CS Series Operation Manual

CS Series Operation Manual
Cat. No. W339-E1-15A
SYSMAC CS Series
CS1G/H-CPU_H
CS1G/H-CPU_-EV1
Programmable Controllers
OPERATION MANUAL
SYSMAC CS Series
CS1G/H-CPU@@H,
CS1G/H-CPU@@-EV1
Programmable Controllers
Operation Manual
Revised December 2009
iv
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures
by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this
manual. Always heed the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to property.
!DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
!WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
!Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also
capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not
it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON
products, often means “word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in
this sense.
The abbreviation “PLC” means Programmable Controller. “PC” is used, however, in some Programming Device displays to mean Programmable Controller.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you
locate different types of information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product.
1,2,3...
1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
 OMRON, 1999
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or
by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without
notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility
for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in
this publication.
v
Unit Versions of CS/CJ-series CPU Units
Unit Versions
A “unit version” has been introduced to manage CPU Units in the CS/CJ
Series according to differences in functionality accompanying Unit upgrades.
This applies to the CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D CPU Units.
Notation of Unit Versions
on Products
The unit version is given to the right of the lot number on the nameplate of the
products for which unit versions are being managed, as shown below.
Product nameplate
CS/CJ-series CPU Unit
CS1H-CPU67H
CPU UNIT
Lot No.
Unit version
Example for Unit version 3.0
Lot No. 040715 0000 Ver.3.0
OMRON Corporation
MADE IN JAPAN
• CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Units manufactured on or before November 4, 2003 do not have a unit version given on the CPU Unit (i.e., the
location for the unit version shown above is blank).
• The unit version of the CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Units, as well as
the CS1D CPU Units for Single-CPU Systems, begins at version 2.0.
• The unit version of the CS1D CPU Units for Duplex-CPU Systems, begins
at version 1.1.
• CPU Units for which a unit version is not given are called Pre-Ver. @.@
CPU Units, such as Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units and Pre-Ver. 1.1 CPU Units.
Confirming Unit Versions
with Support Software
CX-Programmer version 4.0 can be used to confirm the unit version using one
of the following two methods.
• Using the PLC Information
• Using the Unit Manufacturing Information (This method can be used for
Special I/O Units and CPU Bus Units as well.)
Note CX-Programmer version 3.3 or lower cannot be used to confirm unit versions.
PLC Information
• If you know the device type and CPU type, select them in the Change
PLC Dialog Box, go online, and select PLC - Edit - Information from the
menus.
• If you don't know the device type and CPU type, but are connected
directly to the CPU Unit on a serial line, select PLC - Auto Online to go
online, and then select PLC - Edit - Information from the menus.
In either case, the following PLC Information Dialog Box will be displayed.
vi
Unit version
Use the above display to confirm the unit version of the CPU Unit.
Unit Manufacturing Information
In the IO Table Window, right-click and select Unit Manufacturing information - CPU Unit.
The following Unit Manufacturing information Dialog Box will be displayed.
vii
Unit version
Use the above display to confirm the unit version of the CPU Unit connected
online.
Using the Unit Version
Labels
The following unit version labels are provided with the CPU Unit.
These labels can be attached to the front of previous CPU Units to differentiate between CPU Units of different unit versions.
viii
Unit Version Notation
Product nameplate
In this manual, the unit version of a CPU Unit is given as shown in the following table.
CPU Units on which no unit version is
given
Lot No. XXXXXX XXXX
OMRON Corporation
Units on which a version is given
(Ver. @.@)
Lot No. XXXXXX XXXX
Ver. @ .@
MADE IN JAPAN
Meaning
Designating individual
Pre-Ver. 2.0 CS1-H CPU Units
CPU Units (e.g., the
CS1H-CPU67H)
Pre-Ver. 2.0 CS1-H CPU Units
Designating groups of
CPU Units (e.g., the
CS1-H CPU Units)
Designating an entire
Pre-Ver. 2.0 CS-series CPU Units
series of CPU Units
(e.g., the CS-series CPU
Units)
CS1H-CPU67H CPU Unit Ver. @.@
CS1-H CPU Units Ver. @.@
CS-series CPU Units Ver. @.@
ix
Unit Versions
CS Series
Units
CS1-H CPU Units
Models
CS1@-CPU@@H
CS1D CPU Units
Duplex-CPU Systems
CS1D-CPU@@H
CS1 CPU Units
Single-CPU Systems
CS1D-CPU@@S
CS1@-CPU@@
CS1 Version-1 CPU Units
CS1@-CPU@@-V1
Unit version
Unit version 4.0
Unit version 3.0
Unit version 2.0
Pre-Ver. 2.0
Unit version 1.2
Unit version 1.1
Pre-Ver. 1.1
Unit version 2.0
No unit version.
No unit version.
Function Support by Unit Version
• Functions Supported for Unit Version 4.0 or Later
CX-Programmer 7.0 or higher must be used to enable using the functions
added for unit version 4.0.
CX-Programmer version 7.2 can be used to enable using additional functions.
CS1-H CPU Units
Function
Online editing of function blocks
CS1@-CPU@@H
Unit version 4.0 or
Other unit versions
later
OK
---
Input-output variables in function blocks
Text strings in function blocks
OK
OK
-----
New application
OK
---
Note This function cannot be used for simulations on the CXSimulator.
Number-Text String Conversion Instructions:
instructions
NUM4, NUM8, NUM16, STR4, STR8, and STR16
TEXT FILE WRITE (TWRIT)
OK
The ST language can be used in task programs.
OK with CX-Programmer
version 7.2 or higher
The SFC language can be used in task programs.
OK with CX-Programmer
version 7.2 or higher
-------
User programs that contain functions supported only by CPU Units with unit
version 4.0 or later cannot be used on CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or earlier. An error message will be displayed if an attempt is made to
download programs containing unit version 4.0 functions to a CPU Unit with a
unit version of 3.0 or earlier, and the download will not be possible.
If an object program file (.OBJ) using these functions is transferred to a CPU
Unit with a unit version of 3.0 or earlier, a program error will occur when operation is started or when the unit version 4.0 function is executed, and CPU
Unit operation will stop.
x
• Functions Supported for Unit Version 3.0 or Later
CX-Programmer 5.0 or higher must be used to enable using the functions
added for unit version 3.0.
CS1-H CPU Units
Function
Function blocks
Serial Gateway (converting FINS commands to CompoWay/F
commands at the built-in serial port)
Comment memory (in internal flash memory)
Expanded simple backup data
New application TXDU(256), RXDU(255) (support no-protocol
instructions
communications with Serial Communications
Units with unit version 1.2 or later)
Model conversion instructions: XFERC(565),
DISTC(566), COLLC(567), MOVBC(568),
BCNTC(621)
Special function block instructions: GETID(286)
Additional
TXD(235) and RXD(236) instructions (support noinstruction func- protocol communications with Serial Communications
tions Boards with unit version 1.2 or later)
CS1@-CPU@@H
Unit version 3.0 or
Other unit versions
later
OK
--OK
--OK
OK
OK
-------
OK
---
OK
OK
-----
User programs that contain functions supported only by CPU Units with unit
version 3.0 or later cannot be used on CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit version 2.0 or earlier. An error message will be displayed if an attempt is made to
download programs containing unit version 3.0 functions to a CPU Unit with a
unit version of 2.0 or earlier, and the download will not be possible.
If an object program file (.OBJ) using these functions is transferred to a CPU
Unit with a unit version of 2.0 or earlier, a program error will occur when operation is started or when the unit version 3.0 function is executed, and CPU
Unit operation will stop.
xi
• Functions Supported for Unit Version 2.0 or Later
CX-Programmer 4.0 or higher must be used to enable using the functions
added for unit version 2.0.
CS1-H CPU Units
Function
Downloading and Uploading Individual Tasks
Improved Read Protection Using Passwords
Write Protection from FINS Commands Sent to CPU Units
via Networks
Online Network Connections without I/O Tables
Communications through a Maximum of 8 Network Levels
Connecting Online to PLCs via NS-series PTs
Setting First Slot Words
Automatic Transfers at Power ON without a Parameter File
Automatic Detection of I/O Allocation Method for Automatic
Transfer at Power ON
Operation Start/End Times
New Application
MILH, MILR, MILC
Instructions
=DT, <>DT, <DT, <=DT, >DT, >=DT
BCMP2
GRY
TPO
DSW, TKY, HKY, MTR, 7SEG
EXPLT, EGATR, ESATR, ECHRD,
ECHWR
Reading/Writing CPU Bus Units with
IORD/IOWR
PRV2
CS1-H CPU Units
(CS1@-CPU@@H)
Unit version 2.0 or
Other unit versions
later
OK
--OK
--OK
--OK
OK
OK
OK for up to 64 groups
OK
---
----OK from lot number 030201
OK for up to 8 groups
-----
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
--------OK from lot number 030201
OK
OK
OK
-------
OK
OK from lot number 030418
---
---
User programs that contain functions supported only by CPU Units with unit
version 2.0 or later cannot be used on CS/CJ-series Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units.
An error message will be displayed if an attempt is made to download programs containing unit version s.0 functions to a Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Unit, and
the download will not be possible.
If an object program file (.OBJ) using these functions is transferred to a PreVer. 2.0 CPU Unit, a program error will occur when operation is started or
when the unit version 2.0 function is executed, and CPU Unit operation will
stop.
xii
Unit Versions and Programming Devices
The following tables show the relationship between unit versions and CX-Programmer versions.
Unit Versions and Programming Devices
CPU Unit
Functions
CS/CJ-series unit
Ver. 4.0
Functions
Using new functions
added for unit
version 4.0
Not using new functions
CS/CJ-series unit Functions
Using new functions
Ver. 3.0
added for unit Not using new funcversion 3.0
tions
CS/CJ-series unit Functions
Using new functions
Ver. 2.0
added for unit Not using new funcversion 2.0
tions
Using new functions
CS1D CPU Units Functions
for Single-CPU
added for unit Not using new funcSystems, unit Ver. version 2.0
tions
2.0
Using function blocks
CS1D CPU Units Functions
added for unit Not using function
for Duplex-CPU
Systems, unit
version 1.1
blocks
Ver.1.
Note
CX-Programmer
Ver. 3.3 Ver. 4.0 Ver. 5.0 Ver. 7.0
or lower
Ver. 6.0 or higher
------OK (See
note 2.)
OK
OK
OK
OK
Programming
Ver. 7.2
or higher Console
OK (See
note 2.)
OK
--OK
--OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
--OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
---
OK
OK
OK
OK
--OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
No
restrictions
1. As shown above, there is no need to upgrade to CX-Programmer version
as long as the functions added for unit versions are not used.
2. CX-Programmer version 7.0 or higher is required to use the upgraded
functions for CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit version 4.0. CX-Programmer version 7.2 can be used to enable using additional functions.
Device Type Setting
Series
CS Series
The unit version does not affect the setting made for the device type on the
CX-Programmer. Select the device type as shown in the following table
regardless of the unit version of the CPU Unit.
CPU Unit group
CS1-H CPU Units
CS1D CPU Units for Duplex-CPU Systems
CS1D CPU Units for Single-CPU Systems
CPU Unit model
CS1G-CPU@@H
CS1H-CPU@@H
CS1D-CPU@@H
CS1D-CPU@@S
Device type setting on
CX-Programmer Ver. 4.0 or higher
CS1G-H
CS1H-H
CS1D-H (or CS1H-H)
CS1D-S
xiii
Troubleshooting Problems with Unit Versions on the CX-Programmer
Problem
Cause
An attempt was made to download a program containing
instructions supported only by
later unit versions or a CPU Unit
to a previous unit version.
Solution
Check the program or change
to a CPU Unit with a later unit
version.
After the above message is displayed, a compiling
error will be displayed on the Compile Tab Page in the
Output Window.
An attempt was to download a
Check the settings in the PLC
PLC Setup containing settings
Setup or change to a CPU Unit
supported only by later unit verwith a later unit version.
sions or a CPU Unit to a previous
unit version.
“????” is displayed in a program transferred from the
PLC to the CX-Programmer.
xiv
An attempt was made to upload a
program containing instructions
supported only by higher versions
of CX-Programmer to a lower version.
New instructions cannot be
uploaded to lower versions of
CX-Programmer. Use a higher
version of CX-Programmer.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii
1
2
3
4
5
6
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxviii
xxviii
xxviii
xxx
xxxi
xxxvi
SECTION 1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-10
1-11
1-12
1-13
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CS-series Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CS1-H CPU Unit Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 4.0 Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CS1 and CS1-H CPU Unit Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CS-series Function Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CS1-H Functions Arranged by Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comparison of CS-series PLCs and C200HX/HG/HE Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Setup for CS1 CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Internal Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
3
13
22
23
30
52
57
64
66
72
73
76
SECTION 2
Specifications and System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Unit Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expanded System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unit Current Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Bus Unit Setting Area Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Table Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
78
91
97
116
130
147
158
159
SECTION 3
Nomenclature, Functions, and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backplanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C200H High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B7A Interface Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Timer Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
166
174
184
195
205
214
232
238
263
xv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 4
Operating Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
4-1
4-2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
268
270
SECTION 5
Installation and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
5-1
5-2
5-3
Fail-safe Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
286
288
307
SECTION 6
DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
6-1
DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
334
SECTION 7
PLC Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
7-1
7-2
PLC Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Explanations of PLC Setup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
338
365
SECTION 8
I/O Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
I/O Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Allocation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Allocating First Words to Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Allocating First Words to Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detailed Information on I/O Table Creation Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
378
383
390
393
396
396
SECTION 9
Memory Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-6
9-7
9-8
9-9
9-10
9-11
9-12
9-13
9-14
xvi
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Memory Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions in Using C200H Special I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CIO Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C200H DeviceNet Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CS-series DeviceNet Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC Link Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Link Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Bus Unit Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inner Board Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special I/O Unit Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSMAC BUS Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Terminal Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
402
403
412
413
419
420
422
424
425
426
427
429
430
431
TABLE OF CONTENTS
9-15
9-16
9-17
9-18
9-19
9-20
9-21
9-22
9-23
9-24
9-25
9-26
9-27
Holding Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TR (Temporary Relay) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timer Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Counter Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Memory (DM) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extended Data Memory (EM) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Task Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Condition Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock Pulses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
432
433
456
457
458
459
461
463
469
471
471
474
475
SECTION 10
CPU Unit Operation and the Cycle Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
10-1
10-2
10-3
10-4
10-5
CPU Unit Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Unit Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Computing the Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
481
486
488
493
512
SECTION 11
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
11-1 Error Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2 Error Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3 Troubleshooting Racks and Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
548
549
571
SECTION 12
Inspection and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
12-1 Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-2 Replacing User-serviceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
576
578
Appendices
A
Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
589
B
Auxiliary Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
711
C
Memory Map of PLC Memory Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
749
D
PLC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
751
E
Connecting to the RS-232C Port on the CPU Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
763
F
Restrictions in Using C200H Special I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
771
G
CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
777
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793
xvii
xviii
About this Manual:
This manual describes the installation and operation of the CS-series Programmable Controllers
(PLCs) and includes the sections described on the following page. The CS Series and CJ Series are
subdivided as shown in the following figure.
CS Series
CJ Series
NSJ Series
CS1-H CPU Units
CJ2 CPU Units
NSJ Controllers
CJ2H-CPU@@-@@@
CS1H-CPU@@H
CS1G-CPU@@H
CS1 CPU Units
CJ1-H CPU Units
CJ1H-CPU@@H-R
CJ1H-CPU@@H
CJ1G-CPU@@H
CJ1G -CPU@@P
(Loop-control CPU Units)
CS1H-CPU@@(-V1)
CS1G-CPU@@(-V1)
CS1D CPU Units
CS1D CPU Units for
Duplex Systems
CS1D-CPU@@H
NSJ5-TQ@@(B)-G5D
NSJ5-SQ@@(B)-G5D
NSJ8-TV@@(B)-G5D
NSJ10-TV@@(B)-G5D
NSJ12-TS@@(B)-G5D
NSJ Controllers
NSJ5-TQ@@(B)-M3D
NSJ5-SQ@@(B)-M3D
NSJ8-TV@@(B)-M3D
CJ1M CPU Units
CJ1M-CPU@@
CS1D CPU Units for
Simplex Systems
CS1D-CPU@@S
CJ1 CPU Units
CS1D Process-control CPU Units
CJ1G-CPU@@
CS1D-CPU@@P
CS-series Basic I/O Units
CJ-series Basic I/O Units
CS-series Special I/O Units
CJ-series Special I/O Units
CS-series CPU Bus Units
CJ-series CPU Bus Units
CS-series Power Supply Units
CJ-series Power Supply Units
NSJ-series Expansion Units
Note: A special Power Supply Unit
must be used for CS1D CPU
Units.
Please read this manual and all related manuals listed in the following table and be sure you understand information provided before attempting to install or use CS1G/H-CPU@@-EV1 or CS1G/HCPU@@H CPU Units in a PLC System.
Name
SYSMAC CS Series
CS1G/H-CPU@@H, CS1G/H-CPU@@-EV1
Programmable Controllers Operation Manual
SYSMAC CS/CJ/NSJ Series
CS1G/H-CPU@@-EV1, CS1G/H-CPU@@H, CS1D-CPU@@H,
CS1D-CPU@@S, CJ1H-CPU@@H-R, CJ1G-CPU@@, CJ1MCPU@@, CJ1G-CPU@@P, CJ1G/H-CPU@@H
Programmable Controllers Programming Manual
SYSMAC CS/CJ/NSJ Series
CS1G/H-CPU@@-EV1, CS1G/H-CPU@@H, CS1D-CPU@@H,
CS1D-CPU@@S, CJ1H-CPU@@H-R, CJ1G-CPU@@, CJ1MCPU@@, CJ1G-CPU@@P, CJ1G/H-CPU@@H
Programmable Controllers Instructions Reference Manual
Cat. No.
Contents
W339
Provides an outlines of and describes the
design, installation, maintenance, and other
basic operations for the CS-series PLCs. (This
manual)
W394
This manual describes programming and
other methods to use the functions of the CS/
CJ-series PLCs.
W340
Describes the ladder diagram programming
instructions supported by CS/CJ-series PLCs.
xix
Name
Cat. No.
Contents
W341
Provides information on how to program and
operate CS/CJ-series PLCs using a Programming Console.
W342
Describes the C-series (Host Link) and FINS
communications commands used with CS/CJseries PLCs.
W405
Provides an outline of and describes the
design, installation, maintenance, and other
basic operations for a Duplex System based
on CS1D CPU Units.
SYSMAC WS02-CXPC@-E-V@
CX-Programmer Operation Manual
W446
Provides information on how to use the CXProgrammer for all functionality except for
function blocks.
SYSMAC WS02-CXPC@-E-V@
W447
Describes the functionality unique to the CXProgrammer and CP-series CPU Units or CS/
CJ-series CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or
later based on function blocks. Functionality
that is the same as that of the CX-Programmer is described in W446 (enclosed).
SYSMAC CS/CJ Series
CS1W-SCB@@-V1, CS1W-SCU@@-V1, CJ1W-SCU@@-V1
Serial Communications Boards/Units Operation Manual
W336
SYSMAC WS02-PSTC1-E
CX-Protocol Operation Manual
W344
Describes the use of Serial Communications
Unit and Boards to perform serial communications with external devices, including the
usage of
standard system protocols for OMRON products.
Describes the use of the CX-Protocol to create protocol macros as communications
sequences to communicate with external
devices.
CXONE-AL@@C-EV3/AL@@D-EV3
CX-Integrator Operation Manual
W464
CXONE-AL@@C-EV3/AL@@D-EV3
CX-One Setup Manual
W463
SYSMAC CS/CJ/NSJ Series
CQM1H-PRO01-E, C200H-PRO27-E, CQM1-PRO01-E
Programming Consoles Operation Manual
SYSMAC CS/CJ/NSJ Series
CS1G/H-CPU@@-EV1, CJ1G/H-CPU@@H, CS1D-CPU@@H,
CS1D-CPU@@S, CJ1M-CPU@@, CJ1H-CPU@@H-R, CJ1GCPU@@, CJ1G-CPU@@, CJ1G-CPU@@P, CJ1G/H-CPU@@H,
CS1W-SCB@@-V1, CS1W-SCU@@-V1,
CJ1W-SCU@@-V1, CP1H-X@@@@-@, CP1H-XA@@@@-@,
CP1H-Y@@@@-@
Communications Commands Reference Manual
SYSMAC CS Series
CS1D-CPU@@H CPU Units
CS1D-CPU@@S CPU Units
CS1D-DPL01 Duplex Unit
CS1D-PA207R Power Supply Unit
Duplex System Operation Manual
CX-Programmer Ver. 7.0 Operation Manual Function Blocks
(CS1G-CPU@@H, CS1H-CPU@@H, CJ1H-CPU@@H-R,
CJ1G-CPU@@H, CJ1H-CPU@@H,
CJ1M-CPU@@, CP1H-X@@@@-@,
CP1H-XA@@@@-@, CP1H-Y@@@@-@ CPU Units)
Describes operating procedures for the CXIntegrator Network Configuration Tool for CS-,
CJ-, CP-, and NSJ-series Controllers.
Installation and overview of CX-One FA
Integrated Tool Package.
This manual contains the following sections.
Section 1 introduces the special features and functions of the CS-series PLCs and describes the differences between these PLCs and other PLCs.
Section 2 provides tables of standard models, Unit specifications, system configurations, and a comparison between different Units.
Section 3 provides the names of components and their functions for various Units. The Unit dimensions are also provided.
Section 4 outlines the steps required to assemble and operate a CS-series PLC system.
xx
Section 5 describes how to install a PLC System, including mounting the various Units and wiring the
System. Be sure to follow the instructions carefully. Improper installation can cause the PLC to malfunction, resulting in very dangerous situations.
Section 6 describes the settings of the DIP switch and how they affect operation.
Section 7 describes the settings in the PLC Setup and how they are used to control CPU Unit operation.
Section 8 describes I/O allocations to Basic I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units, and data
exchange with Units.
Section 9 describes the structure and functions of the I/O Memory Areas and Parameter Areas.
Section 10 describes the internal operation of the CPU Unit and the cycle used to perform internal
processing.
Section 11 provides information on hardware and software errors that occur during PLC operation.
Section 12 provides inspection and maintenance information.
The Appendices provide Unit specifications, current/power consumptions, Auxiliary Area words and
bits, a comparison of CS-series and previous PLCs, internal I/O addresses, and PLC Setup settings.
!WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each section
in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and
related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.
xxi
xxii
Read and Understand this Manual
Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON
representative if you have any questions or comments.
Warranty and Limitations of Liability
WARRANTY
OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NONINFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS
DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS,
WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT
LIABILITY.
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which
liability is asserted.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS
REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS
WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO
CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.
xxiii
Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the
combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products.
At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a
complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine,
system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not
intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses
listed may be suitable for the products:
• Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or
uses not described in this manual.
• Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical
equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate
industry or government regulations.
• Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED
FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any
consequence thereof.
xxiv
Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons.
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed
without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key
specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any
time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when
tolerances are shown.
PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does
not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must
correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and
Limitations of Liability.
ERRORS AND OMISSIONS
The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no
responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.
xxv
xxvi
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the CS-series Programmable Controllers (PLCs) and related devices.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of Programmable
Controllers. You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or
operate a PLC system.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
Applicable Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3
Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
Relay Output Noise Reduction Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxviii
xxviii
xxviii
xxx
xxxi
xxxvi
xxxvi
xxxvi
xxxvi
xxxvii
xxvii
1
Intended Audience
1
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have
knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
2
General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the
manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems,
aviation systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used
improperly, consult your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide
the systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit. Be
sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this manual close at hand for reference during operation.
!WARNING It is extremely important that a PLC and all PLC Units be used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that
can directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your OMRON
representative before applying a PLC System to the above-mentioned applications.
3
Safety Precautions
!WARNING The CPU Unit refreshes I/O even when the program is stopped (i.e., even in
PROGRAM mode). Confirm safety thoroughly in advance before changing the
status of any part of memory allocated to I/O Units, Special I/O Units, or CPU
Bus Units. Any changes to the data allocated to any Unit may result in unexpected operation of the loads connected to the Unit. Any of the following operation may result in changes to memory status.
• Transferring I/O memory data to the CPU Unit from a Programming
Device.
• Changing present values in memory from a Programming Device.
• Force-setting/-resetting bits from a Programming Device.
• Transferring I/O memory files from a Memory Card or EM file memory to
the CPU Unit.
• Transferring I/O memory from a host computer or from another PLC on a
network.
!WARNING Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied. Doing
so may result in electric shock.
xxviii
3
Safety Precautions
!WARNING Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being
supplied. Doing so may result in electric shock.
!WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify any Units. Any attempt to do
so may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock.
!WARNING Do not touch the Power Supply Unit while power is being supplied or immediately after power has been turned OFF. Doing so may result in electric shock.
!WARNING Provide safety measures in external circuits (i.e., not in the Programmable
Controller), including the following items, to ensure safety in the system if an
abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PLC or another external factor
affecting the PLC operation. Not doing so may result in serious accidents.
• Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety
measures must be provided in external control circuits.
• The PLC will turn OFF all outputs when its self-diagnosis function detects
any error or when a severe failure alarm (FALS) instruction is executed.
Unexpected operation, however, may still occur for errors in the I/O control section, errors in I/O memory, and other errors that cannot be
detected by the self-diagnosis function. As a countermeasure for all such
errors, external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the
system.
• The PLC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposition or burning of
the output relays or destruction of the output transistors. As a countermeasure for such problems, external safety measures must be provided
to ensure safety in the system.
• When the 24-V DC output (service power supply to the PLC) is overloaded or short-circuited, the voltage may drop and result in the outputs
being turned OFF. As a countermeasure for such problems, external
safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system.
!Caution Confirm safety before transferring data files stored in the file memory (Memory Card or EM file memory) to the I/O area (CIO) of the CPU Unit using a
peripheral tool. Otherwise, the devices connected to the output unit may malfunction regardless of the operation mode of the CPU Unit.
!Caution Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines,
momentary power interruptions, or other causes. Serious accidents may
result from abnormal operation if proper measures are not provided.
!Caution Execute online edit only after confirming that no adverse effects will be
caused by extending the cycle time. Otherwise, the input signals may not be
readable.
xxix
Operating Environment Precautions
4
!Caution A CS1-H/CJ1-H/CJ1M/CS1D CPU Unit automatically back up the user program and parameter data to flash memory when these are written to the CPU
Unit. I/O memory (including the DM, EM, and HR Areas), however, is not written to flash memory. The DM, EM, and HR Areas can be held during power
interruptions with a battery. If there is a battery error, the contents of these
areas may not be accurate after a power interruption. If the contents of the
DM, EM, and HR Areas are used to control external outputs, prevent inappropriate outputs from being made whenever the Battery Error Flag (A40204) is
ON. Areas such as the DM, EM, and HR Areas, the contents of which can be
held during power interrupts, is backed up by a battery. If a battery error
occurs, the contents of the areas that are set to be held may not be accurate
even though a memory error will not occur to stop operation. If necessary for
the safety of the system, take appropriate measures in the ladder program
whenever the Battery Error Flag (A40204) turns ON, such as resetting the
data in these areas.
!Caution Confirm safety at the destination node before transferring a program to
another node or changing contents of the I/O memory area. Doing either of
these without confirming safety may result in injury.
!Caution Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the AC Power Supply Unit to the
torque specified in the operation manual. The loose screws may result in
burning or malfunction.
!Caution Be careful when connecting personal computers or other peripheral devices
to a PLC to which is mounted a non-insulated Unit (CS1W-CLK1@(-V1),
CS1W-CLK5@(-V1), or CS1W-ETN01) connected to an external power supply. A short-circuit will be created if the 24 V side of the external power supply
is grounded and the 0 V side of the peripheral device is grounded. When connecting a peripheral device to this type of PLC, either ground the 0 V side of
the external power supply or do not ground the external power supply at all.
4
Operating Environment Precautions
!Caution Do not operate the control system in the following locations:
• Locations subject to direct sunlight.
• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified
in the specifications.
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
• Locations subject to shock or vibration.
!Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in
the following locations:
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
xxx
5
Application Precautions
• Locations close to power supplies.
!Caution The operating environment of the PLC System can have a large effect on the
longevity and reliability of the system. Improper operating environments can
lead to malfunction, failure, and other unforeseeable problems with the PLC
System. Be sure that the operating environment is within the specified conditions at installation and remains within the specified conditions during the life
of the system.
5
Application Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the PLC System.
• You must use the CX-Programmer (programming software that runs on
Windows) if you need to program more than one task. A Programming
Console can be used to program only one cyclic task plus interrupt tasks.
A Programming Console can, however, be used to edit multitask programs originally created with the CX-Programmer.
• There are restrictions in the areas and addresses that can be accessed in
I/O memory of the CS-series CPU Units when using the C200H Special
I/O Units in combination with the following functions. (Refer to Appendix F
Restrictions in Using C200H Special I/O Units for details.)
• There are restrictions in data transfer with the CPU Unit when programming transfers inside an ASCII Unit using the PLC READ, PLC
WRITE, and similar commands.
• There are restrictions in data transfer with the CPU Unit for allocated
bits and DM area specifications (areas and addresses for source and
destination specifications).
• The DeviceNet output area for a C200HW-DRM21-V1 DeviceNet Master Unit (CIO 0050 to CIO 0099) overlaps with the I/O bit area (CIO
0000 to CIO 0319). Do not use automatic allocations for I/O in any system where allocations to the DeviceNet system will overlap with allocations to I/O Units. Instead, use a Programming Device or the CXProgrammer to manually allocate I/O for the DeviceNet devices, being
sure that the same words and bits are not allocated more than once,
and transfer the resulting I/O table to the CPU Unit. If DeviceNet communications are attempted when the same bits are allocated to both
DeviceNet devices and I/O Units (which can occur even if automatic allocation is used), the DeviceNet devices and I/O Units may both exhibit
faulty operation.
• Special bits and flags for PLC Link Units (CIO 0247 to CIO 0250) overlap with the I/O bit area (CIO 0000 to CIO 0319). Do not use automatic
allocations for I/O in any system where allocations to the I/O Units will
overlap with allocations to I/O Units. Instead, use a Programming Device or the CX-Programmer to manually allocate I/O to I/O Units, being
sure that the special bits and flags for PLC Link Units are not used, and
transfer the resulting I/O table to the CPU Unit. If operation is attempted when the special bits and flags for PLC Link Units are also allocated
to I/O Units (which can occur even if automatic allocation is used), the
PLC Link Units and I/O Units may both exhibit faulty operation.
!WARNING Always heed these precautions. Failure to abide by the following precautions
could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury.
xxxi
5
Application Precautions
• Always connect to a ground of 100 Ω or less when installing the Units. Not
connecting to a ground of 100 Ω or less may result in electric shock.
• A ground of 100 Ω or less must be installed when shorting the GR and LG
terminals on the Power Supply Unit.
• Always turn OFF the power supply to the PLC before attempting any of
the following. Not turning OFF the power supply may result in malfunction
or electric shock.
• Mounting or dismounting Power Supply Units, I/O Units, CPU Units, Inner Boards, or any other Units.
• Assembling the Units.
• Setting DIP switches or rotary switches.
• Connecting cables or wiring the system.
• Connecting or disconnecting the connectors.
!Caution Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of
the PLC or the system, or could damage the PLC or PLC Units. Always heed
these precautions.
• When using a CS1 CPU Unit for the first time, install the CS1W-BAT1 Battery provided with the Unit and clear all memory areas from a Programming Device before starting to program. (The Battery is installed in
advance for CS1-H CPU Units, so initial Battery installation and the memory clear operation are not required.)
• When using the internal clock for a CS1 CPU Unit, turn ON power after
installing the battery and set the clock from a Programming Device or
using the DATE(735) instruction. The clock will not start until the time has
been set. Refer to 1-12 Initial Setup for CS1 CPU Units for details. (The
Battery is installed in advance for CS1-H CPU Units, so clock does not
need to be set.)
• The user program and parameter area data in CS1-H CPU Units is
backed up in the built-in flash memory. The BKUP indicator will light on
the front of the CPU Unit when the backup operation is in progress. Do
not turn OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit when the BKUP indicator
is lit. The data will not be backed up if power is turned OFF.
• If, when using a CS1-H CPU Unit, the PLC Setup is set to specify using
the mode set on the Programming Console and a Programming Console
is not connected, the CPU Unit will start in RUN mode. This is the default
setting in the PLC Setup. (A CS1 CPU Unit will start in PROGRAM mode
under the same conditions.)
• When creating an AUTOEXEC.IOM file from a Programming Device (a
Programming Console or the CX-Programmer) to automatically transfer
data at startup, set the first write address to D20000 and be sure that the
size of data written does not exceed the size of the DM Area. When the
data file is read from the Memory Card at startup, data will be written in
the CPU Unit starting at D20000 even if another address was set when
the AUTOEXEC.IOM file was created. Also, if the DM Area is exceeded
(which is possible when the CX-Programmer is used), the remaining data
will be written to the EM Area. Refer to information on file operations in
the CS/CJ Series Programming Manual for details.
• Always turn ON power to the PLC before turning ON power to the control
system. If the PLC power supply is turned ON after the control power supply, temporary errors may result in control system signals because the
xxxii
Application Precautions
5
output terminals on DC Output Units and other Units will momentarily turn
ON when power is turned ON to the PLC.
• Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event that outputs from Output Units remain ON as a result of internal circuit failures, which can occur in relays, transistors, and other elements.
• Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal
lines, momentary power interruptions, or other causes.
• Interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety measures in external circuits (i.e., not in the Programmable Controller) must be provided by the
customer.
• Do not turn OFF the power supply to the PLC when data is being transferred. In particular, do not turn OFF the power supply when reading or
writing a Memory Card. Also, do not remove the Memory Card when the
BUSY indicator is lit. To remove a Memory Card, first press the memory
card power supply switch and then wait for the BUSY indicator to go out
before removing the Memory Card.
• If the I/O Hold Bit is turned ON, the outputs from the PLC will not be
turned OFF and will maintain their previous status when the PLC is
switched from RUN or MONITOR mode to PROGRAM mode. Make sure
that the external loads will not produce dangerous conditions when this
occurs. (When operation stops for a fatal error, including those produced
with the FALS(007) instruction, all outputs from Output Unit will be turned
OFF and only the internal output status will be maintained.)
• The contents of the DM, EM, and HR Areas in the CPU Unit are backed
up by a Battery. If the Battery voltage drops, this data may be lost. Provide
countermeasures in the program using the Battery Error Flag (A40204) to
re-initialize data or take other actions if the Battery voltage drops.
• When supplying power at 200 to 240 V AC, always remove the metal
jumper from the voltage selector terminals on the Power Supply Unit
(except for Power Supply Units with wide-range specifications). The product will be destroyed and must be replaced if 200 to 240 V AC is supplied
while the metal jumper is attached. Refer to 5-3 Wiring for details.
• Always use the power supply voltages specified in the operation manuals.
An incorrect voltage may result in malfunction or burning.
• Do not apply a force greater than 100 N on the terminal block when tightening the terminals.
• Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the
rated voltage and frequency is supplied. Be particularly careful in places
where the power supply is unstable. An incorrect power supply may result
in malfunction.
• Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuiting in external wiring. Insufficient safety measures against short-circuiting may result in burning.
• Install Units as far as possible away from devices that generate strong,
high-frequency noise.
• Do not apply voltages to the Input Units in excess of the rated input voltage. Excess voltages may result in burning.
• Do not apply voltages or connect loads to the Output Units in excess of
the maximum switching capacity. Excess voltage or loads may result in
burning.
xxxiii
5
Application Precautions
• Separate the line ground terminal (LG) from the functional ground terminal (GR) on the Power Supply Unit before performing withstand voltage
tests or insulation resistance tests. Not doing so may result in burning.
• Change the applied voltage gradually using the adjuster on the Tester. If
full dielectric strength voltage is applied or turned OFF using the switch on
the Tester, the generated impulse voltage may damage the Power Supply
Unit.
• Install the Units properly as specified in the operation manuals. Improper
installation of the Units may result in malfunction.
• Be sure that all the Backplane mounting screws, terminal block screws,
and cable connector screws are tightened to the torque specified in the
relevant manuals. Incorrect tightening torque may result in malfunction.
• Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring. Removing the label may
result in malfunction if foreign matter enters the Unit.
• Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dissipation. Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction.
• Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires
directly to terminals. Connection of bare stranded wires may result in
burning.
• Wire all connections correctly.
• Do not drop the product or subject it to excessive vibration or shock.
• Double-check all wiring and switch settings before turning ON the power
supply. Incorrect wiring may result in burning.
• Mount Units only after checking terminal blocks and connectors completely.
• Be sure that the terminal blocks, Memory Units, expansion cables, and
other items with locking devices are properly locked into place. Improper
locking may result in malfunction.
• Check switch settings, the contents of the DM Area, and other preparations before starting operation. Starting operation without the proper settings or data may result in an unexpected operation.
• Check the user program for proper execution before actually running it on
the Unit. Not checking the program may result in an unexpected operation.
• Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting
any of the following. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Changing the operating mode of the PLC (including the setting of the
startup operating mode).
• Force-setting/force-resetting any bit in memory.
• Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory.
• Resume operation only after transferring to the new CPU Unit the contents of the DM Area, HR Area, and other data required for resuming
operation. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Do not pull on the cables or bend the cables beyond their natural limit.
Doing either of these may break the cables.
• Do not place objects on top of the cables or other wiring lines. Doing so
may break the cables.
• Do not use commercially available RS-232C personal computer cables.
Always use the special cables listed in this manual or make cables
according to manual specifications. Using commercially available cables
may damage the external devices or CPU Unit.
xxxiv
Application Precautions
5
• Never connect pin 6 (5-V power supply) on the RS-232C port on the CPU
Unit to any device other than an NT-AL001, CJ1W-CIF11 Link Adapter, or
NV3W-M@20L Programmable Terminal. The external device or the CPU
Unit may be damaged.
• When replacing parts, be sure to confirm that the rating of a new part is
correct. Not doing so may result in malfunction or burning.
• Before touching a Unit, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object in
order to discharge any static build-up. Not doing so may result in malfunction or damage.
• When transporting or storing circuit boards, cover them in antistatic material to protect them from static electricity and maintain the proper storage
temperature.
• Do not touch circuit boards or the components mounted to them with your
bare hands. There are sharp leads and other parts on the boards that
may cause injury if handled improperly.
• Do not short the battery terminals or charge, disassemble, heat, or incinerate the battery. Do not subject the battery to strong shocks. Doing any
of these may result in leakage, rupture, heat generation, or ignition of the
battery. Dispose of any battery that has been dropped on the floor or otherwise subjected to excessive shock. Batteries that have been subjected
to shock may leak if they are used.
• UL standards required that batteries be replaced only by experienced
technicians. Do not allow unqualified persons to replace batteries.
• Dispose of the product and batteries according to local ordinances as
they apply.
Have qualified specialists properly dispose of used batteries as industrial
waste.
• Unexpected operation may result if inappropriate data link tables or
parameters are set. Even if appropriate data link tables and parameters
have been set, confirm that the controlled system will not be adversely
affected before starting or stopping data links.
• CPU Bus Units will be restarted when routing tables are transferred from
a Programming Device to the CPU Unit. Restarting these Units is required
to read and enable the new routing tables. Confirm that the system will
not be adversely affected before allowing the CPU Bus Units to be reset.
• When wiring crossovers between terminals, the total current for both terminals will flow in the line. Check the current capacities of all wires before
wiring crossovers.
• The following precautions apply to Power Supply Units with Replacement
Notification.
• When the LED display on the front of the Power Supply Unit starts to
alternately display “0.0” and “A02” or the alarm output automatically
turns OFF, replace the Power Supply Unit within 6 months.
• Separate the alarm output cables from power lines and high-voltage
lines.
• Do not apply a voltage or connect a load to the alarm output that exceeds the rated voltage or load.
• Maintain an ambient storage temperature of −20 to 30°C and humidity
of 25% to 70% when storing the product for longer than 3 months to
xxxv
6
Conformance to EC Directives
keep the replacement notification function in optimum working condition.
• Always use the standard installation method. A nonstandard installation will decrease heat dissipation, delay the replacement notification
signal, and may degrade or damage the internal elements.
• Design the system so that the power supply capacity of the Power Supply
Unit is not exceeded.
• Do not touch the terminals on the Power Supply Unit immediately after
turning OFF the power supply. Electric shock may occur due to the residual voltage.
6
Conformance to EC Directives
6-1
Applicable Directives
• EMC Directives
• Low Voltage Directive
6-2
Concepts
EMC Directives
OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives also conform to the related
EMC standards so that they can be more easily built into other devices or the
overall machine. The actual products have been checked for conformity to
EMC standards (see the following note). Whether the products conform to the
standards in the system used by the customer, however, must be checked by
the customer.
EMC-related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives will vary depending on the configuration, wiring, and other conditions of
the equipment or control panel on which the OMRON devices are installed.
The customer must, therefore, perform the final check to confirm that devices
and the overall machine conform to EMC standards.
Note Applicable EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) standards are as follows:
EMS (Electromagnetic Susceptibility): EN61131-2 or EN61000-6-2
EMI (Electromagnetic Interference):
EN61000-6-4
(Radiated emission: 10-m regulations)
Low Voltage Directive
Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1,000 V AC and 75
to 1,500 V DC meet the required safety standards for the PLC (EN61131-2).
6-3
Conformance to EC Directives
The CS-series PLCs comply with EC Directives. To ensure that the machine
or device in which the CS-series PLC is used complies with EC Directives, the
PLC must be installed as follows:
1,2,3...
1. The CS-series PLC must be installed within a control panel.
2. You must use reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power
supplies used for the communications power supply and I/O power supplies.
3. CS-series PLCs complying with EC Directives also conform to the Common Emission Standard (EN61000-6-4). Radiated emission characteristics (10-m regulations) may vary depending on the configuration of the
control panel used, other devices connected to the control panel, wiring,
xxxvi
6
Conformance to EC Directives
and other conditions. You must therefore confirm that the overall machine
or equipment complies with EC Directives.
6-4
Relay Output Noise Reduction Methods
The CS-series PLCs conforms to the Common Emission Standards
(EN61000-6-4) of the EMC Directives. However, noise generated by relay output switching may not satisfy these Standards. In such a case, a noise filter
must be connected to the load side or other appropriate countermeasures
must be provided external to the PLC.
Countermeasures taken to satisfy the standards vary depending on the
devices on the load side, wiring, configuration of machines, etc. Following are
examples of countermeasures for reducing the generated noise.
Countermeasures
(Refer to EN61000-6-4 for more details.)
Countermeasures are not required if the frequency of load switching for the
whole system with the PLC included is less than 5 times per minute.
Countermeasures are required if the frequency of load switching for the whole
system with the PLC included is more than 5 times per minute.
Countermeasure Examples
When switching an inductive load, connect an surge protector, diodes, etc., in
parallel with the load or contact as shown below.
Circuit
Power
supply
Inductive
load
CR method
Current
Characteristic
AC DC
Yes Yes If the load is a relay or solenoid, there is a
time lag between the moment the circuit is
opened and the moment the load is reset.
If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V, insert
the surge protector in parallel with the
load. If the supply voltage is 100 to 200 V,
insert the surge protector between the
contacts.
Required element
The capacitance of the capacitor must
be 1 to 0.5 µF per contact current of
1 A and resistance of the resistor must
be 0.5 to 1 Ω per contact voltage of
1 V. These values, however, vary with
the load and the characteristics of the
relay. Decide these values from experiments, and take into consideration
that the capacitance suppresses
spark discharge when the contacts
are separated and the resistance limits the current that flows into the load
when the circuit is closed again.
The dielectric strength of the capacitor
must be 200 to 300 V. If the circuit is
an AC circuit, use a capacitor with no
polarity.
xxxvii
6
Conformance to EC Directives
Circuit
Current
AC DC
Power
supply
Power
supply
Inductive
load
Varistor method
Required element
The reversed dielectric strength value
of the diode must be at least 10 times
as large as the circuit voltage value.
The forward current of the diode must
be the same as or larger than the load
current.
The reversed dielectric strength value
of the diode may be two to three times
larger than the supply voltage if the
surge protector is applied to electronic
circuits with low circuit voltages.
---
No
Yes
The diode connected in parallel with the
load changes energy accumulated by the
coil into a current, which then flows into
the coil so that the current will be converted into Joule heat by the resistance of
the inductive load.
This time lag, between the moment the circuit is opened and the moment the load is
reset, caused by this method is longer
than that caused by the CR method.
Yes
Yes
The varistor method prevents the imposition of high voltage between the contacts
by using the constant voltage characteristic of the varistor. There is time lag
between the moment the circuit is opened
and the moment the load is reset.
If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V, insert
the varistor in parallel with the load. If the
supply voltage is 100 to 200 V, insert the
varistor between the contacts.
Inductive
load
Diode method
Characteristic
When switching a load with a high inrush current such as an incandescent
lamp, suppress the inrush current as shown below.
Countermeasure 1
OUT
Countermeasure 2
R
OUT
R
COM
Providing a dark current of approx.
one-third of the rated value through
an incandescent lamp
xxxviii
COM
Providing a limiting resistor
SECTION 1
Introduction
This section introduces the special features and functions of the CS-series PLCs and describes the differences between these
PLCs and other PLCs.
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-10
1-11
1-12
1-13
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CS-series Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-2 Versatile Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CS1-H CPU Unit Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-1 High-speed Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-2 High-speed Structured Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-3 Function Block (FB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-4 More Instructions for Specific Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-5 Battery-free Operation with Flash Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-6 Better Compatibility with Other SYSMAC PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-7 Refreshing Timer/Counter PVs in Binary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-8 Features of CS1-H CPU Units Ver. 3.0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-9 Changes to CS-series Operating Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-10 Features of CS1-H CPU Units Ver. 2.0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 4.0 Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-1 Online Editing of Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-2 Input-Output Variables in Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-3 Text String Support in Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-1 Function Blocks (FB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-2 Serial Gateway (Converting FINS to CompoWay/F Via Serial Port). . . . .
1-5-3 Comment Memory (in Internal Flash Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-4 Simple Backup Data Expanded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-5 Free Running Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-6 New Special Instructions and Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-7 Increased Points for SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Communications . . . . .
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6-1 Downloading and Uploading Individual Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6-2 Improved Read Protection Using Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6-3 Write Protection from FINS Commands Sent to CPU Units via Networks
1-6-4 Online Network Connections without I/O Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6-5 Communications through a Maximum of 8 Network Levels . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6-6 Connecting Online to PLCs via NS-series PTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6-7 Setting First Slot Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6-8 Automatic Transfers at Power ON without a Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6-9 Operation Start/End Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6-10 New Application Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CS1 and CS1-H CPU Unit Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-7-1 CS1 and CS1-H CPU Unit Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-7-2 New Functions for Version-1 CS1 CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CS-series Function Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-8-1 Functions Arranged by Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-8-2 Communications Functions (Serial/Network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CS1-H Functions Arranged by Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comparison of CS-series PLCs and C200HX/HG/HE Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Setup for CS1 CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Internal Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
3
3
8
13
13
14
14
15
16
16
16
16
17
18
22
22
22
22
23
24
25
26
26
27
28
28
30
30
31
36
41
43
46
47
49
51
51
52
52
56
57
57
62
64
66
72
73
76
1
Section 1-1
Overview
1-1
Overview
The CS-series PLCs are medium-sized Programmable Controllers that provide improved programming efficiency by dividing the program into tasks. The
CS-series PLCs also feature faster processing, higher capacities, multiple
ports supporting protocol macros, improved seamless communications
across three network levels, and much more, enabling them to flexibly handle
advanced information capabilities as core FA controllers.
The CS Series includes both CS1 CPU Units and the high-speed CS1-H CPU
Units.
Note
Improvements in Basic
Performance
Faster instruction execution
and peripheral servicing
Larger memory capacity
Faster data exchange
between Units and I/O
memory access
Instruction operands can
be specified binary or BCD
Programs from earlier PLCs
are compatible
Where differentiation is required, “CS1 CPU Units” or “CS1-H CPU Units” is
specified in this manual. “CS1 CPU Units” includes model numbers CS1@CPU@@-EV1. “CS1-H CPU Units” includes model numbers CS1@-CPU@@H.
CS-series PLC
Serial
Communications
Unit
CPU Unit
Memory
Serial
Communications Card
Board
Protocol Macro Function Serves
Multiple Ports
Up to 34 ports can be connected (Serial
Communications Boards + Serial
Communications Units).
Different Protocol Macros can be
allocated to each port.
Programming
Console
Programmable
Terminal or
other device
Generalpurpose
I/O device
Structured Programming
The program is divided into tasks.
Symbols can be used in programming.
The overall performance of the system is
improved by executing only the required
tasks.
Modification and debugging are simplified.
The program arrangement can be changed.
Step control and block programming
instructions can be used.
Comments can be added to make the
program easier to understand.
Remote Programming, Monitoring
and Seamless Links between
Networks
FINS commands allow communications
between nodes in different networks.
Remote programming and monitoring
can be performed.
Personal
computer
Full Complement of Versatile Functions
Memory Card and file processing functions
Simplify programs with specialized instructions such as the table data and text
string processing instructions
Troubleshooting functions
Data tracing function
Minimum (fixed) cycle time function
I/O refreshing method selection
PLC Setup functions
Use Windows tools to create multiple environments in a single personal computer.
2
Section 1-2
CS-series Features
1-2
1-2-1
CS-series Features
Features
Improvements in Basic Performance
The CS-series PLCs provide higher speed, greater capacity, and more functions in a package as compact as the C200H PLCs.
Faster Cycle Times
Instruction processing times have been reduced to 0.02 µs min. for basic
instructions, 0.06 µs min. for special instructions, and 0.8 µs min. for floatingpoint calculations for CS1-H CPU Units and to 0.04 µs min. for basic instructions, 0.12 µs min. for special instructions, and 10.2 µs min. for floating-point
calculations for CS1 CPU Units. The time required for overseeing (overhead),
I/O refreshing, and peripheral servicing has also been reduced dramatically.
Extra Capacity for High
Value-added Programs
With capacity for 250,000 program steps, up to 448,000 words of Data Memory, and up to 5,120 I/O points, there is plenty of memory for complex programs, intricate interfaces, communications, and data processing.
Binary Operand Settings
Increase Setting Ranges
In earlier PLCs, most instruction operands had to be specified in BCD (0 to
9,999), but in the CS-series PLCs they can be specified in binary (0 to FFFF
hexadecimal or 0 to 65,535 decimal). As an example, the BLOCK TRANSFER
instruction can now transfer data from up to 65,535 words rather than 9,999
words. Also the maximum DM address that can be indirectly addressed is
now D32767 rather than the maximum DM address of D09999 in
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs.
Program Compatibility
Programs from earlier OMRON PLCs (such as the C200H, C200HS,
C200HX/HG/HE, and CV Series) can be imported into the CS-series PLCs.
CS-series and C200H
Units Supported
High-density CS-series Units, such as the 96-point I/O Units and 8-point Analog I/O Units (4 inputs and 4 outputs) can be used together with the wide variety of C200H Units (about 90 models) can be used in a CS-series PLC.
CS-series Long-distance
Expansion Racks
I/O Control Units and I/O Interface Units can be used to create systems containing CS-series Long-distance Expansion Racks. Up to two series of Longdistance Expansion Racks can be connected, each measuring up to 50 m, for
a total coverage of 100 m. CS-series Long-distance Expansion Racks can be
used to create high-speed, low-cost distribution systems without using Communications Units.
Structured Programming
Division of the Program
into Tasks
When the program is divided into tasks that handle separate functions, control
systems, or processes, several programmers can develop these separate
tasks simultaneously.
There can be up to 32 normal (cyclic) tasks and 256 interrupt tasks. There are
four types of interrupts: the Power OFF Interrupt, Scheduled Interrupts, I/O
Interrupts, and External Interrupts (interrupts from Special I/O Units or CPU
Bus Units).
3
Section 1-2
CS-series Features
Task
Earlier program
Task
Task
Task
When a new program is being created, standard programs can be combined
as tasks to create an entire program.
Standard programs
Program ABD
Program ABC
Using Symbols
Task 1 (A)
Task 1 (A)
Task 2 (B)
Task 2 (B)
Task 3 (C)
Task 3 (D)
Arbitrary symbols (names up to 32 characters) that are independent of I/O terminal allocations can be used in programming. Standard programs created
with symbols are more general and easier to reuse as tasks in different programs.
Symbols specified for bit address:
SW1
Global and Local Symbols
Supported
VALVE
I/O names are handled as symbols which can be defined as global symbols,
which apply to all of the programs in all tasks, or as local symbols, which apply
to just the local task.
When the symbols are defined, you can choose to have the local symbols
allocated to addresses automatically.
Improve Overall System
Response Performance
The response performance of the system can be improved by dividing the
program into a system-management task and tasks used for control and executing only those control tasks that need to be executed.
Simplify Program Modification
• Debugging is more efficient when the job of modifying and debugging the
tasks can be divided among several individuals.
• Program maintenance is easier because only the tasks affected by
changes have to be modified when there are changes (such as changes
in specifications).
• Several consecutive program lines can be modified with online editing.
• The amount the cycle time is extended during online editing has been
reduced.
4
CS-series Features
Section 1-2
Change Program
Arrangement Easily
When separate tasks have been programmed for different production models,
the task control instructions can be used to switch the program quickly from
production of one model to another.
Step Control and Block
Programming
The step control and block programming instructions can be used to control
repetitive processes that are difficult to program with ladder programming
alone.
Comments
Several types of comments can be added to the program to make it easier to
understand, including Rung comments, and I/O comments.
Section Function
The section function can be used to make the program easier to visualize
(CX-Programmer version 2.0 or higher).
Port-specific Protocol Macro Function
Create Protocol Functions
for All Ports
The protocol macro function can be used to create versatile communications
functions for any of the PLC’s communications ports. The communications
functions can have host link, NT Link, or protocol macro configurations and
can be directed to RS-232C and RS-422/485 ports on any of the Units.
1,2,3...
1. One Serial Communications Board can be mounted in the CPU Unit. (A
Serial Communications Board has two serial communications ports.)
2. Up to 16 Serial Communications Units can be connected to a CPU Unit.
(Each Serial Communications Unit has two serial communications ports.)
In total, up to 36 ports can be used.
Programming Device
PT
Host Computer
Serial Communications Unit
CPU Unit
Serial Communications Board
Up to 36 ports
are possible
Standard Serial
Communications with
External Devices
External device
with serial port
Messages can be transferred to and from standard serial devices with the protocol macro function (according to preset parameter settings). The protocol
macro function supports processing options such as retries, timeout monitoring, and error checks.
Symbols that read and write data to the CPU Unit can be included in the communications frames, so data can be exchanged with the CPU Unit very easily.
OMRON components (such as Temperature Controllers, ID System Devices,
Bar Code Readers, and Modems) can be connected to a Serial Communications Board or Serial Communications Unit with the standard system protocol.
It is also possible to change the settings if necessary.
Note The Serial Communications Board or Serial Communications Unit must be
purchased separately to take advantage of this function.
5
Section 1-2
CS-series Features
Transmit or receive data
with just one instruction.
External device
Multilevel Network Configurations
Different network levels can be connected as shown in the following diagram.
The multilevel configuration provides more flexibility in networking from the
manufacturing site to production management. In particular, the DeviceNet
network makes it very easy to connect devices from other manufacturers.
OA Network:
FA Network:
DeviceNet*:
High-speed ON/OFF bus:
Ethernet
Controller Link
DeviceNet
CompoBus/S
Note *Units that conform to JEMANET standards are also available.
Ethernet
Controller Link
DeviceNet
CompoBus/S
6
Section 1-2
CS-series Features
Remote Monitoring and Programming
1,2,3...
1. The host link function can operate through a modem, which allows monitoring of a distant PLC’s operation, data transfers, or even online editing of
a distant PLC’s program by phone.
2. PLCs in a network can be programmed and monitored through the Host
Link.
3. It is possible to communicate through 3 network levels even with different
types of networks.
Remote programming/monitoring
of a distant PLC
Modem
Remote programming/monitoring of a
PLC on the network through Host Link
Modem
Controller Link Network
Communications Across 3
Network Levels
Remote programming/monitoring of a PLC on a network up to 3 levels away
(including the local network) for the same or different types of networks is possible through Host Link.
Network 3
Network 1
Network 2
Note With CS/CJ-series CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later, remote programming/monitoring is possible up to 8 levels away. Refer to 1-6-2 Improved Read Protection
Using Passwords for details.
Message transfer between PLCs on a network 3 levels away (including the
local network) for the same or different types of networks.
Network 3
Network 1
Network 2
7
Section 1-2
CS-series Features
High-speed
Communications with PTs
1-2-2
NT Link communications between an NS-series or NT31/NT631-V2 PT and a
CS-series PLC are possible at high speed (except for pre-version 1 CS1 CPU
Units).
Versatile Functions
Memory Card and File Management Functions
Transfer Data to and from
Memory Cards
Data area data, program data, and PLC Setup data can be saved as files on a
Memory Card (compact flash memory). Data can be read and written from
Programming Devices, instructions in the user program, or host computers.
(From the program, only I/O memory can be read and written and it must be
read or written as a file.)
I/O Memory, program,
and parameter areas
stored as files.
Convert EM Area Banks to
File Memory
Part of the EM Area can be converted to file memory to provide file management capabilities without a Memory Card and with much faster access time
than a Memory Card. (I/O comments can also be stored.)
Automatic File Transfer at
Start-up
The PLC can be set up to transfer the program and/or PLC Setup files from
the Memory Card when the PLC is turned ON. With this function, the Memory
Card provides a flash-ROM transfer. This function can also be used to store
and change PLC configurations quickly and easily.
I/O Memory Files in CSV
and Text Format
It is now possible to save production results and other data (hexadecimal)
from the CPU Unit I/O memory in a Memory Card in CSV or text format. The
data can then be read and edited using personal computer spreadsheet software by means of a Memory Card Adapter. This function is not supported by
pre-version-1 CS1 CPU Units.
I/O memory data stored
in CSV or text format
Spreadsheet software
Via Memory Card Adapter
Memory Card
File Operations (Deleting,
Creating Directories, etc.)
from Ladder Programs
It is possible to format files, delete, copy, change file names, create new directories, and perform similar operations on a Memory Card from the ladder program during PLC operation. This function is not supported by pre-version-1
CS1 CPU Units.
Program Replacement
During Operation
It is now possible to replace the entire user program in the CPU Unit from the
Memory Card during operation. In this way, it is possible to switch PLC operation without stopping the PLC. This function is not supported by pre-version-1
CS1 CPU Units.
PLC operation
.OBJ
Replacement
8
Section 1-2
CS-series Features
Easy Backups
It is now possible to back up all data (user programs, parameters, and I/O
memory) to the Memory Card by pressing the Memory Card power supply
switch. In this way, if a malfunction arises, it is possible to back up all data in
the CPU Unit at the time without using a Programming Device. This function is
not supported by pre-version-1 CS1 CPU Units.
Specialized Instructions Simplify Programming
Text String Instructions
The text string instructions allow text processing to be performed easily from
the ladder program. These instructions simplify the processing required when
creating messages for transmission or processing messages received from
external devices with the protocol macro function.
Processing of text string
data
External device with
standard serial port
Loop Instructions
The FOR(512), NEXT(513), and BREAK(514) instructions provide a very
powerful programming tool that takes up little program capacity.
Index Registers
Sixteen Index Registers are provided for use as pointers in instructions. An
Index Register can be used to indirectly address any word in I/O memory. The
CS-series PLCs also support the auto-increment, auto-decrement, and offset
functions.
The Index Registers can be a powerful tool for repetitive processing (loops)
when combined with the auto-increment, auto-decrement, and offset functions. Index Registers can also be useful for table processing operations such
as changing the order of characters in text strings.
Table Data Processing Instructions
Stack Instructions
A region of I/O memory can be defined as a stack region. Words in the stack
are specified by a stack pointer for easy FIFO (first-in first-out) or LIFO (last-in
first-out) data processing.
Stack region
Pointer
Table Processing
Range Instructions
These instructions operate on a specified range of words to find the maximum
value or minimum value, search for a particular value, calculate the sum or
FCS, or swap the contents of the leftmost and rightmost bytes in the words.
Range specified
in the instruction
Data
Search, find maximum,
find minimum, etc.
9
Section 1-2
CS-series Features
Record-table Instructions
Record-table instructions operate on specially defined data tables. The record
table must be defined in advance with DIM(631), which declares the number
of words in a record and the number of records in the table. Up to 16 record
tables can be defined.
Record tables are useful when data is organized in records. As an example, if
temperatures, pressures, or other set values for various models have been
combined into a table, the record-table format makes it easy to store and read
the set values for each model.
The SETR(635) can be used to store the first address of the desired record in
an Index Register. Index Registers can then be used to simplify complicated
processes such as changing the order of records in the record table, searching for data, or comparing data.
Table
Record 2
Record 3
Record 2
Set values for model A
Temperature setting
Pressure setting
Time setting
Troubleshooting Functions
Failure Diagnosis:
FAL(006) and FALS(007)
The FAL(006) and FALS(007) can be used to generate a non-fatal or fatal
error when the user-defined conditions are met. Records of these errors are
stored in the error log just like system-generated errors.
User-defined
error condition
Failure Point Detection:
FPD(269)
FAL(006) or FALS(007) error
Diagnoses a failure in an instruction block by monitoring the time between
execution of FPD(269) and execution of a diagnostic output and finding which
input is preventing an output from being turned ON.
FPD
Input preventing
diagnostic output
from going ON
Error Log Functions
The error log contains the error code and time of occurrence for the most
recent 20 errors (user-defined or system-generated errors).
Maintenance Functions
The CS-series PLCs record information useful for maintenance, such as the
number of power interruptions and the total PLC ON time.
10
Section 1-2
CS-series Features
Data Trace Function
The content of the specified word or bit in I/O memory can be stored in trace
memory by one of the following methods: scheduled sampling, cyclic sampling, or sampling at execution of TRSM(045).
Trace memory
Specified address
in I/O memory
Fixed Cycle Time Function
A fixed (minimum) cycle time can be set to minimize variations in I/O response
times.
I/O Refreshing Methods
I/O refreshing can be performed cyclically and immediately by programming
the immediate-refreshing variation of the instruction.
PLC Setup Functions
PLC operation can be customized with PLC Setup settings, such as the maximum cycle time setting (watch cycle time) and the instruction error operation
setting, which determines whether instruction processing errors and access
errors are treated as non-fatal or fatal errors.
The PLC's initial settings can be
customized with the PLC Setup.
Binary Refreshing of Timer/Counter Instruction PVs
Present values of timer/counter instructions can now be refreshed in binary, in
addition to the existing BCD capability. (Binary refreshing, however, can be
specified with only CX-Programmer Ver. 3.0 and higher.) This allows the
timer/counter setting time to be expanded to a range of 0 to 65535 (from the
existing 0 to 9,999). Also, results calculated by other instructions can be used
as is for timer/counter set values.
11
Section 1-2
CS-series Features
Windows Tools
The single-port multiple-access (SPMA) function can be used to program and
monitor other CPU Bus Units on the same bus (CPU Rack or Expansion
racks) or other CPU Units on the same network from a serial port on the CPU
Unit or a Serial Communications Board.
CX-Programmer
Several CPU Bus Units on the same
bus or other CPU Units on the same
network can be accessed from a
single port.
Controller Link
Power Supply Units with Replacement Notification
The C200HW-PA204C Power Supply Units with Replacement Notification provide six display levels using a 7-segment display on the front panel of the Unit
to indicate the remaining service life of the Power Supply Unit. An alarm output also notifies when the estimated remaining service life drops to 6 months
or shorter. This function enables Power Supply Unit replacement before the
power supply reaches the end of its service life resulting in a system failure.
POWER
PA204C
C200HW-PA204C Power Supply
Unit with Replacement Notification
C200HW-PA204C
POWER
Years
TEST
12
Alarm output turns OFF
when remaining service
life is 6 months.
Section 1-3
CS1-H CPU Unit Features
1-3
1-3-1
CS1-H CPU Unit Features
High-speed Performance
Ultra High-speed Cycle
Time
The CS1-H CPU Units provide a cycle time that is three to four times faster
than that of the CS1 CPU Units.
For example, a program consisting of 38 Ksteps of only basic instructions with
128 inputs and 128 outputs executes in 1 ms (4.2 ms for the CS1 CPU Units);
a program consisting of 20 Ksteps of basic and special instructions in a 1:1
ratio with 128 inputs and 128 outputs executes in 1 ms (2.0 ms for the CS1
CPU Units); and a program consisting of 8 Ksteps of basic and special
instructions in a 1:2 ratio with 64 inputs and 64 outputs executes in 0.5 ms
(1.0 ms for the CS1 CPU Units).
The following factors give the CS1-H CPU Units their high speed.
1,2,3...
1. Instruction execution times: Only about 1/2 the time required for basic instructions, and only about 1/3 the time required for special instructions.
2. Better bus performance: Data transfers between the CPU Unit and Special
I/O or Communications Units is about twice as fast, providing greater overall system performance.
3. Instruction execution is performed in parallel with peripheral servicing.
4. Other factors, including background execution of text string processing and
table data processing instructions.
Faster Execution of
Common Instructions
Extensive research on applications of CS1 CPU Units was used to identify the
20 most commonly used instructions of the more than 400 supported instructions (see below), and execution speed for these instructions was increased
by 10 to 20 times previous performance.
CPS (SIGNED BINARY COMPARE)
JMP (JUMP)
CPSL (DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY COMPARE)
CJP (CONDITIONAL JUMP)
XFER (BLOCK TRANSFER)
BCNT (BIT COUNTER)
MOVB (MOVE BIT)
MLPX (DATA DECODER)
MOVD (MOVE DIGITS)
BCD (BINARY-TO-BCD)
BSET (BLOCK SET)
SBS/RET (SUBROUTINE CALL/RETURN)
Transfer Speed between
CPU Unit and CPU Bus
Units Doubled
The speed of transferring data between the CPU Unit and CPU Bus Units has
been doubled to increase overall system performance.
Parallel Processing of
Instructions and
Peripheral Servicing
A special mode is supported that enables parallel processing of instruction
execution and peripheral device servicing to support the following types of
application.
• Extensive data exchange with a host not restricted by the program capacity in the CS1-H CPU Unit
• Consistently timed data exchange with SCADA software
• Eliminating the effects on cycle time of future system expansion or
increases in communications
13
Section 1-3
CS1-H CPU Unit Features
Less Cycle Time
Fluctuation for Data
Processing
Table data processing and text string processing, which often require time,
can be separated over several cycles to minimize fluctuations in the cycle time
and achieve stable I/O response.
Better Data Link and
Remote I/O Refreshing
CPU Bus Unit refresh response has been increased both by reductions in the
cycle time itself and by the addition of an immediate I/O refresh instruction for
CPU Bus Units (DLNK(226)). This instruction will refresh data links,
DeviceNet remote I/O, protocol macros, and other special data for CPU Bus
Units.
The response of a CS1-H CPU Unit is approximately 2.4 times that of a CS1
CPU Unit. And, for a cycle time of approximately 100 ms or higher, the
increase in the data link response is comparable to that for the cycle time.
Immediate Refreshing for
CPU Bus Units
1-3-2
Although previously, I/O refreshing for CPU Bus Units was possible only after
program executions, a CPU BUS I/O REFRESH instruction (DLNK(226)) has
been added to enable immediate I/O refreshing for CPU Bus Units. Data links,
DeviceNet remote I/O, an other unique CPU Bus Unit refreshing can be
refreshed along with words allocated to the CPU Bus Unit in the CIO and DM
Areas whenever DLNK(226) is executed. This is particularly effective for
longer cycle times (e.g., 100 ms or longer). (Data exchange for data links,
DeviceNet remote I/O, and other network communications are also affected
by the communications cycle time, i.e., DLNK(226) refreshes data only
between the CPU Bus Units and the CPU Unit, not the data on the individual
networks.)
High-speed Structured Programming
To further aid standardized programming, program structuring functions have
been improved, as has program execution speed.
More Cyclic Tasks
Tasks provide better efficiency by enabling programs to be separated by function or for development by different engineers. The CS1-H CPU Units support
up to 288 cyclic tasks, an incredible increase over the previous maximum of
32 tasks.
Common Processing from
Multiple Tasks
Global subroutines that can be called by any task are now supported. These
can be used for common processing from more than one task, for greater
standardization.
Faster Subroutine
Instructions
Subroutine instruction are executed approximately 70 times faster to enable
greater program modularization without having to be concerned about
increasing the cycle time.
Shared Index and Data
Registers between Tasks
Although separate index and data registers can still be used in each task, they
have been joined by shared index and data registers that can be used
between tasks to reduce the time required to switch between tasks.
1-3-3
Function Block (FB)
When using a CPU Unit with unit version 3.0 or later, standard processes can
be encapsulated as easily reusable function blocks as long as those processes only exchange I/O data externally. The function blocks can be written
in ladder language or ST (structured text) language. Mathematical processing
that is difficult to write in ladder language can be written easily in the ST language.
OMRON function blocks can be written in ladder language or ST (structured
text) language, and conform to IEC 61131-3 standards (JIS B3503). The function blocks provide functions for more efficient design and debugging of the
user equipment, as well as easier maintenance.
14
Section 1-3
CS1-H CPU Unit Features
Smart FB Library
The Smart FB Library is a set of function blocks that improve interoperability
between OMRON PLC Units and FA components. Since it isn't necessary to
create a ladder program to use basic Unit and FA component functions, the
user can concentrate on more important work, such as determining how to
make the most of device functions.
Online Editing of FB
Definitions
FB definitions can be changed during operation, so FB definitions can be
edited quickly during debugging. In addition, FBs can be used with confidence
even in equipment that must operate 24 hours/day. (Requires CPU Unit unit
version 4.0 or later and CX-Programmer version 7.0 or higher.)
Nesting
Not only can programs be created with nested OMRON FBs, it is possible to
make easy-to-understand, stress-free operations by switching displays under
preset conditions and displaying structures in a directory-tree format.
(Requires CX-Programmer version 6.0 or higher.)
Protecting FB Definitions
It is possible to prevent unauthorized manipulation, editing, or misappropriation of the program by setting passwords for the function block definitions allocated in the project file and protecting the definitions based on their purpose.
(Requires CX-Programmer version 6.1 or higher.)
Offline Debugging with
the Simulator
The Simulator enables checking the PLC program's operation on the desktop,
so program quality can be improved and verified early on. Both the ladder and
ST programming can be executed in the computer application.
Variable Support for
String Operations (CPU
Units with Unit Version 4.0
or Later)
The functions that perform string data operations in ST language not only
support string variables, they also strengthen the functions used to communicate with string data I/O. This feature simplifies the creation of programs that
send and receive communications commands. (Requires CPU Unit unit version 4.0 or later and CX-Programmer version 7.0 or higher.)
FB Generation Function
Existing PLC programming can be reused by easily converting it to FBs.
(Requires CX-Programmer version 7.0 or higher.)
1-3-4
More Instructions for Specific Applications
Very specific control can be easily programmed for a much wider range of
applications with the many new special instructions added to the CS1-H CPU
Units.
High-speed Positioning
for XY Tables
Double-precision floating-point calculations are supported for the CS1-H CPU
Units to provide even better precision for position control operations.
Convert between Floating
Point and Text String Data
To display floating-point data on PTs, the CS1-H CPU Units provide conversion instructions from floating-point data to text strings (ASCII). Conversion
between ASCII and floating-point data is also possible so that ASCII data from
serial communications with measurement devices can be used in calculations.
Accurate Line
Approximations
Unsigned 16-bit binary/BCD data, signed 16/32-bit binary data, or single-precision floating-point data can be used for line data, enabling precise (high data
resolution) conversions, such as from a level meter (mm) to tank capacity (l)
based on the shape of the tank.
Realtime Workpiece Data
Management
When loading and unloading workpieces from conveyor lines, stack instructions can be used to manage workpiece information in realtime in table format.
15
Section 1-3
CS1-H CPU Unit Features
PID Autotuning
Autotuning is now supported for PID constants with the PID CONTROL
instruction. The limit cycle method is used to ensure rapid autotuning. Very
effective for multiloop PID control.
System Debugging
through Error Simulation
A specified error status can be created with the FAL/FALS instructions. This
can be used effectively when depending systems. For example, errors can be
simulated to produce corresponding displays on a PT to confirm that the correct messages are being displayed.
Program Simplification
with More Specific Basic
Instructions
Programs that use a high quantity of basic instructions can be simplified
though the use of differentiated forms of the LD NOT, AND NOT and OR NOT
instructions, and through the use of OUT, SET, and RSET instructions that
can manipulate individual bits in the DM or EM Area.
Delayed Power OFF
Processing for Specified
Program Areas
The DI and EI instructions can be used to disable interrupts during specific
portions of the program, for example, to prevent the power OFF interrupt from
being executed until a specific instruction has been executed.
1-3-5
Battery-free Operation with Flash Memory
Any user program or parameter area data transferred to the CPU Unit is automatically backed up in flash memory in the CPU Unit to enable battery-free
operation without using a Memory Card.
Note Refer to information on flash memory in the CS/CJ Series Programming Manual (W394) for precautions on this function.
1-3-6
Better Compatibility with Other SYSMAC PLCs
C200HE/HG/HX PLCs
The AREA RANGE COMPARE (ZCP) and DOUBLE AREA RANGE COMPARE (ZCPl) instructions are supported in the CS1-H CPU Units to provide
better compatibility with the C200HE/HG/HX PLCs.
CVM1/CV-series PLCs
The CONVERT ADDRESS FROM CV instruction allows real I/O memory
addresses for the CVM1/CV-series PLCs to be converted to addresses for the
CS-series PLCs, enabling programs with CVM1/CV-series addresses to be
quickly converted for use with a CS-series CPU Unit.
1-3-7
Refreshing Timer/Counter PVs in Binary
In addition to BCD, binary can also be set as the PV refresh method for
timer/counter instructions. (This setting is possible, however, only with version
3.0 or higher versions of the CX-Programmer.) This means that the settable
time range for timer/counter instructions is increased from 0 to 9999 to 0 to
65,535. It also means that the results of calculations made with other instructions can be used without conversion.
1-3-8
Features of CS1-H CPU Units Ver. 3.0
Encapsulate Programming into Function Blocks Using Ladder Programming or Structured Text
When using CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0 or higher, function blocks can be used
to encapsulate standard processing that is often reused and for which only I/O
data is output externally as the user interface. Function blocks can be written
using ladder programming or structured text. Structured text is particularly
effective for easily including arithmetic processing that is difficult to write in
ladder programming.
16
Section 1-3
CS1-H CPU Unit Features
Incorporate CompoWay/F-compatible OMRON Components into FINS Network Via Serial Gateway
Using the Serial Gateway mode for the CPU Unit’s serial port enables flexible
access to CompoWay/F-compatible OMRON components from devices on
the network (e.g., PTs, PLC CPU Units, personal computers)
Store Comment/Section Data in CPU Unit’s Flash Memory
The CX-Programmer can be used to save I/O comments and other comment/section data in the comment memory contained in the CPU Unit’s flash
memory.
Back Up Comment and Section Data
Comment/section data in comment memory can be backed up using the simple backup function.
Use No-protocol Communications at Multiple Ports
No-protocol communications can be performed via the serial ports of Serial
Communications Boards/Units with unit version 1.2 or later. This enables noprotocol communications at multiple ports.
Free Running Timer Calculates Intervals without Requiring Timer Instructions
The system timers used after the power is turned ON are contained in Auxiliary Area words A000 and A001.
A000 is set to 0000 hex when the power is turned ON and this value is automatically incremented by 1 every 10 ms. The value returns to 0000 hex after
reaching FFFF hex (655,350 ms), and then continues to be incremented in a
ring operation.
A001 is set to 0000 hex when the power is turned ON and automatically incremented by 1 every 100 ms. The value returns to 0000 hex after reaching
FFFF hex (655,350 ms), and then continues to be incremented in a ring operation.
Example:The interval can be counted between processing A and processing
B without requiring timer instructions. This is achieved by calculating
the difference between the value in A000 for processing A and the
value in A000 for processing B. The interval is counted in 10 ms
units. With unit version 4.0 or later, the free running time is stored in
A002 in 1-s increments.
Reuse Ladder Programs Created Using C-series CPU Units
C-series ladder programs can be easily reused through the newly supported
model conversion instructions (XFERC(565), DISTC(566), COLLC(567),
MOVBC(568), and BCNTC(621)).
1-3-9
Changes to CS-series Operating Specifications
Increased Points for SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Communications
The maximum number of points for SYSMAC BUS remote I/O communications in the operating specifications has been expanded from 800 points (50
words) to 1,280 points (80 words). This change applies to all CS-series CPU
Units and Units using SYSMAC BUS remote I/O communications, including
previously manufactured Units. For details, refer to 1-5-7 Increased Points for
SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Communications.
17
Section 1-3
CS1-H CPU Unit Features
1-3-10 Features of CS1-H CPU Units Ver. 2.0
Easier System Development by Teams
Download/Upload Tasks Individually with CX-Programmer Version 4.0 or Higher
The CX-Programmer (version 4.0 or higher) can be used to upload or download only the required tasks. This enables the member of a development team
to work separately and then upload/download tasks after debugging them,
helping to eliminate the need for unification work by a manager as well as mistakes that can easily occur in such work.
Many Protection Functions
Improved Read Protection Using Passwords with CX-Programmer Version 4.0 or Higher
■
Read Protection for Specific Tasks
Passwords can be set to read-protect individual groups of tasks. This enables
creating black boxes in the program.
■
Enabling/Disabling Creating File Memory Program Files
When read protection is set, an optional setting allows you to enable or disable creating program backup files (.OBJ). This setting can be used to prevent
programs from being disclosed.
■
Program Write Protection
The user program can be protected without using the DIP switch setting. This
helps prohibit unauthorized or accidental program changes.
Protection for CPU Units from FINS Write Commands Sent via Networks
Write operations to a CPU Unit using FINS commands across networks can
be enabled for specific nodes and disabled for all other nodes. This can be
used to enable monitoring data via networks while eliminating the possibility
of accidental mistakes caused by careless writing operations.
Easier Network Connections and More-advanced Seamless Network Communications
Online Connections via Networks without I/O Tables
By using the CS1W-ETN21 Ethernet Unit, online connection is possible to any
PLC in the local network from a Programming Device, such as the CX-Programmer, as soon as the network is connected by using automatic I/O allocation at startup. It’s not necessary to create the I/O tables to enable connection.
This eliminates the need to use a serial connection to create I/O tables before
the CX-Programmer can be connected via Ethernet. Only an Ethernet connection is required to go online and create I/O tables.
Work Across Up to Eight Networks with CX-Net in CX-Programmer Version 4.0 or Higher
FINS commands can be sent across up to 8 network levels (including the local
network). This enables a wider range of communications between devices on
Ethernet and Controller Link Networks.
FINS commands can only be sent across up to 8 network levels when the
destination is a CPU Unit. FINS commands can be sent to other destinations
up to 3 network levels away.
Online Connections to PLCs via NS-series PTs
Downloading, uploading, and monitoring of ladder programs or other data is
possible to a PLC connected serially to an NS-series PT from the CX-Programmer connected to the NS-series PT by Ethernet.
18
Section 1-3
CS1-H CPU Unit Features
Easier Implementation of Explicit Messages with Explicit Message Instructions
Special Explicit Message Instructions are now supported to simplify using
explicit messages. (Previously, CMND(490) had to be used to send a FINS
command of 2801 hex to enable sending explicit messages.) The new instructions include the following: EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND (EXPLT(720)),
EXPLICIT GET ATTRIBUTE (EGATR(721)), EXPLICIT SET ATTRIBUTE
(ESATR(722)), EXPLICIT WORD READ (ECHRD(723)), and EXPLICIT
WORD WRITE (ECHWR(724)). Of these, EXPLICIT WORD READ
(ECHRD(723)) and EXPLICIT WORD WRITE (ECHWR(724)) enable easily
reading and writing data in CPU Units on networks with the same type of
notation as used for SEND(290) and RECV(298). (Not supported by the
C200HX(-Z)/HG(-Z)/HE(-Z) and CV-series PLCs.)
Greater Flexibility in I/O Allocations
First Word Address Settings for Slots (Using CX-Programmer Version 3.1 or Higher)
When editing I/O tables for CS1-H CPU Units, the first word address can be
set for up to 64 slots. This can be used, for example, to create fixed starting
addresses for Input Units and Output Unit to separate I/O allocations from the
program and increase the efficiency of program maintenance.
Automatic Power-ON Transfers without a Parameter File (.STD)
The user program can be automatically transferred to the CPU Unit at power
ON without a parameter file (.STD) if the name of the program file (.OBJ) is
changed to REPLACE on the CX-Programmer and the file is stored on a
Memory Card. This can be used, for example, to enable transferring a program to a CPU Unit by creating the program offline and sending it as an email
attachment, without a local Programming Device.
More Application Instruction with CX-Programmer Version 4.0 or Higher
Multiple Interlock Instructions (MILH(517), MILR(518), and MILC(519)) for Nested Interlocks
These instruction enable easy creation of nested interlocks. For example, create one interlock to control the entire program (e.g., for an emergency stop)
and then nest other interlocks for separate portions of the program (e.g., conveyor operation, alarms, etc.).
TIME-PROPORTIONAL OUTPUT (TPO(685)) Instruction for Time-proportional Operation with
Temperature Controllers or Variable-duty Lighting/Power Control
This instruction is used in combination with PID instructions to create a timeproportional output based on the manipulated variable output by the PID
instruction. This enables easily connecting an SSR to a Transistor Output Unit
to achieve time-proportional operation of a Temperature Controller. Variableduty pulse outputs can also be created for lighting or power control.
Symbol Time Comparison Instructions for Easy Calendar Timers
Two times/dates can be compared to continue operation to the next instruction
in the ladder program rung when the results of comparison is true. Opposed
to normal comparison instructions, comparisons are by byte and the bytes
that are compared in the time/date data can be controlled. This enables comparing built-in clock data with set times/dates to easily create a calendar timer,
for example, on the hour (when the minutes is 0) or on a specific date each
year).
19
Section 1-3
CS1-H CPU Unit Features
GRAY CODE CONVERSION (GRY(474)) for Easy Conversion of Parallel Inputs from Absolute Encoders
to Binary, BCD, or Angle Data
This instruction converts Gray binary codes to binary, BCD, or angle data.
This enables easily handling position or angle data input as parallel signals
(2n) from an Absolute Encoder with a Gray code output using a DC Input Unit.
EXPANDED BLOCK COMPARE (BCMP2(502)) for Comparison Judgements for Up to 256 Ranges
(Upper/Lower Limits) with One Instruction
This instruction determines if a value is within any of up to 256 ranges defined
by upper and lower limits. When used with the GRAY CODE CONVERSION
(GRY(474)) instruction, the same operation as a cam switch can be achieved
by determining if an angle input from an Absolute Encoder is in a comparison
table.
Easier Processing of I/O Devices with Special I/O Instructions
Previously many instructions were required to read or write data for external
input devices such as digital switches and 7-segment displays connected to
Basic I/O Units. Now, I/O processing for these devices can be achieved with a
single instruction. These are sometimes call Combination Instructions.
These instructions are the same as those supported by the C200HX/HG/HE
and CQM1H PLCs, with the exception that more than one of each of these
instructions can be executed in a single user program.
TEN KEY INPUT (TKY(211))
Sequentially reads numbers input from a ten-key connected to an Input Unit.
HEXADECIMAL KEY INPUT (HKY(212))
Sequentially reads numbers input from a hexadecimal keypad connected to
an Input Unit and an Output Unit for a maximum of 8 digits.
DIGITAL SWITCH INPUT (DSW(213))
Reads numbers input from a digital switch or thumbwheel switch connected to
an Input Unit and an Output Unit. Either 4 or 8 digits are read.
MATRIX INPUT (MTR(210))
Sequentially reads 64 input points input from a 8 × 8 matrix connected to an
Input Unit and an Output Unit.
7-SEGMENT DISPLAY OUTPUT (7SEG(214))
Converts 4-digit or 8-digit values to data for a 7-segment display and outputs
the result.
Read/Write CPU Bus Unit Memory Areas with IORD(222)/IOWR(223)
Although INTELLIGENT I/O READ (IORD(222)) and INTELLIGENT I/O
WRITE (IOWR(223)) could previously be used only for Special I/O Units,
these instructions can now be used to read and write data for CPU Bus Units.
Operation Start/End Times
The times that operation is started and ended are automatically stored in
memory in the Auxiliary Area (A515 to A517). This enables easier management of the operating times of the PLC System.
20
Section 1-3
CS1-H CPU Unit Features
Power Supply Units with Replacement Notification
The C200HW-PA204C Power Supply Units with Replacement Notification provide six display levels using a 7-segment display on the front panel of the Unit
to indicate the remaining service life of the Power Supply Unit. An alarm output also notifies when the estimated remaining service life drops to 6 months
or shorter. This function enables Power Supply Unit replacement before the
power supply reaches the end of its service life resulting in a system failure.
POWER
PA204C
C200HW-PA204C Power Supply
Unit with Replacement Notification
C200HW-PA204C
POWER
Years
TEST
Alarm output turns OFF
when remaining service
life is 6 months.
21
Section 1-4
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 4.0 Upgrades
1-4
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 4.0 Upgrades
This section summarizes the upgrades made for CS1-H CPU Units with unit
version 4.0. CX-Programmer version 7.0 or higher must be used to enable
using the following functions.
Functional Upgrades for Unit Version 4.0
Function
Online Editing of Function Blocks
Section
1-4-1 Online Editing of Function
Blocks
1-4-2 Input-Output Variables in
Function Blocks
1-4-3 Text String Support in
Function Blocks
Input-Output Variables in Function Blocks
Text String Support in Function Blocks
1-4-1
Online Editing of Function Blocks
Unit Version 3.0 or Earlier
Function block definitions could not be changed during operation.
Unit Version 4.0 or Later
Function block definitions can be changed during operation. This allows function block definitions to be quickly corrected during debugging. It also allows
function blocks to be used more easily in systems that operate 24 hours a day.
1-4-2
Input-Output Variables in Function Blocks
Unit Version 3.0 or Earlier
The data size of parameters that could be passed to and from function blocks
was limited to four words maximum. It was thus necessary to separate elements with large data sizes, such as data tables.
FB
(INT)
D100
Unit Version 4.0 or Later
1-4-3
Pattern A
D101
Pattern B
D102
Pattern C
D103
Pattern D
D104
Pattern E
D101
D102
D103
D104
Para1o
(INT)
Para2o
(INT)
Para3o
(INT)
Para4o
(INT)
Para5o
D100
D101
D102
D103
D104
Input-output variables can be used to passed large quantities of data, such as
table data.
D100
Pattern A
D101
Pattern B
D102
Pattern C
D103
Pattern D
D104
Pattern E
FB
(INT)[]
D100
Para1 ---
Para1
D100
Text String Support in Function Blocks
Unit Version 3.0 or Earlier
22
D100
(INT)
Para1i
(INT)
Para2i
(INT)
Para3i
(INT)
Para4i
(INT)
Para5i
To program text string processing for communications commands and display
data in ladder diagrams, it was necessary to know the ladder string instructions and ASCII codes. Also, several instructions had to be combined to converted from numbers to text strings or text strings to numbers.
Section 1-5
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 Upgrades
Unit Version 4.0 or Later
MOV
#426C
stBlack[0]
" Bl" is #426C in ASCII.
MOV
#6163
stBlack[1]
" ac" is #6163 in ASCII.
Text strings can be used in ST programming to easily create text string processing programs.
Black
9
White
18
Blue
7
Pink
30
Production
log file
created.
06/05/28
Black: 9
White:18
Blue: 7
Pink: 30
File name
LineA.txt
FB to Create Production Log File
(* Convert black quantity to string *)
(* Convert white quantity to string *)
(* Convert blue quantity to string *)
(* Convert pink quantity to string *)
(* Get date text *)
GetDate(stDay)
(* Create production log LineA.txt *)
FB to Create Date Text
Name: Generate Date Text
Function: To create text data for yy/mm/dd
(* Create yymm text *)
(* Create ddhh text *)
(* Insert / between yy and mm; extract only dd and combine *)
1-5
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 Upgrades
The following table shows the functional upgrades for CS1-H CPU Unit
Ver. 3.0.
Functional Upgrades for CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 3.0
Function
Function blocks (when using CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0 or higher)
Serial Gateway (converting FINS commands to CompoWay/F commands at the built-in serial port)
Comment memory (in internal flash memory)
Expanded simple backup data
Free running timer (system timer after power is turned ON)
Section
1-5-1
1-5-2
1-5-3
1-5-4
1-5-5
23
Section 1-5
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 Upgrades
Function
New instructions
added
Additional instruction functions
TXDU(256) and RXDU(255) instructions (support no-protocol communications with Serial
Communications Units with unit version 1.2 or
later)
Model conversion instructions: XFERC(565),
DISTC(566), COLLC(567), MOVBC(568), and
BCNTC(621)
Special function block instruction: GETID(286)
TXD(236) and RXD(235) instructions (support
no-protocol communications with Serial Communications Boards with unit version 1.2 or
later)
Section
1-5-6
Changes to Operating Specifications
Function
Maximum number of points expanded for SYSMAC BUS remote I/O
communications
1-5-1
Section
1-5-7
Function Blocks (FB)
Pre-Ver. 2.0
Earlier Units did not support function blocks (FB).
Unit Ver. 3.0 or Later
Function blocks (FB) conforming to IEC 61131-3 are supported. Use of function blocks is determined by the user.
Note IEC 61131-3 is an international standard for programmable logic
controllers (PLC) established by the International Electro-technical
Commission (IEC). This standard is divided into seven parts, of
which Part 3 Programming Languages (IEC 61131-3) provides regulations for programming PLCs.
Function blocks can be created with CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0 or higher by the
user and pasted into normal programs. The standard function blocks provided
by OMRON in the OMRON FB Library can also be pasted into normal programs. Function blocks enable standard processing to be simply inserted into
a program as a single unit. Function blocks provide the following features.
• Function block algorithms can be written using ladder programming or
structured text (see note).
Note Structured text is a high level textual language designed for industrial
control (primarily PLCs) stipulated in IEC 61131-3. The structured
text supported by CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0 conforms to IEC 61131-1.
• A single function block that has been created can be stored in a library for
easy reuse of standard processing.
• Programs that contain function blocks (ladder programming or structured
text), can also be uploaded or downloaded in the same way as normal
programs that do not contain function blocks. Tasks that include function
blocks, however, cannot be downloaded in task units (although they can
be uploaded).
• Array (one-dimensional) variables are supported, making it easier to handle data specific to an application.
24
Section 1-5
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 Upgrades
1-5-2
Serial Gateway (Converting FINS to CompoWay/F Via Serial Port)
Pre-Ver. 2.0
Temperature Controllers, Digital Panel Meters, and other CompoWay/F-compatible OMRON Components previously could be accessed by sending userspecified CompoWay/F commands from the PLC. This required, however, the
use of a Serial Communications Board/Unit protocol macro, execution of the
PMCR(260) instruction in the ladder program of the CPU Unit on the same
PLC, and implementation of the standard system protocol (CompoWay/F
Master). The use of protocol macros prevented access across networks.
Note Specific data could be shared without communications instructions if
user-specified CompoWay/F commands were not required, however,
by using the CJ1W-CIF21 Basic Communications Unit.
Unit Ver. 3.0 or Later
FINS commands (CompoWay/F commands encapsulated in FINS frames)
received by the CPU Unit at the built-in serial port (RS-232C port or peripheral
port) are converted automatically into CompoWay/F command frames and
transmitted on the serial line. This enables access to CompoWay/F-compatible OMRON components that are connected to the CPU Unit’s built-in serial
port via either an NS-series Programmable Terminal (PT) or by using the
CMND(490) instruction.
FINS System
Network
CMND(490)
Serial
Serial
CS/CJ-series CPU Unit with
unit version 3.0 or later
Network
Protocol
conversion
FINS
Network
CompoWay/F
CompoWay/F-compatible
components can be accessed via the network from
personal computers, PTs,
or PLCs.
Serial
CompoWay/F-compatible
components
25
Section 1-5
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 Upgrades
1-5-3
Comment Memory (in Internal Flash Memory)
Pre-Ver. 2.0
Comment data and section data could not be stored in the actual PLC when a
project was downloaded from the CX-Programmer to the CPU Unit unless
both a Memory Card and EM file memory were available.
Unit Ver. 3.0 or Later
A comment memory is provided within the CPU Unit’s internal flash memory.
Therefore, the following comment/section data can be stored in and read from
comment memory even if neither Memory Card nor EM file memory are available.
• Symbol table files (including CX-Programmer symbol names and I/O
comments)
• Comment files (CX-Programmer rung comments and other comments)
• Program index files (CX-Programmer section names, section comments,
and program comments)
CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0 or later
Comment/section data can be stored in the actual PLC
when downloading projects.
Project
Transfer
Symbol table file
CPU Unit
Comment file
Program index file
EM file memory
Memory Card
Comment
memory
Comment/section data can be stored in this area.
When downloading projects using the CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0, either of the
following storage locations can be selected as the transfer destination for
comment data and section data.
• Memory Card
• EM file memory
• Comment memory (in CPU Unit’s internal flash memory)
Note When using CX-Programmer Ver. 4.0 or earlier, this data is stored in either the
Memory Card or EM file memory, whichever is available. If neither the Memory Card nor EM file memory is available, the comment/section data cannot
be stored in comment memory.
1-5-4
Simple Backup Data Expanded
Pre-Ver. 2.0
The simple backup function could not be used to back up comment data or
section data.
Unit Ver. 3.0 or Later
The following files stored in comment memory can be backed up to a Memory
Card when a simple backup operation is executed, or the files can be restored
to comment memory from the Memory Card.
• Symbol table files (including CX-Programmer symbol names and I/O
comments)
26
Section 1-5
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 Upgrades
• Comment files (CX-Programmer rung comments and other comments)
• Program index files (CX-Programmer section names, section comments,
and program comments)
Simple backup executing
CPU Unit
• User program
• Parameters
• I/O memory
Memory Card
CS/CJ Series
(In comment memory)
Symbol table file
Comment file
Program index file
These files can also be backed up using simple backup.
This enables backup/restoration of all data in the CPU Unit including I/O comments if an error occurs or when adding a CPU Unit with the same specifications without requiring a Programming Device.
1-5-5
Free Running Timer
he system timers used after the power is turned ON are contained in the following Auxiliary Area words.
Name
10-ms Incrementing
Free Running Timer
Address
Function
Access
A000
This word contains the system timer Read-only
used after the power is turned ON.
0000 hex is set when the power is
turned ON and this value is automatically incremented by 1 every 10 ms.
The value returns to 0000 hex after
reaching FFFF hex (655,350 ms),
and then continues to be automatically incremented by 1 every 10 ms.
(Unit version 3.0 or later)
100-ms Incrementing A001
This word contains the system timer Read-only
Free Running Timer
used after the power is turned ON.
0000 hex is set when the power is
turned ON and this value is automatically incremented by 1 every 100
ms. The value returns to 0000 hex
after reaching FFFF hex (6,553,500
ms), and then continues to be automatically incremented by 1 every
100 ms.(Unit version 3.0 or later)
1-s Incrementing Free A002
This word contains the system timer Read-only
Running Timer
used after the power is turned ON.
0000 hex is set when the power is
turned ON and this value is automatically incremented by 1 every second. The value returns to 0000 hex
after reaching FFFF hex (65,535 s),
and then continues to be automatically incremented by 1 every second.
(Unit version 4.0 or later)
27
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 Upgrades
Section 1-5
Note The timer will continue to be incremented when the operating mode is
switched to RUN mode.
Example: The interval can be counted between processing A and processing
B without requiring timer instructions. This is achieved by calculating the difference between the value in A000 for processing A and
the value in A000 for processing B. The interval is counted in 10 ms
units.
CPU Units with unit version 4.0 and later also have a 1-s timer in
A002, which is incremented by 1 every 1 s.
1-5-6
New Special Instructions and Functions
The following new instructions and instruction functions have been added. For
details, refer to the CS/CJ Series Instructions Reference Manual (W340).
These new instructions are supported by the CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0 or
higher only.
• Serial Communications Instructions:
Supporting no-protocol communications with Serial Communications
Units with unit version 1.2 or later:
TXDU(256): TRANSMIT VIA SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS UNIT
RXDU(255): RECEIVE VIA SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS UNIT
Supporting no-protocol communications with Serial Communications
Boards with unit version 1.2 or later:
TXD(236): TRANSMIT
RXD(235): RECEIVE
• Model Conversion Instructions:
When using CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0 or higher to convert a C-series ladder program for use in a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit, the C-series
XFER(070), DIST(080), COLL(081), MOVB(082), and BCNT(067)
instructions will be automatically converted to the following instructions.
The operands do not require editing.
XFERC(565) BLOCK TRANSFER
DISTC(566) SINGLE WORD DISTRIBUTE
COLLC(567) DATA COLLECT
MOVBC(568) MOVE BIT
BCNTC(621) BIT COUNTER
1-5-7
Increased Points for SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Communications
Earlier Specifications
The maximum number of SYSMAC BUS remote I/O points per CPU Unit was
800 points (50 words), which were allocated in the SYSMAC BUS Area
(CIO 3000 to CIO 3049).
Updated Specifications
The maximum number of SYSMAC BUS remote I/O points per CPU Unit has
been increased to 1,280 points (80 words), which are allocated in the SYSMAC BUS Area (CIO 3000 to CIO 3079).
The CS Series, including CS1 CPU Units, were designed to have a higher
total number of points, the Units were initially released before the higher specification had been fully confirmed, so the official specifications were limited to
ensure stable operation.
Almost coinciding with release of CPU Units with unit version 3.0, stable operation was confirmed at the higher specification, thereby enabling a change in
the official operating specifications.
This expansion in the number of points is not related to any upgrade of the
Units (CPU Units or SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Communications Units).
28
Section 1-5
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 Upgrades
Therefore, the increase in maximum number of points applies to all CS-series
CPU Units, including those that have already been shipped.
Refer to the following table for details.
Maximum number of points per
CPU Unit (total
optical/wired
points)
Maximum
points per
Remote I/O
Master Unit
(RM) (Total optical/wired points)
Item
SYSMAC Bus
remote I/O relay
area
Number of Remote
I/O Master Units
(RM)
Number of C500
Remote I/O Slave
Units (RT) (i.e.,
Slave Racks))
SYSMAC BUS
Remote I/O Relay
Points
Maximum number
of C500 Remote I/O
Slave Units (i.e.,
Slave Racks)
Before
800 points
(50 words)
Now
1,280 points
(80 words)
2 Units
2 Units
4 Units
C500 Remote I/O Slave Unit (RT) allocated
words for 2 unit numbers
Up to 20 words in total per Slave Rack.
5 Units
8 Units
Slave Rack: Any location, fixed word allocations
C200H Special I/O Unit can be connected.
Up to 10 words in total per Slave Rack.
512 points (32 words)
2 Units
4 Units
C500 Remote I/O Slave Unit (RT) allocated
words for 2 unit numbers
Up to 20 words in total per Slave Rack.
Remote I/O Slave Unit’s (RT) unit number
cannot be used more than once.
Maximum number
of C200H Remote
I/O Slave Units (RT)
(i.e., Slave Racks)
5 Units
8 Units
Slave Rack: Any location, fixed word allocations
C200H Special I/O Unit can be connected.
Up to 10 words in total per Slave Rack.
Maximum number
of Remote I/O
Slaves (Slave Units,
I/O Link Units,
Remote I/O Units)
Optical: 64 Units (Repeater required if number exceeds 32).
Wired: Remote Interfaces, Remote Terminals: 32 Units total
Remote Units: 16 Units.
29
Section 1-6
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
1-6
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
The following table shows the functional upgrades for CS1-H CPU Unit
Ver. 2.0.
Functional Upgrades for CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0
Function
Downloading and Uploading Individual Tasks
Improved Read Protection Using Passwords
Write Protection from FINS Commands Sent to CPU Units via Networks
Online Network Connections without I/O Tables
Communications through a Maximum of 8 Network Levels
Connecting Online to PLCs via NS-series PTs
Setting First Slot Words
Automatic Transfers at Power ON without a Parameter File
Operation Start/End Times
New Application Instructions
1-6-1
Reference
1-6-1
1-6-2
1-6-3
1-6-4
1-6-5
1-6-6
1-6-7
1-6-8
1-6-9
1-6-10
Downloading and Uploading Individual Tasks
Previous CPU Units (Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units)
With the pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units, individual program tasks could not be downloaded from the CX-Programmer. It was only possible to download the entire
user program.
For example, if several programmers were developing the program, the
project manager had to unify each program after debugging and then download the entire user program. Furthermore, the entire user program had to be
downloaded even if just a few changes were made.
Note It was possible to upload individual program tasks with CS/CJ-series PLCs.
Developer A
CX-Programmer
Manager
Developer B
Entire user program
CX-Programmer
CS/CJ Series
Unification
Developer C
Download
CX-Programmer
Individual tasks can be uploaded.
30
Section 1-6
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0
Overview
With CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later CPU Units, individual program tasks can be
uploaded and downloaded from the CX-Programmer.
CX-Programmer
Individual tasks (programs)
END
END
END
Download individual tasks (programs).
CS/CJ-series
CPU Unit Ver.2.0 or later
Usage
When several programmers are developing a program, it isn't necessary for a
project manager to unify the data because just the debugged tasks can be
downloaded/uploaded. Also, transferring individual tasks can help avoid mistakes.
Developer A CX-Programmer
Edited
Just the edited tasks can be downloaded.
Developer B
CX-Programmer
Unchanged
CS/CJ-series
CPU Unit Ver.2.0 or later
Developer C CX-Programmer
Unchanged
Download individual tasks.
Restrictions to Function
Block Use
1-6-2
Individual tasks cannot be downloaded for programs containing function
blocks (unit version 3.0 or later only) (uploading is possible).
Improved Read Protection Using Passwords
Read Protection for Individual Tasks Using Passwords
Previous CPU Units (PreVer. 2.0 CPU Units)
With the pre-Ver. 2.0 CS/CJ-series CPU Units, it was possible to read-protect
the entire PLC with a password (referred to as “UM read protection” below),
but it was not possible to protect individual tasks.
UM read protection prevented anyone from displaying, editing, or uploading
the entire user program from CX-Programmer without inputting the correct
password.
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or Later
and CX-Programmer
Ver. 4.0 or Higher
Overview
With the CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later CPU Units, it is possible to read-protect
individual program tasks (referred to as “task read protection” below) or the
entire PLC. same password controls access to all of the read-protected tasks.
31
Section 1-6
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
Task read protection prevents anyone from displaying, editing, or uploading
the read-protected set of tasks from CX-Programmer without inputting the correct password. In this case, the entire program can be uploaded, but the readprotected tasks cannot be displayed or edited without inputting the correct
password. Tasks that are not read-protected can be displayed, edited, or modified with online editing.
Note Task read protection cannot be set if UM read protection is already set. However, it is possible to set UM read protection after task read protection has
been set.
CX-Programmer
Set a password for particular tasks in the project directory.
Password?
Those tasks cannot be displayed without inputting the password.
CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Ver.2.0 or later
END
The entire user program can be uploaded, but passwordprotected tasks will not be displayed until the password is input.
END
The other tasks can be displayed/edited and are also accessible
through online editing.
END
Operating Procedure
1,2,3...
1. Display the Protection Tab of the PLC Properties Window and register a
password in the Task read protection Box.
Right-click.
Properties
2. Select the tasks that will be password-protected and select the Task read
protect Option in the Program Properties Tab.
Right-click.
Properties
3. Connect online and execute either step a or b below.
a) Transferring the Program and Setting Password Protection:
Select PLC - Transfer - To PLC to transfer the program. The tasks registered in step 2 will be password-protected.
32
Section 1-6
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
b) Setting Password Protection without Transferring the Program:
Select PLC - Protection - Set Password and click the OK button. The
tasks registered in step 2 will be password-protected.
Usage
Apply read protection to tasks when you want to convert those tasks (programs) to “black box” programs.
Task 0
Accessable
END
Task 1
Not accessable
END
Password applied.
Task converted to "black box."
Task 2
Accessable
END
Note
1. If CX-Programmer Ver. 3.2 or an earlier version is used to read a task with
task read protection applied, an error will occur and the task will not be
read. Likewise, if a Programming Console or the PT Ladder Monitor function is used to read a password protected task, an error will occur and the
task will not be read.
2. The entire program can be transferred to another CPU Unit even if individual tasks in the program are read-protected. It is also possible to connect
online and create a program file (.OBJ file) with file memory operations. In
both cases, the task read protection remains effective for the passwordprotected tasks.
3. When the CX-Programmer is used to compare a user program in the computer's memory with a user program in the CPU Unit, password-protected
tasks will be compared too.
Restrictions on Function
Block Use
For programs containing function blocks (unit version 3.0 or later only), function block definitions can be read even if the entire program or tasks are readprotected.
Enabling/Disabling Creating File Memory Program Files
Previous CPU Units (PreVer. 2.0 CPU Units)
With the pre-Ver. 2.0 CS/CJ-series CPU Units, it was possible use file memory operations to transfer a program file (.OBJ file) to a Memory Card even if
the program was protected with UM read protection. (Consequently, illegal
copies could be made.)
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or Later
and CX-Programmer
Ver. 4.0 or Higher
Overview
When the entire program or individual tasks in a CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later are
read-protected from the CX-Programmer, an option can be set to enable or
disable the creation/backup of.OBJ program files. It will not be possible to create program files (.OBJ files) with file memory operations if the creation/backup of program files is prohibited with this setting. (This setting
prohibits both online transfers to a Memory Card/EM file memory as well as
offline storage of PLC data that was uploaded to the CX-Programmer.)
Disabling the creation of file memory program files can help prevent illegal
copying of the user program.
33
Section 1-6
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
CX-Programmer
When a password is being registered for the entire user program or
selected tasks, the creation of backup program files (.OBJ files) can be
enabled/disabled with an option setting.
Password?
Online creation of backup program files
(.OBJ files) prohibited by option setting.
CX-Programmer
Uploading of all PLC
data is prohibited.
CPU Unit
Backup program files (.OBJ files) cannot be
created with file memory operations.
Operating Procedure
1,2,3...
1. When registering a password in the UM read protection password Box or
Task read protection Box, select the Prohibit from saving into a protected
memory card Option.
Right-click.
Properties
2. Either select PLC - Transfer - To PLC to transfer the program or select
PLC - Protection - Set Password and click the OK button.
Usage
This option can be used to prevent the program from being transferred out of
the PLC using the password.
Note
1. The simple backup operation can still be performed when the creation of
program files is prohibited, but the backup program file (BACKUP.OBJ) will
not be created.
2. The program can be copied when program read protection is not enabled.
3. The setting to enable/disable creating file memory program files will not
take effect unless the program is transferred to the CPU Unit. Always transfer the program after changing this setting.
Enabling/Disabling Write Protection for Individual Tasks Using Passwords
Previous CPU Units
(Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units)
34
With the pre-Ver. 2.0 CS/CJ-series CPU Units, the CPU Unit's user program
memory (UM) can be write-protected by turning ON pin 1 of the CPU Unit's
DIP switch. In this case, it is possible to overwrite the user program memory
by turning OFF pin 1.
Section 1-6
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or Later
and CX-Programmer
Ver. 4.0 or Higher
With the CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 and later CPU Units, the CPU Unit's UM area can
be write protected by turning ON pin 1 of the CPU Unit's DIP switch. The program (or selected tasks) can also be write-protected if the write protection
option is selected from the CX-Programmer when a password is being registered for the entire program or those selected tasks. The write protection setting can prevent unauthorized or accidental overwriting of the program.
CX-Programmer
When a password is being registered for the entire user
program or selected tasks, program write-protection can be
enabled/disabled with an option setting.
Password?
The user program cannot be overwritten.
CPU Unit
Overwriting can be prohibited with password protection,
regardless of the DIP switch setting.
Memory Card
The user program cannot be overwritten.
Note
1. If the selected tasks or program are write-protected by selecting this option
when registering a password, only the tasks (program) that are passwordprotected will be protected from overwriting. It will still be possible to overwrite other tasks or programs with operations such as online editing and
task downloading.
2. All tasks (programs) can be overwritten when program read protection is
not enabled.
3. The setting to enable/disable creating file memory program files will not
take effect unless the program is transferred to the CPU Unit. Always transfer the program after changing this setting.
Operating Procedure
1,2,3...
1. When registering a password in the UM read protection password Box or
Task read protection Box, select the Prohibit from overwriting to a protected program Option.
Right-click.
Properties
2. Either select PLC - Transfer - To PLC to transfer the program or select
PLC - Protection - Set Password and click the OK button.
35
Section 1-6
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
Auxiliary Area Flags and Bits related to Password Protection
Name
UM Read Protection
Flag
1-6-3
Bit
address
A09900
Task Read Protection Flag
A09901
Program Write
Protection for Read
Protection
A09902
Enable/Disable Bit
for Program Backup
A09903
Description
Indicates whether or not the PLC (the entire user
program) is read-protected.
0: UM read protection is not set.
1: UM read protection is set.
Indicates whether or not selected program tasks
are read-protected.
0: Task read protection is not set.
1: Task read protection is set.
Indicates whether or not the write protection
option has been selected to prevent overwriting
of password-protected tasks or programs.
0: Overwriting allowed
1: Overwriting prohibited (write-protected)
Indicates whether or not a backup program file
(.OBJ file) can be created when UM read protection or task read protection is set.
0: Creation of backup program file allowed
1: Creation of backup program file prohibited
Write Protection from FINS Commands Sent to CPU Units via
Networks
Previous CPU Units (Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units)
With the pre-Ver. 2.0 CS/CJ-series CPU Units, there was no way to prohibit
write operations and other editing operations sent to the PLC's CPU Unit as
FINS commands through a network such as Ethernet, i.e., connections other
than direct serial connections.
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or Later
Summary
With the CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 and later CS/CJ-series CPU Units, it is possible to
prohibit write operations and other editing operations sent to the PLC's CPU
Unit as FINS commands through a network (including write operations from
CX-Programmer, CX-Protocol, CX-Process, and other applications using FinsGateway). Read processes are not prohibited.
FINS write protection can disable write processes such as downloading the
user program, PLC Setup, or I/O memory, changing the operating mode, and
performing online editing.
It is possible to exclude selected nodes from write protection so that data can
be written from those nodes.
An event log in the CPU Unit automatically records all write processes sent
through the network and that log can be read with a FINS command.
36
Section 1-6
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
Example:
Write operations by FINS commands are prohibited from some
nodes in the network (in this example, computer #1, PLC #1, and
PLC #2).
Computer #1
Computer #2
Network
PLC #2
PLC #1
Network
PLC #3
Network
Write access to this PLC
is enabled/disabled.
Write operations by FINS commands are not prohibited from
selected nodes in the network
(in this example, computer #2
and PLC #3).
Note This function prohibits writing by FINS commands only, so it has no effect on
write operations by functions other than FINS commands, such as data links.
Example Write Protection Patterns
Connection pattern
From a
computer
through a
direct serial
connection
Direct
connection to
PLC
Diagram (example)
Write
protection
Cannot be
applied.
Computer
Write-protection not effective
Peripheral port
PLC
Serial connection
(Peripheral bus or
host link)
Gateway
connection
(Serial-to-network) to PLC
RS-232C port
RS-232C port or 422A/485 port
on a Communications Board/Unit
Can be
applied.
Computer
The CPU Unit in PLC #2
can be write-protected.
PLC #1
PLC #2
Serial connection
(Peripheral bus
or host link)
Network
37
Section 1-6
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
Connection pattern
From a computer through a
direct network connection
Diagram (example)
The CPU Unit in PLC #2
can be write-protected.
Computer
PLC #1
Write
protection
Can be
applied.
PLC #2
Network
From another PLC in the
network
CMND
If the CMND instruction is used to send
a FINS command (requesting a write
operation) to the CPU Unit of PLC #2,
the operation is not performed.
Can be
applied.
The CPU Unit in PLC #2
can be write-protected.
PLC #1
PLC #2
Network
Operation
38
With the CX-Programmer, open the PLC Setup's FINS Protection Tab and
select the Use FINS Write Protection Option. When this option is selected, it
will not be possible to execute write operations for that CPU Unit with FINS
commands sent through a network. To permit write operations from particular
nodes, enter network addresses and node addresses for the node under Protection Releasing Addresses. (Up to 32 nodes can be excluded from FINS
Write Protection).
Section 1-6
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
PLC Setup
Item
Use FINS Write
Protection
Nodes Excluded
from Write Protection (Protection
Releasing
Addresses)
Number of Nodes
Excluded from FINS
Write Protection
(Do not set this
value. It is automatically calculated by
the CX-Programmer.)
Usage
Address in
Description
Programming
Console
Word 448, bit 15 Sets whether the CPU Unit is
write-protected from FINS commands sent through the network.
(Does not prohibit FINS commands sent through a direct serial
connection).
Words 449 to
This area lists the nodes in the
480
network that are not restricted by
FINS write protection. Up to 32
nodes can be specified.
Note These settings are effective
only when FINS write
protection is enabled.
Bits 08 to
Network address:
15
Network address of the FINS
command source
Bits 00 to
Node address:
07
Node address of the FINS
command source
Word 448, bits
00 to 07
Settings
0: Write protection
disabled
1: Write protection
enabled
Default setting
0: Write protection
disabled
00 to 7F hex
01 to FE hex, or FF
hex
(FF hex: node
address unspecified)
0
Contains the number of nodes that 0 to 32
(All nodes subject to
are not subject to the FINS write
(00 to 20 hex)
write protection.)
protection.
(A value of 0 indicates that all nodes
If 0 is specified (no nodes
are subject to write
excluded from write protection),
FINS write commands are prohib- protection.)
ited from all nodes other than the
local node.
Note This setting is effective only
when FINS write protection
is enabled.
The system can be configured so that a PLC can be written only from authorized nodes in the network. (For example, use this function when the system's
control/monitoring computer is the only node allowed to write to a Controller
within a piece of equipment.)
By limiting the number of nodes that can write to the PLC, it is possible to prevent system problems caused by unintentional overwrites during data monitoring.
39
Section 1-6
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
System control/monitoring computer
Allowed to
write/control
Equipment
Network
Monitoring computer
Controller
Not allowed to
write/control
Allowed to
write/control PLC
Network
Network
CS/CJ-series PLC
Operations Restricted by
Network FINS Write
Protection
Code
0102 hex
0103 hex
0105 hex
0202 hex
0203 hex
0307 hex
0308 hex
0401 hex
0402 hex
0702 hex
0C01 hex
40
FINS Write Commands
The following FINS commands are restricted by FINS write protection when
sent to the CPU Unit through the network.
Command name
MEMORY AREA WRITE
MEMORY AREA FILL
MEMORY AREA TRANSFER
PARAMETER AREA WRITE
PARAMETER AREA FILL (CLEAR)
PROGRAM AREA WRITE
PROGRAM AREA CLEAR
RUN
STOP
CLOCK WRITE
ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE
Code
2101 hex
2103 hex
2203 hex
2204 hex
2205 hex
2207 hex
2208 hex
220A hex
220B hex
220C hex
2215 hex
2301 hex
2302 hex
Command name
ERROR CLEAR
ERROR LOG POINTER CLEAR
SINGLE FILE WRITE
FILE MEMORY FORMAT
FILE DELETE
FILE COPY
FILE NAME CHANGE
MEMORY AREA-FILE TRANSFER
PARAMETER AREA-FILE TRANSFER
PROGRAM AREA-FILE TRANSFER
CREATE/DELETE DIRECTORY
FORCED SET/RESET
FORCED SET/RESET CANCEL
Section 1-6
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
Operations from CX-Programmer (including CX-Net) through the Network
The following CX-Programmer (including CX-Net) operations are restricted by
FINS write protection when performed on the CPU Unit through the network.
Operations not
allowed through the
network when FINS
write protection is
enabled.
Note
• Changing the Operating Mode
• Transferring the ladder program to the CPU Unit
• Transferring parameter area data (PLC Setup, I/O table, and
CPU Bus Unit Setup) to the CPU Unit
• Transferring memory area data (I/O memory data) to the
CPU Unit
• Transferring the variable table, comments, or program index
to the CPU Unit
• Forced Set/Reset
• Changing timer/counter set values
• Online editing
• Writing file memory
• Clearing the error log
• Setting the clock
• Releasing the access right
• Transferring the routing table
• Transferring the data link table
1. FINS write protection does not prevent CX-Programmer operations from a
computer connected through a direct serial connection.
2. FINS write protection does not prevent the following file memory write
operations.
• Automatic transfer from the Memory Card at startup
• Simple backup function (including backup operations to selected
Units/Boards)
• Writing files with the FWRIT (WRITE DATA FILE) instruction
Operations from Other Support Software
FINS write protection also prevents the following operations performed
through the network by the CX-Protocol and CX-Process.
• Changing the CPU Unit's operating mode, writing memory areas,
transferring PLC Setup settings, transferring the I/O table, forced
set/reset, and clearing the CPU Unit's error log
Operations from Applications That Use FinsGateway
FINS write protection prevents all write operations addressed to the CPU Unit
from applications that use FinsGateway, such as PLC Reporter and Compolet.
1-6-4
Online Network Connections without I/O Tables
Previous CPU Units (Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units)
With the pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units, it was not possible to make an online connection to other PLCs in the network from CX-Programmer unless the I/O
tables had been created (even if the network connections were completed)
because the Network Communications Unit itself was not recognized from the
CPU Unit. Consequently, it was necessary to connect a Programming Device
(CX-Programmer or a Programming Console) to each PLC through a serial
connection and create and I/O tables in each PLC in order to make online
connections through the network.
41
Section 1-6
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or Later
Summary
With the CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 and later CS/CJ-series CPU Units, the CPU Unit
can recognize a CPU Bus Unit (such as a Network Communications Unit, see
note) even if the I/O tables have not been created and there is no registered
I/O tables.
CPU Bus Unit
(including Network Communications Units)
CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Ver.2.0 or later
Network
CPU Bus Units (including Network Communications Units)
can be recognized before an I/O table is created.
Online connection
can be made.
Note Network Communications Units include Ethernet Units, Controller Link Units,
SYSMAC Link Units, and DeviceNet Units.
Usage
If the nodes are connected to the network, this function allows a computerbased Programming Device (such as the CX-Programmer) to connect online
to PLCs in the network even if the I/O tables have not been created. Since a
network connection is established with the PLCs, setup operations can be
performed such as creating the I/O tables (or editing and transferring I/O
tables), transferring the user program, transferring the PLC Setup, and transferring the CPU Bus Unit Setup.
This function is particularly useful when connecting the CX-Programmer via
Ethernet (using a CS1W-ETN21), because the I/O tables can be created
through Ethernet so a serial cable isn't required and it isn't necessary to
spend extra time establishing a serial connection.
Details
1:1 Computer-to-PLC connection
1:N Computer-to-PLC connection
CX-Programmer
CX-Programmer
CS/CJseries
CPU Unit
Ver.2.0
Ethernet
CS/CJseries
CPU Unit
Ver.2.0
I/O table not
registered
Even without an I/O table, it is
possible to make an online connection, create the I/O table,
transfer the program, and perform other operations.
I/O table not registered
CS/CJseries
CPU Unit
Ver.2.0
CS/CJseries
CPU Unit
Ver.2.0
I/O table not registered I/O table not registered
Ethernet
Even without an I/O table, it is possible to make an online
connection, create the I/O table, transfer the program, and
perform other operations.
• Applicable Units: All CS/CJ-series CPU Bus Units
• Applicable computer-based Programming Devices: CX-Programmer and
CX-Protocol only
• Applicable functions: Online connections from CX-Programmer and CXProtocol, and online functions of the applicable CPU Units and CPU Bus
Units
42
Section 1-6
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
Note
1. A non-fatal I/O verification error will occur if a CPU Bus Unit (including a
Network Communications Unit) is used without creating I/O tables.
2. With a CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later CS1-H CPU Unit, CPU Bus Units can be
used even if the I/O tables have not been created, but the purpose of this
function is making an online connection through the network with a computer-based Programming Device (such as the CX-Programmer).
The I/O tables are used to identify the mounted Units and allocate I/O, so
always create the I/O tables before operating the PLC.
3. Data can be exchanged between the CPU Unit and CPU Bus Units even if
the I/O tables have not been created, but do not perform any online functions other than establishing an online connection with a computer-based
Programming Device (such as the CX-Programmer).
4. When a CS1W-ETN21 or CJ1W-ETN21 Ethernet Unit is being used, the
Ethernet Unit's IP address is automatically set to the default value of
192.168.250.xx, where xx is the FINS node address. After connecting the
ethernet cable between the CX-Programmer and PLC (without making a
direct serial connection and creating the I/O tables), manually set the computer's IP address (Example: 192.168.250.55) in the Windows Local Area
Connection Properties. An online connection can be established just by
setting the Ethernet Unit's IP address (192.168.250.xx) and node in the
CX-Programmer.
Note When connecting the computer directly to the Ethernet Unit, use an
Ethernet crossover cable.
1-6-5
Communications through a Maximum of 8 Network Levels
Previous CPU Units (Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units)
With the pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units, it was possible to communicate through 3
network levels max. (see note), including the local network. It was not possible
to communicate through 4 or more levels.
Note
1. This functionality is enabled only after setting routing tables with the CXNet in CX-Programmer version 4.0 or higher.
2. A Gateway to the network via serial communications was not counted as a
level.
FINS command
source
OR
Level count = 1
Level count = 2
Network 2
FINS command
destination
Serial
connection
Network 1
Network 3
This connection is not counted as a network level.
43
Section 1-6
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or Later
Summary
With the CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later CS/CJ-series CPU Units, it is possible to
communicate through 8 network levels max. (see note), including the local
network.
Note
1. FINS commands can only be sent across up to 8 network levels, however,
when the destination is a CPU Unit. FINS commands can be sent to other
destinations up to 3 network levels away.
2. CX-Net in CX-Programmer version 4.0 or higher must be used to set routing tables to enable communicating through 8 network levels.
3. A Gateway to the network via serial communications was not counted as a
level.
Compatible Networks
Only the following 2 kinds of networks can be used when communicating
through a maximum of 8 networks. The network levels can be combined in
any order.
• Controller Link
• Ethernet
Note Communications are restricted to a maximum of 8 networks through
DeviceNet and SYSMAC Link networks.
Configuration of Compatible Models
All of the CPU Units must be CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later CS/CJ-series CPU
Units. Also, the Gateway Counter Setting must be made with the CX-Net.
FINS command
source
Level
count = 1
OR
Level
count = 2
Network 2
Level
count = 3
Level
count = 4
Network 4
Level
count = 7
Network 7
FINS command
destination
Serial
connection
Network 1
This connection is not counted as a network level.
Internal Structure
Network 3
Network 8
The Gateway Counter (GCT) is in the FINS header of the FINS command/response frame. This counter value is decremented (−1) each time a
network level is crossed.
FINS Command Frame
FINS header
ICF
RSV
Command code
GCT
GCT (Gateway counter: Number of allowed bridge passages)
The standard setting is 02 hex when sending, but this value can be
user-set up to 07 hex.
The count is decremented by one each time a network level is passed.
44
Text
Section 1-6
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
Example:
At this point, the gateway counter = 6 hex
FINS command
source
At this point, the gateway counter = 4 hex
FINS command
FINS command
FINS command
FINS command
Network 1
Network 3
At this point, the gateway counter = 7 hex
Operating Procedure
FINS command
destination
Network 4
Network 2
At this point, the gateway counter = 5 hex
FINS command
Network 8
At this point, the gateway counter = 0 hex
Set the maximum number of network levels that can be crossed by setting the
Gateway Counter Setting to 2 or 7. The gateway counter setting can be
changed in the routing table settings of the CX-Net in the CX-Programmer
Ver.4.0 or higher.
Note
1. The gateway counter is the maximum number of levels that can be
crossed, i.e., the maximum number of junctions.
With earlier CPU Units (Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units), up to 3 network levels
were allowed, so the gateway counter was set to 2.
With the CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 and later CS/CJ-series CPU Units, up to 8
network levels are allowed, so the maximum gateway counter setting is 7.
2. With CS/CJ-series CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later, communications are possible for up to 8 network levels simply by setting the normal routing tables.
No other operations are required.
3. When using communications only for up to 3 network levels, the CS/CJ-series CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later can be used together with other CPU Units.
When using communications only for up to 4 to 8 network levels, use only
CS/CJ-series CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later. Other CPU Units cannot be used.
(Routing error (error codes 0501 to 0504 hex) may occurs in one of the
relaying PLCs, preventing a FINS response from being returned.
4. With CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit version 2.0 or later, the Gateway
Counter (GCT: Number of allowed bridges passed) for FINS command/
response frames is the value decremented from 07 hex (variable). (In earlier versions, the value was decremented from 02 hex.)
With unit version 3.0 or later, the default GCT for FINS command/response
frames is the value decremented from 02 hex. CX-Net can be select to
used 07 hex as the value from which to decrement.
5. Do not use the Gateway Counter (GCT: Number of allowed bridge passages) enclosed in the FINS header of the FINS command/response frame in
verification checks performed by user applications in host computers. The
GCT in the FINS header is used by the system, and a verification error may
occur if it is used to perform verification checks in user applications, particularly when using CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit version 2.0 or later.
45
Section 1-6
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
1-6-6
Connecting Online to PLCs via NS-series PTs
Summary
The CX-Programmer can be connected online to a PLC connected via a serial
line to an NS-series PT that is connected to the CX-Programmer via Ethernet
(see note 2). This enables uploading, downloading, and monitoring the ladder
program and other data.
CX-Programmer
(Example IP address: 192.168.0.1)
Connect online to PLC #1 to enable
programming, monitoring, and other operations.
NS-series PT
(Example IP address:
192.168.0.22)
PLC #1
CS/CJ-series
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0
Ethernet (See note 1.)
(Example network address: 1)
Note
1:N NT Link
(Example network address: 111)
1. The NS-series PT must be version 3.0 or higher and the CX-Programmer
must be version 3.1 or higher.
2. Connection is not possible through an NS-series PT connected serially to
the CX-Programmer.
Connection Method
In CX-Programmer, open the Change PLC Window and set the Network Type
to Ethernet. Click the Settings Button and set the IP address of the NS-series
PT on the Driver Tab Page. Also make the following settings on the Network
Tab Page.
• FINS Source Address
Set the local network address of the NS-series PT for the Network (example network address: 1).
• FINS Destination Address
Network: Set the address to 111 if the PLC is connected to serial port A
on the NS-series PT and to 112 if it is connected to serial port B.
Node: Always set to 1
• Frame Length: 1,000 (See note.)
• Response Timeout: 2
Note Do not set the frame length higher than 1,000. If any higher value is used, the
program transfer will fail and a memory error will occur.
46
Section 1-6
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
1-6-7
Setting First Slot Words
Previous CPU Units (Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units)
With CX-Programmer Ver. 3.0 or earlier, only the first addresses on Racks
could be set. The first address for a slot could not be set.
First addresses on Racks
Example:
Rack No.
CPU Rack
Rack 1
Rack 2
Rack 3
Rack 4
Rack 5
Rack 6
Rack 7
CX-Programmer
Ver. 3.0 or earlier
First address
100
0
200
CIO 0100
CPU Rack slot
0 1
2
Rack 1 slot
0 1
2 3 4
CIO 0000
0 1
2
CIO 0200
Rack 2 slot
CX-Programmer Ver. 3.1 or Higher
Summary
Starting with CX-Programmer Ver. 3.1, the first addresses for slots can be set
when editing the I/O tables for CS/CJ-series CPU Units (CS1-H, CJ1-H, and
CJ1M). The first address can be set for up to eight slots. (See note.)
Note This function is supported only for CS1-H/CJ1-H CPU Units manufactured on
June 1, 2002 or later (lot number 020601@@@@ or later). It is supported for all
CJ1M CPU Units regardless of lot number. It is not supported for CS1D CPU
Units.
47
Section 1-6
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
Operating Procedure
Select Option - Rack/Slot Start Addresses in the PLC IO Table - Traffic Controller Window. This command will enable setting both the first Rack
addresses and the first slot addresses.
Select Option - Rack/Slot Start. Addresses.
Double-click
This function can be used, for example to allocate fixed addresses to Input
Units and Output Units. (With CQM1H PLCs, input bits are from IR 000 to
IR 015 and output bits are from IR 100 to IR 115. First slot addresses can be
set when replacing CQM1H PLCs with CS/CJ-series PLCs to reduce conversion work.)
First slot addresses
Example:
Rack No.
CPU Rack
CPU Rack
Rack 1
Rack 1
Rack 2
Rack 2
CX-Programmer
Ver. 3.2 or higher
CPU Rack slot
Slot No.
Slot No. 00
Slot No. 02
Slot No. 00
Slot No. 02
Slot No. 00
Slot No. 01
0 1
2
CIO 0100
CIO 0000
Rack 1 slot
0 1
2 3 4
CIO 0102
CIO 0001
Rack 2 slot
0 1
2
CIO 0105
CIO 0005
100
0
102
1
105
5
Up to 8 settings
can be made.
Note The first address settings for Racks and slots can be uploaded/downloaded
from/to the CPU Unit.
48
Section 1-6
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or Later and CX-Programmer Ver. 4.0 or Higher
Summary
When using CX-Programmer Ver.4.0 or higher with CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later,
the first address can be set for up to 64 slots.
Note This function is supported only for CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Units
Ver. 2.0 or later. It is not supported for CS1D CPU Units.
First slot addresses
Example:
CX-Programmer
Ver. 4.0 or higher
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0
or later
0 1
CPU Rack slot
1-6-8
Rack No.
CPU Rack
CPU Rack
Rack 1
Rack 1
Rack 2
Rack 2
Slot No.
Slot No. 00
Slot No. 02
Slot No. 00
Slot No. 02
Slot No. 00
Slot No. 01
100
0
102
1
105
5
Rack 7
Slot No. 01
50
2
Up to 64 settings
can be made.
CIO 0100
CIO 0000
Rack 1 slot
0 1
2 3 4
CIO 0102
CIO 0001
Rack 2 slot
0 1
2
CIO 0105
CIO 0005
Rack 7 slot
0 1
2
CIO 0155
CIO 0050
Automatic Transfers at Power ON without a Parameter File
Previous CPU Units (Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units)
Previously with the CS/CJ-series CPU Units, both the program file for automatic transfer at power ON (AUTOEXEC.OBJ) and the parameter file for automatic transfer at power ON (AUTOEXEC.STD) had to be stored on the
Memory Card to enable automatic transfers to the CPU Unit at power ON.
Also, the parameter file for automatic transfer at power ON (AUTOEXEC.STD)
could not be created without the actual PLC (regardless of whether it was
made in online operations from the CX-Programmer or a Programming Console or by using the easy backup operation).
49
Section 1-6
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
Even if a program file (.OBJ) was created offline without the actual PLC and
then sent to a remote PLC as an email attachment, the program file could not
be transferred to the CPU Unit without a Programming Device.
Personal
computer
Local site (no Programming Device)
CPU Unit
Mail
Program cannot be transferred
(see note).
Program file
(AUTOEXEC.OBJ)
Note: Transfer is not possible because
there is no parameter file
(AUTOEXEC.STD).
Internet
Mail
Program file (.OBJ) sent
as mail attachment.
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or Later
Summary
With CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Ver. 2.0, the user program can be automatically
transferred to the CPU Unit at power ON without a parameter file (.STD) if the
name of the program file (.OBJ) is changed to REPLACE.OBJ on the CX-Programmer and the file is stored on a Memory Card. If data files are included
with the program file using this function, the following data file names are
used: REPLACE.IOM, REPLCDM.IOM, REPLCE@.IOM.
Note
1. If the Memory Card contains a REPLACE.OBJ file, any parameter file on
the Memory Card will not be transferred.
2. If the Memory Card contains both a REPLACE.OBJ file and a AUTOEXEC.OBJ file, neither will be transferred.
Personal
computer
Remote site (no Programming Device)
CPU Unit
Mail
Program can be transferred
(see note).
REPLACE.OBJ
Mail
Internet
Note: Transfer is possible even
without a parameter file
(AUTOEXEC.STD).
Program file created on CXProgrammer (see note), file name
changed to REPLACE.OJB, and
file sent as mail attachment.
Note With CX-Programmer Ver. 3.0 or higher, a program file (.OBJ) can be created
offline and saved on a computer storage media. Select Transfer - To File
from the PLC Menu. This enable creating a program file offline without a PLC
so that the name can be changed to enable sending the program file.
50
CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
1-6-9
Section 1-6
Operation Start/End Times
Previous CPU Units (Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units)
The time that operation started and the time operation ended were not stored
in the CPU Unit.
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or Later
The times that operation started and ended are automatically stored in the
Auxiliary Area.
• The time that operation started as a result of changing the operating
mode to RUN or MONITOR mode is stored in A515 to A517 of the Auxiliary Area. The year, month, day, hour, minutes, and seconds are stored.
• The time that operation stopped as a result of changing the operating
mode to PROGRAM mode or due to a fatal error is stored in A518 to
A520 of the Auxiliary Area. The year, month, day, hour, minutes, and seconds are stored.
This information simplifies managing PLC System operating times.
1-6-10 New Application Instructions
The following instructions have been added. Refer to the Programming Manual (W340) for details.
• Multiple Interlock Instructions:
MULTI-INTERLOCK DIFFERENTIATION HOLD (MILH(517)), MULTIINTERLOCK DIFFERENTIATION RELEASE (MILR(518)), and MULTIINTERLOCK CLEAR (MILC(519))
• TIME-PROPORTIONAL OUTPUT (TPO(685))
• GRAY CODE CONVERSION (GRY(474))
• Combination Instructions:
TEN KEY INPUT (TKY(211)), HEXADECIMAL KEY INPUT (HKY(212)),
DIGITAL SWITCH INPUT (DSW(213)), MATRIX INPUT (MTR(210)), and
7-SEGMENT DISPLAY OUTPUT (7SEG(214))
• Time Comparison Instructions: =DT, <>DT, <DT, <=DT, >DT, >=DT
• Explicit Message Instructions:
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND (EXPLT(720)), EXPLICIT GET ATTRIBUTE
(EGATR(721)), EXPLICIT SET ATTRIBUTE (ESATR(722)), EXPLICIT
WORD READ (ECHRD(723)), and EXPLICIT WORD WRITE
(ECHWR(724))
• EXPANDED BLOCK COMPARE (BCMP2(502)) (This instruction, previously supported by only the CJ1M PLCs, is now supported by the CS1-H
and CJ1-H.)
• INTELLIGENT I/O READ (IORD(222)) and INTELLIGENT I/O WRITE
(IOWR(223)) (These instructions could previously be used only for Special I/O Units, but they can now be used to read and write data for CPU
Bus Units.)
51
Section 1-7
CS1 and CS1-H CPU Unit Comparison
1-7
CS1 and CS1-H CPU Unit Comparison
1-7-1
CS1 and CS1-H CPU Unit Comparison
Item
Instruction
executions
times
Basic instructions
Special instructions
EM Area
Overseeing processing time
Execution
timing
CPU execution processing
modes
CPU Bus Unit
special
refreshing
Data links
DeviceNet
remote I/O
Protocol
macro
send/receive
data
Refreshing of CIO and DM
Areas words allocated to CPU
Bus Unit
52
CS1-H CPU Unit
(CS1H-CPU6@H, CS1G-CPU4@H)
LD: 0.02 µs
OUT: 0.02 µs
Example
XFER: 300 µs (for 1,000 words)
BSET: 200 µs (for 1,000 words)
BCD arithmetic: 8.2 µs min.
Binary arithmetic: 0.18 µs min.
Floating-point math: 8 µs min.
SBS/RET: 2.1 µs
1 bank (32 Kwords) min. for all
models
Normal mode: 0.3 ms
Parallel mode: 0.2 ms
Any of the following 4 modes:
Normal (instructions and peripheral servicing perform consecutively)
Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode
(instruction execution interrupted to
service peripherals at a specific
cycle and time; consecutive
refreshing also performed)
Parallel Processing Mode with Synchronous Memory Access (instruction executed and peripheral
services in parallel while synchronizing access to I/O memory)
Parallel Processing Mode with
Asynchronous Memory Access
(instruction executed and peripheral services in parallel without synchronizing access to I/O memory)
CS1 CPU Unit
(CS1H-CPU6@-E, CS1G-CPU4@-E)
0.04 µs
0.17 µs
633 µs (for 1,000 words)
278 µs (for 1,000 words)
14 µs min.
0.25 µs min.
10 µs min.
37 µs
Not supported by all models
0.5 ms
Either of following 2 modes:
Normal (instructions and peripheral
servicing perform consecutively)
Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode
(instruction execution interrupted to
service peripherals at a specific
cycle and time; consecutive refreshing also performed) (Add for CPU
Units with lot number No.
001201@@@@ or later.)
During I/O refresh period or via
During I/O refresh period
special CPU BUS UNIT I/O
REFRESH instruction (DLNK(226))
CS1 and CS1-H CPU Unit Comparison
Item
Tasks
CS1-H CPU Unit
CS1 CPU Unit
(CS1H-CPU6@H, CS1G-CPU4@H) (CS1H-CPU6@-E, CS1G-CPU4@-E)
Cyclic execution of interrupt
tasks via TKON instruction
(called “extra cyclic tasks”)
Independent/shared specifications for index and data
registers
Initialization when tasks are
started
Starting subroutines from
multiple tasks
Interrupt task
execution timing during
instruction execution
Data backup
Section 1-7
For instructions other
than the following ones
For BIT
COUNTER
(BCNT) or
BLOCK
TRANSFER
(XFER)
instructions
Backup to Memory Cards
(simple backup function)
Supported
Not supported
(Up to 255 extra cyclic tasks,
(No extra cyclic tasks; 32 cyclic tasks
increasing the total number of
max.)
cyclic tasks to 288 max.)
Supported
Not supported
The time to switch between tasks
(only independent registers for each
can be reduces if shared registers task)
are used.
Supported
Only Task Flag for first execution
Task Startup Flags supported.
Global subroutines can be defined Not supported
that can be called from more than
one task.
Any instruction that is being executed is interrupted when interrupt task
conditions are met to start the interrupt task. If the cyclic task (including
extra cyclic tasks) access the same data area words as the instruction that
was interrupted, data may not be concurrent. To ensure data concurrency,
the DI and EI instructions must be used to disable and enable interrupts
during a specific part of the program.
Interrupt tasks are started only after
execution of the instruction has
been completed, ensuring data
concurrency even when the same
data area words are accessed from
the instruction and the interrupt
task.
In addition to the data listed at the Only the user program parameters,
and I/O memory in the CPU Unit
right, data from Units and Boards
mounted to the CPU Rack or
Expansion Racks can also be
backed up to the Memory Card (via
pushbutton on front panel). This is
very effective when replacing Units.
Backup data includes scan lists for
DeviceNet Units, protocol macros
for Serial Communications
Units/Boards, etc.
Automatic user program and
parameter area backup to
flash memory
I/O tables
Supported (enabling battery-free
Not supported
operation without a Memory Card)
The user program and parameter
area data are automatically backed
up the flash memory whenever they
are transferred to the CPU Unit
from the CX-Programmer, file memory, etc.
Detailed information on I/O
Detailed I/O table error information Not supported
table creation errors
is stored in A261 whenever the I/O
tables cannot be created for any
reason.
Not supported
It’s possible to confirm if the first
Displaying presence of first
rack word setting on Program- rack word has been specified for
the system on the Programming
ming Console
Console display.
The first rack word is specified from
the CX-Programmer, making it previously impossible to confirm the
setting from the Programming Console.
53
Section 1-7
CS1 and CS1-H CPU Unit Comparison
Item
Sequence
instructions
Differentiated LD NOT, AND
NOT, and OR NOT instructions
OUTB, SETB, and RSTB
instructions to manipulate
individual bits in DM and EM
Area words
PV refresh method for TIM,
Timer/
TIMH, TMHH, TTIM, TIML,
counter
MTIM, CNT, CNTR, CNR,
instructions
TIMW, TMHW, and CNTW
instructions
Special math 32-bit signed data line coordiinstructions
nates and X axis starting
point specification for APR
instruction
FloatingSingle-precision calculations
point deciand conversions
mal instrucConversions between singletions
precision floating point and
ASCII
CS1-H CPU Unit
CS1 CPU Unit
(CS1H-CPU6@H, CS1G-CPU4@H) (CS1H-CPU6@-E, CS1G-CPU4@-E)
Supported
Supported
Not supported (Can be programmed
by combining differentiated LD, AND,
and OR instructions with the NOT
instruction.)
Not supported
BCD only
Either BCD or binary can be
selected (with CX-Programmer Ver.
3.0 or higher versions)
Supported
Not supported
Supported (enabling standard devi- Not supported
ation calculations)
Not supported
Supported
Floating point can be converted to
ASCII for display on PTs
ASCII text strings from measurement devices can be converted to
floating-point decimal for use in calculations.
Double-precision calculations Supported (enabling high-preciNot supported
and conversions
sion positioning)
Text string,
Text string and table data protable data,
cessing instruction execution
and data shift
instructions
Data processing can be performed
normally or in the background
(specified for each instruction)
(Using time slices to process
instruction over several cycles
reduces the effect of these instructions on the cycle time.)
Stack insertions/deleSupported
tions/replacements and stack Effective for tracking workpieces on
counts with table processing conveyor lines.
instructions
Data control PID with autotuning
Supported (eliminating the need to
instructions
turn PID constants)
Subroutine
Global subroutines
Supported (GSBS, GSBN, and
instructions
GRET instructions)
Enables easier structuring of subroutines.
Supported
Failure diag- Error log storage for FAL
FAL can be executed without placnosis instrucing an entry in the error log. (Only
tions
system FAL errors will be placed in
the error log.)
Error simulation with
Supported
FAL/FALS
Fatal and nonfatal errors can be
simulated in the system to aid in
debugging.
Data compar- AREA RANGE COMPARE
Supported
ison instruc- (ZCP) and DOUBLE RANGE
tions
COMPARE (ZCPL)
54
Normal processing only
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Section 1-7
CS1 and CS1-H CPU Unit Comparison
Item
Program and real I/O memory
Index regisaddress compatibility with
ter real I/O
address con- CVM1/CV-series PLCs
version for
CVM1/CV
Condition
Flag saving
and loading
Compatibility with CVM1/CVseries PLCs
Startup mode for PLC Setup defaults when
no Programming Console is connected
CPU Unit startup
Operation
when
Unit/Inner
Board
doesn’t complete startup
process
Disabling power interruptions in program sections
Condition Flag operation
CS1-H CPU Unit
CS1 CPU Unit
(CS1H-CPU6@H, CS1G-CPU4@H) (CS1H-CPU6@-E, CS1G-CPU4@-E)
Not supported
CVM1/CV-series real I/O memory
addresses can be converted to CSseries addresses and placed in
index registers or CS-series real
I/O memory addresses in index
registers can be converted to
CVM1/CV-series addresses.
Condition Flag status can be saved Not supported
or loading using the SAVE CONDITION FLAGS (CCS) and LOAD
CONDITION FLAGS (CCL) instructions, enabling applications where
Condition Flag status must be
passed between different program
locations, tasks, or cycles.
RUN mode
PROGRAM mode
CPU Unit standby (fixed)
Starting or not starting (standby)
the CPU Unit in MONITOR or RUN
mode even if a Unit or an Inner
Board has not completed startup
processing can be specified in the
PLC Setup.
Supported
Instructions between DI and EI are
executed without performing power
OFF processing even if a power
interruption has been detected and
confirmed.
The statuses of the Equals, Negative, and Error Flags are maintained for execution of the following
instructions.
TIM, TIMH, TMHH, CNT, IL, ILC,
JMP0, JME0, XCHG, XCGL,
MOVR, symbol comparison instructions, CMP, CMPL, CPS, CPSL,
TST, TSTN, STC, and CLC
Not supported
The Equals, Negative, and Error
Flags are turned OFF after executing
the following instructions.
TIM, TIMH, TMHH, CNT, IL, ILC,
JMP0, JME0, XCHG, XCGL, MOVR,
symbol comparison instructions,
CMP, CMPL, CPS, CPSL, TST,
TSTN, STC, and CLC
55
CS1 and CS1-H CPU Unit Comparison
1-7-2
Section 1-7
New Functions for Version-1 CS1 CPU Units
The following functions have been added or improved in the version-1 CS1
CPU Units (CS1G/H-CPU@@-EV1; previous version: CS1G/H-CPU@@-E).
Item
Function
Support for CSV and The FREAD/FWRIT instructions can
TXT formats in data be used to read and write hexadecimal
files
I/O memory data in CSV or TXT format. (Previously, only binary format
was supported.)
Application
Production results from I/O memory in
the CPU Unit can be written to a Memory Card in CSV/TXT format, the Memory Card can be used to read the data
to a computer via a Memory Card
Adapter, and the data can then be
used in spreadsheet software on the
computer.
Spreadsheet data from a computer can
also be transferred in CSV/TXT format
to the CPU Unit’s I/O memory via
Memory Cards.
File operations for
The CPU Unit can send commands to Files can be formatted, deleted, copied, or renamed and directories can be
instructions (format- itself using the CMND instruction to
ting, deleting, etc.)
perform file operations. (The CPU Unit created on Memory Cards using ladder
program instructions during operation.
could previous not send FINS commands to itself.)
Program replaceThe entire user program can be loaded Switching operations while the PLC is
ments during opera- from a Memory Card to the CPU Unit running.
tion
during operation to replace the proReplacing the program without using a
gram. (Previously only
Programming Device.
AUTOEXEC.OBJ could be used at
startup to replace the program.)
DM and EM files for DM and EM files can be automatically Storing settings in the DM and EM
Areas at startup.
automatic transfer at loaded to the CPU Unit at startup.
(Previously only the data file
startup
Loading data automatically at startup
AUTOEXEC.IOM could be used to load instead of using FREAD.
the Special I/O Unit and Inner Board
areas starting at D20000 to the DM
Area. For other parts of the DM Area,
the FREAD instruction had to be used,
i.e., automatic transfer at startup was
not possible.)
All data could be backed up easily and
Simple backup func- The user program, parameter data,
quickly without a Programming Device
tion
and I/O memory data can be backed
up to a Memory Card by pressing the whenever a problem occurs.
memory card power button if simple
backup was specified on the DIP
switch. (Previously a write operation
from a Programming Device was
required to back up all of this data.)
High-speed NT Links High-speed 1:N NT Links are supBetter realtime performance for setting
ported, enabling faster communicaand monitoring operations on PTs.
tions with PTs (Programmable
Terminals) than previously possible.
Only the following PTs support highspeed NT Links: NT31/NT631-V2 and
the NS-series PT.
High-speed online
editing
56
Reference
Section 5 File
Memory Functions in the
CS/CJ Series
Programming
Manual
NT Link System
(1:N Mode)
under 2-5-2 Systems in this
manual and 6-33 NT Link (1:N
Mode) in CS/CJ
Series Programming Manual
Less time is required to change part of The effects on the system are reduced 7-2-3 Online
when changing the program for main- Editing in the
the program when performing online
CS/CJ Series
editing in MONITOR mode. (Previously tenance during operation.
Programming
each cycle was increased by up to
Manual
90 ms, but the maximum increase for
version-1 CPU Units is 12 ms.)
Section 1-8
CS-series Function Tables
1-8
CS-series Function Tables
The following tables list functions for the CS-series CPU Units (including both
the CS1 CPU Units and the CS1-H CPU Units).
1-8-1
Functions Arranged by Purpose
Studying Basic
Operations and
the System
Purpose
Studying the system configuration
Function
Studying I/O allocations
Finding the installation dimensions
Finding the installation method
3-1-2 Components
7-1 PLC Setup
Setting the DIP switch
Setting the PLC Setup
Using special flags in the Auxiliary
Area
Studying the cycle time
Troubleshooting
Improving
Program
Structure
Simplifying the
Program
Standardizing programs as modules.
Developing a program with several
programmers working in parallel.
Making the program easier to understand.
Creating step programs.
Appendix B Auxiliary Area
10-4-2 Cycle Time
Overview
11-2-4 Error Processing Flowchart
Program with tasks to divide the pro- Programming
gram, use function blocks (FBs),
Manual (W394)
specify symbols, and define local
and global symbols.
Use ST (Structured Text) language.
Use the step instructions.
Using BASIC-like mnemonic instructions to program processes that are
difficult to enter in the ladder diagram format (such as conditional
branches and loops).
Use the block programming instructions.
Use ST (Structured Text) language.
Creating looped program sections.
Use FOR(512) and NEXT(513) or
JMP(004) and JME(005).
Indirectly addressing DM words.
All words in the DM and EM Areas
can be indirectly addressed.
Use Index Registers as pointers to
indirectly address data area
addresses.
The Index Registers are very useful
in combination with loops, increment
instructions, and table data processing instructions. The auto-increment,
auto-decrement, and offset functions are also supported.
Simplifying the program by switching
to PLC memory address specification.
Consolidating instruction blocks with
the same pattern but different
addresses into a single instruction
block.
Reference
SECTION 2 Specifications and System Configuration
SECTION 8 I/O
Allocations
5-2-4 Mounting
Dimensions
5-2 Installation
Use function blocks (FBs).
Use MCRO(099).
Instructions Reference Manual
(W340)
Instructions Reference Manual
(W340)
Programming
Manual (W394)
CX-Programmer
Operation Manual Function
Blocks (W438)
Instructions Reference Manual
(W340)
57
Section 1-8
CS-series Function Tables
Purpose
Managing the
Cycle Time
Reducing the cycle time.
Setting a fixed (minimum) cycle time.
• Variations in I/O response times
can be eliminated by suppressing
processing variations.
Setting a maximum cycle time.
(Generating an error for a cycle time
exceeding the maximum.)
Reducing the I/O response time for
particular I/O points.
Receiving input pulses shorter than
the cycle time.
Function
Set a maximum cycle time (watch
cycle time) in the PLC Setup. If the
cycle time exceeds this value, the
Cycle Time Too Long Flag (A40108)
will be turned ON and PLC operation
will be stopped.
Use an I/O interrupt task, immediate
refreshing, or IORF(097).
Use a quick-response input on a
Unit with High-speed Inputs or a
High-density I/O Unit (a Special I/O
Unit).
Finding the I/O refresh times for
Units
Studying the I/O response times
Finding the increase in cycle time
caused by online editing
Using Interrupt
Tasks
Monitoring operating status at regular intervals
• Monitoring operating status at regular intervals.
Performing interrupt processing
when an input goes ON.
• Executing processing immediately
with an input.
Issuing an interrupt to the CPU
when data is received through serial
communications.
Executing an emergency interrupt
program when the power supply
fails.
Studying the interrupt response time
Finding the priority of interrupt tasks
58
Reference
• Use tasks to put parts of the pro- Programming
Manual (W394)
gram that don’t need to be executed into “standby” status.
• Use JMP(004) and JME(005) to
jump parts of the task that don’t
need to be executed.
• Convert parts of the task to subroutines if they are executed only
under particular conditions.
• Disable a Unit’s Special I/O Unit
refreshing in the PLC Setup if it
isn’t necessary to exchange data
with that Special I/O Unit every
cycle.
• Set sharing index and data registers by all tasks if index and data
registers are not being used.
Set a minimum cycle time in the PLC
Setup.
Use a scheduled interrupt task.
7-1 PLC Setup
Programming
Manual (W394)
3-6-3 Units with
High-speed Inputs
and 3-7 C200H
High-density I/O
Units (Special I/O
Units)
10-4-2 Cycle Time
Overview
10-4-6 I/O
Response Time
10-4-5 Online
Editing Cycle
Time Extension
Programming
Manual (W394)
Use an I/O interrupt task.
Use a Serial Communications Board
and external interrupt task or an
ASCII Unit.
Use a power OFF interrupt task.
Enable the power OFF interrupt task
in the PLC Setup.
10-4-7 Interrupt
Response Times
Programming
Manual (W394)
Section 1-8
CS-series Function Tables
Purpose
Data Processing
Operating a FIFO or LIFO stack.
Performing basic operations on
tables made up of 1-word records.
System
Configuration
Connecting
Programming
Devices
Performing complex operations on
tables made up of 1-word records.
Performing operations on tables
made up of records longer than 1
word.
(For example, the temperature, pressure, and other manufacturing settings for different models of a
product could be stored in separate
records.)
Monitoring several different kinds of
devices through the RS-232C port.
Changing protocol during operation
(from a modem connection to host
link, for example).
Connecting a Programming Console.
Connecting a Programming Device
(e.g., the CX-Programmer).
Connecting a host computer.
Connecting a PT.
Connecting a standard serial device
to the CPU Unit (no-protocol mode).
Controlling Out- Turning OFF all outputs on basic
puts
Output Units and High-density Output Units (a type of Special I/O Unit).
Maintaining the status of all outputs
on Output Units when PLC operation
stops (hot start).
Function
Use the stack instructions
(FIFO(633) and LIFO(634)).
Use range instructions such as
MAX(182), MIN(183), and
SRCH(181).
Use Index Registers as pointers in
special instructions.
Use Index Registers and the recordtable instructions (DIM, GETR, etc.)
Multiple serial ports can be installed
with Serial Communications Units
(protocol macro) and ASCII Units.
Use STUP(237), the CHANGE
SERIAL PORT SETUP instruction.
Connect to the peripheral port with
pin 4 of the CPU Unit’s DIP switch
OFF.
Connect to the peripheral port with
pin 4 of the CPU Unit’s DIP switch
OFF or with pin 4 ON and the network type of the CX-Programmer set
to the peripheral bus.
Connect to the RS-232C port with
pin 5 of the CPU Unit’s DIP switch
ON or with pin 5 OFF and the network type of the CX-Programmer set
to the peripheral bus.
Connect to the RS-232C port or
peripheral port. (Set the communications mode to “host link” in the
PLC Setup.)
Connect to the RS-232C port or
peripheral port. (Set the communications mode to “NT Link” in the
PLC Setup.)
Set the PT communications settings
for a 1:N NT Link.
Connect to the RS-232C port.
(Set the communications mode to
“no-protocol” in the PLC Setup.)
Turn ON the Output OFF Bit
(A50015).
Reference
Instructions Reference Manual
(W340)
Programming
Manual (W394)
2-3 Basic System
Configuration
Instructions Reference Manual
(W340)
3-3-2 Programming Consoles
3-3-3 CX-Programmer
2-5 Expanded
System Configuration
Programming
Manual (W394)
Turn ON the IOM Hold BIt (A50012).
59
Section 1-8
CS-series Function Tables
Purpose
Controlling
I/O Memory
File Memory
Text string
processing
Maintaining the previous contents of
all I/O Memory at the start of PLC
operation (hot start).
Maintaining the previous contents of
all I/O Memory when the PLC is
turned on.
Automatically transferring the program, I/O Memory, and PLC Setup
from the Memory Card when the
PLC is turned on.
• Easily replacing the program
onsite.
• Operating without a battery.
Creating a library of programs for different program arrangements.
Creating a library of parameter settings for various PLC Racks and
models.
Creating a library of data files with
settings for various PLC Racks, and
CPU Bus Units.
Storing I/O Comment data within the
Memory Card.
Storing operating data (trend and
quality data) within the CPU Unit
during program execution.
Replacing the program without
stopping operation.
Reading and writing I/O memory
data with a spreadsheet.
Creating data that can be read with
a text editor.
Performing string processing at the
PLC which was performed at the
host computer previously and reducing the program load at the host
computer (operations such as read,
insert, search, replace, and
exchange).
Performing string processing operations such as rearranging text
strings.
Receiving data from external
devices (such as bar code readers)
through serial communications, storing the data in DM, and reading just
the required string when it is
needed.
60
Function
Reference
Turn ON the IOM Hold BIt (A50012). Programming
Manual (W394)
Turn ON the IOM Hold BIt (A50012)
and set the PLC Setup to maintain
the status of the IOM Hold Bit at
start-up.
(IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup)
Enable the “automatic transfer at
Programming
start-up” function by turning ON pin Manual (W394)
2 of the CPU Unit’s DIP switch and
create an AUTOEXEC file.
Memory Card functions (Program
Files)
Memory Card functions (Parameter
Files)
Memory Card functions (Data Files)
Memory Card functions
(Symbol Table Files)
EM File Memory Functions and the
FREAD(700)/FWRIT(701) instructions
Memory Card functions (Program
Replacement during PLC Operation)
Read/write data files using instructions in CSV or text format.
Use the WRITE TEXT FILE instruction (TWRIT(704)).
Instructions Refer• Easily replacing the program
onsite
ence Manual
(W340)
• Operating without a battery
Combine the Host Link function with
the text string processing instructions.
Replacing the program without stopping operation.
Use the string comparison instructions and index registers.
Use the WRITE TEXT FILE instruction (TWRIT(704)).
Combine the protocol macro function with the text string processing
instructions.
Section 1-8
CS-series Function Tables
Purpose
Maintenance
Changing the program while it is
and Debugging being executed.
Sampling I/O Memory data.
• Periodic sampling
• Sampling once each cycle
• Sampling at specified times
Confirming there are no errors in
instruction execution.
Recording the time that power was
turned on, the last time that power
was interrupted, the number of
power interruptions, and the total
PLC on time.
Replacing the program without stopping operation.
Reading the time/date when the
user program was changed.
Reading the time/date when the
parameter area was changed.
Programming/monitoring the PLC
remotely.
• Programming or monitoring a PLC
on the network through Host Link.
• Programming or monitoring a PLC
through modems.
Programming/monitoring PLCs in
other networks
Error Processing and Troubleshooting
Other
Functions
Generating a non-fatal or fatal error
for user-defined conditions.
• Non-fatal errors (Operation continues.)
• Fatal errors (PLC operation stops.)
• Not recording user-defined alarms
and errors in the error log.
Analyzing time and logic in execution of an instruction block.
Recording the time/date of errors
and error details.
Reading recorded error details.
Allocating words in the I/O Area by
specifying the first word allocated to
Rack.
Function
Use the online editing function from
a Programming Device.
(Several instruction blocks can be
changed with CX-Programmer.)
Reference
Programming
Manual (W394)
Data trace at regular intervals
Data trace at the end of each cycle
Data trace each time that
TRSM(045) is executed
Set the PLC Setup to specify the
desired operating mode at start-up.
(Startup Mode)
Read the Auxiliary Area words
containing power supply information.
Startup Time: A510 and A511
Power Interruption Time: A512 and
A513
Number of Power Interruptions:
A514
Set the PLC Setup so that instruction errors are treated as fatal errors.
(Instruction Error Operation)
Host Link → Network Gateway
function
2-5 Expanded
System Configuration
Host Link through modems
Communicate with PLCs up to 2
network levels away through
Controller Link or Ethernet.
Programming
Manual (W394)
FAILURE ALARM: FAL(006)
SEVERE FAILURE ALARM:
FALS(007)
Set the PLC Setup so that userdefined FAL errors are not recorded
in the error log.
FAILURE POINT DETECTION:
FPD(269)
Use the error log function. Up to 20
error records can be stored.
Set the first word allocated to Rack
by registering the I/O table from the
CX-Programmer. (Words must be
allocated to Racks in the order that
the Racks are connected.)
Programming
Manual (W394)
61
Section 1-8
CS-series Function Tables
Purpose
Function
Reducing input chattering and the
effects of noise.
Allocating words in the I/O Area
freely by specifying the word allocated to a slot.
1-8-2
Reference
Specify the input response times for
Basic I/O Units in the PLC Setup.
(Basic I/O Unit Input Response
Time)
Set the first word allocated to a slot 8-4 Allocating
by registering the I/O tables from the First Words to
CX-Programmer.
Slots
Communications Functions (Serial/Network)
Monitoring from
the Host Computer
Purpose
RS-232C or RS-422/485
Host Link communications from the
PLC
Network communications through
RS-232C or RS-422/485
Network
Control system
Information system
Protocol: Required Equipment
Host Link:
Port in the CPU Unit, Serial Communications Board, or Serial Communications Unit
Enclose a FINS command with a
Host Link header and terminator and
issue it from the PLC as a network
communications instruction.
Controller Link and Ethernet communications are possible through the
Host Link. (Enclose a FINS command
with a Host Link header and terminator and issue it from the PLC as a network communications instruction.)
Controller Link:
Controller Link Unit or Controller Link
Board
Ethernet: Ethernet Unit
Reference
2-5-2 Systems
2-5-3 Communications
Network System
Communicating
with a PT
Direct access
Data Link
between PLCs
High capacity or free word allocation
Message
communications
between PLCs
Normal or high capacity
Protocol written in BASIC: ASCII Unit 2-5-2 Systems
Protocol Macro:
Serial Communications Board or
Serial Communications Unit
No protocol:
CPU Unit’s RS-232C port, ASCII Unit,
or Protocol Macro
NT Link:
Port in the CPU Unit, Serial Communications Board, or Serial Communications Unit
Controller Link: Controller Link Unit
2-5-3 Communications
PLC Link: PLC Link Unit
Network System
Controller Link:
Controller Link Unit or Controller Link
Board
Controller Link: Controller Link Unit
Information system
Ethernet: Ethernet Unit
Connecting to a
Standard Serial
Device
Creating a custom, user-defined protocol
Creating a simple protocol
High-speed data exchange
No protocol
Low capacity and fixed word allocation
Data Link between PLC and computer
62
Section 1-8
CS-series Function Tables
Purpose
Message
communications
between PLC
and computer
Remote I/O
between PLC
and Slaves
Control system
Information system
High-density I/O
Free word allocation
Protocol: Required Equipment
Controller Link:
Controller Link Unit or Controller Link
Board
Ethernet: Ethernet Unit
Reference
2-5-3 Communications
Network System
DeviceNet:
DeviceNet Master Unit and required
Slave Units
Multi-vendor capability
Analog I/O capability
Multi-level architecture
High-speed Remote I/O
Remote I/O Slave Rack connection
CompoBus/S:
CompoBus/S Master Unit and
required Slave Units
SYSMAC BUS Wired Remote I/O:
SYSMAC BUS Master Unit and
required Slave Units
2-3 Basic
System Configuration
63
Section 1-9
CS1-H Functions Arranged by Purpose
1-9
Increasing
speed
CS1-H Functions Arranged by Purpose
Purpose
Reducing the cycle time and improving
communications responsiveness.
• Fast large-scale data exchange with the
host is needed even though the PLC
program is very large.
• Consistently timed data exchange with
SCADA software is needed.
• Fast message communications and control
are required between distributed PLCs.
• It is necessary to minimize the effects on
the cycle time of future system expansion
or increases in communications.
When using parallel processing mode, it is
necessary to maintain concurrency
between I/O memory data accessed for
instruction execution and from communications (for data larger than one word).
When using parallel processing mode, it is
not necessary to maintain concurrency
between I/O memory data accessed for
instruction execution and from communications (for data larger than one word).
Giving higher priority to communications
response than the cycle time. (For example,
to give priority to the read/write response of
CPU Unit data from SCADA software for
process control).
Function
Use the Parallel Processing Mode with Synchronous Memory
Access or Parallel Processing Mode with Asynchronous Memory Access.
Using parallel processing enables the following savings.
For example, if the program consists of basic instructions with a
cycle time of approximately 10 ms and one Ethernet Unit is
being used, the cycle time will be reduced to approximately
90% of the time for the normal mode. and the peripheral servicing time will be reduced to approximately 40% of the time for
the normal mode.
Use the Parallel Processing Mode with Synchronous Memory
Access.
Use the Parallel Processing Mode with Asynchronous Memory
Access.
The response of peripheral servicing can be adjusted by using
the following modes (listed in order from highest response):
Parallel Processing Mode with Asynchronous Memory Access,
Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode (with a long instruction execution cycle), Parallel Processing Mode with Synchronous
Memory Access, Normal Mode
Minimizing cycle time fluctuations and main- Table data processing and text string processing, which often
taining consistent I/O response even when
require time, can be set in the PLC Setup so that they are proextensive table data and text string data is
cessed in the background. The default is for no background
being processed
execution. (For background execution, time slicing is used to
separate processing over several cycles.)
If background execution is used, the effect on the cycle time
can be limited to 4% or less (PLC Setup default setting).
Improving data link response with a long
The CPU BUS UNIT I/O REFRESH instruction (DLNK(226))
cycle time (Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK) can be used at one or more locations in the ladder program.
This enables refreshing data links for specified Controller Link
or SYSMAC LINK Units, whenever necessary, as well as during
the I/O refresh period. (The actual data that is refreshed
depends on the communications cycle time.)
Improving DeviceNet remote I/O response
The CPU BUS UNIT I/O REFRESH instruction (DLNK(226))
can be used in the ladder program. This enables refreshing
remote I/O for DeviceNet Units, whenever necessary, as well
as during the I/O refresh period. (The actual data that is
refreshed depends on the communications cycle time.)
Improving the response of protocol macro
The CPU BUS UNIT I/O REFRESH instruction (DLNK(226))
data transfers for Serial Communications
can be used at one or more locations in the ladder program.
Units
This enables refreshing data transferred for protocol macros
executed by Serial Communications Units, whenever necessary, as well as during the I/O refresh period. (The actual data
that is refreshed depends on the communications cycle time.)
Immediately refreshing status data and other The CPU BUS UNIT I/O REFRESH instruction (DLNK(226))
words allocated to CPU Bus Units in the CIO can be used at one or more locations in the ladder program.
This enables refreshing words allocated to CPU Bus Units in
Area whenever necessary (including Etherthe CIO Area (25 words) whenever necessary, in the same way
net Units, Serial Communications Units,
that the IORF instruction is used for other Units.
Controller Link Units, etc.)
64
Section 1-9
CS1-H Functions Arranged by Purpose
Purpose
Increas- Using more tasks
ing
structure Reducing the cycle time even with structured
programs using many tasks
Using the same index or data registers in different tasks without saving and loading register contents
Initializing processing when a task is started
Using standard processing shared by more
than one task
Special
applications
Function
Define interrupt tasks as cyclic tasks (called “extra cyclic
tasks”).
Use shared index and data registers.
Use the Task Start Flags.
Use a global subroutine (GSBN to GRET) in interrupt task
number 0.
User function blocks (FBs).
Standardization and program structure based Increase speed using subroutine instructions (SBS, SBN, and
on subroutines
RET) and global subroutine instructions (GSBS, GSBN, and
GRET)
Protecting programs so that other people
Read protection for entire program
cannot read them
Task read protection
Function block protection
Displaying floating-point decimal data on a
Use the FLOATING- POINT TO ASCII instruction (FSTR(448)).
PT
Use function blocks (FBs).
Using text string data from measurement
Use the ASCII TO FLOATING-POINT instruction (FVAL(449)).
devices in calculations
Use function blocks (FBs).
Performing high-precision positioning, e.g.,
Use the Double-precision Floating-point instructions.
for XY tables
Managing information on workpieces flowing Use the stack instructions.
on a conveyer in realtime in table form, e.g., STACK DATA READ, STACK DATA OVERWRITE, STACK DATA
when workpieces are added or removed from INSERT, and STACK DATA DELETE (Operate on a specified
the conveyor during processing
element in the stack.)
STACK SIZE READ (Counts the number of elements in the
stack.)
Performing high-precision linear approxima- Use the ARITHMETIC PROCESS instruction (unsigned 16-bit
tions, e.g., converting a level meter reading in binary/BCD data, signed 16/32-bit binary data, or single-precimm to a capacity value in liters according to sion floating-point data can be used for line data).
the shape of a tank
Use the PID CONTROL WITH AUTO TUNING instruction.
Autotuning PID constants (particularly to
automatically tune PID constants and start
the system faster when using multiloop PID)
Saving and loading execution results (e.g.,
Use the SAVE CONDITION FLAGS (CCS) and LOAD CONDIfrom comparison instructions) at different
TION FLAGS (CCL) instructions to save the current status of
locations in a task or in different tasks
the Condition Flags or load the previous status.
Using a CVM1/CV-series program containing Use the CONVERT ADDRESS FROM CV (FRMCV) instrucreal I/O memory addresses in a CS-series
tion.
CPU Unit
Use the CONVERT ADDRESS TO CV (TOCV) instruction.
Using I/O memory tables containing
CVM1/CV-series real I/O memory addresses
(e.g., to return the data to a CVM1/CV-series
CPU Unit after processing by the CS-series
CPU Unit).
Disabling power interruptions during specific Create program sections for which power interrupts have been
regions of the program
disabled with the DI and EI instructions (set A530 to A5A5 hex).
65
Section 1-10
Comparison of CS-series PLCs and C200HX/HG/HE Operation
Purpose
Debugging and
maintenance
Function
Simulating errors in the CPU Unit when
debugging the system, e.g., to check error
messages displayed on a PT
Backing up CPU Unit data and internal from
other Units, such as DeviceNet Units and
Serial Communications Units/Boards.
Finding errors occurring when creating I/O
tables
Using battery-free operation (ROM operation)
without a Memory Card
Starting CPU Unit operation without waiting
for Units/Boards with comparatively long
power-ON startup times to complete startup
processing.
Use FAL/FALS to simulate fatal and nonfatal system errors.
Use the simple backup operation, which includes data from
specific Units/Boards.
Reference the I/O Table Error Flags in A261.
Use the automatic program/parameter area backup function to
flash memory in the CPU Unit.
Use the startup condition settings (allowing the CPU Unit to
startup immediately in RUN or MONITOR mode even when
startup processing has not been completed for other
Units/Boards).
1-10 Comparison of CS-series PLCs and C200HX/HG/HE
Operation
Operation of the CS-series PLCs differs from that of the C200HX/HG/HE
PLCs in several basic points, which are outlined in the following table. Refer to
Appendix A PLC Comparison in the CS/CJ Series Programming Manual
(W394) for differences between the CJ-series, CS-series, C200HX/HG/HE,
CQM1H, and CV-series PLCs.
Program
Structure
I/O allocation
66
Item
Single program vs.
multiple tasks
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs
The program is executed as a single
unit each cycle.
Interrupt programs are executed as
subroutines with subroutine numbers 00 to 15 (I/O interrupts) and 99
(scheduled interrupt).
Both I/O interrupt (up to 16) and
scheduled interrupt (just 1) programs are supported.
I/O Table Registra- I/O allocation is determined solely
tion is supported in by the slot location of Basic I/O
CS-series PLCs.
Units and the unit number settings
on Special I/O Units. IR Area words
are automatically allocated to I/O
Units and Special I/O Units without
performing the I/O Table Registration operation.
(The I/O Table Registration operation is used to prevent Units from
being installed in the wrong slots.)
CS-series PLCs
In CS-series PLCs, the program is divided into
tasks (cyclic tasks) that are executed in order
when they are enabled. Interrupt programs are
also entered as tasks (interrupt tasks).
The operation of a CS-series PLC is the same
as a C200HX/HG/HE PLC when just one cyclic
task (or extra cyclic task) is enabled.
CS-series PLCs support up to 32 cyclic tasks,
32 I/O interrupt tasks, 2 scheduled interrupt
tasks, 1 power OFF interrupt task, and 256
external interrupt tasks.
With the CS1-H CPU Units, up to 255 interrupt
tasks can be defined as cyclic tasks (called
“extra cyclic tasks’). Thus, up to 288 extra cyclic
tasks can be created (including normal cyclic
tasks and extra cyclic tasks).
In CS-series PLCs, word allocation doesn’t
depend only on slot position, and it isn’t necessary to allocate words to an empty slot. If a Unit
requires several words, those words can be allocated.
When a CS-series PLC is being used, the I/O
Table Registration operation must be executed.
If it isn’t executed, the CPU Unit won’t recognize
each Basic I/O Unit, Special I/O Unit, and CSseries CPU Bus Unit that has been installed.
Section 1-10
Comparison of CS-series PLCs and C200HX/HG/HE Operation
Item
Data Areas
CIO
Area
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs
I/O Area
CS-series PLCs
IR 000 to IR 029,
IR 300 to IR 309
(Unlike the CS Series, word allocation is fixed.)
IR 030 to IR 049,
C200H
IR 330 to IR 341
Group-2
High-den(These words are allocated to
sity I/O Unit C200H Group-2 High-density I/O
and B7A
Units.)
Interface
Unit Area
CIO 0000 to CIO 0319 (CIO 0000 to CIO 0999
can be set if the first word on the Rack is set.)
(Unlike the C200HX/HG/HE PLCs, word allocation is flexible.)
None
(These words are allocated in the I/O Area.)
Special I/O
Unit Area
DeviceNet
Area and
SYSMAC
BUS Area
CIO 2000 to CIO 2959
IR 100 to IR 199,
IR 400 to IR 459
IR 050 to IR 099
IR 350 to IR 399
(Can be used as the DeviceNet
Area or SYSMAC BUS Area, but not
both.)
SR 247 to SR 250 (in SR Area)
PLC Link
Words
Optical I/O Optical I/O Unit and I/O Terminal
Unit and I/O Area: IR 200 to IR 231
Terminal
Area
Work/Inter- Work Areas:
nal I/O Area IR 310 to IR 329, IR 342 to IR 349,
and IR 460 to IR 511
Work Area (WR)
None
Temporary Relay
Area (TR)
Holding Relay Area
(HR)
Special Relay Area
(SR)
Auxiliary Relay
Area (AR)
Link Relay Area
(LR)
DM Area
DeviceNet Area:
CIO 0050 to CIO 0099,
CIO 0350 to CIO 0399
SYSMAC BUS Area:
CIO 3000 to CIO 3079
CIO 0247 to CIO 0250 and A442
I/O Terminal Area:
CIO 3100 to CIO 3131
TR 00 to TR 07
Internal I/O Area:
CIO 1200 to CIO 1499
CIO 3800 to CIO 6143
Work Area: W000 to W511
(No new functions will be assigned to this area
in future CPU versions; this area has been set
aside for use as work words and bits.)
TR 00 to TR 15
HR 00 to HR 99
H 000 to H 511
Special Relay Area:
SR 236 to SR 255,
SR 256 to SR 299
Auxiliary Relay Area:
AR 00 to AR 27
Link Relay Area: LR 00 to LR 63
Auxiliary Area:
A 000 to A 959
DM 0000 to DM 6143 (Normal DM):
Words in this range can be read and
written by instructions and Programming Devices, although DM 6000 to
DM 6030 are used for the Error Log
and DM 1000 to DM 2599 are used
by Special I/O Units.
DM 6144 to DM 6655 (Fixed DM):
Words in this range are read-only for
instructions and can be read or written by Programming Devices.
DM 6550 to DM 6559 and DM 6600
to DM 6655 are used for the PLC
Setup. The Programming Console
can be used to convert up to 3,000
words from the user program area
(UM) to Fixed DM words (DM 7000
to DM 9999).
D00000 to D32767
D20000 to D29599 are used by Special I/O
Units, D30000 to D31599 are used by CS-series
CPU Bus Units, and D32000 to D32099 are
used by Inner Boards.
The Error Log is stored in A100 to A199 and the
PLC Setup is stored in the Parameter Area (not
a part of I/O Memory).
Link Area: CIO 1000 to CIO 1199
67
Comparison of CS-series PLCs and C200HX/HG/HE Operation
Item
Data
Areas,
continued
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs
CS-series PLCs
EM Area
EM 0000 to EM 6143
(3 banks max., 16 banks max. for
ZE-version PLCs)
Basically, those EM Area instructions access the current bank, which
can be changed.
Timer Area
Counter Area
Timer/Counter Area:
T/C 000 to T/C 511
(Timers and counters share the
same numbers.)
None
E00000 to E32767
(13 banks max.)
Regular instructions can access data in the current bank or any other bank.
Part of the EM Area can be converted for use as
file memory.
T0000 to T4095
C0000 to C4095
(Timer and counter numbers are independent.)
Task Flag Area
Index Registers
Data Registers
Arithmetic Flags
(such as ER, EQ,
and CY)
None
None
Part of the SR Area
Clock pulses
Part of the SR Area
PLC Setup
C200HX/HG/HE:
DM Area
CS: Special Area
The PLC Setup is stored in the DM
Area (DM 6550 to DM 6559 and
DM 6600 to DM 6655), so PLC
Setup settings are made directly by
specifying DM addresses.
Instruction
variations
Up-differentiation
Supported
Down-differentiation
Supported
Flags and
Clock
Pulses
Immediate refresh- Not supported
ing
Not supported
Up-differentiation
and immediate
refreshing
Down-differentiaNot supported
tion and immediate
refreshing
Instruction operand data format Basically operands are specified in
BCD. In XFER(070), for example,
the number of words is specified in
BCD (0001 to 9999).
Specifying operands requiring
If an operand requiring multiple
multiple words
words is specified at the end of an
area so that there are not enough
words left in the area for the operand, the instruction will not be executed and the Error Flag will turn
ON.
68
Section 1-10
TK00 to TK31
IR0 to IR15
DR0 to DR15
Condition Flags:
In the CS Series, these Flags are in a separate
area and are specified by labels rather than
addresses. With the CX-Programmer, these are
specified using global symbols, such as “P_ER”
and “P_EQ.” With a Programming Console, they
are specified using “ER,” “=,” etc.
Clock Pulses:
In the CS-series PLCs these pulses are in a
separate area and are specified by labels such
as “P_1s” and “P_0_1s” rather than addresses.
In the CS Series, the PLC Setup isn’t stored in
the DM Area, but a separate area (the Parameter Area) which isn’t a part of I/O memory. The
PLC Setup is edited with CX-Programmer in a
table format and user-friendly dialogue. Individual PLC Setup addresses can also be edited
with a Programming Console.
Supported
Including LD NOT, AND NOT, and OR NOT for
CS1-H CPU Units.
Supported for LD, AND, OR, RSET, and SET
Including LD NOT, AND NOT, and OR NOT for
CS1-H CPU Units.
Supported for LD, LD NOT, AND, AND NOT, OR,
OR NOT, OUT, OUT NOT, RSET, SET, KEEP,
DIFU, DIFD, CMP, CPS, and MOV
Supported for LD, LD NOT, AND, AND NOT, OR,
OR NOT, RSET, SET, and MOV
Supported for LD, LD NOT, AND, AND NOT, OR,
OR NOT, RSET, and SET
Basically operands are specified in binary. In
XFER(070), for example, the number of words is
specified in binary (0001 to FFFF or 1 to 65,535
decimal).
If an operand requiring multiple words is specified at the end of an area so that there are not
enough words left in the area for the operand,
the instruction can be executed and the Error
Flag will not turn ON. The program, however, is
checked when transferred from the CX-Programmer to the CPU Unit and cannot be transferred with incorrect operand specifications.
Such programs also cannot be read from the
CPU Unit.
Comparison of CS-series PLCs and C200HX/HG/HE Operation
Item
Instructions Sequence Input
Sequence Output
Sequence Control
Timer/Counter
Comparison
Data Movement
Data Shift
Increment/Decrement
Symbol Math
Conversion
Logic
Special Math
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs
Up and down-differentiated versions of LD, AND, and OR are not
supported.
TST and TSTN not supported.
SETA and RSTA not supported.
CJP and CJPN not supported.
TIML, MTIM, TMHH, and CNR not
supported.
Input Comparison Instructions not
supported.
MOVL, MVNL, and XCGL not supported.
NSFL/NSFR, NASL/NASR,
NSLL/NSRL, ASLL/ASRL,
ROLL/RORL, RLNC/RRNC, and
RLNL/RRNL not supported.
Section 1-10
CS-series PLCs
Up and down-differentiated versions of LD, AND,
and OR are supported.
TST and TSTN supported.
SETA and RSTA supported.
With the CS1-H CPU Units, bit addresses can
be specified in the DM and EM areas using
OUT, SET, and RSET.
CJP and CJPN supported.
TIML, MTIM, TMHH, and CNTR supported.
Input Comparison Instructions supported. ZCP
and ZCPL supported for CS1-H CPU Units.
MOVL, MVNL, and XCGL supported.
NSFL/NSFR, NASL/NASR, NSLL/NSRL,
ASLL/ASRL, ROLL/RORL, RLNC/RRNC, and
RLNL/RRNL supported.
ASFT can be executed in the background for
CS1-H CPU Units.
++, ++L, – –, – –L, ++BL, and – –BL ++, ++L, – –, – –L, ++BL, and – –BL supported.
not supported.
The same in both series.
SIGN, BINS, BCDS, BISL, and
SIGN, BINS, BCDS, BISL, and BDSL supBDSL not supported.
ported.
ANDL, ORWL, XORL, XNRL, and
ANDL, ORWL, XORL, XNRL, and COML supCOML not supported.
ported.
ROTB not supported.
Floating-point Math Not supported.
Table Data Processing
SSET, PUSH, LIFO, and FIFO not
supported.
Data Control
SCL2 and SCL3 not supported.
Subroutines
The same in both series.
Interrupt Control
Interrupts controlled using one
instruction (INT).
ROTB supported.
SAVE CONDITION FLAGS (CCS) and LOAD
CONDITION FLAGS (CCL) supported by CS1H CPU Units.
Supported.
Floating-point math, floating-point to/from ASCII
conversions, and double-precision floating-point
math supported by CS1-H CPU Units.
SSET, PUSH, LIFO, and FIFO supported.
Stack insertions/deletions/replacements and
stack counts supported by CS1-H CPU Units.
Background execution of SRCH, SWAP, MAX,
MIN, SUM, and FCS supported by CS1-H CPU
Units.
SCL2 and SCL3 supported.
PID with autotuning supported by CS1-H CPU
Units.
Global subroutines (GSBS, GSBN, and GRET)
supported by CS1-H CPU Units.
Interrupts controlled using CLI, MSKS, and
MSKR.
69
Comparison of CS-series PLCs and C200HX/HG/HE Operation
Item
Instructions, continued
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs
Section 1-10
CS-series PLCs
Step
The same in both series, although the specified control bit must be in the WR Area in
CS-series PLCs.
I/O Units
TKY, HKY, DSW, and CMCR
TKY, HKY, DSW, and CMCR not supported.
supported.
CPU BUS UNIT I/O REFRESH (DLNK(226))
supported by CS1-H CPU Units.
Network
CMND not supported.
CMND supported.
File Memory
Not supported.
Supported.
Display
LMSG (32-character message
MSG (32-character message display) available,
display) supported.
but only 16 characters displayed on a Programming Console.
Clock
CADD, CSUB, and DATE not
CADD, CSUB, and DATE supported.
supported.
Debugging
The same in both series.
Failure Diagnosis
The same in both series.
Not storing user-defined FAL errors in the error
log supported by CS1-H CPU Units.
FAL/FALS error simulation supported by CS1-H
CPU Units.
Special
XDMR and IEMS supported.
SCAN not available
Block Programming Not supported.
Supported.
Text String ProNot supported.
Supported.
cessing
Background execution supported by CS1-H
CPU Units.
Task Control
Not supported.
Supported.
I/O Comment storage
A Programming Device can be used In the CS-series PLCs, I/O comments can be
to divide the UM Area (user program stored in Memory Cards or EM file memory as
memory area) into a program area, variable files.
I/O comment area, and Expansion
DM area. I/O comments can be
stored in that I/O comment area.
Battery installation
Clock function
Memory
Cards and
Memory
Cassettes
70
I/O Memory
A battery is installed in the CPU Unit The battery is not installed when a CS1 CPU
when it is shipped from the factory. Unit is shipped from the factory. Install the provided battery before using the PLC.
A battery is installed in a CS1-H CPU Unit when
it is shipped from the factory, the same as it is
for a C200HX/HG/HE CPU Unit.
The internal clock is set when the
When the battery is installed in a CS1 CPU Unit,
PLC is shipped from the factory.
the clock will begin from an arbitrary value. Set
the clock with a Programming Device or the
DATE(735) instruction.
The internal clock is set when a CS1-H CPU
Unit is shipped from the factory, the same as it is
for a C200HX/HG/HE CPU Unit.
Any range of I/O Memory can be saved as a file
All of I/O Memory can be saved to
in a Memory Card (flash ROM) or EM file meman EEPROM Memory Cassette by
ory with a Programming Device (including Proturning ON a control bit in the SR
Area. A Programming Device (other gramming Consoles) or the instruction provided
for this operation. (With the -EV1 or higher CS1
than a Programming Console) can
be used to read the data back from CPU Units and all CS1-H CPU Units, these files
can also be saved in CSV or text format.) A Prothe Memory Cassette.
gramming Device or instruction can be used to
read the data from file memory. These operations can also be performed with FINS commands.
Comparison of CS-series PLCs and C200HX/HG/HE Operation
Item
Memory
Cards and
Memory
Cassettes
User program
Serial com- Mode Peripheral
port
munications
(peripheral
port or RSRS-232C
232C ports)
port
Baud Peripheral
rate
port
RS-232C
port
Interrupt control modes
Section 1-10
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs
CS-series PLCs
The entire program can be saved to
an EEPROM Memory Cassette by
turning ON a control bit in the SR
Area. A Programming Device (other
than a Programming Console) can
be used to read the data back from
the Memory Cassette.
A standard EPROM Writer can be
used to save the entire program to
an EPROM Memory Cassette. A
Programming Device can be used to
read the data back from the Memory
Cassette.
The PLC can be set to automatically
read the entire program from the
Memory Cassette (EEPROM or
EPROM) when the PLC is turned
on.
Host link, customer (Programming
Console and peripheral bus are
automatically recognized.)
The entire program can be saved as a file in a
Memory Card (flash ROM) or EM file memory
with a Programming Device (including Programming Consoles) or the instruction provided for
this operation. A Programming Device or
instruction can be used to read the program
back from file memory.
These operations can also be performed with
FINS commands.
The PLC can be set to automatically read the
entire program from the Memory Card when the
PLC is turned on.
With the -EV1 or higher, it is also possible to
read (i.e., replace) the entire user program from
the Memory Card during PLC operation.
Host Link, peripheral bus, NT Link (1:N), (Programming Console is automatically recognized.)
Custom protocols are not possible for the
peripheral port.
Host Link, NT Link (1:1), NT Link
Host Link, peripheral bus, NT Link (1:N), custom
(1:N), custom, 1:1 link master, 1:1
1:1 links and Programming Console are not suplink slave
ported for the RS-232C port.
2,400/4,800/9,600/19,200 bps
300/600/1,200/2,400/4,800/9,600/
19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200 bps
Baud rates of 38,400/57,600/ 115,200 bps are
not standard for RS-232C. Your computer may
not support these speeds. Use slower baud
rates if necessary.
CS-series PLCs operate in high-speed interrupt
There are two interrupt modes in
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs: normal inter- mode only. If an interrupt occurs during periphrupt mode and high-speed interrupt eral servicing, I/O refreshing, or execution of an
instruction, that process will be stopped immedimode.
ately and the task will be executed instead.
Normal Interrupt Mode:
In this mode, the interrupt is not exe- With CS1-H CPU Units, interrupt processing will
cuted until the current process (Host also wait for completion of the BLOCK TRANSFER (XFER), BLOCK SET (BSET), and BIT
Link servicing, Remote I/O servicCOUNTER (BCNT) instructions.
ing, Special I/O Unit servicing, or
execution of an instruction) is completed.
High-speed Interrupt Mode:
In this mode, the interrupt stops the
current process (Host Link servicing, Remote I/O servicing, Special
I/O Unit servicing, or execution of an
instruction) and executes the interrupt immediately.
71
Section 1-11
Checking the Package
Item
CPU processing mode
Startup mode
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs
CS-series PLCs
Normal Mode only (including
instruction execution followed by I/O
refreshing and peripheral servicing)
Peripheral servicing include servicing the RS-232C port, Host Link,
peripheral bus, and Communications Units (e.g., Controller Link
Units).
CS1 CPU Units: Normal Mode or Peripheral
Servicing Priority Mode
CS1-H CPU Units: Normal Mode, Parallel Processing Mode with Asynchronous Memory
Access, Parallel Processing Mode with Synchronous Memory Access, or Peripheral Servicing
Priority Mode (Parallel processing executes
peripheral servicing in parallel with instruction
execution and I/O refreshing.)
RUN mode was entered if the Star- A CS1 CPU Unit will start in PROGRAM mode if
tup Mode was set in the PLC Setup the Startup Mode is set in the PLC Setup to
to 00: Switch Setting on ProgramPRCH: Switch Setting on Programming Console
ming Console and the CPU Unit was (default setting) and the CPU Unit is started
started without a Programming Con- without a Programming Console connected.
sole connected.
A CS1-H CPU Unit will start in RUN mode under
the same conditions.
1-11 Checking the Package
Check to be sure that the CPU Unit and Battery Unit are in good shape without any damage.
CS1-H CPU Units
CPU Unit
Note The CS1W-BAT01 will already be installed in the CPU Unit.
CS1 CPU Units
One CS1W-BAT01 Battery is packed
separately in the same container.
CPU Unit
Note The Battery Set is required to backup the user program in the RAM memory,
the contents of the PLC Setup, the I/O memory holding areas, etc., when the
power supply is turned OFF.
72
Initial Setup for CS1 CPU Units
Section 1-12
1-12 Initial Setup for CS1 CPU Units
Before using a CS1 CPU Unit, you must install the Battery Set in the CPU Unit
using the following procedure.
Note A Battery is installed to a CS1-H CPU Unit when it is shipped from the factory.
There is no need to clear memory or set the time.
Battery Installation
1,2,3...
1. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver in the small gap at the bottom of the battery
compartment and flip the cover upward to open it.
73
Section 1-12
Initial Setup for CS1 CPU Units
2. Hold the Battery Set with the cable facing outward and insert it into the battery compartment.
Battery compartment
3. Connect the battery connector to the battery connector terminals. Connect
the red wire to the top and the black wire to the bottom terminal. There are
two sets of battery connector terminals; connect the battery to either one.
It does not matter whether the top terminals or bottom terminals are used.
Red
Black
Battery connector terminals
(Connect to either set of terminals.)
4. Fold in the cable and close the cover.
74
Section 1-12
Initial Setup for CS1 CPU Units
Clearing Memory
After installing the battery, clear memory using the memory clear operation to
initialize the RAM inside the CS1 CPU Unit.
Programming Console
Use the following procedure from a Programming Console.
Initial display
SET
NOT
RESET
MON
0
0
(or
1
)
MON
Note You cannot specify more than one cyclic task when clearing memory from a
Programming Console. You can specify one cyclic task and one interrupt task,
or one cyclic task and no interrupt task. Refer to 4-2 Examples for more information on the memory clear operation. Refer to SECTION 6 DIP Switch Settings and SECTION 11 Troubleshooting for more information on tasks.
CX-Programmer
Memory can also be cleared from the CX-Programmer. Refer to the CX-Programmer Operation Manual for the actual procedure.
Clearing Errors
After clearing memory, clear any errors from the CPU Unit, including the low
battery voltage error.
Programming Console
Use the following procedure from a Programming Console.
Initial display
FUN
MON
MON
(Displayed error will be cleared.)
MON
(Returns to the initial display.)
CX-Programmer
Errors can also be cleared from the CX-Programmer. Refer to the CX-Programmer Operation Manual for the actual procedure.
Note When an Inner Board is mounted, an Inner Board routing table error may continue even after you have cancelled the error using the CX-Programmer.
(A42407 will be ON for a Serial Communications Board.) If this occurs, either
reset the power or restart the Inner Board, then cancel the error again.
75
Section 1-13
Using the Internal Clock
1-13 Using the Internal Clock
The internal clock of a CS1 CPU Unit is set to “00 year, 01 month, 01 day (0001-01), 00 hours, 00 minutes, 00 seconds (00:00:00), and Sunday (SUN)”
when the Battery Set is mounted in the CPU Unit.
When using the internal clock, turn ON the power supply after mounting the
Battery Set and 1) use a Programming Device (Programming Console or CXProgrammer) to set the clock time, 2) execute the CLOCK ADJUSTMENT
(DATE) instruction, or 3) send a FINS command to start the internal clock from
the correct current time and date.
The Programming Console operation used to set the internal clock is shown
below.
Key Sequence
Initial display
FUN
SHIFT
MON
0
CHG
↑
Data
↓
Specify: Yr Mo Day Hr Min S
76
WRITE
SECTION 2
Specifications and System Configuration
This section provides tables of standard models, Unit specifications, system configurations, and a comparison between
different Units.
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
78
2-1-1
CPU Unit Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
78
2-1-2
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
87
CPU Unit Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91
2-2-1
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91
2-2-2
CS-series CPU Unit Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
94
2-2-3
Unit Classifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
95
2-2-4
Data Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
95
Basic System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
97
2-3-1
Basic System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
97
2-3-2
CPU Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
99
2-3-3
Expansion Racks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
105
2-3-4
SYSMAC BUS Slave Racks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
113
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
116
2-4-1
Basic I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
116
2-4-2
Special I/O Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123
2-4-3
CS-series CPU Bus Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
129
Expanded System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
130
2-5-1
Serial Communications System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
130
2-5-2
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
131
2-5-3
Communications Network System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
142
Unit Current Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
147
2-6-1
CPU Racks and Expansion Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
147
2-6-2
SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Slave Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
148
2-6-3
Example Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
148
2-6-4
Current Consumption Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
150
CPU Bus Unit Setting Area Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
158
2-7-1
System Setting Allocations to CPU Bus Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
158
I/O Table Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
159
2-8-1
CS-series Basic I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
159
2-8-2
CS-series Special I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
161
2-8-3
C200H Special I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
162
2-8-4
CS-series CPU Bus Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
163
77
Section 2-1
Specifications
2-1
Specifications
2-1-1
CPU Unit Specifications
CPU Unit Comparison
CS1-H CPU Units
CPU
CS1HCPU67H
I/O bits
5120
User program
memory (steps)
250K
Data memory
32K words
Extended data
memory
32K words
x 13 banks
E0_00000
to
EC_32767
CS1HCPU66H
CS1HCPU65H
CS1HCPU64H
CS1GCPU45H
CS1GCPU44H
CS1GCPU43H
CS1GCPU42H
1280
960
60K
30K
20K
32K words x 1 bank
E0_00000 to E0_32767
32K words
x 3 banks
E0_00000
to
E2_32767
32K words x 1 bank
E0_00000 to E0_32767
1024
1024
128
1024
1024
128
128
2048
2048
2048
256
2048
2048
256
256
2048
1280
1280
1280
1280
704
704
704
120K
60K
30K
32K words
x 7 banks
E0_00000
to
E6_32767
32K words
x 3 banks
E0_00000
to
E2_32767
Func- Maxi1024
tion
mum No.
blocks of definitions
1024
Maxi2048
mum No.
of
instances
2048
Total
(Kbytes)
for FB
program
memory,
comment
files,
program
index
files, and
symbol
tables
Flash
memory
(Unit
version
4.0 or
later
(See
note.))
CS1HCPU63H
20K
10K
Current
consumption
0.82 A at 5 V DC
0.78 A at 5 V DC
Connector
(provided)
One RS-232C Connector (Plug: XM2A-0901, Hood: XM2S-0911-E) provided with CPU Unit as standard
Note The values displayed in the table are valid when a CPU Unit with unit version
4 or later is combined with CX-Programmer 7.0 or higher.
The following table shows the flash memory capacities for CPU Units with unit version 3.
CPU
CS1HCS1HCS1HCS1HCS1HCS1GCS1GCS1GCS1GCPU67H CPU66H CPU65H CPU64H CPU63H CPU45H CPU44H CPU43H CPU42H
Flash memory FB program
1664
(unit version 3) memory (Kbytes)
1664
1024
512
512
1024
512
512
512
Comment files
(Kbytes)
128
128
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
Program index
files (Kbytes)
128
128
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
Symbol tables
(Kbytes)
128
128
128
64
64
128
64
64
64
Earlier CPU Units (unit version 2 or earlier) are not equipped with the function
that stores data such as comment files in flash memory.
78
Section 2-1
Specifications
CS1 CPU Units
CPU
CS1HCPU67EV1
I/O bits
5120
User
program
memory
(steps)
(See note.)
250K
Data
memory
32K words
Extended
data
memory
32K words
x 13 banks
E0_00000
to
EC_32767
CS1HCPU66EV1
CS1HCPU65EV1
CS1HCPU64EV1
CS1HCPU63EV1
CS1GCPU44EV1
CS1GCPU43EV1
CS1GCPU42EV1
1280
960
120K
60K
30K
20K
60K
30K
20K
10K
32K words
x 7 banks
E0_00000
to
E6_32767
32K words
x 3 banks
E0_00000
to
E2_32767
32K words
x 1 bank
E0_00000
to
E0_32767
Not supported
32K words
x 3 banks
E0_00000
to
E2_32767
32K words
x 1 bank
E0_00000
to
E0_32767
Not supported
Not
supported
Current con- 1.10 A at 5 V DC
sumption
Connector
(provided)
CS1GCPU45EV1
0.95 A at 5 V DC
One RS-232C Connector (Plug: XM2A-0901, Hood: XM2S-0911-E) provided with CPU Unit as standard
Note The number of steps in a program is not the same as the number of instructions. For example, LD and OUT require 1 step each, but MOV(021) requires
3 steps. The program capacity indicates the total number of steps for all
instructions in the program. Refer to 10-5 Instruction Execution Times and
Number of Steps for the number of steps required for each instruction.
Common Specifications
Item
Control method
I/O control method
Programming
CPU processing mode
Instruction length
Specification
Stored program
Cyclic scan and immediate processing are both possible.
• Ladder diagrams
• SFC (sequential function charts)
• ST (structured text)
• Mnemonics
CS1-H CPU Units: Normal Mode, Parallel Processing Mode
with Asynchronous Memory Access, Parallel Processing
Mode with Synchronous Memory Access, or Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode
CS1 CPU Units, Pre-version: Normal Mode only
CS1 CPU Units, Version 1 or higher: Normal Mode or Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode
1 to 7 steps per instruction
Ladder instructions
Execution time
Approx. 400 (3-digit function codes)
CS1-H CPU Units:
Basic instructions: 0.02 µs min.
Special instructions: 0.06 µs min.
CS1 CPU Units:
Basic instructions: 0.04 µs min.
Special instructions: 0.12 µs min.
Overhead processing time
CS1-H CPU Units:
Normal mode:
0.3 ms min.
Parallel processing: 0.2 ms min.
CS1 CPU Units:
0.5 ms min.
Reference
-------
---
Steps and number of
steps per instruction:
10-5 Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
--Instruction execution
times: 10-5 Instruction
Execution Times and
Number of Steps
---
79
Section 2-1
Specifications
Item
Number of Expansion Racks
Specification
7 max. (C200H Expansion I/O Racks: 3 max.)
Number of tasks
288 (cyclic tasks: 32, interrupt tasks: 256)
Note Cyclic tasks are executed each cycle and are controlled with TKON(820) and TKOF(821) instructions.
Note The following 4 types of interrupt tasks are supported.
Power OFF interrupt tasks: 1 max.
Scheduled interrupt tasks:
2 max.
I/O interrupt tasks:
32 max.
External interrupt tasks:
256 max.
Interrupt types
Reference
Expansion Racks:
2-3-3 Expansion Racks
Tasks:
Programming Manual
(W394): 1-4 Programs
and Tasks
Programming Manual
(W394): Section 4:
Tasks
Scheduled Interrupts:
Interrupts generated at a time scheduled by the CPU Unit’s
built-in timer.
I/O Interrupts:
Interrupts from Interrupt Input Units.
Power OFF Interrupts:
Interrupts executed when the CPU Unit’s power is turned
OFF.
External I/O Interrupts:
Interrupts from the Special I/O Units, CS-series CPU Bus
Units, or the Inner Board.
Calling subroutines from more CS1-H CPU Units: Supported.
than one task
CS1 CPU Units: Not supported
Function blocks (CPU Units
Languages in function block definitions: ladder programming, CX-Programmer Ver.
with unit version 3.0 or later
structured text
7.@ CS/CJ Series
only)
Operation Manual
Function Blocks (W447)
80
Section 2-1
Specifications
Item
CIO
(Core
I/O)
Area
I/O Area
C200H DeviceNet
Area
PLC Link Area
Link Area
CPU Bus Unit Area
Special I/O Unit Area
Inner Board Area
SYSMAC BUS Area
I/O Terminal Area
Specification
5,120: CIO 000000 to CIO 031915 (320 words from CIO
0000 to CIO 0319)
The setting of the first word can be changed from the default
(CIO 0000) so that CIO 0000 to CIO 0999 can be used.
I/O bits are allocated to Basic I/O Units, such as CS-series
Basic I/O Units, C200H Basic I/O Units, and C200H Group-2
High-density I/O Units.
1,600 (100 words):
Outputs: CIO 005000 to CIO 009915 (words CIO 0050 to
CIO 0099)
Inputs: CIO 035000 to CIO 039915 (words CIO 0350 to
CIO 0399)
C200H DeviceNet Area bits are allocated to Slaves according
to C200HW-CRW21-V1 DeviceNet Unit remote I/O communications.
80 bits (5 words): CIO 024700 to CIO 025015 (words
CIO 0247 to CIO 0250 and CIO A442)
When a PLC Link Unit is used in a PLC Link, use these bits to
monitor PLC Link errors and the operating status of other
CPU Units in the PLC Link.
3,200 (200 words): CIO 10000 to CIO 119915 (words CIO
1000 to CIO 1199)
Link bits are used for data links and are allocated to Units in
Controller Link Systems and PLC Link Systems.
6,400 (400 words): CIO 150000 to CIO 189915 (words CIO
1500 to CIO 1899)
CS-series CPU Bus Unit bits store the operating status of
CS-series CPU Bus Units.
(25 words per Unit, 16 Units max.)
15,360 (960 words): CIO 200000 to CIO 295915 (words CIO
2000 to CIO 2959)
Special I/O Unit bits are allocated to CS-series Special I/O
Units and C200H Special I/O Units. (See Note.)
(10 words per Unit, 96 Units max.)
Note Special I/O Units are I/O Units that belong to a special
group called “Special I/O Units.” Examples: C200HID215/0D215/MD215
1,600 (100 words): CIO 190000 to CIO 199915 (words CIO
1900 to CIO 1999)
Inner Board bits are allocated to Inner Boards. (100 I/O
words max.)
1,280 (80 words): CIO 300000 to CIO 307915 (words CIO
3000 to CIO 3079)
SYSMAC BUS bits are allocated to Slave Racks connected
to SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Master Units. (10 words per
Rack, 8 Racks max.)
512 (32 words): CIO 310000 to CIO 313115 (words CIO 3100
to CIO 3131)
I/O Terminal bits are allocated to I/O Terminal Units (but not
to Slave Racks) connected to SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O
Master Units. (1 word per Terminal, 32 Terminals max.)
Reference
Input and
output
bits:9-4
CIO Area
The CIO
Area can
be used as
work bits if
the bits are
not used
as shown
here.
9-5 C200H
DeviceNet
Area
9-7 PLC
Link Area
9-8 Data
Link Area
9-9 CPU
Bus Unit
Area
9-11 Special I/O
Unit Area
9-10 Inner
Board
Area
9-12 SYSMAC BUS
Area
9-13 I/O
Terminal
Area
81
Section 2-1
Specifications
Item
CIO
CS-series DeviceNet
(Core Area
I/O)
Area,
continued
Specification
Reference
9,600 (600 words): CIO 320000 to CIO 379915 (words
9-6 CS-series
CIO 3200 to CIO 3799)
DeviceNet Area
CS-series DeviceNet Area bits are allocated to Slaves
according to C200HW-CRW21-V1 DeviceNet Unit remote I/O
communications.
Fixed allocation 1 Outputs: CIO 3200 to CIO 3263
Inputs: CIO 3300 to CIO 3363
Fixed allocation 2 Outputs: CIO 3400 to CIO 3463
Inputs: CIO 3500 to CIO 3563
Fixed allocation 3 Outputs: CIO 3600 to CIO 3663
Inputs: CIO 3700 to CIO 3763
The following words are allocated to the CS-Series
DeviceNet Unit functioning as a master when fixed allocations are used for the CS1W-DRM21 DeviceNet Unit.
Setting
Master to slave
Slave to master
Fixed allocation 1 Outputs: CIO 3370 Inputs: CIO 3270
Fixed allocation 2 Outputs: CIO 3570 Inputs: CIO 3470
Fixed allocation 3 Outputs: CIO 3770 Inputs: CIO 3670
Internal I/O Area
Work Area
Holding Area
Auxiliary Area
Temporary Area
Timer Area
Counter Area
82
4,800 (300 words): CIO 120000 to CIO 149915 (words CIO
--1200 to CIO 1499)
37,504 (2,344 words): CIO 380000 to CIO 614315 (words
CIO 3800 to CIO 6143)
These bits in the CIO Area are used as work bits in programming to control program execution. They cannot be used for
external I/O.
8,192 bits (512 words): W00000 to W51115 (W000 to W511) 9-14 Work Area
Controls the programs only. (I/O from external I/O terminals is
not possible.)
Note When using work bits in programming, use the bits in
the Work Area first before using bits from other areas.
8,192 bits (512 words): H00000 to H51115 (H000 to H511)
9-15 Holding Area
Holding bits are used to control the execution of the program,
and maintain their ON/OFF status when the PLC is turned
OFF or the operating mode is changed.
Note The Function Block Holding Area words are allocated
from H512 to H1535. These words can be used only
for the function block instance area (internally allocated
variable area).
Read only: 7,168 bits (448 words): A00000 to A44715 (words 9-16 Auxiliary Area
A000 to A447)
Read/write: 8,192 bits (512 words): A44800 to A95915
(words A448 to A959)
Auxiliary bits are allocated specific functions.
16 bits (TR0 to TR15)
Temporary bits are used to temporarily store the ON/OFF
execution conditions at program branches.
4,096: T0000 to T4095 (used for timers only)
4,096: C0000 to C4095 (used for counters only)
9-17 TR (Temporary
Relay) Area
9-18 Timer Area
9-19 Counter Area
Section 2-1
Specifications
Item
DM Area
EM Area
Data Registers
Index Registers
Task Flag Area
Trace Memory
File Memory
Specification
32K words: D00000 to D32767
Used as a general-purpose data area for reading and writing
data in word units (16 bits). Words in the DM Area maintain
their status when the PLC is turned OFF or the operating
mode is changed.
Internal Special I/O Unit DM Area: D20000 to D29599 (100
words × 96 Units)
Used to set parameters for Special I/O Units.
CPU Bus Unit DM Area: D30000 to D31599 (100 words × 16
Units)
Used to set parameters for CPU Bus Units.
Inner Board DM Area: D32000 to D32099
Used to set parameters for Inner Boards.
32K words per bank, 13 banks max.: E0_00000 to EC_32767
max. (Not available on some CPU Units.)
Used as a general-purpose data area for reading and writing
data in word units (16 bits). Words in the EM Area maintain
their status when the PLC is turned OFF or the operating
mode is changed.
The EM Area is divided into banks, and the addresses can be
set by either of the following methods.
Changing the current bank using the EMBC(281) instruction
and setting addresses for the current bank.
Setting bank numbers and addresses directly.
EM data can be stored in files by specifying the number of
the first bank.
DR0 to DR15
Store offset values for indirect addressing. One register is 16
bits (1 word).
CS1 CPU Units: Data registers used independently in each
task.
CS1-H CPU Units: Setting to use data registers either independently in each task or to share them between tasks.
IR0 to IR15
Store PLC memory addresses for indirect addressing. One
register is 32 bits (2 words).
CS1 CPU Units: Index registers used independently in each
task.
CS1-H CPU Units: Setting to use index registers either independently in each task or to share them between tasks.
32 (TK0000 to TK0031)
Task Flags are read-only flags that are ON when the corresponding cyclic task is executable and OFF when the corresponding task is not executable or in standby status.
40,000 words (trace data: 31 bits, 6 words)
Reference
9-20 Data Memory
(DM) Area
9-21 Extended Data
Memory (EM) Area
9-23 Data Registers
9-22 Index Registers
9-24 Task Flags
Programming Manual
(W394)
Memory Cards: Compact flash memory cards can be used
Programming Manual
(MS-DOS format).
(W394)
EM file memory: Part of the EM Area can be converted to file
memory (MS-DOS format).
83
Section 2-1
Specifications
Function Specifications
Item
Constant cycle time
Specification
Reference
1 to 32,000 ms (Unit: 1 ms)
Cycle time:10-4 Computing the
When a parallel processing mode is used for a CS1-H CPU Cycle Time
Unit, the cycle time for executing instructions is constant.
Constant cycle time: Programming Manual (W394)
Cycle time monitoring Possible (Unit stops operating if the cycle is too long): 1 to Cycle time:10-4 Computing the
40,000 ms (Unit: 10 ms)
Cycle Time
When a parallel processing mode is used for a CS1-H CPU Cycle time monitoring: ProgramUnit, the instruction execution cycle is monitored. CPU Unit ming Manual (W394)
operation will stop if the peripheral servicing cycle time
exceeds 2 s (fixed).
I/O refreshing
Cyclic refreshing, immediate refreshing, refreshing by
I/O refreshing:10-4 Computing
IORF(097).
the Cycle Time
IORF(097) refreshes I/O bits allocated to Basic I/O Units
I/O refresh methods: Programming Manual (W394)
and Special I/O Units.
With the CS1-H CPU Units, the CPU BUS UNIT I/O
REFRESH (DLNK(226)) instruction can be used to refresh
bits allocated to CPU Bus Units in the CIO and DM Areas.
--Timing of special
Data links for Controller Link Units and SYSMAC LINK
refreshing for CPU Bus Units, remote I/O for DeviceNet Units, and other special
Units
refreshing for CPU Bus Units is performed at the following
times:
CS1 CPU Units: I/O refresh period
CS1-H CPU Units: I/O refresh period and when the CPU
BUS UNIT I/O REFRESH (DLNK(226)) instruction is executed
I/O memory holding
Depends on the ON/OFF status of the IOM Hold Bit in the
when changing operat- Auxiliary Area.
ing modes
Load OFF
All outputs on Output Units can be turned OFF when the
CPU Unit is operating in RUN, MONITOR, or PROGRAM
mode.
Input response time
setting
Time constants can be set for inputs from Basic I/O Units.
The time constant can be increased to reduce the influence
of noise and chattering or it can be decreased to detect
shorter pulses on the inputs.
Startup mode setting
84
I/O memory: SECTION 9 Memory Areas
Programming Manual (W394):
6-6-1 Hot Start/Cold Start Function
Holding I/O memory: 9-2-3 Data
Area Properties
Load OFF:
Programming Manual (W394):
6-7-2 Load OFF Function and 72-3 Online Editing
Input response time: 10-4-6 I/O
Response Time
Input response settings:
Programming Manual (W394):
6-11-1 I/O Response Time Settings
Supported
Startup mode: Programming
The startup mode will be as follows if the PLC Setup is set Manual (W394)
to use the Programming Console mode (default) and a Programming Console is not connected:
CS1 CPU Units: PROGRAM mode
CS1-H CPU Units: RUN mode
Section 2-1
Specifications
Item
Specification
Flash memory (CS1-H
CPU Units only)
Reference
• The user program and parameter area data (e.g., PLC
Setup) are always backed up automatically in flash
memory.
• CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later only:
When downloading projects from CX-Programmer Ver.
5.0 or higher, symbol table files (including CX-Programmer symbol names, I/O comments), comment files (CXProgrammer rung comments, other comments), and
program index files (CX-Programmer section names,
section comments, or program comments) are stored in
comment memory within the flash memory.
Memory Card functions Automatically reading proSupported
grams (autoboot) from the
Memory Card when the
power is turned ON.
---
Filing
File memory: Programming Manual (W394)
Debugging, set/reset, differential
monitoring, data tracing: Programming Manual (W394)
Memory Cards and file memory:
3-2 File Memory and Programming Manual (W394) Section 5
File Memory Functions
Automatic file transfer at startup
and file operations using CMND:
Programming Manual (W394)
5-2-3 Using Instruction in User
Program
Program replacement during Supported
Replacing the program with
PLC operation (except preCMND: Programming Manual
version-1 CS1 CPU Units)
(W394)
Format in which data is
User program: Program file Data stored in the Memory Card:
Programming Manual (W394)
stored in Memory Card
format
5-2-3 Using Instruction in User
PLC Setup and other
parameters: Data file format Program
I/O memory: Data file format
(binary format), text format,
or CSV format (except preversion-1 CS1 CPU Units)
Functions for which Memory User program instructions, Memory Card read/write operaCard read/write is supported Programming Devices
tions: Programming Manual
(including Programming
(W394)
Consoles), Host Link computers, AR Area control bits,
easy backup operation
Debugging
Online editing
Program protection
Error check
Memory Card data and the EM (Extended Data Memory)
Area can be handled as files.
Control set/reset, differential monitoring, data tracing
(scheduled, each cycle, or when instruction is executed),
storing location generating error when a program error
occurs
When the CPU Unit is in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode,
multiple program sections (“circuits”) of the user program
can be edited together. This function is not supported for
block programming areas.
(With the CX-Programmer is used, multiple program sections of the user program can be edited together. When a
Programming Console is used, the program can be edited
in mnemonics only.).
Overwrite protection: Set using DIP switch.
Copy protection: Password set using Programming Device.
User-defined errors (i.e., user can define fatal errors and
non-fatal errors)
The FPD(269) instruction can be used to check the execution time and logic of each programming block.
FAL and FALS instructions can be used with the CS1-H
CPU Units to simulate errors.
Operating modes: Programming
Manual (W394)
Program protection: Programming Manual (W394)
Failure diagnosis: Programming
Manual (W394)
Fatal and nonfatal errors: 11-2-4
Error Processing Flowchart
User-defined errors: Programming Manual (W394)
85
Section 2-1
Specifications
Item
Error log
Specification
Serial communications Built-in peripheral port: Programming Device (including
Programming Console) connections, Host Links, NT Links
Built-in RS-232C port: Programming Device (excluding
Programming Console) connections, Host Links, no-protocol communications, NT Links
Serial Communications Board (sold separately): Protocol
macros, Host Links, NT Links
Clock
Provided on all models. Accuracy: ± 30 s/mo. at 25°C
(accuracy varies with the temperature)
Power OFF detection
time
Power OFF detection
delay time
Memory protection
Sending commands to
a Host Link computer
Remote programming
and monitoring
86
Serial communications systems:
2-5-1 Serial Communications
System
Serial communications: Programming Manual (W394)
Clock: Programming Manual
(W394)
Note Used to store the time when power is turned ON and
when errors occur.
10 to 25 ms (not fixed)
Power OFF operation and power
OFF detection time: 10-3 Power
OFF Operation
0 to 10 ms (user-defined, default: 0 ms)
Power OFF detection delay time:
Programming Manual (W394)
Memory protection: 9-2-3 Data
Held Areas: Holding bits, contents of Data Memory and
Extended Data Memory, and status of the counter Comple- Area Properties
tion Flags and present values.
Note If the IOM Hold Bit in the Auxiliary Area is turned
ON, and the PLC Setup is set to maintain the IOM
Hold Bit status when power to the PLC is turned ON,
the contents of the CIO Area, the Work Area, part of
the Auxiliary Area, timer Completion Flag and PVs,
Index Registers, and the Data Registers will be
saved for up to 20 days.
FINS commands can be sent to a computer connected via
the Host Link System by executing Network Communications Instructions from the PLC.
Host Link communications can be used for remote programming and remote monitoring through a Controller Link
System or Ethernet network.
Communicating across Remote programming and monitoring using the Support
network layers
Software, as well as FINS message communications, can
be conducted across network layers, including other types
of network.
Pre-Ver. 2.0:
Three layers
Version 2.0 or later: Eight layers for Controller Link and
Ethernet (see note). Three layers for
DeviceNet and SYSMAC LINK.
Storing comments in
CPU Unit
Reference
Up to 20 errors are stored in the error log. Information
Error log: Programming Manual
includes the error code, error details, and the time the error (W394)
occurred.
A CS1-H CPU Unit can be set so that user-defined FAL
errors are not stored in the error log.
Host Links and non-solicited
communications: 2-5-2 Systems
Remote programming and monitoring: Programming Manual
(W394)
Controller Link 2-5-3 Communications Network System
Host Links and FINS message
service: 2-5-2 Systems
Note To construct a network of eight layers, it is necessary
to use the CX-Integrator or CX-Programmer (version
4.0 or higher) to set routing tables.
I/O comments can be stored as symbol table files in the
I/O comments: CX-Programmer
Memory Card, EM file memory, or comment memory (see Operation Manual (W446)
note).
Storing comments in CPU Unit:
Programming Manual (W394)
Note Comment memory is supported for CS/CJ-series
CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later only.
Section 2-1
Specifications
Item
Program check
Control output signals
Battery life
Specification
Program checks are performed at the beginning of operation for items such as no END instruction and instruction
errors.
CX-Programmer can also be used to check programs.
RUN output: The internal contacts will turn ON (close)
while the CPU Unit is operating.
These terminals are provided only on the C200HWPA204R and C200HW-PA209R Power Supply Units.
Battery Set: CS1W-BAT01
Self-diagnostics
CPU errors (watchdog timer), I/O verification errors, I/O
bus errors, memory errors, and battery errors.
Other functions
Storage of number of times power has been interrupted.
(Stored in A514.)
2-1-2
Item
Power
Supply
Unit
Supply
voltage
Operating
voltage
range
Power
consumption
Inrush
current
Output
capacity
(See note
7.)
Reference
Program check: Programming
Manual (W394)
RUN output: Programming Manual (W394)
Battery life and replacement
period: 12-2-1 Battery Replacement
CPU, I/O bus, memory, and battery errors: 11-2-4 Error Processing Flowchart
Number of power interruptions:
10-3 Power OFF Operation
General Specifications
C200HWPA204
C200HWPA204S
C200HWPA204R
100 to 120 V AC or 200 to 240 V AC,
50/60 Hz
85 to 132 V AC or 170 to 264 V AC
120 VA max.
30 A max.
100 to 240 V
AC (wide
range),
50/60 Hz
85 to 264 V
AC, 47 to
63 Hz
100 VA max.
100 to 120 V
AC or 200 to
240 V AC,
50/60 Hz
85 to 132 V
AC or 170 to
264 V AC
180 VA max.
C200HWPD024
C200HWPD025
24 V DC
24 V DC
19.2 to 28.8 V 19.2 to 28.8 V
DC
DC
40 W max.
60 W max.
30 A max.
30 A max.
0.625 A,
26 V DC
100 to 120 V 30 A max.
AC input
15 A max.
(cold start at
room temperature)
200 to 240 V
AC input
30 A max.
(cold start at
room temperature)
9 A, 5 V DC
(including the
CPU Unit
power supply)
0.625 A,
1.3 A,
26 V DC
26 V DC
4.6 A, 5 V DC
(including the
CPU Unit
power supply)
0.625 A,
26 V DC
5.3 A, 5 V DC
(including the
CPU Unit
power supply)
1.3 A,
26 V DC
Total: 30 W
max.
Total: 30 W
max.
Total: 30 W
max.
Total: 40 W
max.
4.6 A, 5 V DC
0.625 A, 26 V 0.625 A,
DC
26 V DC
0.8 A,
24 V DC
Total: 30 W
Total: 30 W
max.
max.
Specifications
C200HWC200HWPA204C
PA209R
Total: 45 W
max.
87
Section 2-1
Specifications
Item
Power
Supply
Unit
C200HWPA204
C200HWPA204S
C200HWPA204R
Output
terminal
(service
supply)
Not provided
RUN
output
(See note
2.)
Not provided
Provided.
Not provided
At consumption of less
than 0.3 A,
24-V DC supply will be
+17%/–11%;
at 0.3 A or
greater,
+10%/–11%
(lot 0197 or
later)
Contact configuration:
SPST-NO
Switch
capacity:
250 V AC,
2 A (resistive
load)
250 V AC,
0.5 A (induction load),
24 V DC, 2 A
Replacement
notification
function
Not provided
Specifications
C200HWC200HWPA204C
PA209R
Not provided
With
Alarm output
(open-collector output)
30 V DC
max., 50 mA
max.
Insulation 20 MΩ min. (at 500 V DC) between AC exter- 20 MΩ min.
resistance nal and GR terminals (See note.)
(at 500 V DC)
between all
external terminals and
GR terminal,
and between
all alarm output terminals.
20 MΩ min.
(at 250 V DC)
between all
alarm output
terminals and
GR terminal.
88
C200HWPD024
C200HWPD025
Contact con- Not provided
figuration:
SPST-NO
Switch capacity: 240 V AC,
2A (resistive
load)
120 V AC,
0.5 A (induction load)
24 V DC, 2 A
(resistive
load)
24 V DC, 2 A
(induction
load)
Not provided
20 MΩ min.
(at 500 V DC)
between AC
external and
GR terminals
(See note 1.)
20 MΩ min.
(at 500 V DC) between DC
external and GR terminals
(See note 1.)
Section 2-1
Specifications
Item
Power
Supply
Unit
C200HWPA204
Dielectric
strength
(See note
5.)
2,300 V AC 50/60 Hz for 1 min between AC
external and GR terminals (See note.)
Leakage current: 10 mA max.
C200HWPA204S
C200HWPA204R
1,000 V AC 50/60 Hz for 1 min between AC
external and GR terminals (See note.)
Leakage current: 10 mA max.
Specifications
C200HWC200HWPA204C
PA209R
2,300 V AC,
50/60 Hz for 1
minute
between all
external terminals and
GR terminal
and between
all alarm output terminals
with a leakage current of
10 mA max.
1,000 V AC,
50/60 Hz for 1
minute
between all
alarm output
terminals and
GR terminal
with a leakage current of
10 mA max.
2,300 V AC
50/60 Hz for
1 min
between AC
external and
GR terminals
(See note 1.)
Leakage current: 10 mA
max.
C200HWPD024
C200HWPD025
1,000 V AC 50/60 Hz for
1 min between DC external
and GR terminals (See note
1.).
Leakage current: 10 mA max.
1,000 V AC
50/60 Hz for
1 min
between AC
external and
GR terminals
(See note.)
Leakage
current:
10 mA max.
Noise
2 kV on power supply line (conforming to IEC61000-4-4)
immunity
Vibration
10 to 57 Hz, 0.075-mm amplitude, 57 to 150 Hz, acceleration: 9.8 m/s2 in X, Y, and Z directions for 80
resistance minutes (Time coefficient: 8 minutes ×coefficient factor 10 = total time 80 min.)
CPU Unit mounted to a DIN track: 2 to 55 Hz, 2.94 m/s2 in X, Y, and Z directions for 20 minutes
Shock
147 m/s2 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions (according to JIS 0041)
resistance
Ambient
0 to 55°C
operating
temperature
Ambient
10% to 90% (with no condensation)
10% to 90%
10% to 90% (with no condensation)
operating
(without conhumidity
densation)
(See note 4.)
AtmoMust be free from corrosive gases.
sphere
Ambient
–20 to 75°C (excluding battery)
–20 to 75°C
–20 to 75°C (excluding battery)
storage
(See note 4.)
temperature
Grounding Less than 100 Ω
Enclosure Mounted in a panel.
Weight
All models are each 6 kg max.
CPU Rack 2 slots:198.5 × 157 × 123 (W x H x D)
Same as for
Same as for C200HW-PA204.
dimenC200HW3 slots: 260 × 130 × 123 (W x H x D)
sions
PA204.
5 slots: 330 × 130 × 123 (W x H x D)
(mm)
(See note 5.)
(See note 8 slots: 435 × 130 × 123 (W x H x D)
10 slots:505 × 130 × 123 (W x H x D)
3.)
Safety
measures
(See note
6.)
Conforms to cULus, NK, Lloyds, and EC directives.
Note
1. Disconnect the Power Supply Unit’s LG terminal from the GR terminal
when testing insulation and dielectric strength.
89
Section 2-1
Specifications
Testing the insulation and dielectric strength with the LG terminal and the
GR terminals connected will damage internal circuits in the CPU Unit.
2. Supported only when mounted to CPU Backplane.
3. The depth is 153 mm for the C200HW-PA209R/PD025 Power Supply Unit,
111 mm for the C200HW-PA204C Power Supply Unit.
4. Maintain an ambient storage temperature of −25 to 30°C and relative humidity of 25% to 70% when storing the C200HW-PA204C for longer than 3
months to keep the replacement notification function in optimum working
condition.
5. Change the applied voltage gradually using the adjuster on the Tester. If
the full dielectric strength voltage is applied or turned OFF using the switch
on the Tester, the generated impulse voltage may damage the Unit.
6. The C200HW-PA204C/PD025 are pending approval for NK and Lloyds
Standards.
7. The Power Supply Unit’s internal parts may deteriorate and be damaged if
the power supply output capacity is exceeded for a long time or the outputs
are short-circuited.
90
Section 2-2
CPU Unit Components
2-2
2-2-1
CPU Unit Components
Components
8. Inner Board
connector
compartment
1. Indicators
9. Peripheral port
2. Memory Card indicators
10. RS-232C port
3. Memory Card power supply switch
4. Memory Card eject button
6. Memory Card
connector
7. Memory Card
Battery compartment cover lifted
Inner Board
(e.g., Serial Communications Board)
5. DIP switch
91
Section 2-2
CPU Unit Components
1,2,3...
1. Indicators
The following table describes the LED indicators on the front panel of the
CPU Unit.
Indicator
RUN (green)
Meaning
Lights when the PLC is operating normally in MONITOR or RUN
mode.
ERR/ALM (red) Flashes if a non-fatal error occurs that does not stop the CPU Unit.
If a non-fatal error occurs, the CPU Unit will continue operating.
Lights if a fatal error occurs that stops the CPU Unit or if a hardware error occurs. If a fatal or hardware error occurs, the CPU Unit
will stop operating, and the outputs from all Output Units will turn
OFF.
INH (orange)
Lights when the Output OFF Bit (A50015) turns ON. If the Output
OFF Bit is turned ON, the outputs from all Output Units will turn
OFF.
BKUP (orange; Lights when data is being backed up from RAM to the flash memory.
CS1-H CPU
Units only)
Do not turn OFF the CPU Unit when this indicator is lit.
PRPHL
Flashes when the CPU Unit is communicating via the peripheral
(orange)
port.
COMM (orange) Flashes when the CPU Unit is communicating via the RS-232C
port.
MCPWR
Flashes when power is being supplied to the Memory Card.
(green)
BUSY (orange) Flashes when the Memory Card is being accessed.
2. Memory Card Indicators
The MCPWR indicator flashes green when power is being supplied to the
Memory Card and the BUSY indicator flashes orange when the Memory
Card is being accessed.
3. Memory Card Power Supply Switch
Press the Memory Card power supply switch to disconnect power before
removing the Memory Card. Also, press the Memory Card Power Supply
Switch to perform an easy backup operation (i.e., to write to or verify the
Memory Card), or to stop the MCPWR indicator flashing due to a write or
verify malfunction when performing an easy backup to the Memory Card.
4. Memory Card Eject Button
Press the Memory Card eject button to remove the Memory Card from the
CPU Unit before turning the power OFF or to perform an easy backup operation.
5. DIP Switch
The CS1 CPU Unit has an 8-pin DIP switch that is used to set basic operational parameters for the CPU Unit. The DIP switch is located under the
cover of the battery compartment. The DIP switch pin settings are described in the following table.
92
CPU Unit Components
Pin No.
1
2
3
(Not used
by CS1-H
CPU
Units.)
4
5
6
7
8
Section 2-2
Setting
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Function
Writing disabled for user program memory.
Writing enabled for user program memory.
The user program is automatically transferred and executed when power is turned ON.
The user program is automatically transferred but not executed when power is turned ON.
CS1 CPU Units only: Programming Console messages displayed in English.
CS1 CPU Units only: Programming Console messages displayed in the language stored in system ROM. (Messages displayed in Japanese with the Japanese version of system ROM.)
ON
OFF
Use peripheral port communications parameters set in the PLC Setup.
Auto-detect Programming Console or CX-Programmer communications parameters at the
peripheral port.
Auto-detect Programming Console or CX-Programmer communications parameters at the RS232C port.
Use RS-232C port communications parameters set in the PLC Setup.
User-defined pin. Turns OFF the User DIP Switch Pin Flag (A39512).
User-defined pin. Turns ON the User DIP Switch Pin Flag (A39512).
Easy backup by reading/writing to Memory Card.
Easy backup by verifying contents of Memory Card.
Always OFF.
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
6. Memory Card Connector
The Memory Card connector connects the Memory Card to the CPU Unit.
7. Memory Card
Memory Cards fit into the slot located on the lower right side of the CPU
Unit. Memory Cards are not provided with the PLC and must be ordered
separately and installed in the CPU Unit.
8. Inner Board Connector Compartment
The Inner Board connector compartment is used to connect Inner Boards
such as the Serial Communications Board.
9. Peripheral Port
The peripheral port is connected to Programming Devices, such as a Programming Console or Host Computers. Refer to 3-3 Programming Devices
for details.
10. RS-232C Port
The RS-232C port is connected to Programming Devices (excluding Programming Console), Host Computers, general-purpose external devices,
Programmable Terminals, and other devices. Refer to 3-3 Programming
Devices for details.
93
Section 2-2
CPU Unit Components
2-2-2
CS-series CPU Unit Capabilities
CS1-H CPU Units
Model
CS1H-CPU67H
CS1H-CPU66H
CS1H-CPU65H
CS1H-CPU64H
CS1H-CPU63H
CS1G-CPU45H
CS1G-CPU44H
CS1G-CPU43H
CS1G-CPU42H
I/O bits
5120 bits
(Up to 7
Expansion
Racks)
5120 bits
(Up to 7
Expansion
Racks)
1280 bits
(Up to 3
Expansion
Racks)
960 bits
(Up to 2
Expansion
Racks)
Program
capacity
Data memory
capacity
(See note.)
250K steps
120K steps
60K steps
30K steps
20K steps
60K steps
448K words
256K words
128K words
64K words
64K words
128K words
30K steps
64K words
20K steps
10K steps
64K words
64K words
Ladder
instruction
processing
speed
0.02 µs
Internal communications
ports
Optional
products
Peripheral port Memory Cards
and
Inner Boards
RS-232C port. such as Serial
Communications Boards
0.04 µs
Note The available Data Memory capacity is the sum of the Data Memory (DM) and
the Extended Data Memory (EM).
CS1 CPU Units
Model
CS1H-CPU67-EV1
CS1H-CPU66-EV1
CS1H-CPU65-EV1
CS1H-CPU64-EV1
CS1H-CPU63-EV1
CS1G-CPU45-EV1
CS1G-CPU44-EV1
CS1G-CPU43-EV1
CS1G-CPU42-EV1
I/O bits
5120 bits
(Up to 7
Expansion
Racks)
5120 bits
(Up to 7
Expansion
Racks)
1280 bits
(Up to 3
Expansion
Racks)
960 bits
(Up to 2
Expansion
Racks)
Program
capacity
Data memory
capacity
(See note.)
250K steps
448K words
Ladder
instruction
processing
speed
0.04 µs
120K steps
60K steps
30K steps
20K steps
60K steps
256K words
128K words
64K words
32K words
128K words
0.08 µs
30K steps
64K words
20K steps
10K steps
32K words
32K words
Internal communications
ports
Optional
products
Peripheral port Memory Cards
and
Inner Boards
RS-232C port. such as Serial
Communications Boards
Note The available Data Memory capacity is the sum of the Data Memory (DM) and
the Extended Data Memory (EM).
94
Section 2-2
CPU Unit Components
2-2-3
Unit Classifications
CS-series CPU Units can exchange data with Basic I/O Units, Special I/O
Units, and CS-series CPU Bus Units as shown in the following diagram.
C200H Basic I/O Units
C200H Interrupt Input Units
C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units
Basic I/O Units
I/O Units
CS-series Basic I/O Units
CS-series Units
C200H High-density I/O Units
(classified as C200H Special I/O Units)
Special I/O Units
C200H Special I/O Units
CS-series Special I/O Units
CPU Bus Units
2-2-4
CS-series CPU Bus Units
Data Communications
CPU Unit Data Communications
Unit
CS-series Basic I/O
Units
C200H Basic I/O
Units
C200H Group-2 Highdensity I/O Units
(classified as Basic
I/O Units)
CS-series Special I/O
Units
C200H Special I/O
Units
CPU Bus Units
Data Exchange during cyclic servicing
(allocations)
According to I/O
I/O refreshing
allocations
(Words are allocated
in order according to
the position the Unit is
mounted.)
Unit No. allocations
Special I/O Unit Area
(CIO): 10 words/Unit
Special I/O Unit Area
(DM): 100 words/Unit
CS-series CPU Bus
Unit Area (CIO):
5 words/ Unit
CS-series CPU Bus
Unit Area (DM): 100
words/Unit
Event service data
communications
(IORD/IOWR
instruction)
Not provided.
I/O refreshing using
IORF instruction
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
(Not available for some (Not available for some
Units.)
Units.)
Yes
Yes
(Not available for some (Not available for some
Units.)
Units.)
Not provided.
No
95
Section 2-2
CPU Unit Components
CPU Unit Connections
Unit
CS-series Basic I/O
Units
C200H Basic I/O
Units
C200H Group-2 Highdensity I/O Units
(classified as Basic
I/O Units)
CS-series Special I/O
Units
C200H Special I/O
Units
CPU Bus Units
Maximum Number of Units on
CPU Racks and
Expansion
Racks
80
(See note 1.)
80
(See note 1.)
80
(See note 1.)
CPU Rack
(See note 5.)
Racks to which Unit can be mounted
C200H
CS-series
SYSMAC BUS
Expansion
Expansion
Slave Racks
I/O Racks
Racks
(See note 5.)
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
80
(See notes 2 and
4.)
16
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
16
Yes
No
Yes
(See note 3.)
Yes (See notes 3
and 4.)
No
Note
1. The maximum number of Units on CPU Racks and Expansion Racks is 80
because there is a maximum of 80 slots.
2. There is a maximum of 80 slots.
3. Some CS-series CPU Bus Units cannot be mounted to a CS-series Expansion Rack.
4. Up to 89 Special I/O Units can be mounted as follows: Up to 79 CS-series
Special I/O Units can be mounted to the CPU Rack and CS-series Expansion Racks and up to 10 C200H Special I/O Units can be mounted to the
SYSMAC BUS Slave Racks. The C200H Special I/O Units must be assigned unit numbers 0 to 9, and each Remote I/O Master Unit must be
counted as a CS-series Special I/O Unit.
5. C200H Units and Racks cannot be used with CS-series-only CPU Racks
or Expansion Racks.
96
Section 2-3
Basic System Configuration
2-3
Basic System Configuration
2-3-1
Basic System Configuration
CPU Rack
A CPU Rack consists of a CPU Unit, a Power Supply Unit, a CPU Backplane,
Basic I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units. A Serial Communications Board and Memory Card are optional.
Note
1. The Backplanes required depend on which CPU Racks, Expansion I/O
Racks, and Slave Racks are used.
2. Expansion Racks cannot be connected to a 2-slot CPU Rack.
3. A maximum of four C200HS-INT01 Interrupt Input Units can be connected
to one CPU Unit.
Expansion Racks
The Expansion Racks required for the C200H CPU Units and CS-series CPU
Units are different.
• C200H Expansion I/O Racks can be connected to CPU Racks, CS-series
Expansion Racks, or other C200H Expansion I/O Racks.
• CS-series Expansion Racks can be connected to CPU Racks or other
CS-series Expansion Racks. A CS-series Expansion Rack consists of a
Power Supply Unit, a CS-series Expansion Backplane or C200H Expansion I/O Backplane, a Basic I/O Unit, a Special I/O Unit, and a CS-series
CPU Bus Unit.
Note a) CS-series Expansion Racks cannot be connected after C200H
Expansion I/O Racks.
b) CS-series Basic I/O Units, CS-series Special I/O Units and CS-series CPU Bus Units cannot be mounted to C200H Expansion I/O
Racks.
c) Interrupt Input Units cannot be mounted to CS-series Expansion
Racks or C200H Expansion I/O Racks.
CS-series Long-distance
Expansion Racks
I/O Control Units and I/O Interface Units can be used to create systems containing CS-series Long-distance Expansion Racks. Up to two series of Longdistance Expansion Racks can be connected, each measuring up to 50 m, for
a total coverage of 100 m.
SYSMAC BUS Slave
Racks
Up to 5 SYSMAC BUS Slave Racks can be connected to one SYSMAC BUS
Remote I/O Master Unit. A maximum of 5 Units, however, can be connected
to one CPU Unit.
A SYSMAC BUS Slave Rack consists of a Remote I/O Slave Unit, a Remote
I/O Slave Rack Backplane, a Basic I/O Unit, and a Special I/O Unit.
Note
1. C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units, Interrupt Input Units, CS-series
Basic I/O Units, CS-series Special I/O Units and CS-series CPU Bus Units
cannot be mounted to SYSMAC BUS Slave Racks.
97
Section 2-3
Basic System Configuration
2. SYSMAC BUS Slave Racks can be connected to C200H Expansion I/O
Racks using C200H I/O Connecting Cables.
CPU Rack
CPU Backplane
Power Supply Unit
I/O Units
Special I/O Units
CS1 CPU Bus Units
Memory Card
Serial Communications Board
Remote I/O Master Unit
Expansion Rack
I/O Backplane
I/O Connecting
Cables
I/O Units
Special I/O Units
CS1 CPU Bus Units
Power Supply Unit
Optical fiber cables
Two-core cables
SYSMAC BUS Slave Rack
Backplane
I/O Units
Special I/O Units
Remote I/O Slave Unit
98
Section 2-3
Basic System Configuration
2-3-2
CPU Rack
A CS-series CPU Rack consists of a CPU Backplane, a Power Supply Unit,
and various other Units.
CPU Backplane (2, 3, 5, 8, or 10 slots)
CPU Unit
Power Supply Unit
Peripheral port
RS-232C port
Other Units
(Depending on the CPU Backplane, 2, 3, 5, 8,
or 10 Units can be mounted)
Inner Board
connector
Memory Card compartment
Memory Card
Name
CPU Rack
Configuration
Remarks
CPU Backplane
One of each Unit required for every CPU Rack.
Refer to the following table for details on applicable models.
CPU Unit
Power Supply Unit
Memory Card
Serial Communications Board
Install as required.
Refer to the following table for details on applicable models.
Units
CS1-H CPU Units
Name
CS-series CS1-H CPU
Units
Model
Specifications
CS1H-CPU67H
I/O bits: 5,120, Program capacity: 250K steps
Data Memory: 448K words (DM: 32K words, EM: 32K words × 13 banks)
CS1H-CPU66H
I/O bits: 5,120, Program capacity: 120K steps
Data Memory: 256K words (DM: 32K words, EM: 32K words × 7 banks)
CS1H-CPU65H
I/O bits: 5,120, Program capacity: 60K steps
Data Memory: 128K words (DM: 32K words, EM: 32K words × 3 banks)
CS1H-CPU64H
I/O bits: 5,120, Program capacity: 30K steps
Data Memory: 64K words (DM: 32K words, EM: 32K words × 1 banks)
CS1H-CPU63H
I/O bits: 5,120, Program capacity: 20K steps
Data Memory: 32K words (DM: 32K words, EM: 32K words × 1 banks)
CS1H-CPU45H
I/O bits: 5,120, Program capacity: 60K steps
Data Memory: 128K words (DM: 32K words, EM: 32K words × 3 banks)
CS1H-CPU44H
I/O bits: 1,280, Program capacity: 30K steps
Data Memory: 64K words (DM: 32K words, EM: 32K words × 1 banks)
CS1H-CPU43H
I/O bits: 960, Program capacity: 20K steps
Data Memory: 64K words (DM: 32K words, EM: 32K words × 1 banks)
CS1H-CPU42H
I/O bits: 960, Program capacity: 10K steps
Data Memory: 64K words (DM: 32K words, EM: 32K words × 1 banks)
99
Section 2-3
Basic System Configuration
Name
Standard CPU
Backplanes
CS-series-only CPU
Backplanes
Name
Power Supply Units
Model
Specifications
CS1W-BC023
2 slots (Expansion Racks cannot be connected)
CS1W-BC033
3 slots
CS1W-BC053
5 slots
CS1W-BC083
8 slots
CS1W-BC103
10 slots
CS1W-BC022
2 slots (See note 1.)
CS1W-BC032
3 slots (See note 1.)
CS1W-BC052
5 slots (See note 1.)
CS1W-BC082
8 slots (See note 1.)
CS1W-BC102
10 slots (See note 1.)
Model
C200HW-PA204
C200HW-PA204S
C200HW-PA204R
C200HW-PA204C
C200HW-PD024
C200HW-PA209R
Memory Cards
Serial Communications
Boards
Programming Consoles
Programming Console
Key Sheet
Programming Console
Connecting Cables
C200HW-PD025
HMC-EF372
HMC-EF672
HMC-EF183
HMC-AP001
CS1W-SCB21
CS1W-SCB41
CQM1H-PRO01-E
CQM1-PRO01-E
C200H-PRO27-E
CS1W-KS001-E
CS1W-CN114
CS1W-CN224
CS1W-CN624
Programming Device
Connecting Cables
(for peripheral port)
CS1W-CN118
CS1W-CN226
CS1W-CN626
Specifications
100 to 120 V AC or 200 to 240 V AC
100 to 120 V AC or 200 to 240 V AC (with 0.8 A 24 V DC service
power supply)
Output capacity: 4.6 A, 5 V DC
100 to 120 V AC or 200 to 240 V AC (with RUN output)
Output capacity: 4.6 A, 5 V DC
100 to 240 V AC (with replacement notification), output capacity:
4.6 A at 5 V DC
24 V DC
100 to 120 V AC or 200 to 240 V AC (with RUN output)
Output capacity: 9 A, 5 V DC
24 V DC
Flash memory, 30 MB
Flash memory, 64 MB
Flash memory, 128 MB (See note 3.)
Memory Card Adapter
2 × RS-232C ports, protocol macro function
1 × RS-232C port + 1 × RS-422/485 port, protocol macro function
An English Keyboard Sheet (CS1W-KS001-E) is required.
For CQM1-PRO01 or C200H-PRO27
Connects the CQM1-PRO01-E Programming Console.
(Length: 0.05 m)
Connects the CQM1-PRO27-E Programming Console.
(Length: 2.0 m)
Connects the CQM1-PRO27-E Programming Console.
(Length: 6.0 m)
Connects DOS computers, D-Sub 9-pin receptacle (For converting
between RS-232C cable and peripherals) (Length: 0.1 m)
Connects DOS computers, D-Sub 9-pin (Length: 2.0 m)
Connects DOS computers, D-Sub 9-pin (Length: 6.0 m)
Note: 1. C200H Units (C200H Basic I/O Units, C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units, and C200H Special I/O
Units) cannot be used with CS-series-only CPU Backplanes.
2. When using the CX-Programmer with the computer connected via a Programming Device Connecting
Cable for the peripheral port, a Host Link (SYSWAY) software connection is not possible. Use a toolbus
(peripheral bus) connection.
3. The HMC-EF183 cannot be used with all CPU Units. Before ordering, refer to Precaution on Applicable
Units on page 175.
100
Section 2-3
Basic System Configuration
CS1 CPU Units
Model
CS1H-CPU67-EV1
CS1H-CPU66-EV1
CS1H-CPU65-EV1
CS1H-CPU64-EV1
CS1H-CPU63-EV1
CS1G-CPU45-EV1
CS1G-CPU44-EV1
CS1G-CPU43-EV1
CS1G-CPU42-EV1
Specifications
I/O bits: 5,120, Program capacity: 250K steps
Data Memory: 448K words (DM: 32K words, EM: 32K words × 13 banks)
I/O bits: 5,120, Program capacity: 120K steps
Data Memory: 256K words (DM: 32K words, EM: 32K words × 7 banks)
I/O bits: 5,120, Program capacity: 60K steps
Data Memory: 128K words (DM: 32K words, EM: 32K words × 3 banks)
I/O bits: 5,120, Program capacity: 30K steps
Data Memory: 64K words (DM: 32K words, EM: 32K words × 1 banks)
I/O bits: 5,120, Program capacity: 20K steps
Data Memory: 32K words (DM: 32K words, EM: None)
I/O bits: 5,120, Program capacity: 60K steps
Data Memory: 128K words (DM: 32K words, EM: 32K words × 3 banks)
I/O bits: 1,280, Program capacity: 30K steps
Data Memory: 64K words (DM: 32K words, EM: 32K words × 1 banks)
I/O bits: 960, Program capacity: 20K steps
Data Memory: 32K words (DM: 32K words, EM: None)
I/O bits: 960, Program capacity: 10K steps
Data Memory: 32K words (DM: 32K words, EM: None)
Other Units
Name
Programming Device
Connecting Cables (for
RS-232C port)
Model
XW2Z-200S-CV
XW2Z-500S-CV
XW2Z-200S-V
XW2Z-500S-V
USB−Serial Conversion
Cable
Battery Set
CS1W-CIF31
CS1W-BAT01
Specifications
Connects DOS computers
D-Sub 9-pin (Length: 2.0 m), Static-resistant connector used.
Connects DOS computers
D-Sub 9-pin (Length: 5.0 m), Static-resistant connector used.
Connects DOS computers
D-Sub 9-pin (Length: 2.0 m) (See note.)
Connects DOS computers
D-Sub 9-pin (Length: 5.0 m) (See note.)
Converts between a USB connector and a D-Sub 9-pin connector.
Cable length: 0.5 m
For CS Series only.
Note A peripheral bus connection is not possible when connecting the CX-Programmer via an RS-232C Connecting Cable. Use the Host Link (SYSWAY)
connection.
Connecting Programming Devices
Programming Console
When using a Programming Console, connect the Programming Console to
the peripheral port of the CPU Unit and set pin 4 of the DIP switch on the front
panel of the Unit to OFF (automatically uses default communications parameters for the peripheral port).
101
Section 2-3
Basic System Configuration
CQM1H-PRO01-E/CQM1-PRO01-E
The Programming Console can be connected only to the peripheral port.
The following cable is included with the
CQM1-PRO01-E Programming Console
Programming Console
Cable
Length
CQM1H-PRO01-E Not required
2m
(pre-wired).
CQM1-PRO01-E
CS1W-CN114
0.05 m
CS1W-KS001-E
English Keyboard
Sheet required.
CQM1H-PRO01-E,
CQM1-PRO01-E
Programming
Console
Note Set pin 4 of the DIP switch on the
front panel of the CPU Unit to OFF.
Peripheral port
C200H-PRO27-E
The Programming Console can be connected only to the peripheral port.
CS1W-KS001-E
English Keyboard
Sheet required.
Programming Console
CQM1-PRO27-E
C200H-PRO27-E
Programming
Console
Cable
CS1W-CN224
CS1W-CN624
Length
2.0 m
6.0 m
Note Set pin 4 of the DIP switch on the
front panel of the CPU Unit to OFF.
Peripheral port
Note When an OMRON Programmable Terminal (PT) is connected to the RS-232C
port and Programming Console functions are being used, do not connect the
Programming Console at the same time.
102
Section 2-3
Basic System Configuration
Connecting Personal Computers Running Support Software
Connecting to Peripheral Port
RS-232C
Connecting Cables for Peripheral Port
Computer
DOS computer
(RS-232C, 9-pin)
DOS
Peripheral
port
Cable
Length
Computer
connector
CS1W-CN118
0.1 m
CS1W-CN226
2.0 m
D-Sub,
9-pin
CS1W-CN626
6.0 m
Note The CS1W-CN118 Cable is used with an RS-232C
cable to connect to the peripheral port on the CPU
Unit as shown below. The CS1W-CN118 Cable can
not be used with an RS-232C cable whose model
number ends in -V for a peripheral bus connection
and must be used for a Host Link (SYSMAC WAY)
connection.
RS-232C Cable
XW2Z-200S-@@: 2 m
XW2Z-500S-@@: 5 m
CS1W-CN118 Cable
Peripheral
port
Connecting to RS-232C Port
Connecting Cables for RS-232C Port
Computer
RS-232C Cable
DOS version
(RS-232C, 9-pin)
XW2Z-200S-CV
or XW2Z-200S-V: 2 m
XW2Z-500S-CV
or XW2Z-500S-V: 5 m
DOS
Cable
Length
XW2Z-200S-CV 2.0 m
or XW2Z-200S-V
XW2Z-500S-CV 5.0 m
or XW2Z-500S-V
Computer
connector
D-Sub,
9-pin
Note The XW2Z-200S-CV and XW2Z-500S-CV use static-resistRS-232C port
ant connectors and can be connected to the peripheral bus
or the Host Link. The XW2Z-200S-V and XW2Z-500S-V,
however, can only be connected to the Host Link, not the
peripheral bus.
103
Section 2-3
Basic System Configuration
Using Personal Computer’s USB Port (USB-Serial Conversion Cable)
Connecting to Peripheral Port
Cable
CS1W-CN226/626
Connection diagram
USB A plug connector (male)
CS1W-CIF31
D-sub connector
(9-pin, male)
CS/CJ-series PLC
Customizable Counter Unit
CS/CJ-series peripheral connector
D-sub connector
(9-pin, female)
Peripheral
port
Recommended cable:
CS1W-CN226/626
CQM1-CIF02
USB A plug connector (male)
CS1W-CIF31
D-sub connector
(9-pin, male)
CS/CJ-series PLC (See note.)
C-series peripheral CS/CJ-series
peripheral connector
D-sub connector connector
(9-pin, female)
Peripheral port
Recommended cable:
CQ1M-CIF02
CS1W-CN114
Note Connection supported for Host Link only when using
CS/CJ-series PLCs.
XW2Z-200S-CV/
500S-CV or
XW2Z-200S-V/
500S-V for RS-232C
USB A plug connector (male)
CS1W-CIF31
D-sub connector
(9-pin, male)
CS/CJ-series PLC
Customizable Counter Unit
D-sub connector (9-pin, male)
D-sub connector
(9-pin, female)
XW2Z-200S-CV/500S-CV
or XW2Z-200S-V/500S-V
(See note.)
D-sub connector
(9-pin, female)
Peripheral
port
CS/CJ-series
peripheral connector
CS1W-CN118
Note Connection supported for Host Link only when using
CS/CJ-series PLCs.
104
Section 2-3
Basic System Configuration
Connecting to RS-232C Port
Cable
XW2Z-200S-CV/500SCV or
XW2Z-200S-V/500S-V
for RS-232C
Connection diagram
USB A plug connector (male)
CS1W-CIF31
CS/CJ-series PLC
D-sub connector
(9-pin, male)
D-sub connector (9-pin, male)
D-sub connector
(9-pin, female)
RS-232C port
D-sub connector
(9-pin, female)
Recommended cable:
XW2Z-200S-CV/500S-CV or
XW2Z-200S-V/500S-V (See note.)
Note Connection supported for Host Link only when
using CS/CJ-series PLCs.
2-3-3
Expansion Racks
To expand the number of Units in the system, other Expansion Racks can be
connected to CPU Racks. The other Expansion Racks that can be connected
to the CPU Racks are Standard CS-series Expansion Racks, CS-series Longdistance Expansion Racks, CS-series-only Expansion Racks, and C200H
Expansion I/O Racks.
C200H Expansion I/O Racks can be connected after CS-series Expansion
Racks, however, the CS-series Expansion Racks cannot be connected after
C200H Expansion I/O Racks.
C200H Expansion I/O Racks cannot be connected in the same series as CSseries Long-distance Expansion Racks.
Note
1. Expansion Racks cannot be connected to a 2-slot CPU Rack (Backplane:
CS1W-BC02@).
2. C200H Units (C200H Basic I/O Units, C200H Group-2 High-density I/O
Units, and C200H Special I/O Units) cannot be used on CS-series-only
CS-series Expansion Backplanes (CS1W-BI@@2).
3. C200H Units cannot be used on the CPU Rack or Expansion Racks if a
CS-series-only CPU Backplane (CS1W-BC@@2) is used. The C200H
Units will not be recognized by the CPU Unit.
4. When using a CS-series-only Expansion Rack (CS1W-BI@@2) with a CPU
Unit with a lot number of 000427 (27 April 2000) or earlier, CS1 Units and
C200H Units cannot be used on any Expansion Racks past the CS-seriesonly CPU Expansion Rack. When using a CS-series-only CPU Backplane
(CS1W-BC@@2), CS1 Units and C200H Units cannot be used on any Expansion Racks.
When using C200H Units and both CS1W-BC@@2 and CS1W-BI@@2
Backplanes are used, use a CPU Unit with a lot number of 000428 (28 April
2000) or later. (When using a CS-series-only CPU Backplane (CS1WBC@@2), the restriction described in note 3 above applies, and so C200H
Units cannot be mounted on Expansion Racks even if a CPU Unit with a
lot number of 000428 or later is used.)
105
Section 2-3
Basic System Configuration
Examples of Mixing Backplanes (❍: Mountable, ×: Not mountable)
Example 1
Example 2
Rack
Backplane name
Backplane model
CS-series
Units
C200H Units
CPU Rack
Expansion Racks
Expansion Racks
CPU Rack
Expansion Racks
CPU Backplane
CS-series Expansion Backplane
C200H Expansion I/O Backplane
CPU Backplane
CS-series-only Expansion Backplane
CS-series Expansion Backplane
CPU Backplane
CS-series-only Expansion Backplane
C200H Expansion I/O Backplane
CS-series-only CPU Backplane
CS-series-only Expansion Backplane
CS-series Expansion Backplane
CS1W-BC@@3
CS1W-BI@@3
C200HW-BI@@1-V1
CS1W-BC@@3
CS1W-BI@@2
❍
❍
×
❍
❍ (See note 4.)
❍
❍
❍
❍
× (See note 2.)
CS1W-BI@@3
CS1W-BC@@3
CS1W-BI@@2
❍ (See note 4.) ❍ (See note 4.)
❍
❍
❍ (See note 4.) × (See note 2.)
Example 3
Expansion Racks
CPU Rack
Expansion Racks
Example 4
Expansion Racks
CPU Rack
Expansion Racks
Expansion Racks
C200HW-BI@@1-V1 ×
❍ (See note 4.)
CS1W-BC@@2
❍
× (See note 3.)
CS1W-BI@@2
❍ (See note 4.) × (See notes 2
and 3.)
CS1W-BI@@3
❍ (See note 4.) × (See note 3.)
CPU Unit
Power Supply Unit
Refer to Configuration Device List and 2-4 Units on CS-series Units and
C200H Units.
CPU Rack
(Other than a 2-slot CPU Rack)
Power Supply Unit
CS-series
I/O Connecting Cable
(30 cm, 70 cm, 2 m, 3 m,
5 m, 10 m, or 12 m)
CS-series Expansion Backplane
(3, 5, 8, 10 slots)
Power Supply Unit
CS to C200H I/O Connecting
Cables (30 cm, 70 cm, 2 m,
3 m, 5 m, 10 m, or 12 m)
C200H Expansion I/O Backplane
(3, 5, 8, 10 slots)
106
CS I/O Connecting Cables
Length
Cable
0.3 m
CS1W-CN313
0.7 m
CS1W-CN713
2m
CS1W-CN223
3m
CS1W-CN323
5m
CS1W-CN523
10 m
CS1W-CN133
12 m
CS1W-CN133B2
CS to C200H I/O Connecting Cables
Length
Cable
0.3 m
CS1W-CN311
0.7 m
CS1W-CN711
2m
CS1W-CN221
3m
CS1W-CN321
5m
CS1W-CN521
10 m
CS1W-CN131
12 m
CS1W-CN131B2
Section 2-3
Basic System Configuration
Expansion Patterns
The following diagrams show the 4 possible expansion patterns.
CS I/O
Connecting
Cable
CS I/O
Connecting
Cable
CPU Rack
(Excluding the
2-slot Rack.)
CS to C200H
I/O Connecting
Cable
CS Ex* pansion
Rack
*
CPU Rack
(Excluding the
2-slot Rack.)
CS I/O Connecting Cable
*
C200H
Expansion I/O
Rack
7 Expansion Racks
max.
*
C200H
Expansion I/O
Rack
CS to C200H
I/O Connecting
Cable
3 Expansion
Racks max.
*
CS Ex* pansion
Rack
C200H
Expansion I/O
Rack
Note: The above configuration is not possible if a
CS-series-only CPU Backplane is used.
* Power Supply Unit
*
CPU Rack
(Excluding the
2-slot Rack.)
CS Expansion
Rack
C200H
Expansion I/O
Rack
C200H I/O Connecting Cable
C200H I/O Connecting Cable
CS I/O
Connecting
Cable
*
*
C200H I/O Connecting Cable
CS Ex* pansion
Rack
3. CPU Rack connected to CS
Expansion Rack connected to
C200H Expansion I/O Rack
CPU Unit
*
2. CPU Rack connected to C200H
Expansion I/O Rack
CPU Unit
CPU Unit
1. CPU Rack connected to CS
Expansion Rack
C200H I/O Connecting Cable
*
7 Expansion
Racks max. (3
C200H Expansion
I/O Racks max.)
C200H
Expansion I/O
Rack
Note: The above configuration is not possible if a
CS-series-only CPU Backplane is used.
When using a CS-series-only CPU
Expansion Rack with a CPU Unit with a lot
number of 000427 (27 April 2000) or earlier,
C200H Units cannot be used past the CSseries-only CPU Expansion Rack.
107
Section 2-3
Basic System Configuration
CPU Unit
4. CPU Rack connected to CS1 Long-distance Expansion Racks
CS1 Connecting Cable
(30 cm/70 cm)
I/O Control
Unit**
*
*
Series A (50 m max.)
CPU Rack
(Excluding the
2-slot Rack.)
The following Units can be mounted: CS1/C200H I/O Units,
CS1/C200H Special I/O Units, and CS1 CPU Bus Units.
CS1 Expansion
Rack
Series B (50 m max.)
I/O Interface
Unit
I/O Interface
Unit
*
*
CS1 Long-distance
Expansion Rack
CS1 Long-distance
Expansion Rack
CV-series
Expansion
I/O Cables
(See table
below.)
I/O Interface
Unit
I/O Interface
Unit
*
* CS1 Long-distance
Expansion Rack
CS1 Long-distance
Expansion Rack
Terminator
I/O Interface
Unit
*
The following Units can
be mounted: CS1 I/O
Units, CS1 Special I/O
Units, and CS1 CPU
Bus Units. (C200H
Units cannot be
mounted.)
CS1 Long-distance
Expansion Rack
* Power Supply Unit
I/O Interface
Unit
*
CS1 Long-distance
Expansion Rack
**The I/O Control Unit can be mounted to
the CPU Rack or a CS1 Expansion Rack
(Rack No. 1). A CS1 Long-distance Expansion Rack is a CS1 Expansion Rack connected after an I/O Control Unit.
Terminator
Note The following CV-series Expansion I/O Cables are used to connect to the CSseries Long-distance Expansion Racks (i.e., between the I/O Control Unit and
the first I/O Interface Unit and between I/O Interface Units).
Model number
CV500-CN312
CV500-CN612
CV500-CN122
CV500-CN222
CV500-CN322
CV500-CN522
CV500-CN132
CV500-CN232
CV500-CN332
CV500-CN432
CV500-CN532
108
Length
0.3 m
0.6 m
1m
2m
3m
5m
10 m
20 m
30 m
40 m
50 m
Section 2-3
Basic System Configuration
Power Supply Unit
Note CS-series Expansion Racks must be connected before C200H Expansion I/O
Racks. The following configuration is not allowed.
C200H Expansion I/O Rack
Power Supply Unit
Not Allowed
CS1 Expansion Rack
Maximum Expansion Racks
Expansion pattern
CPU Rack with CS-series
Expansion Racks
CPU Rack with CS-series
Expansion Racks and
C200H Expansion I/O Racks
CPU Rack with C200H
Expansion I/O Racks
CPU Rack with CS-series
Expansion Racks and
CS-series Long-distance
Expansion Racks
Rack
CS-series Expansion Racks
Maximum No. of Racks
7 Racks
Remarks
The total cable length must
be 12 m or less.
CS-series Expansion Racks 7 Racks (with 3 C200H
and C200H Expansion I/O
Expansion I/O Racks max.)
Racks
C200H Expansion I/O Racks 3 Racks
CS-series Expansion Racks
and CS-series Long-distance Expansion Racks
7 Racks (with 1 CS-series
Expansion Rack max.)
The total cable length must
be 0.7 m or less to the last
CS-series Expansion Rack.
The total cable length must
be 50 m or less each for up
to two series of CS-series
Long-distance Expansion
Racks (100 m max. total).
Note C200H Units (C200H Basic I/O Units, C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units,
and C200H Special I/O Units) cannot be used with CS-series-only CPU
Racks.
109
Section 2-3
Basic System Configuration
Rack Configurations
Rack
Standard CS-series Expansion Racks
Configuration
Remarks
CS-series Expansion Backplane
One of each Unit is required.
Power Supply Unit
Note CS-series Expansion
Racks can be conCPU Backplane or CS-series CS I/O Connecting Cables
nected to C200H
Expansion Backplane
Expansion I/O Racks,
C200H Expansion I/O
CS to C200H I/O Connecting
however, C200H
Backplane
Cables
Expansion I/O Racks
must be connected
after CS-series
Expansion Racks.
CS-series-only Expansion
CS-series-only Backplane
One of each Unit is required.
Racks
Power Supply Unit
Note C200H Units and
Racks cannot be used
CPU Backplane or CS-series CS I/O Connecting Cables
with CS-series-only
Expansion Backplane
CPU Racks or Expansion Racks.
C200H Expansion I/O Racks C200H Expansion I/O Backplane
One of each Unit is required.
Power Supply Unit
CS-series Expansion
CS to C200H I/O Connecting
Backplane
Cables
C200H Expansion I/O
C200H I/O Connecting
Backplane
Cables
CS-series Long-distance
Mount an I/O Control Unit (CS1W-IC102) to the leftmost slot Each I/O Control Unit and
Expansion Racks
on the CPU Rack or the last CS-series Expansion Rack.
I/O Interface Unit requires
one slot.
Mount an I/O Interface Unit (CS1W-II102) to the leftmost
These Units are not alloslot on each Long-distance Expansion Rack.
cated I/O words.
Attach a Terminator (CV500-TER01) to the last Long-distance Expansion Rack in each series. Two Terminators are Use CV-series I/O Connecting Cables.
provided with the I/O Control Unit.
A CS-series Expansion Rack
cannot be connected to a
CS-series Long-distance
Expansion Rack using a CS
I/O Connecting Cable.
Configuration Device List
Name
Standard CS-series Expansion Backplanes
CS-series-only CS-series
Expansion Backplanes
C200H Expansion I/O
Backplanes
Model
CS1W-BI033
CS1W-BI053
CS1W-BI083
CS1W-BI103
CS1W-BI032
CS1W-BI052
CS1W-BI082
CS1W-BI102
C200HW-BI031
Specifications
3 slots
5 slots
8 slots
10 slots
3 slots
5 slots
8 slots
10 slots
3 slots
C200HW-BI051
5 slots
C200HW-BI081-V1 (See note.) 8 slots
Cable Length
Can be used for Long-distance Expansion Racks.
Can be used for Long-distance Expansion Racks.
Cannot be used for Long-distance Expansion Racks.
C200HW-BI101-V1 (See note.) 10 slots
Note Using the C200HW-BI081/BI101
The C200HW-BI081 or C200HW-BI101 can be used, but always use the
C200HW-BI081-V1 or C200HW-BI101-V1 if you are using the C200HWPA209R Power Supply.
110
Section 2-3
Basic System Configuration
Name
Power Supply Units
Model
C200HW-PA204
C200HW-PA204S
C200HW-PA204R
C200HW-PA204C
C200HW-PD024
C200HW-PA209R
I/O Control Unit
C200HW-PD025
CS1W-CN313 (See note.)
CS1W-CN713 (See note.)
CS1W-CN223
CS1W-CN323
CS1W-CN523
CS1W-CN133
CS1W-CN133B2
CS1W-CN311
CS1W-CN711
CS1W-CN221
CS1W-CN321
CS1W-CN521
CS1W-CN131
CS1W-CN131B2
C200H-CN311
C200H-CN711
C200H-CN221
C200H-CN521
C200H-CN131
CS1W-IC102
I/O Interface Unit
CS1W-II102
CS I/O Connecting Cables
CS to C200H I/O
Connecting Cables
C200H I/O Connecting
Cables
Specifications
100 to 120 V AC or 200 to
240 V AC
Output capacity: 4.6 A,
5 V DC
100 to 120 V AC or 200 to
240 V AC (with service
supply: 0.8 A, 24 V DC)
Output capacity: 4.6 A,
5 V DC
100 to 120 V AC or 200 to
240 V AC (with RUN output)
Output capacity: 4.6 A,
5 V DC
100 to 240 V C (with replacement notification)
Output capacity: 4.6 A at
5 V DC
24 V DC
100 to 120 V AC or 200 to
240 V AC (with RUN output)
Output capacity: 9 A, 5 V DC
24 V DC
Connects CS-series Expansion Backplanes to CPU
Backplanes or other CSseries Expansion Backplanes.
Cable Length
---
0.3 m
0.7 m
2m
3m
5m
10 m
12 m
Connects C200H Expansion 0.3 m
I/O Backplanes to CPU
0.7 m
Backplanes or CS-series
2
m
Expansion Backplanes.
3m
5m
10 m
12 m
Connects C200H Expansion 0.3 m
I/O Backplanes to other
0.7 m
C200H Expansion I/O Back2m
planes.
5m
10 m
Mounts to the leftmost slot on --the CPU Rack or a CS-series
Expansion Rack to enable
connecting CS-series Longdistance Expansion Racks.
Mounts to the leftmost slot on
an CS-series Long-distance
Expansion Rack.
Note Restrictions in Using CS-series I/O Connecting Cables
When using a CS1W-CN313 or CS1W-CN713 CS-series I/O Connecting
Cable with a CS1-H CPU Unit, always use a Cable manufactured on Septem-
111
Section 2-3
Basic System Configuration
ber 20, 2001 or later. Do not use Cables that do not have manufacturing numbers or Cables manufacture earlier than September 20, 2001.
Manufacturing Number Legend
Four-digit Numbers
@ @ @ @
Year (e.g., 1997 = 7, 2001 = 1
Month (January to September = 1 to 9, October to December = X to Z)
Day of month (01 to 31)
Six-digit Numbers
@ @ @ @ @ @
Symbol
Day of month (01 to 31)
Month (January to September = 01 to 12)
Year (e.g., 2003 = 03)
Name
CV-series I/O Connecting
Cables
Model
CV500-CN312
CV500-CN612
CV500-CN122
CV500-CN222
CV500-CN322
CV500-CN522
CV500-CN132
CV500-CN232
CV500-CN332
CV500-CN432
CV500-CN532
Connectable Units
Unit
Cable Length
0.3 m
0.6 m
1m
2m
3m
5m
10 m
20 m
30 m
40 m
50 m
The following table shows the Units that can be connected to CPU Racks, CSseries Expansion Racks, and C200H Expansion I/O Racks.
Refer to 2-4 Units for details on the limitations on each particular Unit.
Standard CPU
Rack
Yes
Yes
C200H Group-2
CS-series
High-density
Special
I/O Units (Basic
I/O Units
I/O Units)
Yes
Yes
CS-series-only
CPU Rack
Standard CSseries Expansion Racks
C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks
CS-series-only
Expansion
Racks
CS-series
Long-distance
Expansion
Racks
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
(See note 2.)
112
CS-series
Basic I/O Units
Specifications
Connects CS-series Longdistance Expansion Racks.
C200H Basic
I/O Units
C200H
Special I/O
Units
(See note 2.)
Yes
CPU Bus
Units
(See note 3.)
Yes
Section 2-3
Basic System Configuration
Note
1. The CS1W-INT01 and C200HS-INT01 Interrupt Input Units are Basic I/O
Units, but they can be mounted only to the CPU Rack.
2. Although CS-series CPU Bus Units can be mounted to CS-series Longdistance Expansion Racks, it is not recommended because doing so will
increase the cycle time.
Maximum Number of Units
The maximum number of expansion slots is 80, so the maximum number of
Units that can be connected is 80. The total number of each type of Unit is not
limited in the mounting location.
Note
1. CS1W-INT01 and C200HS-INT01 Interrupt Input Units are Basic I/O Units
but can be connected to CPU Racks only (four C200HS-INT01 and two
CS1W-INT01 Units max. per CPU Rack).
2. Up to 16 C200H Special I/O Units can be mounted.
3. Up to 16 CPU Bus Units can be mounted.
2-3-4
SYSMAC BUS Slave Racks
SYSMAC BUS Slave Racks are used to perform basic CS-series remote I/O
communications. The SYSMAC BUS Slave Rack allows comparatively smallscale (512 bits max.) remote I/O communications using Basic I/O Units and
Special I/O Units. The Slave Racks are connected using two-core cable or
optical fiber cables. Units such as Basic I/O Units and Special I/O Units can
be mounted to some Slave Racks. I/O Terminals can also be connected.
Configuration
Rack
SYSMAC BUS Slave
Racks
Configuration
Backplane
Remote I/O Slave Unit
Remarks
One of each required per
Rack.
SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Master Unit (two-conductor or optical fiber cables)
SYSMAC BUS (two-conductor or optical fiber cables)
Remote I/O
Slave Rack
Slave Rack
SYSMAC BUS
Remote I/O Slave
Unit
SYSMAC BUS
Remote I/O Slave
Unit
Maximum No. of Units and Racks
Per CPU Rack
Master Units
Slave Racks
2 Units max.
8 Racks max.
Per Master Unit
Slave Racks
8 Racks max.
Per Slave Rack
Maximum Units
10 Units max.
(depending on the
Backplane used)
113
Section 2-3
Basic System Configuration
Configuration Devices
Master Units
Unit
Model
Maximum Units
per CPU Unit
Maximum Slave Racks and I/O
bits per CPU Unit and Master
Unit
Slave Racks
Slave Rack
communications cables
Transmission
distance (total
extension)
I/O bits
SYSMAC BUS
Wired Remote
I/O Master Units
C200H-RM201
2 Units
8
1,280
(80 words)
Two-core cable
200 m
SYSMAC BUS
Optical Remote
I/O Master Units
C200H-RM001PV1
2 Units
8
1,280
(80 words)
Optical fiber
cable (PCF or
APF)
(See note.)
PCF: 200 m
APF: 20 m
Note PCF: Plastic Clad Optical Fiber Cable
APF: All Plastic Optical Fiber Cable.
Slave Racks
Name
Model
SYSMAC BUS Slave Rack
Backplanes
SYSMAC BUS Wired Remote
I/O Master Units
Specifications
C200H-BC101-V2
10 Units
C200H-BC081-V2
8 Units
C200H-BC051-V2
5 Units
Remarks
---
C200H-BC031-V2
3 Units
C200H-RT201
Power supply voltage: 100 to
120 V AC or 200 to 240 V AC
C200H-RT202
Power supply voltage:
24 V DC
SYSMAC BUS Optical Remote C200H-RT001-P
I/O Master Units
Power Supply Unit is not
required.
Power supply voltage: 100 to
120 V AC or 200 to 240 V AC
C200H-RT002-P
Power supply voltage:
24 V DC
Note Words are allocated to Units on SYSMAC BUS Slave Racks from the
SYSMAC BUS Area and not from the I/O Bit Area.
Connectable Units
Unit
CS-series
Basic I/O Units
C200H Basic
I/O Units
C200H Group-2
High-density I/O
Units (Basic I/O
Units)
CS-series Special I/O Units
C200H Special
I/O Units
CPU Bus Units
SYSMAC BUS
Wired Slave
Racks
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
(See note.)
No
SYSMAC BUS
Optical Slave
Racks
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
(See note.)
No
Note
1. C200H DeviceNet Master Units (C200HW-DRM21-V1), CompoBus/S
Master Units, PLC Link Units, and SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Master Units
cannot be connected to Wired Slave Racks.
2. Special I/O Unit words (CIO 2000 to CIO 2959) are allocated to C200H
Special I/O Units according to unit numbers.
3. Up to a total of 10 C200H Special I/O Units can be mounted to all Slave
Racks in a SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O System. Only unit numbers 0 to 9
can be used. The number of C200H Special I/O Units that can be mounted
to any one Slave Rack depends on the specific Units that are used, as
shown in the following table. For the purpose of calculating the maximum
number of Units, Units are classified into four groups, A to D.
114
Section 2-3
Basic System Configuration
Group
Units
A
High-speed Counter Units,
NC111/NC112/NC113/NC213
Position Control Units, ASCII
Units, Analog I/O Units, ID
Sensor Units, Fuzzy Logic Units
4 Units max.
B
High-density I/O Units, Temperature Controller Units,
Heating/Cooling Control
Units, PID Control Units,
Cam Positioner Units
8 Units max.
Maximum Units in
each group for
each Slave Rack
Maximum Units for 3A + B + 2C + 6D ≤ 12 and A + B + C + D ≤ 8
all groups for each
Slave Rack
C
Temperature
Sensor Units,
Voice Units
6 Units max.
D
NC211/NC413
Position Control Units,
Motion Control
Units
2 Units max.
Note I/O READ/WRITE instructions (IORD/IOWR) cannot be used with C200H
Special I/O Units that are mounted to a Slave Rack.
115
Section 2-4
Units
2-4
2-4-1
Units
Basic I/O Units
Input Units
CS-series Basic Input Units
Name
Specifications
Model
AC Input 100 to 120 V DC,
Units
100 to 120 V AC 16
inputs
Number
of bits
allocated
(CIO 0000
to
CIO 0319)
Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack
C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks
Reference
CS-series CS-series
ExpanLongsion
distance
Racks
Expansion
Racks
SYSMAC
BUS
Slave
Racks
CS1W-IA111
16
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
200 to 240 V AC, 16 CS1W-IA211
inputs
16
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
DC Input 24 V DC, 16 inputs
Units
CS1W-ID211
16
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Interrupt
Input
Units
24 V DC, 16 inputs
CS1W-INT01
16
Yes
No
Yes (See
notes 1
and 2.)
Yes (See
notes 1
and 2.)
No
Highspeed
Input
Units
24 V DC, 16 inputs
CS1W-IDP01
16
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
DC Input 24 V DC, 32 inputs
Units
24 V DC, 64 inputs
CS1W-ID231
32
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
CS1W-ID261
64
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
24 V DC, 96 inputs
CS1W-ID291
96
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Note
1. The interrupt function can be used only when the Unit is mounted to the
CPU Rack. (The Interrupt Input Unit can be used as a regular I/O Unit on
Expansion Racks.)
2. Can be used only with CPU Units with model numbers ending in “-V1,” i.e.,
CS1W-CPU4@-V1 or CS1W-CPU6@-V1.
3. The C200H-ID001 (8 no-voltage contact inputs, NPN) cannot be used with
CS-series PLCs.
116
Section 2-4
Units
C200H Basic Input Units
Name
Specifications
Model
Number
of bits
allocated
(CIO 0000
to
CIO 0319)
Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack
C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks
Reference
CS-series CS-series
ExpanLongsion
distance
Racks
Expansion
Racks
SYSMAC
BUS
Slave
Racks
AC Input 100 to 120V AC,
Units
8inputs
C200H-IA121
16
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
100 to 120V AC,
16inputs
C200H-IA122
16
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
100 to 120V AC,
16inputs
C200H-IA122V 16
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
200 to 240V AC,
8inputs
C200H-IA221
16
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
200 to 240V AC,
16inputs
C200H-IA222
16
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
200 to 240V AC,
16inputs
C200H-IA222V 16
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
12 to 24
V AC/V DC,
8inputs
C200H-IM211
16
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
24 V AC/V DC,
16inputs
C200H-IM212
16
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
DC Input 12 to 24 V DC,
Units
8inputs
C200H-ID211
16
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
24 V DC, 16 inputs
C200H-ID212
16
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
12 to 24 V DC,
8inputs
C200HS-INT01 16
Yes
Yes
Yes
(See note
1.)
No
No
AC/DC
Input
Units
Interrupt
Input
Units
Note
3-6 Basic
I/O Units
and Appendix A Specifications of
Basic I/O
Units and
High-density I/O
Units
1. The interrupt function can be used only when the Unit is mounted to the
CPU Rack. (The Interrupt Input Unit can be used as a regular I/O Unit on
Expansion Racks.)
2. The C200H-ID001 (8 no-voltage contact inputs, NPN) cannot be used with
CS-series PLCs.
3. C200H Units and Racks cannot be used with CS-series-only CPU Racks
or Expansion Racks.
C200H High-density Input Units (Group 2)
Name
Specifications
Model
Number
of bits
allocated
(CIO 0000
to
CIO 0319)
32
Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack
Yes
C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks
Yes
Reference
CS-series CS-series
ExpanLongsion
distance
Racks
Expansion
Racks
SYSMAC
BUS
Slave
Racks
Yes
No
DC Input 24 V DC, 32 inputs
Units
24 V DC, 32 inputs
C200H-ID216
No
C200H-ID218
32
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
12 V DC, 64inputs
C200H-ID111
64
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
24 V DC, 64 inputs
C200H-ID217
64
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
24 V DC, 64 inputs
C200H-ID219
64
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Note C200H Units and Racks cannot be used with CS-series-only CPU Racks or
Expansion Racks.
117
Section 2-4
Units
Basic Output Units
CS-series Basic Output Units
Name
Relay
Output
Units
Specifications
Model
Number
of bits
allocated
(CIO 0000
to
CIO 0319)
Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack
C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks
CS-series CS-series
ExpanLongsion
distance
Racks
Expansion
Racks
Reference
SYSMAC
BUS
Slave
Racks
250 V AC/
24 V DC, 2 A;
120 V DC, 0.1A;
8 points, independent contacts
CS1W-OC201
16
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
250 V AC/24 V
DC, 2 A; 120 V
DC, 0.1 A;
16 points
CS1W-OC211
16
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
250 V AC, 1.2 A,
8outputs, with
fuse burnout
detection circuit
CS1W-OA201
16
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
250 V AC, 0.5 A,
16 outputs
CS1W-OA211
16
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Transis- 12 to 24 V DC,
tor Out- 0.5 A,
put Units 16sinkingoutputs
CS1W-OD211
16
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
12 to 24 V DC,
0.5 A,
32sinkingoutputs
CS1W-OD231
32
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
12 to 24 V DC,
0.3 A,
64sinkingoutputs
CS1W-OD261
64
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
12 to 24 V DC,
0.1 A,
96sinkingoutputs,
with fuse burnout
detection circuit
CS1W-OD291
96
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
24 V DC, 0.5 A,
CS1W-OD212
16sourcingoutputs,
load short-circuit
protection
16
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
24 V DC, 0.3 A,
CS1W-OD232
32sourcingoutputs,
load short-circuit
protection
32
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
24 V DC, 0.3 A,
CS1W-OD262
64sourcingoutputs,
load short-circuit
protection
64
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
24 V DC, 0.1 A,
CS1W-OD292
96sourcingoutputs,
with fuse burnout
detection circuit
96
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Triac
Output
Units
118
3-6 Basic
I/O Units
and
Appendix
A Specifications of
Basic I/O
Units and
High-density I/O
Units
Section 2-4
Units
C200H Basic Output Units
Name
Relay
Output
Units
Triac
Output
Units
Transistor Output
Units,
Sinking
Specifications
Model
Number
of bits
allocated
(CIO 0000
to
CIO 0319)
Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack
C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks
CS-series CS-series
ExpanLongsion
distance
Racks
Expansion
Racks
Reference
SYSMAC
BUS
Slave
Racks
250V AC/24V DC,
2 A, independent
contacts, 5 outputs
max.
C200H-OC223
16
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
250 V AC/24 V DC,
2 A, independent
contacts, 8 outputs
max.
C200H-OC224
16
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
250 V AC/24 V DC,
2 A, independent
contacts, 8 outputs
max.
C200H-OC224V 16
(no longer manufactured)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
250 V AC/24 V DC,
2 A, independent
contacts, 8 outputs
max.
C200H-OC224N
16
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
250V AC/24V DC,
2 A, 8 outputs max.
C200H-OC221
16
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
250V AC/24V DC,
2 A, 12outputs max.
C200H-OC222
16
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
250 V AC/24V DC,
2A, 12 outputs max.
C200H-OC222V 16
(no longer manufactured)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
250 V AC/24V DC,
2A, 12 outputs max.
C200H-OC222N
16
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
250V AC/24V DC,
C200H-OC226
16
2 A, 16 outputs max. (no longer manufactured)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
250V AC/24V DC,
C200H-OC226N
2 A, 16 outputs max.
16
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
250V AC/24V DC,
C200H-OC225
2 A, 16 outputs max.
16
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
250 V AC, 1 A,
8outputs, with fuse
burnout detection
circuit
C200H-OA221
16
(no longer manufactured)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
250 V AC, 1.2 A,
8outputs, with fuse
burnout detection
circuit
C200H-OA223
16
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
250 V AC, 0.3 A,
12outputs
C200H-OA222V
16
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
250 V AC, 0.5 A,
12outputs
C200H-OA224
16
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
24 V DC, 2.1 A,
8outputs
C200H-OD213
16
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
12 to 48 V DC, 1A,
8 outputs
C200H-OD411
16
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
24 V DC, 0.3 A,
12outputs
C200H-OD211
16
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
24 V DC, 0.3 A,
16outputs
C200H-OD212
16
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
119
Section 2-4
Units
Name
Transistor Output
Units,
Sourcing
Specifications
Model
Number
of bits
allocated
(CIO 0000
to
CIO 0319)
Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack
C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks
CS-series CS-series
ExpanLongsion
distance
Racks
Expansion
Racks
Reference
SYSMAC
BUS
Slave
Racks
24 V DC, 0.8 A,
C200H-OD214
8outputs, load shortcircuit protection.
16
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
5 to 24 V DC, 0.3 A,
8outputs
C200H-OD216
16
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
5 to 24 V DC, 0.3 A,
12outputs
C200H-OD217
16
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
24 V DC, 1 A,
16outputs, load
short-circuit protection.
C200H-OD21A
16
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Note C200H Units and Racks cannot be used with CS-series-only CPU Racks or
Expansion Racks.
C200H High-density Group-two Output Units
Name
Specifications
Model
Number
of bits
allocated
(CIO 0000
to
CIO 0319)
Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack
C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks
CS-series CS-series
ExpanLong-dission
tance
Racks
Expansion
Racks
Reference
SYSMAC
BUS
Slave
Racks
Transis- 4.5 V DC/16 mA to C200H-OD218
tor Out- 26.4 V/100mA,
put Units 32sinking outputs
32
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
4.5 V DC/16 mA to C200H-OD219
26.4 V/100mA,
64sinking outputs
64
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
24 V DC, 0.5 A,
32 outputs, sourcing outputs, load
short-circuit protection
32
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
C200H-OD21B
Note C200H Units and Racks cannot be used with CS-series-only CPU Racks or
Expansion Racks.
120
Section 2-4
Units
Mixed I/O Units
CS-series Basic I/O Units
Name
DC
Input/
Transistor Output Units
TTL I/O
Units
Specifications
Model
Number
of bits
allocated
(CIO 0000
to
CIO 0319)
Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack
C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks
CS-series CS-series
ExpanLongsion
distance
Racks
Expansion
Racks
Reference
SYSMAC
BUS
Slave
Racks
24V DC, 32 inputs CS1W-MD261
12 to 24 V DC,
0.3A, 32 sinking
outputs
64-point
I/O
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
24V DC, 48 inputs CS1W-MD291
12 to 24 V DC,
0.1A, 48 sinking
outputs, with fuse
burnout detection
circuit
96-point
I/O
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
24V DC, 32 inputs CS1W-MD262
24 V DC, 0.3A, 32
sourcing outputs,
load short-circuit
protection.
64-point
I/O
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
24V DC, 48 inputs CS1W-MD292
12 to 24 V DC,
0.1A, 48 sourcing
outputs, with fuse
burnout detection
circuit
96-point
I/O
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
5 V DC, 3.5 mA,
32 inputs
5 V DC, 35 mA,
32 outputs
64-point
I/O
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
CS1W-MD561
3-6 Basic
I/O Units
and
Appendix
A Specifications of
Basic I/O
Units and
High-density I/O
Units
B7A Interface Units
CS-series Basic I/O Units
Name
Specifications
Model
Number
of bits
allocated
(CIO 0000
to
CIO 0319)
Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack
C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks
CS-series
Expansion
Racks
CS-series
Longdistance
Expansion
Racks
Reference
SYSMAC
BUS
Slave
Racks
B7A
Input
Units
32 inputs
CS1W-B7A12
32
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
B7A
Output
Units
32 outputs
CS1W-B7A02
32
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
B7A
Input/
Output
Units
16 inputs/
16 outputs
CS1W-B7A21
32-point
I/O
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
32 inputs/
32 outputs
CS1W-B7A22
64-point
I/O
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
3-8 B7A
Interface
Units
121
Section 2-4
Units
C200H Basic I/O Units
Name
Specifications
Model
Number
of bits
allocated
(CIO 0000
to
CIO 0319)
Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack
C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks
CS-series
Expansion
Racks
CS-series
Longdistance
Expansion
Racks
Reference
SYSMAC
BUS
Slave
Racks
B7A
Input
Units
16 inputs
C200H-B7AI1
16
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
B7A
Output
Units
16 outputs
C200H-B7AO1
16
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
3-8 B7A
Interface
Units
Note C200H Units and Racks cannot be used with CS-series-only CPU Racks or
Expansion Racks.
C200H High-density I/O Units (Group 2)
Name
Specifications
Model
Number
of bits
allocated
(CIO 0000
to
CIO 0319)
Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack
C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks
CS-series
Expansion
Racks
CS-series
Longdistance
Expansion
Racks
Reference
SYSMAC
BUS
Slave
Racks
B7A
Input
Units
32 inputs
C200H-B7A12
32
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
B7A
Output
Units
32 outputs
C200H-B7A02
32
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
B7A I/O
Units
16 inputs,
16outputs
C200H-B7A21
32-point
I/O
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
32 inputs,
32outputs
C200H-B7A22
64-point
I/O
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
3-8 B7A
Interface
Units
Note C200H Units and Racks cannot be used with CS-series-only CPU Racks or
Expansion Racks.
Analog Timer Unit
C200H Basic Unit
Name
Analog
Timer
Units
Specifications
4-point timer
Model
C200H-TM001
Number
of bits
allocated
(CIO 0000
to
CIO 0319)
16 points
Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack
Yes
C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks
Yes
CS-series
Expansion
Racks
CS-series
Longdistance
Expansion
Racks
Yes
No
Reference
SYSMAC
BUS
Slave
Racks
Yes
3-9 Analog
Timer
Units
Note C200H Units and Racks cannot be used with CS-series-only CPU Racks or
Expansion Racks.
122
Section 2-4
Units
2-4-2
Special I/O Units
CS-series Special I/O Units
Name
Specifications
Model
Number of
words
allocated
(CIO 2000 to
CIO 2959)
Number of
words
allocated
(D20000 to
D29599)
Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack
C200H
Expansion
I/O Racks
CS-series
Expansion
Racks
CS-series
Longdistance
Expansion
Racks
SYSMAC
BUS Slave
Racks
Unit
No.
Reference
W345
Analog I/O Unit
4 inputs (4 to 20 mA,
1 to 5 V, etc.)
4 outputs (1 to 5 V,
0 to 10 V, etc.)
CS1W-MAD44
10 words
100 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95
Analog Input
Unit
4 inputs (4 to 20 mA,
1 to 5 V, etc.)
CS1W-AD041-V1
10 words
100 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95
8 inputs (4 to 20 mA,
1 to 5 V, etc.)
CS1W-AD081-V1
10 words
100 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95
16 inputs (4 to 20
mA,
1 to 5 V, etc.)
CS1W-AD161
20 words
200 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95
(See
note.)
4 outputs (1 to 5 V,
4 to 20 mA, etc.)
CS1W-DA041
10 words
100 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95
8 outputs
(1 to 5 V, etc.)
CS1W-DA08V
10 words
100 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95
8 outputs
(4 to 20 mA)
CS1W-DA08C
10 words
100 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95
Isolated Thermocouple Input
Unit
4 inputs (D, E, J, K,
N, R, S, T, or ±80 mV
DC)
CS1W-PTS01-V1
10 words
100 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95
High-resolution
Isolated Thermocouple Input
Unit
4 inputs (B, E, J, K,
L, N, R, S, T, U,
WRe5-26, PL II, or
mV)
CS1W-PTS11
10 words
100 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95
Isolated Resistance Thermometer Input
Unit
4 inputs
(Pt100, JPt100)
CS1W-PTS02
10 words
100 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95
Isolated
Ni508.4Ω
Resistance
Thermometer
Input Unit
4 inputs (Ni508.4Ω)
CS1W-PTS03
10 words
100 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95
High-resolution
Isolated Resistance Thermometer Input
Unit
4 inputs (Pt100,
JPt100, Pt50, or
Ni508.4 Ω)
CS1W-PTS12
10 words
100 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95
Isolated 2-wire
Transmission
Device Input
Unit
4 inputs (1 to 5 V, 4
to 20 mA) 2-wire
transmission device
power supply built in
CS1W-PTW01
10 words
100 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95
Isolated DC
Input Unit
4 inputs (1 to 5 V,
4 to 20 mA, etc.)
CS1W-PDC01
10 words
100 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95
High-resolution
Isolated DC
Input Unit
4 inputs (1 to 5 V,
4 to 20 mA, etc.)
CS1W-PDC11
10 words
100 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95
Isolated Control Output Unit
(Analog Output
Unit)
4 outputs (1 to 5 V,
4 to 20 mA)
CS1W-PMV01
10 words
100 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95
Isolated Control Output Unit
(Analog Output
Unit, advanced
type)
4 outputs
(−10 to 10 V, −1 to
1 V: 1/16,000 resolution; 0 to 10 V, 0 to
5 V, 0 to 1 V: 1/8,000
resolution; 0 to 5 V:
1/4,000 resolution)
CS1W-PMV02
10 words
100 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95
Power Transducer Input Unit
8 inputs (−1 to 1 mA,
0 to 1 mA)
CS1W-PTR01
10 words
100 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95
DC Input Unit
(100 mA)
8 inputs (−100 to
100 mV, 0 to
100 mV)
CS1W-PTR02
10 words
100 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95
Isolated Pulse
Input Unit
4 pulse inputs (0 to
20 kpulses/s, 0 to 20
pulses/s)
CS1W-PPS01
10 words
100 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95
Analog Output
Unit
W368
Note Allocated two unit numbers.
123
Section 2-4
Units
Name
Position
Control
Units
Specifications
Model
Number of
words
allocated
(CIO 2000 to
CIO 2959)
Number of
words
allocated
(D20000 to
D29599)
CPU
Rack
Mountable Racks
C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks
Unit No.
CS-series
Expansion
Racks
CS-series
Longdistance
Expansion
Racks
SYSMAC
BUS
Slave
Racks
Reference
Pulse output, 1 axis, 1 to
500 kpulses/s, open-collector output
CS1W-NC113
10 words
100 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95
Pulse output, 1 axis, 1 to
500 kpulses/s, line-driver
output
CS1W-NC133
10 words
100 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95
Pulse outputs, 2 axes, 1 to
500 kpulses/s, open-collector outputs
CS1W-NC213
10 words
100 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95
Pulse outputs, 2 axes, 1 to
500 kpulses/s, line-driver
outputs
CS1W-NC233
10 words
100 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95
Pulse outputs, 4 axes, 1 to
500 kpulses/s, open-collector outputs
CS1W-NC413
20 words
200 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95 (See
note 1.)
Pulse output, 4 axes, 1 to
500 kpulses/s, line-driver
outputs
CS1W-NC433
20 words
200 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95 (See
note 1.)
Two axes, analog output
for each axis, supports Glanguage
CS1W-MC221-V1
30 words
None
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95 (See
note 2.)
Four axes, analog output
for each axis, supports Glanguage
CS1W-MC421-V1
50 words
None
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95 (See
note 3.)
4 Kwords, 12 contact
inputs, 8 contact outputs
CS1W-HIO01
10 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95
4 Kwords, 12 contact
inputs, 8 contact outputs,
2 pulse inputs, 2 pulse
outputs
CS1W-HCP22
10 words
100 words
(90 for general data
ex-change)
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95
4 Kwords, 12 contact
inputs, 8 contact outputs,
1 pulse input, 1 analog
input, 2 analog outputs
CS1W-HCA12-V1
10 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95
4 Kwords, 12 contact
inputs, 8 contact outputs,
2 pulse inputs, 2 analog
outputs
CS1W-HCA22
10 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95
Pulse inputs for two axes,
counting rate: 500 kcps
max., line driver compatible
CS1W-CT021
40 words
400 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95 (Allo- W902
cated words
for 4 unit
numbers.)
Pulse inputs for four axes,
counting rate: 500 kcps
max., line driver compatible
CS1W-CT041
40 words
400 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95 (Allocated words
for 4 unit
numbers.)
GP-IB
Interface
Unit
Conforms to IEEE-4881978.
CS1W-GPI01
10 words
100 words
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to 95
CompoNet Master Unit
CompoNet remote I/O
CS1W-CRM21
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Communications
mode No. 0: 128
inputs/128 outputs
for Word Slaves
20 words
None
0 to 95 (Allocated words
for 2 unit
numbers.)
Communications
mode No. 1: 256
inputs/256 outputs
for Word Slaves
40 words
None
0 to 95 (Allocated words
for 4 unit
numbers.)
Communications
mode No. 2: 512
inputs/512 outputs
for Word Slaves
80 words
None
0 to 95 (Allocated words
for 8 unit
numbers.)
Communications
mode No. 3: 256
inputs/256 outputs
for Word Slaves and
128 inputs/128 outputs for Bit Slaves
80 words
None
0 to 95 (Allocated words
for 8 unit
numbers.)
Communications
mode No. 8: 1,024
inputs/1,024 outputs
for Word Slaves and
256 inputs/256 outputs for Bit Slaves
maximum
10 words
Depends
on setting
0 to 95 (Allocated words
for 1 unit
numbers.)
Motion
Control
Units
Customizable
Counter
Unit
Highspeed
Counter
Unit
Note
1. Allocated two unit numbers.
2. Allocated three unit numbers.
3. Allocated five unit numbers.
124
W376
W359
W384
W410
W456
Section 2-4
Units
C200H Special I/O Units
C200H High-density I/O Units
Note
1. Functionally, these Units are I/O Units, but are categorized as Special I/O
Units.
2. C200H Units and Racks cannot be used with CS-series-only CPU Racks
or Expansion Racks.
Name
Specifications
Model
Number of
words allocated
(CIO 2000 to
CIO 2959)
Number of
words allocated
(D20000 to
D29599)
Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack
C200H
Expansion
I/O Racks
CS-series
Expansion
Racks
CS-series
Long-distance
Expansion
Racks
SYSMAC
BUS Slave
Racks
Unit
No.
Reference
3-7 C200H
High-density I/O
Units (Special
I/O Units) and
Appendix A
Specifications
of Basic I/O
Units and Highdensity I/O
Units
DC Input
Units
24 V DC, 32 inputs
C200H-ID215
10 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
TTL Input
Units
5 V DC, 32 inputs
C200H-ID501
10 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
Transistor
Output
Units
24 V DC, 32 sinking
outputs
C200H-OD215
10 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
TTL Output
Units
5 V DC, 32 sinking
outputs
C200H-OD501
10 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
TTL I/O
Units
5 V DC, 16 inputs,
16 sinking outputs
C200H-MD501
10 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
DC
Input/Transistor Output Units
24 V DC, 16 inputs,
16 sinking outputs
C200H-MD215
10 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
12 V DC, 16 inputs,
16 sinking outputs
C200H-MD115
10 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
C200H Special I/O Units
Note C200H Units and Racks cannot be used with CS-series-only CPU Racks or
Expansion Racks.
Name
Temperature
Control Units
Specifications
Model
Number of
words allocated
(CIO 2000 to
CIO 2959)
Number of
words allocated
(D20000 to
D29599)
Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack
C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks
CS-series
Expansion Racks
CS-series
Long-distance
Expansion
Racks
SYSMAC
BUS Slave
Racks
Unit
No.
Thermocouple input,
time-proportioning PID,
or ON/OFF transistor
output
C200H-TC001
10 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
Thermocouple input,
time-proportioning PID,
or ON/OFF voltage output
C200H-TC002
10 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
Thermocouple input,
PID current output
C200H-TC003
10 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
Temperature-resistance thermometer
input, time-proportioning PID, or ON/OFF
transistor output
C200H-TC101
10 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
Temperature-resistance thermometer
input, time-proportioning PID, or ON/OFF
voltage output
C200H-TC102
10 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
Temperature-resistance thermometer
input, PID current output
C200H-TC103
10 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
Reference
W225
125
Section 2-4
Units
Name
Heat/Cool
Temperature
Control Units
Specifications
Model
Number of
words allocated
(CIO 2000 to
CIO 2959)
Number of
words allocated
(D20000 to
D29599)
Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack
C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks
CS-series
Expansion Racks
CS-series
Long-distance
Expansion
Racks
SYSMAC
BUS Slave
Racks
Unit
No.
Reference
Thermocouple input,
time-proportioning PID,
or ON/OFF transistor
output
C200H-TV001
10 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
Thermocouple input,
time-proportioning PID,
or ON/OFF voltage output
C200H-TV002
10 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
Thermocouple input,
PID current output
C200H-TV003
10 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
Temperature-resistance thermometer
input, time-proportioning PID, or ON/OFF
transistor output
C200H-TV101
10 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
Temperature-resistance thermometer
input, time-proportioning PID, or ON/OFF
voltage output
C200H-TV102
10 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
Temperature-resistance thermometer
input, PID current output
C200H-TV103
10 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
Thermocouple input,
K(CA) or J(IC), selectable
C200H-TS001
10 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
C200H-TS002
10 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
Temperature-resistance thermometer,
JPt 100 Ω
C200H-TS101
10 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
Temperature-resistance thermometer,
Pt 100 Ω
C200H-TS102
10 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
Voltage output/current
input, time-proportioning PID, or ON/OFF
transistor output
C200H-PID01
10 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
Voltage output/current
input, time-proportioning PID, or ON/OFF
voltage output
C200H-PID02
10 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
Voltage output/current
input, PID current output
C200H-PID03
10 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
Cam Positioner Units
48 cam outputs (16
external outputs and 32
internal outputs)
Resolver speed: 20 µs
(5 kHz)
C200H-CP114
10 words
11 words
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
ASCII Units
24-Kbyte RAM
C200H-ASC02
10 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
W165
200-Kbyte RAM, 2 RS232C ports
C200H-ASC11
10 words
100 words
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to F
W306
200-Kbyte RAM, RS232C port, RS-422/485
port
C200H-ASC21
10 words
100 words
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to F
200-Kbyte RAM, 3 RS232C ports
C200H-ASC31
10 words
100 words
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to F
4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to
10 V (selectable), 4
inputs, 1/4,000 resolution
C200H-AD001
10 words
100 words
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to
10 V/–10 to +10 V
(selectable); 8 inputs;
1/4,000 resolution
C200H-AD002
10 words
100 words
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to F
4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to
10 V/–10 to +10 V
(selectable); 8 inputs;
1/4,000 resolution
C200H-AD003
10 words
100 words
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to F
W345
4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to
10 V (selectable); 2
outputs; 1/4,000 resolution
C200H-DA001
10 words
100 words
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
W229
4 to 20 mA, –10 to
+10 V (selectable),
4 outputs
C200H-DA002
10 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to F
1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, –10
to +10 V (selectable), 8
outputs; 1/4,000 resolution
C200H-DA003
10 words
100 words
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to F
4 to 20 mA, 8 outputs;
1/4,000 resolution
C200H-DA004
10 words
100 words
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to F
2 inputs (4 to 20 mA,
1 to 5 V, etc.)
2 outputs (4 to 20 mA,
1 to 5 V, etc.)
C200H-MAD01
10 words
100 words
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to F
Temperature
Sensor Units
PID Control
Units
Analog Input
Units
Analog Output Units
Analog I/O
Units
126
W240
W124
W241
W224
W229
W325
Section 2-4
Units
Name
High-speed
Counter
Units
Specifications
Model
Number of
words allocated
(CIO 2000 to
CIO 2959)
Number of
words allocated
(D20000 to
D29599)
Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack
C200H
Expansion I/O
Racks
CS-series
Expansion Racks
CS-series
Long-distance
Expansion
Racks
SYSMAC
BUS Slave
Racks
Unit
No.
Reference
One-axis pulse input,
counting rate: 50 kcps
max.
C200H-CT001-V1
10 words
100 words
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
One-axis pulse input,
counting rate: 75 kcps
max., line driver compatible
C200H-CT002
10 words
100 words
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
Two-axis pulse input,
counting rate: 75 kcps
max., line driver compatible
C200H-CT021
20 words
100 words
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to F
W311
Motion Control Units
G-language programmable, two-axis analog
outputs
C200H-MC221
20 words
100 words
(Uses first 2
words.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to F
W315
W314
Position Control Units
Two axes, pulse output
for each axis, speeds: 1
to 250,000 pps, directly
connects to servomotor
driver
C200H-NC211
20 words
200 words
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
W166
One axis, pulse output,
speed: 1 to 99,990 pps
C200H-NC111
10 words
100 words
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
W137
One axis, pulse output,
speeds 1 to 250,000
pps, directly connects
to servomotor driver,
line driver compatible
(Z level)
C200H-NC112
10 words
100 words
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
W128
One axis, pulse output,
speeds 1 to 500,000
pps, directly connects
to servomotor driver
C200HW-NC113
10 words
100 words
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to F
W334
Two axes, pulse output
for each axis, speeds 1
to 500,000 pps, directly
connects to servomotor
driver
C200HW-NC213
10 words
100 words
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to F
Four axes, pulse output
for each axis, speeds 1
to 500,000 pps, directly
connects to servomotor
driver
C200HW-NC413
20 words
200 words
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to F
Electromagnetic coupling
C200H-IDS01-V1
10 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
ID Sensor
Units
W141
W153
Microwave type
C200H-IDS21
10 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
Voice Unit
(See note 6.)
Adaptive differential
pulse-code modulation
C200H-OV001
10 words
100 words
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
W172
Fuzzy Logic
Unit
8 inputs, 4 outputs
C200H-FZ001
10 words
100 words
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
0 to 9
W208
JPCN-1 Unit
Settable as master or
slave
C200H-JRM21
10 words
100 words
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
0 to F
---
DeviceNet
Master Units
DeviceNet Remote I/O,
1,600 bits max.
C200HW-DRM21V1
(See note 1.)
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
0 to F
W347
C200H I/O
Link Units
DeviceNet Slave, 512
inputs/512 outputs
max.
C200HW-DRT21
10 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
0 to F
W347
CompoBus/S Master Units
CompoBus/S Remote
I/O, 256 bits max.
C200HW-SRM21V1
10 words or
20 words
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
0 to F
W266
PLC Link
Units
PLC Link, single level:
32 units, multilevel:
16 Units
C200H-LK401
(See note 2.)
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
0 to 9
W135
SYSMAC
BUS Remote
I/O Master
Units
Wired
C200H-RM201
(See note 3.)
---
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
0 to 3
W120
Optical
C200H-RM001PV1
---
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
0 to 3
W136
Note
1. The DeviceNet Slaves are allocated up to 1,600 I/O bits (100 words) in the
DeviceNet Area.
2. PLC Link Units are allocated up to 1,024 bits (64 words) in the Link Area.
3. Each Slave Rack connected to a Remote I/O Master Unit is allocated
10 words in the SYSMAC BUS Area.
Each I/O Terminal is allocated 1 word in the I/O Terminal Area.
4. The C200HW-CLK21 Controller Link Unit (C200HX/HG/HE) cannot be
used. Use the CS1W-CLK21(-V1) or CS1W-CLK23 Controller Link Unit
(CS-series CPU Bus Unit). Data links and message services are supported between C200HX/HG/HE and CS-series PLCs.
127
Units
Section 2-4
5. The C200H-LK@@@-@@ Host Link Unit (C200H, C200HS,
C200HX/HG/HE) cannot be used. Use the CS1W-SCU21 Serial Communications Unit (CS-series CPU Bus Unit).
6. Observe the following precautions when using the C200H-OV001 Voice
Unit.
• The Voice Unit cannot be used if an OMRON Programmable Terminal
(PT) set for NT Link Mode is connected to the peripheral port or RS232C port on the CPU Unit.
• When using both a Voice Unit and an OMRON PT, connect the PT to
a CS1W-SCB@@@ Serial Communications Board or to a CS1WSCU@@@ Serial Communications Unit.
• When a Voice Unit is mounted, set to baud rate for the peripheral port
or RS-232C port on the CPU Unit to 9,600 bps or less when communicating with a computer or other external device.
128
Section 2-4
Units
2-4-3
CS-series CPU Bus Units
Name
Controller
Link Units
Specifications
Model
Number
of words
allocated
CIO 1500
to
CIO 1899
Number
of words
allocated
D30000
to
D31599
CPU
Bus
Unit
System
Settings
Mountable Racks
CPU
Rack
C200H
Expansion
I/O Racks
CS-series
Expansion
Racks
CS-series
Long-distance
Expansion
Racks
SYSMAC
BUS Slave
Racks
Wired
CS1WCLK21-V1,
CS1WCLK23
25 words
100 words
Used
(data link
tables)
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Optical ring,
H-PCF cable
CS1WCLK12-V1,
CS1WCLK13
25 words
100 words
Used
(data link
tables)
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Optical ring,
GI cable
CS1WCLK52-V1,
CS1WCLK53
25 words
100 words
Used
(data link
tables)
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Coaxial
CS1WSLK21
25 words
100 words
Used
(data link
tables)
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Optical
CS1WSLK11
25 words
100 words
Used
(data link
tables)
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Serial Communications
Unit
Two RS-232C Ports
CS1WSCU21-V1
25 words
20 words
Not used
Yes
No
Yes
Two RS-422A/ 485 Ports
CS1WSCU31-V1
25 words
20 words
Not used
Yes
No
Ethernet
Unit
10Base-5
CS1WETN01
25 words
100 words
Used
Yes
100Base-TX (Can be used
as 10Base-T.)
CS1WETN21
25 words
100 words
Used
FL-net Unit
100Base-TX cyclic transmis- CS1Wsions and message transmis- FLN22
sions
25 words
100 words
DeviceNet
Unit
DeviceNet remote I/O 2,048
CS1Wpt, user settings without Con- DRM21-V1
figurator
25 words
PROFIBUSDP Master
Unit
PROFIBUS-DP remote I/O
7,168 words
CS1WPRM21
Loop Control
Unit
PID operations: 32 max.
Loop, process operations:
250 max.
Position
Control
Units
supporting
MECHATROLINK-II
communications
SYSMAC
LINK Units
Unit
No.
0 to F
(See
note
1.)
Reference
W309
---
W367
No
0 to F
(See
note
2.)
Yes
No
0 to F
W336
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to F
(See
note
2.)
W343
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to F
(See
note
2.)
W420
W421
Used
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to F
(See
note
2.)
W440
100 words
Not used
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to F
W380
25 words
100 words
Not used
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to F
W409
CS1WLC001
25 words
None
Not used
Yes
No
No
No
No
0 to F
(See
note
3.)
W374
W375
MECHATROLINK-II,
16 axes max.
CS1WNCF71
25 words
None
Not used
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to F
W426
High-resolution Motion
Control Unit
MECHATROLINK II, Real
axes: 30, Virtual axes: 2,
Special motion control language
CS1WMCH71
25 words
100 words
Not used
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to F
---
SYSMAC
SPU Unit
(High-speed
Storage and
Processing
Unit)
One CF card
type I/II slot
(used with
OMRON HMCEF@@@ Memory Card)
One
Ethernet
port
CS1WSPU01
Not used
Not used
Not used
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 to F
W229
Two
Ethernet
ports
CS1WSPU02
Not used
Not used
Not used
Note
1. A maximum of eight Units can be mounted.
2. A maximum of four Units can be mounted.
3. A maximum of three Units can be mounted.
4. Some CPU Bus Units are allocated words in the CPU Bus Unit Setting Area. The system must be designed so that the number of words allocated
in the CPU Bus Unit Setting Area does not exceed its capacity. Refer to 27 CPU Bus Unit Setting Area Capacity for details.
129
Section 2-5
Expanded System Configuration
2-5
2-5-1
Expanded System Configuration
Serial Communications System
The CS-series system configuration can be expanded by using the following
serial communications ports.
• CPU Unit built-in ports × 2 (peripheral port and RS-232C port)
• Serial Communications Board ports × 2 (RS-232C or RS-422/485)
• Serial Communications Unit ports × 2 (RS-232C)
• ASCII Unit ports × 2 (RS-232C or RS-422/485)
1,2,3...
1. If the CPU Unit built-in ports, the Serial Communications Board ports, or
Serial Communications Unit ports are used, words can be allocated to various protocols, such as Host Link and protocol macro.
2. Up to 16 Serial Communications Units and 16 ASCII Units can be connected to one CPU Unit. The system configuration can then be expanded by
connecting devices with RS-232C or RS-422/485 ports, such as Temperature Sensor Units, Bar Code Readers, ID Systems, personal computers,
Board Computers, Racks, and other companies’ PLCs.
ASCII Unit (16 Units max.)
Serial Communications Unit (16 Units max.)
CPU Unit
Serial Communications Board
Communications ports 1
Peripheral port
RS-232C port
Communications ports 2
Expanding the system configuration as shown above allows a greater
number of serial communications ports, and greater flexible and simpler
support for different protocols.
3. The Serial Gateway is supported for CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later and Serial Communications Boards/Units with unit version 1.2 or later.
• CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later: Gateway from FINS network to
serial communications (CompoWay/F only) is possible through the
peripheral port and RS-232C port.
• Serial Communications Boards/Units with unit version 1.2 or later: Gateway from FINS network to serial network (CompoWay/F, Modbus, or Host
Link) is possible. Using a Gateway to Host Link enables Host Links with
the PLC as master.
130
Section 2-5
Expanded System Configuration
System Configuration Example
Programming Device
Programming
CX Programmer Console
Host computer
Programmable
Terminal
OR
NT Link
Serial Communications Unit
Serial Communications Unit
Ver. 1.2 or later
CPU Unit
Peripheral
port
CompoWay Master
Modbus Master
Serial Communications Board
Host Link Master
RS-232C port
Protocol macro
General-purpose
external devices
(such as other
companies' PLCs)
CPU Unit
Host Link slave
Peripheral Bus
Communications
conditions
automatically
recognized.
RS-232C port
Host Link slave
RS-232C port
Protocol macro
General-purpose external devices
(such as Temperature Sensor
Units, Bar Code Readers)
CompoWay/Fcompatible device
Modbuscompatible device
Refer to page 137 for a table showing which communications protocols are
supported by each Unit.
2-5-2
Systems
The serial communications port mode (protocol) can be switched in the CPU
Unit’s PLC Setup. Depending on the protocol selected, the following systems
can be configured.
Protocols
The following protocols support serial communications.
Protocol
Host Link (SYSMAC WAY)
slave
Main connection
Personal computer
OMRON Programmable
Terminals
No-protocol (customer) com- General-purpose external
munications
devices
NT Links (1: N)
OMRON Programmable
Terminals
Use
Communications between
the Host computer and the
PLC. Commands can be
sent to a computer from the
PLC.
No-protocol communications with general-purpose
devices.
High-speed communications with Programmable
Terminals via direct access.
Applicable commands,
communications
instructions
Host Link commands/ FINS
commands. Commands can
be sent to a computer from
the PLC.
TXD(236), RXD(235),
TXDU(256), RXDU(255)
None
131
Section 2-5
Expanded System Configuration
Protocol
Main connection
Peripheral bus (See note 1.)
Programming Devices
CX-Programmer
Protocol macro (See note 2.) General-purpose external
devices
General-purpose (BASIC
languages) (See note 3.)
General-purpose external
devices
Serial Gateway
OMRON Component
PLC
CompoWay/F Master
(See note 4.)
CompoWay/F slave
Modbus Master
(See note 5.)
Modbus slave
Host Link FINS
(SYSWAY) Master
(See note 5.)
Host Link FINS (SYSWAY)
slave (PLC)
Note
Use
Communications between
Programming Devices and
the PLC from the computer.
Sending and receiving messages (communications
frames) according to the
communications specifications of external devices.
(SYSMAC-PST is used to
create protocols by setting
various parameters.)
Free communications with
general-purpose external
devices using BASIC commands.
Converts FINS commands
that are received into CompoWay/F, Modbus, or Host
Link protocols, and then
transmits the converted
command to the serial line.
Converts FINS commands
(encapsulated CompoWay/F
commands) received at the
serial port into CompoWay/F
commands.
Converts FINS commands
(encapsulated Modbus commands) received at the serial
port into Modbus commands.
Applicable commands,
communications
instructions
None
PMCR(260) instruction
BASIC program
FINS command
2803 hex received
(including sending FINS
command using
CMND(490))
FINS command
2804 hex or 2805 hex
received
(including sending FINS
command using
CMND(490))
Converts FINS commands
Any FINS command
into FINS commands encap- received except those sent
sulated in Host Link
to serial port
(including sending FINS
command using
CMND(490))
1. The peripheral bus mode is used for Programming Devices excluding Programming Console. If Programming Console is to be used, set pin 4 of the
DIP switch on the front panel of the Unit to OFF so that the default peripheral port communications parameters are used instead of those specified
in the PLC Setup.
2. Serial Communications Unit or Serial Communications Board required.
3. ASCII Unit required.
4. CPU Unit with version 3.0 or later (peripheral port and RS-232C port) and
Serial Communications Board/Unit with unit version 1.2 or later only.
5. Serial Communications Board/Unit with unit version 1.2 or later only.
Host Link System (SYSWAY 1:N Mode) (Slave)
The Host Link System allows the I/O memory of the PLC to be read/written,
and the operating mode to be changed from a Host computer (personal computer or Programmable Terminal) by executing Host Link commands or FINS
commands that are preceded by a header and followed by a terminator. Alternatively, FINS commands (preceded by a header and followed by a terminator) can be sent to a computer connected via the Host Link System by
132
Section 2-5
Expanded System Configuration
executing Network Communications Instructions (SEND(090), RECV(098),
and CMND(490)) from the CPU Unit.
Host computer
FINS commands sent via
SEND/RECV/CMND
instructions from the PLC
Applicable port
CPU Unit
Peripheral port RS-232C port
Host Link commands or FINS
commands
Note
Yes
Yes
(See note 1.)
(See note 2.)
Serial
Communications
Board
Serial
Communications
Unit
Yes
Yes
1. Set pin 4 of the DIP switch on the front panel of the CPU Unit to ON, and
set the serial communications mode in the PLC Setup to Host Link.
2. Set pin 5 of the DIP switch on the front panel of the CPU Unit to OFF, and
set the serial communications mode in the PLC Setup to Host Link.
3. Host Link master functions can be performed by sending the CMND(490)
instruction via the Serial Gateway when using Serial Communications
Boards/Units with unit version 1.2 or later.
PLC (Host Link Master)
Serial Communications
Board/Unit
Serial
Gateway
CMND(490)
FINS command sent
FINS
FINS
Host Link
header
Host Link
terminator
PLC (Host Link slave)
No-protocol (Custom) Communications System
No-protocol communications allow simple data transmissions, such as inputting bar code data and outputting printer data using communications port I/O
instructions. The start and completion codes can be set, and RS and CS signal control is also possible with no-protocol communications.
The following table shows the usage of each communications port I/O
instruction, based on the communications port being used and the direction of
the data transfer (sending or receiving).
Communications
port
CPU Unit's built-in
RS-232C port
Send
Receive
TXD(236)
RXD(235)
Serial port on a Serial Communications Unit (unit version 1.2 or
later)
TXDU(256)
RXDU(255)
Serial port on a Serial Communications Board (unit version 1.2
or later)
TXD(236)
RXD(235)
133
Section 2-5
Expanded System Configuration
CPU
Applicable port
SCU
Serial
Communications
Unit (SCU)
CPU Unit
Peripheral port RS-232C port
No
RS-232C
Yes
(See note 1.)
Yes
(See note 2.)
RXDU
TXDU
General-purpose
external device
RXD
TXD
General-purpose
external device
Note
1. Set pin 5 of the DIP switch on the front panel of the CPU Unit to OFF, and
set the serial communications mode in the PLC Setup to no-protocol communications.
2. No-protocol communications are supported for Serial Communications
Units with unit version 1.2 or later only.
NT Link System (1:N Mode)
If the PLC and Programmable Terminal (PT) are connected together using
RS-232C ports, the allocations for the PT’s status control area, status notify
area, objects such as touch switches, indicators, and memory maps can be
allocated in the I/O memory of the PLC. The NT Link System allows the PT to
be controlled by the PLC, and the PT can periodically read data from the status control area of the PLC, and perform necessary operations if there are any
changes in the area. The PT can communicate with the PLC by writing data to
the status notify area of the PLC from the PT. The NT Link system allows the
PT status to be controlled and monitored without using PLC ladder programs.
The ratio of PLCs to PTs is 1: n (8 ≥ n ≥ 1).
Set the PT communications settings for a 1:N NT Link. Either one or up to
eight PTs can be connected to each PLC.
Version-1 CPU Units support high-speed NT Links (1:N mode). In this way,
equipment monitoring and settings can be made faster from the PT. The applicable PTs are the NS-series PTs, the NT31(C)-V2 and the NT631(C)-V2.
1:N Mode
1:N Mode
Applicable port
CPU Unit
RS-232C
Peripheral port RS-232C port
Yes
Yes
(See note 1.) (See note 2.)
RS-232C
RS-232C to RS-422/485
Conversion Adapter
Note
Programmable
Terminal
RS-422A/485
Programmable Programmable Programmable
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
134
Serial
Communications
Board
Serial
Communications
Unit
Yes
Yes
1. Turn ON pin 4 on the DIP switch on
the front of the CPU Unit and set the
serial communications mode in the
PLC Setup for an NT Link.
2. Turn OFF pin 5 on the DIP switch on
the front of the CPU Unit and set the
serial communications mode in the
PLC Setup for an NT Link.
Section 2-5
Expanded System Configuration
Note
1. The PLC can be connected to any PT port that supports 1:N NT Links. It
cannot be connected to the RS-232C ports on the NT30 or NT30C, because these ports support only 1:1 NT Links.
2. The NT20S, NT600S, NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, and NT625C cannot be used if the CPU Unit’s cycle time is 800 ms or longer (even if only
one of these PTs is connected).
3. The Programming Console functionality of a PT (Expansion Function) can
be used only when the PT is connected to the RS-232C or peripheral port
on the CPU Unit. It cannot be used when connected to an RS-232C or RS422A/485 port on a Serial Communications Board or Serial Communications Unit.
4. When more than one PT is connected to the same PLC, be sure that each
PT is assigned a unique unit number. Malfunctions will occur if the same
unit number is set on more than one PT.
5. The 1:1 and 1:N NT Link protocols are not compatible with each other, i.e.,
they are separate serial communications protocols.
Protocol Macros
The CX-Protocol is used to create data transmission procedures (protocols)
for general-purpose external devices according to the communications specifications (half-duplex or full-duplex, asynchronous) of the general-purpose
external devices. The protocols that have been created are then recorded in a
Serial Communications Board, enabling data to be sent to and received from
the external devices by simply executing the PMCR(260) instruction in the
CPU Unit. Protocols for data communications with OMRON devices, such as
Temperature Controller, Intelligent Signal Processors, Bar Code Readers, and
Modems, are supported as standard protocols. (See note.)
Note The standard protocols are provided with the CX-Protocol, Serial Communications Boards, and Serial Communications Units.
Host computer
CX-Protocol or PSS Support
Software for protocol macro
function
Protocol
Applicable port
CPU Unit
Peripheral port RS-232C port
No
No
Serial
Communications
Board
Yes
Serial
Communications
Unit
Yes
Messages
Messages
CompoWay/F
(Host Function)
General-purpose external device
The CS-series CPU Unit can operate as a host to send CompoWay/F commands to OMRON components connected in the system. CompoWay/F commands are executed by using the CompoWay/F send/receive sequences in
the standard protocols of the protocol macro function.
135
Section 2-5
Expanded System Configuration
Protocol macro
CompoWay/F command
CompoWay/F
OMRON
device
Serial Gateway Mode
When using CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later (peripheral port and RS232C port), the received FINS message is automatically converted into CompoWay/F according to the message (see note). When Serial Communications
Boards/Units with unit version 1.2 or later are used, the received FINS message is automatically converted into either CompoWay/F, Modbus-RTU, Modbus-ASCII, or Host Link FINS according to the message.
Note CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later (peripheral port and RS-232C port)
support automatic conversion into CompoWay/F only (automatic conversion
into Modbus-RTU, Modbus-ASCII, and Host Link FINS is not possible).
CompoWay/F, Modbus-RTU, Modbus-ASCII
FINS
CPU Unit with unit
version 3.0 or later
(peripheral port or RS232C port)
Serial Communications
Board/Unit with unit
version 1.2 or later
CompoWay
(See note.)
Network
CMND(490) FINS command sent
Serial
Gateway
CompoWay
(See note.)
FINS
Note: Or Modbus-RTU command or Modbus-ASCII command.
These commands cannot be sent to the CPU Unit.
CompoWay
(See note.)
CompoWay-compatible
OMRON Component, or
Modbus-RTU-compatible
or Modbus-ASCIIcompatible device
Host Link FINS
FINS
Network
Serial Communications
Board/Unit with unit
version 1.2 or later
Note: Not supported
for CPU Units
CX-Programmer or other
Programming Device that
uses CX-Server as the
communications driver
CMND(490)
Serial
Gateway
FINS command
sent
FINS
FINS
PLC (Host Link Master)
FINS
Host Link
header
Host Link
header
Host Link
terminator
Host Link
terminator
PLC (Host Link slave)
136
Section 2-5
Expanded System Configuration
Unit/Protocol Compatibility
Unit
CPU Units
Serial
Communications
Boards
Serial
Communications
Units
ASCII
Units
Model
Port
CS1G/HCPU@@-E
Peripheral
RS-232C
CS1W-SCB21- RS-232C
V1
RS-232C
Peripheral bus
(See
note 1.)
Host
Link
(slave)
Yes
Yes
---
Yes
Yes
Yes
---
Yes
CS1W-SCB41- RS-232C
--V1
RS-422/485 ---
Yes
Yes
CS1W-SCU21- RS-232C
V1
---
Yes
RS-232C
---
Yes
CS1W-SCU31- RS422A/
V1
485
---
Yes
RS422A/
485
C200H-ASC11 RS-232C
RS-232C
C200H-ASC21 RS-232C
RS-422/485
C200H-ASC31 RS-232C
RS-232C
RS-232C
(Terminal
port)
---
Yes
---------------
---------------
Note
Protocol
macro
NT Link
(1:N
Mode)
GeneralSerial
purpose Gateway
(using
(See
BASIC) note 2.)
----Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-------
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
---
Yes
Yes
Yes
---
Yes
Yes
Yes
---
Yes
Yes
Yes
---
Yes
Yes (See Yes
note 2.)
Yes (See Yes
note 2.)
Yes
---
Yes
Yes
---
Yes
Yes
Yes
---
Yes
---------------
---------------
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
---------------
No-protocol
(customer)
communications
--Yes
Yes (See
note 2.)
Yes (See
note 2.)
Yes (See
note 2.)
Yes (See
note 2.)
Yes (See
note 2.)
Yes (See
note 2.)
---------------
1. The peripheral bus mode is used for Programming Devices excluding Programming Console. If Programming Console is to be used, set pin 4 of the
DIP switch on the front panel of the Unit to OFF so that the default peripheral port communications parameters are used instead of those specified
in the PLC Setup.
2. Supported for CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later and Serial Communications Boards/Units with unit version 1.2 or later only. For CPU Units,
however, only automatic CompoWay/F connection is possible.
137
Section 2-5
Expanded System Configuration
Host Link System
The following system configurations are possible for a Host Link System.
Host Link Slave
C-mode Commands
Host Link
Host Link commands
FINS Commands
Host Link
FINS
Host Link terminator
Host Link header
In Host Link mode, FINS commands contained between a header and terminator can be sent from the host computer to any PLC on the Network. Communications are possible with PLCs on the same or different types of
interconnected Networks up to two levels away (three levels including the
local level but not including the Host Link connection).
Host Link
FINS
FINS
Host Link
terminator
Host Link header
Host Link
Controller Link Network
or Ethernet
Bridge
Ethernet
Controller Link Network
Controller Link
Network
138
Gateway
Section 2-5
Expanded System Configuration
Communications from Host Computer
SEND(090)/
RECV(098)
CMND(490)
SEND(090): Sends data to the Host computer.
RECV(098): Receives data from the Host computer.
CMND(490): Executes a specified FINS command.
Host Link
FINS
Host Link terminator
Host Link header
In Host Link mode, FINS commands contained between a header and terminator can be sent from the host computer to any PLC on the Network. Communications are possible with PLCs on the same or different types of
interconnected Networks up to two levels away (three levels including the
local level but not including the Host Link connection).
SEND(090)/
RECV(098)
CMND(490)
Host Link
Controller
Link Network
FINS
Host Link
terminator
FINS
Host Link header
Host Link
Bridge
Ethernet
SEND(090)/
RECV(098)
CMND(490)
Controller Link Network
Controller Link Network
Gateway
Host Link Master
Using a Serial Communications Board/Unit with unit version 1.2 or later and
Serial Gateway mode enables received FINS commands to be enclosed in a
Host Link header and terminator and transmitted to the PLC on the serial line
(Host Link slave).
139
Section 2-5
Expanded System Configuration
FINS
Network
CMND(490)
Serial Communications
Board/Unit with unit
version 1.2 or later
Serial
Gateway
FINS command
sent
CX-Programmer or other
Programming Device
that uses CX-Server as
the communications
driver
FINS
FINS
PLC (Host Link Master)
Host Link
header
FINS
Host Link
header
Host Link
terminator
Host Link
terminator
PLC (Host Link slave)
FINS Messages
FINS (Factory Interface Network Service) messages are commands and
responses that are used as a message service in an OMRON Network. FINS
messages enable the user to control operations such as sending and receiving data and changing operating modes when necessary. The features of
FINS messages are as follows:
Flexible Communications
FINS messages are defined in the application layer and do not rely on the
physical layer, data link layer, or other lower-level layers. This enables flexible
communications on the CPU bus and different types of networks. Basically,
communications with Ethernet, SYSMAC NET, SYSMAC LINK, Controller
Link, DeviceNet, or Host Link Networks, and between the CPU Unit and CPU
Bus Units or Inner Boards is possible via the CPU bus.
CS1 CPU Bus Unit
Inner Board
Ethernet
FINS
TCP/IP FINS
Host Link
FINS
FINS
Controller Link
Note A TCP/IP header must be attached to the FINS command for an Ethernet Network, and a Host Link header must be attached to the FINS command for a
Host Link Network
140
Section 2-5
Expanded System Configuration
Supports Network Relay
Up to three network levels (eight levels for unit version 2.0 or later), including
the local network, can be bypassed to access other Racks.
Network 2
Network 1
Network 3
Note With CS/CJ-series CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later, remote programming/monitoring is possible up to 8 levels away. Refer to 1-6-5 Communications through a
Maximum of 8 Network Levels for details.
Access to CPU Unit Plus
Other Devices on Racks
The CPU Unit, CS-series CPU Bus Units, personal computers (boards), Inner
Boards, and other devices can be identified and specified using unit
addresses.
CS1 CPU Bus Unit
Inner Board
CPU Unit
Network-to-Serial
Conversion or Network-toSerial-to-Network
Conversion
Personal
computer
board
Using a Serial Communications Board/Unit with unit version 1.2 or later and
Serial Gateway mode enables received FINS commands to be automatically
converted into CompoWay/F, Modbus-RTU, Modbus-ASCII, or Host Link FINS
commands according to the FINS message. FINS commands that have been
converted into Host Link FINS commands can also be converted back into
Host Link FINS commands.
FINS
Network
Serial Communications
Unit with unit version 1.2
or later
Serial
Gateway
FINS
FINS
FINS
Network
Serial (Host Link)
PLC
(Host Link slave)
FINS
Network
141
Section 2-5
Expanded System Configuration
2-5-3
Communications Network System
Information Systems
The following network systems can be configured when using CS-series
Units.
Ethernet
Message Communications
Host computer to PLC
PLC to PLC or Host computer
Ethernet Unit
FTP Server Function
Socket Service
Host computer to PLC
Sends/receives data using TCP
or UDP protocol
Transmission of files to Memory
Card installed in CPU Unit
Controller Link Unit
Controller Link Support Board
Controller Link
Configurator
Simple Network configuration
(twisted-pair cables/ optical
fiber cables)
Data link and message communications
DeviceNet
CompoBus/S
Message communications
and large-capacity data
transmission
Links between PLC and personal computer
Multi-vendor network
DeviceNet
Optical Controller Link Units
provide a bypass function
when a node fails.
Remote I/O message
communications
Remote I/O: Many points,
free allocation
Message communications
between PLCs, DeviceNet
and Explicit messages
High-speed remote I/O
Multi-level network
Many Types of Slaves
Remote I/O Terminals, Remote I/O Modules, Sensor
Amp Terminals, Sensor Terminals, Bit Chain Terminals
Various connection
methods
Superior Slaves
Remote I/O Terminals,
Remote Adapters, Analog
I/O Terminals, Sensor
Terminals, I/O Link Units,
Temperature Input
Terminals, High-density
I/O Terminals
Various connection methods
Superior Master Units
Serial Communications Units
CPU Units
SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O
Remote I/O via I/O Units
Multiple and optical fiber
cables
Slave Racks, I/O Terminals, I/O Relay Terminals
142
Control Systems
Large-capacity, flexible, and
effective data links
Section 2-5
Expanded System Configuration
Ethernet
If an Ethernet Unit is connected to the system, FINS messages can be used
to communicate between the Host computer connected to the Ethernet and
the PLC, or between PLCs. By executing FTP commands for the PLC from
the Host computer connected to the Ethernet, the contents of the files on the
Memory Card installed in the CPU Unit can be read or written (transferred).
Data can be sent and received using UDP and TCP protocols. These functions enable a greater compatibility with information networks.
Host computer
FTP command
Ethernet
FINS
FINS
Ethernet Unit
Ethernet Unit
Controller Link
The Controller Link Network is the basic framework of the OMRON PLC FA
Network. Connecting a Controller Link Unit to the network enables data links
between PLCs, so that data can be shared without programming, and FINS
message communications between PLCs, which enable separate control and
data transfer when required. The Controller Link Network connections use
either twisted-pair cables or optical fiber cables. Data links and message communications are also possible between the PLC and personal computer. Data
links enable large-capacity and free allocations. FINS message communications also allow large-capacity data transfer.
Controller Link Unit
Messages
Controller Link Unit
Controller Link
Support
Board
Controller Link
Free
allocation
Data link
DeviceNet
DeviceNet is a multi-vendor network consisting of multi-bit control and information systems and conforms to the Open Field DeviceNet specification.
Connecting a DeviceNet Master Unit to the network enables remote I/O communications between the PLC and the Slaves on the network. Remote I/O
communications enable large-capacity I/O and user-set allocations. Analog
I/O Terminals are used for the Slaves. Message communications are possible
between PLCs and between the PLC and DeviceNet devices manufactured by
other companies.
143
Section 2-5
Expanded System Configuration
The following Units can be used to connect to a DeviceNet network from a
CS-series PLC. There are differences in functionality, including in the words
that are allocated for fixed allocations.
Name
CS-series
DeviceNet
Unit
Model
Classification
CS1W-DRM21 CS-series CPU
Bus Unit
C200H
C200HWDeviceNet DRM21-V2
Master Unit
C200H Special
I/O Unit
Master/slave
Fixed allocations for remote I/O master
Master and slave In CS-series
One of following three groups
DeviceNet Area Outputs: CIO 3200 to CIO 3263
Inputs: CIO 3300 to CIO 3363
Outputs: CIO 3400 to CIO 3463
Inputs: CIO 3500 to CIO 3563
Outputs: CIO 3600 to CIO 3663
Inputs: CIO 3700 to CIO 3763
Master only
In C200H
Outputs: CIO 0050 to CIO 0099
DeviceNet Area Inputs: CIO 0350 to CIO 0399
DeviceNet
Master Unit
DeviceNet
Master Unit
Messages
Remote I/O
DeviceNet Slaves
CompoBus/S
CompoBus/S is a high-speed ON/OFF bus for remote I/O communications.
Connecting a CompoBus/S Master Unit to the network allows remote I/O
communications between the PLC and Slaves. High-speed communications
are performed with 256 points in a cycle time of 1 ms max.
CompoBus/S Master Unit
CompoBus/S
Remote I/O
PROFIBUS-DP
PROFIBUS (PROcess FIeldBUS) is an open fieldbus standard for a wide
range of applications in manufacturing, processing, and building automation.
The Standard, EN 50170 (the Euronorm for field communications), to which
PROFIBUS adheres, ensures vendor independence and transparency of
operation. It enables devices from various manufacturers to intercommunicate
without having to make any special interface adaptations.
144
Section 2-5
Expanded System Configuration
PROFIBUS-DP Master Unit
PROFIBUS-DP
Remote I/O
Communications Network Overview
System
Information networks
Network
Ethernet
Controller Link
RS-232C →
Controller Link
Control networks
Controller Link
Function
Between Host computer and PLC.
Between PLCs.
Between Host computer and Memory
Card installed in CPU
Unit.
Between PLC and
nodes with socket service, such as UNIX
computers.
Between PLC and personal computer
directly connected to
the Network.
Between Host Link
computer and PLC on
the Network.
Between PLCs.
PLC Link
DeviceNet
PLC and Network
devices (Slaves).
CompoBus/S
PROFIBUS-DP
Communications
FINS message
communications
Communications
Device
Ethernet Unit
FTP server
Socket service
FINS message
communications
Data link (offset,
simple settings)
Host Link commands
and gateway.
Controller Link Support Board and Controller Link Unit
FINS message
communications
Data link (offset,
simple settings)
Simple data link
FINS message
communications in an
open network.
Large-capacity remote
I/O (fixed or free allocation) in an open network
High-speed remote I/O
in a network with
OMRON devices only.
Large-capacity remote
I/O (user-set allocation) in an open network
Controller Link Unit
RS-232C cables and
Controller Link Unit
PLC Link Unit
C200H DeviceNet
Master Unit (C200HWDRM21-V1) and Configurator
CompoBus/S Master
Unit
PROFIBUS-DP Master
Unit and Configurator
145
Expanded System Configuration
Section 2-5
Communications Specifications
Network
Ethernet
Controller Link
PLC Link
DeviceNet
146
Communications
Max.
Commu- Max. No. Commu- Data link Max.
Connectnicaof Units
nicacapacity remote
able
Mes- Data
Re- baud rate
tions
tions
(per netI/O
devices
sages link mote
distance
medium
work)
points
I/O
Yes
----10 Mbps
2.5 km/
--Coaxial
----Host com100 m
or
puter-totwistedPLC, PLCpair
to-PLC
100 Mbps 100 m
--Twisted- ----pair
32,000
--PLC-to-PLC,
Special
Yes
Yes
--2 Mbps
Twisted- 62
personal
(twisted- words
pair
(62 for
computer-topair)
cables:
Wired
PLC
cables or
500 m
Units
(1.5 km
only with optical
with two Repeater fiber
Repeater Units, 32 cables
Units)
without
Repeater
Optical
Units)
cables:
20 km/
30km
64 words ----Yes
--128 Kbps 500 m
32
RS232C,
RS-422,
optical
fiber
cables
63
Special
--2,048 PLC-toYes
--Yes
500 Kbps 100 m
cables
Slave
Communi(Slaves:
cations
Remote I/O
cycle:
Terminals,
Approx.
Remote
5 ms (128
Adapters.
inputs,
Sensor Ter128 outminals,
puts)
CQM1 I/O
Link Units,
Analog Output Terminals, Analog
Input Terminals)
Section 2-6
Unit Current Consumption
Network
Communications
Mes- Data
Resages link mote
I/O
Max.
Commu- Max. No. Commu- Data link Max.
baud rate
nicaof Units
nicacapacity remote
tions
tions
(per netI/O
distance
medium
work)
points
---
---
Yes
750 Kbps 100 m
Communications
cycle:
Approx.
1 ms max.
(128
inputs,
128 outputs)
32
Two-core --wires,
special
flat
cables
256
PROFIBUS-DP ---
---
Yes
100 m
12 Mbps
Communications
cycle:
Approx.
3.5 ms
max. (128
inputs,
128 outputs)
125
Special
cables
7,168
words
CompoBus/S
2-6
---
Connectable
devices
PLC-toSlave
(Slaves:
Remote I/O
Terminals,
Remote I/O
Modules.
Sensor Terminals, Sensor Amp
Terminals,
Bit Chain
Terminals)
PLC-toSlave
(Slaves: All
PROFIBUSDP slaves)
Unit Current Consumption
The amount of current/power that can be supplied to the Units mounted in a
Rack is limited by the capacity of the Rack’s Power Supply Unit. Refer to the
following tables when designing your system so that the total current consumption of the mounted Units does not exceed the maximum current for
each voltage group and the total power consumption does not exceed the
maximum for the Power Supply Unit.
2-6-1
CPU Racks and Expansion Racks
The following table shows the maximum currents and power that can be supplied by Power Supply Units in CPU Racks and Expansion Racks (both CSseries Expansion Racks and C200H Expansion I/O Racks).
When calculating current/power consumption in a CPU Rack, be sure to
include the power required by the CPU Rack and CPU Unit themselves. Likewise, be sure to include the power required by the Expansion Rack itself
When calculating current/power consumption in an Expansion Rack.
Power Supply
Unit
C200HW-PA204
C200HW-PA204S
C200HW-PA204R
C200HW-PA204C
C200HW-PD204
C200HW-PA209R
C200HW-PD025
Max. Current Consumption
5-V group
26-V group
24-V group
(Internal logic)
(Relays)
(Service)
4.6 A
0.625 A
None
4.6 A
0.625 A
0.8 A
4.6 A
0.625 A
None
4.6 A
0.625 A
None
4.6 A
0.625 A
None
9A
1.3 A
None
5.3 A
1.3 A
None
Max. Total
Power
Consumption
30 W
30 W
30 W
30 W
30 W
45 W
40 W
147
Section 2-6
Unit Current Consumption
2-6-2
SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Slave Racks
The following table shows the maximum currents and power that can be supplied by Power Supply Units in SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Slave Racks. Be
sure to include the power required by the Rack itself When calculating current/power consumption.
Slave Unit
C200H-RT201
(Wired)
C200H-RT202
(Wired)
C200H-RT001-P
(Optical)
C200H-RT002-P
(Optical)
Max. Current Consumption
Max. Total
Power
5-V group
26-V group 24-V group
Consumption
(Internal logic)
(Relays)
(Service)
2.7 A
0.625 A
0.8 A
28 W
2.7 A
0.625 A
None
23 W
2.7 A
0.625 A
0.8 A
28 W
2.7 A
0.625 A
None
23 W
The current consumed by each voltage group must not exceed the maximum
current shown in the table above.
1,2,3...
1. Current required at 5 V DC by all Units (A) ≤ Max. Current shown in table
2. Current required at 26 V DC by all Units (B) ≤ Max. Current shown in table
3. Current required at 24 V DC by all Units (C) ≤ Max. Current shown in table
Also, the power consumed by all Units must not exceed the maximum shown
in the table above.
A × 5 V DC + B × 26 V DC + C × 24 V DC ≤ Max. Power shown in table
2-6-3
Example 1
Example Calculations
In this example, the following Units are mounted to a CPU Rack with a
C200HW-PA204S Power Supply Unit.
Unit
CPU Backplane
(8 slots)
CPU Unit
Input Units
Model
CS1W-BC083
CS1H-CPU66
C200H-ID216
CS1W-ID291
Output Units
C200H-OC221
Special I/O Unit
C200HW-NC213
CS-series CPU Bus CS1W-CLK21
Unit
Service power supply (24 V DC)
Quantity
1
Voltage group
5 V DC 26 V DC 24 V DC
0.11 A
-----
1
2
2
2
1
1
1.10 A
0.10 A
0.20 A
0.01 A
0.30 A
0.33 A
------0.075 A
-----
-------------
0.3 A used
---
---
0.3 A
Current Consumption
Group
5 V DC
26 V DC
24 V DC
148
Current consumption
0.11 A + 1.10 A + 0.10 A × 2 + 0.20 A × 2 + 0.01 A × 2 + 0.30 A + 0.33 A
= 2.46 A (≤4.6 A)
0.075 A × 2 = 0.15 A (≤0.625 A)
0.3 A = 0.3 A (≤0.8 A)
Section 2-6
Unit Current Consumption
Power Consumption
2.46 A × 5 V + 0.15 A × 26 V + 0.3 A × 24 V
= 12.3 W + 3.9 W + 7.2 W
= 23.4 W (≤30 W)
Example 2
In this example, the following Units are mounted to a CS-series Expansion
Rack with a C200HW-PA209R Power Supply Unit.
Unit
CS-series Expansion Backplane
(10 slots)
Input Units
Output Units
Model
Quantity
CS1W-BI103
1
5 V DC
0.23 A
CS1W-ID291
CS1W-OD291
2
8
0.20 A
0.48 A
Voltage group
26 V DC 24 V DC
-----
-----
-----
Current Consumption
Group
5 V DC
26 V DC
24 V DC
Current consumption
0.23 A + 0.20 A × 2 + 0.48 A × 8 = 4.47 A (≤9 A)
-----
Power Consumption
4.47 A × 5 V = 22.35 W (≤45 W)
Example 3
In this example, the following Units are mounted to a SYSMAC BUS Remote
I/O Slave Rack with a C200H-RT201 Slave Unit.
Unit
Input Units
Output Units
Model
C200H-ID211
C200H-OD411
Quantity
2
3
Voltage group
5 V DC 26 V DC 24 V DC
0.11 A
----0.14 A
-----
Current Consumption
Group
5 V DC
26 V DC
24 V DC
Current consumption
0.11 A × 2 + 0.14 A × 3 = 0.64 A (≤2.7A)
-----
Power Consumption
0.64 A × 5 V = 3.2 W (≤28 W)
149
Section 2-6
Unit Current Consumption
2-6-4
Current Consumption Tables
5-V DC Voltage Group
Name
CS1-H CPU Units
(These values include current
consumption by a Programming Console or CX-Programmer connection.)
CS1 CPU Units
(These values include current
consumption by a Programming Console or CX-Programmer connection.)
Serial Communications
Boards
Standard CPU Backplanes
CS-series-only CPU Backplanes
Standard CS-series Expansion Backplanes
CS-series-only Expansion
Backplanes
C200H Expansion I/O Backplanes
I/O Control Units
I/O Interface Units
Model
CS1H-CPU6@H
Current consumption (A)
0.82 (See note.)
CS1G-CPU4@H
0.78 (See note.)
CS1H-CPU6@-EV1
1.10 (See note.)
CS1G-CPU4@-EV1
0.95 (See note.)
CS1W-SCB21
CS1W-SCB41
CS1W-BC@@3
CS1W-BC@@2
0.28 (See note.)
0.37 (See note.)
0.11
0.11
CS1W-BI@@3
0.23
CS1W-BI@@2
0.23
C200HW-BI031
C200HW-BI051
C200HW-BI081-V1
C200HW-BI101-V1
CS1W-IC102
CS1W-II102
0.15
0.15
0.15
0.15
0.92
0.23
Note NT-AL001 Link Adapters consume 0.15/Unit when used.
Add 0.04 A for each CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter that is used.
Add 0.20 A for each NV3W-M@20L Programmable Terminal that is used.
Basic I/O Unit
Category
C200H Input Units
Name
DC Input Units
AC Input Units
AC/DC Input Units
Interrupt Input Unit
C200H Group-2 High- DC Input Units
density Input Units
150
Model
C200H-ID211
C200H-ID212
C200H-IA121
C200H-IA122
C200H-IA122V
C200H-IA221
C200H-IA222
C200H-IA222V
C200H-IM211
C200H-IM212
C200HS-INT01
C200H-ID216
C200H-ID217
C200H-ID218
C200H-ID219
C200H-ID111
Current
consumption (A)
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.02
0.10
0.12
0.10
0.12
0.12
Section 2-6
Unit Current Consumption
Category
Name
CS-series Basic Input DC Input Units
Units
AC Input Units
C200H Output Units
B7A Input Unit
Interrupt Input Unit
High-speed Input
Unit
Relay Output Units
Transistor Output
Units
B7A Interface Units
Triac Output Units
C200H Group-2 High- Transistor Output
density Output Units Units
Model
CS1W-ID211
CS1W-ID231
CS1W-ID261
CS1W-ID291
CS1W-IA111
CS1W-IA211
CS1W-B7A12
CS1W-INT01
CS1W-IDP01
Current
consumption (A)
0.10
0.15
0.15
0.20
0.11
0.11
0.09
0.10
0.10
C200H-OC221
0.01
C200H-OC222
C200H-OC222V
C200H-OC222N
C200H-OC225
C200H-OC226
C200H-OC226N
C200H-OC223
C200H-OC224
C200H-OC224V
C200H-OC224N
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.05
0.03
0.03
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
C200H-OD411
C200H-OD213
C200H-OD214
C200H-OD216
C200H-OD211
C200H-OD217
C200H-OD212
C200H-OD21A
C200H-B7AO1
C200H-B7A02
C200H-OA221
C200H-OA223
C200H-OA222V
C200H-OA224
C200H-OD218
C200H-OD21B
C200H-OD219
0.14
0.14
0.14
0.01
0.16
0.01
0.18
0.10
0.10
0.18
0.14
0.27
0.18
0.27
0.18
0.18
0.27
151
Section 2-6
Unit Current Consumption
Category
Name
Model
CS-series Basic Output Units
Relay Output Units
Transistor Output
Units
Triac Output Units
CS-series Basic I/O
Units
B7A Output Unit
DC Input/ Transistor Output Units
TTL I/O Unit
B7A I/O Units
C200H Basic Output
Unit
C200H High-density
Output Unit
C200H High-density
I/O Units
B7A Output Unit
C200H Basic Unit
Analog Timer Unit
B7A I/O Units
CS1W-OC201
CS1W-OC211
CS1W-OD211
CS1W-OD212
CS1W-OD231
CS1W-OD232
CS1W-OD261
CS1W-OD262
CS1W-OD291
CS1W-OD292
CS1W-OA201
CS1W-OA211
CS1W-B7A02
CS1W-MD261
CS1W-MD262
CS1W-MD291
CS1W-MD292
CS1W-MD561
CS1W-B7A21
CS1W-B7A22
C200H-B7AO1
Current
consumption (A)
0.10
0.13
0.17
0.17
0.27
0.27
0.39
0.39
0.48
0.48
0.23
0.41
0.09
0.27
0.27
0.35
0.35
0.27
0.09
0.09
0.10
C200H-B7A02
0.10
C200H-B7A21
C200H-B7A22
C200H-TM001
0.10
0.10
0.06
Special I/O Units
Category
Name
C200H HighDC Input Unit
density I/O Units TTL Input Unit
(Special I/O
Transistor Output
Units)
Unit
TTL Output Unit
TTL I/O Unit
DC Input/
Transistor Output
Units
152
Model
C200H-ID215
C200H-ID501
C200H-OD215
Current
consumption (A)
0.13
0.13
0.22
C200H-OD501
C200H-MD501
C200H-MD215
C200H-MD115
0.22
0.18
0.18
0.18
Section 2-6
Unit Current Consumption
Category
C200H Special
I/O Units
Name
Model
Temperature Control Units
C200H-TC001
C200H-TC002
C200H-TC003
C200H-TC101
C200H-TC102
C200H-TC103
Heat/Cool Tempera- C200H-TV001
ture Control Units
C200H-TV002
C200H-TV003
C200H-TV101
C200H-TV102
C200H-TV103
Temperature SenC200H-TS001
sor Units
C200H-TS002
C200H-TS101
C200H-TS102
PID Control Units
C200H-PID01
C200H-PID02
C200H-PID03
Cam Positioner Unit C200H-CP114
ASCII Units
C200H-ASC02
C200H-ASC11
C200H-ASC31
Analog Input Units
C200H-AD001
C200H-AD002
C200H-AD003
Analog Output Units C200H-DA001
C200H-DA002
C200H-DA003
C200H-DA004
Current
consumption (A)
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.30
0.20
0.25
0.30
0.55
0.45
0.10
0.65
0.60
0.10
0.10
153
Section 2-6
Unit Current Consumption
Category
C200H Special
I/O Units
Name
Analog I/O Unit
C200H-MAD01
High-speed Counter C200H-CT001-V1
Units
C200H-CT002
C200H-CT021
Motion Control Unit C200H-MC221
Position Control
Units
ID Sensor Units
Voice Unit
DeviceNet Master
Unit
CompoBus/S Master Unit
PLC Link Unit
SYSMAC BUS
Remote I/O Slave
Units
CS-series Special I/O Units
154
Model
Analog I/O Unit
Analog Input Units
C200H-NC211
C200H-NC111
C200H-NC112
C200HW-NC113
C200HW-NC213
C200HW-NC413
C200H-IDS01-V1
C200H-IDS21
C200H-OV001
C200HW-DRM21V1
C200HW-SRM21V1
C200H-LK401
C200H-RM201
C200H-RM001-PV1
CS1W-MAD44
CS1W-AD041V1/081-V1
CS1W-AD161
Analog Output Units CS1WDA041/08V/08C
Isolated ThermoCS1W-PTS01-V1
couple Input Unit
High-resolution
CS1W-PTS11
Isolated Thermocouple Input Unit
Isolated Resistance CS1W-PTS02
Thermometer Input
Unit
Isolated Ni508.4Ω
CS1W-PTS03
Resistance Thermometer Input Unit
High-resolution
CS1W-PTS12
Isolated Resistance
Thermometer Input
Unit
Isolated 2-wire
CS1W-PTW01
Transmission Device
Input Unit
Isolated DC Input
CS1W-PDC01
Unit
High-resolution Iso- CS1W-PDC11
lated DC Input Unit
Isolated Control
CS1W-PMV01
Output Unit (Analog
Output Unit)
Current
consumption (A)
0.10
0.30
0.30
0.45
0.65
(0.85 with Teaching
Box)
0.50
0.15
0.15
0.30
0.30
0.50
0.25
0.25
0.30
0.25
0.15
0.35
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.13
0.15
0.13
0.15
0.12
0.15
0.15
0.12
0.15
0.15
0.12
0.15
Section 2-6
Unit Current Consumption
Category
CS-series Special I/O Units
Name
Power Transducer
Input Unit
DC Input Unit
(100 mA)
Isolated Pulse Input
Unit
Motion Control Units
Model
CS1W-PTR01
Current
consumption (A)
0.15
CS1W-PTR02
0.15
CS1W-PPS01
0.20
CS1W-MC221
0.6 (0.80 when connected to a Teaching Box)
0.7 (1.00 when connected to a Teaching Box)
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.36
0.36
0.60
0.80
0.75
0.75
0.36
0.45
0.33
0.40
CS1W-MC421
Position Control
Units
CS1W-NC113
CS1W-NC133
CS1W-NC213
CS1W-NC233
CS1W-NC413
CS1W-NC433
Customizable
CS1W-HIO01-V1
Counter Units
CS1W-HCP22-V1
CS1W-HCA12-V1
CS1W-HCA22-V1
High-speed Counter CS1W-CT021
Unit
CS1W-CT041
GP-IB Interface Unit CS1W-GPI01
CompoNet Master
CS1W-CRM21
Unit
155
Section 2-6
Unit Current Consumption
CS-series CPU Bus Units
Category
CS-series CPU Bus
Units
Name
Controller Link
Unit
Serial Communications Units
SYSMAC LINK
Unit
Ethernet Unit
FL-net Unit
DeviceNet Unit
PROFIBUS-DP
Master Unit
Position Control
Unit supporting
MECHATROLINKII communications
Loop Control Unit
High-resolution
Motion Control
Unit
SYSMAC SPU
Units (High-speed
Storage and Processing Unit)
Model
Current
consumption (A)
0.33
CS1W-CLK21-V1,
CS1W-CLK23
CS1W-CLK12-V1,
CS1W-CLK13
CS1W-CLK52-V1,
CS1W-CLK53
CS1W-SCU21-V1
CS1W-SCU31-V1
CS1W-SLK21
CS1W-SLK11
CS1W-ETN01
CS1W-ETN21
CS1W-FLN22
CS1W-DRM21-V1
CS1W-PRM21
0.30 (See note.)
0.40
0.48
0.47
0.40
0.38
0.38
0.29
0.40
CS1W-NCF71
0.36
CS1W-LC001
CS1W-MCH71
0.36
0.80
CS1W-SPU01
CS1W-SPU02
0.56
0.70
0.58
0.65
Note NT-AL001 Link Adapters consume 0.15/Unit when used.
Add 0.04 A for each CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter that is used.
Add 0.20 A for each NV3W-M@20L Programmable Terminal that is used.
Current Consumptions for
26-V Supply
Category
C200H Output Units
Name
Relay Contact
Output Unit
Transistor
Output Units
156
Model
C200H-OC221
C200H-OC222
C200H-OC223
C200H-OC224
C200H-OC225
C200H-OC222V/N
C200H-OC226(N)
C200H-OC224V/N
C200H-OD216
C200H-OD217
Current
consumption (A)
0.075 for 8 points
when ON simultaneously
0.09 for 8 points
when ON simultaneously
0.075 for 8 points
when ON simultaneously
Section 2-6
Unit Current Consumption
Category
C200H Special I/O
Units
CS-series Basic
Output Units
CS-series Special I/O
Units
Name
Model
Analog Input
Units
Analog Output
Units
C200H-AD003
Analog I/O Unit
Analog Input
Unit
CS1W-MAD44
CS1W-AD041/081
CS1W-AD161
CS1W-DA041/08V
CS1W-DA08C
CS1W-PTS01-V1
C200H-DA003
C200H-DA004
Analog I/O Units C200H-MAD01
ID Sensor Units C200H-IDS01-V1
C200H-IDS21
Relay Output
CS1W-OC201
Units
CS1W-OC211
Analog Output
Unit
Isolated Thermocouple Input
Unit
High-resolution CS1W-PTS11
Isolated Thermocouple Input
Unit
Isolated Resis- CS1W-PTS02
tance Thermometer Input Unit
Isolated Ni508Ω
Resistance
Thermometer
Input Unit
High-resolution
Isolated Resistance Thermometer Input Unit
Isolated 2-wire
Transmission
Device Input
Unit
Isolated DC
Input Unit
High-resolution
Isolated DC
Input Unit
Isolated Control
Output Unit
(Analog Output
Unit)
Power Transducer Input Unit
DC Input Unit
(100 mA)
Isolated Pulse
Input Unit
Customizable
Counter Unit
Current
consumption (A)
0.10
0.20
0.25
0.2
0.12
0.12
0.006 per ON
output point
0.006 per ON
output point
0.20
0.09
0.06
0.18
0.25
0.15
0.08
0.15
CS1W-PTS03
0.15
CS1W-PTS12
0.07
CS1W-PTW01
0.16
CS1W-PDC01
0.15
CS1W-PDC11
0.12
CS1W-PMV01
0.16
CS1W-PTR01
0.08
CS1W-PTR02
0.08
CS1W-PPS01
0.16
CS1W-HCA212-V1
CS1W-HCA22-V1
0.15
0.15
157
Section 2-7
CPU Bus Unit Setting Area Capacity
2-7
CPU Bus Unit Setting Area Capacity
Settings for most CPU Bus Units and Inner Boards are stored in the CPU Bus
Unit Setting Area in the CPU Unit. Refer to 9-27 Parameter Areas for details.
The CPU Bus Units are allocated the required number of works for settings
from this area.
There is a limit to the capacity of the CPU Bus Unit Setting Area of 10,752
bytes (10 Kbytes). The system must be designed so that the number of words
used in the CPU Bus Unit Setting Area by all of the CPU Bus Units and the
Inner Board does not exceed this capacity. If the wrong combination of Units
is used, the capacity will be exceeded and either Units will operate from
default settings only or will not operate at all.
2-7-1
System Setting Allocations to CPU Bus Units
Classification
CS-series CPU
Bus Units
Inner Boards
Name
Model number
Allocation
(bytes)
512
Controller Link Unit
CS1WCLK11/12/21/52(-V1),
CS1W-CLK13/23/53
Serial Communications Unit
Ethernet Unit
CS1W-SCU21/31-V1
0
CS1W-ETN01
CS1W-ETN21
CS1W-FLN22
CS1W-SLK21/11
CS1W-DRM21-V1
CS1W-NCF71
CS1W-MCH71
CS1W-LC001
CS1W-MCH71
412
99.4
988
512
0
0
0
0
0
FL-net Unit
SYSMAC LINK Unit
DeviceNet Unit
Position Control Unit
Motion Control Unit
Loop Control Unit
High-resolution
Motion Control Unit
Storage and Process- CS1W-SPU01/02
ing Unit
Serial CommunicaCS1W-SCB21/41
tions Board
0
0
Note Any Unit with a usage of “0” does not use the CPU Bus Unit Setting Area at
all.
158
Section 2-8
I/O Table Settings
2-8
I/O Table Settings
The following settings are used in the I/O tables on the CX-Programmer.
2-8-1
CS-series Basic I/O Units
Name
AC Input Units
AC/DC Input Units
DC Input Units
DC Input Units classified as C200H Group-2
Units
Interrupt Input Units
High-speed Input Unit
Contact Output Units
Triac Output Units
Transistor Output Units
Model
CS1W-IA111
CS1W-IA211
CS1W-IA121/221
CS1W-IA122/122V/222/222V
C200H-IM211
C200H-IM212
CS1W-ID211
CS1W-ID231
CS1W-ID261
16pt Unit − 16pt Input
16pt Unit − 16pt Input
CS/CJ 8pt Unit − 8pt Input
16pt Unit − 16pt Input
CS/CJ 8pt Unit − 8pt Input
16pt Unit − 16pt Input
16pt Unit − 16pt Input
32pt Unit − 32pt Input
64pt Unit − 64pt Input
Addresses
per Unit
-------------------
CS1W-ID291
C200H-ID211
96pt Unit − 96pt Input
CS/CJ 8pt Unit − 8pt Input
-----
6
1
0
0
C200H-ID212
C200H-ID216/218
C200H-ID111/217/219
16pt Unit − 16pt Input
32pt Unit − 32pt Input
64pt Unit − 64pt Input
-------
1
2
4
0
0
0
CS1W-INT01
C200HS-INT01
CS1W-IDP01
CS1W-OC201
CS1W-OC211
C200H-OC223
C200H-OC221/224/224V/224N
C200H-OC222/222V/222N
C200H-OC225/226/226N
CS1W-OA201
CS1W-OA211
CS1W-OA221/223
CS1W-OA222V/224
CS1W-OD211/212
CS1W-OD231/232
CS1W-OD261/262
CS1W-OD291/292
C200H-OD213/214/216/411
C200H-OD211/217
C200H-OD212/21A
C200H-OD218/21B
C200H-OD219
Interrupt Unit (8 Bit)
Interrupt Unit (8 Bit)
16pt Unit − 16pt Input
8pt Unit − 8pt Output
16pt Unit − 16pt Output
5pt Unit - 5pt Output
8pt Unit − 8pt Output
12pt Unit - 12pt Output
16pt Unit − 16pt Output
8pt Unit − 8pt Output
16pt Unit − 16pt Output
8pt Unit − 8pt Mixed
12pt Unit − 12pt Output
16pt Unit − 16pt Output
32pt Unit − 32pt Output
64pt Unit − 64pt Output
96pt Unit − 96pt Mixed
8pt Unit − 8pt Mixed
12pt Unit − 12pt Output
16pt Unit − 16pt Output
32pt Unit − 32pt Output
64pt Unit − 64pt Output
---------------------------------------------
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
4
6
1
1
1
2
4
64pt Unit − 64pt Mixed
96pt Unit − 96pt Mixed
64pt Unit - 64pt Mixed
-------
2
3
2
2
3
2
Transistor Output Units
classified as C200H
Group-2 Units
DC Input/Transistor Out- CS1W-MD261/262
put Units
CS1W-MD291/292
TTL I/O Units
CS1W-MD561
Unit type setting
Input
Words
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
4
Output
Words
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
159
Section 2-8
I/O Table Settings
Name
B7A Interface Units
classified as CS-series
Basic I/O Units
B7A Interface Units
B7A Interface Units
classified as C200H
Group-2 Units
Analog Timer Unit
Model
CS1W-B7A12
CS1W-B7A02
CS1W-B7A21
CS1W-B7A22
C200H-B7AI1
C200H-B7AO1
C200H-B7A12
C200H-B7A02
C200H-B7A21
C200H-B7A22
C200H-TM001
Note
Unit type setting
32pt Unit − 32pt Input
32pt Unit − 32pt Output
32pt Unit − 32pt Mixed
64pt Unit − 64pt Mixed
16pt Unit − 16pt Input
16pt Unit − 16pt Output
32pt Unit − 32pt Input
32pt Unit − 32pt Output
32pt Unit − 32pt Mixed
64pt Unit − 64pt Mixed
4 times
Internal bits: 8 inputs and 4
outputs
Addresses Input Output
per Unit Words Words
-----------------------
2
0
1
2
1
0
2
0
1
2
1
0
2
1
2
0
1
0
2
1
2
1. An I/O setting error will occur if Units are not set correctly.
2. An I/O verification error will occur if the number of input or output words is
set incorrectly.
160
Section 2-8
I/O Table Settings
2-8-2
CS-series Special I/O Units
Name
Analog I/O Unit
Analog Input Units
Analog Output Units
Isolated Thermocouple
Input Unit
High-resolution Isolated
Thermocouple Input Unit
Isolated Resistance Thermometer Input Unit
Isolated Ni508.4Ω Resistance Thermometer Input
Unit
High-resolution Isolated
Resistance Thermometer
Input Unit
Isolated 2-wire Transmission Device Input Unit
Isolated DC Input Unit
Model
Unit type setting
Addresses Input Output
per Unit
Words Words
CS1W-MAD44
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Analog Input/Out- 1
5
5
put Unit
CS1W-AD041/081-V1 CS/CJ SIO Unit − Analog Input Unit 1
9
1
CS1W-AD161
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Analog Input Unit 2
17
1
CS1WCS/CJ SIO Unit − Analog Output
1
1
9
DA041/08V/08C
Unit
CS1W-PTS01-V1
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Process
1
10
0
Input/Output Unit
CS1W-PTS11
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Process
1
10
0
Input/Output Unit
CS1W-PTS02
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Process
1
10
0
Input/Output Unit
CS1W-PTS03
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Process
1
10
0
Input/Output Unit
CS1W-PTS12
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Process
Input/Output Unit
1
10
0
CS1W-PTW01
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Process
Input/Output Unit
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Process
Input/Output Unit
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Process
Input/Output Unit
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Process
Input/Output Unit
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Process
Input/Output Unit
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Process
Input/Output Unit
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Process
Input/Output Unit
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Motion Control
Unit
1
10
0
1
10
0
1
10
0
1
10
0
1
10
0
1
5
5
1
10
0
3
5
1
1
2
1
20
32
3
6
12
5
10
18
2
4
8
5
4
26
14
1
2
5
11
5
9
4
8
8
1
21
41
45
Variable
17
33
25
Variable
CS1W-PDC01
High-resolution Isolated DC CS1W-PDC11
Input Unit
Isolated Control Output Unit CS1W-PTR01
(Analog Output Unit)
Power Transducer Input
Unit
CS1W-PTR02
DC Input Unit (100 mA)
CS1W-PMV01
Isolated Pulse Input Unit
CS1W-PPS01
Motion Control Units
CS1W-MC221
CS1W-MC421
Position Control Units
CS1W-NC113/133
CS1W-NC213/233
CS1W-NC413/433
Customizable Counter Units CS1WHIO01/HCP22/HCA22
High-speed Counter Units
CS1W-CT021/041
GP-IB Interface Unit
CompoNet Master Unit
CS1W-GPI01
CS1W-CRM21
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Numerical Control Unit
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Customizable
Unit
CS/CJ SIO Unit − High Speed
Counter Unit
CS/CJ SIO Unit − Other SIO Unit
CS/CJ SIO Unit Communications
mode No. 0
− CompoNet
Master Unit
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 8
Note A Special I/O setting error will occur if Units, the number of input, or the number of output words is set incorrectly.
161
Section 2-8
I/O Table Settings
2-8-3
C200H Special I/O Units
Name
High-density I/O Units
Temperature Control
Units
Heating/Cooling Control Units
Temperature Sensor
Units
PID Control Units
Cam Positioner Unit
ASCII Units
Analog Input Units
Analog Output Units
Analog I/O Units
High-speed Counter
Units
Motion Control Units
Position Control Units
ID Sensor Units
Voice Unit
Fuzzy Logic Control
Unit
162
Model
Addresses Input Output
per Unit
Words Words
C200H-ID501/215
C200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1
2
0
C200H-OD501/215 (standard
1
0
2
mode)
C200H-OD501/215 (dynamic
1
0
8
mode)
C200H-MD501/215/115
1
1
1
(standard mode)
C200H-MD501/215/115
1
8
0
(dynamic mode)
C200HC200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1
7
3
TC001/002/003/101/102/103
C200HC200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1
7
3
TV001/002/003/101/102/103
C200H-TS001/002/101/102
C200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1
5
1
C200H-PID01/02/03
C200H-CP114
C200H-ASC02
C200H-ASC11/21/31
C200H-AD001
C200H-AD002
C200H-AD003 (normal mode)
C200H-AD003 (adjustment
mode)
C200H-DA001
C200H-DA002
C200H-DA003/004 (normal
mode)
C200H-DA003/004 (adjustment mode)
C200H-MAD01 (normal
mode)
C200H-MAD01 (adjustment
mode)
C200H-CT001-V1/CT002
(mode 1 or 2)
C200H-CT001-V1/CT002
(mode 3)
C200H-CT001-V1/CT002
(mode 4, 5, or 6)
C200H-CT021
C200H-MC221
C200H-NC111/112
C200H-NC211
C200H-NC114
C200HW-NC213
C200HW-NC413
C200H-IDS01-V1/IDS21
C200H-OV001
C200H-FZ001
Unit type setting
C200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1
C200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1
C200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1
1
C200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1
7
8
1
5
5
3
2
3
5
1
1
1
1
9
9
2
1
1
8
C200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1
1
1
1
0
1
3
4
9
1
2
8
C200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1
5
5
1
2
8
C200H High Speed Counter Unit 1
6
4
1
5
4
1
4
4
1
2
1
2
1
8
12
5
10
3
2
8
5
10
2
1
2
C200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1
C200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1
C200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1
6
12
1
1
1
4
8
4
5
4
C200H Numerical Control Unit
C200H Numerical Control Unit
Section 2-8
I/O Table Settings
Name
JPCN-1 Unit
C200H DeviceNet Master Unit
DeviceNet Slave Unit
(C200H I/O Link Unit)
CompoBus/S Master
Unit
Model
Unit type setting
Addresses Input Output
per Unit
Words Words
C200H-JRM21
C200HW-DRM21-V1
C200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1
C200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1
2
9
8
1
C200HW-DRT21
C200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1
5
5
C200H SIOU/C200H ASCII Unit 1
6
4
2
12
8
-----
-----
-----
C200HW-SRM21-V1 (unit
number 1)
C200HW-SRM21-V1 (unit
number 2)
PLC Link Unit
C200H-LK401
SYSMAC BUS Remote C200H-RM001-PV1/RM201
I/O Master Unit
PC Link Unit LK401
SYSMAC BUS Master
Note A Special I/O setting error will occur if Units, the number of input, or the number of output words is set incorrectly.
2-8-4
CS-series CPU Bus Units
Unit type setting
Communications
Name
Controller Link Unit
Serial Communications Unit
Ethernet Unit
Position Control Unit
Motion Controllers
Loop Controllers
General-purpose
Devices
FL-net Unit
SYSMAC LINK Unit
DeviceNet Unit
Position Control Unit
Motion Control Unit
Loop Control Unit
Storage and Processing Unit
Open Network Controller
Model
CS1W-CLK13/23/53
CS1W-CLK12/21/52(-V1)
CS1W-SCU21-V1
CS1W-SCU31-V1
CS1W-ETN01/11/21
CS1D-ETN21D
CS1W-FLN01/02/12/22
CS1W-SLK11/21
CS1W-DRM21-V1
CS1W-NCF71
CS1W-MCH71
CS1W-LC001
CS1W-SPU01/02
CS1W-EIS/EIX-CTS
ITBC-CTS01
Note The DeviceNet Unit is not support by CX-Programmer version 2.0 or earlier,
and I/O tables containing the DeviceNet Unit cannot be created with these
versions. Create the tables online.
163
I/O Table Settings
164
Section 2-8
SECTION 3
Nomenclature, Functions, and Dimensions
This section provides the names of components and their functions for various Units. The Unit dimensions are also
provided.
3-1
CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-1 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-2 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-3 CPU Unit Memory Block Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-4 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
166
166
167
170
174
3-2
File Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-1 Specifications of Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-2 Files Handled by CPU Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-3 Initializing File Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-4 Using File Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-5 Memory Card Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-6 Installing and Removing the Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
174
175
176
178
178
181
182
3-3
Programming Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-2 Programming Consoles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-3 CX-Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-4 Peripheral Port Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-5 RS-232C Port Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
184
184
185
187
191
192
3-4
Power Supply Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-1 Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-2 Components and Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-3 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-4 Selecting a Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-5 Replacement Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
195
195
195
197
198
199
3-5
Backplanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-1 CPU Backplanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-2 CS-series Expansion Backplanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-3 C200H Expansion I/O Backplanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-4 I/O Control Units, I/O Interface Units, and Terminators . . . . . . . . .
205
205
207
209
210
3-6
Basic I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-1 C200H and CS-series Basic I/O Units with Terminal Blocks . . . . .
3-6-2 Interrupt Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-3 Units with High-speed Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-4 CS-series Basic I/O Units with Connectors (32-, 64-, and 96-pt Units)
3-6-5 C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
214
214
220
226
227
230
3-7
C200H High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
232
3-8
B7A Interface Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8-1 CS-series B7A Interface Units (CS-series Basic I/O Units). . . . . . .
3-8-2 C200H Basic B7A Interface Units (C200H Basic I/O Units) . . . . .
3-8-3 B7A Interface Units (C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units) . . .
238
238
252
254
3-9
Analog Timer Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
263
165
Section 3-1
CPU Units
3-1
3-1-1
CPU Units
Models
CS1-H CPU Units
I/O points
5,120
1,280
960
Expansion
Racks
7 max.
3 max.
2 max.
Programming
Data Memory
(DM + EM)
250K steps
448K words
LD instruction
Model
processing
time
0.02 µs
CS1H-CPU67H
120K steps
60K steps
30K steps
20K steps
60K steps
30K steps
20K steps
10K steps
256K words
128K words
64K words
64K words
128K words
64K words
64K words
64K words
CS1H-CPU66H
CS1H-CPU65H
CS1H-CPU64H
CS1G-CPU63H
CS1G-CPU45H
CS1G-CPU44H
CS1G-CPU43H
CS1G-CPU42H
0.04 µs
Weight
350 g
max.
CS1 CPU Units
I/O points
Expansion
Racks
5,120
7 max.
1,280
960
3 max.
2 max.
166
Programming
250K steps
120K steps
60K steps
30K steps
20K steps
60K steps
30K steps
20K steps
10K steps
Data Memory
(DM + EM)
448K words
256K words
128K words
64K words
32K words
128K words
64K words
32K words
32K words
LD instruction
Model
processing
time
0.04 µs
CS1H-CPU67-EV1
CS1H-CPU66-EV1
CS1H-CPU65-EV1
CS1H-CPU64-EV1
CS1G-CPU63-EV1
0.08 µs
CS1G-CPU45-EV1
CS1G-CPU44-EV1
CS1G-CPU43-EV1
CS1G-CPU42-EV1
Weight
400 g
max.
Section 3-1
CPU Units
3-1-2
Components
RUN
ERR/ALM
1. LED indicators
INH
PRPHL/COMM
2. Battery compartment
3. DIP switch (under battery cover)
OPEN
MCPWR
BUSY
OPEN
4. Memory Card indicators
10. Peripheral port
PERIPHERAL
5. Memory Card power supply switch
9. RS-232C port
PORT
8. Inner Board connector compartment
6. Memory Card eject button
7. Memory Card connector
A CS1 CPU Unit is shown above.
Indicators
The following table describes the LED indicators located on the front panel of
the CPU Units.
Indicator
RUN
Color
Green
Status
ON
Flashing
OFF
ERR/ALM
Red
ON
Flashing
INH
Orange
BKUP (CS1- Orange
H CPU Units
only)
PRPHL
Orange
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Flashing
OFF
Meaning
PLC is operating normally in MONITOR or RUN mode.
System download mode error or DIP switch settings error.
PLC has stopped operating while in PROGRAM mode, or has stopped operating
due to a fatal error, or is downloading data from the system.
A fatal error has occurred (including FALS instruction execution), or a hardware
error (watchdog timer error) has occurred.
The CPU Unit will stop operating, and the outputs from all Output Units will turn
OFF.
A non-fatal error has occurred (including FAL instruction execution)
The CPU Unit will continue operating.
CPU Unit is operating normally.
Output OFF Bit (A50015) has been turned ON. The outputs from all Output Units
will turn OFF.
Output OFF Bit (A50015) has been turned OFF.
User program and parameter area data is being backed up to flash memory in the
CPU Unit or being restored from flash memory.
Note Do not turn OFF the power supply to the PLC while this indicator is lit.
Data is not being written to flash memory.
CPU Unit is communicating (sending or receiving) via the peripheral port.
CPU Unit is not communicating via the peripheral port.
167
Section 3-1
CPU Units
Indicator
COMM
Color
Orange
MCPWR
Green
BUSY
Orange
Status
Flashing
OFF
ON
Flashing
OFF
Flashing
OFF
Meaning
CPU Unit is communicating (sending or receiving) via the RS-232C port.
CPU Unit is not communicating via the RS-232C port.
Power is being supplied to the Memory Card.
Flashes once: Easy backup read, write, or verify normal
Flashes five times: Easy backup write malfunction
Flashes three times: Easy backup write warning
Flashes continuously: Easy backup read or verify malfunction
Power is not being supplied to the Memory Card.
Memory Card is being accessed.
Memory Card is not being accessed.
CS1-H CPU Unit
RUN
CS1 CPU Unit
CS
ERR/ALM
INH BKUP
PRPH COMM
168
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
PRPHL/COMM
Section 3-1
CPU Units
DIP Switch Settings
Pin no. Setting
Function
1
ON
Writing disabled for user program memory.
(See Note.)
OFF
Writing enabled for user program memory.
2
ON
The user program is automatically transferred from the Memory Card when power is
turned ON.
OFF
The user program is not automatically transferred from the Memory Card when power is
turned ON.
3
ON
OFF
4
ON
OFF
5
ON
OFF
6
ON
OFF
7
ON
OFF
8
OFF
CS1 CPU Unit:
Programming Console messages displayed
in English.
CS1 CPU Unit:
Programming Console messages displayed
in the language stored in system ROM.
(Messages displayed in Japanese with the
Japanese version of system ROM.)
Peripheral port communications parameters
set in the PLC Setup are used.
Peripheral port communications parameters
set using Programming Console or CX-Programmer (Peripheral bus only) are used.
RS-232C port communications parameters
set using a CX-Programmer (Peripheral bus
only) are used.
RS-232C port communications parameters
set in the PLC Setup are used.
User-defined pin. Turns OFF the User DIP
Switch Pin Flag (A39512).
User-defined pin. Turns ON the User DIP
Switch Pin Flag (A39512).
Writing from the CPU Unit to the Memory
Card.
Usage
Used to prevent programs from being accidently overwritten from Programming
Devices (including Programming Console).
Default
OFF
Used to store the programs in the Memory
OFF
Card to switch operations, or to automatically
transfer programs at power-up (Memory
Card ROM operation).
Note When pin 7 is ON, easy backup reading from the Memory Card is given priority, so even if pin 2 is ON, the user
program is not automatically transferred from the Memory Card when
power is turned ON.
CS1 CPU Unit: Turn ON to display Program- ON
ming Console messages in English.
Note This pin is not used on CS1-H CPU
Units. Keep it turned OFF.
Turn ON to use the peripheral port for a
device other than Programming Console or
CX-Programmer (Peripheral bus only).
OFF
Turn ON to use the RS-232C port for a Programming Device.
OFF
Set pin 6 to ON or OFF and use A39512 in
the program to create a user-defined condition without using an I/O Unit.
OFF
OFF
Press and hold the Memory Card Power
Supply Switch for three seconds.
Note Normally, this pin should be left turned
OFF.
Restoring from the Memory Card to the CPU To read from the Memory Card to the CPU
Unit.
Unit, turn ON the PLC power.
This operation is given priority over automatic
transfer (pin 2 is ON) when power is ON.
Verifying contents of Memory Card.
Press and hold the Memory Card Power
Supply Switch for three seconds.
Always OFF.
OFF
Note
1. The following data cannot be overwritten when pin 1 is ON:
• All parts of the user program (programs in all tasks)
• All data in the parameter area (such as the PLC Setup and I/O table)
When pin 1 is ON, the user program and parameter area will not be cleared
when the memory clear operation is performed from a Programming Device.
169
Section 3-1
CPU Units
2. The DIP switch is not used to set the display language with CS1-H CPU
Units. The language is selected on the startup display on the Programming
Console.
3. The CPU Unit will not enter any mode except PROGRAM mode after backing up data to a Memory Card using DIP switch pin 7. To enter RUN or
MONITOR mode, turn OFF the power supply, turn OFF pin 7, and then restart the PLC. This will enable changing the operating mode as normal.
3-1-3
CPU Unit Memory Block Map
The memory of CS-series CPU Units is configured in the following blocks.
• I/O Memory: The data areas accessible from the user program
• User Memory: The user program and parameter areas (See Note 1.)
The above memory is backed up using a CS1W-BAT01 Battery. If the battery
voltage is low, the data in these areas will not be stable.
With the CS1-H CPU Units, however, the CPU Unit has a built-in flash memory to which the user program and parameter area data is backed up whenever the user memory is written to, including data transfers and online editing
from a Programming Device (CX-Programmer or Programming Console, data
transfers from a Memory Card, etc. The user program and the parameter area
data will be held when using a CS1-H CPU Unit.
The internal flash memory of CS1-H CPU Units with unit version 3.0 also contains a comment memory and FB program memory area. The comment memory is used to store symbol table files, comment files, and program index files
(if comment memory is selected as the transfer destination when transferring
projects from a CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0). The FB source memory area is
used to store function block program data.
170
Section 3-1
CPU Units
CPU Unit
Built-in RAM
I/O Memory Area
Drive 1: EM file memory
(See Note 2.)
Flash Memory
(CS1-H CPU Units only)
User program
Written
automatically
User program
Parameter Area
(See Note 1.)
Written
automatically
Comment memory area
Battery
The battery life is 5 years at an
ambient temperature of 25°C.
Drive 0: Memory
Card
(flash memory)
Written
automatically
Parameter Area
Backup
File memory
Automatically backed up to flash memory whenever a write
operation for the user memory area (user program or parameter
area) is performed from a Programming Device.
Used to store symbol table files, comment files, and program
index files. CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later, Memory
Card, EM file memory, or comment memory can be selected as
the destination when transferring projects from CX-Programmer
Ver. 5.0.
FB program memory area
For CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later, when transferring
projects containing function blocks from the CX-Programmer,
the function block program information is automatically stored
in the FB program memory area.
Note
1. The Parameter Area stores system information for the CPU Unit, such as
the PLC Setup.
2. Part of the EM (Extended Data Memory) Area can be converted to file
memory to handle data files and program files in RAM memory format,
which has the same format as Memory Cards. File memory in the EM Area
is backed up by a battery.
!Caution Always install the CS1W-BAT01 Battery before first using a CS1 CPU Unit.
171
Section 3-1
CPU Units
Opening the Battery
Compartment Cover
Insert a small flat-blade screwdriver into the opening at the bottom of the battery compartment cover and lift open the cover.
Insert a small flat-blade
screwdriver into the opening
at the bottom of the battery
compartment cover and lift
open the cover.
Battery
DIP switch
Opening the Peripheral Port Cover and Connecting Cables
Insert a small flat-blade
screwdriver into the
opening at the top of the
port cover and pull open.
172
Make sure the connector is
in facing the correct direction.
Hold the grips on the side of the
connector and push into the port.
Section 3-1
CPU Units
Installing Inner Boards
1,2,3...
1. Press in the lever at the top of the Inner Board connector compartment and
pull out.
Press in the lever on the top of the
cover and pull out.
Press in the lever on the bottom of
the cover and pull out.
2. Remove the cover of the Inner Board connector compartment.
Inner Board connector
3. Insert the Inner Board into the compartment.
Note
1. Always make sure the power is OFF before installing the Inner Board. Installing the Inner Board when the power is ON may cause CPU Unit malfunction, damage to internal components, and improper communications.
2. Before installing the Inner Board, be sure to touch a grounded metal object
to discharge static electricity from your body.
173
Section 3-2
File Memory
3-1-4
Dimensions
CS1H-CPU@@-EV1 and CS1G-CPU@@-EV1
CS1H-CPU@@H, CS1G-CPU@@H
3-2
File Memory
For CS-series CPU Units, the Memory Card and a specified part of the EM
Area can be used to store files. All user programs, the I/O Memory Area, and
the Parameter Area can be stored as files.
File memory
Memory Card
EM file memory
Bank 0
Bank n
Bank C
Memory type
Memory capacity
Flash mem30 Mbytes
ory
64 Mbytes
Model/Contents
HMC-EF372
HMC-EF672
128 Mbytes
HMC-EF183 (See note 3.)
RAM
The maximum capacity of the CPU
Unit’s EM Area (e.g., the maximum
capacity for a CPU67 is 832 Kbytes)
The specified bank (set in the PLC
Setup) to the last bank of the EM Area
in the I/O Memory.
CPU Unit’s
internal flash
memory
Comment files
CPU66H/67H: 128 Kbytes
Other CPU Units: 64 Kbytes
Program index files
CPU66H/67H: 128 Kbytes
Other CPU Units: 64 Kbytes
Symbol table files
CPU45H/65H66H/67H: 128 Kbytes
Other CPU Units: 64 Kbytes
CX-Programmer rung comments and
other comments
EM file
memory
Comment memory
(CS/CJ-series CPU
Units with unit version
3.0 or later only)
Note
CX-Programmer section names, section comments, and program comments
CX-Programmer global symbol tables,
local symbol tables, and settings for
automatically allocated areas.
1. A Memory Card can be written up to approximately 100,000 times. (Each
write operation to the Memory Card must be counted regardless of the size
of the write.) Be particularly careful not to exceed the life of the Memory
Card when writing to it from the ladder program.
2. The HMC-AP001 Memory Card Adapter is shown below.
3. The HMC-EF183 cannot be used with all CPU Units. Before ordering, refer
to Precaution on Applicable Units on page 175.
174
Section 3-2
File Memory
3-2-1
Specifications of Memory Card
Specifications
Model number
Memory Card capacity
Common
Dimensions
specifications Weight
Current
consumption
Environmental
specifications
No. of writes
Factory
No. of files
specifications writable to
root directory
File system
HMC-EF183
HMC-EF672
HMC-EF372
128 Mbytes
64 Mbytes
30 Mbytes
42.8 × 36.4 × 3.3 mm (W × H × T)
15 g max.
Approx. 30 mA (when used with PLC)
Same as general specifications of PLC
100,000 (guaranteed value)
511
FAT16
Precaution on Applicable Units
The HMC-EF183 Memory Card cannot be used with the following CPU Units
and PTs. Confirm applicability when ordering.
1) CS-series CPU Units
• All CS1G-CPU@@H and CS1H-CPU@@H CPU Units manufactured
before January 9, 2002 (lot number 020108 and earlier)
• All CS1G-CPU@@, CS1G-CPU@@-V1, CS1H-CPU@@, and CS1HCPU@@-V1 CPU Units (i.e., those without an H in the model number suffix (CPU@@H))
2) CJ-series CPU Units
• All CJ1G-CPU@@H and CJ1H-CPU@@H CPU Units manufactured before
January 9, 2002 (lot number 020108 and earlier)
• All CJ1G-CPU@@ CPU Units (i.e., those without an H in the model number suffix: CPU@@H)
3) NS7-series PTs
All NS7-SV0@ PTs manufactured before May 9, 2002 (lot number 0852 and
earlier)
Memory Card Recognition Time
Several seconds is normally required for the CPU Unit to recognize the Memory Card after it is inserted. The required time depends on the PLC's cycle
time, the Memory Card Capacity, the number of files stored on the Memory
Card, and other factors.
The recognition times given in the following table are guidelines for a CS1HCPU@@H CPU Unit with a PLC cycle time of 0.4 ms and all PLC Setup
parameters set to the default values.
Model
Recognition time
HMC-EF183
8s
HMC-EF672
5s
HMC-EF372
3s
175
Section 3-2
File Memory
3-2-2
Files Handled by CPU Unit
Files are ordered and stored in the Memory Card or EM file memory according to the file name and the extension attached to it.
General-use Files
File type
Data files
Contents
File name
Specified
Binary
********
range in I/O Text (except
(See note 1.)
memory
pre-version-1
CS1 CPU Units)
CSV (except
pre-version-1
CS1 CPU Units)
Program file
All user programs
Parameter file PLC Setup, registered I/O
tables, routing tables, CSseries CPU Bus Unit settings,
SYSMAC LINK data link tables,
and Controller Link data link
tables
Files Transferred
Automatically at Startup
Extension
.IOM
.TXT
.CSV
.OBJ
.STD
Including Parameter File
File type
Data files
Program file
Parameter file
Contents
DM area data (stores data for
specified number of words starting from D20000)
DM area data (stores data for
specified number of words starting from D00000) (except preversion-1 CS1 CPU Units) (See
note.)
EM area for bank No. @ (stores
data for specified number of
words starting from E@_00000)
(except pre-version-1 CS1 CPU
Units) (See note.)
All user programs
PLC Setup, registered I/O tables,
routing tables, CS-series CPU
Bus Unit settings, SYSMAC
LINK data link tables, and Controller Link data link tables
File name
AUTOEXEC
Extension
.IOM
ATEXECDM
.IOM
ATEXECE@
.IOM
AUTOEXEC
AUTOEXEC
.OBJ
.STD
Note Version 1 (-V1) or higher CPU Units only.
Excluding Parameter File (CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or Later)
File type
Data files
176
Contents
File name
DM area data (stores data for
REPLACE
specified number of words start- (CPU Unit Ver.
ing from D20000)
2.0 or later
only)
DM area data (stores data for
REPLCDM
specified number of words start- (CPU Unit Ver.
ing from D00000)
2.0 or later
only)
EM area for bank No. @ (stores REPLCE@
data for specified number of
(CPU Unit Ver.
words starting from E@_00000) 2.0 or later
only)
Extension
.IOM
.IOM
.IOM
Section 3-2
File Memory
File type
Easy Backup Files
(except pre-version 1 CS1
CPU Units)
Note
Contents
Program file
All user programs
Parameter file
---
File name
REPLACE
(CPU Unit Ver.
2.0 or later
only)
Not needed
File type
Data files
Contents
Words allocated to Special I/O
Units, CPU Bus Units, and Inner
Boards in the DM area
CIO area
DM area
EM area
Program files
All user programs
Parameter files
PLC Setup, registered I/O tables,
routing tables, CS-series CPU Bus
Unit settings, SYSMAC LINK data
link tables, and Controller Link data
link tables
Unit/Board backup Data from specific Units or Boards
files (CS1-H CPU
Units only)
Symbol table files CX-Programmer global symbol
(See note 4.)
tables, local symbol tables, settings
for automatically allocated areas
Comment files
CX-Programmer rung comments
(See note 4.)
and comments
Program index
CX-Programmer section names,
files (See note 4.) section comments, and program
comments
Extension
.OBJ
---
File name
BACKUP
Extension
.IOM
BACKUPIO
BACKUPDM
BACKUPE@
BACKUP
.IOR
.IOM
.IOM
.OBJ
.STD
BACKUP@@ .PRM
BKUPSYM
.SYM
BKUPCMT
.CMT
BCKUPPRG .IDX
1. Specify 8 ASCII characters. For a file name with less than 8 characters,
add spaces (20 hex).
2. Always specify the name of files to be transferred automatically at powerup as AUTOEXEC or ATEXEC@@.
3. The BACKUP@@.PRM files are as follows:
Unit/Board
CPU Bus Units
Special I/O Units
Inner Board
@@
10 to 1F
20 to 6F
E1
Unit number
0 to F
0 to 79
---
4. Supported for CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later only.
177
Section 3-2
File Memory
3-2-3
Initializing File Memory
File memory
Initializing procedure
Data capacity after
initialization
1. Install Memory Card into Essentially the specific capacity
CPU Unit.
of the Memory Card
2. Initialize the Memory
Card using a Programming Device (including
Programming Console).
1 bank:
Approx. 61 KB
1. Convert the part of the
Approx. 825 KB
EM Area from the specified 13 banks:
bank No. to the last bank
No. to file memory in the
PLC Setup.
2. Initialize the EM file
memory using a Programming Device (excluding
Programming Console).
Memory Card
EM file memory
3-2-4
Using File Memory
Note For details on using file memory, refer to SECTION 5 File Memory of the
CS/CJ Series PLC Programming Manual.
Memory Cards
Reading/Writing Files Using Programming Device
1,2,3...
File
Program files
File name and extension
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.OBJ
I/O memory files
Parameter files
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.IOM
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.STD
Data transfer direction
Between CPU Unit and Memory Card,
1. Install the Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
2. Initialize the Memory Card if necessary.
3. Name the file containing the data in the CPU Unit and save the contents in
the Memory Card.
4. Read the file that is saved in the Memory Card to the CPU Unit.
Automatically Transferring Memory Card Files to the CPU Unit at Power-up
Including Parameter File
File
Program file
I/O memory files
Parameter file
1,2,3...
File name and extension
AUTOEXEC.OBJ
AUTOEXEC.IOM
ATEXECDM.IOM
ATEXECE@.IOM
AUTOEXEC.STD
Data transfer direction
From Memory Card to CPU Unit
1. Install the Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
2. Set pin 2 of the DIP switch to ON.
3. The files are read automatically when the power is turned ON.
178
Section 3-2
File Memory
Excluding Parameter File
File
Program file
I/O memory files
Parameter file
1,2,3...
File name and extension
REPLACE.OBJ
REPLACE.IOM
REPLCDM.IOM
REPLCE@.IOM
Not needed
Data transfer direction
From Memory Card to CPU Unit
1. Install the Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
2. Set pin 2 of the DIP switch to ON.
3. Turn ON the power to the PLC. The files will be read automatically when
the power is turned ON.
Reading/Writing I/O Memory Files Using FREAD(700)and FWRIT(701)
File
I/O memory files
1,2,3...
File name and extension
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.IOM
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.TXT
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.CSV
Data transfer direction
Between CPU Unit and
Memory Card
1. Install the Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
2. Initialize the Memory Card using a Programming Device.
3. Using the FWRIT(701) instruction, name the file of the specified I/O memory area, and save to the Memory Card.
4. Using the FREAD(700) instruction, read the I/O memory files from the
Memory Card to the I/O memory in the CPU Unit.
Note When using spreadsheet software to read data that has been written to the
Memory Card in CSV or text format, it is now possible to read the data using
Windows applications by mounting a Memory Card in the personal computer
card slot using a HMC-AP001 Memory Card Adapter (except pre-version-1
CS1 CPU Units).
Reading and Replacing Program Files during Operation (except pre-version-1 CS1 CPU Units)
File
Program files
1,2,3...
File name and extension
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.OBJ
Data transfer direction
Memory Card to CPU Unit
1. Install a Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
2. Set the following information: Program File Name (A654 to A657) and Program Password (A651).
3. Next, from the program, turn ON the Replacement Start Bit (A65015).
179
Section 3-2
File Memory
Backing Up or Restoring CPU Unit Data or Data for Specific Units and Boards
(except pre-version-1 CS1 CPU Units)
File
Program files
Data files
File name and extension
BACKUP.OBJ
BACKUP.IOM
BACKUPIO.IOR
BACKUPDM.IOM
BACKUPE@.IOM
BACKUP.STD
BACKUP@@.PRM
Data transfer direction
CPU Unit to Memory Card
(when backing up)
Memory Card to CPU Unit
(when restoring)
Parameter files
Unit/Board backup
files (CS1-H CPU
Units only)
Symbol table files BKUPSYM.SYM
Comment files
BKUPCMT.CMT
Program index files BKUPPRG.IDX
1,2,3...
1. Install a Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
2. Turn ON pin 7 on the DIP switch.
3. To back up data, press and hold the Memory Card Power Supply Switch
for three seconds. To restore data, turn ON the PLC power.
Transferring Files between
Memory Cards and the
CX-Programmer
1,2,3...
The following files can be transferred between a Memory Card and the CXProgrammer.
File
Symbols file
Comment file
Program index file
File name and extension
SYMBOLS.SYM
COMMENTS.CNT
PROGRAM.IDX
Data transfer direction
Between CX-Programmer and
Memory Card
1. Insert a formatted Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
2. Place the CX-Programmer online and use the file transfer operations to
transfer the above files from the personal computer to the PLC or from the
PLC to the personal computer.
EM File Memory
Reading/Writing EM File Memory Files Using Programming Device
File
Program files
I/O memory files
Parameter files
1,2,3...
File name and extension
Data transfer direction
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.OBJ
Between CPU Unit and EM
file memory
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.IOM
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.STD
1. Convert the part of the EM Area specified by the first bank number into file
memory in the PLC Setup.
2. Initialize the EM file memory using a Programming Device.
3. Name the data in the CPU Unit and save in the EM file memory using the
Programming Device.
4. Read the EM file memory files to the CPU Unit using the Programming Device.
180
Section 3-2
File Memory
Reading/Writing I/O Memory Files in EM File Memory Using FREAD(700)and FWRIT(701)
File
I/O memory files
1,2,3...
File name and extension
Data transfer direction
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.IOM
Between CPU Unit and EM
file memory
1. Convert the part of the EM Area specified by the first bank number into file
memory in the PLC Setup.
2. Initialize the EM file memory using a Programming Device.
3. Using the FWRIT(701) instruction, name the specified area in I/O memory
with a file name and save in the EM file memory.
4. Using the FREAD(700) instruction, read the I/O memory files from the EM
file memory to the I/O memory in the CPU Unit.
Note The following files can be transferred between EM file memory and the CXProgrammer.
File
Symbols file
Comment file
Program index file
1,2,3...
File name and extension
Data transfer direction
SYMBOLS.SYM
Between CX-Programmer
and EM file memory
COMMENTS.CNT
PROGRAM.IDX
1. Format the EM Area in the CPU Units as file memory.
2. Place the CX-Programmer online and use the file transfer operations to
transfer the above files from the personal computer to the PLC or from the
PLC to the personal computer.
Comment Memory (Unit Version 3.0 or Later Only)
The internal flash memory in CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or
later contains a comment memory area. The following comment data and section data (symbol table files, comment files, and program index files) can be
stored in or read from the comment memory when both the Memory Card and
EM file memory are not available.
Note When using CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0 to download projects, either of the following locations can be selected as the transfer destination for comment data
and section data.
• Memory Card
• EM file memory
• Comment memory (in CPU Unit’s internal flash memory)
3-2-5
Memory Card Dimensions
181
Section 3-2
File Memory
3-2-6
Installing and Removing the Memory Card
Installing the Memory Card
1,2,3...
1. Pull the top end of the Memory Card cover forward and remove from the
Unit.
∇
2. Insert the Memory Card with the label facing to the right. (Insert with the ∆
on the Memory Card label and the
on the CPU Unit facing each other.)
Product label
3. Push the Memory Card securely into the compartment. If the Memory Card
is inserted correctly, the Memory Card eject button will be pushed out.
Removing the Memory Card
1,2,3...
1. Press the Memory Card power supply switch.
Memory Card power supply switch
182
Section 3-2
File Memory
2. Press the Memory Card eject button after the BUSY indicator is no longer
lit.
BUSY indicator
Memory Card eject button
3. The Memory Card will eject from the compartment.
4. Remove the Memory Card cover when a Memory Card is not being used.
Note
1. Never turn OFF the PLC while the CPU is accessing the Memory Card.
2. Never remove the Memory Card while the CPU is accessing the Memory
Card. Press the Memory Card power supply switch and wait for the BUSY
indicator to go OFF before removing the Memory Card. In the worst case,
the Memory Card may become unusable if the PLC is turned OFF or the
Memory Card is removed while the Card is being accessed by the CPU.
3. Never insert the Memory Card facing the wrong way. If the Memory Card
is inserted forcibly, it may become unusable.
Installing the Memory Card into a Personal Computer
HMC-AP001 Memory Card Adapter
Memory Card
Personal computer PC card slot
183
Section 3-3
Programming Devices
Note
1. When a Memory Card is inserted into a computer using a Memory Card
Adapter, it can be used as a standard storage device, like a floppy disk or
hard disk.
2. When deleting all of the data in a Memory Card or formatting it in any way,
always place it in the CPU Unit and perform the operation from the CX-Programmer or a Programming Console.
3-3
3-3-1
Programming Devices
Overview
There are 2 types of Programming Devices that can be used: Any of three
models of Hand-held Programming Consoles or the CX-Programmer, which is
operated on a Windows computer. The CX-Programmer is usually used to
write the programs, and a Programming Console is then used to change the
operating modes, edit the programs, and monitor a limited number of points.
The following table provides a comparison between the CX-Programmer functions and the Programming Console functions.
Function
Editing and referencing I/O tables
Selecting tasks
Writing
Inputting instructions
programs
Inputting addresses
I/O comment, rung comment
Setting global/local symbols
Editing programs
Checking programs
Monitoring programs
Monitoring I/O memory
Changing I/O memory present values
Online editing
Debugging
Changing timer and
counter settings
Control set/ reset
Programming Console
CX-Programmer
Yes
Yes
Writes instructions one at a time using
mnemonics
Addresses only
No
Yes
Yes
Writes multiple blocks using mnemonics or ladder programs
Addresses or symbols
Yes
No
Yes (Automatic allocation of local symbols)
Yes
(Cutting, pasting, inserting within programs; searching/exchanging instructions, addresses, and symbols;
displaying cross-references)
Yes
Monitors multiple blocks
Monitors multiple points
Yes
Edits multiple adjacent blocks
Yes
Inserts instructions and searches for
program addresses
No
Monitors in program address units
Simultaneous, 2 points max.
Changes 1 point at a time
Edits in instruction units
Yes
Executes 1 point at a time (or resets all
at once)
Differentiation monitoring Yes
Reading cycle time
Yes
Data tracing
No
Time chart monitoring
No
Reading error information
Yes (error message display)
Reading error log
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Reading/setting timer information
Reading/setting PLC parameters
Setting CPU Bus Unit parameters
Yes
Yes
Yes
184
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Section 3-3
Programming Devices
File memory operations
Remote
programming and
monitoring
Function
Initializing Memory Card
Initializing EM file memory
Transferring files between
CPU Unit and file memory
Between Host Link and
Network PLC
Via modem
Setting password protection
Managing files
Printing
3-3-2
Programming Console
CX-Programmer
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Manages files by project.
Yes
Programming Consoles
There are three Programming Consoles that can be used with the CS-series
CPU Units: The CQM1H-PRO01-E, CQM1-PRO01-E, and C200H-PRO27-E.
These Programming Consoles are shown here.
CQM1H-PRO01-E Programming Console
Connection
LCD area
Mode selector switch
FUN
SFT
A
ST
OR
H
AA
LD
AC
OUT
N
M
7
TIM
O
1
1
0
6
6
D
2
. −IR
TR
J
*EM
WR/LR
K
AR
HR
EM
DM
P
CH
*DM
Q
CONT
#
R
F
L
S
T
SET
DEL
MON
V
RESET
3
SHIFT
E
CF
SRCH
U
EM_/EXT
9
5
5
C
DR
IR
*EM_
9
8
F
4
4
A
C
TK
CNT
I
8
7
E
B
NOT
B
TN
AND
G
. IR+
. IR
D
2
3
Y
TEXT
!
CLR
VRFY
CHG
W
INS
X
↑
Operation keys (Install the
CS1W-KS001-E Key Sheet
(See Note.)
Z
WRITE
↓
0
Cable included with CQM1H-PRO01-E
Programming Console
CQM1H-PRO01-E Programming Console
185
Section 3-3
Programming Devices
CQM1-PRO01-E Programming Console
Connection
LCD area
Mode selector switch
FUN
SFT
A
ST
OR
H
AA
LD
AC
OUT
N
M
7
O
0
6
D
DR
IR
*EM
WR/LR
K
AR
HR
EM
DM
P
CH
*DM
Q
CONT
#
R
F
L
S
T
CF
SRCH
U
SET
DEL
MON
CHG
V
W
2
3
Y
TEXT
!
CLR
VRFY
Operation keys (Install the
CS1W-KS001-E Key Sheet
(See Note.)
X
↑
INS
RESET
3
SHIFT
E
EM_/EXT
9
6
2
. IR+
. IR
D
. −IR
TR
J
*EM_
9
5
5
C
1
1
A
TIM
8
F
4
4
B
C
TK
CNT
I
8
7
E
NOT
B
TN
AND
G
Z
↓
WRITE
0
CS1W-CN114 (cable length: 0.05 m)
Cable included with CQM1-PRO01-E
Programming Console
CQM1-PRO01-E Programming Console
Connect the CPU Unit to the Programming Console with the following cables.
CS1W-CN114 (Cable length: 0.05 m)
C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console
LCD area
Mode selector switch
FUN
SFT
A
B
TN
AND
G
ST
OR
H
AA
LD
AC
OUT
N
M
7
TIM
O
1
0
6
6
D
2
DR
IR
. −IR
TR
J
*EM
WR/LR
K
AR
HR
EM
DM
P
CH
*DM
Q
CONT
#
R
E
F
L
S
T
SET
DEL
MON
V
RESET
3
SHIFT
CF
SRCH
U
EM_/EXT
9
5
5
C
1
. IR+
. IR
D
*EM_
9
8
F
4
4
A
C
TK
CNT
I
8
7
E
B
NOT
2
3
Y
TEXT
!
CLR
VRFY
CHG
W
INS
Operation keys (Install
the CS1W-KS001-E
Key Sheet (See Note.)
X
↑
Z
WRITE
↓
0
CS1W-CN224 (Cable length: 2.0 m)
CS1W-CN624 (Cable length: 6.0 m)
Casette jacks
C200H-PRO27-E
Connect the CPU Unit to the Programming Console with the following cables.
CS1W-CN224 (Cable length: 2.0 m)
CS1W-CN624 (Cable length: 6.0 m)
Note The Key Sheet is not used with CS-series CPU Units.
186
Section 3-3
Programming Devices
3-3-3
CX-Programmer
Item
Applicable PLC
OS
Personal computer
Connection method
Communications
protocol with PLC
Offline operation
Online operation
Basic functions
Details
CS-series, CJ-series, CP-series, NSJ-series, CV-series,
C200HX/HG/HE (-Z), C200HS, CQM1, CPM1, CPM1A,
SRM1, C1000H/2000H
Microsoft Windows 95 (See note.), 98, NT 4.0 (Service Pack
6), 2000, Me, XP
DOS version
CPU Unit’s peripheral port or built-in RS-232C port
Peripheral bus or Host Link
Programming, I/O memory editing, creating I/O tables, setting
PLC parameters, printing, program changing
Transmitting, referencing, monitoring, creating I/O tables, setting PLC parameters
1. Programming: Creates and edits ladder programs and mnemonic programs for the applicable PLC.
2. Creating and referencing I/O tables.
3. Changing the CPU Unit operating mode.
4. Transferring: Transfers programs, I/O memory data, I/O
tables, PLC Setup, and I/O comments between the personal
computer and the CPU Unit.
5. Program execution monitoring: Monitors I/O status/present
values on ladder displays, I/O status/present values on mnemonic displays, and present values on I/O memory displays
Note Windows 95 cannot be used when connecting via a Controller Link Support
Board (PCI bus) or a SYSMAC LINK Support Board (PCI bus).
Connections
Personal computer
DOS
Peripheral port connection
RS-232C port connection
9-pin
male
9-pin
female
9-pin
male
Peripheral port
10-pin female
9-pin
female
CS1W-CN118 (0.1 m) (See note 1)
CS1W-CN226 (2.0 m)
CS1W-CN616 (6.0 m)
CS1W-CN118
CS1W-CN226
CS1W-CN616
Note
9-pin
female
10-pin
RS-232C port
9-pin female
XW2Z-200S-CV/200S-V (See note 2)
XW2Z-500S-CV/500S-V (See note 2)
XW2Z-200SCV/200S-V or
XW2Z-500SCV/500S-V
9-pin
female
9-pin
male
1. The CS1W-CN118 Cable is used with one of the RS-232C Cables shown
on the right (XW2Z-@@@S-@@) to connect to the peripheral port on the
CPU Unit.
Peripheral port
RS-232C Cable
CS1W-CN118 Cable
2. If cables with model numbers ending in -V instead of -CV are used to connect the computer running the CX-Programmer to the RS-232C port (in-
187
Section 3-3
Programming Devices
cluding when using a CS1W-CN118 Cable), a peripheral bus connection
cannot be used. Use a Host Link (SYSMAC WAY) connection. To connect
to the port using a peripheral bus connection, prepare an RS-232C cable
as described in 3-3-5 RS-232C Port Specifications.
CX-Programmer Connecting Cables
Unit
CPU Units
Serial Communications
Boards/Units
Unit port
Computer
Computer
port
Peripheral port
DOS
D-Sub, 9-pin,
male
Built-in
RS-232C
port
D-Sub, 9pin,
female
RS-232C
Port
D-Sub, 9pin,
female
DOS
D-Sub, 9-pin,
male
DOS
D-Sub, 9-pin,
male
Note
Serial
Model
communications
mode
Peripheral Bus or CS1W-CN226
Host Link
CS1W-CN626
Peripheral Bus or XW2Z-200S-CV
Host Link
XW2Z-500S-CV
Host Link
XW2Z-200S-CV
XW2Z-500S-CV
Length
2.0 m
6.0 m
2m
5m
2m
5m
Cable notes
--Use a staticresistant connector.
Use a staticresistant connector.
1. Before connecting a connector from the above table to an RS-232C port,
touch a grounded metal object to discharge static electricity from your
body.
The XW2Z-@@@S-CV Cables have been strengthened against static because they use a static-resistant connector hood (XM2S-0911-E). Even so,
always discharge static electricity before touching the connectors.
2. Do not use commercially available RS-232C personal computer cables. Always use the special cables listed in this manual or make cables according
to manual specifications. Using commercially available cables may damage the external devices or CPU Unit.
RS-232C Cables for a Peripheral Port
Unit
CPU Units
Unit port
Built-in
peripheral port
Computer
DOS
Computer
port
D-Sub, 9-pin,
male
Model
Serial
communications
mode
Peripheral Bus or CS1W-CN118 +
Host Link
XW2Z-200S-CV/
500S-CV
Length
0.1 m+
(2 m or
5 m)
Cable notes
XW2Z@@@S-CV
models use a
static-resistant connector
Using a CQM1-CIF01/02 Cable for a Peripheral Port
Unit
CPU Units
188
Unit port
Built-in
peripheral port
Computer
DOS
Computer
port
D-Sub, 9-pin,
male
Serial
Model
communications
mode
Host Link
CS1W-CN114 +
CQM1-CIF02
Length
0.05 m +
3.3 m
Cable notes
---
Section 3-3
Programming Devices
Using a RS-232C Cable for a IBM PC/AT or Compatible
Unit
CPU Units
Unit port
Built-in
RS-232C
port
D-Sub, 9pin,
female
Serial Communi- RS-232C
port
cations
Boards/Units
D-Sub,
9-pin,
female
Computer
Computer
port
DOS
D-Sub, 9-pin,
male
DOS
D-Sub, 9-pin,
male
Serial
Model
communications
mode
Host Link
XW2Z-200S-V
XW2Z-500S-V
Host Link
Length
2m
5m
XW2Z-200S-V
XW2Z-500S-V
Cable notes
---
2m
5m
Connection Method for USB-Serial Conversion Cable
Computer
CS1W-CIF31
Cable 1
Cable 2
PLC
CS1W-N226/626 CS/CJ-series
Peripheral Port Programming
Device Connecting Cable
CS1W-CN114 C-series PeripheralCS/CJ-series Peripheral
Conversion Cable
OR
CS1W-CIF31
USB Connecting Cable
CQM1H-CIF02 C-series
Peripheral Port Programming
Device Connecting Cable
+
+
CS1W-CN118 RS-232C-CS/CJseries Peripheral Conversion
Cable
OR
XW2Z-@@@ RS-232C
Programming Device
Connecting Cable
CX-Programmer Connecting Cables
Cables Connecting to CPU Units
USB
Connecting
Cable
Model
CS1WCIF31
Cable 1
Connector
Cable model
D-sub, 9- CS1W-CN226/626
pin
(length: 2 m/6 m)
female
Cable 2
Connector
Connector
Cable model
CS/CJseries
peripheral
Not required.
C-series
peripheral
C-series
peripheral
Unit port
Connector
CS/CJseries
peripheral
Serial
communications
mode
(network)
Peripheral Bus
(Toolbus) or Host
Link (SYSWAY)
CS1W-CN114
(length: 5 cm)
CS/CJseries
peripheral
Host Link
(SYSWAY)
XW2Z-200S-V/
D-sub, 9- D-sub, 9500S-V (length: 2 m/ pin male pin
5 m)
female
CS1W-CN118
(length: 0.1 m)
CS/CJseries
peripheral
Peripheral Bus
(Toolbus) or Host
Link (SYSWAY)
XW2Z-200S-V/
D-sub, 9- D-sub, 9500S-V (length: 2 m/ pin male pin
5 m)
female
CS1W-CN118
(length: 0.1 m)
CS/CJseries
peripheral
Host Link
(SYSWAY)
CQM1-CIF02
(length: 3.3 m)
XW2Z-200S-CV/
500S-CV (length:
2 m/5 m)
RS-232C Not required.
D-sub, 9pin male
XW2Z-200S-V/
RS-232C Not required.
500S-V (length: 2 m/ D-sub, 95 m)
pin male
RS-232C Peripheral Bus
D-sub, 9- (Toolbus) or Host
pin
Link (SYSWAY)
female
Host Link
(SYSWAY)
189
Section 3-3
Programming Devices
Cables Connecting to Serial Communications Boards/Units
USB
ConConnecting nector
Cable
Model
CS1W- D-sub,
CIF31
9-pin
female
CS1W- D-sub,
CIF31
9-pin
female
Cable 1
Cable model
XW2Z-200S-CV/
500S-CV
(length: 2 m/5 m)
XW2Z-200S-V/
500S-V
(length: 2 m/5 m)
Cable 2
Unit port
Connector
RS-232C
D-sub, 9-pin
male
RS-232C
D-sub, 9-pin
male
Not required.
RS-232C
D-sub, 9-pin
female
Serial
communications
mode
(network)
Host Link
(SYSWAY)
Not required.
Communications Modes when Connecting a CX-Programmer to a CS-series CPU Unit
Serial communications mode
Characteristics
Peripheral Bus
High-speed communications are possible. Consequently, connecting via a peripheral bus is recommended when using a CX-Programmer.
Only 1:1 connection is possible.
When using a CS-series CPU Unit, the baud rate of
the communications devices can be automatically
recognized for connection.
Host Link
This is a communications protocol with a generalpurpose host computer.
Either 1:1 or 1:N connections are possible.
Host Link communications are slow compared with
the Peripheral Bus communications.
The following connections are possible: Via a
modem or optical fiber adapter, over long distance
using a RS-422A/485, and 1:N.
Note The CX-Programmer can be used for remote programming and monitoring. It
can be used to program and monitor not only the PLC to which it is directly
connected, but also to program and monitor any PLC connected through a
Controller Link or Ethernet network to which the PLC that the CX-Programmer
is connected to is a part of. All programming and monitoring functionality for
the directly connected PLC is supported for remote programming and monitoring, the PLC can be connected though either the peripheral or an RS-232C
port, and either the peripheral bus or Host Link bus can be used. Remote programming is possible for up to three levels of networks (counting the local network but not counting the peripheral bus or Host Link connection between the
CX-Programmer and the local PLC).
190
Section 3-3
Programming Devices
CX-Programmer
Peripheral port
or RS-232C port
Peripheral bus
or Host Link
FINS
Remote programming
and monitoring
Controller Link or Ethernet Network
CX-Programmer
Peripheral bus
or Host Link
Bridge
Ethernet Network
Controller Link Network
Controller Link Network
3-3-4
Gateway
Peripheral Port Specifications
Communications Mode Selection Flowchart
Connecting Device (Protocol)
Communications Mode
Programming Console
1. Peripheral bus (auto-detect)
CX-Programmer
Peripheral bus connection
Communicate with the
CX-Programmer's communications
settings (peripheral bus).
Communicate with the PLC Setup's
communications settings
(peripheral bus).
Host Link connection
2. Peripheral bus
3. Host Link
Host computer
OMRON PT
4. NT Link
OMRON component (CompoWay/F)
5. Serial Gateway
Peripheral Port Communications Settings
Connection
1. Peripheral bus
(auto-detect)
2. Peripheral bus
3. Host Link
4. NT Link
5. Serial Gateway
Communications Settings
Pin 4 of Front-panel PLC Setup peripheral port
DIP Switch
setting (See note.)
OFF (factory setting) --ON
ON
ON
ON
Peripheral bus
Host Link (default setting)
NT Link
Serial Gateway
Note Set from the CX-Programmer or Programming Console.
191
Section 3-3
Programming Devices
3-3-5
RS-232C Port Specifications
Connector Pin Arrangement
Pin No.
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Connector hood
FG
SD (TXD)
RD (RXD)
RS (RTS)
CS (CTS)
5V
DR (DSR)
ER (DTR)
SG (0 V)
FG
Name
Protection earth
Send data
Receive data
Request to send
Clear to send
Power supply
Data set ready
Data terminal ready
Signal ground
Protection earth
Direction
--Output
Input
Output
Input
--Input
Output
-----
Note Do not use the 5-V power from pin 6 of the RS-232C port for anything other
than an NT-AL001, CJ1W-CIF11 Link Adapter, or NV3W-M@20L Programmable Terminal. Using this power supply for any other external device may damage the CPU Unit or the external device.
Connection between CS-series CPU Unit and Personal Computer
The following connections are in Host Link serial communications mode.
CS-series
CPU Unit
Personal computer
Pin
Signal No.
Pin
Signal No.
Shield
RS-232C
interface
RS-232C
interface
D-Sub, 9-pin connector
Male connector on cable
Note
D-Sub, 9-pin connector
Female connector on cable
1. Refer to Appendix E Connecting to the RS-232C Port on the CPU Unit
when converting between RS-232C and RS-422A/485 for 1:N connections.
2. Refer to Appendix E Connecting to the RS-232C Port on the CPU Unit
when making your own RS-232C cable.
The following connections are in Peripheral Bus serial communications mode.
CS-series
CPU Unit
Pin
Signal No.
RS-232C
interface
D-Sub, 9-pin connector
Male connector on cable
192
Personal computer
Pin
No.
Signal
RS-232C
interface
D-Sub, 9-pin connector
Female connector on cable
Section 3-3
Programming Devices
Applicable Connectors
CPU Unit Connector
Item
Plug
Hood
Model
XM2A-0901
XM2S-0911-E
Specifications
9-pin male
Used together (One
of
each provided
9-pin, millimeter
with CPU Unit.)
screws
Personal Computer Connector
Item
Plug
Hood
Model
XM2D-0901
XM2S-0913
Specifications
9-pin female
Used together
9-pin, inch screws
IBM PC/AT or compatible
(9-pin male connector)
CS1-series CPU Unit
Plug: XM2D-0901 (9-pin female)
RS-232C port
Hood: XM2S-0913
Recommended cable
Hood: XM2S-0911-E
Plug: XM2A-0901 (9-pin male)
Provided with CPU Unit
Note Use the special cables provided from OMRON for all connections whenever
possible. If cables are produced in-house, be sure they are wired correctly.
External devices and the CPU Unit may be damaged if general purpose (e.g.,
computer to modem) cables are used or if wiring is not correct.
Recommended Cables
Fujikura Ltd.:
UL2464 AWG28 × 5P IFS-RVV-SB (UL product)
AWG 28 × 5P IFVV-SB (non-UL product)
Hitachi Cable, Ltd.: UL2464-SB(MA) 5P × 28AWG (7/0.127) (UL product)
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P × 28AWG (7/0.127) (non-UL product)
RS-232C Port Specifications
Item
Communications method
Synchronization
Baud rate
Transmission distance
Interface
Protocol
Specification
Half duplex
Start-stop
0.3/0.6/1.2/2.4/4.8/9.6/19.2/38.4/57.6/115.2 kbps
(See note.)
15 m max.
EIA RS-232C
Host Link, NT Link, 1:N, No-protocol, or Peripheral Bus
Note Baud rates for the RS-232C are specified only up to 19.2 kbps. The CS Series
supports serial communications from 38.4 kbps to 115.2 kbps, but some computers cannot support these speeds. Lower the baud rate if necessary.
193
Section 3-3
Programming Devices
Communications Mode Selection Flowchart
Connecting Device (Protocol)
CX-Programmer
Communications Mode
Peripheral bus connection
Communicate with the
CX-Programmer’s communications
settings (peripheral bus).
1. Peripheral bus (auto-detect)
Communicate with the PLC Setup’s
communications settings
(peripheral bus).
2. Peripheral bus
Host Link connection
3. Host Link
Host computer
OMRON PT
4. NT Link
General-purpose external serial device
5. No-protocol
OMRON component (CompoWay/F)
6. Serial Gateway
RS-232C Port Communications Settings
Connection
1. Peripheral bus
(auto-detect)
2. Peripheral bus
3. Host Link
4. NT Link
5. No-protocol
6. Serial Gateway
Communications Settings
Pin 5 of Front-panel
PLC Setup RS-232C port
DIP Switch
setting (See note.)
ON
--OFF (factory setting) Peripheral bus
OFF (factory setting) Host Link (default setting)
OFF (factory setting) NT Link
OFF (factory setting) No-protocol
OFF (factory setting) Serial Gateway
Note Set from the CX-Programmer or Programming Console.
194
Section 3-4
Power Supply Units
3-4
3-4-1
Power Supply Units
Power Supply Units
Power supply
voltage
Output
Power output
terminals
4.6 A at 5 V DC,
No
0.625 A at 26 V DC, Yes
total 30 W
0.8 A at 24 V
(See note.)
DC
No
No
9 A at 5 V DC,
1.3 A at 26 V DC,
total 45 W
100 to 240 V AC 4.6 A at 5 V DC,
No
(wide range)
0.625 A at 26 V DC,
total 30 W
No
Replacement
notification
function
Without
No
Without
C200HW-PA204S 500 g max.
Yes
Yes
Without
Without
C200HW-PA204R 500 g max.
C200HW-PA209R 1,000 g max.
No
C200HW-PA204C 500 g max.
24 V DC
No
Display: Supported
Output: Supported
Without
C200HW-PD024
550 g max.
No
Without
C200HW-PD025
630 g max.
100 to 120 V AC
or
200 to 240 V AC
(selectable
using jumper)
24 V DC
4.6 A at 5 V DC,
No
0.625 A at 26 V DC,
total 30 W
No
5.3 A at 5 V DC,
1.3 A at 26 V DC,
total 40 W
RUN
output
Model
Weight
C200HW-PA204
500 g max.
Note For C200HW-PA204S, the total also includes the power consumption of the
power supply output terminals.
3-4-2
Components and Switch Settings
POWER indicator
(Lights when 5 V is output
from Power Supply Unit)
External connection terminals
C200HW-PA204
C200HW-PA204S
AC input
AC input
Voltage
selector
Voltage
selector
NC
NC
C200HW-PA204R
24 VDC
power
output
C200HW-PA209R
AC input
AC input
Voltage
selector
Voltage
selector
RUN
output
RUN
output
C200HW-PD024/025
DC input
DC24V
RESISTIVE
195
Section 3-4
Power Supply Units
Note 100 to 120 V AC: Closed circuit, 200 to 240 V AC: Open circuit
Always open the circuit (remove the metal jumper) before applying a voltage
of 200 to 240 V AC.
(Example: C200HW-PA204C)
Replacement notification display
POWER indicator
Lit: 5-V output from Power Supply Unit.
PA204C
PA204C
Terminals
external connect
L2 /N 100 to 240
VAC
IN PU T
C200HW-PA204C
POWER
POW
AC input
L1
LG
GR
TEST
L
ALA RM
OUTPU T
30 VDC, 50 mA
NORMAL: ON
AL ARM : OFF
Alarm output
(replacement notification
output)
− NC
− NC
TEST switch
The TEST switch can be used to temporarily turn OFF the
alarm output that notifies when replacement is needed.
AC Input
Either a power supply of 100 to 120 V AC or 200 to 240 V AC can be selected.
The C200HW-PA204C supplies 100 to 240 V AC (allowable voltage fluctuation range: 85 to 264 V AC).
The C200HW-PA204C has a wide-range supply voltage, so voltage selector
terminals are not provided.
Note The L2/N and L1 display on the AC power supply terminal is L1/N and L2 on
some products, however, the function and performance of the terminals are
the same.
Voltage Selector
Before applying a voltage of 100 to 120 V AC, close the circuit using the metal
jumper.
Note Always remove the metal jumper before applying a voltage of 200 to 240 V
AC. Not doing so will damage the Unit.
LG
Ground to a resistance of 100 Ω or less to increase noise resistance and
avoid electric shock.
196
Section 3-4
Power Supply Units
GR
Ground to a resistance of 100 Ω or less to avoid electric shock.
24-V DC Power Output (PA204 Only)
This terminal outputs a service voltage of 24 V DC. Use this terminal to supply
power to DC Input Units (C200HW-PA204S only). The total current consumption of the 5-V and 24-V outputs must be 30 W max.
DC Input
24-V DC power is supplied from this terminal.
RUN Output (PA204R/PA209R Only)
The internal contact turns ON when the CPU Unit is operating (RUN or MONITOR mode). (The RUN output does not turn ON on Expansion Racks.)
Alarm Output (PA204C Only)
The alarm output is used to notify when Power Supply Unit replacement is
required. The output is normally ON. The output turns OFF when the time
until replacement is 6 months or less.
3-4-3
Dimensions
C200HW-PA204
C200HW-PA204S
C200HW-PA204R
C200HW-PD204
197
Section 3-4
Power Supply Units
C200HW-PA204C
PA204C
130
C200HW-PA204C
POWER
PO
TEST
TE
11
54
100
105.2
C200HW-PA209R
C200HW-PD025
3-4-4
Selecting a Power Supply Unit
After determining what power supply voltage is required, whether power output terminals and a RUN output are required, and whether replacement notification is required, calculate the current and power requirements for each
Rack.
Condition 1: Current Requirements
There are three voltage groups for internal power consumption: 5 V DC,
26 V DC, and 24 V DC.
Current Consumption at 5 V DC (Internal Logic Power Supply)
The following table shows the current that can be supplied to Units (including
the CPU Unit) and Backplanes that use 5-V DC power.
Power Supply Unit
C200HW-PA204/204S/204R/204C
C200HW-PD204
C200HW-PA209R
C200HW-PD025
198
Maximum current at 5 V DC
4.6 A
9A
5.3 A
Section 3-4
Power Supply Units
Current Consumption at 26 V DC (Relay Driving Power Supply)
The following table shows the current that can be supplied to Units that use
26-V DC power.
Power Supply Unit
C200HW-PA204/204S/204R/204C
C200HW-PD204
C200HW-PA209R/PD025
Maximum current at 26 V DC
0.625 A
1.3 A
Current Consumption at 24 V DC (Power Output Terminals)
The C200HW-PA204S Power Supply Unit can supply up to 0.8 A at 24 V DC
through its power output terminals.
Condition 2: Power Requirements
The following table shows the maximum total power that can be supplied at
5 V DC, 26 V DC, and 24 V DC.
Power Supply Unit
C200HW-PA204/204S/204R/204C
C200HW-PD204
C200HW-PA209R
C200HW-PD025
Maximum total power output
30 W
45 W
40 W
Refer to 2-6 Unit Current Consumption for tables showing the current consumed by each particular Unit as well as example calculations.
3-4-5
Replacement Notification
Principle of Replacement Notification
The Power Supply Unit has a built-in electrolytic capacitor. The electrolytic
capacitor is impregnated with electrolytic solution that starts to penetrate the
sealing rubber from the time of manufacture. As time elapses, the internal
electrolytic solution continues to evaporate, resulting in decreased electrostatic capacity and deterioration in other characteristics. Over time, the characteristic deterioration of the electrolytic capacitor prevents the Power Supply
Unit from being utilized to its full capacity. In particular, the speed at which the
electrolytic capacitor deteriorates fluctuates greatly with the ambient temperature (generally, a temperature rise of 10°C will double the rate of a reaction, as
stated by Arrhenius' law).
The C200HW-PA204C Power Supply Unit with Replacement Notification monitors the internal temperature of the Power Supply Unit while the power is
turned ON, and calculates the level of deterioration of the electrolytic capacitor from the operating time and internal temperature. The replacement notification function displays the approximate time until the Power Supply Unit will
stop functioning at its full capacity due to the characteristic deterioration of the
electrolytic capacitor, based on the calculated level of deterioration. When 6
months are remaining until replacement is required, the alarm output will turn
OFF.
Note The replacement notification function provides an indication of when the deterioration of the electrolytic capacitor will prevent the power supply functioning
at its full capacity. It does not provide information on failures occurring due to
other causes.
199
Section 3-4
Power Supply Units
Power Supply Unit with Replacement Notification
Model
C200HW-PA204C
Specifications
Output capacity: 4.6 A at 5 V DC, 0.625 A at 26 V DC, total of
30 W
With replacement notification
Power Supply Unit Replacement Notification Module
C200HW-PA204C
Replacement notification display (7-segment, red)
C200HW-PA204C
POWER
PO
POWER indicator (green)
TEST
TE
ST
Alarm output
(replacement notification output)
Test switch
Function
Replacement Notification Function Displays
The replacement notification for the Power Supply Unit is shown using three
7-segment LED displays.
• At time of purchase “FUL” is displayed. The display changes to “HLF” as
the electrolytic capacitor deteriorates (“HLF” may not be displayed,
depending on the operating environment).
• When the time until replacement is required drops below 2 years, the display will change corresponding to the operating time from “1.5” to “1.0” to
“0.5” to “0.0”/”A02.” When the remaining service life reaches 6 months or
less, the display will alternate between “0.0” and “A02” in 2-second intervals.
Capacity at
time of
manufacture
Replacement
required
Electrolytic
capacitor level
Replacement notification display 2.0 yr
(7-Segment)
Alarm output
(replacement notification output)
1.5 yr
Output ON
1.0 yr
0.5 yr
0 yr
Remaining
life plan
Output
OFF
The output turns OFF when the remaining
life span reaches 6 months, and the
following display is repeatedly alternated.
Note
200
1. The time remaining until replacement does not include periods when the
power is turned OFF.
Section 3-4
Power Supply Units
2. Until approximately one month of operating time has accumulated, the display will always be “FUL” and the alarm output will remain ON (conducting)
due to the estimated deterioration speed.
3. The time remaining until replacement will vary the operating and storage
conditions, so periodically check the display.
4. Fluctuation in the time remaining until replacement may result in the alarm
output repeatedly turning ON and OFF.
5. The precision of the replacement notification function will be adversely affected by applications in which the power is frequently turned ON and OFF.
6. Due to the service life of the electronic components, replace the Power
Supply Unit approximately 15 years after purchase, even if the replacement notification display or output has not indicated that replacement is required.
Alarm Output (Replacement Notification Output)
The output remains ON until the remaining service life drops below 6 months
and then turns OFF.
Note
1. The alarm output will also turn OFF under the following conditions.
• The AC input to the Power Supply Unit is turned OFF.
• An error is detected by the self-diagnostic function.
• The TEST switch is pressed for at least 3 seconds.
2. Example of Using the Alarm Output:
Monitoring Power Supply Replacement Notification in the System (6
Months or Less Until Replacement Is Required)
Alarm output
ON
OFF
Turns OFF when 6 months remains
Alarm output
[ TIM 000 5 s ]
T000
Internal Flag
The Flag is programmed to allow for the delay in the alarm output at system
startup. The Flag does not turn ON when the alarm output is ON (normal
operation). When the alarm output turns OFF (replacement required), the
Flag turns ON, and the replacement notification can be monitored from the
system.
Maintenance Function Using the TEST Switch
• Press the TEST switch for at least 3 seconds to display “A02” and force
the alarm output OFF. Release the switch to return to normal operating
status.
The TEST switch is used initially or periodically to check the connection
status between the alarm output and external devices.
• Press the TEST switch for less than 3 seconds to display the unit version
information for the Power Supply Unit.
Note
1. Replace the Power Supply Unit within 6 months when the display on the
front panel of the Power Supply Unit alternates between 0.0 and A02 or the
alarm output automatically turns OFF.
201
Section 3-4
Power Supply Units
2. Maintain an ambient storage temperature of −20 to 30°C and humidity of
25% to 70% when storing the product (with the power turned OFF) for
longer than 3 months to keep the replacement notification function in optimum working condition. The replacement time is calculated from when the
power is turned ON only. The precision of the replacement period will decline if the electrolytic capacitor deteriorates during storage.
Display and Alarm Output Operation
Normal Display: Replacement Notification Display
When 6 months or less are remaining until replacement is required, the display will alternate between “0.0” and “A02” (in 2 second intervals), and the
alarm output will turn OFF.
Remaining service life:
1 year to 6 months
Remaining service life:
6 months max.
2s
Alarm output
2s
2s
2s
ON
2s
OFF
Operation at Powerup
The following initial display is shown when the power is turned ON, after which
the replacement notification is displayed. The alarm output turns ON approximately 0.2 seconds after the power is turned ON.
Display start
Power ON
0.3 s
Initial display (approx. 1.1 s)
0.1 s
0.3 s
0.1 s
0.3 s
Replacement
required display
Display
Alarm
output
OFF
ON
1 s max.
0.2 s max.
When replacement is already required, the alarm display will follow the initial
display. The alarm output will turn ON approximately 0.2 seconds after the
power is turned ON, and then turn OFF after approximately 5 seconds.
Power ON
Display start
Initial display (approx. 1.1 s)
Alarm display
Alarm output OFF
Display
Alarm
output
OFF
ON
1 s max.
0.2 s max.
202
OFF
5 s max.
Section 3-4
Power Supply Units
Operation at Power OFF
When the power is turned OFF, the display will turn OFF after the PC operation stops. The alarm output will turn OFF after the display turns OFF.
Power
interruption
Replacement
notification display
PLC operation
stopped
Notification display
OFF
Alarm output
OFF
Display
Alarm
output
Approx. 70 ms
(See note.)
ON
OFF
100 VAC: Approx. 2 s
200 VAC: Approx. 7 s
(See note.)
If replacement is already required, the display will turn OFF after the PC operation stops. When the display turns OFF, the alarm output will turn ON
momentarily and then turn OFF again.
Power
interruption
PLC operation
stopped
Alarm display
Notification display OFF
+ alarm output ON
Alarm output
OFF
Display
Alarm
output
ON
Approx. 70 ms
(See note.)
OFF
OFF
100 VAC: Approx. 2 s
200 VAC: Approx. 7 s
(See note.)
Note The values shown are reference values (calculated for a no-load status on the
Power Supply Unit's output).
Operation when TEST Switch Is Pressed
The following operation will be performed when the TEST switch on the
replacement notification function module is pressed. When the switch is
pressed for less than 3 seconds, the unit version will be displayed 3 times at
0.5-second intervals. When the switch is pressed for at least 3 seconds, the
alarm output will momentarily turn OFF, and the alarm display A02 will be
shown. The operation will return to the normal display and output when the
switch is released. Use the TEST switch to check the connection between the
replacement notification output and devices.
1. Operation when TEST switch is pressed for less than 3 seconds.
TEST switch
ON
0.5 s
0.5 s
0.5 s
0.5 s
0.5 s
0.5 s
2. Operation when TEST switch is pressed for 3 seconds or longer.
3s
TEST switch
ON
0.5 s
Alarm output
0.5 s
0.5 s
0.5 s
ON
0.5 s
0.5 s
OFF
ON
Note In standard operating conditions, the Power Supply Unit replacement notification function will be activated after between several years to beyond a decade.
203
Section 3-4
Power Supply Units
For long-term use, be sure to periodically check TEST switch operations, and
make sure that the alarm output is operating normally.
Self-diagnostic Function
Error name
Display
Alarm output
status
Unit overheated
error
OFF
Unit error
OFF
Error details (cause)
Internal overheating has
occurred in the Power Supply
Unit as a result of usage under
conditions that exceed the specified values, insufficient ventilation, or incorrect installation.
(See note.)
System error from external
noise or hardware malfunction.
Recovery method
Remove the cause of the overheating error.
Turn ON the input's power supply
again.If the Unit does not recover,
the error may be caused by a Unit
malfunction. Consult with your
OMRON representative.
Note If the error continues for 3 hours or longer, the replacement notification function will be disabled. Even if the cause of the overheating is removed, the display will continue as “Hot,” and the notification output will remain OFF. In this
state, the internal parts may deteriorate even if the PC operation is normal, so
replace the Power Supply Unit.
Precautions when Replacing Earlier Units
The following precautions apply when replacing a C200HW-PA204/PA204S/
PA204R with a C200HW-PA204C.
Terminal Wiring
• Be sure to wire the ground terminals correctly. Incorrect ground terminal
wiring will adversely affect the Unit's resistance to noise. (For details on
terminal arrangements for each Power Supply Unit, refer to 3-4-2 Components and Switch Settings.)
• The C200HW-PA204C is not provided with a service power supply and
RUN output (RUN).
Startup Time
The time from when the power is turned ON until the PC operation starts is
approximately 1 second faster. Make sure that the system will not be
adversely affected by the change in timing.
Power Failure Detection Voltage
The power failure detection voltage is 85 V. The PLC will stop operating if the
voltage drops below this voltage level.
Note If the previously used Power Supply Unit was used with 200 to 240 V AC,
power failures were detected when the voltage dropped to 170 V or lower and
the PC operation stopped. With C200HW-PA204C, however, operation will not
stop between 85 V and 170 V. Therefore, make sure that the system will not
be adversely affected by the change in detection voltage.
204
Section 3-5
Backplanes
Comparison between the C200HW-PA204C and the C200HW-PA204
Item
Input specifications
Power failure
detection voltage
Power supply startup
time (See note.)
Service power
supply
RUN contact output
Terminal block wiring
C200HW-PA204C
100 to 240 V AC (wide range)
85 V or lower
200 ms max.
C200HW-PA204 (previous Unit)
100 to 120/200 to 240 V AC (voltage selected)
100 to 120 VAC: 85 V or lower
200 to 240 VAC: 170 V or lower
1,500 ms max.
Not supported
Not supported (Supported by the PA204S)
Not supported (for future expansion)
C200HW-PA204C
Not supported (Supported by the PA204R)
C200HW-PA204
L2 /N
L2 /N
100 to 240 V AC
INPUT
AC input
L1
L1
LG
Voltage
selector
GR
Alarm output
(replacement
notification output)
GR
Unconnected
terminals
NC
100 to 120
CLOSE
200 to 240
OPEN
LG
ALARM OUTPUT
30 V DC, 50 mA
NC
Unconnected
terminals
POWER indicator
Replacement
notification
L
100 to 240 V AC
INPUT
AC input
NC
NC
On replacement notification module
On hood of Power Supply Unit
Supported
(7-segment display + transistor outputs)
Not supported
Note The time from when the external input (AC power supply) is input until 5 V or
26 V is output.
3-5
3-5-1
Backplanes
CPU Backplanes
CPU Backplane Models
Standard CS-series CPU Backplanes
Number of
slots
2 slots
3 slots
5 slots
8 slots
10 slots
Model
CS1W-BC023
CS1W-BC033
CS1W-BC053
CS1W-BC083
CS1W-BC103
CS-series-only CPU Backplanes
Number of
slots
2 slots
3 slots
5 slots
8 slots
10 slots
Model
CS1W-BC022
CS1W-BC032
CS1W-BC052
CS1W-BC082
CS1W-BC102
205
Section 3-5
Backplanes
Note C200H Units (C200H Basic I/O Units, C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units,
and C200H Special I/O Units) cannot be used with CS-series-only CPU Backplanes.
Components and Switch Settings
Unit mounting slots
(for mounting each Unit)
Backplane mounting screws
(4 M4 screws)
(The Backplane is structured so that
it can be insulated from the control
panel when installed.)
Unit connectors
Power Supply Unit connector
CPU Unit connector
See note.
Unit lock lever
(Fix each Unit securely. Press down on
the lock lever to remove the Unit)
Note Mount an I/O Control Unit (CS1W-IC102)
here to connect a CS1 Long-distance Expansion Rack next.
I/O cable connector
(for connecting a CS1 Expansion Rack
or a C200H Expansion I/O Rack)
Note Always cover the connectors that are not being used with Connector Covers
(sold separately) as a measure against dust.
Name
C200H Unit Connector Cover
CS-series Special I/O Unit Connector Cover
Model
C500-COV01
CV500-COV01
Dimensions and Weights
157
145
CS1W-BC023/022 (2 Slots)
5.9
105.25
172.3
198.5
6
5.2
35
17
17
23.7
21.9
20.2
CS1W-BC023
Weight: 600 g max.
206
CS1W-BC022
5.2
Section 3-5
Backplanes
135 (including protruding parts)
132
118
6
CS1W-BC@@@ (3, 5, 8, or 10 Slots)
5.2
35
L
W
Model
CS1W-BC033
CS1W-BC053
CS1W-BC083
CS1W-BC103
CS1W-BC032
CS1W-BC052
CS1W-BC082
CS1W-BC102
3-5-2
17
124
6
27
Number of slots
3
5
8
10
3
5
8
10
L (mm)
246
316
421
491
246
316
421
491
W (mm)
260
330
435
505
260
330
435
505
Weight (max.)
750 g
900 g
1,200 g
1,400 g
750 g
900 g
1,200 g
1,400 g
CS-series Expansion Backplanes
CS-series Expansion Backplanes are used for both CS-series Expansion
Racks and CS-series Long-distance Expansion Racks.
CS-series Expansion Backplane Models
Standard CS-series Expansion Backplane
Number of slots
3 slots
5 slots
8 slots
10 slots
Model
CS1W-BI033
CS1W-BI053
CS1W-BI083
CS1W-BI103
CS-series-only Expansion Backplane
Number of slots
3 slots
5 slots
8 slots
10 slots
Model
CS1W-BI032
CS1W-BI052
CS1W-BI082
CS1W-BI102
Note C200H Units (C200H Basic I/O Units, C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units,
and C200H Special I/O Units) cannot be used with CS-series-only Expansion
Backplanes.
207
Section 3-5
Backplanes
Components and Switch Settings
Unit mounting slots
(for mounting each Unit)
Backplane mounting screws
(4 M4 screws)
(The Backplane is structured
so that it can be insulated
from the control panel when
installed.)
Unit connectors
Power Supply Unit connector
See note .
I/O cable connector
(for connecting the following Rack)
I/O cable connector
(for connecting the previous Rack)
Unit lock lever
(Fix each Unit securely. Press down
on the lock lever to remove the Unit)
Note Mount an I/O Control Unit (CS1W-IC102) here to start connecting CS1 Long-distance Expansion Racks next. Mount an
I/O Interface Unit (CS1W -II102) if this Rack is a CS1 Long-distance Expansion Rack (i.e., the previous Rack is connected
via an I/O Control Unit or an I/O Interface Unit).
Note Always cover the connectors that are not being used with Connector Covers
(sold separately) as a measure against dust.
Name
C200H Unit Connector Cover
CS-series CPU Bus Unit Connector Cover
Model
C500-COV01
CV500-COV01
Dimensions
130
118
CS1W-BI@@@
5.2
59.75
L
17
6
6
35
27
W
Model
CS1W-BI033
CS1W-BI053
CS1W-BI083
CS1W-BI103
CS1W-BI032
CS1W-BI052
208
Number of slots
3
5
8
10
3
5
L (mm)
246
316
421
491
246
316
W (mm)
260
330
435
505
260
330
Weight (max.)
750 g
900 g
1,200 g
1,400 g
750 g
900 g
Section 3-5
Backplanes
Model
CS1W-BI082
CS1W-BI102
3-5-3
Number of slots
L (mm)
8
421
10
491
W (mm)
435
505
Weight (max.)
1,200 g
1,400 g
C200H Expansion I/O Backplanes
C200H Expansion I/O Racks cannot be connected together with CS-series
Long-distance Expansion Racks.
C200H Expansion I/O Backplane Models
Number of slots
3 slots
5 slots
8 slots
10 slots
Model
C200HW-BI031
C200HW-BI051
C200HW-BI081-V1
C200HW-BI101-V1
Components and Switch Settings
Unit mounting slots
(for mounting each Unit)
Backplane mounting screws
(4 M4 screws)
Unit connectors
I/O cable connector
(for connecting the previous Rack:
CPU Rack, CS1 Expansion Rack,
or C200H Expansion I/O rack)
Power Supply Unit connector
Unit lock lever
(Fix each Unit securely. Press down
on the lock lever to remove the Unit)
I/O cable connector
(for connecting the following Rack:
C200H Expansion I/O Rack)
Note Always cover the connectors that are not being used with Connector Covers
(sold separately) as a measure against dust.
Name
C200H Unit Connector Cover
CS-series CPU Bus Unit Connector
Cover
Model
C500-COV01
CV500-COV01
209
Section 3-5
Backplanes
Dimensions
C200HW-BI@@@
Model
C200HW-BI031
C200HW-BI051
C200HW-BI081-V1
C200HW-BI101-V1
Number of slots
3
5
8
10
W (mm)
Weight (max.)
500 g
650 g
950 g
1,100 g
Number of slots
3 slots
Model
C200HW-ATT32
5 slots
C200HW-ATT52
8 slots
C200HW-ATT82
10 slots
C200HW-ATTA2
189
259
364
434
Optional Products
Product
Backplane
Insulation Plate
(for C200H
Expansion I/O
Backplane)
3-5-4
Specifications
Used to electrically
insulate the C200H
Expansion I/O Rack
from the mounting
surface in the control panel to
improve noise
resistance.
I/O Control Units, I/O Interface Units, and Terminators
I/O Control Units and I/O Interface Units are used to create CS-series Longdistance Expansion Racks. Terminators are connected to the last CS-series
Long-distance Expansion Rack in each series. (Up to two series of CS-series
Long-distance Expansion Racks can be connected.)
CS1W-IC102 I/O Control Unit
An I/O Control Unit is connected to the leftmost slot on the CPU Rack or the
last CS-series Expansion Rack to start connecting CS-series Long-distance
Expansion Racks.
210
Section 3-5
Backplanes
Part Names and Functions
Indicators
OUT A OUT B
Connector to Backplane
Connector to I/O Interface
Unit of series B
Connector to I/O Interface
Unit of series A
Indicators
Indicator
RDY (green)
TERM ERR (red)
Status
Lit
Not lit
Lit
Not lit
Meaning
Operating normally.
Bus error.
Terminator missing.
Terminator connected.
Dimensions and Weight
190
IC102
RDY
123
CS
TERM
ERRB
OUT
A OUT
OUT A OUT B
130
34.5
Weight: 300 g max. (including cable to Backplane)
236.5
Backplane
211
Section 3-5
Backplanes
Connection Method on CPU Rack
Connect to I/O
cable connector.
CPU Rack
Series A
Series B
Note Connect a Terminator (CV500-TER01) to the unused connector when connecting only series A or series B.
Connection Method on
CS-series Expansion Rack
Connect the I/O Control Unit to the output I/O cable connector (right side).
To CPU Rack
or previous CS
series Expansion Rack
CS1 Expansion Rack
Series A
Series B
Note Connect a Terminator (CV500-TER01) to the unused connector when connecting only series A or series B.
CS1W-II102 I/O Interface Unit
Mount an I/O Interface Unit to the leftmost slot on each CS-series Long-distance Expansion Rack.
Part Names and Functions
Indicator
IN
OUT
Connector to
Backplane
IN expansion connector
(to previous Rack)
OUT expansion connector
(to following Rack)
Indicator
Indicator
RDY (green)
212
Status
Meaning
Lit
Operating normally.
Not lit Bus error (bus reset) or system error.
Section 3-5
Backplanes
Dimensions and Weight
190
II102
RDY
IN
123
CS
OUT
130
34.5
Weight: 300 g max. (including connector to Backplane)
Connection Method
236.5
Backplane
Connect the I/O Interface Unit to the input I/O cable connector on the Backplane (left side). Always connect a Terminator (CV500-TER01) to the connector for the next Rack when it is not used (i.e., on the last CS-series Longdistance Expansion Rack in the series).
To the previous Rack
(I/O Control Unit or I/O
Interface Unit)
CS1 Long-distance
Expansion Rack
To the next Rack
(I/O Interface Unit)
CV500-TER01 Terminator
Connect a Terminator when not used.
Two Terminators are provided with an I/O Control Unit
Weight: 50 g max.
213
Section 3-6
Basic I/O Units
3-6
Basic I/O Units
3-6-1
C200H and CS-series Basic I/O Units with Terminal Blocks
Name
Basic Input
Units (with
terminal
blocks)
Model
100 to 120 V AC, 100 to 120 V DC, 16 inputs CS1W-IA111
100 to 120 V AC, 8 inputs
C200H-IA121
100 to 120 V AC, 16 inputs
C200H-IA122
C200H-IA122V
200 to 240 V AC, 8 inputs
C200H-IA221
200 to 240 V AC, 16 inputs
C200H-IA222
C200H-IA222V
200 to 240 V AC, 16 inputs
CS1W-IA211
AC/DC Input Units 12 to 24 V AC/V DC, 8 inputs
C200H-IM211
24 V AC/V DC, 16 inputs
C200H-IM212
DC Input Units
12 to 24 V DC, 8 inputs
C200H-ID211
12 to 24 V DC, 16 inputs
C200H-ID212
24 V DC, 16 inputs
CS1W-ID211
Interrupt Input
24 V DC, 16 inputs
CS1W-INT01
Units
12 to 24 V DC, 8 inputs
C200HS-INT01
High-speed Input 24 V DC, 16 inputs
CS1W-IDP01
Unit
C200H OutRelay Output
2 A at 250 V AC/24 V DC max., 0.1 A at
CS1W-OC201
put Units (with Units
120 V DC, independent contacts, 8 outputs
terminal
2 A at 250 V AC/24 V DC max., 0.1 A at
CS1W-OC211
blocks)
120 V DC, 16 outputs
2 A at 250 V AC/24 V DC max., independent C200H-OC223
contacts, 5 outputs
2 A at 250 V AC/24 V DC max., independent C200H-OC224
contacts, 8 outputs
C200H-OC224N
C200H-OC224V
(no longer manufactured)
C200H-OC124N
2 A at 250 V AC/24 V DC max., 8 outputs
C200H-OC221
2 A at 250 V AC/24 V DC max., 12 outputs
C200H-OC222
C200H-OC222V
(no longer manufactured)
C200H-OC222N
2 A at 250 V AC/24 V DC max., 16 outputs
C200H-OC225
C200H-OC226 (no
longer manufactured)
C200H-OC226N
214
AC Input Units
Specifications
External
view/dimensions
reference No.
5
1
3
3
1
3
3
5
1
3
1
3
5
5
1
5
5
5
1
3
3
3
1
3
3
3
3
4
4
Section 3-6
Basic I/O Units
Name
Specifications
C200H OutTriac Output Units
put Units (with
terminal
blocks)
Transistor Output
Units, Sinking
Transistor Output
Units, Sourcing
Model
1.2 A at 250 V AC max., 8 outputs, with fuse CS1W-OA201
burnout detection circuit
1 A at 250 V AC max., 8 outputs, with fuse
C200H-OA221 (no
burnout detection circuit
longer manufactured)
1.2 A at 250 V AC max., 8 outputs, with fuse C200H-OA223
burnout detection circuit
0.3 A at 250 V AC max., 12 outputs
C200H-OA222V
0.5 A at 250 V AC max., 12 outputs
C200H-OA224
0.5 A at 250 V AC max., 16 outputs
CS1W-OA211
2.1 A at 24 V DC, 8 outputs
C200H-OD213
1 A at 12 to 48 V DC, 8 outputs
C200H-OD411
0.3 A at 24 V DC, 12 outputs
C200H-OD211
0.3 A at 24 V DC, 16 outputs
C200H-OD212
0.5 A at 12 to 24 V DC, 16 outputs
CS1W-OD211
0.8 A at 24 V DC, load short-circuit protecC200H-OD214
tion, 8 outputs
0.3 A at 5 to 24 V DC common, 8 outputs
C200H-OD216
0.3 A at 5 to 24 V DC common, 12 outputs
C200H-OD217
0.5 A at 24 V DC, load short-circuit protecCS1W-OD212
tion, 16 outputs
1 A at 24 V DC, load short-circuit protection, C200H-OD21A
16 outputs
External
view/dimensions
reference No.
5
1
2
3
3
5
1
1
3
3
5
1
1
3
5
3
Note Immediate refreshing (!) or refreshing using IORF(097) is possible for all
C200H Basic I/O Units.
Optional Products
Name
I/O Unit Cover
Specifications
Model
Cover for 10-pin terminal
C200H-COV11
block; 8-point Input/5-point
Output Unit
CS-series Special I/O Unit
Connector Cover
Short protection for 10-pin C200H-COV02
terminal block (package of
10 covers); 8 inputs, 8 outputs
Short protection for 19-pin C200H-COV03
terminal block (package of
10 covers); 12 inputs, 12
outputs
Protective cover for unused CV500-COV01
connectors on Backplane
C200H Unit Connector
Cover
Protective cover for unused C200H-COV01
connectors on Backplane
Relay
24 V DC, C200H-OC221/
OC222/OC223/OC224/
OC225
Terminal Block Covers
G6B-1174P-FD-US-M
215
Section 3-6
Basic I/O Units
Components and Switch Settings
C200H 10-pin/19-pin Terminal Block
10-pin terminal block
19-pin terminal block
Unit mounting hooks
Hooked onto Backplane to mount Unit.
Model label
I/O indicator
I/O indicator
Terminal block
connector
(10-pin)
Terminal block
connector
(10-pin)
10-pin Terminal Block
Terminal block
connector
10-pin Terminal Block (C200H-OA223)
10-pin terminal block
8-point Unit
C200H-ID211,
C200H-IM211,
C200H-IA121,
C200H-IA221,
C200H-OC221,
C200H-OD216
8-point Unit
C200H-OD213,
F indicator (fuse C200H-OD411,
C200H-OA221,
burnout)
C200H-OA223
(illustrated above)
216
Model label
I/O indicator
19-pin terminal block
16-point Unit
C200H-ID212,
C200H-IA122,
C200H-IA222,
C200H-IM212,
C200H-IA122V,
C200H-IA222V,
C200H-OD21A,
C200H-OD212,
C200H-OC225,
C200H-OC226N,
C200H-OC226
(illustrated above)
8-point Unit
C200H-OD214
ALARM indicator
12-point Unit
5-point Unit
8-point Unit
C200H-OC223
19-pin Terminal Block
(C200H-OC226 19-pin
Terminal Block)
C200H-OC222,
C200H-OC222V,
C200H-OD211,
C200H-OD217,
C200H-OA224,
C200H-OA222V
C200H-OC222N
C200H-OC224,
C200H-224V,
C200H-224N
Section 3-6
Basic I/O Units
CS-series Basic Input Units (20-pin Terminal Block)
16-point Unit
8-point Unit
20-pin terminal block
CS1W-ID211
INT01
IDP01
OD211
IA111
IA211
OC211
OA211
CS1W-OC201
ERR
ERR
16-point Units
CS1W-OD212
with ERR indicator (load short-circuit)
8-point Units
with ERR indicator (fuse burnout)
CS1W-OA201
217
Section 3-6
Basic I/O Units
Dimensions
C200H Units with 10-pin Terminal Blocks
Backplane
C200H-IA121
C200H-IA221
C200H-ID211
C200H-IM211
C200H-OA221
C200H-OC221
C200H-OC223
C200H-OD216
C200H-OD213
C200H-OD411
C200H-OD214
(See note.)
Backplane
C200H-OA223
(See note.)
Note The heights of the Units including the Backplane are 5 mm greater on the
CPU Backplane and CS-series Expansion Backplane (123 and 143 mm).
218
Section 3-6
Basic I/O Units
Units with 19-pin Terminal Blocks
Backplane
C200H-IA122
C200H-IA122V
C200H-IA222
C200H-IA222V
C200H-ID212
C200H-IM212
C200H-OA222V
C200H-OA224
C200H-OC222
C200H-OC222V
C200H-OC224
C200H-OC224V
C200H-OC225
C200H-OD211
C200H-OD212
C200H-OD217
C200H-OD21A
C200H-OC222N
C200H-OC224N
(See note.)
Terminal Dimensions
Backplane
C200H-OC226
C200H-OC226N
(See note .)
Note The heights of the Units including the Backplane are 5 mm greater on the
CPU Backplane and CS-series Expansion Backplane (150 and 174 mm).
219
Section 3-6
Basic I/O Units
CS-series Basic I/O Units (20-pin Terminal Blocks)
Backplane
CS1W-IA111
CS1W-IA211
CS1W-ID211
CS1W-INT01
CS1W-IDP01
CS1W-OD211
CS1W-OD212
CS1W-OA201
CS1W-OA211
CS1W-OC201
CS1W-OC211
Terminal Dimensions
3-6-2
Functions
Interrupt Input Units
Interrupt Input Units are used to execute interrupt programs on the rising or
falling edge of an input signal (See note.). When the specified interrupt input
turns ON (or OFF), execution of the cyclic program in the CPU Unit is interrupted and an I/O interrupt task (task number 100 to 131) is executed. When
execution of the I/O interrupt task has been completed, the cyclic program is
again executed starting from the instruction after which it was interrupted.
Note Only the CS1W-INT01 can detect falling edges. The interrupt control instructions, however, can be used to switch between upward and downward differentiation.
Interrupt Input Unit
CPU Unit
1 cyclic task
MSKS(690)
Input
(rising or
falling
edge)
220
Immediate
interrupt
I/O interrupt task is
executed when the in
put turns ON (or OFF).
I/O interrupt task
Section 3-6
Basic I/O Units
Applicable Units
Either of the following Interrupt Input Units can be used.
Model
CS1W-INT01
C200HS-INT01
Specifications
24 V DC 16 inputs
24 V DC 8 inputs
No. of Units mountable
to CPU Rack
2 max.
4 max.
Application Precautions
All Interrupt Input Units must be mounted to the CPU Rack. The interrupt input
function will not be supported if an Interrupt Input Unit is mounted to an
Expansion Rack. If mounted to an Expansion Rack, the Unit can be used as a
normal I/O Unit.
There are limits to the number of Interrupt Input Units that can be mounted.
(See table, above.)
Use only CS-series or only C200H Interrupt Input Units on the same CPU
Rack. The CS-series and C200H Interrupt Input Units cannot be used
together.
Can be used only with CPU Units with model numbers ending in “-V1,” i.e.,
CS1W-CPU4@-V1 or CS1W-CPU6@-V1.
The input response time cannot be changed for the CS1W-INT01, and the
related portions of the Basic I/O Unit input time constants in the PLC Setup,
and the setting status in A220 to A259 will not be valid.
Use CX-Programmer Version 2.0 or higher when using the CS1W-INT01
Interrupt Input Unit. Earlier versions of CX-Programmer do not support this
Unit. (The Programming Consoles, however, can be used for this Unit.)
Input Signal Width
Input signals must meet the following conditions.
ON
Unit
CS1W-INT01
C200HS-INT01
OFF
ON time
0.1 ms min.
0.2 ms min.
OFF time
0.5 ms min.
0.5 ms min.
221
Section 3-6
Basic I/O Units
Components
CS1W-INT01
Input indicators
C200HS-INT01
Unit lock notch
(fit into the Backplane)
Input indicators
Model label
01
I/O indicator
10-pin Terminal
Block connector
Using I/O Interrupts
1,2,3...
1. Mount the Input Interrupt Unit to the CPU Rack and create the I/O tables.
2. Create the I/O task (see note 1).
3. Use the SET INTERRUPT MASK Instruction (MSKS(690)) in the cyclic
program to enable the required interrupt input numbers (see note 1).
4. Turn ON or OFF the inputs on the Interrupt Input Unit for the interrupt input
numbers that have been enabled.
Note
1. The relationship between Interrupt Input Unit numbers, interrupt input
numbers, and I/O interrupt tasks is shown in the following table.
Model
CS1W-INT01
C200HS-INT01
Interrupt Input
Unit number
0
1
0
1
2
3
Interrupt input
number
0 to 15
0 to 7
I/O interrupt task
number
100 to 115
116 to 131
100 to 107
108 to 115
116 to 123
124 to 131
2. The CS1W-INT01 can set to detect either rising or falling edges.
222
Section 3-6
Basic I/O Units
MSKS(690) Instruction
Specifying Rising/Falling Edge for CS1W-INT01
MSKS(690)
N: Control data 1 (Interrupt Input Unit No.)
S: Control data 2 (interrupt mask data)
The MSKS(690) instruction is used to set rising edge or falling edge detection
for each interrupt input number.
• The value of N will determine which Interrupt Input Unit will perform the
I/O interrupt processing.
• The value of S will determine rising or falling edge detection for each
interrupt input number.
Operand
Value
CS1W- C200HSINT01
INT01
N
2, 3
---
S
0000 to
--FFFF hex
Details
Interrupt Input Unit Number
Numbers 2 and 3 are assigned to the Units in
order from left to right.
2: Interrupt Input Unit 0 (interrupt task numbers
100 to 115)
3: Interrupt Input Unit 1 (interrupt task numbers
116 to 131)
Rising/Falling Edge Designation
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to the interrupt input numbers (interrupt tasks 100 to 115 or 116 to 131).
0: Rising edge
1: Falling edge
Specifying I/O Interrupt Processing
MSKS(690)
N: Control data 1 (Interrupt Input Unit No.)
S: Control data 2 (interrupt mask data)
The MSKS(690) instruction is used to set I/O interrupt processing or scheduled interrupt processing.
• The value of N will determine which Interrupt Input Unit will perform the
I/O interrupt processing.
• The value of S will determine which interrupt number will be enabled.
223
Section 3-6
Basic I/O Units
Operand
N
S
224
Value
Details
CS1WC200HSINT01
INT01
0, 1
0 to 3
Interrupt Input Unit Number
Numbers are assigned to the Units in order from
left to right.
CS1W-INT01 (unit numbers 0 and 1)
0: Interrupt Input Unit 0 (interrupt task numbers
100 to 115)
1: Interrupt Input Unit 1 (interrupt task numbers
116 to 131)
CS1W-INT01 (unit numbers 0 to 3)
0: Interrupt Input Unit 0 (interrupt task numbers
100 to 107)
1: Interrupt Input Unit 1 (interrupt task numbers
108 to 115)
2: Interrupt Input Unit 2 (interrupt task numbers
116 to 123)
3: Interrupt Input Unit 3 (interrupt task numbers
123 to 131)
0000 to
0000 to
Interrupt Mask Data
FFFF hex 00FF hex Bits 00 to 15 for the CS1W-INT01 and the rightmost 8 bits for the C200H-INT01are used for the
Interrupt Input Unit’s interrupt input number.
1: Interrupt masked
(interrupt input disabled)
0: Interrupt valid
(interrupt input enabled)
Section 3-6
Basic I/O Units
Dimensions
CS1W-INT01
Backplane
C200HS-INT01
(See note .)
Note The height of the Unit including the Backplane is 5 mm greater on the CPU
Backplane and CS-series Expansion Backplane (123 mm).
225
Section 3-6
Basic I/O Units
3-6-3
Units with High-speed Inputs
Functions
The CS1W-IDP01 enables inputting pulse signals that are shorted than the
cycle time of the CPU Unit. C200H High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units)
also supported high-speed inputs.
I/O Units with High-speed
Inputs
Model
CS1W-IDP01
C200H-ID501
C200H-ID215
C200H-MD501
C200H-MD115
C200H-MD215
Name
High-speed Input Unit
TTL Input Unit
DC Input Unit
TTL I/O Unit
DC Input/Transistor
Output Unit
Specifications
24 V DC, 16 inputs
5 V DC, 32 inputs
24 V DC, 32 inputs
5 V DC,16 inputs/16 outputs
12 V DC,16 inputs/16 outputs
24 V DC,16 inputs/16 outputs,
Note Refer to 3-7 C200H High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units) for details on
C200H High-density I/O Units
Components
CS1W-IDP01
Input indicators
Input Signal Width
High-speed input signals must meet the following conditions for the ON time.
ON OFF
Model
CS1W-IDP01
C200H-ID501/215
C200H-MD501/215/115
Dimensions
226
ON time
0.1 ms min.
1.0/4.0 ms min. (switchable)
The High-speed Input Unit has the same dimensions as the Interrupt Input
Unit. Refer to page 225.
Section 3-6
Basic I/O Units
3-6-4
CS-series Basic I/O Units with Connectors
(32-, 64-, and 96-pt Units)
CS-series Basic I/O Units are classified as Basic I/O Units.
Models
Name
DC Input Unit
Specifications
24 V DC, 32 inputs
24 V DC, 64 inputs
24 V DC, 96 inputs
Model
CS1W-ID231
CS1W-ID261
CS1W-ID291
Transistor Output Unit,
Sinking
0.5 A at 12 to 24 V DC, 32 outputs
0.3 A at 12 to 24 V DC, 64 outputs
0.1 A at 12 to 24 V DC, with fuse burnout
detection circuit, 96 outputs
0.5 A at 24 V DC, load short-circuit protection, 16 outputs
0.5 A at 24 V DC, load short-circuit protection, 32 outputs
0.3 A at 24 V DC, load short-circuit protection, 64 outputs
0.1 A at 24 V DC, with fuse burnout
detection circuit, 96 outputs
24 V DC input, 0.3 A output at 12 to
24 V DC, 32 inputs/32 outputs
24 V DC input, 0.1 A output at 12 to 24 V
DC, with fuse burnout detection circuit,
48 inputs/48 outputs
24 V DC input, 0.3 A output at 24 V DC,
load short-circuit protection, 32
inputs/32 outputs
24 V DC input, 0.1 A output at 24 V DC,
with fuse burnout detection circuit, 48
inputs/48 outputs
3.5 mA at 5 V DC, 32 inputs
35 mA at 5 V DC, 32 outputs
CS1W-OD231
CS1W-OD261
CS1W-OD291
Transistor Output Unit,
Sourcing
DC Input/Transistor
Output Unit, Sinking
DC Input/Transistor
Output Unit, Sourcing
TTL I/O Unit
CS1W-OD212
CS1W-OD232
CS1W-OD262
CS1W-OD292
CS1W-MD261
CS1W-MD291
CS1W-MD262
CS1W-MD292
CS1W-MD561
227
Section 3-6
Basic I/O Units
Note Immediate refreshing (!) or refreshing using IORF(097) is possible for CSseries High-density I/O Units.
Unit mounting hooks
Hooked onto Backplane to
mount Unit.
Model label
I/O indicators
Display Switch
for 64-point I/O Units
56-pin I/O wiring
connectors 2
Unit lock notch
(Attach Unit to Backplane
and fix securely)
32-point Units
CS1W-ID231
CS1W-OD231
Area 1
Area 2
Display switch
0, 1
2, 3
m
m+2
m+1
m+3
Display Switch
for 96-point I/O Units
32-point Units with ERR indicator
(load short-circuit indicator)
CS1W-OD232
Display switch (3-level selection)
Display switch
0, 1
2, 3
4, 5
Area 1
m
m+2
m+4
Area 2
m+1
m+3
m+5
64-point Units
CS1W-ID261
CS1W-OD261
CS1W-MD261
CS1W-MD561
64-point Units with ERR indicator
(load short-circuit indicator)
CS1W-OD262
CS1W-MD262
96-point Units
CS1W-ID291/OD291/OD292/MD291/MD292
F (fuse burnt out) indicator
Available on Output Units.
Lights when one or more fuses in the Unit blows.
Lights when external power is OFF.
228
Section 3-6
Basic I/O Units
Units with Two
40-pin connectors
CS1W-ID261
CS1W-0D261
CS1W-OD262
CS1W-MD261
CS1W-MD262
CS1W-MD561
Units with 56-pin
connectors
CS1W-ID291
CS1W-OD291
CS1W-OD292
CS1W-MD291
CS1W-MD292
Using Pressure-welded Connector
Connecting Cables:
G79-@@@C-@@@-@@@
XW2Z-@@@
Backplane
Using Soldered or Crimped Connector
Backplane
Units with One
40-pin connector
CS1W-ID231
CS1W-0D231
CS1W-0D232
Indicator switch
Indicator switch
Dimensions
123
123
Approx. 169 for 32- and 64-pt Units
Approx. 179 for 96-pt Units
150
229
Section 3-6
Basic I/O Units
3-6-5
C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units
C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units are classified as Basic I/O Units.
Models
Name
Specifications
DC Input Unit
24 V DC, input current:
4.1 mA typical, 32 inputs
24 V DC, input current:
6 mA typical, 32 inputs
12 V DC, 64 inputs
24 V DC, input current:
4.1 mA typical, 64 inputs
24 V DC, input current:
6 mA typical, 64 inputs
Transistor Output Unit 16 mA at 4.5 V to 100 mA
at 26.4 V, 32 outputs
16 mA at 4.5 V to 100 mA
at 26.4 V, 64 outputs
24 V DC, 0.5 A, sourcing,
32 inputs
Note
Model
C200H-ID216
Appearance/
dimensions
reference No.
1
C200H-ID218
1
C200H-ID111
C200H-ID217
2
2
C200H-ID219
2
C200H-OD218
1
C200H-OD219
2
C200H-OD21B 1
1. C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units cannot be mounted to SYSMAC
BUS Slave Racks.
2. Immediate refreshing (!) is not possible for C200H Group-2 High-density
I/O Units, but refreshing using IORF (097) is possible for these Units.
Components and Switch Settings
Unit mounting hooks
Hooked onto Back
plane to mount Unit.
Model label
Model label
I/O indicators
I/O indicators
I/O No. setting switch
I/O No. setting switch
(Cannot be used with
the CS-series)
Indicator selector switch
(Select whether the I/O
indicator is CN1 or CN2.)
(Cannot be used with
the CS-series)
I/O wiring connector
1. Units with One 40-pin Connector
40-pin I/O wiring
connector × 2
2. Units with Two 40-pin Connectors
Note The I/O number setting switch on the front panel of C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units is not used for the CS Series, i.e., the I/O number setting will not
affect allocations. Words are allocated to the Units according to their position
on the Rack in the same way as for Basic I/O Units.
230
Section 3-6
Basic I/O Units
Units with One 40-pin Connector
32-point Unit
C200H-ID216
C200H-ID218
32-point Unit
C200H-OD218
F (fuse burnt out)
indicator
Units with Two 40-pin Connectors
64-point Unit
C200H-ID111
C200H-ID217
C200H-ID219
64-point Unit
F (fuse burnt out)
indicator
C200H-OD219
Dimensions
1. Units with 40-pin
Connector
2. Units with Two 40-pin
Connectors
Backplane
Unit Dimensions with Backplane and Connector
(See note .)
Approx. 143 (See note .)
Note The height of the Unit including the Backplane is 5 mm greater on the CPU
Backplane and CS-series Expansion Backplane (123 and 148 mm).
231
Section 3-7
C200H High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units)
3-7
C200H High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units)
C200H High-density I/O Units are classified as C200H Special I/O Units.
Models
Name
TTL Input Unit
DC Input Unit
TTL Output Unit
Transistor Output Unit
TTL I/O Unit
DC Input/Transistor
Output Unit
Specifications
5 V DC, 32 inputs
24 V DC, 32 inputs
5 V DC, 32 outputs
24 V DC, 32 outputs
5 V DC, 16 inputs/16 outputs
12 V DC, 16 inputs/16 outputs
24 V DC, 16 inputs/16 outputs
Model
C200H-ID501
C200H-ID215
C200H-OD501
C200H-OD215
C200H-MD501
C200H-MD115
C200H-MD215
Dynamic I/O mode
----128 outputs
128 outputs
128 inputs
128 inputs
128 inputs
Static I/O mode
High-speed inputs
High-speed inputs
----High-speed inputs
High-speed inputs
High-speed inputs
Note Immediate refreshing (!) is not possible for C200H High-density I/O Units, but
refreshing using IORF (097) is possible.
Components and Switch Settings
Unit lock notch
Model label
I/O indicators
24-pin I/O wiring
connectors × 2
Note
Unit number setting switch
Set the unit number between 0 and
9. Ten words are allocated per Unit
in the Special I/O Unit Area (words
2000 to 2959) according to the unit
number setting.
1. Be sure to turn OFF the power supply to the PLC before setting the unit
number.
2. Set the unit number using a flat-blade screwdriver.
3. Do not stop in the middle of setting the value (between 0 and 9) or the setting will not be complete.
4. Make sure that the groove in the unit number setting switch does not become damaged.
232
Section 3-7
C200H High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units)
Back of Unit
DIP switch
123456
Model
RUN mode
High-speed
inputs
SW1
SW2
ON
C200H-ID501
C200H-ID215
ON
Highspeed
input
function
enabled
----Highspeed
input
function
enabled
32 static --128
dynamic outputs
outputs
---
OFF
---
OFF
Normal
input
High-speed input
Normal input
minimum
response time
response pulse
SW3
SW4
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
4 ms
1 ms
-----
Dynamic data
output logic
SW5
ON
15 ms
max.
OFF
2.5 ms
max.
Normal
input
4 ms
1 ms
---
---
15 ms
max.
2.5 ms
max.
---
---
---
---
---
Positive
logic
output
(See
note.)
C200H-OD215
128
32 static --dynamic outputs
outputs
---
---
---
---
---
Positive
logic
output
(See
note.)
C200H-MD501
128
16 static
dynamic inputs,
inputs
16 static
outputs
Normal
input
4 ms
1 ms
15 ms
max.
2.5 ms
max.
---
Negative
logic
output
(See
note.)
Negative
logic
output
(See
note.)
---
C200H-MD115
128
16 static
dynamic inputs,
inputs
16 static
outputs
Normal
input
4 ms
1 ms
15 ms
max.
2.5 ms
max.
---
---
C200H-MD215
128
16 static
dynamic inputs,
inputs
16 static
outputs
Normal
input
4 ms
1 ms
15 ms
max.
2.5 ms
max.
---
---
C200H-OD501
Highspeed
input
function
enabled
Highspeed
input
function
enabled
Highspeed
input
function
enabled
Note Negative and positive logic output are only available with 128-point dynamic
output mode.
233
Section 3-7
C200H High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units)
C200H High-density I/O Units are classified as C200H Special I/O Units and
have the following functions.
Dynamic I/O Mode
The High-density I/O Units (other than the C200H-ID501 and C200H-ID215)
can provide high-density I/O rather than the normal output (static output
mode) and I/O (static I/O mode). High-density I/O (dynamic output and
dynamic input modes: 128 points) is achieved by combining the I/O signals
with a strobe signal output. The High-density I/O Units require less wiring, use
a numeric display device in dynamic output mode with large number capacity,
and use keyboard switches in dynamic input mode.
High-speed Inputs
The High-density I/O Units (other than the C200H-OD501 and C200HOD502) also provide high-speed inputs. High-speed inputs are possible with 8
input points. This function enables accurate reading of short pulse inputs from
photomicroswitches and other devices.
Dynamic I/O Mode
Dynamic Output Mode
C200H-OD501/OD215
Data output
Numeric display
: :
Strobe output
: :
Data output
Numeric display
: :
Strobe output
: :
By combining data signals (DATA 0 to 7 and DATA 8 to 15) with strobe signals
(STB 0 to 7/ STB 8 to 15, 128 bits (8 words) can be output to a numerical display device as shown in the following diagram.
234
Section 3-7
C200H High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units)
Word n
Word n
Word n + 1
Word n + 3
Rightmost
byte
Leftmost
byte
Rightmost
byte
Leftmost
byte
Data output
DATA 0 to 7
Strobe output
STB 0
STB 1
STB 2
to
STB 7
DATA 8 to 15 can also be output as STB 8 to 15 at the same time.
Dynamic Input Mode
C200H-MD501/MD115/MD215
Strobe
output
Keyboard switch,
thumbwheel
switch, etc.
Data input
Strobe
output
Keyboard switch,
thumbwheel
switch, etc.
Data input
Using strobe signals STB 0 to 7 as outputs, data signals DATA 0 to 7 as
inputs, strobe signals STB 8 to 15 as outputs, and data signals DATA 8 to 15
as inputs, 128 bits (8 words) can be input from strobe input keyboard switches
or thumbwheel switches as shown in the following diagram.
235
Section 3-7
C200H High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units)
Word n
Rightmost
bytes
Word n
Leftmost
bytes
Word n + 1 Word n + 3
Rightmost Leftmost
bytes
bytes
Data input
DATA 0 to 7
Strobe output
STB 0
STB 1
STB 2
to
STB 7
DATA 8 to 15 can also be output as STB 8 to 15 at the same time.
High-speed Inputs
The inputs 8 to 15 from the CN2 connector can be used for pulse input. The
minimum pulse width is 1 ms or 4 ms (selectable).
A High-density I/O Unit will recognize a pulse input when the pulse input
occurs (i.e., the inputs turns ON and then OFF again), and the pulse width is
greater than 1 ms or 4 ms (according to the selected minimum pulse width).
The data is refreshed in the Special I/O Unit Area (word n + 1, bits 8 to 15) of
I/O memory during the CPU Unit’s I/O refresh period.
High-density I/O Unit
CPU Unit
I/O refresh
1 ms or 4 ms
High-speed
input buffer
+
The High-density I/O Unit data in the high-speed input buffer can also be
refreshed during program execution by executing the IORF(097) instruction
for the desired Special I/O Unit.
High-density I/O Unit
CPU Unit
I/O refresh
1 ms or 4 ms
236
High-speed
input buffer
+
+
Section 3-7
C200H High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units)
Backplane
Dimensions
Fujitsu connection
cable
123
Backplane
Approx. 168
G79-@C Connecting Cable
123
150
237
Section 3-8
B7A Interface Units
3-8
3-8-1
B7A Interface Units
CS-series B7A Interface Units (CS-series Basic I/O Units)
Overview
The B7A is a 1:1 transmission path that does not require a master. A total of
16 signals are transmitted using a two-conductor or three-conductor VCTF
cable (maximum length: 500 m). The CS1W-B7A@@ B7A Interface Unit is a
CS-series Basic I/O Unit that exchanges up to 64 points of I/O data mainly
with B7A Link Terminals using a B7A transmission path.
The B7A Interface Unit and B7A Link Terminal can be used in the same way
as a standard Basic I/O Unit and I/O Terminal without any need to worry about
communications. This characteristic reduces the wiring when using more than
one relatively remote sensor or actuator.
System Configuration
B7 Interface Unit
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
PRPHL/COMN
SYSMAC CS1G
PROGRAMABLE CONTROLLER
CPU42
OPEN
MCPWR
BUSY
OPEN
PERIPHERAL
CPU
Unit
PORT (RS-232C)
B7A Input Link Terminal
Transmission
distance:
500 m max.
Sensors
Switches
B7A Output Link Terminal
Lamps or other output devices
238
Section 3-8
B7A Interface Units
Models
B7A Interface Unit
CS1W-B7A12
CS1W-B7A02
CS1W-B7A21
CS1W-B7A22
Specifications
I/O words allocated
Connectable B7A Link Terminals
to Unit
(See note 1.)
32 inputs
2 input words
Inputs: Two 16-point Input Terminals, one
32-point Input Terminal, or one 16-point Input
(two B7A ports)
Terminal
32 outputs
2 output words
Outputs: Two 16-point Output Terminals or
one 32-point Output Terminal or one 16-point
(two B7A ports)
Output Terminal
16 inputs, 16 outputs 1 input word and
Inputs: One 16-point Input Terminal
1 output word
Outputs: One 16-point Output Terminal
(two B7A ports)
or
One Mixed I/O Terminal
(16 inputs/16 outputs)
32 inputs, 32 outputs 2 input words and
Inputs: Two 16-point Input Terminals or one
2 output words
32-point Input Terminal
(four B7A ports)
Outputs: Two 16-point Output Terminals or
one 32-point Output Terminal
or
Two Mixed I/O Terminals
(16 inputs/16 outputs)
Note
1. A 10-point B7A Link Terminal cannot be connected to a B7A Interface Unit.
B7A Interface Units can be connected together.
2. Wireless transmissions are possible if B7AP Power Couplers are used on
a B7A transmission path, reducing the wiring required for moving objects
and rotating objects.
239
Section 3-8
B7A Interface Units
B7A Communications Specifications
Item
Transmission
method
Transmission delay
(communications
delay on
transmission path)
Transmission points
External power
supply voltage
(See note 3.)
External supply
current
(See note 4.)
Minimum input time
(See note 5.)
Transmission
distance
Specifications
One-way time-sharing multiplex transmissions
High-speed 3 ms typical, 5 ms max.
Standard
19.2 ms typical, 31 ms max.
CS1W-B7A12 32 inputs (2 ports)
CS1W-B7A02 32 outputs (2 ports)
CS1W-B7A21 16 inputs (1 port), 16 outputs (1 port)
CS1W-B7A22 32 inputs (2 ports), 32 outputs (2 ports)
12 to 24 V DC (allowable voltage range: 10.8 to 26.4 V)
CS1W-B7A12 20 mA min.
CS1W-B7A02 60 mA min.
CS1W-B7A21 30 mA min.
CS1W-B7A22 60 mA min.
High-speed 16 ms
Standard
2.4 ms
High-speed Power supply on one side
(common power supply)
Power supply on both sides
(separate power supplies)
Standard
Cables
Power supply on one side
(common power supply)
Power supply on both sides
(separate power supplies)
10 m max.
50 m max. (with shielded cable)
10 m max.
100 m max. (with shielded cable)
100 m max.
500 m max.
VCTF, 0.75 mm2, 3 conductors (power supply on one side (common power supply))
VCTF, 0.75 mm2, 2 conductors (power supply on both sides (separate power supplies))
Shielded cable, 0.75 mm2, 3 conductors (power supply on one side (common power supply))
Shielded cable, 0.75 mm2, 2 conductors (power supply on both sides (separate power supplies))
Note
1. When separate power supplies are used, the B7A Interface Unit and B7A
Link Terminal are supplied by separate external power supplies.
2. When a common power supply is used, the B7A Interface Unit and B7A
Link Terminal are supplied by the same external power supply.
3. Use a SELV power supply with overcurrent protection. A SELV power supply refers to a power supply with double or reinforced insulation between
input and output and with an output voltage of 30 V rms with a 42.4-V peak
or an output voltage of 60 VDC max. We recommend OMRON S8@@-series Power Supply Units for the external power supplies.
4. The capacity of the external supply current does not include the capacity
required by the B7A Link Terminal.
5. The minimum input time is the minimum time required by the B7A Interface
Unit to read the input signals from the CPU Unit.
240
Section 3-8
B7A Interface Units
Common Specifications
Item
Applicable PLCs
Unit classification
Transmission delay
Specifications
CS Series
CS-series Basic I/O Unit
Standard (19.2 ms typical) or high-speed (3 ms typical),
switchable
(Switchable by using the setting switch on the front panel.
Settings are read when power is turned ON or Unit is
restarted.)
Factory setting: Standard (19.2 ms typical)
Note A transmission error will occur if B7A Link Terminals
with different transmission delay times are connected to each other.
Hold status or reset inputs (loads off) (switch settable)
Transmission error
input status processing
Front panel connection Terminal block
Current consumption
5 V DC: 90 mA max. (supplied from Power Supply Unit)
Weight
CS1W-B7A12: 230 g max.
CS1W-B7A02: 230 g max.
CS1W-B7A21: 240 g max.
CS1W-B7A22: 240 g max.
I/O Memory Allocations
The B7A Interface Unit is a Basic I/O Unit. Each Unit is allocated two or four
words in the I/O Area (which starts at CIO 0000). The words are allocated
according to the mounting position of the Unit as shown in the following table.
Port
1
2
3
4
Input/output
CS1WB7A12
Input
Input
-----
CS1WB7A02
Output
Output
-----
CS1WB7A21
Output
Input
-----
CS1WB7A22
Output
Output
Input
Input
Allocated word
(n: First word
allocated to Unit)
Word n
Word n+1
Word n+2
Word n+3
Transmission Error Processing
Input Ports
The B7A Interface Unit detects transmission errors at the input ports. When a
transmission error is detected at an input port, the corresponding indicator
and Transmission Error Flag turn ON.
■
Indicators
When a transmission occurs at an input port, indicators ERR1 to ERR2 on the
front panel will turn ON according to the port where the error occurred.
Port where
error
occurred
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
CS1W-B7A12
ERR1
ERR2
-----
LED error indicators
CS1W-B7A02 CS1W-B7A21
---------
--ERR1
-----
CS1W-B7A22
----ERR1
ERR2
241
Section 3-8
B7A Interface Units
■
Transmission Error Flag
The corresponding Transmission Error Flag in the first word allocated to the
Unit in the CPU Unit's Auxiliary Area will turn ON for each input port, as
shown in the following table. Words A050 to A080 are allocated to Basic I/O
Unit as information words.
Example: Rack 0, Slot 0
Port where
error
occurred
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
CS1W-B7A12
A05000
A05001
-----
Transmission Error Flag
CS1W-B7A02 CS1W-B7A21
---------
--A05000
-----
CS1W-B7A22
----A05000
A05001
Example: Rack 0, Slot 1
Port where
error
occurred
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
■
CS1W-B7A12
A05008
A05009
-----
Transmission Error Flag
CS1W-B7A02 CS1W-B7A21
---------
--A05008
-----
CS1W-B7A22
----A05008
A05009
Transmission Error Input Status Processing
If an error occurs at an input port, the Unit will hold the status of the input bit in
the CPU Unit's I/O memory from immediately before the transmission error
occurred. When transmission returns to normal, the signals that have been
normally received will be input to the input bit.
Output Ports
The B7A Interface Unit does not detect transmission errors at output ports.
Detect output port transmission errors at the B7A Link Terminal that is connected to the B7A Interface Unit.
Parts and Names
Indicators
Connection terminals
242
Section 3-8
B7A Interface Units
Indicators
■
CS1W-B7A12
Display
Name
ERROR1 Port 1 transmission error
Color
Red
Status
ON
ERROR2 Port 2 transmission error
Red
OFF
ON
3 ms
Orange
OFF
ON
Transmission
delay setting
OFF
LOAD
OFF
15IN +
ERR
Orange
Transmission
error input
status processing setting
ON
Input mode
setting
ON
Orange
OFF
OFF
■
Condition
A transmission error has
occurred at port 1 of the B7A
Unit.
The Unit is operating normally.
A transmission error has
occurred at port 2 of the B7A
Unit.
The Unit is operating normally.
The high-speed transmission
delay (3 ms) is set.
The standard transmission
delay (19.2 ms) is set.
Transmission error input status
processing is set to reset status
(loads OFF).
Transmission error input status
processing is set to hold status.
The input mode is set to 15
inputs + error input.
The input mode is set to 16
inputs.
CS1W-B7A02
Display
3 ms
Name
Transmission
delay setting
Color
Orange
Status
ON
OFF
Condition
The high-speed transmission
delay (3 ms) is set.
The standard transmission
delay (19.2 ms) is set.
243
Section 3-8
B7A Interface Units
■
CS1W-B7A21
Display
Name
ERROR Port 1 transmission error
Color
Red
Status
ON
3 ms
Orange
OFF
ON
Transmission
delay setting
OFF
LOAD
OFF
15IN +
ERR
Transmission
error input status processing
setting
Orange
ON
OFF
Input mode set- Orange
ting
ON
OFF
■
CS1W-B7A22
Display
Name
ERROR1 Port 1 transmission error
Color
Red
Status
ON
ERROR2 Port 2 transmission error
Red
OFF
ON
3 ms
Orange
OFF
ON
Transmission
delay setting
OFF
LOAD
OFF
244
Condition
A transmission error has
occurred at port 1 of the B7A
Unit.
The Unit is operating normally.
The high-speed transmission
delay (3 ms) is set.
The standard transmission
delay (19.2 ms) is set.
Transmission error input status
processing is set to reset status
(loads OFF).
Transmission error input status
processing is set to hold status.
The input mode is set to 15
inputs + error input.
The input mode is set to 16
inputs.
Transmission
error input status processing
setting
Orange
ON
OFF
Condition
A transmission error has
occurred at port 1 of the B7A
Unit.
The Unit is operating normally.
A transmission error has
occurred at port 2 of the B7A
Unit.
The Unit is operating normally.
The high-speed transmission
delay (3 ms) is set.
The standard transmission
delay (19.2 ms) is set.
Transmission error input status
processing is set to reset status
(loads OFF).
Transmission error input status
processing is set to hold status.
Section 3-8
B7A Interface Units
Display
Name
Color
15IN +
Input mode set- Orange
ERR
ting
Status
ON
OFF
Condition
The input mode is set to 15
inputs + error input.
The input mode is set to 16
inputs.
Function Setting Switch
1
2
3
4
5
6
Set functionality using the DIP switch on the back of the Unit.
ON
OFF
■
ON
CS1W-B7A12
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
Name
Transmission delay
Transmission error process
Input mode
ERROR 1 indicator enable
ERROR 2 indicator enable
OFF
Standard (19.2 ms)
Hold status
16 inputs
Disabled
Disabled
ON
High-speed (3 ms)
Reset Inputs
15 inputs + error input
Enabled
Enabled
6
Not used. (Leave OFF.)
NA
NA
Defaults: Pins 4 and 5 are turned ON and all other pins are turned OFF.
■
CS1W-B7A02
Pin
Name
1
Transmission delay
2 to 6 Not used. (Leave OFF.)
OFF
Standard (19.2 ms)
NA
ON
High-speed (3 ms)
NA
OFF
Standard (19.2 ms)
Hold status
16 inputs
Disabled
NA
ON
High-speed (3 ms)
Reset Inputs
15 inputs + error input
Enabled
NA
Defaults: All pins are turned OFF
■
CS1W-B7A21
Pin
1
2
3
5
4, 6
Name
Transmission delay
Transmission error process
Input mode
ERROR indicator enable
Not used. (Leave OFF.)
Defaults: Pin 5 is turned ON and all other pins are turned OFF
245
Section 3-8
B7A Interface Units
■
CS1W-B7A22
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
Name
Transmission delay
Transmission error process
Input mode
ERROR 1 indicator enable
ERROR 2 indicator enable
Not used. (Leave OFF.)
OFF
Standard (19.2 ms)
Hold status
16 inputs
Disabled
Disabled
NA
ON
High-speed (3 ms)
Reset Inputs
15 inputs + error input
Enabled
Enabled
NA
Defaults: Pins 4 and 5 are turned ON and all other pins are turned OFF
Terminal Names and
Allocations
■
Terminal
CS1W-B7A12
Name
SIG IN1
Function
Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
A1
B1
+V
B4
SIG IN2
A5
B5
+V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Input
B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Ter- n+1
minal.
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Input
B7A Link Terminal.
Not used.
---
B0
−
−
IN1
IN2
A0, A2 to A4, A6 NC
to A8, B2, B3,
B6 to B8
A9
−V
B9
+V
246
Connect to – terminal on external power supply.
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Word
Appearance
n
SIG IN1
IN1
SIG IN2
IN2
Section 3-8
B7A Interface Units
■
CS1W-B7A02
Terminal
Name
Function
Word
SIG OUT1 Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link
n
Terminal.
A1
+V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
B1
Connect to – power supply terminal on Output
− OUT1
B7A Link Terminal.
B4
SIG OUT2 Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link
n+1
Terminal.
A5
+V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
B5
Connect to – power supply terminal on Output
− OUT2
B7A Link Terminal.
A0, A2 to A4, A6 NC
Not used.
--to A8, B2, B3,
B6 to B8
A9
−V
Connect to – terminal on external power supply.
B9
+V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Appearance
B0
■
Terminal
SIG OUT1
OUT1
SIG OUT2
OUT2
CS1W-B7A21
Name
Function
Word
SIG OUT1 Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link
n
Terminal.
A1
+V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
B1
Connect
to – power supply terminal on Output
OUT1
−
B7A Link Terminal.
B4
SIG IN1
Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Ter- n+1
minal.
A5
+V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
B5
Connect
to – power supply terminal on Input
− IN1
B7A Link Terminal.
A0, A2 to A4, A6 NC
Not used.
--to A8, B2, B3,
B6 to B8
A9
−V
Connect to – terminal on external power supply.
B9
+V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Appearance
B0
SIG OUT
OUT
SIGIN
IN
247
Section 3-8
B7A Interface Units
■
Terminal
B0
A1
B1
B2
A3
B3
B4
A5
B5
B6
A7
B7
A0, A2, A4, A6,
A8, B8
A9
B9
CS1W-B7A22
Name
Function
SIG OUT1 Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal.
+V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Output
− OUT1
B7A Link Terminal.
SIG OUT2 Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal.
+V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Output
− OUT2
B7A Link Terminal.
SIG IN1
Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
+V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A
− IN1
Link Terminal.
SIG IN2
Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
+V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A
− IN2
Link Terminal.
NC
Not used.
−V
+V
Word
Appearance
n
SIG OUT1
OUT1
n+1
SIG OUT2
OUT2
SIGIN1
IN1
n+2
SIGIN2
IN2
n+3
---
Connect to – terminal on external power supply.
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Preparing and Connecting Cables
Cables
Terminal connector
Recommended wire size
20-pin
AWG22 (0.32 mm2)
• The current capacity of a wire depends on the ambient temperature and
insulation thickness.
Terminal Screws and Crimp Terminals
M3.5 self-rising screws are used for all power supply wiring terminals.
Note Always turn OFF the Unit's power supply and communications power supply
before attaching or removing connectors.
Use the following procedure to prepare and connect the cables.
1) Preparing the Covering
First, use the following procedure to prepare the cable.
1,2,3...
1. Strip approximately 10 mm of the sheath covering the signal lines to match
the crimp terminals. Next, twist together the wires of each signal line firmly.
Approx. 10 mm
248
Section 3-8
B7A Interface Units
2. Use vinyl tape or a heat-shrink tube to cover the end of the VCTF cable
sheath, as shown in the following diagram.
Cover with vinyl tape
or heat-shrinking tube.
2) Preparing Cable Signal Lines
Attach the crimp terminals to the cable's signal lines.
1,2,3...
1. Attaching Crimp Terminals
Insert the end of the cable into the terminal and crimp.
6.5 mm max.
7 mm max.
Note Always use the specified crimp tool to attach the crimp terminals. If
a crimp tool is not used, the cable will not be crimped properly, which
may cause the cable to become detached from the terminal.
2. Insulate the stripped end of each signal line with vinyl tape or heat-shrink
tubing.
Wiring
• Wire the Units so that the I/O indicators are not covered by the wiring.
• Do not place the wiring for I/O Units in the same duct or raceway as power
lines. Inductive noise can cause errors in operation or damage.
• Tighten the terminal screws to the torque of 0.8 N.m.
A
M3.5
Self-rising screw
A
20-pin 18 mm
• Power Supply on One Side (Common Power Supply)
V1
SIG1
G1
• Power Supply on Both Sides (Separate Power Supplies)
SIG1
G1
249
Section 3-8
B7A Interface Units
Wiring Methods
Note
1. Confirm that terminals are connected correctly. If connections are incorrect, the internal components of the B7A Interface Unit and B7A Link Terminal may be damaged.
2. Route the signal lines in separate ducts both inside and outside the control
panel to isolate them from power lines.
3. Connect cables at a distance that is within the range given in the specifications.
4. Always turn OFF the power to the CPU Unit and all other Units before connecting the communications cables.
5. Always lay communications cables within ducts.
Standard Mode
■
Common Power Supply
B7A Interface Unit
SIG
Transmission distance: 100 m max.
B7A Link Terminal
SIG
B7A Link Terminal
Transmission cable: VCTF, 0.75 mm2 min.
12 to 24 VDC
■
Separate Power Supplies
B7A Interface Unit
SIG
12 to 24 VDC
Transmission distance: 500 m max.
B7A Link Terminal
SIG
12 to 24 VDC
B7A Link Terminal
Transmission cable: VCTF, 0.75 mm2 max.
12 to 24 VDC
High-speed Mode
Note If shielded cable is not used, the maximum transmission distance is 10 m
regardless of whether a common or separate power supplies are used. (Use
VCTF cable of 0.75 mm2 or higher.)
250
Section 3-8
B7A Interface Units
■
Common Power Supply
B7A Interface Unit
SIG
Transmission distance: 50 m max.
B7A Link Terminal
Shielded cable: 0.75 mm2 max.
SIG
Ground
B7A Link Terminal
Shielded cable: 0.75 mm2 max.
12 to 24 VDC
■
Ground
Separate Power Supplies
B7A Interface Unit
SIG
12 to 24 VDC
Transmission distance: 100 m max.
B7A Link Terminal
Shielded cable: 0.75 mm2 max.
SIG
Ground
12 to 24 VDC
B7A Link Terminal
Shielded cable: 0.75 mm2 max.
12 to 24 VDC
Ground
Dimensions (Unit: mm)
Backplane
CS
130
35
124
147
251
Section 3-8
B7A Interface Units
3-8-2
C200H Basic B7A Interface Units (C200H Basic I/O Units)
The Basic B7A Interface Unit used with the B7A Link Terminal allows the
transmission and reception of 16-point I/O data over two wires.
The following Basic B7A Interface Unit and B7A Link Terminal models are
available.
B7A Interface Unit
(C200H Basic I/O Unit)
16-point input: C200H-B7AI1
B7A Link Terminals
16-point output: C200H-B7AO1
B7A-T6@1 (Screw terminal models)
B7A-T6D2 (Modular models)
B7A-R6@@1 (Screw terminal models)
B7A-R6A52 (Modular models)
Note If the B7A Interface Unit is mounted to a Rack with a C200HW-PD024 24-V
DC Power Supply Unit, supply 24 V DC from an independent power supply to
the B7A Interface Unit or use a transformer to separate the power supply line
to the B7A Interface Unit from the power supply lines to the CPU Unit and I/O
Power Supply Unit.
I/O indicator
ERR indicator
Connection terminals
Connection terminals for the B7A Link Terminal:
Connect this terminal to the SIG terminal of the
B7A Link Terminal.
Connect this terminal to the negative power terminal of the B7A Link Terminal.
12 to 24 VDC
Supply 12 to 24 VDC.
I/O Indicator
Indicates the ON or OFF status of input from the B7A Link Terminal or the ON
and OFF status of output to the B7A Link Terminal.
ERR Indicator
Incorporated by the B7AI1 and lit when the B7AI1’s data transmission or
reception is abnormal.
Connection Terminals
SIG:
V–:
Connects to the SIG terminal of the B7A Link Terminal.
Connects to the negative power terminal of the B7A Link Terminal.
!Caution If the terminals are not connected correctly, the internal circuitry of the B7A
Link Terminal will be damaged.
Note
252
1. The transmission cable must be a VCTF cable with a thickness of
0.75 mm2 minimum.
2. Do not wire power lines or high-tension lines along with the transmission
cable in the same conduit.
Section 3-8
B7A Interface Units
Input Mode Selector
The B7AI1 incorporates an input mode selector on the back panel of the Unit,
with which the following modes can be set.
Input mode
Function
Switch setting
Bit no. allocation 00 to 14
15
Status of input indicator lamp 15
Status of the ERR indicator
15 points + 1 error
Fifteen-point input from the B7A Link Terminal is effective. Bit 15 is used as transmission error bit.
Upper side
Input 00 to input 14
Transmission error bit
Not used
16 points
Sixteen-point input from the B7A Link Terminal is effective.
Lower side
Input 00 to input 14
Input 15
Lit when input 15 is ON. Not lit when input
15 is OFF.
Lit when there is a transmission error and OFF during normal transmission
The ERR indicator is lit when an error occurs. If the error is corrected, the
ERR indicator is OFF at the next transmission cycle.
When there is a transmission error, the B7A Link Terminal will hold the data
just before the occurrence of the transmission error. If there is a transmission
error because the B7A Link Terminal is turned off, however, data 0 is transmitted in the first transmission cycle when the B7A Link Terminal is turned on
again.
Transmission errors between the C200H-B7AO1 and B7A Link Terminal are
detected by the B7A Link Terminal only. Check the ERR indicator and error bit
for any error.
Performance Specifications
Item
I/O points
Transmission distance
Transmission delay
Minimum input time (See note 1.)
Internal current consumption
External power supply (See note 2.)
Weight
Note
C200H-B7AI1
C200H-B7AO1
16 points or 15 points and 1 error input 16 output points
500 m max. if power is supplied to the Interface Unit and B7A Link Terminal separately.
100 m max. if power is supplied to the Interface Unit and B7A Link Terminal from
a single power supply. (24 V DC±10%)
Typ. 19.2 ms, 31 ms max.
–––
16 ms
5 V DC, 100 mA max.
12 to 24 V DC ±10%, 10 mA min.
12 to 24 V DC ±10%, 30 mA min.
200 g max.
1. The minimum input time refers to the minimum time required for reading
the input signals from the CPU Unit. The ON/OFF width of the signal transmitted from the CPU Unit to the Output Relay of the B7A Interface Unit
should be set to a value larger than the minimum input time.
2. The value of the external power supply does not include the value required
by the B7A Link Terminal.
253
Section 3-8
B7A Interface Units
3-8-3
B7A Interface Units (C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units)
Features and System Configuration
Group-2 B7A Interface Unit
CPU
Unit
Input B7A Link Terminal
Sensor
Switch
Transmission
distance: 500 m
max.
Output B7A Link Terminal
Lamps and other loads
A B7A Interface Unit (C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Unit) used with two or
four B7A Link Terminals allows the transmission and reception of 32-point or
64-point I/O data over two-conductor cables.
A B7A Interface Unit (C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Unit) can be mounted
to a CPU Rack or an Expansion I/O Rack. They cannot be mounted to Slave
Racks.
I/O words are allocated in the same way as for C200H Basic I/O Units, i.e.,
according to the position on the Rack. Units with 32 I/O points are allocated
two words; Units with 64 I/O points are allocated four words.
Refer to the B7A Link Terminals Datasheet for more information on B7A Link
Terminals.
Models
The following B7A Interface Units (C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units) are
available.
B7A Interface Unit
C200H-B7A12
C200H-B7A02
C200H-B7A21
C200H-B7A22
254
Inputs
32 points
None
16 points
32 points
Outputs
None
32 points
16 points
32points
Section 3-8
B7A Interface Units
Comparison between B7A Interface Units Classified as Basic I/O Units and C200H
Group-2 High-density I/O Units
Type
C200H
Basic I/O
Units
C200H
Group 2
High-density I/O
Units
Models
Word allocations
C200H-B7AI1 Same as I/O Units (in order
C200H-B7AO1 mounted).
C200H-B7A12
C200H-B7A02
C200H-B7A21
C200H-B7A22
Same as I/O Units (in order
mounted).
Note
Connectable B7A Link Terminals
Transmission Transmission
Points
delay
errors
Standard types Input status
16-point Termionly (19.2 ms) held automati- nals only (10cally
point, 32-point,
Switch setting and mixed I/O TerStandard
(19.2 ms) and to hold or reset minals cannot be
connected.
Input status.
high-speed
(3 ms) types
(set via switch)
1. With CS-series PLCs, I/O is allocated to B7A Interface Units (C200H
Group-2 High-density I/O Units) just like other Basic I/O Units (allocating
outputs first and then inputs for I/O Units). The unit number setting on the
front panel of the B7A Interface Unit does not affect I/O allocations.
Name
32-point Input Unit
32-point Output Unit
16-point Input/
16-point Output Unit
32-point Input/32point Output Unit
Model
Words per Unit
C200H-B7A12 2
C200H-B7A02
C200H-B7A21
C200H-B7A22 4
Order of allocation
2 input words
2 output words
1 output word then 1
input word
2 output words then 2
input words
2. B7A Link Terminals with 10 points or those with 8 input and 8 output points
cannot be connected to the B7A Interface Units. B7A Link Terminals with
16 points, two circuits of 16 points each (32 points total) or 16 points of
mixed I/O can be connected.
Connectable B7A Link Terminals
Only 16-point B7A Link Terminals can be connected to a B7A Interface Unit.
These are listed in the following tables.
Input Terminals
Type
Screw terminals
Modular
PLC connectors
Model
B7A-T6@1
B7AS-T6@1
B7A-T6@6
B7AS-T6@6
B7A-T6D2
B7A-T6D7
B7A-T@E3
B7A-T@E8
Transmission delay
Standard (19.2 ms)
High-speed (3 ms)
Standard (19.2 ms)
High-speed (3 ms)
Standard (19.2 ms)
High-speed (3 ms)
Output Terminals
Type
Screw terminals
Modular
Model
B7A-R6@@1
B7AS-R6@@1
B7A-R6@@6
B7AS-R6@@6
B7A-R6A52
B7A-R6A57
Transmission delay
Standard (19.2 ms)
High-speed (3 ms)
Standard (19.2 ms)
High-speed (3 ms)
255
Section 3-8
B7A Interface Units
Type
PLC connectors
Note
Model
B7A-R@A@3
B7A-R@A@8
Transmission delay
Standard (19.2 ms)
High-speed (3 ms)
1. Do not connect Terminals with different transmission delays to the same
Interface Unit. Doing so will cause a transmission error.
2. Only 16-point or 32-point B7A Link Terminals can be connected to B7A Interface Units. Mixed I/O B7A Link Terminals and 10-point B7A Link Terminals cannot be connected.
Parts and Names (C200H-B7A22 shown below)
Front
I/O number switch
Not used for CS PLCs.
Status indicators
The indicators depend on the model of B7A Interface Unit.
Connection terminals
Connect to the SIG terminal of the B7A Link Terminal
and to the negative power terminal of the B7A Link
Terminal. The actual use of these terminals depends
on the B7A Interface Unit.
External Power Supply Terminals
Supply 12 to 24 VDC.
12
VDC
12toto2424
VDC
Back
DIP switch
Used to set the transmission delay,
transmission error processing mode, input mode, and ERROR indicator operation.
256
Section 3-8
B7A Interface Units
Indicator Operation
The indicators depend on the model of B7A Interface Unit, as shown below.
Name
Input transmission error
Color
Red
Transmission
delay setting
Orange
LOAD OFF
Transmission
error process
Orange
15IN+ERR
Input mode
setting
Orange
ERROR 1
ERROR 2
ERROR
3ms
Function
Lights when an error occurs in transmissions from an Input B7A Link Terminal.
For the B7A12/22, ERROR 1 is for the first word allocated to the B7A Interface
Unit; ERROR 2 is for the second word.
Lit when the transmission delay is set to the high-speed setting (3 ms).
Not lit when the transmission delay is set to the standard setting (19.2 ms).
Lit when the processing for transmission errors is set to reset input status.
Not lit when the processing for transmission errors is set to hold input status.
Lit when the input mode is set to use 15 inputs and 1 error input.
Not lit when the input mode is set to use 16 inputs.
Note With CS-series PLCs, I/O is allocated to Group-2 B7A Interface Units just like
other Basic I/O Units. The unit number setting on the front panel of the Group2 B7A Interface Unit is not used and does not affect I/O allocations.
DIP Switch Settings
Set the DIP switch as described before for the various models of B7A Interface Units.
C200H-B7A22/12
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
Function
Transmission delay
Transmission error process
Input mode
ERROR 1 indicator enable
ERROR 2 indicator enable
Not used.
OFF
Standard (19.2 ms)
Hold status
16 inputs
Disabled
Disabled
NA
ON
High-speed (3 ms)
Reset Inputs
15 inputs + error input
Enabled
Enabled
NA
Factory settings: Pins 4 and 5 ON, others OFF.
C200H-B7A21
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
Function
Transmission delay
Transmission error process
Input mode
ERROR indicator enable
Not used.
Not used.
OFF
Standard (19.2 ms)
Hold status
16 inputs
Disabled
NA
NA
ON
High-speed (3 ms)
Reset Inputs
15 inputs + error input
Enabled
NA
NA
Factory settings: Pin 5 ON, others OFF.
257
Section 3-8
B7A Interface Units
C200H-B7A02
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
Function
Transmission delay
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
OFF
Standard (19.2 ms)
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
ON
High-speed (3 ms)
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
Factory settings: All pins OFF.
Transmission Delay
Pin 1 is used to set the transmission delay. The same delay is used for all
words allocated to the Unit.
Set the transmission delay to match that of the B7A Link Terminal. A transmission error will occur if the same transmission delay is not set.
The “3ms” indicator will be lit whenever the high-speed (3 ms) transmission
delay is set.
Transmission Error
Process
Pin 2 is used to turned ON to specify resetting input status when transmission
errors occur. If pin 2 is turned OFF, input status will be held when transmission
errors occur.
The LOAD OFF indicator will be lit whenever pin 2 is turned ON.
Input Mode
Pin 3 is turned ON to specify use of only 15 inputs and the use of bit 15 as a
Transmission Error Flag. If pin 3 is OFF, 16 normal inputs can be used.
The “15IN+ERR” indicator will be lit whenever pin 3 is turned ON.
ERROR Indicators
Pin 4 or pins 4 and 5 are turned ON to enable the ERROR, ERROR 1, and/or
ERROR 2 indicators. These indicators will not light even if a transmission
error occurs if the corresponding pin is turned OFF.
Transmission Error Precautions
Startup
The Transmission Error Flag for the B7A Interface Unit will be OFF when
power is turned on to the CS-series PLCs. If normal transmissions with the
B7A Link Terminal are not possible within about 10 ms, the Transmission Error
Flag (bit 15) will turn ON (i.e., if its operation is enabled by the input mode setting).
All input bits will remain OFF until normal transmissions are achieved.
Inputs
When a transmission error occurs, input status will be either held or all inputs
will be reset according to the setting for the transmission error process, and
the Transmission Error Flag (bit 15) will turn ON (i.e., if its operation is enabled
by the input mode setting). The Transmission Error Flag will go OFF and the
input status will return to normal when normal transmissions are achieved
again.
Outputs
Transmission errors for Output B7A Link Terminals are not detected at the
B7A Interface Unit and must be confirmed using the error indicators or error
outputs on the Link Terminal.
Wiring
Terminal Names and
Allocations
258
The use of the terminals depends on the model of the B7A Interface Unit. “m”
indicates the first word allocated to the Unit.
Section 3-8
B7A Interface Units
C200H-B7A22
Terminal
Name
B0
SIG OUT1
B1
– OUT1
B2
B3
SIG OUT2
– OUT2
B4
B5
SIG IN1
– IN1
B6
B7
SIG IN2
– IN2
B8
A0 to A7
B9
A8
NC
Function
Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Output B7A Link
Terminal.
Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Output B7A Link
Terminal.
Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
Not used.
+V
–V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Connect to – terminal on external power supply.
Word
m
m+1
m+2
m+3
---
C200H-B7A21
Terminal
Name
B0
SIG OUT1
B1
– OUT1
B2, B3
B4
B5
NC
SIG IN1
– IN1
B6 to B8
A0 to A7
B9
A8
NC
Function
Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Output B7A Link
Terminal.
Not used.
Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
Not used.
+V
–V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Connect to – terminal on external power supply.
Word
m
--m+1
----
C200H-B7A12
Terminal
Name
B0
SIG IN1
B1
– IN1
B2, B3
B4
B5
NC
SIG IN2
– IN2
B6 to B8
A0 to A7
B9
A8
NC
Function
Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
Not used.
Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal.
Not used.
+V
–V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Connect to – terminal on external power supply.
Word
m
--m+1
---
259
Section 3-8
B7A Interface Units
C200H-B7A02
Terminal
Name
B0
SIG OUT1
B1
– OUT1
B2, B3
B4
B5
NC
SIG OUT2
– OUT2
B6 to B8
A0 to A7
B9
A8
NC
Function
Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Output B7A Link
Terminal.
Not used.
Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal.
Connect to – power supply terminal on Output B7A Link
Terminal.
Not used.
+V
–V
Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
Connect to – terminal on external power supply.
Recommended Cables
and Transmission
Distance
Word
m
--m+1
---
The following cables are recommended to connect the B7A Interface Unit to
B7A Link Terminals. The wiring method and transmission distance depend on
the transmission delay and on whether or not a common power supply is
being used for the B7A Link Terminal and the Interface Unit.
Standard Transmission
Delays (19.2 ms): Cap-tire
Cable
High-speed Transmission
Delays (3 ms): Shielded
Cable
Power supply
Common
VCTF, 0.75 mm x 3 conductors
Transmission distance
100 m max.
Separate
VCTF,0.75 mm2 x 2 conductors
500 m max.
Power supply
Common
Separate
Cable
2
Cable
2
Shielded cable, 0.75 mm x 3 conductors
Shielded cable, 0.75 mm2 x 2 conductors
Transmission distance
50 m max.
100 m max.
Terminal Construction
Use hook-type crimp connectors with a line thickness of 0.25 to 1.65 mm2.
The construction of the terminals is shown in the illustration.
Wiring Method
Standard Transmission Delays (19.2 ms)
Common Power Supply
B7A Link Terminal
B7A Interface Unit
Transmission distance: 100 m max.
B7A Link Terminal
Transmission cable: VCTF 0.75 mm2 or higher
12 to 24 V DC
260
Section 3-8
B7A Interface Units
Separate Power Supplies
B7A Link Terminal
B7A Interface Unit
12 to 24 V DC
Transmission distance: 500 m max.
B7A Link Terminal
12 to 24 V DC
Transmission cable: VCTF 0.75 mm2 or higher
12 to 24 V DC
High-speed Transmission Delays (3 ms): Shielded Cable
B7A Link Terminal
Common Power Supply
B7A Interface Unit
Transmission distance: 50 m max.
B7A Link Terminal
Shielded cable: 0.75
mm2
or higher
GND
Shielded cable: 0.75 mm2 or higher
24 V DC+10%
GND
Separate Power Supplies
B7A Link Terminal
B7A Interface Unit
12 to 24 V DC
Transmission distance: 100 m max.
Shielded cable: 0.75 mm2 or higher
B7A Link Terminal
GND
12 to 24 V DC
12 to 24 V DC
Note
Shielded cable: 0.75 mm2 or higher
GND
1. We recommend grounding the shielded cable.
2. If shielded cable is not used, the maximum transmission distance is 10 m
regardless of whether a common or separate power supplies are used.
(Use 0.75 mm2 or higher VCTF cable.)
261
Section 3-8
B7A Interface Units
3. To prevent noise on the transmission cable, do not lay it near power cables
or high-voltage lines.
Specifications
Item
I/O points
C200H-B7A12
32 input points or
30 input points and 2
error inputs
Transmission
method
Transmission
distance (see
note 1)
Transmission
delay
One-way distributed multiplex transmission
Minimum input
time (see note
2, 3)
Internal current
consumption
External power
supply (see note
4)
Weight
Dimensions
C200H-B7A02
32 output points
C200H-B7A21
16 output points and
16 input points or
15 input points + 1 error
input
C200H-B7A22
32 output points and
32 input points or
30 input points + 2 error
inputs
0.05 A min.
0.08 A min.
Standard: 500 m max.
High-speed: 100 m max.
Standard: Typ. 19.2 ms, 31 ms max.
High-speed: Typ. 3 ms, 5 ms max.
Standard: 16 ms
High-speed: 2.4 ms
5 V DC, 100 mA max.
12 to 24 V DC ±10%
0.05 A min.
0.06 A min.
300 g max.
35 x 130 x 128 mm (W x H x D)
Note
1. The transmission distance also depends on whether a common or separate power supplies are used.
2. The minimum input time refers to the minimum time required for reading
the input signals from the CPU Unit.
3. The ON/OFF width of the signal transmitted from the CPU Unit to the Output Relay of the B7A Interface Unit should be set to a value larger than the
minimum input time.
4. The capacity of the external power supply does not include the capacity required by the B7A Link Terminal.
Dimensions
130
x
x
x
x
x
x
Backplane
x
x
128
35
262
145
Section 3-9
Analog Timer Units
3-9
Analog Timer Units
Analog Timer Units are classified as Basic I/O Units.
Analog Timer Units have 4 built-in timers (numbers 0 to 3). The timer settings
can be adjusted using the internal and external variable resistors without
requiring a Programming Device. The timer can also be used as a accumulative register to temporarily pause the timer operation using a timer pause
input.
Models
Name
Analog Timer Unit
Specifications
Model
4-point timer
C200H-TM001
Timer settings: 0.1 to 1.0 s, 1.0 to 10 s, 10
to 60 s, 1 to 10 min.
The Analog Timer Unit is classified as a Basic I/O Unit and is allocated one
word in the I/O Area. The word (16 bits) allocated to the Unit is used for the 4
timers’ start input, pause input, time-up output, and data transfer with the CPU
Unit.
Allocated words
1 word (16 bits)
Bits
4 (bits 0 to 3)
Details
Set Bit
4 (bits 4 to 7)
Pause Inputs
4 (bits 8 to 11)
Time-up Outputs
Direction
CPU Unit to Analog Timer Unit
CPU Unit to Analog Timer Unit
Analog Timer Unit
to CPU Unit
The timer settings are adjusted using the internal and external variable resistors. The timer settings can be selected using the DIP switch for each timer
number from one of the following four settings.
0.1 to 1 s, 1 to 10 s, 10 to 60 s, 1 to 10 min
263
Section 3-9
Analog Timer Units
Timer set input
Analog Timer Unit
Timer up output
Setting value
Timer pause input
Resistance
value
Setting value
Resistance
value
Setting value
Resistance
value
Setting value
Resistance
value
Components and Switch Settings
Timer status indicators
The SET indicators in the top row light when the corresponding
timer is operating and the TIME UP indicators in the bottom row
light when the corresponding time is up.
TM001
SET
TIME UP
0 1 2 3
1
2
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0
NO
1 2 3 4
Internal variable resistor
• Sets variable resistance of specified
timer setting.
• The settings of these resistors are
only effective when the selector
switch on the Unit is ON (set to the
right).
• Numbers 0 to 3 correspond to timers
T0 to T3, respectively.
• Set or adjust times using the flatblade screwdriver supplied with the
Unit. turning the variable resistor
clockwise to increase the time value.
NO
Min.
(0: OFF, 1: ON)
Timer
Pin
8
T0
7
6
T1
5
4
T2
3
2
T3
1
0.1 to 1 s
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1 to 10 s
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
10 to 60 s 1 to 10 m
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
2
Max.
3
INT/EXT selector switch
ON
Internal variable resistor
OFF External variable resistor
T0
SW4
Time range setting
Each timer uses 2 pins. The upper 8 pins 8 to 1 are used for
timers T0 to T3 as follows:
T1
SW3
Note
T2
SW2
T3
SW1
External variable resistor connectors
• Cable connector for when timer is set with external volume
instead of internal volume.
• Turn OFF (set to left) the Internal/external volume selector
switch.
• Numbers 0 to 3 correspond to timers T0 to T3.
• The external volume resistance is 20 kΩ.
• Use the following connectors. The C4K-CN223 (2 m) connector
with cable can also be used.
Name
Model
Connector
IL-2S-S3L-(N)
Contact
IL-C2-1-10000
Manufacturer
Japan Aviation
Electronics
Industry, Ltd.
1. When the internal variable resistor is used, make sure that the external
variable resistor connector for the same timer number is open. Otherwise
the internal variable resistor settings will not function properly.
2. Use AWG 28 to AWG 22 lead wires for the external variable resistor connectors.
3. Soldering is not required to wire the external variable resistor connectors.
Wire the connector as shown in the following diagram.
264
Section 3-9
Analog Timer Units
Analog Timer Unit connector
External variable resistor: 20 kΩ
Diameter: 16
Shaft length: 15 mm
Check manufacturer's specifications
Analog Timer Unit Specifications
Item
Oscillation
method
Number of timer
points
Time setting
range
Specifications
CR oscillation
4
Use the DIP switch to set any of the following four ranges.
0.1 to 1 s (typical)
1 to 10 s (typical)
10 to 60 s (typical)
1 to 10 min (typical)
The timing operation can be paused by the user program, so the timers can be used as cumulative registers.
SET and TIME UP
Timer pause
function
Operation
indicators
External
Either the external variable resistor or the internal variable resistor can be selected using the INT/EXT
variable resistor selector switch on the front panel of the Unit. External variable resistors are connected by wiring the
connector. Use 20 kΩ variable resistors
Relay number
One word (16 bits) is allocated in the I/O Area.
allocations
Bit I/O
Word n
Internal current
consumption
Weight
00
01
02
03
Output
Output
Output
Output
T0 Set Bit
T1 Set Bit
T2 Set Bit
T3 Set Bit
04
05
06
07
Output
Output
Output
Output
T0 Pause Input Bit
T1 Pause Input Bit
T2 Pause Input Bit
T3 Pause Input Bit
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Input
Input
Input
Input
---------
T0 Completion Flag
T1 Completion Flag
T2 Completion Flag
T3 Completion Flag
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
"1" when time is running
0: Operates
1: Stops
"1" when time is up
60 mA 5 V DC max.
200 g max.
265
Section 3-9
Analog Timer Units
Timer Operation
• When the Timer Start Input turns ON, the Timer Set Bits allocated to the
Analog Timer Unit (word n bits 00 to 03) turn ON, and the Analog Timer
will operate. The timer set indicator (SET) on the Analog Timer Unit will
light.
• After the time specified by the internal variable resistor or external variable resistor has elapsed, the Unit’s Completion Output (word n bits 08 to
11) will turn ON, and the Time Up Output will turn ON. The TIME UP indicator on the Analog Timer Unit will turn light.
Timer Start Input
Timer Set Bit
Word n bit 00 to 03
Word n bit 08 to 11
Time Up Output
Completion Flag
Timer Start Input
Time Up Output
Timer setting time
Dimensions
266
SECTION 4
Operating Procedures
This section outlines the steps required to assemble and operate a CS-series PLC system.
4-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
268
4-2
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
270
267
Section 4-1
Introduction
4-1
Introduction
The following procedure outlines the recommended steps to follow when preparing CS-series PLCs for operation.
1,2,3...
1. Install the provided battery in the CPU Unit (CS1 CPU Units only).
2. Installation
Set the DIP switches on the front of each Unit as required.
Mount the CPU Unit, Power Supply Unit, and other Units to the Backplane.
Install the Inner Board and Memory Card if required.
See 5-2 Installation for details.
3. Wiring
Connect the power supply wiring, I/O wiring, and Programming Device
(CX-Programmer or Programming Console). Connect communications
wiring as required.
See 5-3 Wiring for details on power supply and I/O wiring.
4. Initial Settings (Hardware)
Set the DIP switches an Rotary switches on the front of the CPU Unit and
other Units.
See 6-1 DIP Switch Settings for details.
5. Confirming Programming Device Connection
a) Connect a Programming Device (i.e., the CX-Programmer or a Programming Console).
b) Check the power supply wiring and voltage, turn ON the power supply,
and check to be sure the Programming Device will connect to the CPU
Unit.
See 3-3 Programming Devices for details.
6. Clearing Memory
This step is necessary only for CS1 CPU Units. It can be skipped for CS1H CPU Units.
Using the CX-Programmer:
a) Connect the system online. Online connection can also be made by
selecting “Work Online” from the PLC menu.
b) Double-click Error Log and select the Error Log tab.
c) Click “Clear All” and then click Yes.
Using a Programming Console:
d) When only cyclic task 0 is being used, specify no interrupt tasks when
clearing memory.
e) When cyclic task 0 and one or more interrupt tasks are being used,
specify interrupt tasks when clearing memory.
7. Registering the I/O Table
Check the Units to verify that they are installed in the right slots. With the
PLC in PROGRAM mode, register the I/O table from the Programming Device (CX-Programmer or Programming Console). (Another method is to
create the I/O table in CX-Programmer and transfer it to the CPU Unit.)
See 8-1 I/O Allocations for details.
268
Section 4-1
Introduction
8. PLC Setup Settings
With the PLC in PROGRAM mode, change the settings in the PLC Setup
as necessary from the Programming Device (CX-Programmer or Programming Console). (Another method is to change the PLC Setup in CX-Programmer and transfer it to the CPU Unit.)
See 7-1 PLC Setup for details.
9. DM Area Settings
a) Use a Programming Device (CX-Programmer or Programming Console) to make any necessary settings in the parts of the DM Area that
are allocated to Special I/O Units, CS-series CPU Bus Units, and Inner
Boards.
b) Reset the power (ON → OFF → ON) or toggle the Restart Bit for each
Unit or Board. See the Unit’s or Board’s Operation Manual for details.
10. Writing the Program
Write the program with a Programming Device (CX-Programmer or Programming Console.)
11. Transferring the Program (CX-Programmer Only)
With the PLC in PROGRAM mode, transfer the program from CX-Programmer to the CPU Unit. See 7-1 Program Transfer in the CS/CJ Series
Programmable Controllers Programming Manual (W394) for details.
12. Testing Operation
a) Checking I/O Wiring
Output wiring
Input wiring
With the PLC in PROGRAM mode, force-set output bits
and check the status of the corresponding outputs.
Activate sensors and switches and either check the status
of the indicators on the Input Unit or check the status of the
corresponding input bits with the Programming Device’s
Bit/Word Monitor operation.
b) Auxiliary Area Settings (As Required)
Check operation of special Auxiliary Area Settings such as the following:
Output OFF
Bit
Hot Start Settings
When necessary, turn ON the Output OFF Bit (A50015)
from the program and test operation with the outputs
forced OFF.
When you want to start operation (switch to RUN mode)
without changing the contents of I/O memory, turn ON the
IOM Hold Bit (A50012).
c) Trial Operation
Test PLC operation by switching the PLC to MONITOR mode.
d) Monitoring and Debugging
Monitor operation from the Programming Device. Use functions such
as force-setting/force-resetting bits, tracing, and online editing to debug the program.
See SECTION 7 Program Transfer, Trial Operation, and Debugging in
the CS/CJ Series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual
(W394) for details.
13. Saving and Printing the Program
14. Running the Program
Switch the PLC to RUN mode to run the program.
269
Section 4-2
Examples
4-2
Examples
1. Installation
Mount the Backplane and install each Unit. When necessary, install the Inner
Board or Memory Card.
Make sure that the total power consumption of the Units is less than the maximum capacity of the Power Supply Unit.
2. Wiring
Connect the power supply and I/O wiring.
Note When 220-V AC power (200 to 240 V AC) is being supplied, be sure to
remove the jumper bar that shorts the voltage selector terminals. The Power
Supply Unit will be damaged if 220 V AC is supplied with the jumper bar connected.
3. Initial Settings (Hardware)
Make necessary hardware settings such as the DIP switch settings on the
CPU Unit. Be sure that the communications settings for the peripheral port
and RS-232C port are correct, especially when connecting a Programming
Device (CX-Programmer or Programming Console).
In the following example, a Programming Console is connected to the peripheral port so pin 4 is turned OFF. CX-Programmer is connected to the RS232C port, so pin 5 is turned ON.
270
Section 4-2
Examples
Note When devices other than a Programming Device are connected to the peripheral port and RS-232C port, turn ON pin 4 and turn OFF pin 5.
Programming Console
Programming Device
4. Verifying the Programming Device Connection
Connecting to the CX-Programmer
1,2,3...
1. Connect the CX-Programmer's connecting cable to the peripheral port or
RS-232C port.
Note When connecting to the RS-232C port, pin 5 of the CPU Unit's DIP
switch must be ON.
CX-Programmer
Support Software
2. When connecting to the RS-232C port, pin 5 of the CPU Unit's DIP switch
must be ON.After checking the power supply wiring and voltage, turn ON
the power and verify the Power Supply Unit's POWER Indicator is lit.
3. Start the CX-Programmer and automatically connect online to the PLC.
271
Section 4-2
Examples
4. When connecting online automatically, the CPU Unit is connected in RUN
mode.Verify that the CX-Programmer has connected online with the PLC.
5. Change the operating mode from RUN mode to PROGRAM mode.
Connecting to the Programming Console
1. Connect the Programming Console to the CPU Unit's peripheral port (the
upper port).
Programming
Console
2. Verify that the Programming Console's mode is PROGRAM mode.
3. After checking the power supply wiring and voltage, turn ON the power and
verify the Power Supply Unit's POWER Indicator is lit.
4. Verify that the Programming Console has the following display.
<PRG> 3:JPN~ENG
PASSWORD!
5. Input the password (the Clear and Monitor Keys) and verify that the Programming Console has the following display.
CLR
MON
<PRG>
BZ
3:JPN~ENG
Note If the PLC Setup's Startup Mode Setting is set to PRCN (Startup Mode determined by the Programming Console's mode switch, the default setting), but a
Programming Console isn't connected when the power is turned ON, the CPU
Unit will enter RUN Mode and start operating.
272
Section 4-2
Examples
5. Clearing Memory
This step is necessary only for CS1 CPU Units. It can be skipped for CS1-H
CPU Units.
Clearing Memory with a Programming Console
Only one cyclic task can be created when programming with a Programming
Console, although it is possible to create two or more interrupt tasks with
interrupt task numbers ranging from 1 to 3 or 100 to 131.
Note Data areas won’t be cleared if they are removed from the display. If no data
areas are removed, the entire I/O memory area and PLC Setup will be
cleared.
Connect to the PLC (online) and perform the memory clear operation.
1,2,3...
1. Clear memory.
CLR
SET
NOT
RESET
000000 CT**
000000MEMORY CLR
CHWA TCDE
P
MON
000000CLR MEM?
0:ALL 1:TASK
0
000000CLR MEM?
INT 0:NO 1:YES
2. Indicate whether interrupt tasks will be created.
• If no interrupt tasks are being created, press the 0 and MON Keys.
0
MON
000000CLR'G MEM
INT 0:NO
000000CLR MEM
END 0:NO
Programming Console
• If one or more interrupt tasks are being created, press the 1 and MON
Keys.
1
MON
000000CLR'G MEM
INT
1:YES
000000CLR MEM
END
1:YES
273
Section 4-2
Examples
Clearing Memory with CX-Programmer
Multiple cyclic tasks and interrupt tasks can be created when CX-Programmer
is used. Connect the computer and PLC, switch to online mode, and perform
the all clear operation from the PLC Errors Window.
6. Registering the I/O Table
Registering the I/O table allocates I/O memory to the Units actually installed in
the PLC. This operation is required in CS-series PLCs.
Note The user program and parameter area data in CS1-H CPU Units is backed up
in the built-in flash memory. The BKUP indicator will light on the front of the
CPU Unit when the backup operation is in progress. Do not turn OFF the
power supply to the CPU Unit when the BKUP indicator is lit. The data will not
be backed up if power is turned OFF.
■
Using the CX-Programmer Online
Mounting All Units and Then Creating I/O Tables
Use the following procedure to register the I/O table with the CX-Programmer
that is connected to the PLC.
Install the Units.
1,2,3...
1. Install all of the Units in the PLC.
2. Connect CX-Programmer Connecting Cable to the peripheral port or RS232C port. (The power must be OFF.)
Note If the host computer is being connected to the RS-232C port, pin 5
of the CPU Unit’s DIP switch must be set to ON.
3. Start the CX-Programmer and connect online to the PLC.
4. Double-click I/O Table on the project tree in the main window. The I/O Table Window will be displayed.
274
Section 4-2
Examples
5. Select Options and then Create. The models and positions of Units
mounted to the Racks will be written to the Registered I/O Table in the CPU
Unit.
Using the CX-Programmer Offline
Use the following procedure to create the I/O table offline with the CX-Programmer and later transfer the I/O table from to the CPU Unit.
Write the
I/O table.
1,2,3...
Transfer the
I/O table.
1. Double-click I/O Table on the project tree in the main window. The I/O Table Window will be displayed.
2. Double-click the Rack to be edited. The slots for that Rack will be displayed.
3. Right-click the slots to be edited and select the desired Units from the pulldown menu.
275
Section 4-2
Examples
4. Select Options and then Transfer to PLC to transfer the I/O table to the
CPU Unit.
Note The first word allocated to each Rack can be set by selecting Rack/Slot Start
Addresses from the Option Menu of the PLC IO Table Window of the CX-Programmer.
■
Using a Programming Console
Mounting All Units and Then Creating I/O Tables
Programming Console
Install the Units.
1,2,3...
1. Install all of the Units in the PLC.
2. Connect the Programming Console to the peripheral port.
(It can be connected with the power on.)
3. Perform the following Programming Console operation.
CLR
FUN
SHIFT
000000 CT00
CH
*DM
CHG
276
000000 I/O TBL ?
000000 I/O TBL
WRIT
????
Section 4-2
Examples
000000 I/O TBL
WRIT
????
Password (9713)
WRITE
Specify holding or clearing
CPU Bus Unit information.
000000CPU BU ST?
0:CLR 1:KEEP
000000 I/O TBL
WRIT OK
000000 CT00
CLR
Note With the CS1-H CPU Units, detailed I/O table error information is stored in
A261 whenever the I/O tables cannot be created for any reason. This information can be used to facilitate troubleshooting if an error occurs.
7. PLC Setup Settings
These settings are the CPU Unit’s software configuration. See 7-1 PLC Setup
for details on the settings.
Note When a Programming Console is used to set the PLC Setup, the PLC Setup
settings are arranged by word addresses. Refer to the provided Programming
Console settings sheet for details.
Making the Settings with the CX-Programmer
1. Double-click the Settings Icon in the main window's project directory tree.
The PLC Settings Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Make the required settings.
3. After completing the settings, transfer the PLC Setup to the PLC.
277
Section 4-2
Examples
Making the Settings with the Programming Console
When a Programming Console is used to set the PLC Setup, the PLC Setup
settings are arranged by word addresses. Refer to the provided Programming
Console settings sheet for details.
Setting with a Programming Console
In this example, the Programming Console is used to set the Watch Cycle
Time (maximum cycle time) in 10-ms units.
The following diagram shows the required Programming Console operations.
Address
Bits
209
15
Setting
Enable for Watch Cycle Time
setting
0 to 14
Watch Cycle Time setting
CLR
FUN
VRFY
1
Setting range
0: Use default
1: Use setting in
bits 0 to 14.
0001 to 0FA0
000000 CT00
PC SETUP
0:MODE1:PC SETUP
PC SETUP
+000 0000
Specifying a word address in the PLC Setup.
(Example: 209)
9
0
2
↓
or
↑
CHG
PC SETUP
+209
PC SETUP
+209
0000
PC SETUP?
+209
0000 0000
Example: Input 8064.
8
0
6
4
WRITE
PC SETUP
+209
8064
8. DM Area Settings
The following table shows the parts of the DM Area are allocated to Special
I/O Units, CS-series CPU Bus Units, and Inner Boards for initial settings. The
actual settings depend on the model of Unit or Inner Board being used.
Unit/Board
Special I/O Units
278
Allocated words
D20000 to D29599 (100 words × 96 Units)
Section 4-2
Examples
Unit/Board
CPU Bus Units
Inner Board
Allocated words
D30000 to D31599 (100 words × 16 Units)
D32000 to D32099 (100 words × 1 Board)
After writing the initial settings to the DM Area, be sure to restart the Units by
turning the PLC off and then on again or toggling the Restart Bits for the
affected Units.
Special I/O Unit or
CS1 CPU Bus Unit
Restart
9. Writing the Program
Write the program with the CX-Programmer or a Programming Console.
Unlike earlier OMRON PLCs, the CS-series PLC’s program can be divided
into independently executable tasks. A single cyclic task can be written for
program execution like earlier PLCs or several cyclic tasks can be written for a
more flexible and efficient program. The following table shows the differences
when programming with CX-Programmer or a Programming Console.
Programming
Device
Relationship between Tasks
and Program
Writing a new program
Cyclic tasks
Interrupt tasks
Editing an existing program
Cyclic tasks
Interrupt
tasks
All can be
All can be
edited.
edited.
CX-Programmer
Specify the type of task and
All can be writtask number for each program. ten.
(Cyclic tasks 0
to 31)
All can be written.
(Interrupt tasks 0
to 255)
Programming Console
Task = program
(Cyclic task 0 is the main program)
Several can be
All can be
written.
edited.
(Interrupt tasks 1
to 3, 100 to 131)
Only one can
be written.
(Cyclic task 0)
All can be
edited.
Note When writing the program with a Programming Console, specify whether
there are interrupt tasks during the memory clear operation.
10. Transferring the Program
When the program has been created in a Programming Device other than a
Programming Console, it must be transferred to the PLC’s CPU Unit.
11. Testing Operation
11-a) I/O Wiring Checks
Before performing a Trial Operation in MONITOR mode, check the I/O wiring.
Check Output Wiring
With the PLC in PROGRAM mode, force-set and force-reset output bits and
verify that the corresponding outputs operate properly.
279
Section 4-2
Examples
Force-reset
Check Input Wiring
Activate input devices such as sensors and switches and verify that the corresponding indicators on the Input Units light. Also, use the Bit/Word Monitor
operation in the Programming Device to verify the operation of the corresponding input bits.
Input Unit
11-b) Auxiliary Area Settings
Make any required Auxiliary Area settings, such as the ones shown below.
These settings can be made from a Programming Device (including a Programming Console) or instructions in the program.
IOM Hold Bit (A50012)
Turning ON the IOM Hold Bit protects the contents of I/O memory (the CIO
Area, Work Area, Timer Completion Flags and PVs, Index Registers, and
Data Registers) that would otherwise be cleared when the operating mode is
switched from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
Retained
I/O
memory
Operating mode changed
IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup
When the IOM Hold Bit has been turned ON and the PLC Setup is set to protect the status of the IOM Hold Bit at startup (PLC Setup address 80 bit 15
turned ON), the contents of I/O memory that would otherwise be cleared will
be retained when the PLC is turned ON.
Retained
I/O
memory
PLC turned ON.
280
Section 4-2
Examples
Output OFF Bit (A50015)
Output Unit
Output Unit
Turning ON the Output OFF Bit causes all outputs on Basic I/O Units and
Special I/O Units to be turned OFF. The outputs will be turned OFF regardless
of the PLC’s operating mode.
11-c) Trial Operation
Use the Programming Console or Programming Device (CX-Programmer) to
switch the CPU Unit to MONITOR mode.
Using CX-Programmer
The PLC can be put into MONITOR mode with a host computer running CXProgrammer.
Trial Operation
Select PLC, Mode, RUN.
Actual operation
CX-Programmer
Select PLC, Mode, RUN.
Using a Programming Console
Turn the Mode Switch to MONITOR for the Trial Operation. (Turn the switch to
RUN for full-scale PLC operation.)
Trial Operation
Programming
Console
Actual operation
11-d) Monitoring and Debugging
There are several ways to monitor and debug PLC operation, including the
force-set and force-reset operations, differentiation monitoring, time chart
monitoring, data tracing, and online editing.
Force-Set and Force-Reset
When necessary, the force-set and force-reset operations can be used to
force the status of bits and check program execution.
281
Section 4-2
Examples
When a Programming Console is being used, monitor the bits with Bit/Word
Monitor or 3-word Monitor. Press the SHIFT+SET Keys to force-set a bit or
press the SHIFT+RESET Keys to force-reset a bit. The forced status can be
cleared by pressing the NOT Key.
CX-Programmer
1. Click the bit to be force-set or force-reset.
2. Select Force On or Off from the PLC
menu.
Programming Console
Force-set:
SHIFT
SET
Force-reset:
SHIFT
SET
Bit/Word Monitor display
3-word Monitor display
Clear:
NOT
Differentiation Monitor
The differentiation monitor operation can be used to monitor the up or down
differentiation of particular bits.
When a Programming Console is being used, monitor the bit with Bit/Word
Monitor. Press the SHIFT+Up Arrow Keys to specify up differentiation or press
the SHIFT+Down Arrow Keys to specify down differentiation.
CX-Programmer
1. Click the bit for differential monitoring.
2. Click Differential Monitor from the PLC
Menu. The Differential Monitor Dialog Box
will be displayed.
3. Click Rising or Falling.
4. Click the Start Button. The buzzer will
sound when the specified change is
detected and the count will be incremented.
5. Click the Stop Button. Differential monitoring will stop.
Programming Console
Detect up-differentiation:
SHIFT
Detect down-differentiation:
SHIFT
Bit/Word Monitor display
Time Chart Monitoring
The CX-Programmer’s time chart monitor operation can be used to check and
debug program execution.
Data Tracing
The CX-Programmer’s data trace operation can be used to check and debug
program execution.
Online Editing
When a few lines of the program in the CPU Unit have to be modified, they
can be edited online with the PLC in MONITOR mode or PROGRAM mode.
When more extensive modifications are needed, upload the program from the
CPU Unit to the host computer, make the necessary changes, and transfer
the edited program back to the CPU Unit.
282
Section 4-2
Examples
12. Save and Print the Program
Save
To save a created program, select File - Save or File - Save As from the CXProgrammer menus.
Print
To print a created program, first preview the print output by selecting the
desired section in the CX-Programmer's project workspace and selecting File
- Print Preview from the CX-Programmer menu. If the preview is acceptable,
select File - Print to print.
13. Run the Program
Switch the PLC to RUN mode to run the program.
283
Examples
284
Section 4-2
SECTION 5
Installation and Wiring
This section describes how to install a PLC System, including mounting the various Units and wiring the System. Be sure
to follow the instructions carefully. Improper installation can cause the PLC to malfunction, resulting in very dangerous
situations.
5-1
5-2
5-3
Fail-safe Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
286
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
288
5-2-1
Installation and Wiring Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
288
5-2-2
Installation in a Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
290
5-2-3
Mounting Height. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
292
5-2-4
Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
293
5-2-5
Mounting Units to the Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
294
5-2-6
DIN Track Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
296
5-2-7
I/O Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
298
5-2-8
Inner Board Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
306
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
307
5-3-1
Power Supply Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
307
5-3-2
Wiring CS-series and C200H Basic I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
318
5-3-3
Wiring CS-series and C200H I/O Units with Connectors . . . . . . . .
320
5-3-4
Connecting I/O Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
327
5-3-5
Reducing Electrical Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
331
285
Section 5-1
Fail-safe Circuits
5-1
Fail-safe Circuits
Be sure to set up safety circuits outside of the PLC to prevent dangerous conditions in the event of errors in the PLC or external power supply.
Supply Power to the PLC before Outputs
If the PLC’s power supply is turned on after the controlled system’s power
supply, outputs in Units such as DC Output Units may malfunction momentarily. To prevent any malfunction, add an external circuit that prevents the
power supply to the controlled system from going on before the power supply
to the PLC itself.
Managing PLC Errors
When any of the following errors occurs, PLC operation will stop and all outputs from Output Units will be turned OFF.
• Operation of the Power Supply Unit’s overcurrent protection circuit
• A CPU error (watchdog timer error) or CPU on standby
• A fatal error* (memory error, I/O bus error, duplicate number error, Inner Board stopped error, too many I/O points error, program error, cycle time too long error, or FALS(007) error)
Be sure to add any circuits necessary outside of the PLC to ensure the safety
of the system in the event of an error that stops PLC operation.
Note *When a fatal error occurs, all outputs from Output Units will be turned OFF
even if the IOM Hold Bit has been turned ON to protect the contents of I/O
memory. (When the IOM Hold Bit is ON, the outputs will retain their previous
status after the PLC has been switched from RUN/MONITOR mode to PROGRAM mode.)
Managing Output Malfunctions
It is possible for an output to remain ON due to a malfunction in the internal
circuitry of the Output Unit, such as a relay or transistor malfunction. Be sure
to add any circuits necessary outside of the PLC to ensure the safety of the
system in the event that an output fails to go OFF.
Emergency Stop Circuit
The following emergency stop circuit controls the power supply to the controlled system so that power is supplied to the controlled system only when
the PLC is operating and the RUN output is ON.
An external relay (CR1) is connected to the RUN output from the Power Supply Unit as shown in the following diagram.
286
Section 5-1
Fail-safe Circuits
MCB1
Power supply
MCB2
CR1
Controlled system
Transformer
or noise filter
CS-series PLC
Twisted-pair wires
DC voltage
regulator
PLC RUN (See
note.)
output
CR1
+ DC
– input/output
Surge suppressor
Note This configuration is possible with the C200HW-PA204R and C200HWPA204R Power Supply Units only. When a Power Supply Unit without a RUN
output is used, program the Always ON Flag (A1) as the execution condition
for an output point from an Output Unit. Do not include a circuit that stops the
controlled system by latching the RUN output during operation. Relay contacts are used, and so chattering may cause incorrect operation.
Interlock Circuits
When the PLC controls an operation such as the clockwise and counterclockwise operation of a motor, provide an external interlock such as the one
shown below to prevent both the forward and reverse outputs from turning ON
at the same time.
Interlock circuit
000501
CS-series
PLC
000502
MC2
MC1 Motor clockwise
MC1
MC2 Motor counterclockwise
This circuit prevents outputs MC1 and MC2 from both being ON at the same
time even if both CIO 000500 and CIO 000501 are both ON, so the motor is
protected even if the PLC is programmed improperly or malfunctions.
287
Section 5-2
Installation
5-2
5-2-1
Installation
Installation and Wiring Precautions
Be sure to consider the following factors when installing and wiring the PLC to
improve the reliability of the system and make the most of the PLC’s functions.
Ambient Conditions
Do not install the PLC in any of the following locations.
• Locations subject to ambient temperatures lower than 0°C or higher than
55°C.
• Locations subject to drastic temperature changes or condensation.
• Locations subject to ambient humidity lower than 10% or higher than
90%.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to excessive dust, salt, or metal filings.
• Locations that would subject the PLC to direct shock or vibration.
• Locations exposed to direct sunlight.
• Locations that would subject the PLC to water, oil, or chemical reagents.
Be sure to enclose or protect the PLC sufficiently in the following locations.
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
• Locations close to power lines.
Installation in Cabinets or Control Panels
When the PLC is being installed in a cabinet or control panel, be sure to provide proper ambient conditions as well as access for operation and maintenance.
Temperature Control
The ambient temperature within the enclosure must be within the operating
range of 0°C to 55°C. When necessary, take the following steps to maintain
the proper temperature.
• Provide enough space for good air flow.
• Do not install the PLC above equipment that generates a large amount of
heat such as heaters, transformers, or high-capacity resistors.
• If the ambient temperature exceeds 55°C, install a cooling fan or air conditioner.
Control
panel
CS-series
PLC
Louver
288
Fan
Section 5-2
Installation
• If a Programming Console will be left on the PLC, the ambient temperature must be within the Programming Console’s operating range of 0°C to
45°C.
Accessibility for Operation and Maintenance
• To ensure safe access for operation and maintenance, separate the PLC
as much as possible from high-voltage equipment and moving machinery.
• The PLC will be easiest to install and operate if it is mounted at a height of
about 1.3 m (4 feet).
Improving Noise Resistance
• Do not mount the PLC in a control panel containing high-voltage equipment.
• Install the PLC at least 200 mm (6.5 feet) from power lines.
Power lines
200 mm min.
CS-series PLC
200 mm min.
• Ground the mounting plate between the PLC and the mounting surface.
• When I/O Connecting Cables are 10 m or longer, connect the control panels in which Racks are mounted with heavier power wires (3 wires at least
2 mm2 in cross-sectional area).
PLC Orientation
• Each Rack must be mounted in an upright position to provide proper cooling.
Top
Bottom
289
Section 5-2
Installation
• Do not install a Rack in any of the following positions.
Note Always use the standard installation method. A nonstandard installation will
decrease heat dissipation, and may delay the replacement notification signal
(in particular for C200H-PA204C Power Supply Units with Replacement Notification), or degrade or damage the internal elements.
5-2-2
Installation in a Control Panel
• A typical installation is a CPU Rack mounted above an Expansion Rack
on a mounting plate in the control panel.
• The spacing between the CPU Rack and Expansion Rack (or between
two Expansion Racks) should be sufficient to allow space for a wiring
duct, wiring, air circulation, and replacement of Units in the Racks.
Note If the C200HW-PA209R Power Supply Unit is to be used at an ambient temperature of 50 °C or higher, provide a minimum space of 80 mm between the
top of the Unit and any other objects, e.g., ceiling, wiring ducts, structural supports, devices, etc.
80 mm min.
Duct or other object
C200HW-PA209R
80 mm min.
80 mm min.
Duct or other object
C200HW-PA209R
80 mm min.
Duct or other object
• Up to 7 Expansion Racks can be connected.
Each I/O Connecting Cable can be up to 12 m long, but the sum total of
all cables between the CPU Rack and Expansion Racks must be 12 m or
less.
290
Section 5-2
Installation
• The mounting plate should be grounded completely and we recommend
using a mounting plate that has been plated with a good conductor to
improve noise resistance.
• If all of the Racks cannot be mounted to the same mounting plate, the
individual plates should be securely connected together using 3 wires of
at least 2 mm2 in cross-sectional area.
• The Backplanes are mounted to the plate(s) with four M4 screws each.
• Whenever possible, route I/O wiring through wiring ducts or raceways.
Install the duct so that it is easy to fish wire from the I/O Units through the
duct. It is handy to have the duct at the same height as the Racks.
Duct
20 mm min.
Backplane
Phillips
screwdrivers
Unit
20 mm min.
Duct
Wiring Ducts
The following example shows the proper installation of wiring duct.
118 to 153 mm
CPU
Rack
30 mm
30 mm
40 mm
Mounting
bracket
Duct
Expansion
Rack
Note Tighten the Unit mounting screws, PLC Rack mounting screws, terminal block
screws, and cable screws to the following torques.
Unit Mounting Screws
CPU Unit:
Power Supply Unit:
I/O Units:
0.9 N·m
0.9 N·m
0.4 N·m
Backplane Mounting Screws: 0.9 N·m
Terminal Screws
M3.5: 0.8 N·m
M3:
0.5 N·m
Cable Connector Screws
M2.6: 0.2 N·m
291
Section 5-2
Installation
Routing Wiring Ducts
Install the wiring ducts at least 20 mm between the tops of the Racks and any
other objects, (e.g., ceiling, wiring ducts, structural supports, devices, etc.) to
provide enough space for air circulation and replacement of Units. If the
C200HW-PA209R Power Supply Unit is to be used at an ambient temperature
of 50 °C or higher, provide a minimum space of 80 mm.
Input duct
Power duct
Output duct
200 mm min.
CPU Rack
Breakers,
fuses
Expansion Rack
Power
equipment
such as
transformers
and magnetic
relays
Fuses, relays, timers, etc.
(NOT heat-generating equipment, power equipment, etc.) Terminal blocks
for PLC
5-2-3
Terminal blocks for
power equipment
Mounting Height
The mounting height of CPU Racks, Expansion Racks, or Slave Racks is 118
to 153 mm for a CS-series Backplane, depending on I/O Units mounted. If
Programming Devices or connecting cables are attached, the additional
dimensions must be taken into account. Allow sufficient clearance in the control panel in which the PLC is mounted.
118 to 153 mm
Approx. 180 to 223 mm
292
Section 5-2
Installation
5-2-4
Mounting Dimensions
Backplanes
CPU Backplane with 2 Slots
198.5
Four, M4
6
CS1W-BC023
CPU Backplane
157
145±0.3
172.3±0.3
Unit: mm
Note Expansion Backplanes cannot be connected to 2-slot CPU Backplanes.
CPU Backplane with 3, 5, 8, or 10 Slots
A±0.3
6
Unit: mm
135
(including protruding parts)
Four, M4
6
CPU Backplane
132
118±0.3
80 min.
66 min.
135
(including protruding parts)
A±0.3
6
6
132
Expansion Backplane
W
Four, M4
Backplane
Standard CPU Backplanes
CS-series-only CPU Backplanes
Expansion Backplanes
118±0.3
CS-series Expansion Backplanes
C200H Expansion
I/O Backplanes
Model
CS1W-BC033
CS1W-BC053
CS1W-BC083
CS1W-BC103
CS1W-BC032
CS1W-BC052
CS1W-BC082
CS1W-BC102
CS1W-BI033
CS1W-BI053
CS1W-BI083
CS1W-BI103
C200HW-BI031
C200HW-BI051
C200HW-BI081-V1
C200HW-BI101-V1
A
246 mm
316 mm
421 mm
491 mm
246 mm
316 mm
421 mm
491 mm
246 mm
316 mm
421 mm
491 mm
245 mm
316 mm
350 mm
420 mm
W
260 mm
330 mm
435 mm
505 mm
260 mm
330 mm
435 mm
505 mm
260 mm
330 mm
435 mm
505 mm
259 mm
330 mm
364 mm
434 mm
293
Section 5-2
Installation
Backplane Insulation Plates
Backplane Insulation Plates can be installed on C200H I/O Backplanes only.
There are four models available, corresponding to the number of slots on the
Backplane. The dimensions at locations A, B, C, D, and E are shown below in
millimeters for each Backplane Insulation Plate.
Unit: mm
M4 screws for mounting to PLC
(4/5 places)
5-dia. holes for mounting
Base Insulation Plate
(4/6 places)
(B)
6
12 dia.
5 dia.
135 (118) 110
C
D
(A)
(E)
10
Insulation Plates for I/O Backplanes
Specifications
For 3 slots
For 5 slots
For 8 slots
For 10 slots
5-2-5
Model
C200HW-ATT32
C200HW-ATT52
C200HW-ATT82
C200HW-ATTA2
E
190
260
365
435
Dimensions (mm)
D
C
B
140
----210
----315
----385
-----
A
175
245
350
420
Mounting Units to the Backplane
There are two methods for mounting or removing Units in the Backplane. The
following table shows which method to use for each type of Unit.
Group
A
B
294
Unit type
CS-series CPU Units,
Power Supply Units,
CS-series Basic I/O
Units,
CS-series Special I/O
Units,
CS-series CPU Bus
Units, and
SYSMAC BUS Remote
I/O Slave Units
C200H Basic I/O Units,
C200H Special I/O
Units
Installation method
Hook the top of the Unit
into the slot on the
Backplane and tighten
the screw on the bottom
of Unit.
Removal method
Loosen the screw on
the bottom of the Unit
and rotate the Unit
upward.
Hook the top of the Unit
into the slot on the
Backplane and secure
the bottom of the Unit
with the Backplane’s
lock lever.
Press and hold the lock
lever at the bottom of
the Unit and rotate the
Unit upward.
Section 5-2
Installation
1,2,3...
1. Mount the Unit to the Backplane by hooking the top of the Unit into the slot
on the Backplane and rotating the I/O Unit downwards. (Groups A and B)
Hook
Backplane
Lock lever
2. Make sure that the connector on the back of the Unit is properly inserted
into the connector in the Backplane. (Groups A and B)
3. With the Group-A Units, use a Phillips-head screwdriver to tighten the
screw on the bottom of Unit. The screwdriver must be held at a slight angle,
so be sure to leave enough space below each Rack.
Note The screws at the bottoms of the Units must be tightened to the following torques.
CPU Unit:
0.9 N·m
Power Supply Unit: 0.9 N·m
I/O Units:
0.4 N·m
Duct
20 mm min.
Phillips
screwdriver
Units in
group A
Backplane
20 mm min.
Duct
With Group-B Units, the lock lever will snap into place when the Unit is
properly inserted. Check that the lock lever is engaged and the Unit is secure.
295
Section 5-2
Installation
4. To remove a Group-A Unit, use a phillips-head screwdriver to loosen the
screw at the bottom of the Unit, rotate the Unit upward, and remove it.
To remove a Group-B Unit, hold down the lock lever with a tool such as a
screwdriver, rotate the Unit upward, and remove it.
Lock lever
5-2-6
DIN Track Mounting
Do not use DIN Track to mount Backplane in locations subject to vibration;
use locking screws to attach the Backplane directly.
Mount the DIN Track in the control panel with M4 screws in at least three
places. Tighten the mounting screws to a torque of 1.2 N·m.
DIN Track Mounting Bracket
Use DIN Track Mounting Brackets to mount Racks to the DIN Track.
C200H-DIN01
Mounting Bracket
DIN Track
296
Section 5-2
Installation
DIN Track
The following DIN Tracks are available.
Model
PFP-50N
PFP-100N
PFP-100N2
Specification
50 cm long, 7.3 mm high
1 m long, 7.3 mm high
1 m long, 16 mm high
DIN Track Installation
1,2,3...
1. Attach Mounting Brackets to each side (left and right) of the Backplane as
shown below.
Backplane (rear view)
DIN Track Mounting
Bracket
There are two Backplane mounting screws each on the left
and right sides of the Backplane. Use these screws to attach
the DIN Track Mounting Brackets to the Backplane.
(Tighten to a torque of 0.9 N·m.)
2. Mount the Backplane to the DIN Track so that the hooks on the Mounting
Brackets fit into the upper portion of the DIN Track as shown below.
These hooks fit into the DIN Track
Backplane
DIN Track
DIN Track Mounting Bracket
297
Section 5-2
Installation
3. Loosen the hold-down bracket’s screws and slide the Backplane upward
so that the Mounting Bracket and Backplane clamp securely onto the DIN
Track. Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.5 N·m.
DIN Track Mounting Bracket
DIN Track
Hold-down bracket Projections Slide this screw to the top of the
projection and then tighten it.
5-2-7
I/O Connecting Cables
I/O Connecting Cables are used to connect the CPU Rack and Expansion
Racks. There are four types of I/O Connecting Cables.
Type
CS → CS
CS1W-CN@@3
I/O Connecting Cables
Connectors
CPU Rack end
Expansion Rack end
Simple lock conSimple lock connector
nector
CS → C200H
CS1W-CN@@1
I/O Connecting Cables
Simple lock connector
C200H → C200H
C200H-CN@@1
I/O Connecting Cables
CV500-CN@@2
Cables for CS-series
Long-distance Expansion Racks (CV-series
I/O Connecting
Cables)
Two-screw connec- Two-screw
tor
connector
Simple lock conSimple lock connector
nector
298
Model number
Two-screw connector
Usage
CPU Rack →
CS-series Expansion Rack
CS-series Expansion Rack →
CS-series Expansion Rack
CPU Rack →
C200H Expansion I/O Rack
CS-series Expansion Rack →
C200H Expansion I/O Rack
C200H Expansion I/O Rack →
C200H Expansion I/O Rack
CPU Rack or CS-series Longdistance Expansion Rack →
CS-series Long-distance
Expansion Rack
Section 5-2
Installation
Available Models
CS1 → CS1 I/O
Connecting Cables
Model number
CS1 → C200H I/O
Connecting Cables
Model number
CS1W-CN713
Cable
length
0.3 m
(See note.)
0.7 m
(See note.)
CS1W-CN223
C200H → C200H I/O
Connecting Cables
Cable
length
Model number
Cable
length
Cables for CS1 Long-distance
Expansion Racks (CV-series
I/O Connecting Cables)
Model number
Cable
length
CS1W-CN311
0.3 m
C200H-CN311
0.3 m
CV500-CN312
0.3 m
CS1W-CN711
0.7 m
C200H-CN711
0.7 m
CV500-CN612
0.6 m
2m
CS1W-CN221
2m
C200H-CN221
2m
CV500-CN122
1m
CS1W-CN323
3m
CS1W-CN321
3m
C200H-CN521
5m
CV500-CN222
2m
CS1W-CN523
5m
CS1W-CN521
5m
C200H-CN131
10 m
CV500-CN322
3m
CS1W-CN133
10 m
CS1W-CN131
10 m
CV500-CN522
5m
CS1W-CN131B2
12 m
CV500-CN132
10 m
CV500-CN232
20 m
CV500-CN332
30 m
CV500-CN432
40 m
CV500-CN532
50 m
CS1W-CN313
CS1W-CN133B2 12 m
Note Restrictions in Using CS-series I/O Connecting Cables
When using a CS1W-CN313 or CS1W-CN713 CS-series I/O Connecting
Cable with a CS1-H CPU Unit, always use a Cable manufactured on September 20, 2001 or later. Do not use Cables that do not have manufacturing numbers or Cables manufacture earlier than September 20, 2001.
Manufacturing Number Legend
Four-digit Numbers
@ @ @ @
Year (e.g., 1997 = 7, 2001 = 1)
Month (January to September = 1 to 9, October to December = X to Z)
Day of month (01 to 31)
Six-digit Numbers
@ @ @ @ @ @
Symbol
Day of month (01 to 31)
Month (January to September = 01 to 12)
Year (e.g., 2003 = 03)
• Install the Racks and select I/O Connecting Cables so that the total length
of all I/O Connecting Cables does not exceed 12 m.
• The following diagram shows where each I/O Connecting Cable must be
connected on each Rack. The Rack will not operate if the cables aren’t
connected properly. (The “up” direction is towards the CPU Unit and
“down” is away from the CPU Unit.)
299
Section 5-2
Installation
CPU Rack
Up
Down
CS1 Expansion Rack
Down
Up
C200H Expansion I/O Rack
Down
• The following diagram shows two examples of proper Rack connections.
Total cable length: 12 m max.
CPU Rack
CS1 → CS1
I/O Connecting Cable
CS1 Expansion Rack
CS1 → CS1
I/O Connecting Cable
CS1 Expansion Rack
CS1 → C200H
I/O Connecting Cable
C200H Expansion I/O Rack
Total cable length: 12 m max.
CPU Rack
CS1 → C200H
I/O Connecting Cable
C200H Expansion I/O Rack
C200H → C200H
I/O Connecting Cable
C200H Expansion I/O Rack
C200H → C200H
I/O Connecting Cable
C200H Expansion I/O Rack
300
Section 5-2
Installation
Example
CPU Rack
(Excluding the
2-slot Rack.)
Total cable
length: 0.7 m
max.
CS1 Expansion
Rack
Series B (0.5 m max.)
CS1 Long-distance
Expansion Rack
CS1 Long-distance
Expansion Rack
Total cable
length: 50 m
max.
CS1 Long-distance
Expansion Rack
Total cable
length: 50 m
max.
CS1 Long-distance
Expansion Rack
Terminator
CS1 Long-distance
Expansion Rack
CS1 Long-distance
Expansion Rack
Terminator
• I/O Control Unit can also be mounted on the CPU Rack.
• Only one CS-series Expansion Rack can be connected.
• The cable length between the CPU Rack and CS-series Expansion Rack
must be 0.7 m max.
• Up to two series of CS-series Long-distance Expansion Racks can be
connected.
• A maximum of seven CS-series and CS-series Long-distance Expansion
Racks can be connected (including all Racks in both series).
• Each series of CS-series Long-distance Expansion Racks must be 50 m
max. with a total of 100 m max. for both series.
• C200H Expansion I/O Racks cannot be connected together with CSseries Long-distance Expansion Racks.
• A CS-series Expansion Rack cannot be connected to a CS-series Longdistance Expansion Rack using a CS I/O Connecting Cable.
301
Section 5-2
Installation
Cable Connections
There are two types of connectors used in the I/O Connecting Cables: Simple
locking connectors for CS-series Racks and screw-in connectors for C200H
Racks.
The connectors can be inserted only one way; they cannot be inserted upside
down. Be sure that the connectors fit properly as they are inserted.
CS1 → CS1
I/O Connecting Cable
This cable has simple locking
connectors on both ends.
CPU Rack or
CS1 Expansion Rack
Simple locking
connectors
CS1 → C200H
I/O Connecting Cable
This cable has a simple locking
connector on one end and a
screw-in connector on the other.
C200H Expansion
I/O Rack
CPU Rack or
CS1 Expansion Rack
Simple locking
connector
CS1 Expansion Rack
C200H → C200H
I/O Connecting Cable
This cable has screw-in
connectors on both ends.
C200H Expansion
I/O Rack
C200H Expansion
I/O Rack
Screw-in
connectors
Screw-in
connector
Cables to CS-series Long-distance Expansion Racks
Mounting the I/O Control Unit to the CPU Rack
CPU Rack
I/O Control Unit
CV-series
Expansion
I/O Cables
CS1 Long-distance
Expansion Rack
CS1 Long-distance
Expansion Rack
Series B
Series A
I/O Interface Unit
302
I/O Interface Unit
Section 5-2
Installation
Mounting the I/O Control Unit to a CS-series Expansion Rack
CPU Rack
CS1 I/O Connecting Cable
CS1 Expansion Rack
I/O Control Unit
CS1 Long-distance
Expansion Rack
CV-series
Expansion
I/O Cables
CS1 Long-distance
Expansion Rack
Series B
Series A
I/O Interface Unit
I/O Interface Unit
Connecting the Simple Locking Connectors
Insert the connector until it locks in place. The PLC will not operate properly if
the connector isn’t inserted completely.
Note When using an I/O Connecting Cable with a locking connector, be
sure that the connector is firmly locked in place before using it.
Connecting the Screw-in Connectors
Insert the connector and secure it by tightening the two screws to a torque of
0.2 N·m. The PLC will not operate properly if the connector isn’t inserted completely. To remove the connector, simply loosen the screws and pull it out.
Do not route the I/O Connecting Cables through ducts that contain the I/O or
power wiring.
303
Section 5-2
Installation
• An I/O bus error will occur and the PLC will stop if an I/O Connecting
Cable’s connector separates from the Rack. Be sure that the connectors
are secure.
• A 75-mm hole will be required if the I/O Connecting Cable must pass
through a hole when connecting a CS-series Long-distance Expansion
Rack and a 63-mm hole will be required for Cables connecting other
Racks. The cables can withstand a pulling force up to 49 N (11 lbs), so be
sure that they aren’t pulled too forcefully.
• Do not cut or reconnect I/O Connecting Cables. Handle them with caution
when mounting the PLC or when using wiring ducts.
• Do not bend the I/O Connecting Cables too severely. The minimum bending radii are shown in the following diagram.
• Always turn OFF the power supply to the PLC before connecting Cables.
CS1 → CS1 I/O Connecting Cable
(Cable diameter: 8.6 mm)
C200H → C200H I/O Connecting Cable
(Cable diameter: 5.1 mm)
R ≥ 69 mm
R ≥ 41 mm
CS1 → C200H I/O Connecting Cable
(Cable diameter: 5.1 mm)
Cables for CS1 Long-distance Expansion Racks
(Cable diameter: 10 mm)
R ≥ 41 mm
R ≥ 80 mm
Mounting the Brackets for Securing the Expansion Cable
Expansion Cable Brackets can be used to prevent Expansion Cables from
accidentally coming loose.
Note Expansion Cable Brackets must be ordered separately from Expansion Cables and Backplanes.
Screw holes are required in the Backplane. Use a Backplane manufactured in
August 2007 or later. Earlier Backplanes do not have screw holes, so the
Brackets cannot be mounted. (Refer to Manufacturing Number Legend on
page 299.)
1,2,3...
304
1. Connect the Cables according to the description in 5-2-7 I/O Connecting
Cables.
Section 5-2
Installation
2. Mount the Expansion Cable Bracket from the top, and tighten the screws
(included) on the top and bottom using a Phillips screwdriver.
Phillips screwdriver
CS1D-ATT01 Expansion Cable Bracket
Backplane
Expansion Cable
Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.5 N·m.
Mounting Long-distance Expansion Cable Brackets
Long-distance Expansion Cable Brackets can be used to prevent Expansion
Cables from accidentally coming loose.
Note Two Long-distance Expansion Cable Brackets are included with the
CS1W-II102 I/O Interface Unit.
1,2,3...
1. Connect the Cables according to the description in 5-2-7 I/O Connecting
Cables.
2. Mount the Long-distance Expansion Cable Bracket from the top, and use
a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screws (included) on the top and bottom.
Mounting screws (2 places)
Connection to Backplane
Long-distance
Expansion Cable
R
• Tighten the screws to a torque of
0.5 N·m.
• When connecting two Long-distance Expansion Cables to a single Long-distance Expansion
Unit, turn one of the Mounting
Brackets upside down and
attached them from the sides as
shown in the figure to the left.
R≥80 mm
Long-distance Expansion Cable
Brackets (included with the
CS1W-II102 I/O Interface Unit)
CS1W-IC102 I/O Control Unit
CS1W-II102 I/O Interface Unit
305
Section 5-2
Installation
5-2-8
Inner Board Installation
Always turn the power off before installing or removing the Inner Board.
Installing or removing the Inner Board with the power on can cause the CPU
Unit to malfunction, damage internal components, or cause communications
errors.
Before installing the Inner Board, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic
object, such as a metal water pipe, in order to discharge any static build-up.
CPU Unit
Inner Board
(such as a Serial
Communications
Board)
1,2,3...
1. Press the catches at the top and bottom of the Inner Board compartment
cover and pull the cover forward.
Press the top catch.
Press the bottom catch.
2. Remove the Inner Board compartment cover.
306
Section 5-3
Wiring
3. Align the Inner Board with the groove and slide it into the compartment.
5-3
5-3-1
Wiring
Power Supply Wiring
AC Power Supply Units
When 220 V AC power (200 to 240 V AC) is being supplied, be sure to
remove the jumper bar that shorts the voltage selector terminals. The Unit will
be damaged if 220 V AC is supplied with the jumper bar connected.
220 V AC
power
Voltage selector
terminals
Voltage selector
terminals
Not connected
(OPEN)
CORRECT
220 V AC
power
Unit will be damaged
if connected.
INCORRECT!
(Unit will be damaged.)
Note If 110 V AC power is supplied but the jumper bar has been removed to select
220 V AC, the Unit will not operate because the power supply voltage will be
below the 85% minimum level.
• Do not remove the protective label from the top of the Unit until wiring has
been completed. This label prevents wire strands and other foreign matter
from entering the Unit during wiring procedures.
307
Section 5-3
Wiring
C200HW-PA204 or C200HW-PA204S Power Supply Unit
Screws (3.5 mm head with
self-raising pressure plate)
1:1 isolation
transformer
AC power
source
100 to 200 V AC
Voltage selector:
Closed for 110 V AC
Open for 220 V AC*
24-V DC output
Note The 24-V DC service power supply is
provided on the C200HW-PA204S only.
Note To prevent damage, be sure that the jumper bar on the voltage selector terminals has been removed before applying 220 V AC power.
C200HW-PA204R or C200HW-PA209R Power Supply Unit
Screws (3.5 mm head with
self-raising pressure plate)
1:1 isolation
transformer
Voltage selector:
Closed for 110 V AC
Open for 220 V AC1
RUN
OUTPUT
308
Power
supply
AC power
source
100 to 200 V AC
RUN output2
ON when the PLC is in RUN or MONITOR mode.
OFF when the PLC is in PROGRAM mode or a fatal
error has occurred.
Section 5-3
Wiring
C200HW-PA204C Power Supply Unit
PA204C
3.5-mm self-rising screws
L2 /N 100 to
240 VAC
INPUT
1:1 isolation
transformer
L1
AC power
source
100 to 240 V AC
ALARM
OUTPUT
30 VDC, 50 mA
NORMAL: ON
ALARM: OFF
L
Alarm output (replacement notification
output)
ON: Power Supply Unit replacement
not required for at least 6 months.
OFF: Power Supply Unit replacement
required within 6 months.
24 V DC
power supply
NC
NC
!Caution Be careful when connecting personal computers or other peripheral devices
to a PLC to which is mounted a non-insulated Unit (CS1W-CLK12/15(-V1),
CS1W-CLK13/53, or CS1W-ETN01) connected to an external power supply.
A short-circuit will be created if the 24 V side of the external power supply is
grounded and the 0 V side of the peripheral device is grounded. When connecting a peripheral device to this type of PLC, either ground the 0 V side of
the external power supply or do not ground the external power supply at all.
Incorrect
External power supply
24 V
0V
Non-insulated
DC power supply
Peripheral
cable
Shield
0V
SG
FG
FG
Non-insulated Unit
Note
CPU Unit
FG
GR
FG
Peripheral device
(e.g., personal
computer)
1. To prevent damage, be sure that the jumper bar on the voltage selector terminals has been removed before applying 220 V AC power.
2. If a Power Supply Unit without a RUN output is being used, an output that
acts as a RUN output can be created by programming the Always ON Flag
(A1) as the execution condition for an output from an Output Unit.
AC Power Source
• Supply 100 to 120 V AC or 200 to 240 V AC.
• The C200HW-PA204C supplies 100 to 240 V AC (allowable voltage fluctuation range: 85 to 264 V AC). The C200HW-PA204C has a wide-range
supply voltage (100 to 240 V AC), so voltage selector terminals are not
provided.
309
Section 5-3
Wiring
• Keep voltage fluctuations within the specified range:
Power Supply Unit
model
C200HW-PA204/204S/
204R/PA209R
C200HW-PA204C
Supply voltage
Allowable voltage
fluctuations
85 to 132 V AC
170 to 264 V AC
85 to 264 V AC
100 to 120 V AC
200 to 240 V AC
100 to 240 V AC
• The terminal block indicator L2/N-L1 may appear as L1/N-L2 in some
Units, but the function of the terminals is the same.
• If one power supply phase of the equipment is grounded, connect the
grounded phase side to the L2/N (or L1/N if so indicated) terminal.
Voltage Selector
Shorted: 100 to 120 V AC
Open:
200 to 240 V AC
Short-circuit the voltage selector terminals with the jumper bar to select 100 to
120 V AC supply voltage. For 200 to 240 V AC leave them open.
Note The Power Supply Unit will be damaged if 200 to 240 V AC power is supplied
and the voltage selector terminals are connected with the jumper bar.
Isolation Transformer
The PLC’s internal noise isolation circuits are sufficient to control typical noise
in power supply lines, but noise between the PLC and ground can be significantly reduced by connecting a 1-to-1 isolation transformer. Do not ground the
secondary coil of the transformer.
Power Consumption
The power consumption will be 120 VA max. per Rack, but there will be a
surge current of at least 5 times the max. current when power is turned ON.
24-V DC Output
(C200HW-PA204S Only)
Use these terminals as the power supply for 24-V DC Input Units. Never externally short these terminals; PLC operation will stop if these terminals are
shorted.
Although the 24-V DC output can supply up to 0.8 A, the combined power
consumption for both 5 V DC and 24 V DC must be 30 W or less, i.e., the
capacity of the 24-V DC output will be reduced if the Units mounted to the
Rack consume a lot of current. Refer to Appendix C Unit Current and Power
Consumption for the power consumption of each Unit.
The output voltage of the 24-V DC output will vary with the current consumption of the load as shown in the following table. Be sure to check the current
consumption and allowable voltage ranges of the devices connected before
using these terminals.
Load current on 24-V DC output
Accuracy of 24-V DC output for lot
No. 0197 or later
Accuracy of 24-V DC output for lot
No. 3187 or earlier
Less than 0.3 A
+17%
–11%
+10%
–20%
0.3 A or higher
+10%
–11%
Note Lot numbers are as shown in the following diagram.
0 1 9
7
1997 (Rightmost digit of year)
September (Month: 1 to 9 = Jan. to Sept, X/Y/Z = Oct/Nov/Dec)
01 (Day: 01 to 31)
310
Section 5-3
Wiring
We recommend connecting a dummy load as shown in the following diagram
if the maximum operating voltage of the connected device is 26.4 V (24 V
+10%).
IL
Connected
device
(Photoelectric
Switch, Sensor Input Unit,
etc.
Dummy
load
R
L
24 V DC
OUTPUT
Resistance of the dummy load: 120 Ω when IL = 0.1 A
240 Ω when IL = 0.2 A
Not necessary when IL = 0.3 A
24
R=
(IL: Total current of connected devices)
0.3 – lL
Power rating of the dummy load (with a safety factor of 5):
30 W (120 Ω) when IL = 0.1 A
W = (0.3 – lL) × 26.4 × 5
15 W (240 Ω) when IL = 0.2 A
Note Since the dummy load will generate heat, be careful not to allow any combustible materials to come in contact with the resistor.
Alarm Output (C200HW-PA204C Only)
Connect the alarm output to a PLC's Input Unit or external LED indicator to
enable notification when Power Supply Unit replacement is required.
ON: Power Supply Unit replacement not required for at least 6 months.
OFF: Power Supply Unit replacement required within 6 months.
Output Specifications:
Transistor open-collector output
30 VDC max., 50 mA max.
ON: Residual voltage of 2 V max., OFF: Leakage current of 0.1 mA max.
PLC Input Unit Wiring Example
Connect the positive terminals of the 24-V DC power supply to the Input Unit
common (COM) terminals.
311
Section 5-3
Wiring
IN Unit
CS1W-ID2**
C200H-ID2**
CPU Unit
C200HW-PA204C
PA204C
IN0
L2 /N
100 t o
240
VAC
IN PUT
L1
L
IN(N)
ALA RM
OUTPUT
30VDC,50mA
N ORM ALON
ALARM OFF
NC
IN (N+ 1)
NC
COM
24 V DC
power supply
Connect the negative terminal of the 24-V DC power supply to the Input Unit
common (COM) terminal.
IN Unit
CS1W-ID2**
C200H-ID2**
CPU Unit
C200HW-PA204C
PA204C
IN0
L2 /N 100 t o
240 V AC
IN PUT
L1
L
ALA RM
OUTPUT
30VDC,50mA
NORMAL:OFF
ALARM:OFF
IN(N)
IN (N+ 1)
− NC
COM
− NC
24 V DC
power supply
External Display Device Connection Example
The alarm output (replacement notification output) is an NC contact. Therefore, wire the alarm output using an NC contact or other means to turn ON an
error indicator or LED display as shown in the following diagram.
C200HW-PA204C
PA204C
Power
supply
L2 /N 100 to
240 VAC
IN PUT
L1
L
ALA RM
OU TPU T
30VD C, 50 mA
NORM AL: ON
Relay
(NC contact)
ALARM: OFF
NC
NC
Note
OL
24 VDC
power supply
1. The OL display will also light if the PLC's power supply fails.
2. Separate the alarm output cables from power lines and high-voltage lines.
312
Section 5-3
Wiring
3. Do not apply a voltage or connect a load to the alarm output that exceeds
the rated voltage or load.
RUN Output
(C200HW-PA204R/209R)
This output is ON whenever the CPU Unit is operating in RUN or MONITOR
mode; it is OFF when the CPU Unit is in PROGRAM mode or a fatal error has
occurred.
The RUN output can be used to control external systems, such as in an emergency stop circuit that turns off the power supply to external systems when
the PLC is not operating. (See 5-1 Fail-safe Circuits for more details on the
emergency stop circuit.)
Contact
form
Maximum
switching
capacity
C200HW-PA204R
SPST-NO
C200HW-PA209R
SPST-NO
250 V AC: 2 A for resistive loads
240 V AC:2 A for resistive loads
0.5 A for inductive loads 120 V AC:0.5 A for inductive loads
24 V DC: 2 A
24 V DC: 2 A for resistive loads
2 A for inductive loads
Wiring
Terminal screws
Recommended wire size
Recommended tightening
torque
M3.5 self-rising screws
AWG 20 to 14 (0.517 to 2.08 mm2)
0.8 N·m
Recommended crimp terminals
7 mm max.
7 mm max.
Manufacturer
JST Mfg.
Note
Models
Shape
V1.25-YS3A
Y-shaped terminal with sleeve
V1.25-M3(RAV1.25-3.5) Round terminal
with sleeve
V2-YS3A
Y-shaped terminal with sleeve
V2-M3(RAV2-3.5)
Round terminal
with sleeve
Applicable wire range
(stranded wire)
0.25 to 1.65 mm2 (AWG
22 to 16)
1.04 to 2.63 mm2 (AWG
16 to 14)
1. Use crimp terminals for wiring.
2. Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to the terminals.
20 mm max.
M3.5 self-raising terminals
Torque to 0.8 N·m
!Caution Tighten the AC power supply terminal block screws to the torque of 0.8 N·m.
Loose screws may result in short-circuit, malfunction, or fire.
Note
1. Supply power to all of the Power Supply Units from the same source.
313
Section 5-3
Wiring
2. Be sure to check the setting of the voltage selector before supplying power.
3. Do not forget to remove the label from the top of the Power Supply Unit after wiring the Unit. The label will block air circulation needed for cooling.
DC Power Supplies
Do not remove the protective label from the top of the Unit until wiring has
been completed. This label prevents wire strands and other foreign matter
from entering the Unit during wiring procedures. (Remove the label after wiring has been completed to allow air circulation needed for cooling.)
C200HW-PD024/025 Power Supply Unit
Screw (3.5 mm head with
self-raising pressure plate)
DC
power
source
DC Power Source
Supply 24 V DC. Keep voltage fluctuations within the specified range (19.2 to
28.8 V DC).
Power Supply Capacity
The maximum power consumption is 40 W per Rack for C200HW-PD024 and
60 W per Rack for C200HW-PD025, but there will be a surge current of about
5 times that level when the power is turned on.
Wiring
Terminal screws
Recommended wire size
Recommended tightening
torque
M3.5 self-rising screws
AWG 20 to 14 (0.517 to 2.08 mm2)
0.8 N·m
Recommended crimp terminals
7 mm max.
Manufacturer
JST Mfg.
314
7 mm max.
Models
V1.25-YS3A
Shape
Y-shaped terminal with sleeve
V1.25-M3(RAV1.25-3.5) Round terminal
with sleeve
V2-YS3A
Y-shaped terminal with sleeve
V2-M3(RAV2-3.5)
Round terminal
with sleeve
Applicable wire range
(stranded wire)
0.25 to 1.65 mm2 (AWG
22 to 16)
1.04 to 2.63 mm2 (AWG
16 to 14)
Section 5-3
Wiring
Note
1. Use crimp terminals for wiring.
2. Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to the terminals.
3. Wire the power supply with the correct polarity. Supply power to all of the
Power Supply Units from the same source.
4. Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dissipation. Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction.
Grounding
The diagram below shows the location of the ground and line ground terminals.
AC100V-120V/
AC2100-240V/
INPUT
100-200
CLOSE
200-240
OPEN
LG (Noise-filter neutral terminal)
Ground this terminal to less than 100 Ω to improve
noise resistance and prevent electric shock.
DC24V/0.8A
OUTPUT
GR (Ground terminal)
Ground this terminal to less than 100 Ω to prevent
electric shock.
• To help prevent electrical shock, ground the ground terminal (GR: ) with
a ground resistance of less than 100 Ω using a 14-gauge wire (minimum
cross-sectional area of 2 mm2).
• The line ground terminal (LG: ) is a noise-filtered neutral terminal. If
noise is a significant source of errors or electrical shocks are a problem,
connect the line ground terminal to the ground terminal and ground both
with a ground resistance of less than 100 Ω.
• The ground wire should not be more than 20 m long.
• The following grounding configurations are acceptable.
• The CS-series Backplanes are designed to be mounted so that they are
isolated (separated) from the mounting surface to protect them from the
effects of noise in the installation environment (e.g., the control panel).
(C200HX/HG/HE and C200H Backplanes are mounted directly to the
mounting surface. If Expansion I/O is being affected by control panel or
other environmental noise, use the C200HW-ATT@@ or C200H-ATT@@
Backplane Insulation Plates to isolate the Backplanes.
Note Make sure that the C200HW-PA204C is wired correctly. The C200HWPA204C terminals are wired differently from other Power Supply Units.
• Do not share the PLC’s ground with other equipment, such as motors and
inverters, or ground the PLC to the metal structure of a building. The configuration shown in the following diagram may worsen operation.
315
Section 5-3
Wiring
CS-series PLC
Other equipment
Ground
(100 or less)
CS-series PLC
Other equipment
Ground
(100 or less)
CS-series PLC
Ground
(100 or less)
Ground
(100 or less)
Other equipment
(e.g., motors and inverters)
!Caution Tighten the AC power supply terminal block screws to the torque of 0.8 N·m.
Loose screws may result in short-circuit, malfunction, or fire.
Grounding Long-distance Expansion Racks
A difference in potential will occur between remote ground points if more than
one point is grounded on the CPU Rack and Long-distance Expansion Racks
in a CS1 Long-distance Expansion System. This is caused by high-frequency
noise from power lines, potential and phase differences between power lines,
and other factors. To prevent noise from entering on the GR (ground) terminal
as a result of a difference in potential, wire the system as shown below.
• Connect all of the GR terminals on the Racks and ground them at one
point only to 100 Ω or less.
• Short the LR terminals to the GR terminals.
• Use a ground wire of 2 mm2 min.
• Insert 1:1 isolating transformers into the power supply lines and do not
ground the secondary sides of the transformers.
316
Section 5-3
Wiring
Recommended Wiring
IC101
I102
CPU
L2
L1
1:1 Isolating
transformer
L2
L1
LG
GR
LG
GR
CPU Rack
1:1 Isolating
transformer
Match to the I/O
Expansion Cable.
Expansion Rack
I/O Expansion Cable
Control panel
Control panel
Wiring Susceptible to Noise
IC101
I102
CPU L2
L1
L2
L1
LG
GR
LG
GR
Noise source
Expansion Rack
CPU Rack
I/O Expansion Cable
Control panel
Grounded to building
Control panel
Wiring Communications Lines
When using communications from one or more Rack in the system, ground
the entire system so that only one point is grounded. (Refer to user documentation for the devices connected.) For detailed connection methods, refer to
the Operation Manual for the Communications Unit.
Recommended Wiring
Control panel
Control panel
IC101
II102 Expansion
CPU Rack
Rack
GR
GR
I/O Expansion Cable
GR
Wiring Susceptible to Noise
Control panel
Control panel
IC101
CPU Rack
II102
GR
Expansion Rack
GR
I/O Expansion Cable
Noise source
GR
317
Section 5-3
Wiring
Wiring
Terminal screws
Recommended wire size
Recommended tightening
torque
M3.5 self-rising screws
AWG 14 min. (2 mm2 min.)
0.8 N·m
Recommended crimp terminals
7 mm max.
7 mm max.
Manufacturer
JST Mfg.
Models
Shape
V2-YS3A
V2-M3(RAV2-3.5)
Note
Y-shaped terminal with sleeve
Round terminal
with sleeve
Applicable wire range
(stranded wire)
1.04 to 2.63 mm2 (AWG
16 to 14)
1. Use crimp terminals for wiring.
2. Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to the terminals.
5-3-2
Wiring CS-series and C200H Basic I/O Units
I/O Unit Specifications
Double-check the specifications for the I/O Units. In particular, do not apply a
voltage that exceeds the input voltage for Input Units or the maximum switching capacity for Output Units. Doing so may result in breakdown, damage, or
fire.
When the power supply has positive and negative terminals, be sure to wire
them correctly.
Electric Wires
The following wire gauges are recommended.
Terminal Block Connector
10-terminal
Wire Size
AWG 22 to 18 (0.32 to 0.82 mm2)
19-terminal/20-terminal
AWG 22 (0.32 mm2)
Note The current capacity of electric wire depends on factors such as the ambient
temperature and insulation thickness as well as the gauge of the conductor.
Wiring
Terminal screws
Recommended wire size
Recommended tightening
torque
M3.5 self-rising screws
AWG 22 to 18 (0.326 to 0.823 mm2)
0.8 N·m
Recommended crimp terminals
1. C200H Basic I/O Units with 10-terminal or 19-terminal Terminal Blocks
7 mm max.
318
7 mm max.
Section 5-3
Wiring
2. CS-series Basic I/O Units with 20-terminal Terminal Blocks
6.5 mm max.
7 mm max.
Manufacturer
JST Mfg.
Note
Models
Shape
V1.25-YS3A
Y-shaped terminal with sleeve
V1.25-M3(RAV1.25-3.5) Round terminal
with sleeve
Applicable wire range
(stranded wire)
0.25 to 1.65 mm2 (AWG
22 to 16)
1. Use crimp terminals for wiring.
2. Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to the terminals.
Do not remove the protective label from the top of the Unit until wiring has
been completed. This label prevents wire strands and other foreign matter
from entering the Unit during wiring procedures. (Remove the label after wiring has been completed to allow air circulation needed for cooling.)
During wiring
After wiring
Remove the label.
• Wire the Units so that they can be easily replaced. In addition, make sure
that the I/O indicators are not covered by the wiring.
• Do not place the wiring for I/O Units in the same duct or raceway as power
lines. Inductive noise can cause errors in operation.
• Tighten the terminal screws to the torque of 0.8 N·m.
• The terminals have screws with 3.5-mm diameter heads and self-raising
pressure plates. Connect the lead wires to the terminals as shown below.
A
Screw (3.5 mm screw with
self-raising pressure plate)
Terminal
block
10P
19P
20P
Terminal Blocks
A
23 mm
14 mm
18 mm
The I/O Units are equipped with removable terminal blocks. The lead wires do
not have to be removed from the terminal block to remove it from an I/O Unit.
The terminal block on a C200H Basic I/O Units can be removed by pressing
the terminal block locks. The terminal block on a CS-series Basic I/O Units
can be removed by taking out the terminal block mounting screws.
319
Section 5-3
Wiring
Terminal block
mounting screws
(black screws
under cover)
Terminal block locks
CS1-series Basic I/O Units
(including Interrupt Input
Units and High-speed Input
Units)
C200H Basic I/O Units
I/O Unit Covers
The C200H-COV11 Cover is available to cover the terminal block on Units
with 10-terminal terminal block connectors. These Covers can be purchased
separately if extra protection is required.
Attach
Remove
5-3-3
C200H-COV11
I/O Unit cover
Wiring CS-series and C200H I/O Units with Connectors
This section describes wiring for the following Units:
• C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units
• CS-series Basic I/O Units with Connectors (32-, 64-, and 96-point Units)
• C200H High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units)
C200H High-density I/O Units and CS-series Basic I/O Units with connectors
use special connectors to connector to external I/O devices. The user can
combine a special connector with cable or use a preassembled OMRON
cable to connect a High-density I/O Unit to a terminal block or Relay Terminal.
The available OMRON cables are described later in this section.
CS-series Basic I/O Units with connectors have the same connector pin allocations as the C200H High-density I/O Units to make them compatible.
• Be sure not to apply a voltage that exceeds the input voltage for Input
Units or the maximum switching capacity for Output Units.
• When the power supply has positive and negative terminals, be sure to
wire them correctly. Loads connected to Output Units may malfunction if
the polarity is reversed.
• Use reinforced insulation or double insulation on the DC power supply
connected to DC I/O Units when required by EC Directives (low voltage).
• When connecting the connector to the I/O Unit, tighten the connector
screws to a torque of 0.2 N·m.
320
Section 5-3
Wiring
• Turn ON the power after checking the connector’s wiring. Do not pull the
cable. Doing so will damage the cable.
• Bending the cable too sharply can damage or break wiring in the cable.
Available Connectors
Use the following connectors when assembling a connector and cable.
C200H Group-2 Highdensity I/O Units and CSseries Basic 32- and 64point I/O Units
The following connectors are recommended for attachment to C200H Group2 High-density I/O Units and CS-series 32- and 64-point I/O Units.
Connection
Solder-type
(included with Unit)
Pins
OMRON set
40
C500-CE404
Fujitsu parts
Socket: FCN-361J040-AU
Connector bar: FCN-360C040-J2
Crimp-type
40
C500-CE405
Crimp-type
40
C500-CE403
Socket: FCN-363J040
Connector bar: FCN-360C040-J2
Contacts: FCN-363J-AU
FCN-367J040-AU/F
Note Solder-type connectors are included with each Unit.
CS-series 96-point Basic
I/O Units
The following connectors are recommended for attachment to CS-series 96point I/O Units.
Connection
Solder-type
(included with Unit)
Crimp-type
Pins
OMRON set
56
CS1W-CE561
56
CS1W-CE562
Crimp-type
56
CS1W-CE563
Fujitsu parts
Socket: FCN-361J056-AU
Connector bar: FCN-360C056-J2
Socket: FCN-363J056
Connector bar: FCN-360C056-J2
Contacts: FCN-363J-AU
FCN-367J056-AU/F
Note Solder-type connectors are included with each Unit.
C200H High-density I/O
Units
The following connectors are recommended for attachment to C200H Highdensity I/O Units.
Connection
Solder-type
(included with Unit)
Crimp-type
Pins
OMRON set
24
C500-CE241
24
C500-CE242
Crimp-type
24
C500-CE243
Fujitsu parts
Socket: FCN-361J024-AU
Connector bar: FCN-360C024-J2
Socket: FCN-363J024
Connector bar: FCN-360C024-J2
Contacts: FCN-363J-AU
FCN-367J024-AU/F
Note Solder-type connectors are included with each Unit.
Wire
We recommend using cable with wire gauges of AWG 24 to AWG 28
(0.2 mm2 to 0.08 mm2). Use cable with external wire diameters of 1.61 mm
max.
Wiring Procedure
The wiring procedure is the same for the C200H Group-2 High-density I/O
Units, CS-series High-density I/O Units, and C200H High-density I/O Units
(C200H Special I/O Units).
1,2,3...
1. Check that each Unit is installed securely.
Note Do not force the cables.
2. Do not remove the protective label from the top of the Unit until wiring has
been completed. This label prevents wire strands and other foreign matter
321
Section 5-3
Wiring
from entering the Unit during wiring. (Remove the label after wiring has
been completed to allow air circulation needed for cooling.)
Before wiring
ID215
CH
3
4
5
3
4
5
11
12 13 14
15
RUN
0 1 2
CN1
8 9 10
0 1 2
CN2
8 9 10
CAUT11ION 6 7
12 13 14
15
6
7
3
11
4
5
6
7
12 13 14
15
5 6 7
3
4
11
12 13 14
15
MACINE
NO.
C200H-00215
MACINE
NO.
CN1
CN2
B A A
B
Remove label
after wiring
CH
CN1
CN2
B A A
B
C200H-00215
ID215
RUN
0 1 2
CN1
8 9 10
0 1 2
CN2
8 9 10
After wiring
12
12
1
1
1
1
12
12
3. When solder-type connectors are being used, be sure not to accidentally
short adjacent terminals. Cover the solder joint with heat-shrink tubing.
Solder-type connector
included with Unit.
Heat-shrink tubing
Wire (0.2 to 0.13 mm2)
Note Double-check to make sure that the Output Unit’s power supply leads haven’t
been reversed. If the leads are reversed, the Unit’s internal fuse will blow and
the Unit will not operate.
322
Section 5-3
Wiring
4. Assemble the connector (included or purchased separately) as shown in
the following diagram.
Small screws (3)
Connector bar
Small screws (2)
Socket
Connector-attaching
screws
Nuts (3)
Cable-securing
bracket
Nuts (2)
5. Insert the wired connector.
High-density I/O Unit
Connector
High-density I/O Unit
Connector
6. Remove the protective label after wiring has been completed to allow air
circulation needed for cooling.
After wiring
Remove label after wiring.
Tighten the connector-attaching screws to a torque of 0.2 N·m.
323
Section 5-3
Wiring
Preassembled Cables
The following examples show applications for preassembled OMRON Cables.
Contact your OMRON dealer for more details.
C200H Group-2 Highdensity I/O Units
The following cables are compatible with C200H Group-2 High-density I/O
Units.
1,2,3...
1. Connecting to a terminal block.
C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Unit
C200H-ID216/218 (32 input points)
C200H-ID217/219 (64 input points)*
C200H-OD218/21B (32 output points)
C200H-OD219 (64 output points)*
*(Two sets needed for 64-point Units.)
C200H Group-2 High-density Input Unit
C200H-ID216 (32 input points)
C200H-ID217 (64 input points)*
*(Two sets needed for 64-point Unit.)
XW2Z-@@@D Connecting Cable
for Connector-Terminal Block
Conversion Unit
XW2Z-@@@B Connecting Cable
for Connector-Terminal Block
Conversion Unit
16 inputs
Connector-Terminal Block
Conversion Unit with Flat Cable
XW2B-40G5 (M3.5 terminal screws)
XW2B-40G4 (M2.5 terminal screws)
Connector-Terminal Block
16 inputs Conversion Unit (common-type)
XW2C-20G5-IN16
2. Connecting to a Relay Terminal.
C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Unit
C200H-ID216/218 (32 input points)
C200H-ID217/219 (64 input points)
G79-I@C-@ Connecting Cable
for Relay Terminals
(For I/O Units with PLC32/64point connectors.)
G79-I@16 Input Relay Terminals
324
C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Unit
C200H-OD218/OD21B (32 output points)
C200H-OD219 (64 output points)
G79-O@C-@ Connecting Cable
for Relay Terminals
(For I/O Units with PLC32/64-point
connectors.)
G7TC-OC16, G70D-@O@16,
G70A-ZOC16-3
Output Relay Terminals
G70D-@O16-1 (OD21B only)
G70A-ZOC16-1 (OD21B only)
Section 5-3
Wiring
CS-series Basic I/O Units
with Connectors
1,2,3...
The following cables are compatible with CS-series High-density I/O Units.
1. Connecting to a terminal block. (Two of the following Cables and Conversion Units are required.)
CS1 Basic I/O Unit
CS1W-ID291 (96 input points)
CS1W-OD291 (96 output points)
CS1W-OD292 (96 output points)
CS1W-MD291 (48 inputs, 48 outputs)
CS1W-MD292 (48 inputs, 48 outputs)
XW2Z-@@@H-1 Connecting
Cable for Connector-Terminal
Block Conversion Unit
2 required
XW2Z-@@@H-3 Connecting
Cable for Connector-Terminal
Block Conversion Unit
2 required
Connector-Terminal Block
Conversion Unit with Flat Cable
XW2B-60G4 or XW2B-60G5
CS1 Basic I/O Unit
CS1W-ID291 (96 input points)
CS1W-OD291 (96 output points)
CS1W-OD292 (96 output points)
CS1W-MD291 (48 inputs, 48 outputs)
CS1W-MD292 (48 inputs, 48 outputs)
XW2Z-@@@H-2 Connecting
Cable for Connector-Terminal
Block Conversion Unit
2 required
CS1 Basic I/O Unit
CS1W-ID291 (96 input points)
CS1W-OD291 (96 output points)
CS1W-OD292 (96 output points)
CS1W-MD291 (48 inputs, 48 outputs)
CS1W-MD292 (48 inputs, 48 outputs)
Connector-Terminal Block Conversion
Unit with Flat Cable
XW2B-40G4 or XW2B-40G5
Connector-Terminal Block Conversion
Unit with Flat Cable
XW2B-20G4 or XW2B-20G5
Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit with Flat Cable
XW2B-20G5 or XW2B-20G4
CS1 Basic I/O Unit
CS1W-ID231
CS1W-ID261
CS1W-OD231
CS1W-OD232
CS1W-OD261
CS1W-OD262
CS1W-MD261
CS1W-MD262
Connecting Cable
XW2Z-@@@B
XW2Z-@@@D
Connector-Terminal Block
Conversion Unit
XW2B-40G4, XW2B-40G5, or
XW2C-20GB-IN16 (Connectable to Input Unit only.)
325
Section 5-3
Wiring
2. Connecting to a Relay Terminal. (Two of the following Cables and Relay
Terminals are required.)
CS1 Basic I/O Unit
CS1W-ID291 (96 input points)
CS1W-OD291 (96 output points)
CS1W-OD292 (96 output points)
CS1W-MD291 (48 inputs, 48 outputs)
CS1W-MD292 (48 inputs, 48 outputs)
CS1 Basic I/O Unit
CS1W-ID231
CS1W-ID261
CS1W-MD261 (inputs)
CS1W-OD291
CS1W-OD261
CS1W-MD261 (outputs)
CS1W-OD292
CS1W-OD262
CS1W-MD262 (outputs)
#1
#2
#3
G79-@@@C-@@@-@@@
Connecting Cable for Relay Terminals
2 required
Connecting Cable
#1:
G79-I@C-@
#2, #3: G79-O@C-@
G7TC-I@16 Input Relay Terminals or
G7TC-OC16 Output Relay Terminals
(CS1W-OD291/MD291)
G7TC-OC16-1 Output Relay Terminals
(CS1W-OD292/MD292)
#1: G7TC-I@16
#2: G7TC-OC16
70D-@O@16
70A-ZOC16-3 and relays
#3: 70D-@O@16-1
70A-ZOC16-4
C200H High-density I/O
Units
1,2,3...
The following cables are compatible with C200H High-density I/O Units (a
kind of C200H Special I/O Unit).
1. Connecting to a terminal block.
C200H High-density Input Unit
C200H-ID215 (32 input points)
C200H-ID501 (32 input points)
C200H-OD215 (32 output points)
C200H-OD501 (32 output points)
C200H-MD215 (16 inputs/16 outputs)
C200H-MD115 (16 inputs/16 outputs)
C200H-MD501 (16 inputs/16 outputs)
XW2Z-@@@A Connecting Cable for ConnectorTerminal Block Conversion Unit
(For I/O Units with PLC32-point connectors.)
Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit
XW2B-20G4/20G5/20G5-D (all 16 points)
XW2B-40G5-T (32-point twin connector)
OR
Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit
XW2C-20G5-IN16 (16 input points, common-type)
326
Section 5-3
Wiring
2. Connecting to a Relay Terminal.
C200H High-density I/O Unit
C200H-OD215 (32 output points)
C200H-OD501 (32 output points)
C200H-MD215 (16 inputs/16 outputs)
C200H High-density I/O Unit
C200H-ID215 (32 input points)
C200H-ID501 (32 input points)
G79-@C Connecting Cable
for Relay Terminals
(For I/O Units with
PC32/64-point connectors.)
G79-@C Connecting Cable
for Relay Terminals
(For I/O Units with
PC32/64-point connectors.)
G7TC-OC@@
G70D, G70A
Output Relay Terminal
G79-I@16
Input Relay Terminal
5-3-4
Connecting I/O Devices
Input Devices
Use the following information for reference when selecting or connecting input
devices.
DC Input Units
The following types of DC input devices can be connected.
Contact output
IN DC Input Unit
COM
Two-wire DC output
IN DC Input Unit
Sensor
Power
Supply
+
COM
NPN open-collector output
+
Output
7 mA
0V
Sensor
Power
Supply
IN DC Input Unit
COM
327
Section 5-3
Wiring
NPN current output
+
Current
regulator
IN DC Input Unit
Output
7 mA
0V
Sensor
Power
Supply
COM
PNP current output
+
Sensor
Power
Supply
Output
IN AC/DC Input Unit
7 mA
COM
0V
Voltage current output
+
COM
Output
0V
IN DC Input Unit
Sensor
Power
Supply
The circuit below should NOT be used for I/O devices having a voltage output.
Voltage output
Sensor
Power
Supply
+
Output
0V
AC Input Units
IN DC Input Unit
COM
The following types of AC input devices can be connected.
Contact output
IN AC Input Unit
COM
AC Switching
IN AC Input Unit
Proximity
switch
main
circuit
COM
328
Section 5-3
Wiring
Note When using a reed switch as the input contact for an AC Input Unit, use a
switch with an allowable current of 1 A or greater. If Reed switches with
smaller allowable currents are used, the contacts may fuse due to surge currents.
Precautions when
Connecting a Two-wire DC
Sensor
When using a two-wire sensor with a 12-V DC or 24-V DC input device, check
that the following conditions have been met. Failure to meet these conditions
may result in operating errors.
1,2,3...
1. Relation between voltage when the PLC is ON and the sensor residual
voltage:
VON ≤ VCC – VR
2. Relation between voltage when the PLC is ON and sensor control output
(load current):
IOUT (min) ≤ ION ≤ IOUT (max.)
ION = (VCC – VR – 1.5 [PLC internal residual voltage])/RIN
When ION is smaller than IOUT (min), connect a bleeder resistor R. The
bleeder resistor constant can be calculated as follows:
R ≤ (VCC – VR)/(IOUT (min.) – ION)
Power W ≥ (VCC – VR)2/R × 4 [allowable margin]
Note The residual voltage in the PLC is 4.0 V for the following Units:
C200H-ID211/ID212/IM211/IM212/INT01
The residual voltage is 1.5 V for all other Units.
3. Relation between current when the PLC is OFF and sensor leakage current:
IOFF ≥ Ileak
If Ileak is larger than IOFF, connect a breeder resistor. The breeder resistor
constant can be calculated as follows:
R ≤ RIN × VOFF/(Ileak × RIN – VOFF)
Power W ≥ (VCC – VR)2/R × 4 [allowable margin]
DC Input Unit
Two-wire sensor
RIN
R
VR
VCC
VCC:
VON:
ION:
IOFF:
RIN:
Power voltage
PLC ON voltage
PLC ON current
PLC OFF current
PLC input impedance
VR :
IOUT:
Ileak:
R:
Sensor output residual current
Sensor control current (load current)
Sensor leakage current
Bleeder resistance
4. Precautions on Sensor Surge Current
An incorrect input may occur if a sensor is turned ON after the PLC has
started up to the point where inputs are possible. Determine the time required for sensor operation to stabilize after the sensor is turned ON and
take appropriate measures, such as inserting into the program a timer delay after turning ON the sensor.
329
Section 5-3
Wiring
Example
In this example, the sensor’s power supply voltage is used as the input to
CIO 000000 and a 100-ms timer delay (the time required for an OMRON
Proximity Sensor to stabilize) is created in the program. After the Completion Flag for the timer turns ON, the sensor input on CIO 000001 will cause
output bit CIO 000100 to turn ON.
000000
TIM
0000
#0001
TIM0000
000001
000100
Output Wiring Precautions
Output Short-circuit
Protection
If a load connected to the output terminals is short-circuited, output components and the and printed circuit boards may be damaged. To guard against
this, incorporate a fuse in the external circuit. Use a fuse with a capacity of
about twice the rated output.
Transistor Output
Residual Voltage
A TTL circuit cannot be connected directly to a transistor output because of
the transistor’s residual voltage. It is necessary to connect a pull-up resistor
and a CMOS IC between the two.
Output Leakage Current
If a Triac Output Unit is used to drive a low-current load, the leakage current
may prevent the output device from turning OFF. To prevent this, connect a
bleeder resistor in parallel with the load as shown in the following diagram.
OUT
PLC
L
R
Bleeder resistor
Load power supply
COM
Use the following formula to determine the resistance and rating for the
bleeder resistor.
R<
Output Surge Current
VON: ON voltage of the load (V)
I: Leakage current (mA)
R: Bleeder resistance (KΩ)
VON
I
When connecting a transistor or triac output to an output device having a high
surge current (such as an incandescent lamp), steps must be taken to avoid
damage to the transistor or triac. Use either of the following methods to
reduce the surge current.
Method 1
Add a resistor that draws about 1/3 of the current consumed by the bulb.
L
OUT
R
COM
330
+
Section 5-3
Wiring
Method 2
Add a control resistor as shown in the following diagram.
R
L
OUT
+
COM
5-3-5
Reducing Electrical Noise
I/O Signal Wiring
Whenever possible, place I/O signal lines and power lines in separate ducts or
raceways both inside and outside of the control panel.
1 = I/O cables
2 = Power cables
Suspended duct
In-floor duct
Conduits
If the I/O wiring and power wiring must be routed in the same duct, use
shielded cable and connect the shield to the GR terminal to reduce noise.
Inductive Loads
When an inductive load is connected to an I/O Unit, connect a surge suppressor or diode in parallel with the load as shown below.
IN
L
Diode
DC input
COM
OUT
Relay output or
triac output
L
Surge suppressor
COM
OUT
Relay output or
transistor output
L
Diode
+
COM
Note Use surge suppressors and diodes with the following specifications.
Surge suppressor specifications
Diode specifications
Resistor: 50 Ω
Breakdown voltage: 3 times load voltage min.
Capacitor: 0.47 µF
Mean rectification current: 1 A
Voltage: 200 V
331
Section 5-3
Wiring
External Wiring
Observe the following precautions for external wiring.
• When multi-conductor signal cable is being used, avoid combining I/O
wires and other control wires in the same cable.
• If wiring racks are parallel, allow at least 300 mm (12 inches) between the
racks.
Low-current cables
PLC I/O wiring
300 mm min.
Control cables
PLC power supply and
general control circuit wiring
300 mm min.
Power cables
Power lines
Ground to 100 Ω or less
If the I/O wiring and power cables must be placed in the same duct, they must
be shielded from each other using grounded steel sheet metal.
PLC I/O wiring
PLC power supply
and general
control wiring
Steel sheet metal
Power lines
200 mm min.
Ground to 100 Ω or less
332
SECTION 6
DIP Switch Settings
This section describes the settings of the DIP switch and how they affect operation.
6-1
DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
334
333
Section 6-1
DIP Switch Settings
6-1
DIP Switch Settings
There are two kinds of initial settings for a CS-series PLC: hardware settings
and software settings. Hardware settings are made with the CPU Unit’s DIP
switch and software settings are made in the PLC Setup (using a Programming Device).
The DIP switch can be reached by opening the battery compartment cover on
the front of the CPU Unit.
Note Always touch a grounded piece of metal to discharge any static electricity
from your body before touching the DIP switch. Otherwise, the PLC may malfunction due to static discharge.
Pin
Function
1
Write-protection
ON
for user program OFF
memory (UM)
(See note 1.)
2
Automatic transON
fer of the program
at start-up
OFF
3
4
5
CS1 CPU Unit:
ON
Programming
OFF
Console language
334
Yes
No
English
Other
Description
User program memory is write-protected when
this pin is ON. Turn ON to prevent the program
from being changed accidentally.
The program (AUTOEXEC.OBJ) and PLC
Setup (AUTOEXEC.STD) will be transferred
from the Memory Card to the CPU Unit automatically at start-up when this pin is ON. (See
note 4.)
A PLC’s software (program and PLC Setup)
can be completely initialized just by inserting a
new Memory Card and turning on the power.
This can be used to switch the system to a new
arrangement very quickly.
Note When pin 7 is ON, reading from the
Memory Card for easy backup is given
priority; even if pin 2 is ON, the program
will not be automatically transferred.
Programming Console messages are displayed
in English when this pin is ON. Turn OFF to display messages in the language stored in system ROM.
CS1-H CPU Unit
Peripheral port
communications
parameters
Not used.
ON
Use parameters • Leave this pin OFF when using a Programset in the PLC
ming Console or CX-Programmer (periphSetup.
eral bus setting) connected to the peripheral
port.
OFF
Auto-detect Pro• Turn this pin ON when the peripheral port is
(default) gramming
being used for a device other than a ProDevice
gramming Console or CX-Programmer
(See note 2.)
(peripheral bus setting).
RS-232C port
communications
parameters
ON
OFF
(default)
6
Setting
Write-protected
Read/write
User-defined pin
ON
OFF
(default)
Auto-detect Programming
Device
(See note 3.)
Use parameters
set in the PLC
Setup.
A39512 ON
A39512 OFF
• Leave this pin OFF when the RS-232C port
is being used for a device other CX-Programmer (peripheral bus setting) such as a
Programmable Terminal or host computer.
• Turn this pin ON when using CX-Programmer (peripheral bus setting) connected to the
RS-232C port.
The ON/OFF status of this pin is reflected in
A39512. Use this function when you want to
create an Always-ON or Always-OFF condition
in the program without using an Input Unit.
Section 6-1
DIP Switch Settings
Pin
7
Function
Easy backup setting
Setting
ON
Writing from the
CPU Unit to the
Memory Card
Restoring from
the Memory
Card to the CPU
Unit.
OFF
(default)
8
Not used
Note
OFF
(default)
Verifying
contents of
Memory Card.
Always OFF.
Description
Press and hold the Memory Card Power Supply
Switch for three seconds.
To read from the Memory Card to the CPU Unit,
turn ON the PLC power.
This operation is given priority over automatic
transfer (pin 2 is ON) when power is ON. (See
note 5.)
Press and hold the Memory Card Power Supply
Switch for three seconds.
1. The following data is write-protected when pin 1 is ON: the user program
and all data in the parameter area such as the PLC Setup and registered
I/O table. Furthermore when pin 1 is ON, the user program and parameter
area won’t be cleared even when the memory clear operation is performed
from a Programming Device.
2. The auto-detect goes through baud rates in the following order: Programming Console → Peripheral bus at 9,600 bps, 19,200 bps, 38,400 bps, and
115,200 bps. Programming Devices that aren’t in peripheral bus mode and
devices in peripheral bus mode operating at 51,200 bps will not be detected.
3. The auto-detect operation goes through baud rates in the following order:
Peripheral bus at 9,600 bps, 19,200 bps, 38,400 bps, and 115,200 bps.
Programming Devices that aren’t in peripheral bus mode and devices in
peripheral bus mode operating at any other speeds will not be detected.
4. When pin 2 is ON and the power is turned ON, any I/O Memory file (AUTOEXEC.IOM, ATEXEC@@.IOM) (prefer to the CS/CJ Series Programming Manual) will also be transferred automatically. Both the program
(AUTOEXEC.OBJ) and the parameter area (AUTOEXEC.STD) must exist
in the Memory Card. I/O Memory files (AUTOEXEC.IOM, ATEXEC@@.IOM) are optional.
5. After reading data from the Memory Card to the CPU Unit with the simple
backup operation, the CPU Unit will remain in PROGRAM mode and cannot be changed to MONITOR or RUN mode until the power supply has
been cycled. After completing the backup operation, turn OFF the power
supply to the CPU Unit, change the settings of pin 7, and then turn the
power supply back ON.
DIP switch
settings
Pin
4
OFF
ON
PLC Setup settings
Peripheral port settings
Default NT Link Peripheral Host Link
Serial
bus
Gateway
Programming Console or CX-Programmer in Peripheral
Bus Mode
(Auto-detect connected device’s baud rate)
OMRON CX-ProHost com- OMRON
Host
compocomputer PT (NT grammer in puter or
Link)
Peripheral CX-Pronent
or CXBus Mode grammer (CompoProgramin host
Way/F)
mer in
link mode
host link
mode
335
Section 6-1
DIP Switch Settings
DIP switch
settings
Pin
5
OFF
ON
PLC Setup settings
Peripheral port settings
Default NT Link
NoPeripheral Host Link
protocol
bus
CX-ProHost comOMRON Standard
Host
grammer in puter or
computer PT (NT external
Peripheral CX-Prodevice
Link)
or CXBus Mode grammer
Programin host
mer in
link mode
host link
mode
CX-Programmer in Peripheral Bus Mode
(Auto-detect connected device’s baud rate)
Serial
Gateway
OMRON
component
(CompoWay/F)
Note Use the following settings for the network on the CX-Programmer and pin 4 on
the DIP switch when connecting the CX-Programmer via the peripheral or RS232C port.
CX-Programmer network
setting
Toolbus (peripheral bus)
SYSMAC WAY (Host Link)
Peripheral port
connections
Turn OFF pin 4.
Turn ON bit 4.
RS-232C port
connection
Turn ON pin 5.
Turn OFF pin 5.
PLC Setup
None
Set to Host Link.
When CX-Programmer is set to host link mode, it won’t be possible to communicate (go online) in the following cases:
• The computer is connected to the CPU Unit’s peripheral port and pin 4 is
OFF.
• The computer is connected to the CPU Unit’s RS-232C port and pin 5 is
ON.
To go online, set CX-Programmer to peripheral bus mode, turn pin 4 ON (turn
pin 5 OFF for the RS-232C port), and set the communications mode to host
link mode in the PLC Setup.
336
SECTION 7
PLC Setup
This section describes the settings in the PLC Setup and how they are used to control CPU Unit operation.
7-1
7-2
PLC Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
338
7-1-1
Overview of the PLC Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
338
7-1-2
PLC Setup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
340
Explanations of PLC Setup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
365
337
Section 7-1
PLC Setup
7-1
7-1-1
PLC Setup
Overview of the PLC Setup
The PLC Setup contains basic CPU Unit software settings that the user can
change to customize PLC operation. These settings can be changed from a
Programming Console or other Programming Device. The various settings for
the CPU Unit are made in the PLC Setup.
The following table lists cases in which the PLC Setup must be changed. In
other cases, the PLC can be operated with the default settings.
Note To read or set parameters in the PLC Setup, use the version of CX-Programmer that corresponds to the parameters.
For example, with CX-Programmer Ver.3.@,when the PLC Setup is uploaded
from a PLC that was used to set the PLC Setup for CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or
higher only, the PLC Setup that was set cannot be downloaded again. (The
following screen will be displayed.) Use the CX-Programmer Ver. 4.0 in this
case.
Scheduled Interrupt Time Units
Interval
Scheduled interrupt task
Cases when settings must be changed
The input response time settings for Basic I/O Units must be changed in the
following cases:
• Chattering or noise occur in CS-series Basic I/O Units.
• Short pulse inputs are being received for intervals longer than the cycle
time.
Data in all regions of I/O Memory (including the CIO Area, Work Areas,
Timer Flags and PVs, Task Flags, Index Registers, and Data Registers)
must be retained when the PLC’s power is turned on.
The status of bits force-set or force-reset from a Programming Device
(including Programming Consoles) must be retained when the PLC’s power
is turned on.
• You do not want the operating mode to be determined by the Programming Console’s mode switch setting at startup.
• You want the PLC to go into RUN mode or MONITOR mode and start
operating immediately after startup.
• You want the operating mode to be other than PROGRAM mode when
the power is turned ON.
Disabling detection of low-battery errors when it is not required.
Detecting interrupt-task errors is not required.
Data files are required but a Memory Card cannot be used or the files are
written frequently. (Part of the EM Area will be used as file memory.)
The peripheral port will not be used with the Programming Console or CXProgrammer (peripheral bus) communications speed auto-detection and will
not used the default host link communications settings such as 9,600 bps.
Note Pin 4 of the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit must be OFF to
change the PLC Setup settings.
338
Setting(s) to be changed
Basic I/O Unit Input Response Time
IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup
Forced Status Hold Bit Status at Startup
Startup Mode
Detect Low Battery
Detect Interrupt Task Error
EM File Memory
Peripheral Port Settings
Section 7-1
PLC Setup
Cases when settings must be changed
Setting(s) to be changed
The RS-232C port will not be used with the Programming Console or CXRS-232C Port Settings
Programmer (peripheral bus) communications speed auto-detection and will
not use the default host link communications settings such as 9,600 bps.
Note Pin 5 of the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit must be OFF to
change the PLC Setup settings.
You want to speed up communications with a PT via an NT Link.
Set the peripheral port or the RS-232C port
communications port baud rate to “highspeed NT Link.”
You want the intervals for scheduled interrupts to be set in units of 1 ms
Scheduled Interrupt Time Units
rather than 10 ms.
You want CPU Unit operation to be stopped for instruction errors, i.e., when Instruction Error Operation
the ER Flag or AER Flag is turned ON. (You want instruction errors to be
fatal errors.)
You want to find the instructions where instruction errors are occurring
(where the ER Flag is turning ON.
You want a minimum cycle time setting to create a consistent I/O refresh
Minimum Cycle Time
cycle.
You want to set a maximum cycle time other than 1 second (10 ms to
Watch Cycle Time
40,000 ms).
You want to delay peripheral servicing so that it is executed over several
Fixed Peripheral Servicing Time
cycles.
You want to give priority to servicing peripherals over program execution.
Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode
Here, “peripherals” include CPU Bus Units, Special I/O Units, Inner Boards,
the built-in RS-232C port, and the peripheral port.
A power OFF interrupt task will be used.
Power OFF Interrupt Task
You want to extend the detection of a power interruption to 10 to 20 ms.
Power OFF Detection Delay Time
You want to shorten the average cycle time when a lot of Special I/O Units Special I/O Unit Cyclic Refreshing
are being used.
You want to extend the I/O refreshing interval for Special I/O Units.
You want to improve both program execution and peripheral servicing
CPU Processing Mode (CS1-H CPU Units
response.
only)
You do not want to record user-defined errors for FAL(006) and FPD(269) in FAL Error Log Registration (CS1-H CPU
the error log.
Units only)
You want to reduce fluctuation in the cycle time caused by text string proBackground Execution for Table Data, Text
cessing
String, and Data Shift Instructions (CS1-H
CPU Units only)
You do not want to wait for Units and Boards to complete startup processing Startup Condition (CS1-H CPU Units only)
to start CPU Unit operation.
339
Section 7-1
PLC Setup
7-1-2
PLC Setup Settings
The Programming Console addresses given in this section are used to access
and change settings in the PLC Setup when using a Programming Console or
the Programming Console function of an NS-series Programming Terminal.
The PLC Setup is stored in the Parameter Area, which can be accessed only
from a Programming Device. Addresses in the Parameter Area cannot be
used as instruction operands in the same way as addresses in the I/O Memory Area.
Startup Operation Settings (CX-Programmer’s Startup Tab Page)
7-1-2-1
Startup Tab Page
Startup Hold Settings
Forced Status Hold Bit
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+80
14
Settings
0: Cleared
1: Retained
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
This setting determines whether or not the A50013
status of the Forced Status Hold Bit
(Forced Sta(A50013) is retained at startup.
tus Hold Bit)
When you want all of the bits that have been
force-set or force-reset to retain their forced
status when the power is turned on, turn ON
the Forced Status Hold Bit and set this setting to 1 (ON).
New
setting’s
effectiveness
Takes effect
at startup
IOM Hold Bit
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+80
340
15
Settings
0: Cleared
1: Retained
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
New
setting’s
effectiveness
This setting determines whether or not the A50012 (IOM Takes effect
status of the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) is
Hold Bit)
at startup
retained at startup.
When you want all of the data in I/O Memory
to be retained when the power is turned on,
turn ON the IOM Hold Bit and set this setting to 1 (ON).
Section 7-1
PLC Setup
Mode Setting
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+81
---
Settings
Function
Use programming console
(PRCN):
Programming Console’s
mode switch
Program: PROGRAM
mode
Monitor: MONITOR mode
Run: RUN mode
Default: Program
Related
flags and
words
This setting determines whether the
--Startup Mode will be the mode set on
the Programming Console’s mode switch
or the mode set here in the PLC Setup.
If this setting is PRCN and a Programming Console isn’t connected, startup
mode will depend on the CPU Unit being
used.
CS1 CPU Unit: PROGRAM mode
CS1-H CPU Unit: RUN mode
New
setting’s
effectiveness
Takes effect
at startup
Execution Settings
Startup Condition (CS1-H CPU Units Only)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+83
15
Settings
0: Wait for Units and
Boards.
1: Don’t wait.
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
To start the CPU Unit in MONITOR or PRO- --GRAM mode even if there is one or more
Boards or Units that has not completed startup processing, set this setting to 1 (Don’t
wait for Units and Boards). (The operation
for Inner Boards, however, also depends on
the next setting.)
To wait for all Units and Boards to finish startup processing, set this setting to 0 (Wait for
Units and Boards).
New
setting’s
effectiveness
Takes effect
at startup
Note This setting applies only to specific Units and Boards.
Specific Units
This setting applies to the ITNC-EIS01-CST and ITNC-EIX01-CST Open Network Controller-CS1 Bus Interface Units.
Specific Boards
There are currently no Inner Boards that are applicable as of July 2006.
Inner Board Setting (CS1-H CPU Units Only)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+84
15
Settings
0: Wait for Boards.
1: Don’t wait.
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
--To start the CPU Unit in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode even if there is one or more of
Boards that has not completed startup processing, set this setting to 1 (Don’t wait for
Boards).
To wait for all Boards to finish startup processing, set this setting to 0 (Wait for Boards).
This setting is valid only if the Startup Condition is set to 1 (Don’t wait for Units and
Boards).
New
setting’s
effectiveness
Takes effect
at startup
Note There are currently no Inner Boards that are applicable as “Specific Boards”
as of July 2006.
341
Section 7-1
PLC Setup
7-1-2-2
CPU Unit Settings (CPU Settings Tab Page on the CX-Programmer)
Execute Process
Detect Low Battery
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+128
15
Settings
0: Detect
1: Do not detect
Default: 0
Function
This setting determines whether CPU Unit
battery errors are detected. If this setting is
set to 0 and a battery error is detected, the
ERR/ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will
flash and the Battery Error Flag (A40204)
will be turned ON, but CPU Unit operation
will continue.
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
A40204 (Bat- Takes effect
tery Error
the next cycle
Flag)
Detect Interrupt Task Error
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+128
342
14
Settings
0: Detect
1: Do not detect
Default: 0
Function
This setting determines whether interrupt
task errors are detected. If this setting is set
to 0 and an interrupt task error is detected,
the ERR/ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will
flash and the Interrupt Task Error Flag
(A40213) will be turned ON, but CPU Unit
operation will continue.
Related
flags and
words
A40213
(Interrupt
Task Error
Flag)
New
setting’s
effectiveness
Takes effect
the next cycle
Section 7-1
PLC Setup
Stop CPU on Instruction Error (Instruction Error Operation)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+197
15
Settings
0: Continue
1: Stop
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
This setting determines whether instruction
errors (instruction processing errors (ER)
and illegal access errors (AER)) are treated
as non-fatal or fatal errors. When this setting
is set to 1, CPU Unit operation will be
stopped if the ER or AER Flags is turned
ON (even when the AER Flag is turned ON
for an indirect DM/EM BCD error).
Related Flags: A29508 (Instruction Processing Error Flag)
A29509 (Indirect DM/EM BCD Error Flag)
A29510 (Illegal Access Error Flag)
A29508,
A29509,
A29510
(If this setting
is set to 0,
these flags
won’t be
turned ON
even if an
instruction
error occurs.)
Function
Related
flags and
words
New
setting’s
effectiveness
At start of
operation.
Don’t Register FAL to Error Log
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+129
15
Settings
0: Record userdefined FAL errors
in error log.
1: Don’t record userdefined FAL errors
in error log.
Default: 0
This setting determines if user-defined FAL --errors created with FAL(006) and time monitoring for FPD(269) will be recorded in the
error log (A100 to A199). Set it to 1 so prevent these errors from being recorded.
New
setting’s
effectiveness
Whenever
FAL(006) is
executed
(every cycle)
Note This setting does not exists in CS1@-CPU@@ CPU Units.
Memory Allocation Settings
EM File Setting Enabled
Programming
Console address
Word
+136
Settings
Function
0: None
1: EM File Memory
Enabled
Default: 0
This setting determines whether part of the
EM Area will be used for file memory.
Bit(s)
7
Related
flags and
words
---
New
setting’s
effectiveness
After initialization from
Programming Device
or via FINS
command.
EM Start File No. (Starting Memory Starting Bank)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+136
0 to 3
Settings
0 to 6
Default: 0
Function
If bit 7 (above) is set to 1, the setting here
specifies the EM bank where file memory
begins. The specified EM bank and all subsequent banks will be used as file memory.
This setting will be disabled if bit 7 is set to
0.
Related
flags and
words
A344 (EM
File Memory
Starting
Bank)
New
setting’s
effectiveness
After initialization from
Programming Device
or via FINS
command.
343
Section 7-1
PLC Setup
Background Execution Settings
Table Data Process Instructions
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+198
15
Settings
Function
0: Not executed in
background
1: Executed in background
Default: 0
This setting determines if Table Data
Instructions will be processed over multiple
cycle times (i.e., processed in the background).
Related
flags and
words
---
New
setting’s
effectiveness
Start of operation
String Data Process Instructions
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+198
14
Settings
Function
0: Not executed in
background
1: Executed in background
Default: 0
This setting determines if Text String Data
Instructions will be processed over multiple
cycle times (i.e., processed in the background).
Related
flags and
words
---
New
setting’s
effectiveness
Start of operation
Note This setting does not exists in CS1@-CPU@@ CPU Units.
Data Shift Process Instructions
Programming
Console address
Word
+198
Settings
Function
Bit(s)
13
Related
flags and
words
0: Not executed in
This setting determines if Data Shift Instruc- --background
tions will be processed over multiple cycle
1: Executed in back- times (i.e., processed in the background).
ground
Default: 0
New
setting’s
effectiveness
Start of operation
Note This setting does not exists in CS1@-CPU@@ CPU Units.
Communications Port Number for Background Execution
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+198
0 to 3
Settings
0 to 7: Communications ports 0 to 7
(internal logical
ports)
Function
Related
flags and
words
The communications port number (internal --logical port) that will be used for background
execution.
Note This setting does not exists in CS1@-CPU@@ CPU Units.
344
New
setting’s
effectiveness
Start of operation
Section 7-1
PLC Setup
7-1-2-3
FB Communications Instruction Settings
(Settings for OMRON FB Library)
The following PLC Setup settings are used only when using the OMRON FB
Library.
Number of Resends
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+200
0 to 3
Settings
0 to F: 0 to 15
Default: 0
Function
Set the number of retries for sending commands when executing DeviceNet explicit
messages or FINS messages within function blocks.
Related
flags and
words
A58000 to
A58003
New
setting’s
effectiveness
Start of
operation
Note This setting does not exists in CS1@-CPU@@ CPU Units.
FB Communications Instruction Response Monitoring Time
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+201
0 to 15
Settings
Function
0001 to FFFF (Unit: A response timeout occurs when no
0.1 s, 0.1 to 6553.5) response is returned within the time set
here for FINS commands executed within a
0000: 2 s
function block.
Related
flags and
words
A581
New
setting’s
effectiveness
Start of
operation
Note This setting does not exists in CS1@-CPU@@ CPU Units.
DeviceNet Communications Instruction Response Monitoring Time
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+202
0 to 15
Settings
Function
0001 to FFFF (Unit: A response timeout occurs when no
0.1 s, 0.1 to 6553.5) response is returned within the time set
here for explicit messages commands exe0000: 2 s
cuted within a function block.
Related
flags and
words
A582
New setting’s
effectiveness
Start of operation
Note This setting does not exists in CS1@-CPU@@ CPU Units.
Note The number of resends and response monitoring time must be set by the user
in the FB communications instructions settings in the PLC Setup, particularly
when using function blocks from the OMRON FB Library to execute FINS
messages or DeviceNet explicit messages communications. The values set in
this PLC Setup for OMRON FB Library will be automatically stored in the
related Auxiliary Area words A580 to A582 and used by the function blocks
from the OMRON FB Library.
345
Section 7-1
PLC Setup
7-1-2-4
Time and Interrupt Settings (CX-Programmer Timings Tab Page)
Enable Watch Cycle Time Setting
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+209
15
Settings
0: Default
1: Bits 0 to 14
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
A40108
Set to 1 to enable the Watch Cycle Time
Setting in bits 0 to 14. Leave this setting at 0 (Cycle Time
Too Long
for a maximum cycle time of 1 s.
Flag)
New
setting’s
effectiveness
Takes effect
at the start of
operation
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)
Watch Cycle Time
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+209
0 to 14
Settings
001 to FA0: 10 to
40,000 ms
(10-ms units)
Default: 001 (1 s)
Function
This setting is valid only when bit 15 of 209
is set to 1. The Cycle Time Too Long Flag
(A40108) will be turned ON if the cycle time
exceeds this setting.
Related
flags and
words
A264 and
A265
(Present
Cycle Time)
New
setting’s
effectiveness
Takes effect
at the start of
operation
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)
Cycle Time (Minimum Cycle Time)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+208
346
0 to 15
Settings
0001 to 7D00: 1 to
32,000 ms
(1-ms units)
Default: 0000
(No minimum)
Function
Related
flags and
words
Set to 0001 to 7D00 to specify a minimum
--cycle time. If the cycle time is less than this
setting, it will be extended until this time
passes. Leave this setting at 0000 for a variable cycle time. (Can’t be changed during
operation.)
This cycle time will apply to the program
execution cycle when a parallel processing
mode is used.
New
setting’s
effectiveness
Takes effect
at the start of
operation
Section 7-1
PLC Setup
Schedule Interrupt Interval
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+195
0 to 3
Settings
0 hex: 10 ms
1 hex: 1.0 ms
Default: 0 hex
Function
Sets the time interval for the scheduled
interrupt task.
Related
flags and
words
---
New
setting’s
effectiveness
Takes effect
at the start of
operation.
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)
Power OFF Detection Time (Power OFF Detection Delay Time)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+225
0 to 7
Settings
00 to 0A:
0 to 10 ms
(1-ms units)
Default: 00
Function
Related
flags and
words
--This setting determines how much of a
delay there will be from the detection of a
power interruption (approximately 10 to
25 ms after the AC power supply voltage
drops below 85% of the rated value or DC
power supply voltage drops below 80% of
the rated value) to the confirmation of a
power interruption. The default setting is 0
ms.
When the power OFF interrupt task is
enabled, it will be executed when the power
interruption is confirmed. If the power OFF
interrupt task is disabled, the CPU will be
reset and operation will be stopped.
New
setting’s
effectiveness
Takes effect
at startup or
at the start of
operation.
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)
Power OFF Interrupt Disable
Programming
Console address
Word
+225
Settings
Bit(s)
15
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
When this setting is set to 1, the power OFF --interrupt task will be executed when power
is interrupted.
New setting’s
effectiveness
Takes effect
at startup or
at the start of
operation.
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)
347
Section 7-1
PLC Setup
7-1-2-5
Special I/O Unit Cyclic Refreshing (CX-Programmer SIOU Refresh Tab
Page)
Item
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
Cyclic Refreshing of Units 0 to
15
+226
0 to 15
Cyclic Refreshing of Units 16
to 31
+227
0 to 15
Cyclic Refreshing of Units 32
to 47
+228
0 to 15
Cyclic Refreshing of Units 48
to 63
+229
0 to 15
Cyclic Refreshing of Units 64
to 79
+230
0 to 15
Cyclic Refreshing of Units 80
to 95
+231
0 to 15
Settings
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Default: 0
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Default: 0
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Default: 0
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Default: 0
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Default: 0
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
--These settings determine whether
data will be exchanged between the
specified Unit and the Special I/O
Unit’s allocated words (10
words/Unit) during cyclic refreshing
for Special I/O Units.
Turn ON the corresponding bit to disable cyclic refreshing when the Unit
will be refreshed in an interrupt task
by IORF(097), several Special I/O
Units are being used and you don’t
want to extend the cycle time, or the
cycle time is so short that the Special
I/O Unit’s internal processing can’t
keep up.
(Special I/O Units can be refreshed
from the program with IORF(097).)
New
setting’s
effectiveness
Takes
effect at the
start of
operation
Note If a Special I/O Unit is not refreshed periodically from the CPU Unit (at least
every 11 seconds), a CPU Unit monitoring error will occur. (The ERH indicator
and RUN indicator will be lit on the Special I/O Unit.) If cyclic I/O refreshing of
a Special I/O Unit is disabled, use the IORF(097) instruction to refresh the
Unit from the user program.
348
Section 7-1
PLC Setup
7-1-2-6
Basic I/O Unit Input Response Times (Unit Settings Tab Page on the CXProgrammer)
Item
Rack 0, Slot 0
Rack 0, Slot 1
Rack 0, Slot 2
Rack 0, Slot 3
Rack 0, Slot 4
Rack 0, Slot 5
Rack 0, Slot6
Rack 0, Slot 7
Rack 0, Slot 8
Rack 0, Slot 9
Rack 1, Slots 0 to 9
Rack 2, Slots 0 to 9
Rack 3, Slots 0 to 9
Rack 4, Slots 0 to 9
Rack 5, Slots 0 to 9
Rack 6, Slots 0 to 9
Rack 7, Slots 0 to 9
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+10
+11
+12
+13
+14
+15 to 19
+20 to 24
+25 to 29
+30 to 34
+35 to 39
+40 to 44
+45 to 49
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
0 to 7
8 to 15
See
Rack 0.
Settings
00: 8 ms
10: 0 ms
11: 0.5 ms
12: 1 ms
13: 2 ms
14: 4 ms
15: 8 ms
16: 16 ms
17: 32 ms
Default:
00 (8 ms)
Function
Sets the input response time
(ON response time = OFF
response time) for CS-series
Basic I/O Units. The default
setting is 8 ms and the setting
range is 0.5 ms to 32 ms.
This value can be increased to
reduce the effects of chattering and noise, or it can be
reduced to allow reception of
shorter input pulses.
Related
flags and
words
A220 to
A259:
Actual
input
response
times for
Basic I/O
Units
New setting’s
effectiveness
Takes
effect at
startup
349
Section 7-1
PLC Setup
7-1-2-7
Host Link (RS-232C) Port Tab Page
The following settings are valid when pin 5 on the DIP switch on the CPU Unit
is ON.
Host Link Settings
Communications Settings
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
15
Settings
0: Standard
1: PLC Setup (custom)
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
*The default settings are for 1 start bit, 7
A61902
data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits, and a baud (RS-232C
rate of 9,600 bps.
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At the next
cycle.
Mode: Communications Mode
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
8 to 11
Settings
00: Host link
05: Host link
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
This setting determines whether the RS232C port will operate in host link mode or
another serial communications mode. (Host
link can be specified with 00 or 05.)
The Peripheral bus mode is for communications with Programming Devices other than
the Programming Console.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Function
Related
flags and
words
These settings are valid only when the communications mode is set to host link or noprotocol.
These settings are also valid only when the
RS-232C Port Settings Selection is set to 1:
PLC Setup.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At the next
cycle.
Format: Data Bits
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
3
350
Settings
0: 7 bits
1: 8 bits
Default: 0
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At the next
cycle.
Section 7-1
PLC Setup
Format: Stop Bits
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
2
Settings
0: 2 bits
1: 1 bit
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
These settings are valid only when the communications mode is set to host link or noprotocol.
These settings are also valid only when the
RS-232C Port Settings Selection is set to 1:
PLC Setup.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Function
Related
flags and
words
These settings are valid only when the communications mode is set to host link or noprotocol.
These settings are also valid only when the
RS-232C Port Settings Selection is set to 1:
PLC Setup.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Function
Related
flags and
words
These settings are valid only when the communications mode is set to host link or noprotocol.
These settings are also valid only when the
RS-232C Port Settings Selection is set to 1:
PLC Setup.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At the next
cycle.
Format: Parity
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
0 to 1
Settings
00: Even
01: Odd
10: None
Default: 00
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At the next
cycle.
Baud Rate (bps)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+161
0 to 7
Settings
00: 9,600 bps
01: 300 bps
02: 600 bps
03: 1,200 bps
04: 2,400 bps
05: 4,800 bps
06: 9,600 bps
07: 19,200 bps
08: 38,400 bps
09: 57,600 bps
0A: 115,200 bps
Default: 00
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At the next
cycle.
Unit Number (for CPU Unit in Host Link Mode)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+163
0 to 7
Settings
00 to 1F:
(0 to 31)
Default: 00
Function
Related
flags and
words
This setting determines the CPU Unit’s unit
number when it is connected in a 1-to-N
(N=2 to 32) Host Link.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At the next
cycle.
351
Section 7-1
PLC Setup
NT Link Settings
Mode: Communications Mode
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
8 to 11
Settings
Function
Related
flags and
words
This setting determines whether the RS232C port will operate in host link mode or
another serial communications mode.
Note Communications will not be possible
with PTs set for 1:1 NT Links.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Settings
Function
Related
flags and
words
00: Standard
0A: High-speed NT
Link*
Default: 00
* Set to 115,200 bps when setting this value
from the CX-Programmer. To return to the
standard setting, leave the setting set to
“PLC Setup” and set the baud rate to 9,600
bps.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
02: 1:N NT Link
Default: 0
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At the next
cycle.
Baud Rate (bps)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+161
0 to 7
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At the next
cycle.
NT Link Max. (Maximum Unit Number in NT Link Mode)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+166
0 to 3
Settings
0 to 7
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
This setting determines the highest unit
number of PT that can be connected to the
PLC.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Function
Related
flags and
words
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At the next
cycle.
Peripheral Bus Settings
Communications Settings
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
15
Settings
0: Standard*
1: PLC Setup (custom)
Default: 0
*The default settings are for a baud rate of
9,600 bps.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At the next
cycle.
Mode: Communications Mode
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
8 to 11
352
Settings
04: Peripheral bus
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
This setting determines whether the RS232C port will operate in host link mode or
another serial communications mode. (Host
link can be specified with 00 or 05.)
The Peripheral Bus mode is for communications with Programming Devices other than
the Programming Console.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At the next
cycle.
Section 7-1
PLC Setup
Baud Rate (bps)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+161
0 to 7
Settings
00: 9,600 bps
06: 9,600 bps
07: 19,200 bps
08: 38,400 bps
09: 57,600 bps
0A: 115,200 bps
Default: 00
Function
Settings 00 and 06 through 0A are valid
when the communications mode is set to
peripheral bus.
Related
flags and
words
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At the next
cycle.
No-protocol Settings
Standard/Custom Settings
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
15
Settings
0: Standard
1: Custom
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
The standard settings are as follows:
A61902
1 stop bit, 7-bit data, even parity, 2 stop bits, (RS-232C
Port Settings
9,600 bps
Changing
Flag)
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Serial Communications Mode
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
08 to 11
Settings
Related
flags and
words
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
This setting is valid only in no-protocol communications mode. Set the Standard/Custom setting (word 160, bit 15) to 1 to enable
this setting.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
This setting is valid only in no-protocol communications mode. Set the Standard/Custom setting (word 160, bit 15) to 1 to enable
this setting.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
03 Hex: No-protocol This setting determines whether the RS232C port will operate in no-protocol mode
Default: 00 Hex
or another serial communications mode.
Data Length
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
3
Settings
0: 7-bit
1: 8-bit
Default: 0
Stop Bits
Programming
Console address
Word
+160
Settings
Bit(s)
2
0: 2 bits
1: 1 bit
Default: 0
353
Section 7-1
PLC Setup
Parity
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
00 to 01
Settings
Function
Related
flags and
words
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
This setting is valid only in no-protocol communications mode. Set the Standard/Custom setting (word 160, bit 15) to 1 to enable
this setting.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Settings
Function
Related
flags and
words
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
00 Hex: 9,600 bps
01 Hex: 300 bps
02 Hex: 600 bps
03 Hex: 1,200 bps
04 Hex: 2,400 bps
05 Hex: 4,800 bps
06 Hex: 9,600 bps
07 Hex: 19,200 bps
08 Hex: 38,400 bps
09 Hex: 57,600 bps
0A Hex: 115,200 bps
Default: 00 Hex
This setting is valid only in no-protocol communications mode. Set the Standard/Custom setting (word 160, bit 15) to 1 to enable
this setting.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Settings
Function
Related
flags and
words
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
00 Hex: Even
01 Hex: Odd
10 Hex: None
Default: 00
Baud Rate
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+161
00 to 07
Send Delay
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+162
00 to 15
354
0000 to 270F Hex (0 When the TXD(236) instruction is executed,
to 99,990 ms)
data will be sent from the RS-232C after the
send delay set here has expired.
Unit: 10 ms
Default: 0000
Section 7-1
PLC Setup
Start Code/End Code
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+164
8 to 15
+165
Settings
00 to FF
Default: 00
0 to 7
00 to FF
Default: 00
12
0: None
1: Code in 164
Default: 0
0: None
1: Code in 164
2: CR+LF
Default: 0
8 to 9
0 to 7
00: 256 bytes
01 to FF:
1 to 255 bytes
Default: 00
Function
Related
flags and
words
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
Start code: Set this start code only when the
start code is enabled (1) in bits 12 to 15 of
165.
End code: Set this end code only when the
end code is enabled (1) in bits 8 to 11 of
165.
Start code setting:
A setting of 1 enables the start code in 164
bits 8 to 15.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
A61901
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
This setting determines whether the communications mode for the RS-232C port
port.
The peripheral bus mode is used for all Programming Devices except for Programming
Consoles.
This setting determines whether the communications mode for the RS-232C port.
(Host Link can be used when specified to
either 0 or 5 hex.)
A61901 (RS232C Port
Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
A61901 (RS232C Port
Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
End code setting:
With a setting of 0, the amount of data being
received must be specified. A setting of 1
enables the end code in bits 0 to 7 of 164. A
setting of 2 enables an end code of CR+LF.
Set the data length to be sent and received
with no-protocol communications. The end
code and start code are not included in the
data length.
Set this value only when the end code setting in bits 8 to 11 of 165 is “0: None.”
This setting can be used to change the
amount of data that can be transferred at
one time by TXD(236) or RXD(235). The
default setting is the maximum value of 256
bytes.
Serial Gateway Settings
Communications Settings
Programming
Console address
Word
+160
Bit(s)
15
Settings
0: Default (standard)*
1: PLC Setup (custom)
Default: 0
Function
*The default settings are for a baud rate of
9,600 bps.
Mode: Communications Mode
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
8 to 11
+160
8 to 11
Settings
9: Serial Gateway
Default: 0
0: Host Link
5: Host Link
Default: 0
355
Section 7-1
PLC Setup
Data Bits
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
3
Settings
0: 7 bits
1: 8 bits
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
These settings are valid when the RS-232C A61901
Port Settings Selection is set to 1: PLC
(RS-232C
Setup.
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
New setting’s effectiveness
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Stop Bits
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
2
Settings
0: 2 bits
1: 1 bit
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
These settings are valid when the RS-232C A61901
Port Settings Selection is set to 1: PLC
(RS-232C
Setup.
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
New setting’s effectiveness
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Parity
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+160
0 to 1
Settings
00: Even
01: Odd
10: None
Default: 00
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
These setting is valid only when the communications mode is set to Host Link.
These settings are also valid only when the
RS-232C Port Settings Selection is set to 1:
PLC Setup.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
These setting is valid only when the communications mode is set to Host Link.
These settings are also valid only when the
RS-232C Port Settings Selection is set to 1:
PLC Setup.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Baud Rate (bps)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+161
0 to 7
356
Settings
00: 9,600
01: 300
02: 600
03: 1,200
04 2,400
05: 4,800
06: 9,600
07: 19,200
08: 38,400
09: 57,600
0A: 115,200
Default: 00
Section 7-1
PLC Setup
Response Monitoring Time
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+167
8 to 15
7-1-2-8
Settings
00: 5 s
01 to FF: 100 to
25,500 ms (Unit:
100 ms)
Default: 00
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
Monitors the time from when the FINS command that has been converted into the
specified protocol using Serial Gateway is
sent until the response is received.
Default: 5 s; PLC Setup: 0.1 to 25.5 s
Note: If a timeout occurs, the FINS end
code 0205 hex (response timeout) will be
returned to the FINS source.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Peripheral Port Tab Page
The following settings are valid when pin 4 on the DIP switch on the CPU Unit
is ON.
Host Link Settings
Communications Settings
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+144
15
Settings
0: Standard*
1: PLC Setup (Custom)
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
A61901
*The default settings are for 1 start bit, 7
data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits, and a baud (Peripheral
Port Settings
rate of 9,600 bps.
Changing
Flag)
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Mode: Communications Mode
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+144
8 to 11
Settings
00: Host Link
05: Host link
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
This setting determines whether the peripheral port will operate in host link mode or
another serial communications mode. (Host
link can be specified with 00 or 05.)
The Peripheral Bus Mode is for communications with Programming Devices other than
the Programming Console.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
357
Section 7-1
PLC Setup
Format: Data Bits
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+144
3
Settings
0: 7 bits
1: 8 bits
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
These settings are valid only when the communications mode is set to Host link.
These settings are also valid only when the
Peripheral Port Settings Selection is set to
1: PLC Setup.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
These settings are valid only when the communications mode is set to Host link.
These settings are also valid only when the
Peripheral Port Settings Selection is set to
1: PLC Setup.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
These setting is valid only when the communications mode is set to Host link.
These settings are also valid only when the
Peripheral Port Settings Selection is set to
1: PLC Setup.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
This setting is valid only when the communications mode is set to the Host Link mode.
These settings are also valid only when the
Peripheral Port Settings Selection is set to
1: PLC Setup.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
This setting determines the CPU Unit’s unit
number when it is connected in a 1-to-N
(N=2 to 32) Host Link.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Format: Stop Bits
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+144
2
Settings
0: 2 bits
1: 1 bit
Default: 0
Format: Parity
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+144
0 and 1
Settings
00: Even
01: Odd
10: None
Default: 00
Baud Rate (bps)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+145
0 to 7
Settings
00: 9,600 bps
01: 300 bps
02: 600 bps
03: 1,200 bps
04: 2,400 bps
05: 4,800 bps
06: 9,600 bps
07: 19,200 bps
08: 38,400 bps
09: 57,600 bps
0A: 115,200 bps
Default: 00
Unit Number (for CPU Unit in Host Link Mode)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+147
0 to 7
358
Settings
00 to 1F
(0 to 31)
Default: 00
Section 7-1
PLC Setup
NT Link Settings
Mode: Communications Mode
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+144
8 to 11
Settings
02: 1:N NT Link
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
This setting determines whether the RS232C port will operate in host link mode or
another serial communications mode.
Note Communications will not be possible
with PTs set for 1:1 NT Links.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
Baud Rate (bps)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+145
0 to 7
Settings
00: Standard
0A: High-speed NT
Link*
Default: 00
* Set to 115,200 bps when setting this value A61901
from the CX-Programmer.
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
NT Link Max. (Maximum Unit Number in NT Link Mode)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+150
0 to 3
Settings
0 to 7
Default: 0
Function
Related
flags and
words
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
This setting determines the highest unit
number of PT that can be connected to the
PLC in NT Link mode.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
This setting determines whether the communications mode for the peripheral port.
The Peripheral Bus Mode is used for all Programming Devices except for Programming
Consoles.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Peripheral Bus Settings
Communications Setting
Programming
Console address
Word
+144
Bit(s)
15
Settings
0: Default (standard)*
1: PLC Setup (custom)
Default: 0
*The default settings are for a baud rate of
9,600 bps.
Mode: Communications Mode
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+144
8 to 11
Settings
4: Peripheral bus
Default: 0
359
Section 7-1
PLC Setup
Baud Rate (bps)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+145
0 to 7
Settings
00: 9,600 bps
06: 9,600 bps
07: 19,200 bps
08: 38,400 bps
09: 57,600 bps
0A: 115,200 bps
Default: 00
Function
Related
flags and
words
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
The following settings are valid for the
Peripheral Bus Mode: 00 and 06 to 0A hex.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
This setting determines whether the communications mode for the peripheral port.
The peripheral bus mode is used for all Programming Devices except for Programming
Consoles.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
These settings are valid when the Peripheral Port Settings Selection is set to 1: PLC
Setup.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
These settings are valid when the Peripheral Port Settings Selection is set to 1: PLC
Setup.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Serial Gateway Settings
Communications Setting
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+144
15
Settings
0: Default (standard)*
1: PLC Setup (custom)
*The default settings are for a baud rate of
9,600 bps.
Mode: Communications Mode
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+144
8 to 11
Settings
9: Serial Gateway
Default: 0
Format: Data Bits
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+144
3
Settings
0: 7 bits
1: 8 bits
Default: 0
Format: Stop Bits
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+144
2
360
Settings
0: 2 bits
1: 1 bit
Default: 0
Section 7-1
PLC Setup
Format: Parity
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+144
0 to 1
Settings
00: Even
01: Odd
10: None
Default: 00
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
These setting is valid only when the communications mode is set to Host Link.
These settings are also valid only when the
Peripheral Port Settings Selection is set to
1: PLC Setup.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
These setting is valid only when the communications mode is set to Host Link.
These settings are also valid only when the
Peripheral Port Settings Selection is set to
1: PLC Setup.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Function
Related
flags and
words
New setting’s effectiveness
Monitors the time from when the FINS command is converted into CompoWay/F using
Serial Gateway and sent until the response
is received.
Default: 5 s; PLC Setup: 0.1 to 25.5 s
Note: If a timeout occurs, the FINS end
code 0205 hex (response timeout) will be
returned to the FINS source.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Baud Rate (bps)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+145
0 to 7
Settings
00: 9,600
01: 300
02: 600
03: 1,200
04 2,400
05: 4,800
06: 9,600
07: 19,200
08: 38,400
09: 57,600
0A: 115,200
Default: 00
Response Monitoring Time
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+151
8 to 15
7-1-2-9
Settings
00: 5 s
01 to FF: 100 to
25,500 ms (Unit:
100 ms)
Default: 00
Peripheral Service Tab Page (CPU Processing Mode Settings)
Peripheral Service Mode (Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode)
Instruction Execution Time
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+219
08 to 15
Settings
00
05 to FF (hex)
Default: 00 (hex)
Function
Related
flags and
words
The Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode will A266 and
A267
be used if a time slice is set for instruction
execution (5 to 255 ms in 1-ms increments).
Instructions will be executed at the set time
slice.
00: Disable priority servicing
05 to FF: Time slice for instruction execution
(5 to 255 ms in 1-ms increments)
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At start of
operation
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)
361
Section 7-1
PLC Setup
Peripheral Service Execution Time
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+219
00 to 07
Settings
00 to FF (hex)
Default: 00 (hex)
Function
Related
flags and
words
A266 and
This parameter sets the time slice for
peripheral servicing (0.1 to 25.5 ms in 0.1- A267
ms increments). The specified amount of
time will be used to service peripherals for
each time slice.
00: Disable priority servicing
01 to FF: Time slice for peripheral servicing
(0.1 to 25.5 ms in 0.1-ms increments)
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At start of
operation
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)
Target Units (Units for Priority Servicing)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+220
08 to 15
00 to 07
+221
08 to 15
00 to 07
+222
08 to 15
Settings
00
10 to 1F
20 to 2F
E1
FC
FD
Default: 00
Function
Up to five Units can be specified for priority
servicing.
00: Disable priority servicing
10 to 1F: CPU Bus Unit unit number (0 to
15) + 10 (hex)
20 to 7F: CS-series Special I/O Unit unit
number (0 to 96) + 20 (hex)
FC: RS-232C port
FD: Peripheral port
Related
flags and
words
---
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At start of
operation
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)
Sync/Async Comms (Parallel Processing Modes)
The following setting is supported only by the CS1-H CPU Units
Execution Mode (Parallel Processing Mode)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+219
08 to 15
362
Settings
00
01
02
Default: 00
Function
Related
flags and
words
This parameter specifies if I/O memory
--access is to be included in the peripheral
service processing executed in parallel with
instruction execution.
00: Not specified (disable parallel processing)
01: Synchronous (Synchronous Memory
Access
02: Asynchronous (Asynchronous Memory
Access)
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At start of
operation
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)
Section 7-1
PLC Setup
Set Time to All Events (Fixed Peripheral Servicing Time)
Enable Fixed Servicing Time
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+218
15
Settings
0: Default*
1: Bits 0 to 7
Default: 0
Function
Set to 1 to enable the fixed peripheral servicing time in bits 0 to 7.
*Default: 4% of the cycle time
Related
flags and
words
---
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At start of
operation
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)
Fixed Servicing Time
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+218
0 to 7
Settings
00 to FF:
0.0 to 25.5 ms
(0.1-ms units)
Default: 00
Function
Set the peripheral servicing time.
This setting is valid only when bit 15 of 218
is set to 1.
Related
flags and
words
---
When setting is read
by CPU Unit
At start of
operation
(Can’t be
changed during operation.)
363
Section 7-1
PLC Setup
7-1-2-10
FINS Protection Tab Page (Protection Against FINS Writes Across
Networks) (CS-series CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Only)
Enabling FINS Write Protection (Use FINS Write Protection)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
+448
15
Settings
0: Disable FINS
write protection
1: Enable FINS write
protection
Default: 0
Function
Enables or disables write protection for the
CPU Unit from FINS command sent over a
network (i.e., all connections except for
serial connections).
Related
flags and
words
---
New setting’s
effectiveness
At any time
Nodes Excluded from Write Protection (Protection Releasing Addresses)
Programming
Console address
Word
Bit(s)
New setting’s
effectiveness
Set the nodes and networks from which FINS write operations will be enabled. The total number of nodes set to be
excluded from write protection will be automatically set.
A maximum of 32 nodes can be set. If these settings are not made (i.e., if the total number of nodes is 0), write operations
will be disabled for all nodes but the local node.
Note: This setting is valid only when FINS write protection has been enabled.
+449 to
8 to 15
0 to 127
FINS command source network address
--At any time
480
(00 to 7F hex)
0 to 7
1 to 255
FINS command source node address
--(01 to FE hex)
Note: 255 (FF hex)
can be set to include
all nodes in the
specified network.
+448
0 to 7
0 to 32
Number of nodes excluded from protection --(00 to 20 hex)
(Automatically calculated by the CX-Programmer; do not set.)
364
Settings
Function
Related
flags and
words
Section 7-2
Explanations of PLC Setup Settings
7-2
Explanations of PLC Setup Settings
Basic I/O Unit Input Response Time
The input response time can be set for CS-series Basic I/O Units by Rack and
Slot number. Increasing this value reduces the effects of chattering and noise.
Decreasing this value allows reception of shorter input pulses, (but do not set
the ON response time or OFF response time to less than the cycle time).
Pulses shorter than the input
response time are not received.
Input such as a
proximity switch
Input bit
Input response time Input response time
The default setting for the input response time is 8 ms and the setting range is
0 to 32 ms. When the input response time is set to 0 ms, the only delay will be
the delays in the Unit’s internal elements. For information on the Unit’s internal
elements, refer to Appendix A Specifications of Basic I/O Units and High-density I/O Units and check the input response time for the Unit that you are
using.
The input response time settings are transferred to the CS-series Basic I/O
Units when the PLC is turned on.
When the Unit’s settings are changed, they are stored in A220 to A259 (Actual
Input Response Times for Basic I/O Units). When the settings in the PLC
Setup have been changed with the PLC in PROGRAM mode, the PLC Setup
settings will differ from the actual settings in the Units. In this case, the values
in A220 to A259 can be checked to see the input response times actually set
in the Units.
IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup
The IOM Hold Bit (A50012) can be turned ON to retain all of the data in I/O
Memory when the CPU Unit’s operating mode is switched between PROGRAM mode and RUN/MONITOR mode. When the PLC is turned on, the
IOM Hold Bit itself will be cleared (OFF) unless it is protected with this PLC
Setup setting.
If the IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup setting is ON, the status of the IOM Hold
Bit will be protected when the PLC is turned on. If this setting is ON and the
IOM Hold BIt itself is ON, all data in I/O memory will be retained when the
PLC is turned on.
Note If the backup battery fails or is disconnected, the IOM Hold Bit will be cleared
whether this setting is ON or OFF.
365
Section 7-2
Explanations of PLC Setup Settings
OFF (0): IOM Hold Bit cleared at start-up
Non-retained parts
of I/O memory
Power
OFF
Power Non-retained parts
ON
of I/O memory:
Cleared
Mode switch
Retained
Power on
IOM Hold Bit: 1
(ON)
Not retained
IOM Hold Bit: 0
(OFF)
Not retained when
power is turned on.
ON (1): IOM Hold Bit protected at start-up
Non-retained parts
of I/O memory
Mode switch
Retained
IOM Hold Bit: 1
(ON)
Power
OFF
Power
ON Non-retained parts
of I/O memory:
Retained
Power on
Retained
IOM Hold Bit: 0
(OFF)
Retained when
power is turned on.
Forced Status Hold Bit at Startup
The Forced Status Hold Bit (A50013) can be turned ON to retain the forced
status of all bits that have been force-set or force-reset when the CPU Unit’s
operating mode is switched between PROGRAM mode and RUN/MONITOR
mode. When the PLC is turned on, the Forced Status Hold Bit itself will be
cleared (OFF) unless it is protected with this PLC Setup setting.
If the Forced Status Hold Bit at Startup setting is ON, the status of the Forced
Status Hold Bit will be protected when the PLC is turned on. If this setting is
ON and the Forced Status Hold BIt itself is ON, all force-set and force-reset
bits will retain their forced status when the PLC is turned on.
Note If the backup battery fails or is disconnected, the Forced Status Hold Bit will
be cleared whether this setting is ON or OFF.
366
Section 7-2
Explanations of PLC Setup Settings
OFF (0): Forced Status Hold Bit cleared at start-up
Forced bit status
Mode switch
Power
OFF
Retained
Power
ON
Forced bit status
Power on
Forced Status
Hold Bit: 1 (ON)
Not retained
Forced Status
Hold Bit: 0 (OFF)
Not retained when
power is turned
ON.
ON (1): Forced Status Hold Bit protected at start-up
Forced bit status
Mode switch
Power
OFF
Retained
Forced Status
Hold Bit: 1 (ON)
Power
ON
Forced bit status
Power on
Retained
Forced Status
Hold Bit: 0 (OFF)
Retained when
power is turned
ON.
Startup Mode Setting
This setting determines whether the startup mode will be the mode set on the
Programming Console’s mode switch or the mode set here in the PLC Setup.
!Caution If the Startup Mode setting specifies the mode set on the Programming Console’s mode switch (0) but a Programming Console isn’t connected, a CS1
CPU Unit will automatically enter PROGRAM mode at startup, and a CS1-H
CPU Unit will automatically enter RUN mode at startup.
PRCN: Programming Console's mode switch
Mode switch
setting
Power ON
Power ON
RUN mode
(CS1-H CPU
Unit) or
PROGRAM
mode (CS1
CPU Unit) when
disconnected.
Other: PLC Setup's Startup Mode setting
PRG: PROGRAM mode
MON: MONITOR mode
RUN: RUN mode
Power ON
367
Section 7-2
Explanations of PLC Setup Settings
Detect Low Battery
This setting determines whether CPU Unit battery errors are detected. Set the
PLC Setup so that battery errors are not detected when using battery-free
operation. Refer to information on battery-free operation in the CS/CJ Series
Programming Manual for details.
If this setting is set to detect errors (0) and a battery error is detected, the Battery Error Flag (A40204) will be turned ON.
Note
1. The contents of the DM, EM, and HR Areas in the CPU Unit are not backed
up to flash memory; they are backed up only by a Battery. If the Battery
voltage drops, this data may be lost. Provide countermeasures in the program using the Battery Error Flag (A40204) to re-initialize data or take other actions if the Battery voltage drops.
2. A battery error will be detected when the battery is disconnected or its voltage drops below the minimum allowed.
Backup
Disconnected or
voltage too low
Battery Error Flag
(A40204) ON
Detect Interrupt Task Error
If this setting is set to detect errors (0), an interrupt task error will be detected
in the following cases:
• An interrupt task is executed for more than 10 ms during I/O refreshing of
a C200H Special I/O Unit or SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O.
• IORF(097) is executed in an interrupt task to refresh a Special I/O Unit’s
I/O while that Unit’s I/O is being refreshed during cyclic refreshing.
EM File Memory Settings
These settings are used to specify converting not converting part of the EM
Area to file memory.
CX-Programmer
With the CX-Programmer, file memory will be formatted when file memory
conversion and the number of banks to be converted is specified when transferring the PLC Setup. (EM banks cannot be formatted as file memory unless
they have been specified as file memory in the PLC Setup.)
Once part of the EM Area has been formatted for use as file memory, it can be
converted back to normal EM Area usage by changing these PLC Setup settings back to their previous value and “un-formatting” the EM banks with a
Programming Device.
Programming Console
368
The specified EM bank and all subsequent banks will be set aside as file
memory. Changing these settings using the Programming Console does not
format the specified EM banks; the EM banks must be formatted with a Programming Device after changing these PLC Setup settings. When formatting
the EM banks with a Programming Console, refer to 7-2 Memory Card Format
in the Programming Console Operation Manual (W341).
Section 7-2
Explanations of PLC Setup Settings
Note
1. The actual starting file memory bank is stored in A344 (EM File Memory
Starting Bank). When the settings in the PLC Setup have been changed
but the EM Area hasn’t been formatted, the PLC Setup setting will differ
from the actual file memory setting in the EM Area. In this case, the values
in A344 can be checked to see the actual file memory setting.
2. The EM Area cannot be formatted if the current EM bank is one of the
banks that is being converted to file memory.
The following example shows EM banks 2 to C (12) converted to file memory.
EM File Memory setting: 1
(EM file memory enabled)
Bank 0
Bank 1
Bank 2
:
Bank C
EM Starting Bank setting: 2
Converted
EM file memory
Peripheral Port Settings
These settings are effective only when pin 4 of the DIP switch on the front of
the CPU Unit is ON.
The default settings for the peripheral port are: host link mode, 1 start bit, 7
data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits, and a baud rate of 9,600 bps. Set the peripheral port settings in the PLC Setup when you need to change these settings.
Note When pin 4 of the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit is OFF, the CPU
Unit automatically detects the communications parameters of a connected
Programming Device (including Programming Consoles). Those automatically
detected parameters are not stored in the PLC Setup.
ON
ON
4
Peripheral port communications settings when DIP
switch pin 4 is ON:
Default settings:
Host link mode, 1 start bit, 7 data bits, even parity,
2 stop bits, and a baud rate of 9,600 bps
User-defined settings:
Set the communications mode (host link, NT Link,
or peripheral bus) and other settings such as the
baud rate.
369
Section 7-2
Explanations of PLC Setup Settings
RS-232C Port Settings
These settings are effective only when pin 5 of the DIP switch on the front of
the CPU Unit is OFF.
The default settings for the RS-232C port are: host link mode, 1 start bit, 7
data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits, and a baud rate of 9,600 bps. Set the RS232C port settings in the PLC Setup when you need to change these settings.
Specify the frame format when no-protocol mode is selected.
The RS-232C port settings can also be changed with STUP(237). The RS232C Port Settings Changing Flag (A61902) is turned ON when STUP(237) is
executed and it is turned OFF when the RS-232C port settings have been
changed.
Note When pin 5 of the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit is ON, the CPU Unit
automatically detects the communications parameters of a Programming
Device (including Programming Consoles) connected to the RS-232C port.
Those automatically detected parameters are not stored in the PLC Setup.
ON
ON
5
RS-232C port communications settings when DIP
switch pin 5 is OFF:
Default settings:
Host link mode, 1 start bit, 7 data bits, even parity,
2 stop bits, and a baud rate of 9,600 bps
User-defined settings:
Set the communications mode (host link, NT Link,
no-protocol*, or peripheral bus) and other settings
such as the baud rate.
*See notes 1 and 2 for details on no-protocol mode.
Note
1. A no-protocol transmission delay (address 162) can be set in no-protocol
mode. The operation of this delay is shown in the following diagram.
No-protocol delay
Delay
Transmission
Time
TXD(236)
2. The following table shows the message formats that can be set for transmissions and receptions in no-protocol mode. The format is determined by
the start code (ST) and end code (ED) settings. (From 1 to 256 bytes can
be received in no-protocol mode.)
370
Section 7-2
Explanations of PLC Setup Settings
Start code setting
None
Yes
None
DATA
ST+DATA
End code setting
Yes
CR+LF
DATA+ED
DATA+CR+LF
ST+DATA+ED
ST+DATA+CR+LF
Scheduled Interrupt Time Units
This setting determines the time units for the scheduled interrupt interval settings. Set the scheduled interrupt interval from the program with MSKS(690).
Note This setting cannot be changed while the CPU Unit is in RUN or MONITOR
mode.
Scheduled Interrupt Time Units
Interval
Scheduled interrupt task
Instruction Error Operation
This setting determines whether instruction execution errors are treated as
non-fatal (0) or fatal errors (1). A program error will be generated as an
instruction error if any of the following flags is turned ON.
Instruction error flag
Instruction Processing Error Flag
Indirect DM/EM BCD Error Flag
Illegal Access Error Flag
Address
Cause
A29508 The ER Flag was turned ON.
A29509 The contents of a DM/EM word wasn’t
BCD when BCD was required for indirect addressing.
A29510 Attempted to access part of memory
that is off-limits from the program.
If this setting is OFF (0), PLC operation will continue after one of these errors.
If this setting is ON (1), PLC operation will stop after one of these errors.
371
Section 7-2
Explanations of PLC Setup Settings
Minimum Cycle Time
Set the minimum cycle time to a non-zero value to eliminate inconsistencies in
I/O responses. This setting is effective only when the actual cycle time is
shorter than the minimum cycle time setting. If the actual cycle time is longer
than the minimum cycle time setting, the actual cycle time will remain
unchanged.
Note The minimum cycle time setting cannot be changed while the CPU Unit is in
RUN or MONITOR mode. As the length of the cycle time increases, the interval for servicing Programming Devices will also increase. The may slow down
the response to online operations from a Programming Device or make it difficult to establish an online connection.
Fixed cycle time
Watch Cycle Time
If the cycle time exceeds the watch (maximum) cycle time setting, the Cycle
Time Too Long Flag (A40108) will be turned ON and PLC operation will be
stopped. This setting must be changed if the normal cycle time exceeds the
default watch cycle time setting of 1 s.
Note The watch cycle time setting cannot be changed while the CPU Unit is in RUN
or MONITOR mode.
Watch Cycle
Time
Watch
Time
Actual Cycle
Time
Watch Cycle
Time
Actual Cycle
Time
Watch Cycle
Time
Actual Cycle
Time
↓
OVER
Cycle Time
Too Long Flag
A40108
CPU Unit operation
is stopped.
Note The default value for the watch cycle time is 1 s (1,000 ms).
Fixed Peripheral Servicing Time
This setting determines whether the peripheral servicing for the following processes is performed with the default settings (4% of the cycle time) or all
together in a fixed servicing time.
Exchange data with CS-series Special I/O Units when necessary
Exchange data with CS-series CPU Bus Units when necessary
Exchange data with peripheral port
Exchange data with serial communications ports
Exchange data with Inner Board
Service file access operations (Memory Card)
372
Section 7-2
Explanations of PLC Setup Settings
Peripheral servicing is performed at the end of the cycle, just after I/O refreshing.
Power ON
Initialization
Common processes
Cycle
time
Program
execution
(Tasks
executed in
order)
I/O refreshing
Peripheral servicing
The following table shows a breakdown of the peripheral servicing time.
Peripheral servicing time
Event service time for
CS-series Special I/O Units
Event service time for
CS-series CPU Bus Units
Event service time for
peripheral port
Event service time for
RS-232C port
Event service time for
serial communication ports
File access service time for
Memory Card
Default value
4% of the previous
cycle’s cycle time
Same as above.
Setting range
Uniform servicing time in ms:
0.0 to 25.5 ms in 0.1-ms units
Same as above.
Same as above.
Same as above.
Same as above.
The default value for each servicing process is 4% of the last cycle’s cycle
time.
In general, we recommend using the default value. Set a uniform servicing
time only when peripheral servicing is being delayed because each service
process is being spread over several cycles.
Note
1. When the peripheral servicing time is set to a time longer than the default
value, the cycle time will also be longer.
2. The fixed peripheral servicing time setting cannot be changed while the
CPU Unit is in RUN mode or MONITOR mode.
3. Use the Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode to give priority to servicing peripheral over program execution. Refer to the CS/CJ Series Programming
Manual for details.
373
Section 7-2
Explanations of PLC Setup Settings
Power OFF Interrupt Task
This setting determines whether or not a power OFF interrupt task will be executed when a power interruption is detected. (When this setting is set to 0, the
regular program will just stop when a power interruption is detected.)
The power OFF interrupt task will be stopped when the power hold time (processing time after power interrupt + power OFF detection delay time) has
elapsed. The maximum power hold time is 10 ms.
When a power OFF detection delay time has to be set, be sure that the power
OFF interrupt task can be executed in the available time (10 ms – power OFF
detection delay time).
Note The power OFF interrupt task setting cannot be changed while the CPU Unit
is in RUN mode or MONITOR mode.
Power OFF Detection
Delay Time
This setting determines how much of a delay there will be from the detection
of a power interruption (approximately after the power supply voltage drops
below 85% of the rated value) until a power interruption is established and the
regular program is stopped. The setting can be between 0 and 10 ms.
It takes a maximum of 10 ms for the internal 5 V DC power supply to drop to
0 V DC after the initial power interrupt detection time. Extend the time until
detection of a power interruption when momentary interruptions in a bad
power supply are causing PLC operation to stop.
Note The power OFF detection delay time setting cannot be changed while the
CPU Unit is in RUN mode or MONITOR mode.
Power Interrupt Detection Time
AC power supply: 10 to 25 ms
(not consistent)
DC power supply: 2 to 5 ms
(not consistent)
Power holding time (fixed: 10 ms)
Power interrupt
detection time
Regular program
Time
Power OFF
detection
delay time
0 to 10 ms
Power OFF
interrupt task
(See note.)
Stop
Note The execution time for the power OFF interrupt task must be less than the
maximum time available, namely: 10 ms – power OFF detection delay time.
Refer to CS/CJ Series Programming Manual for details on the power interrupt
task and on CPU Unit operation when power is turned OFF.
374
Section 7-2
Explanations of PLC Setup Settings
Special I/O Unit Cyclic Refreshing
When a Special I/O Unit will be refreshed in an interrupt task by IORF(097),
always disable cyclic refreshing for that Unit with this setting. The expected
results will not be achieved and the Interrupt Task Error Flag (A40213) will be
turned ON if IORF(097) is executed in an interrupt task during normal I/O
refreshing.
Special I/O Unit
CPU Unit
Special
I/O Unit
Area
These settings determine whether or not
data will be exchanged with the 10 words
allocated to each Special I/O Unit in the
Special I/O Unit Area during cyclic I/O
refreshing.
375
Explanations of PLC Setup Settings
376
Section 7-2
SECTION 8
I/O Allocations
This section describes I/O allocations to Basic I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units, and data exchange with
CPU Bus Units.
8-1
8-2
8-3
I/O Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
378
8-1-1
Unit Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
378
8-1-2
Creating I/O Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
380
I/O Allocation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
383
8-2-1
I/O Allocations to Basic I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
383
8-2-2
I/O Allocations to Special I/O Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
388
8-2-3
I/O Allocations to CPU Bus Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
389
8-2-4
I/O Allocations to SYSMAC BUS Slave Racks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
389
Allocating First Words to Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
390
8-4
Allocating First Words to Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
393
8-5
Detailed Information on I/O Table Creation Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
396
8-6
Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
396
8-6-1
Special I/O Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
396
8-6-2
Disabling Special I/O Unit Cyclic Refreshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
398
8-6-3
CPU Bus Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
399
377
Section 8-1
I/O Allocations
8-1
I/O Allocations
In CS-series PLCs, memory must be allocated to the Units mounted in the
PLC. I/O tables containing the models and locations of all Units and the allocations made to each must be created and these I/O tables must be registered in the CPU Unit. When the power supply is turned ON to the CPU Unit,
the I/O tables are compared against the mounted Units to verify their accuracy.
8-1-1
Unit Types
Memory is allocated differently to Basic I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CSseries CPU Bus Units.
Basic I/O Units
Basic I/O Units
CS-series/C200H Basic I/O Units
00000
CH
0123
4567
I/O Area
CS-series/C200H Group-2
High-density I/O Units
Allocation
CIO 0000 to CIO 0319 (See note 1.)
(Memory is allocated in one-word
units based on mounting position in
the Racks.)
CH
0123
4567
1 CH
10CH 0 2 4
1 3 5
29
Note
1
CN1
CN2
1
29
B
A
A
B
C200H Group-2 High-density
I/O Units (See note 2.)
OD219
A0
CH
7
15
7
15
8
B0
8
CH2
CN1
CN2
20
1
1
20
B
378
A
A
B
C200H-00219
CH1
1. The Rack's first word setting can be
changed from the default setting (CIO 0000)
to any word from CIO 0000 to CIO 0999.
The first word setting can be changed only
with a Programming Device other than a
Programming Console.
2. The unit number setting on the front of
C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units is
ignored. Words are allocated to these Units
based on their location in the Rack, just like
Basic I/O Units.
Section 8-1
I/O Allocations
Special I/O Units
Special I/O Units
CS-series Special I/O Units
C200H-00215
Special I/O Unit Area
Allocation
C200H Special I/O Units
(See note 2.)
ID215
RUN
0 1 2
3
CN1
8 9 10
11
0 1 2
3
CN2
8 9 10
11
CIO 2000 to CIO 2959
(Each Unit is allocated ten words
based on its unit number setting.)
Note 1. Although there are 96 unit number settings,
a maximum of 80 Units can actually be
mounted to a PLC because that is the
maximum number of slots possible.
2. Some Units classified as I/O Units (namely
C200H High-density I/O Units) are actually
treated as Special I/O Units.
CH
4
5
6
7
12 13 14
15
5 6 7
4
12 13 14
15
C200H-00215
MACINE
NO.
CN1
CN2
B A A
B
12
1
1
12
CS-series CPU Bus Units
CS-series CPU Bus Units
CPU Bus Unit Area
Allocation
CIO 1500 to CIO 1899
(Each Unit is allocated 25 words
based on its unit number setting.)
C200H-00215
RDY
COMM1
COMM2
PORT1
PORT2
SCB21
379
Section 8-1
I/O Allocations
8-1-2
Creating I/O Tables
There are two ways to allocate I/O memory to CS-series Units.
• Create the I/O tables online based on the Units actually mounted to the
PLC. This can be done from either the CX-Programmer or a Programming
Console. The Programming Device is connected online and then the I/O
tables are created based on the Units that are mounted.
• Create the I/O tables offline without basing them directly on the mounted
Units and then transfer the I/O tables to the PLC. This is done offline on
the CX-Programmer.
The word addresses, number of words, and mounting slot for each Unit are
registered in the CPU Unit as I/O tables. Data is exchanged between the Units
and the CPU Unit, e.g., to help prevent mistakes in mounting when replacing
Units.
Creating I/O Tables Based on Mounted Units
Connect a Programming Console or the CX-Programmer to a CPU Unit in a
PLC with all the Units mounted and create the I/O tables. In the I/O table creation operation, information on the Unit models and mounting locations are
registered in the parameter area of the CPU Unit as the registered I/O tables
for all Units mounted to the basic PLC system and SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O
Racks.
CX-Programmer or Programming Console
I/O table creation operation
Online
Information on models and
positions of mounted Units:
Registered I/O table
CPU Unit
Registered I/O tables written to
parameter area in CPU Unit.
I/O Memory Allocations
When I/O memory is allocated automatically, words are automatically allocated to Units in the order they are mounted to the Racks. Words are allocated to Units from left to right starting on Rack 0 and then left to right on each
Rack through Rack 7.
In order from left to right starting with slot 00
Rack 0
In order from Rack 0
through Rack 7
380
Rack 1
In order from left to right starting with slot 00
Section 8-1
I/O Allocations
I/O Table Creation with CX-Programmer
Use the following procedure to create the I/O tables online with the CX-Programmer.
1,2,3...
1. Double-click IO Table in the project tree in the main window. The I/O Table
Window will be displayed.
2. Select Options - Create. The models and positions of the Units mounted
to the Racks will be written to the CPU Unit as the registered I/O tables.
I/O Table Creation with a Programming Console
Use the following procedure to register the I/O table with a Programming Console.
CLR
FUN
SHIFT
CH
*DM
000000 CT00
000000 I/O TBL ?
Note If the Rack first words have already been set from the CX-Programmer, “Rack 1st Word En” will be displayed on the second line (CS1H only).
9
1
7
0
CHG
000000 I/O TBL
WRIT
????
3
000000 I/O TBL
WRIT
9713
WRITE
000000CPU BU ST?
0:CLR 1:KEEP
1
CLR
000000 I/O TBL
WRIT OK
000000 CT00
Creating I/O Tables without Mounted Units
With the CX-Programmer, I/O tables can be created offline without mounted
Units and then transferred to the CPU Unit. The information on Unit models
and mounting locations are written to the parameter area of the CPU Unit as
the registered I/O tables.
I/O Table Creation with CX-Programmer
Use the following procedure to create the I/O tables offline with the CX-Programmer and then transfer them to the CPU Unit. Once the Units that are to
be mounted are set for each Rack, the CX-Programmer will automatically allocate words according to Rack and slot positions starting from CIO 0000.
1,2,3...
1. Double-click IO Table in the project tree in the main window. The I/O Table
Window will be displayed.
2. Double-click the Rack to be edited. The slots will be displayed for the Rack.
3. Right-click the slot to which to assign a Unit and select the Unit from the
pop-up menu.
381
Section 8-1
I/O Allocations
4. When all the desired Units have been assigned to slots, select Options Transfer to PLC. The I/O tables will be transferred.
With the CX-Programmer, you can also assign any desired word to an I/O Unit
regardless of it’s position on the Racks.
Setting the First Word on a Rack
The first word allocated on a Rack can be set to allocate specific words to the
Units on the Rack regardless of the order in which the Rack is connected.
Words will be allocated consecutively to the Units on the Rack in the order
that Units are mounted to the Rack. Refer to 8-3 Allocating First Words to
Racks for details.
Setting the First Word on Each Rack
Rack 0
Rack 1
The first word for slot 00 on the Rack is set. Words
are then allocated in order to Units from left to right.
The first word for slot 00 on the Rack is set. Words
are then allocated in order to Units from left to right.
Note The first words for Racks cannot be set at the same time as the first words for
slots.
Setting the First Word for a Slot
The first word allocated to the Unit in any slot on any Rack can be set regardless of the order of the Rack or the position of the slot. Words are then allocated in sequence to the following Units in the order they are mounted. Refer
to 8-4 Allocating First Words to Slots for details.
Setting the First Words for Specific Slots
A word is set for slot 00 on the CPU Rack for group 00.
A word is set for slot 02 on the CPU Rack for group 01.
Rack 0
Rack 1
A word is set for slot 02 on Rack 1 for group 02.
Note The first words for Racks cannot be set at the same time as the first words for
slots.
382
Section 8-2
I/O Allocation Methods
Overview
Method
Operation
Using actual
mounted Units
Not using
actual
mounted Units
Perform I/O table
creation online.
Edit the I/O tables
offline and transfer
them to CPU Unit.
Note
Allocations
Automatic allocations according to
mounting position
Automatic allocations according to
mounting position
Partial manual
Allocating Rack
allocation without first words
restrictions by
Allocation slot first
mounting position words
Rack allocation
order
In order from Rack 0
to Rack 7
In order from Rack 0
to Rack 7
User-set
Slot allocation
order within Rack
Left to right from
slot 00
Left to right from
slot 00
Left to right from
slot 00
Left to right from
any slot allocated a
first word
1. Always create I/O tables either online or by editing them offline and transferring them to the CPU Unit. The CPU Unit will not be able to recognize
Basic I/O Units, Special I/O Units, CPU Bus Units, or Units on SYSMAC
BUS I/O Rack unless I/O tables are registered in the CPU Unit.
2. For CS1-H CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later, CPU Bus Units can be used even if
they are not registered in the I/O tables, this function is provided to enable
online connections from Programming Devices running on personal computers (e.g., the CX-Programmer) and is not intended for normal system
operation. Always register I/O tables in the CPU Unit before starting operation.
3. The C200HX/HG/HE, C200H, and C200HS PLCs use fixed word allocations for slots, enabling operation without I/O tables. I/O tables were created only to prevent Units from being mounted to the wrong slot. With the
CS-series PLCs, the words allocated to any particular slots are not fixed.
Words are merely allocated to the Units actually mounted. If no Unit is
mounted, no words are allocated. If the mounted Unit requires more than
one word, the required number of words is allocated. Operation for CS-series PLCs is thus not possible unless I/O tables are registered.
8-2
8-2-1
I/O Allocation Methods
I/O Allocations to Basic I/O Units
Basic I/O Units include the following Units:
• CS-series Basic I/O Units
• C200H Basic I/O Units
• C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units
These Units are allocated words in the I/O Area (CIO 0000 to CIO 0319) and
can be mounted to the CPU Rack, CS-series Expansion Racks, and C200H
Expansion I/O Racks (See note 2).
Note
1. Refer to 2-4 Units for list of specific Basic I/O Units.
2. CS-series Basic I/O Units cannot be mounted to C200H Expansion I/O
Racks.
383
Section 8-2
I/O Allocation Methods
Allocation Methods
When I/O tables are created in the order of the Racks and the order that Units
are mounted, I/O words will be allocated as described below. If a Programming Console or the CX-Programmer is connected online and the I/O tables
are created automatically according to the Units that are actually mounted,
the CPU Unit will automatically create and register the I/O tables. If the I/O
tables are created offline using the CX-Programmer, the CX-Programmer will
automatically allocate words according to the Unit settings that have been
made.
Basic I/O Units on the CPU Rack
Basic I/O Units on the CPU Rack are allocated words from left to right starting
from CIO 0000 and each Unit is allocated as many words as it requires.
Note
1. Units that have 1 to 16 I/O points are allocated 16 bits (1 word) and Units
that have 17 to 32 I/O points are allocated 32 bits (2 words).
2. I/O words are not allocated to empty slots. To allocate words to an empty
slot, change the I/O table with a Programming Device.
3. The unit number setting on the front of C200H Group-2 High-density I/O
Units is ignored. Words are allocated to these Units based on their location
on the Rack, just like Basic I/O Units.
CIO
0000
Power Supply Unit
CPU Unit
Slot numbers 2, 3, 5, 8, and 10
CPU Rack
Example 1
Power Supply Unit
IN OUT OUT
IN
IN
8
32
64
16
8
CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO
0000 0001 0002 0006 0007
to
to
0008
0005
CPU Unit
The following example shows the I/O allocations to 5 Basic I/O Units on the
CPU Rack.
CPU Rack
Example 2
The following example shows the I/O allocations to 4 Basic I/O Units on the
CPU Rack with one empty slot.
384
IN
96
CIO
0000
CIO
0001
to
0002
CIO
0003
to
0008
Empty OUT
96
CIO
0009
to
0014
Power Supply Unit
IN
32
CPU Unit
CPU Rack
IN
16
Section 8-2
I/O Allocation Methods
Example 3
The following example shows the I/O allocations to 5 Basic I/O Units in the
CPU Rack. Two slots are filled with Dummy Units to reserve I/O words for
those slots.
IN
8
CPU Unit
CIO
0000
to
0001
OUT
ReRe8
served served
16
32
CIO
0002
CIO
CIO
0003 0004
to
0005
Power Supply Unit
CPU Rack
IN
32
CIO
0006
Note Use the CX-Programmer’s I/O table change operation to reserve words for the
empty slots.
Basic I/O Units on CS-series and C200H Expansion Racks
Power Supply Unit
CIO
0000
Power Supply Unit
Words are allocated in order
beginning with the Expansion
Rack nearest the CPU Rack.
Power Supply Unit
CPU Unit
I/O allocation to Basic I/O Units continues from the CPU Rack to the Expansion Rack (CS-series Expansion Rack or C200H Expansion I/O Rack) connected to the CPU Rack. Words are allocated from left to right and each Unit
is allocated as many words as it requires, just like Units in the CPU Rack.
CPU Rack
CS-series Expansion Rack
CS-series Expansion Rack
385
Section 8-2
I/O Allocation Methods
Example
IN
16
CIO
0010
IN Empty OUT OUT
12
32
5
CIO
CIO CIO
0011
0013 0014
and
0012
IN
8
IN OUT served IN
16 32
16
8
Re-
CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO
0015 0016 0017 0018 0019
and
0020
Power Supply Unit
CPU Rack
Power Supply Unit
IN
32
CS-series Expansion
Rack
Power Supply Unit
IN OUT OUT
64 16 32
CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO
0000 0001 0003 0007 0008
and to
and
0002 0006
0009
IN
16
CPU Unit
The following example shows the I/O allocation to Basic I/O Units in the CPU
Rack and two CS-series Expansion Racks.
CS-series Expansion
Rack
Note Use the CX-Programmer’s I/O table change operation to reserve a word for
the empty slot.
Allocations to CS-series Long-distance Expansion Racks
In configurations containing CS-series Long-distance Expansion Racks, up to
two series of CS-series Long-distance Expansion Racks can be included.
Words are automatically allocated to the Units mounted to the Racks in order
of rack number and slot in the same way as for other configurations. The CPU
Rack is rack 0, the CS-series Expansion Rack (if there is one) is Rack 1. Rack
numbers are then assigned in order to the Racks in series A of CS-series
Long-distance Expansion Racks and finally to the Racks in series B of CSseries Long-distance Expansion Racks, to a maximum rack number of 7.
Although words are automatically allocated, the first word on each Rack can
be set.
Note
1. I/O words are not allocated to the I/O Control Units or I/O Interface Units.
2. No C200H Units of any kind can be mounted to CS-series Long-distance
Expansion Racks.
3. CS-series CPU Bus Units should always be placed on the CPU Rack or
CS-series Expansion Rack. Although they can be placed on CS-series
Long-distance Expansion Racks, doing so is not recommended because it
will increase the cycle time.
386
Section 8-2
I/O Allocation Methods
Reserving I/O Words for Expected Changes
If the system configuration will be changed at a later date, changes to the program can be minimized by reserving I/O words in advance for future Unit
changes or additions. To reserve I/O words, edit the I/O table with the CX-Programmer.
I/O Table Editing Operation
1,2,3...
1. Double-click IO Table in the project tree in the main window. The I/O Table
Window will be displayed.
2. Right-click the slot for which a word is to be reserved and select the Dummy item from under the Basic I/O Unit with the correct number of I/O points.
Note
1. Do not execute the I/O table creation operation after completing the above
editing operation. The reserved word settings will be lost.
2. The following High-density I/O Units are not Basic I/O Units, but Special I/O
Units. These Units are allocated 10 words/Unit in the Special I/O Unit Area
(CIO 2000 to CIO 2959) based on their unit number settings. Refer to 8-22 I/O Allocations to Special I/O Units for more details.
Name
High-density
I/O Units
Specifications
32-point DC Input Unit
32-point TTL Input Unit
32-point Transistor Output Unit
32-point TTL Output Unit
16-point TTL Input/16-point TTL Output Unit
16-point DC Input/16-point Transistor Output Unit
16-point DC Input/16-point Transistor Output Unit
Model
C200H-ID215
C200H-ID501
C200H-OD215
C200H-OD501
C200H-MD501
C200H-MD215
C200H-MD115
387
Section 8-2
I/O Allocation Methods
8-2-2
I/O Allocations to Special I/O Units
Special I/O Units include the following Units:
• CS-series Special I/O Units
• C200H Special I/O Units
Each of these Units is allocated ten words in the Special I/O Unit Area
(CIO 2000 to CIO 2959) according the unit number set on the Unit.
Special I/O Units can be mounted to the CPU Rack, CS-series Expansion
Racks, and C200H Expansion I/O Racks (see note 2).
Note
1. Refer to 2-4 Units for more details on the available Special I/O Units.
2. CS-series Special I/O Units cannot be mounted to C200H Expansion I/O
Racks.
Word Allocation
The following table shows which words in the Special I/O Unit Area are allocated to each Unit according to unit number.
Unit number
0
1
2
Words allocated
CIO 2000 to CIO 2009
CIO 2010 to CIO 2019
CIO 2020 to CIO 2029
:
15
:
CIO 2150 to CIO 2159
:
95
:
CIO 2950 to CIO 2959
Special I/O Units are ignored during I/O allocation to Basic I/O Units. Slots
containing Special I/O Units are treated as empty slots and aren’t allocated
any words in the I/O Area.
IN Special OUT Special OUT
I/O
I/O
16
16
32
Unit
Unit
CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO
0000 2000
0001 2010 0002
and
to
to
2009
2019 0003
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
388
Unit
C200H-ID212 16-point DC Input Unit
C200H-AD002 Analog Input Unit
C200H-OD21A 16-point Transistor Output Unit
C200H-NC211 Position Control Unit
C200H-OD218 32-point Transistor Output Unit
Words
required
1
10
1
20
2
Words allocated
Power Supply Unit
The following example shows the I/O word allocation to Basic I/O Units and
Special I/O Units in the CPU Rack.
CPU Unit
Example
CPU Rack
Unit
number
CIO 0000
--CIO 2000 to CIO 2009
0
CIO 0001
--CIO 2010 to CIO 2029
1
CIO 0002 and CIO 0003 ---
Group
Basic I/O Unit
Special I/O Unit
Basic I/O Unit
Special I/O Unit
Basic I/O Unit
Section 8-2
I/O Allocation Methods
8-2-3
I/O Allocations to CPU Bus Units
Each CPU Bus Unit is allocated 25 words in the CPU Bus Unit Area
(CIO 1500 to CIO 1899) according the unit number set on the Unit. CPU Bus
Units can be mounted to the CPU Rack or CS-series Expansion Racks.
Word Allocations
The following table shows which words in the CS-series CPU Bus Unit Area
are allocated to each Unit.
Unit number
Words allocated
CIO 1500 to CIO 1524
CIO 1525 to CIO 1549
CIO 1550 to CIO 1574
0
1
2
:
:
15
CIO 1875 to CIO 1899
CS-series CPU Bus Units are ignored during I/O allocation to Basic I/O Units.
Slots containing CS-series CPU Bus Units are treated as empty slots and
aren’t allocated any words in the I/O Area.
The following example shows the I/O word allocation to Basic I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CS-series CPU Bus Units in the CPU Rack.
Special CPU
I/O
Bus
Unit
Unit
CIO
0000
Slot
Unit
Words
required
0
1
C200H-ID212 16-point DC Input Unit
C200H-ASC02/11/21/31 ASCII Unit
2
C200H-SCU21-V1 Serial Communications Unit 25
3
C200H-OD21A 16-point Transistor Output Unit
4
C200H-SCU21-V1 Serial Communications Unit 25
8-2-4
CIO
2000
to
2009
1
10
1
CIO
1500
to
1521
OUT
16
CPU
Bus
Unit
CIO
0001
CIO
1525
to
1549
Words allocated
CPU Rack
Power Supply Unit
IN
16
CPU Unit
Example
Unit
number
Group
CIO 0000
CIO 2000 to
CIO 2009
CIO 1500 to
CIO 1524
CIO 0001
--0
Basic I/O Unit
Special I/O Unit
0
CS-series CPU Bus
Unit
Basic I/O Unit
CIO 1525 to
CIO 1549
1
---
CS-series CPU Bus
Unit
I/O Allocations to SYSMAC BUS Slave Racks
Each SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Slave Rack is allocated 10 words in the
SYSMAC BUS Area (CIO 3000 to CIO 3079) according the unit number (0 to
7) set on the Slave Unit. No words in the I/O Area are allocated to Units in
Slave Racks.
Each slot in the Slave Rack is allocated one of the Rack’s 10 words. The
words are allocated from left to right. One word is allocated to every slot even
if the slot is empty and the last two words allocated to each Rack are not used
because the Slave Racks have only 8 slots.
The Master and Slave Units themselves do not require any words.
389
Section 8-3
Allocating First Words to Racks
Example
The following example shows the word allocation to 3 Slave Racks.
SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O
Master Unit
SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Remote I/O Slave Rack
Slave Unit with
unit number 0
1
2
3
:
8
Not used.
Not used.
9
10
:
16
17
18
19
20
:
26
Not used.
Not used.
Slave Unit with
unit number 2
Slave Unit with
unit number 1
Slave Unit with
unit number 0
Slave Unit with
unit number 1
Slave Unit with
unit number 2
CIO 3000 to CIO 3079 can be used as work words/bits when a SYSMAC BUS
System is not being used. Also, even if a SYSMAC BUS System is used,
words that are not allocated in the SYSMAC BUS System, such as CIO 3030
to CIO 3079 in the above example, can be used as work bits/words.
8-3
Allocating First Words to Racks
In the CS-series PLCs, the first word allocated to each Rack can be set with
the CX-Programmer’s I/O table edit operation. For example, the CPU Rack
can be set to be allocated words starting with CIO 0000; the next Rack, words
starting with CIO 0100; the next Rack, words starting with CIO 0200; etc. This
can make it easier to check word allocations to Units without calculating all the
way from the CPU Rack.
Note The first words for Racks cannot be set at the same time as the first words for
slots.
Word Allocations
390
For Racks in which the first word address has been set, words are allocated to
Units in the order that the Units are mounted (from left to right) beginning with
the specified first word. Words are not allocated to empty slots.
Section 8-3
Allocating First Words to Racks
For Racks in which the first word address has not been set, words are allocated in rack-number order (lowest to highest) continuing from the last word
allocated to the previous rack and starting with CIO 0000 on the first Rack for
which the first word is not set.
Example: Setting the First Words for Racks
First word:
CIO 0100
Rack number 1
First word:
CIO 0200
CIO CIO CIO
0200 0201 0202
Empty
CIO
0203
Power Supply Unit
CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO
0000 0001 0002 0003 0004
CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO
0300 0301 0302 0303 0304
Power Supply Unit
Rack number 3
First word:
CIO 0300
CPU Rack
CS Expansion Rack
Rack number 2
No first word
setting
Power Supply Unit
CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO
0100 0101 0102 0103 0104
Power Supply Unit
Rack number 0
CPU Unit
In this example, the first words have been set for Racks 0 (the CPU Rack), 2,
and 3. For simplicity, only 16-bit Units have been used.
CS Expansion Rack
CS Expansion Rack
Rack First Word Settings
Rack
CPU Rack
Rack 1
Rack 2
Rack 3
First word
CIO 0100
CIO 0200
Not set
CIO 0300
391
Section 8-3
Allocating First Words to Racks
Note Rack numbers (0 to 7) are fixed according to the order that the Racks are
physically connected with cable. The CPU Rack is always Rack 0 and the
other Racks are, in order, Racks 1 to 7. These numbers cannot be changed.
In the above example, the shaded Racks are allocated words starting from the
specified first words. The non-shaded Racks are allocated in order from left to
right and in order of Rack starting from CIO 0000.
Setting First Rack Words from the CX-Programmer
The first word allocated on each Rack can be set from the CX-Programmer.
These settings are not possible from a Programming Console.
Note For CS1-H CPU Units, an indication of whether or not the first rack words
have been set will be displayed on a Programming Console.
Use the following procedure to set the first rack words.
1,2,3...
1. Select the Rack/Slot Start Addresses from the Option Menu on the I/O
Table Window. The following dialog box will be displayed.
2. Select the Rack Start Addresses Settings Option and click the OK Button.
3. In the dialog box that will appear, remove the checkmarks from the settings
disabling the first rack word settings and set the address of the first words
for the CPU Rack and Expansion Racks (1 to 7).
Setting
Rack Start Address
Invalid
Setting range
Default
Remarks
0 to 9000
0
Same for all Racks
Selected or cleared Selected (invalid)
4. Click the OK Button.
Note Up to 8 Racks can be set for any CPU Unit model.
392
Section 8-4
Allocating First Words to Slots
Confirming First Rack Word Settings on a Programming Console
With a CS1-H CPU Unit, the Programming Console can be used to check
whether or not the first word has been set on a Rack. Use the following procedure.
1,2,3...
1. Press the FUN, SHIFT, and CH Keys to start the I/O table creation operation. If the first work for a Rack has been set, a message saying so will appear on the second line of the display.
FUN
SHIFT
CH
*DM
000000I/O TBL ?
Rack 1st Word En
If nothing is displayed, then a first word has not been set.
2. Press the CHG Key, enter the password (9713), and then press the
WRITE Key to continue creating the I/O tables, or press the CLR Key to
cancel the operation and return to the initial display.
Precautions in Setting Rack First Words
• Be sure to make first word settings so that allocated words do not overlap.
The first word setting for a rack can be any address from CIO 0000 to
CIO 0900. If the same word is allocated to two Racks, the I/O tables cannot be created and the Duplication Error Flag (A26103) in the I/O Table
Error Information will turn ON.
• Always register the I/O table after installing an I/O Unit, after setting a rack
number, or after setting the first word allocation for a Rack. The I/O Table
Registration operation registers the I/O words allocated to the Racks.
• I/O words will not be allocated to empty slots. If an I/O Unit will be
installed later, reserve words for the empty slot by changing the I/O table
with a Programming Device’s I/O Table Change Operation.
• If the actual system configuration is changed after registering the I/O table
so that the number of words or I/O type does not match the I/O table, an
I/O verification error (A40209) or I/O setting error (A40110) will occur. A
CS-series CPU Bus Unit Setting Error (A40203) or Special I/O Unit Setting Error (A40202) may occur as well.
• When a Unit is removed, words can be reserved for the missing Unit using
the I/O Table Change Operation. If a Unit is changed or added, all of the
words in the program following that Unit’s allocated words will be changed
and the I/O Table Registration Operation will have to be performed again.
8-4
Allocating First Words to Slots
In the CS-series PLCs, the first word allocated to a slot on any Rack can be
set with the CX-Programmer’s I/O table edit operation regardless of the position of the slot. This feature can be used whenever it’s necessary to control
allocations to specific Units, e.g., to group allocated I/O words by device or circuit.
The first word can be set for up to 64 slots.
Note The first words for slots cannot be set at the same time as the first words for
Racks.
Word Allocations
When setting first words for slots, the first word must be set for slot 00 on the
CPU Rack. The first word can then be set for any slot on any Rack for up to 63
other slots.
393
Section 8-4
Allocating First Words to Slots
Each first word set for a slot creates a group starting with that slot. Words are
allocated starting from the specified word to the first slot in the group and continuing left to right allocating consecutive words to each Unit until the next
group (i.e., until the next Unit for which a first slot word is set). The next group
can start on the same Rack or on a following Rack.
Example: Setting the First Words for Racks
In this example, a first slot word has been set in the middle of each Rack. For
simplicity, only 16-bit Units have been used.
1
2
3
4
CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO
0000 0001 0002 0100 0101
Power Supply Unit
0
Rack number 0
Group 01 set for first
slot word of CIO 0200
CPU Unit
Group 00 set for first
slot word of CIO 0000
CPU Rack
Group 02 set for first slot word of CIO 0200
1
2
CIO CIO CIO
0102 0103 0200
3
4
Empty
CIO
0201
CS Expansion Rack
Power Supply Unit
0
Group 03 set for first slot word of CIO 0300
1
2
3
4
CIO CIO CIO CIO CIO
0202 0203 0300 0301 0302
Power Supply Unit
0
CS Expansion Rack
First Slot Word Settings
Group
00
01
02
03
Rack
CPU Rack
CPU Rack
Rack 1
Rack 2
Slot
00
03
02
02
Word
CIO 0000
CIO 0100
CIO 0200
CIO 0300
Note Group 00 must start at slot 00 on the CPU Rack. Any word can be set. Any
slot can be set on any Rack for groups 01 to 63.
Setting First Slot Words from the CX-Programmer
First slot words can be set from the CX-Programmer. These settings are not
possible from a Programming Console.
Note For CS1-H CPU Units, an indication of whether or not the first rack words
have been set will be displayed on a Programming Console.
Use the following procedure to set the first rack words.
394
Section 8-4
Allocating First Words to Slots
1,2,3...
1. Select the Rack/Slot Start Addresses from the Option Menu on the I/O
Table Window. The following dialog box will be displayed.
2. Select the Slot Start Addresses Settings Option and click the OK Button.
3. In the dialog box that will appear, set the first word for slot 00 on the CPU
Rack.
4. To change the setting from CIO 0000, click the Edit Button. The follow dialog box will appear.
5. Set the desired word and click the OK Button.
6. To set slot first words for other groups, click the Add Button and make the
appropriate settings for the Rack, slot, and word.
Up to 64 groups can be set for the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Ver. 2.0. Only 8
groups can be set for the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Ver. 1.0
Setting
Group
Setting range
Default
00 to 63
00
Rack
CPU Rack
(“MainRack”)
Racks 1 to 7
00 to 99
0 to 999
Slot
First word
CPU Rack
0
0
Remarks
Groups numbers are allocated
automatically in the order the
groups are displayed and set.
Group 00 always starts at slot 00
on the CPU Rack.
---
395
Detailed Information on I/O Table Creation Errors
Section 8-5
Precautions in Setting First Slot Words
When the I/O tables are edited, the CX-Programmer checks for any duplications in word allocations caused by first word settings. It is conceivable, however, that duplications in word allocations could occur after the I/O tables have
been registered, e.g., as the result of replacing a 1-word Unit with a 2-word
Unit. In this case the extra word needed by the new Unit would still also be
allocated to the next Unit.
When the PLC is turned ON, the CPU Unit checks the registered I/O tables
against the actual Units mounted to the PLC. If there are any duplications, and
error will occur and it will be no longer possible to edit the I/O tables. If this
happens, the I/O tables will have to be deleted and recreated or retransferred
from a Programming Devices.
8-5
Detailed Information on I/O Table Creation Errors
With a CS1-H CPU Unit, the contents of A261 provides information on the
Unit causing the error whenever one occurs when creating the I/O tables from
the Programming Console or CX-Programmer. This information will make it
easier to find the Unit causing the problem with troubleshooting I/O tables.
Refer to SECTION 11 Troubleshooting for actual procedures.
Name
CPU Bus Unit Setup
Area Initialization
Error Flag
I/O Overflow Flag
Address
Word Bit
A261 00
02
Duplication Error Flag
03
I/O Bus Error Flag
04
SYSMAC BUS Recognition Error Flag
06
Special I/O Unit Error
Flag
07
I/O Unconfirmed Error
Flag
09
8-6
Contents
When
At
Setting
changing startup timing
to RUN
mode
ON: Error in CPU Bus Unit Setup
Held
Cleared When I/O
tables are
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
created
ON: Overflow in maximum number of I/O points.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: The same unit number was used more than
once.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: I/O bus error
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: SYSMAC BUS detection ended in an error.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: Error in a Special I/O Unit
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: I/O detection has not been completed.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units
This section describes how data can be exchanged between Special I/O Units
or CS-series CPU Bus Units, and the CPU Unit.
8-6-1
Special I/O Units
Special I/O Units include C200H Special I/O Units and CS-series Special I/O
Units. Data can be exchanged between Special I/O Units and the CPU Unit
through the Special I/O Unit Area, the DM Area, or FINS commands.
Special I/O Unit Area
(I/O Refreshing)
396
Data is exchanged each cycle during I/O refreshing of the Special I/O Unit
Area. Basically, 10 words are allocated to each Special I/O Unit based on its
unit number setting. The number of words actually used by the Special I/O
Unit varies; there are models that require 2 words, 4 words, and 20 words.
Section 8-6
Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units
The Special I/O Unit Area ranges from CIO 2000 to CIO 2959 (10 words × 96
Units).
Special I/O Unit
CPU Unit
Special I/O Unit Area
10 words/Unit
Transferred in
I/O refreshing
Transfer of Words Allocated in DM Area
C200H Special I/O Units
The 100 words allocated to each Unit are transferred from the DM Area to the
Unit when the PLC is turned on or the Unit is restarted. Some C200H Special
I/O Units do not use any of the allocated DM words and others use only a part
of the allocated words.
CS-series Special I/O
Units
There are three times that data may be transferred through the words allocated to each Unit. The timing of data transfers depends on the model being
used.
1,2,3...
1. Data transferred when the PLC is turned on.
2. Data transferred when the Unit is restarted.
3. Data transferred when necessary.
Some models transfer data in both directions, from the DM Area to the Unit
and from the Unit to the DM Area. See the Unit’s Operation Manual for details
on data transfers.
Special I/O Unit Words in the DM Area: D20000 to D29599 (100 Words x 96 Units)
Each Special I/O Unit is allocated 100 words in the DM Area in the range of
D20000 to D29599 (100 words × 96 Units). These 100 words are generally
used to hold initial settings for the Special I/O Unit. When the contents of this
area are changed from the program to reflect a change in the system, the
Restart Bits for affected Units must be turned ON to restart the Units.
Special I/O Unit
CPU Unit
Transferred when power is turned
on or the Unit is restarted.
DM Area for Special I/O Units
100 words/Unit
Transferred each cycle
and when necessary.
397
Section 8-6
Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units
FINS Commands
The CMND(490) instruction can be added to the ladder program to issue a
FINS command to the Special I/O Unit.
Special I/O Unit
CPU Unit
The FINS command is transmitted
when CMND(490) has been
executed in the program.
FINS command transmission
FINS commands can be transmitted to Special I/O Units in other PLCs in the
network, not just the local PLC.
Serial Communications Special I/O Unit
CPU Unit
Unit
Serial Communications Unit
CPU Unit
The FINS command is transmitted
when CMND(490) has been
executed in the program.
FINS command transmission
Special I/O Unit Initialization
Special I/O Units are initialized when the PLC’s power is turned on or the
Unit’s Restart Bit is turned ON. The Unit’s Special I/O Unit Initialization Flag
(A33000 to A33515) will be ON while the Unit is initializing.
I/O refreshing (cyclic I/O refreshing or refreshing by IORF(097)) will not be
performed for a Special I/O Unit while its Initialization Flag is ON.
8-6-2
Disabling Special I/O Unit Cyclic Refreshing
Ten words are allocated to each Special I/O Unit in the Special I/O Unit Area
(CIO 2000 to CIO 2959) based on the unit number set on the front of each
Unit. The data in the Special I/O Unit Area is refreshed in the CPU Unit every
cycle during I/O refreshing (just after execution of the END(001) instruction).
I/O refreshing may take too long if too many Special I/O Units are installed. If
I/O refreshing is taking too much time, the PLC Setup can be set to disable
cyclic refreshing for particular Special I/O Units. (The Special I/O Unit Cyclic
Refreshing Disable Bits are in PLC Setup addresses 226 to 231.)
If the I/O refreshing time is too short, the Unit’s internal processing will not be
able to keep pace, the Special I/O Unit Error Flag (A40206) will be turned ON,
and the Special I/O Unit may not operate properly. In this case, the cycle time
can be extended by setting a minimum cycle time in the PLC Setup or cyclic
I/O refreshing with the Special I/O Unit can be disabled. When cyclic refreshing has been disabled, the Special I/O Unit’s data can be refreshed during
program execution with IORF(097).
Note
1. Always disable a Special I/O Unit’s cyclic refreshing if the Unit’s I/O will be
refreshed in an interrupt task with IORF(097). An interrupt task error
(A40213) will occur if cyclic refreshing and IORF(097) refreshing are performed simultaneously.
2. Whenever disabling a Special I/O Unit’s cyclic refreshing, be sure that the
I/O for that Unit is refreshed with IORF(097) in the program at least every
398
Section 8-6
Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units
11 seconds during operation. A CPU Unit service monitoring error will occur in the Special I/O Unit if it is not refreshed every 11 seconds.
8-6-3
CPU Bus Units
Data can be exchanged between CPU Bus Units and the CPU Unit through
the CPU Bus Unit Area, the DM Area, or FINS commands.
CPU Bus Unit Area (I/O Refreshing)
Data is exchanged each cycle during I/O refreshing of the CPU Bus Unit Area.
Basically, 25 words are allocated to each CPU Bus Unit based on its unit number setting. The number of words actually used by the CPU Bus Unit varies.
The Special I/O Unit Area ranges from CIO 1500 to CIO 1899 (25 words × 16
Units).
CPU Bus Unit
CPU Unit
CPU Bus Unit Area
25 words/Unit
Transferred in
I/O refreshing
Note With CS1-H CPU Units, the CPU BUS I/O REFRESH instruction
(DLNK(226)) can be executed in the ladder program to refresh the
CIO Area words allocated to the CPU Bus Unit of a specified unit
number.
Transfer of Words Allocated in the DM Area
Each CPU Bus Unit is allocated 100 words in the DM Area in the range of
D30000 to D31599 (100 words × 16 Units). There are three times that data
may be transferred through the words allocated to each Unit. The timing of
data transfers depends on the model being used.
1,2,3...
1. Data transferred when the PLC is turned ON.
2. Data transferred each cycle.
3. Data transferred when necessary.
Note With CS1-H CPU Units, the CPU BUS I/O REFRESH instruction
(DLNK(226)) can be executed in the ladder program to refresh the
DM Area words allocated to the CPU Bus Unit of a specified unit
number.
Some models transfer data in both directions, from the DM Area to the Unit
and from the Unit to the DM Area. See the Unit’s Operation Manual for details
on data transfers.
These 100 words are generally used to hold initial settings for the CPU Bus
Unit. When the contents of this area are changed from the program to reflect a
change in the system, the Restart Bits (A50100 to A50115) for affected Units
must be turned ON to restart the Units.
399
Section 8-6
Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units
CPU Bus Unit
CPU Unit
DM Area for CPU Bus Units
100 words/Unit
Transferred when power is turned
on or the Unit is restarted.
Transferred each cycle
and when necessary.
FINS Commands
The CMND(490) instruction can be added to the ladder program to issue a
FINS command to the CPU Bus Unit.
CPU Bus Unit
CPU Unit
The FINS command is transmitted
when CMND(490) has been
executed in the program.
FINS command transmission
FINS commands can be transmitted to CPU Bus Units in other PLCs in the
network, not just the local PLC.
Serial Communications CPU Bus Unit
Unit
CPU Unit
Serial Communications Unit
CPU Unit
The FINS command is transmitted
when CMND(490) has been
executed in the program.
Command transmission
CPU Bus Unit Initialization
CPU Bus Units are initialized when the PLC’s power is turned on or the Unit’s
Restart Bit is turned ON. The Unit’s CPU Bus Unit Initialization Flag (A30200
to A30215) will be ON while the Unit is initializing.
Cyclic I/O refreshing will not be performed for a CPU Bus Unit while its Initialization Flag is ON.
400
SECTION 9
Memory Areas
This section describes the structure and functions of the I/O Memory Areas and Parameter Areas.
9-1
9-2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
402
I/O Memory Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
403
9-2-1
I/O Memory Area Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
403
9-2-2
Overview of the Data Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
406
9-2-3
Data Area Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
411
9-3
Precautions in Using C200H Special I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
412
9-4
CIO Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
413
9-5
C200H DeviceNet Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
419
9-6
CS-series DeviceNet Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
420
9-7
PLC Link Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
422
9-8
Data Link Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
424
9-9
CPU Bus Unit Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
425
9-10 Inner Board Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
426
9-11 Special I/O Unit Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
427
9-12 SYSMAC BUS Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
429
9-13 I/O Terminal Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
430
9-14 Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
431
9-15 Holding Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
432
9-16 Auxiliary Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
433
9-17 TR (Temporary Relay) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
456
9-18 Timer Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
457
9-19 Counter Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
458
9-20 Data Memory (DM) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
459
9-21 Extended Data Memory (EM) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
461
9-22 Index Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
463
9-23 Data Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
469
9-24 Task Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
471
9-25 Condition Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
471
9-26 Clock Pulses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
474
9-27 Parameter Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
475
9-27-1 PLC Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
475
9-27-2 Registered I/O Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
475
9-27-3 Routing Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
476
9-27-4 CPU Bus Unit Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
476
401
Section 9-1
Introduction
9-1
Introduction
The CPU Unit’s memory (RAM with battery back-up) can be divided into three
parts: the User Program Memory, I/O Memory Area, and Parameter Area.
This section describes the I/O Memory Area and Parameter Area.
I/O Memory Area
This region of memory contains the data areas which can be accessed by
instruction operands. The data areas include the CIO Area, Work Area, Holding Area, Auxiliary Area, DM Area, EM Area, Timer Area, Counter Area, Task
Flag Area, Data Registers, Index Registers, Condition Flag Area, and Clock
Pulse Area.
I/O Memory Area
Instruction
Parameter Area
This region of memory contains various settings that cannot be specified by
instruction operands; they can be specified from a Programming Device only.
The settings include the PLC Setup, I/O Table, Routing Table, and CPU Bus
Unit settings.
Programming Device
Programming Device
Parameter Area
Parameter Area
402
Section 9-2
I/O Memory Areas
9-2
I/O Memory Areas
9-2-1
I/O Memory Area Structure
The following table shows the basic structure of the I/O Memory Area.
Area
CIO
Area
I/O Area
Size
Range
External I/O
allocation
Bit
access
Word
access
Access
Read
Write
Change
from
Programming
Device
Status at
startup
or mode
change
Forcing
bit status
Cleared
(See note
5.)
OK
5,120
bits (320
words)
CIO 0000
to
CIO 0319
(See note
1.)
Basic I/O OK
Units
OK
OK
OK
OK
C200H
DeviceNet
Words
1,600
bits (100
words)
Outputs:
CIO 0050
to
CIO 0099
Inputs:
CIO 0350
to
CIO 0399
(See note
2.)
DeviceNet
Slaves
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
PLC Link
Words
32 bits (4
words)
CIO 0247
to
CIO 0250
A442
---
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Data Link
Area
3,200
bits (200
words)
CIO 1000
to
CIO 1199
Data link
or PLC
Link
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
CPU Bus
Unit Area
6,400
bits (400
words)
CIO 1500
to
CIO 1899
CPU Bus OK
Units
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Special I/O
Unit Area
15,360
bits (960
words)
CIO 2000
to
CIO 2959
Special
I/O Units
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Inner Board
Area
1,600
bits (100
words)
CIO 1900
to
CIO 1999
Inner
Boards
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
SYSMAC
BUS Area
1,280
bits (80
words)
CIO 3000
to
CIO 3079
(See note
8.)
Slave
Racks
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
I/O Terminal
Area
512 bits
(32
words)
CIO 3100
to
CIO 3131
(See note
9.)
Slaves
other
than
Racks
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
CS-series
DeviceNet
Area
9,600
bits (600
words)
CIO 3200
to
CIO 3799
DeviceNet
Slaves
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Internal I/O
Areas
37,504
bits
(2,344
words)
4,800
bits (300
words)
CIO 1200
to
CIO 1499
CIO 3800
to
CIO 6143
---
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Work Area
8,192
bits (512
words)
W000 to
W511
---
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Holding Area (See
note 10.)
8,192
bits (512
words)
H000 to
H511
---
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Maintained
OK
403
Section 9-2
I/O Memory Areas
Area
Auxiliary Area
Size
15,360
bits (960
words)
Range
A000 to
A447
External I/O
allocation
---
Bit
access
OK
Word
access
OK
Access
Read
OK
A448 to
A959
Change
from
Programming
Device
Status at
startup
or mode
change
Forcing
bit status
No
No
No
OK
OK
Varies
from
address
to
address.
Write
TR Area
16 bits
TR0 to
TR15
---
OK
---
OK
OK
No
Cleared
No
DM Area
32,768
words
D00000 to
D32767
---
No (See
note 3.)
OK
OK
OK
OK
Maintained
No
EM Area
32,768
words
per bank
(0 to C,
13 max.)
E0_00000 --to
EC_32767
No (See
note 3.)
OK
OK
OK
OK
Maintained
No
Timer Completion
Flags
4,096
bits
T0000 to
T4095
---
OK
---
OK
OK
OK
Cleared
(See note
5.)
OK
Counter Completion
Flags
4,096
bits
C0000 to
C4095
---
OK
---
OK
OK
OK
Maintained
OK
Timer PVs
4,096
words
T0000 to
T4095
---
---
OK
OK
OK
OK
Cleared
(See note
5.)
No (See
note 6.)
Counter PVs
4,096
words
C0000 to
C4095
---
---
OK
OK
OK
OK
Maintained
No (See
note 7.)
Task Flag Area
32 bits
TK00 to
TK31
---
OK
---
OK
No
No
Cleared
No
Index Registers (See 16 regisnote 4.)
ters
IR0 to
IR15
---
OK
OK
Indirect
addressing only
Specific
instructions
only
No
Cleared
(See note
5.)
No
Data Registers (See
note 4.)
DR0 to
DR15
---
No
OK
OK
OK
No
Cleared
(See note
5.)
No
16 registers
Note
1. The I/O Area can be expanded to CIO 0000 to CIO 0999 by changing the
first words allocated to Racks.
2. C200H DeviceNet Words are used for fixed allocations by the C200H DeviceNet Master Unit (C200HW-DRM21-V1). The CS-series DeviceNet Unit
(CS1W-DRM21) does not use this same area for fixed allocations, but rather uses the CS-series DeviceNet Area (CIO 3200 to CIO 3799).
3. Bits can be manipulated using TST(350), TSTN(351), SETB(532),
RSTB(533), OUTB(534).
4. Index registers and data registers can be used either individually by task
or they can be shared by all the tasks (CS1-H CPU Units only).
5. If the I/O Memory Hold Bit (A50012) is turned ON, the contents of these
areas will be maintained when the operating mode is changed. If in addition the IOM Hold Bit is selected under Startup Hold in the PLC Setup, the
contents of these areas will be maintained when the power supply is turned
ON.
6. Timer PVs can be refreshed indirectly by forced setting/resetting the Timer
Completion Flag.
7. Counter PVs can be refreshed indirectly by forced setting/resetting
Counter Completion Flags.
8. These words can be used as work words/bits when SYSMAC BUS Slaves
are not used.
9. These words can be used as work words/bits when I/O Terminals are not
used.
404
I/O Memory Areas
Section 9-2
10. The Function Block Holding Area words are allocated from H512 to H1535.
These words can be used only for the function block instance area (internally allocated variable area).
405
Section 9-2
I/O Memory Areas
9-2-2
Overview of the Data Areas
The data areas in the CS-series I/O Memory Area are described in detail
below.
CIO Area
It isn’t necessary to input the “CIO” acronym when specifying an address in
the CIO Area. The CIO Area is generally used for data exchanges such as I/O
refreshing with various Units. Words that aren’t allocated to Units may be
used as work words and work bits in the program only.
Word
Bit
CIO 0000
15
0
I/O Area
CIO 0319
(CIO 0320)
(Not used.)
(CIO 0999)
CIO 1000
See note 1.
Bit
Word
15
CIO 0000
0
Data Link Area
CIO 1199
CIO 1200
Internal I/O Area
CIO 1499
CIO 1500
CIO 0099
CS1 CPU Bus Unit Area
(25 words/Unit)
CIO 0247
CIO 0250
Inner Board Area
CIO 0319
CIO 0320
CIO 1899
CIO 1900
I/O Area
CIO 0050
DeviceNet Area
(Outputs)
PLC Link Area
(Not used.)
CIO 0349
CIO 0350
CIO 1999
CIO 2000
DeviceNet Area
(Input)
Special I/O Unit Area
(10 words/Unit)
CIO 2959
(CIO 2960)
CIO 0399
CIO 0400
(Not used.)
(Not used.)
(CIO 2999)
CIO 3000
SYSMAC BUS Area
CIO 3079
(CIO 3080)
(CIO 3099)
CIO 3100
CIO 3131
(CIO 3132)
(CIO 3199)
CIO 3200
(Not used.)
I/O Terminal Area
(Not used.)
CS/CJ Series
DeviceNet Area
(CIO 3799)
CIO 3800
CIO 6143
406
See note 2.
Internal I/O Area
CIO 0999
See note 2.
Section 9-2
I/O Memory Areas
Note
1. It is possible to use CIO 0320 to CIO 0999 for I/O words by making the appropriate settings for the first words on the Racks. Settings for the first
words on the Racks can be made using the CX-Programmer to set the first
Rack addresses in the I/O table. The settings range for the first Rack addresses is from CIO 0000 to CIO 0900.
2. When using a C200H DeviceNet Master Unit (C200HW-DRM21-V1), be
sure the same words are not allocated to both Basic I/O Units and DeviceNet I/O.
3. The parts of the CIO Area that are labelled “Not used” may be used in programming as work bits. In the future, however, unused CIO Area bits may
be used when expanding functions. Always use Work Area bits first.
I/O Area
These words are allocated to external I/O terminals on Basic I/O Units. Words
that aren’t allocated to external I/O terminals may be used only in the program.
C200H DeviceNet Area
These words are allocated to Slaves for DeviceNet Remote I/O Communications for C200H DeviceNet Master Units (C200HW-DRM21-V1). Allocations
are fixed and cannot be changed. Be sure that allocates to not overlap with
those used for other I/O points.
The CS-series DeviceNet Unit (CS1W-DRM21) does not use this same area
for fixed allocations.
PLC Link Area
When PLC Link Units are used to create a PLC Link system, the PLC Link
Area contains flags that indicate PLC Link errors and the operating status of
CPU Units in the PLC Link. CIO 247 to CIO 250 are equivalent to SR 247 to
SR 250 in the C200HX/HG/HE PLCs. (The PLC Link Operating Level Flags,
A44211 and A44212, are equivalent to AR 2411 and AR 2412 in the
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs.)
Link Area
These words are used for data links in Controller Link Networks. Words that
aren’t used in data links may be used only in the program.
CPU Bus Unit Area
These words are allocated to CPU Bus Units to transfer status information.
Each Unit is allocated 25 words and up to 16 Units (with unit numbers 0 to 15)
can be used. Words that aren’t used by CPU Bus Units may be used only in
the program.
Special I/O Unit Area
These words are allocated to CS-series Special I/O Units and C200H Special
I/O Units. Each Unit is allocated 10 words and up to 96 Units (unit numbers 0
to 95) can be used. (C200H Special I/O Units are limited to unit numbers 0 to
F (15).)
Words that aren’t used by Special I/O Units may be used only in the program.
Inner Board Area
These words are allocated to Inner Boards such as Communications Boards.
Up to 100 words can be allocated for input and output.
SYSMAC BUS Area
These words are allocated to Slave Racks connected to SYSMAC BUS
Remote I/O Master Units. Each Rack is allocated 10 words and up to 8 Racks
(rack numbers 0 to 7) can be used. These words can be used as work
words/bits when SYSMAC BUS Slaves are not used.
I/O Terminal Area
These words are allocated to Units other than Slave Racks (such as I/O Interfaces and I/O Terminals) that are connected to SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O
Master Units. Each Unit is allocated 1 word except for Optical I/O Units which
take 2 words; up to 32 Units (unit numbers 0 to 31) can be used. These words
can be used as work words/bits when I/O Terminals are not used.
407
Section 9-2
I/O Memory Areas
CS-series DeviceNet Area
These words are allocated to Slaves for DeviceNet Remote I/O Communications for CS-series DeviceNet Units (CS1W-DRM21). Allocations are fixed
and cannot be changed. Be sure that allocates to not overlap with those used
for other I/O points.
The C200H DeviceNet Master Unit (C200HW-DRM21-V1) does not use this
same area for fixed allocations
Internal I/O Area
These words can be used only in the program; they cannot be used for I/O
exchange with external I/O terminals. Be sure to use the work words provided
in the Work Area (WR) before allocating words in the Internal I/O Area or
other unused words in the CIO Area. It is possible that these words will be
assigned to new functions in future versions of CS-series CPU Units, so the
program may have to be changed before being used in a new CS-series PLC
if CIO Area words are used as work words in the program.
Note CIO 25207 and CIO 25213 will be used for the Module (M-Net) Interface Network Restart Bits when a M-Net Interface Unit is connected to the CS-series
PLC. Do not use these bits are work bits in programming. The M-Net Interface
Unit is restarted by turning ON these bits.
Work Area (WR)
Words in the Work Area can be used only in the program; they cannot be
used for I/O exchange with external I/O terminals. No new functions will be
assigned to this area in future versions of CS-series PLCs, so use this area
for work words and bits before any words in the CIO Area.
Word 15
Bit
W511
Holding Area (HR)
Words in the Holding Area can be used only in the program. These words
retain their content when the PLC is turned on or the operating mode is
switched between PROGRAM mode and RUN or MONITOR mode.
Word 15
Bit
H511
Note The Function Block Holding Area words are allocated from H512 to H1535.
These words can be used only for the function block instance area (internally
allocated variable area). These words cannot be specified as instruction operands in the user program.
408
Section 9-2
I/O Memory Areas
Auxiliary Area (AR)
The Auxiliary Area contains flags and control bits used to monitor and control
PLC operation. This area is divided into two parts: A000 to A447 are readonly and A448 to A959 can be read or written. Refer to 9-16 Auxiliary Area for
details on the Auxiliary Area.
Note The undefined addresses of the Auxiliary Area may be allocated to functions
in future version upgrades of the CPU Unit. Do not use these words as CIO
Area words in the user program.
Word 15
Bit
Read-only area
A447
A448
Read-write area
A959
Temporary Relay Area (TR)
The TR Area contains bits that record the ON/OFF status of program
branches. The TR bits are used with mnemonics only.
Data Memory Area (DM)
The DM Area is a multi-purpose data area that can be accessed in word-units
only. These words retain their content when the PLC is turned on or the operating mode is switched between PROGRAM mode and RUN or MONITOR
mode.
Word
D00000
D20000
D06032 to D06063: C200H
DeviceNet Status Area
Special I/O Unit Area
(10 words/Unit)
D29599
D30000
CPU Bus Unit Area
(100 words/Unit)
D31599
D32000
Inner Board Area
D32767
409
Section 9-2
I/O Memory Areas
Extended Data Memory Area (EM)
The EM Area is a multi-purpose data area that can be accessed in word-units
only. These words retain their content when the PLC is turned on or the operating mode is switched between PROGRAM mode and RUN or MONITOR
mode.
The EM Area is divided into 32,767-word regions called banks. The number of
EM banks depends upon the model of CPU Unit, with a maximum of 13 banks
(0 to C). Refer to 2-1 Specifications for details on the number of EM banks
provided in each model of CPU Unit.
Word
Word
E0_00000
EC_00000
E0_32767
EC_32767
Timer Area
There are two timer data areas, the Timer Completion Flags and the Timer
Present Values (PVs). Up to 4,096 timers with timer numbers T0000 to T4095
can be used. The same number is used to access a timer’s Completion Flag
and PV.
Timer Completion Flags
These flags are read as bits. A Completion Flag is turned ON by the system
when the corresponding timer times out (the set time elapses).
Timer PVs
The PVs are read and written as words (16 bits). The PVs count up or down
as the timer operates.
Counter Area
There are two counter data areas, the Counter Completion Flags and the
Counter Present Values (PVs). Up to 4,096 counters with counter numbers
C0000 to C4095 can be used. The same number is used to access a
counter’s Completion Flag and PV.
Counter Completion Flags
These flags are read as bits. A Completion Flag is turned ON by the system
when the corresponding counter counts out (the set value is reached).
Counter PVs
The PVs are read and written as words (16 bits). The PVs count up or down
as the counter operates.
Condition Flags
These flags include the Arithmetic Flags such as the Error Flag and Equals
Flag which indicate the results of instruction execution as well as the Always
ON and Always OFF Flags. The Condition Flags are specified with labels
(symbols) rather than addresses.
Clock Pulses
The Clock Pulses are turned ON and OFF by the CPU Unit’s internal timer.
These bits are specified with labels (symbols) rather than addresses.
Task Flag Area (TK)
Task Flags range from TK00 to TK31 and correspond to cyclic tasks 0 to 31. A
Task Flag will be ON when the corresponding cyclic task is in executable
410
Section 9-2
I/O Memory Areas
(RUN) status and OFF when the cyclic task hasn’t been executed (INI) or is in
standby (WAIT) status.
Index Registers (IR)
These registers (IR0 to IR15) are used to store PLC memory addresses
(absolute memory addresses in RAM) to indirectly address words in I/O memory. The Index Registers can be used separately in each task or, for CS1-H
CPU Units, they can be shared by all tasks.
Data Registers (DR)
These registers (DR0 to DR15) are used together with the Index Registers.
When a Data Register is input just before an Index Register, the content of the
Data Register is added to the PLC memory address in the Index Register to
offset that address. The Data Registers are used separately in each task or,
for CS1-H CPU Units, they can be shared by all tasks.
9-2-3
Data Area Properties
Content After Fatal Errors, Forced Set/Reset Usage
Area
CIO I/O Area
Area C200H DeviceNet Words
PLC Link Words
Data Link Area
CPU Bus Units
Special I/O Unit Area
Inner Board Area
SYSMAC BUS Area
I/O Terminal Area
CS-series DeviceNet
Area
Internal I/O Area
Work Area (W)
Holding Area (H)
Auxiliary Area (A)
Data Memory Area (D)
Extended Data Memory Area
(E)
Timer Completion Flags (T)
Timer PVs (T)
Counter Completion Flags (C)
Counter PVs (C)
Task Flags (TK)
Index Registers (IR)
Data Registers (DR)
External allocation
Fatal Error Generated
Forced Set/
Forced
Reset
Execution of FALS(007) Other Fatal Error
Functions
IOM Hold
IOM Hold IOM Hold IOM Hold
Usable?
Bit OFF
Bit ON
Bit OFF
Bit ON
Retained
Retained
Cleared
Retained Yes
Basic I/O Units
DeviceNet Slaves
None
Controller Link or
PLC Link data links
CPU Bus Units
Special I/O Units
Inner Boards
SYSMAC BUS
Remote I/O Slaves
SYSMAC BUS
Remote I/O Terminals
DeviceNet Slaves or
Master
None
None
Retained
Retained
Cleared
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained Retained
Status varies from address to address.
Retained
Retained
Retained Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Cleared
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Cleared
Retained
Retained
Cleared
Cleared
Retained
Retained
Retained
Cleared
Cleared
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Retained Yes
Retained No
Retained Yes
Retained No
Retained No
Retained No
Retained No
411
Section 9-3
Precautions in Using C200H Special I/O Units
Content After Mode Change or Power Interruption
Area
PLC Power OFF to ON
Mode Changed1
CIO
Area
IOM Hold
Bit OFF
Cleared
IOM Hold
Bit ON
Retained
IOM Hold Bit Cleared2
IOM Hold
IOM Hold
Bit OFF
Bit ON
Cleared
Cleared
IOM Hold Bit Held2
IOM Hold
IOM Hold
Bit OFF
Bit ON
Cleared
Retained
I/O Area
C200H DeviceNet Words
PLC Link Words
Data Link Area
CPU Bus Units
Special I/O Unit Area
Inner Board Area
SYSMAC BUS Area
I/O Terminal Area
CS-series DeviceNet Area
Internal I/O Area
Work Area (W)
Holding Area (H)
Auxiliary Area (A)
Data Memory Area (D)
Extended Data Memory Area (E)
Timer Completion Flags (T)
Timer PVs (T)
Cleared
Retained
Cleared
Retained
Retained
Retained
Status varies from address to address.
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Cleared
Retained
Cleared
Cleared
Retained
Cleared
Cleared
Retained
Cleared
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Cleared
Cleared
Retained
Retained
Cleared
Cleared
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Counter Completion Flags (C)
Counter PVs (C)
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Task Flags (TK)
Index Registers (IR)
Data Registers (DR)
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Retained
Retained
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Retained
Retained
Note
1. Mode changed from PROGRAM to RUN/MONITOR or vice-versa.
2. The PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup” setting determines
whether the IOM Hold Bit’s status is held or cleared when the PLC is turned
on.
9-3
Precautions in Using C200H Special I/O Units
Observe the following precautions when using C200H Special I/O Units.
Memory Areas
412
There are differences between the words allocated to Special I/O Units in the
PLC memory areas, as shown in the following table.
PLC
C200H/C200HS
IR/CIO
IR 100 to IR 199
Area
allocations
C200HX/HG/HE
IR 100 to IR 199
IR 400 to IR 459
DM Area
DM 1000 to DM 1999
allocations
DM 1000 to DM 1999
DM 2000 to DM 2599
CS Series
CIO 2000 to CIO 2959
(allocated CIO 2000 to
CIO 2159 for unit
numbers 0 up to 15)
D20000 to D29599
(allocated D20000 to
D21599 for unit numbers 0 up to 15)
Section 9-4
CIO Area
Restrictions
There are special restrictions in programming, allocations, and data communications with the CPU Unit for the following C200H Special I/O Units. Refer to
Appendix F Restrictions in Using C200H Special I/O Units for details.
Unit
ASCII Units
High-speed Counter Units
ID Sensor Units
Position Control Units
Fuzzy Logic Units
High-speed Counter Units
Motion Control Units
C200H I/O LInk Units
Model number
C200H-ASC02/ASC11/ASC21/ASC31
C200H-CT001-V1/CT002
C200H-IDS01-V1/IDS21
C200H-NC111/NC112/NC211
C200H-FZ001
C200H-CT021
C200H-MC221
C200H-DRT21
There are no special restrictions for other C200H Special I/O Units.
9-4
CIO Area
I/O Area addresses range from CIO 0000 to CIO 0319 (CIO bits 000000 to
031915), but the area can be expanded to CIO 0000 to CIO 0999 by changing
the first Rack word with any Programming Device other than a Programming
Console. The maximum number of bits that can be allocated for external I/O
will still be 5,120 (320 words) even if the I/O Area is expanded.
Note The maximum number of external I/O points depends upon the CPU Unit
being used.
Words in the I/O Area can be allocated to I/O terminals on Basic I/O Units
(CS-series Basic I/O Units, C200H Basic I/O Units, and C200H Group-2 Highdensity I/O Units).
Words are allocated to Basic I/O Units based on the slot position (left to right)
and number of words required. The words are allocated consecutively and
empty slots are skipped. Words in the I/O Area that aren’t allocated to Basic
I/O Units can be used only in the program.
CIO 0000 to CIO 0319 include the C200H DeviceNet Output Area (CIO 0050
to CIO 0099) and the PLC Link Words CIO 0247 to CIO 0250. Be sure that
word allocations do not overlap allocations for other I/O points when using a
C200H DeviceNet Master Unit (C200HS-DRM1-V1) or when using a PLC Link
Unit.
I/O Area Initialization
1,2,3...
The contents of the I/O Area will be cleared in the following cases:
1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
(See the following explanation of IOM Hold Bit Operation.)
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.
(See the following explanation of IOM Hold Bit Operation.)
3. The I/O Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the I/O Area will be retained if FALS(007) is executed.)
IOM Hold Bit Operation
If the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) is ON, the contents of the I/O Area won’t be
cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed from
PROGRAM mode to RUN or MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
413
Section 9-4
CIO Area
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the I/O
Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled. All I/O bits,
including outputs, will retain the status that they had before the PLC was
turned off.
Note If the I/O Hold Bit is turned ON, the outputs from the PLC will not be turned
OFF and will maintain their previous status when the PLC is switched from
RUN or MONITOR mode to PROGRAM mode. Make sure that the external
loads will not produce dangerous conditions when this occurs. (When operation stops for a fatal error, including those produced with the FALS(007)
instruction, all outputs from Output Unit will be turned OFF and only the internal output status will be maintained.)
Forcing bit Status
Bits in the I/O Area can be force-set and force-reset.
Note When designating addresses in programming or allocations inside C200H
Special I/O Units, “000” to “255” will specify CIO 0000 to CIO 0255 in the CPU
Unit and “000” to “511” will specify CIO 0000 to CIO 0511 in the CPU Unit.
Other addresses in this area cannot be specified inside the C200H Special
I/O Units.
Input Bits
A bit in the I/O Area is called an input bit when it is allocated to an Input Unit.
Input bits reflect the ON/OFF status of devices such as push-button switches,
limit switches, and photoelectric switches. There are three ways for the status
of input points to be refreshed in the PLC: normal I/O refreshing, immediate
refreshing, and IORF(097) refreshing.
Normal I/O Refreshing
The status of I/O points on external devices is read once each cycle after program execution.
In the following example, CIO 000101 is allocated to switch 1, an external
switch connected to the input terminal of an Input Unit. The ON/OFF status of
switch 1 is reflected in CIO 000101 once each cycle.
Ladder symbol
Mnemonic
LD 000101
000101
Input Unit
CPU Unit
Bit allocation
CIO 000101
Switch 1
Once
each
cycle
Immediate Refreshing
414
When the immediate refreshing variation of an instruction is specified by
inputting an exclamation point just before the instruction, and the instruction’s
operand is an input bit or word, the word containing the bit or the word itself
will be refreshed just before the instruction is executed. This immediate
refreshing is performed in addition to the normal I/O refreshing performed
once each cycle.
Section 9-4
CIO Area
Note Immediate refreshing will be performed for input bits allocated to Basic I/O
Units only (excluding C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units and Basic I/O
Units mounted in Remote I/O Slave Racks), not High-density I/O Units which
are Special I/O Units.
1,2,3...
1. Bit Operand
Just before the instruction is executed, the ON/OFF status of the 16 I/O
points allocated to the word containing the specified bit will be read to the
PLC.
2. Word Operand
Just before the instruction is executed, the ON/OFF status of the 16 I/O
points allocated to the specified word will be read to the PLC.
In the following example, CIO 000101 is allocated to switch 1, an external
switch connected to the input terminal of an Input Unit. The ON/OFF status of
switch 1 is read and reflected in CIO 000101 just before !LD 000101 is executed.
Ladder symbol
000101
Mnemonic
!LD 000101
Input Unit
CPU Unit
CIO 000101
Switch 0
Switch 1
Switch 7
Read
just before
instruction
execution.
IORF(097) Refreshing
When IORF(097) (I/O REFRESH) is executed, the input bits in the specified
range of words are refreshed. This I/O refreshing is performed in addition to
the normal I/O refreshing performed once each cycle.
Note IORF(097) refreshes input bits allocated to Basic I/O Units (excluding Basic
I/O Units mounted in Remote I/O Slave Racks), C200H Group-2 High-density
I/O Units, and other High-density I/O Units which are Special I/O Units.
The following IORF(097) instruction refreshes the status of all I/O points in I/O
Area words CIO 0000 to CIO 0003. The status of input points is read from the
Input Units and the status of output bits is written to the Output Units.
In the following example, the status of input points allocated to CIO 0000 and
CIO 0001 are read from the Input Unit. (CIO 0002 and CIO 0003 are allocated
to Output Units.)
415
Section 9-4
CIO Area
Input Unit
CPU Unit
Switch 0
Switch 16
Switch 1
Switch 17
Switch 15
Read
when
IORF
(097)
is
executed.
Switch 31
Limitations on Input bits
There is no limit on the number of times that input bits can be used as normally open and normally closed conditions in the program and the addresses
can be programmed in any order.
An input bit cannot be used as an operand in an Output instruction.
000100
00001
Input Response Time
Settings
Not allowed if CIO 000100 is an input bit.
The input response times for each CS-series Input Unit can be set in the PLC
Setup. Increasing the input response time will reduce chattering and the
effects of noise and decreasing the input response time allows higher speed
input pulses to be received.
The default value for input response times is 8 ms and the setting range is 0 to
32 ms.
Note If the time is set to 0 ms, there will still be an ON delay time of 20 µs max. and
an OFF delay time of 300 µs due to delays caused by internal elements.
Pulses shorter than the time
constant are not received.
Input from switch
Input bit
Input time constant
Input time constant
Output Bits
A bit in the I/O Area is called an output bit when it is allocated to an Output
Unit. The ON/OFF status of an output bits are output to devices such as actuators. There are three ways for the status of output bits to be refreshed to an
Output Unit: normal I/O refreshing, immediate refreshing, and IORF(097)
refreshing.
Normal I/O Refreshing
The status of output bits are output to external devices once each cycle after
program execution.
In the following example, CIO 000201 is allocated to an actuator, an external
device connected to an output terminal of an Output Unit. The ON/OFF status
of CIO 000201 is output to that actuator once each cycle.
416
Section 9-4
CIO Area
Ladder symbol
Mnemonic
OUT 000201
000201
CPU Unit
Bit allocation
CIO 000201
Output Unit
Actuator
Once
each
cycle
Immediate Refreshing
When the immediate refreshing variation of an instruction is specified by
inputting an exclamation point just before the instruction, and the instruction’s
operand is an output bit or word, the content of the word containing the bit or
the word itself will be output just after the instruction is executed. This immediate refreshing is performed in addition to the normal I/O refreshing performed
once each cycle.
Note Immediate refreshing will be performed for output bits allocated to Basic I/O
Units only (excluding C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units and Basic I/O
Units mounted in Remote I/O Slave Racks), not High-density I/O Units which
are Special I/O Units.
1,2,3...
1. Bit Operand
Just after the instruction is executed, the ON/OFF status of the 16 I/O
points allocated to the word containing the specified bit will be output to the
output device(s).
2. Word Operand
Just after the instruction is executed, the ON/OFF status of the 16 I/O
points allocated to the specified word will be output to the output device(s).
In the following example, CIO 000201 is allocated to an actuator, an external
device connected to the output terminal of an Output Unit. The ON/OFF status of CIO 000201 is output to the actuator just after !OUT 000201 is executed.
Ladder symbol
000201
Mnemonic
OUT 000201
!
CPU Unit
Bit allocation
CIO 000201
Output Unit
Actuator
Output
just after
instruction
execution.
417
Section 9-4
CIO Area
IORF(097) Refreshing
When IORF(097) (I/O REFRESH) is executed, the ON/OFF status of output
bits in the specified range of words is output to their external devices. This I/O
refreshing is performed in addition to the normal I/O refreshing performed
once each cycle.
Note IORF(097) refreshes output bits allocated to Basic I/O Units (excluding Basic
I/O Units mounted in Remote I/O Slave Racks), C200H Group-2 High-density
I/O Units, and other High-density I/O Units which are Special I/O Units.
The following IORF(097) instruction refreshes the status of all I/O points in I/O
Area words CIO 0000 to CIO 0003. The status of input points is read from the
Input Units and the status of output bits is written to the Output Units.
In this example, the status of input points allocated to CIO 0002 and CIO 0003
are output to the Output Unit. (CIO 0000 and CIO 0001 are allocated to Input
Units.)
CPU Unit
Bit allocation
CIO 0002
Output Unit
Actuator
CIO 0003
Output when
IORF (097)
is executed.
Limitations on Output Bits
Output bits can be programmed in any order. Output bits can be used as operands in Input instructions and there is no limit on the number of times that an
output bit is used as a normally open and normally closed condition.
An output bit can be used in only one Output instruction that controls its status. If an output bit is used in two or more Output instructions, only the last
instruction will be effective.
CIO 000000 is controlled
by CIO 000010.
Only this instruction is
effective.
Note All outputs on Basic I/O Units and Special I/O Units can be turned OFF by
turning ON the Output OFF Bit (A50015). The status of the output bits won’t
be affected even though the actual outputs are turned OFF.
418
Section 9-5
C200H DeviceNet Area
9-5
C200H DeviceNet Area
The C200H DeviceNet Area is divided into two parts:
1,2,3...
1. The DeviceNet Output Area contains 50 words with addresses ranging
from CIO 0050 to CIO 0099.
2. The DeviceNet Input Area contains 50 words with addresses ranging from
CIO 0350 to CIO 0399.
Words in the C200H DeviceNet Area are used for fixed allocations to Slaves
for DeviceNet remote I/O communications for the C200H DeviceNet Master
Unit (C200HW-DRM21-V1).
Note The CS-series DeviceNet Unit (CS1W-DRM21) does not use this
same area for fixed allocations, but rather uses the CS-series DeviceNet Area (CIO 3200 to CIO 3799).
Data is exchanged regularly to Slaves in the network (independent of the program) through the C200H DeviceNet Master Unit (C200HW-DRM21-V1)
mounted in the CPU Rack.
Words can be allocated to Slaves in two ways: fixed allocation (words allocated by node number) or free allocation (user-set word allocation).
• With fixed allocations, words in the C200H DeviceNet Area are allocated
automatically in node-number order.
• With user-set allocations, the user can allocate words to Slaves from the
following words.
CIO 0000 to CIO 0235, CIO 0300 to CIO 0511, CIO 1000 to CIO 1063
H000 to H099
D00000 to D05999
The same ranges can be allocated for both CS-series and C200HX/G/E PLCs
except that LR 00 to LR 63 in the C200HX/G/E PLCs correspond to CIO 1000
to CIO 1063 in the CS-series PLCs. (The entire Master Status Area is from
D06032 to D06063.)
For details on word allocations, refer to the C200HDeviceNet Operation Manual (W267).
C200H DeviceNet Master
Unit (C200HW-DRM21-V1)
C200H DeviceNet Area
CPU Unit
DeviceNet
Slaves
With fixed allocation, words are assigned according to node numbers.
(If a Slave requires two or more words, it will occupy as many node
numbers as words required.)
419
Section 9-6
CS-series DeviceNet Area
DeviceNet Area
Initialization
The contents of the DeviceNet Area will be cleared in the following cases:
1,2,3...
1. The operating mode is changed between PROGRAM and RUN or MONITOR mode and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.
3. The DeviceNet Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the DeviceNet Area will be retained when
FALS(007) is executed.)
IOM Hold Bit Operation
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the contents of the DeviceNet Area won’t
be cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed from
PROGRAM mode to RUN or MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the
DeviceNet Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled.
Forcing Bit Status
Bits in the DeviceNet Area can be force-set and force-reset.
Note
1. The C200H DeviceNet Output Area overlaps the I/O Area. When using DeviceNet communications with the default allocations, be sure that words
are not also allocated to other I/O points.
2. With the CS-series CPU Units, words beginning at D06032 are allocated
as follows for the C200H DeviceNet Master Status and the Communications Cycle Present Value:
9-6
DeviceNet Master Status:
D06032 + unit number × 2
Communications Cycle Present Value:
D06033 + unit number × 2
CS-series DeviceNet Area
The CS-series DeviceNet Area addresses run from CIO 3200 to CIO 3799
(600 words).
Words in the CS-series DeviceNet Area are used for fixed allocations to
Slaves for DeviceNet remote I/O communications for the CS-series DeviceNet
Unit (CS1W-DRM21).
Note The C200H DeviceNet Master Unit (C200HW-DRM21-V1) does not
use this same area for fixed allocations, but rather uses the C200H
DeviceNet Area (CIO 0050 to CIO0099 and CIO 0350 to CIO 0399).
The Fixed Allocation Setting Switches 1 to 3 (Software Switches) in the CIO
Area words allocated to the DeviceNet Unit determine which fixed allocation
words are used.
Area
Fixed Allocation Area 1
Fixed Allocation Area 2
Fixed Allocation Area 3
420
Master to Slave
(Output Words)
CIO 3200 to CIO 3263
CIO 3400 to CIO 3463
CIO 3600 to CIO 3663
Slave to Master
(Input Words)
CIO 3300 to CIO 3363
CIO 3500 to CIO 3563
CIO 3700 to CIO 3763
Section 9-6
CS-series DeviceNet Area
Note If the DeviceNet Unit is set to use the I/O slave function, the following
words are also allocated.
Area
Fixed Allocation Area 1
Fixed Allocation Area 2
Fixed Allocation Area 3
Master to Slave
(Output Word)
CIO 3370
CIO 3570
CIO 3770
Slave to Master
(Input Word)
CIO 3270
CIO 3470
CIO 3670
Data is exchanged regularly to Slaves in the network (independent of the program) through the CS-series DeviceNet Unit (CS1W-DRM21) mounted in the
CPU Rack.
Words can be allocated to Slaves in two ways: fixed allocation (words allocated by node number) or free allocation (user-set word allocation).
• With fixed allocations, words in the CS-series DeviceNet Area are allocated automatically in node-number order in one of the fixed allocation
areas (1 to 3).
• With user-set allocations, the user can allocate words to Slaves from the
following words.
CIO 0000 to CIO 6143
W000 to W511
H000 to H511
D00000 to D32767
E00000 to E32767 (banks 0 to C)
For details on word allocations, refer to the CS/CJ Series DeviceNet Unit
Operation Manual (W380).
CPU Unit
CS-series DeviceNet Unit
(CS1W-DRM21)
CS-series DeviceNet Area
DeviceNet Slaves
With fixed allocations, words are assigned according to node numbers.
(If a Slave requires two or more words, it will use as many node
numbers as words required.)
Forcing Bit Status
Bits in the CS-series DeviceNet Area can be force-set and force-reset.
DeviceNet Area
Initialization
The contents of the DeviceNet Area will be cleared in the following cases:
1,2,3...
1. The operating mode is changed between PROGRAM and RUN or MONITOR mode and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.
3. The DeviceNet Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the DeviceNet Area will be retained when
FALS(007) is executed.)
421
Section 9-7
PLC Link Area
IOM Hold Bit Operation
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the contents of the DeviceNet Area won’t
be cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed from
PROGRAM mode to RUN or MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the
DeviceNet Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled.
9-7
PLC Link Area
The PLC Link Area contains 5 words with addresses ranging from CIO 0247
to CIO 0250. A442 is also used for PLC Links. Use these words to monitor
PLC Link errors, monitor CPU Unit operating status, and detect PLC Link
operating levels.
Note The Link Area (CIO 1000 to CIO 1063) is used to exchange data between
PLCs in a PLC Link system, just as the LR Area is used in other OMRON
PLCs. The flags in the PLC Link Area indicate the status of PLC Link operations.
PLC Link Error Flags
When a transmission error occurs or there is a power interruption at another
Unit after the PLC link is established, the flag corresponding to the other Unit’s
unit number will be turned ON. These flags are read-only, although the PLC
Link Error Flag will be turned ON if the CPU Unit is stopped by a FALS(007)
error.
CPU Unit RUN Flags
The flag corresponding to the a CPU Unit’s unit number will be ON when the
CPU Unit is operating in RUN or MONITOR mode. The corresponding flag will
be OFF when the CPU Unit is in PROGRAM mode. These flags can be used
to determine another Unit’s operating status. These flags are read-only.
Operating Level Detection Flags
The flags in A442 can be used to determine whether a PLC Link Unit is
mounted to the PLC as well as the Unit’s operating level. A44211 will be ON if
the PLC Link Unit is in operating level 1 and A44212 will be ON if the PLC Link
Unit is in operating level 0.
422
Section 9-7
PLC Link Area
CIO Area Flags
Flag type
CPU Unit
RUN Flags
PLC Link
Error Flags
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
The following table shows the allocation of the CIO Area flags related to PLC
Link operation. (The numbers in parentheses show the allocation for multilevel
systems; operating level 0 is #0 and operating level 1 is #1.)
CIO 0247
Unit 24 (#1, Unit 8)
Unit 25 (#1, Unit 9)
Unit 26 (#1, Unit 10)
Unit 27 (#1, Unit 11)
Unit 28 (#1, Unit 12)
Unit 29 (#1, Unit 13)
Unit 30 (#1, Unit 14)
Unit 31 (#1, Unit 15)
Unit 24 (#1, Unit 8)
Unit 25 (#1, Unit 9)
Unit 26 (#1, Unit 10)
Unit 27 (#1, Unit 11)
Unit 28 (#1, Unit 12)
Unit 29 (#1, Unit 13)
Unit 30 (#1, Unit 14)
Unit 31 (#1, Unit 15)
PLC Link Area
Initialization
CIO 0248
Unit 16 (#1, Unit 0)
Unit 17 (#1, Unit 1)
Unit 18 (#1, Unit 2)
Unit 19 (#1, Unit 3)
Unit 20 (#1, Unit 4)
Unit 21 (#1, Unit 5)
Unit 22 (#1, Unit 6)
Unit 23 (#1, Unit 7)
Unit 16 (#1, Unit 0)
Unit 17 (#1, Unit 1)
Unit 18 (#1, Unit 2)
Unit 19 (#1, Unit 3)
Unit 20 (#1, Unit 4)
Unit 21 (#1, Unit 5)
Unit 22 (#1, Unit 6)
Unit 23 (#1, Unit 7)
CIO 0249
Unit 8 (#0, Unit 8)
Unit 9 (#0, Unit 9)
Unit 10 (#0, Unit 10)
Unit 11 (#0, Unit 11)
Unit 12 (#0, Unit 12)
Unit 13 (#0, Unit 13)
Unit 14 (#0, Unit 14)
Unit 15 (#0, Unit 15)
Unit 8 (#0, Unit 8)
Unit 9 (#0, Unit 9)
Unit 10 (#0, Unit 10)
Unit 11 (#0, Unit 11)
Unit 12 (#0, Unit 12)
Unit 13 (#0, Unit 13)
Unit 14 (#0, Unit 14)
Unit 15 (#0, Unit 15)
CIO 0250
Unit 0 (#0, Unit 0)
Unit 1 (#0, Unit 1)
Unit 2 (#0, Unit 2)
Unit 3 (#0, Unit 3)
Unit 4 (#0, Unit 4)
Unit 5 (#0, Unit 5)
Unit 6 (#0, Unit 6)
Unit 7 (#0, Unit 7)
Unit 0 (#0, Unit 0)
Unit 1 (#0, Unit 1)
Unit 2 (#0, Unit 2)
Unit 3 (#0, Unit 3)
Unit 4 (#0, Unit 4)
Unit 5 (#0, Unit 5)
Unit 6 (#0, Unit 6)
Unit 7 (#0, Unit 7)
The contents of the PLC Link Area will be cleared in the following cases:
1,2,3...
1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.
3. The PLC Link Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the PLC Link Area will be retained when
FALS(007) is executed.)
IOM Hold Bit Operation
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the contents of the PLC Link Area won’t
be cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed from
PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the PLC
Link Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled.
Forcing Bit Status
Bits in the PLC Link Area can be force-set and force-reset.
Auxiliary Area Flags
A44211 will be ON when the PLC Link Unit is in operating level #1. A44212
will be ON when the Unit is in operating level #0 or a PLC Link Unit isn’t
mounted in the PLC. (The other bits in A442 are not used.)
Refer to 9-16 Auxiliary Area and to Appendix B Auxiliary Area for more details
on A422.
Note
1. The PLC Link Area (CIO 0247 to CIO 0250) overlaps the I/O Area. When
using PLC Link Units, be sure that words are not also allocated to other I/O
points.
2. When designating addresses in programming or allocations inside C200H
Special I/O Units, “247” to “250” will actually specify CIO 0247 to CIO 0250
in the CPU Unit. A422 cannot be specified inside a C200H Special I/O Unit.
423
Section 9-8
Data Link Area
9-8
Data Link Area
Data Link Area addresses range from CIO 1000 to CIO 1199 (CIO
bits 100000 to 119915). Words in the Link Area are used for data links when
LR is set as the data link area for Controller Link Networks. It is also used for
PLC Links.
A data link automatically (independently of the program) shares data with Link
Areas in other CS-series CPU Units in the network through a Controller Link
Unit mounted to the PLC’s CPU Rack.
Data links can be generated automatically (using the same number of words
for each node) or manually. When a user defines the data link manually, he
can assign any number of words to each node and make nodes receive-only
or transmit-only. Refer to the Controller Link Units Operation Manual (W309)
for more details.
Words in the Link Area can be used in the program when LR is not set as the
data link area for Controller Link Networks and PLC Links are not used.
Link Areas
Controller
Link Unit
Controller
Link Unit
CPU Unit
Controller
Link Unit
CPU Unit
CPU Unit
Controller Link Network
Link Area words are also allocated to PLC Link Systems when a PLC Link is
created by connecting PLC Link Units.
Link Areas
PLC Link Unit
CPU Unit
PLC Link
Unit
PLC Link Unit
CPU Unit
CPU Unit
Links to C200HX/HG/HE,
C200HS, and C200H PLCs
Link Area words CIO 1000 to CIO 1063 in CS-series PLCs correspond to Link
Relay Area words LR 00 to LR 63 for data links created in C200HX/HG/HE
PLCs and PLC Links created in C200HX/HG/HE, C200HS, or C200H PLCs.
When converting C200HX/HG/HE, C200HS, or C200H programs for use in
CS-series PLCs, change addresses LR 00 through LR 63 to their equivalent
Link Area addresses CIO 1000 through CIO 1063.
Link Area Initialization
The contents of the Link Area will be cleared in the following cases:
1,2,3...
1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.
3. The Link Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
424
Section 9-9
CPU Bus Unit Area
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the Link Area will be retained if FALS(007) is executed.)
IOM Hold Bit Operation
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the Link
Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the contents of the Link Area won’t be
cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed from
PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
Forcing Bit Status
Bits in the Link Area can be force-set and force-reset.
Note When designating addresses in programming or allocations inside C200H
Special I/O Units, “LR 00” to “LR63” will actually specify CIO 1000 to CIO1063
in the CPU Unit. CIO 1064 to CIO 1199 in the CPU Unit cannot be specified in
the C200H Special I/O Unit.
9-9
CPU Bus Unit Area
The CPU Bus Unit Area contains 400 words with addresses ranging from
CIO 1500 to CIO 1899. Words in the CPU Bus Unit Area can be allocated to
CPU Bus Units to transfer data such as the operating status of the Unit. Each
Unit is allocated 25 words based on the Unit’s unit number setting.
Data is exchanged with CPU Bus Units once each cycle during I/O refreshing,
which occurs after program execution. (Words in this data area cannot be
refreshed with immediate-refreshing or IORF(097).)
CPU Bus Unit
CPU Unit
CPU Bus Unit Area
(25 words/Unit)
I/O
refreshing
Each CPU Bus Unit is allocated 25 words based on its unit number, as shown
in the following table.
Unit number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
Allocated words
CIO 1500 to CIO 1524
CIO 1525 to CIO 1549
CIO 1550 to CIO 1574
CIO 1575 to CIO 1599
CIO 1600 to CIO 1624
CIO 1625 to CIO 1649
CIO 1650 to CIO 1674
CIO 1675 to CIO 1699
CIO 1700 to CIO 1724
CIO 1725 to CIO 1749
CIO 1750 to CIO 1774
CIO 1775 to CIO 1799
CIO 1800 to CIO 1824
CIO 1825 to CIO 1849
425
Section 9-10
Inner Board Area
Unit number
E
F
Allocated words
CIO 1850 to CIO 1874
CIO 1875 to CIO 1899
The function of the 25 words depends upon the CPU Bus Unit being used. For
details, refer to the Unit’s operation manual.
Words in the CPU Bus Unit Area that aren’t allocated to CPU Bus Units can
be used only in the program.
Note The addresses in the CS-series CPU Bus Unit Area cannot be designated
directly in programming or allocations inside C200H Special I/O Units.
CPU Bus Unit Area
Initialization
The contents of the CPU Bus Unit Area will be cleared in the following cases:
1,2,3...
1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.
3. The CPU Bus Unit Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the CPU Bus Unit Area will be retained when
FALS(007) is executed.)
IOM Hold Bit Operation
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the contents of the CS-series CPU Bus
Unit Area won’t be cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is
changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the CSseries CPU Bus Unit Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is
cycled.
Forcing Bit Status
Bits in the CPU Bus Unit Area can be force-set and force-reset.
9-10 Inner Board Area
The Inner Board Area contains 100 words with addresses ranging from
CIO 1900 to CIO 1999. Words in the Inner Board Area can be allocated to an
Inner Board to transfer data such as the operating status of the Unit. All 100
words must be allocated to just one Inner Board.
Data is exchanged with the Inner Board once each cycle during normal I/O
refreshing, which occurs after program execution. Depending on the type of
Inner Board that is mounted, data can also be refreshed directly.
Inner Board
CPU Unit
I/O refreshing
Inner Board Area
(100 words/Board)
The function of the 100 words in the Inner Board Area depends upon the
Inner Board being used. For details, refer to the Board’s Operation Manual.
When the words in the Inner Board Area aren’t allocated to an Inner Board,
they can be used only in the program.
426
Section 9-11
Special I/O Unit Area
Inner Board Area
Initialization
The contents of the Inner Board Area will be cleared in the following cases:
1,2,3...
1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.
3. The Inner Board Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the Inner Board Area will be retained when
FALS(007) is executed.)
IOM Hold Bit Operation
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the contents of the Inner Board Area
won’t be cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed
from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the Inner
Board Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled.
Forcing Bit Status
Bits in the Inner Board Area can be force-set and force-reset.
Note The addresses in the Inner Board Area cannot be designated directly in programming or allocations inside C200H Special I/O Units.
9-11 Special I/O Unit Area
The Special I/O Unit Area contains 960 words with addresses ranging from
CIO 2000 to CIO 2959. Words in the Special I/O Unit Area are allocated to
CS-series and C200H Special I/O Units to transfer data such as the operating
status of the Unit. Each Unit is allocated 10 words based on its unit number
setting.
Data is exchanged with Special I/O Units once each cycle during I/O refreshing, which occurs after program execution. The words can also be refreshed
with IORF(097).
Special I/O Unit
CPU Unit
Special I/O Unit Area
(10 words/Unit)
I/O
refreshing or
IORF
(097)
Note The addresses in the Special I/O Unit Area cannot be designated directly in
programming or allocations inside C200H Special I/O Units.
427
Section 9-11
Special I/O Unit Area
Each Special I/O Unit is allocated 25 words based on its unit number, as
shown in the following table.
Unit number
Allocated words
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 (A)
11 (B)
12 (C)
13 (D)
CIO 2000 to CIO 2009
CIO 2010 to CIO 2019
CIO 2020 to CIO 2029
CIO 2030 to CIO 2039
CIO 2040 to CIO 2049
CIO 2050 to CIO 2059
CIO 2060 to CIO 2069
CIO 2070 to CIO 2079
CIO 2080 to CIO 2089
CIO 2090 to CIO 2099
CIO 2100 to CIO 2109
CIO 2110 to CIO 2119
CIO 2120 to CIO 2129
CIO 2130 to CIO 2139
14 (E)
15 (F)
16
17
CIO 2140 to CIO 2149
CIO 2150 to CIO 2159
CIO 2160 to CIO 2169
CIO 2170 to CIO 2179
95
CIO 2950 to CIO 2959
C200H
Special I/O Units
Valid unit numbers
CS-series
Special I/O Units
Valid unit numbers
Not available on
C200H Units
The function of the 10 words allocated to a Unit depends upon the Special I/O
Unit being used. For details, refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual.
Words in the Special I/O Unit Area that aren’t allocated to Special I/O Units
can be used only in the program.
Special I/O Unit Area
Initialization
1,2,3...
The contents of the Special I/O Unit Area will be cleared in the following
cases:
1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.
3. The Special I/O Unit Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the Special I/O Unit Area will be retained when
FALS(007) is executed.)
IOM Hold Bit Operation
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the contents of the Special I/O Unit Area
won’t be cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed
from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the Special I/O Unit Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled.
Forcing Bit Status
428
Bits in the Special I/O Unit Area can be force-set and force-reset.
Section 9-12
SYSMAC BUS Area
9-12 SYSMAC BUS Area
The SYSMAC BUS Area contains 80 words with addresses ranging from
CIO 3000 to CIO 3079. Words in the SYSMAC BUS Area are allocated to
Slave Racks connected to Wired or Optical SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Master
Units (C200H-RM201 or C200H-RM001-PV1). Up to two Masters can be
mounted to the CPU Rack or a C200H Expansion I/O Rack. A maximum of 8
Slave Racks can be managed by one CPU Unit, whether one or two Masters
are mounted.
Each Slave Rack is allocated 10 words based on the Rack’s rack number setting (0 to 7).
Rack number
0
1
2
3
4
Allocated words
CIO 3000 to CIO 3009
CIO 3010 to CIO 3019
CIO 3020 to CIO 3029
CIO 3030 to CIO 3039
CIO 3040 to CIO 3049
5
6
7
CIO 3050 to CIO 3059
CIO 3060 to CIO 3069
CIO 3070 to CIO 3079
Up to 10 C200H Basic I/O Units can be mounted in a Slave Rack. One word
(16 bits) is allocated to each slot in the Slave Rack from left to right. Allocations are fixed by slot, e.g., if there is no Unit in a slot, the word normally allocated to that slot will not be used.
Note
1. Up to two Masters can be mounted for any one CPU Unit A maximum of 8
Slave Racks can be managed by one CPU Unit, regardless of whether one
or two Masters are mounted.
2. C200H Special I/O Units can also be mounted to Slave Racks, but they will
be allocated words according to their unit number and will not be allocated
SYSMAC BUS Area words.
3. SYSMAC BUS Units other than Slave Racks (such as I/O Terminals) can
also be connected. These other Units are allocated words in the I/O Terminal Area. Refer to 9-13 I/O Terminal Area for details.
Wired or Optical Master Unit
CPU Unit
SYSMAC BUS Area
Wired or Optical
Slave Unit
Slave Rack
Wired or Optical
Slave Unit
Total length 200 m max.,
2 conductors
Slave Rack
Slave Rack
429
Section 9-13
I/O Terminal Area
1,2,3...
1. Ten words are allocated to each Rack based on the rack number set on the
Slave Unit.
2. The ten words in each Rack are allocated to the slots in the Rack from left
to right (one word/slot).
SYSMAC BUS Area
Initialization
The contents of the SYSMAC BUS Area will be cleared in the following cases:
1,2,3...
1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.
3. The SYSMAC BUS Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the SYSMAC BUS Area will be retained when
FALS(007) is executed.)
IOM Hold Bit Operation
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the contents of the SYSMAC BUS Area
won’t be cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed
from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the SYSMAC BUS Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled.
Forcing Bit Status
Bits in the SYSMAC BUS Area can be force-set and force-reset.
Note The addresses in the SYSMAC BUS Area cannot be designated directly in
programming or allocations inside C200H Special I/O Units.
9-13 I/O Terminal Area
The I/O Terminal Area contains 32 words with addresses ranging from
CIO 3100 to CIO 3131. Words in the I/O Terminal Area can be allocated to
Slaves other than Slave Racks (such as I/O Interfaces, I/O Terminals, and
Optical I/O Units) connected to a Wired or Optical SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O
Master Units (C200H-RM201 or C200H-RM001-PV1). Up to two Masters can
be mounted to the CPU Rack or a C200H Expansion I/O Rack. Up to 32
Slaves are allowed for each CPU Unit.
Each Slave is allocated 1 word based on its unit number setting (0 to 31)
except for Optical I/O Units, which are allocated 2 words each. The words are
allocated according to unit numbers even when two Master Units are being
used.
0
1
Unit number
Allocated word
CIO 3100
CIO 3101
31
CIO 3131
Both Slave Racks and SYSMAC BUS Slaves other than Slave Racks (such as
I/O Terminals) can be connected. Slave Racks are allocated words in the
SYSMAC BUS Area. Refer to 9-12 SYSMAC BUS Area for details.
430
Section 9-14
Work Area
Wired or Optical Master Unit
CPU Unit
I/O Terminal Area
Words are allocated to Slaves other than Slave Racks
(such as I/O Interfaces, I/O Terminals, and Optical I/O
Units) according to their unit numbers.
Note The addresses in the I/O Terminal Area cannot be designated directly in programming or allocations inside C200H Special I/O Units.
I/O Terminal Area
Initialization
The contents of the I/O Terminal Area will be cleared in the following cases:
1,2,3...
1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.
3. The I/O Terminal Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the I/O Terminal Area will be retained when
FALS(007) is executed.)
IOM Hold Bit Operation
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the contents of the I/O Terminal Area
won’t be cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed
from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the I/O
Terminal Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled.
Forcing Bit Status
Bits in the I/O Terminal Area can be force-set and force-reset.
9-14 Work Area
The Work Area contains 512 words with addresses ranging from W000 to
W511. These words can be used only in the program as work words.
There are unused words in the CIO Area (CIO 1200 to CIO 1499 and
CIO 3800 to CIO 6143) that can also be used in the program, but use any
available words in the Work Area first because the unused words in the CIO
Area may be allocated to new functions in future versions of CS-series CPU
Units.
Work Area Initialization
1,2,3...
The contents of the Work Area will be cleared in the following cases:
1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.
431
Section 9-15
Holding Area
3. The Work Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the Work Area will be retained when FALS(007)
is executed.)
IOM Hold Bit Operation
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the contents of the Work Area won’t be
cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed from
PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the Work
Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled.
Forcing Bit Status
Bits in the Work Area can be force-set and force-reset.
Note The addresses in the Work Area cannot be designated directly in programming or allocations inside C200H Special I/O Units.
9-15 Holding Area
The Holding Area contains 512 words with addresses ranging from H000 to
H511 (bits H00000 to H51115). These words can be used only in the program.
Holding Area bits can be used in any order in the program and can be used as
normally open or normally closed conditions as often as necessary.
Holding Area Initialization
Data in the Holding Area is not cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled
or the PLC’s operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN or
MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
A Holding Area bit will be cleared if it is programmed between IL(002) and
ILC(003) and the execution condition for IL(002) is OFF. To keep a bit ON
even when the execution condition for IL(002) is OFF, turn ON the bit with the
SET instruction just before IL(002).
Self-maintaining Bits
When a self-maintaining bit is programmed with a Holding Area bit, the selfmaintaining bit won’t be cleared even when the power is reset.
Note
1. If a Holding Area bit is not used for the self-maintaining bit, the bit will be
turned OFF and the self-maintaining bit will be cleared when the power is
reset.
2. If a Holding Area bit is used but not programmed as a self-maintaining bit
as in the following diagram, the bit will be turned OFF by execution condition A when the power is reset.
3. The Function Block Holding Area words are allocated from H512 to H1535.
These words can be used only for the function block instance area (internally allocated variable area). These words cannot be specified as instruction operands in the user program.
432
Section 9-16
Auxiliary Area
Precautions
When a Holding Area bit is used in a KEEP(011) instruction, never use a normally closed condition for the reset input if the input device uses an AC power
supply. When the power supply goes OFF or is temporarily interrupted, the
input will go OFF before the PLC’s internal power supply and the Holding Area
bit will be reset.
Set input
Input
Unit
Reset input
Instead, use a configuration like the one shown below.
Set input
Input
Unit
Reset input
There are no restrictions in the order of using bit address or in the number of
N.C. or N.O. conditions that can be programmed.
Note
When designating addresses in programming or allocations inside C200H
Special I/O Units, “HR 00” to “HR 99” will actually specify H000 to H099 in the
CPU Unit and “AR 00” to “AR 27” will actually specify H100 to H127 in the
CPU Unit. Other addresses in this area cannot be specified inside the C200H
Special I/O Units.
9-16 Auxiliary Area
The Auxiliary Area contains 960 words with addresses ranging from A000 to
A959). These words are preassigned as flags and control bits to monitor and
control operation.
A000 through A447 are read-only, but A448 through A959 can be read or written from the program or a Programming Device.
Note
1. The addresses in the Auxiliary Area cannot be designated directly in programming or allocations inside C200H Special I/O Units.
2. The undefined addresses of the Auxiliary Area may be allocated to functions in future version upgrades of the CPU Unit. Do not use these words
as CIO Area words in the user program.
Forcing Bit Status
Bits in the Auxiliary Area cannot be force-set and force-reset continuously.
Writing Auxiliary Area Data
The following operations can be performed from a Programming Device to
write data in the Auxiliary Area.
• Using the CX-Programmer: Online set/reset (not force-set/force-reset)
(except pre-version-1 CS1 CPU Units), changing present values when
monitoring programming addresses (set values dialog box), or transfer-
433
Section 9-16
Auxiliary Area
ring data to the PLC after editing the PLC data tables. Refer to the CXProgrammer User Manual (W446).
• Using a Programming Console: Temporarily force-setting/force-resetting
bits from the Bit/Word Monitor or the 3-word Monitor operation (see Programming Consoles Operation Manual).
Functions
The following table lists the functions of Auxiliary Area flags and control bits.
The table is organized according to the functions of the flags and bits. Some
of these functions are not supported by some CPU Unit models and unit versions. For more details or to look up a bit by its address, refer to Appendix B
Auxiliary Area.
Initial Settings
Name
I/O Response Times in Basic
I/O Units
IOM Hold Bit
Address
A22000 to
A25915
A50012
Forced Status Hold BIt
A50013
Power Interruption Disable
Setting (CS1-H CPU Units
only)
A530
Description
Contains the current I/O response times for CS-series Basic
I/O Units.
Determines whether the contents of I/O memory are
retained when the PLC’s power is reset or the PLC’s operating mode is changed (from PROGRAM to RUN/MONITOR
or vice-versa).
Turn ON this bit to maintain I/O memory when changing
between PROGRAM and RUN or MONITOR mode.
Turn OFF this bit to clear I/O memory when changing the
changing between PROGRAM and RUN or MONITOR
mode.
Determines whether the status of force-set and force-reset
bits is maintained when the PLC’s power is reset or the
PLC’s operating mode is changed (between PROGRAM and
RUN or MONITOR mode).
Set to A5A5 hex to disable power interrupts (except the
Power OFF Interrupt task) between DI(693) and EI(694)
instructions.
Access
Read-only
Read/write
Read/write
Read/write
CPU Unit Settings
Name
Status of DIP Switch Pin 6
Address
A39512
Description
Contains the status set on pin 6 of the CPU Unit’s DIP
switch. (Refreshed every cycle.)
Access
Read-only
Address
A05000 to
A08915
Description
Access
Indicates whether fuses in Basic I/O Units are intact or
Read-only
blown. The flags correspond to rack 0, slot 0 through rack 7,
slot 9.
Name
CPU Bus Unit Initialization
Flags
Address
A30200 to
A30215
CPU Bus Unit Restart Bits
A50100 to
A50115
Description
Access
These flags correspond to CPU Bus Units 0 to 15. A flag will Read-only
be ON while the corresponding Unit is initializing after the
power is turned ON or the Unit’s Restart Bit (in A501) is
turned ON.
These bits correspond to CPU Bus Units 0 to 15. Turn a bit Read/write
from OFF to ON to restart the corresponding Unit.
Basic I/O Unit Settings
Name
Basic I/O Unit Status Area
CPU Bus Unit Flags/Bits
434
Section 9-16
Auxiliary Area
Special I/O Unit Flags/Bits
Name
Special I/O Unit Initialization
Flags
Address
A33000 to
A33515
Special I/O Unit Restart Bits
A50200 to
A50715
Description
Access
These flags correspond to Special I/O Units 0 to 95. A flag
Read-only
will be ON while the corresponding Unit is initializing after
the power is turned ON or the Unit’s Restart Bit is turned
ON. (Restart Bits A50200 to A50715 correspond to Units 0
to 95.)
These bits correspond to Special I/O Units 0 to 95. Turn a bit Read/write
from OFF to ON to restart the corresponding Unit.
Inner Board Flags/Bits
Name
Inner Board Monitoring Area
Inner Board Restart Bit
Address
A35500 to
A35915
A60800
Description
The function of these words is defined in the Inner Board.
Access
Read-only
Turn the bit from OFF to ON to restart the corresponding
Inner Board.
Read/write
Flags for Programming
Name
First Cycle Flag
Address
A20011
Initial Task Execution Flag
A20015
Task Started Flag
(Not supported by
CS1@-CPU@@(-V1) Units)
A20014
10-ms Incrementing Free
Running Timer
A000
Description
Access
This flag is turned ON for one cycle when program execution Read-only
starts (the operating mode is switched from PROGRAM to
RUN/MONITOR).
Read-only
When a task switches from INI to RUN status for the first
time, this flag will be turned ON within the task for one cycle
only.
When a task switches from WAIT or INI to RUN status, this Read-only
flag will be turned ON within the task for one cycle only.
The only difference between this flag and A20015 is that this
flag also turns ON when the task switches from WAIT to
RUN status.
This word contains the system timer used after the power is Read-only
turned ON.
0000 hex is set when the power is turned ON and this value
is automatically incremented by 1 every 10 ms. The value
returns to 0000 hex after reaching FFFF hex (655,350 ms),
and then continues to be automatically incremented by 1
every 10 ms.
Note: The timer will continue to be incremented when the
operating mode is switched to RUN mode.
Example: The interval can be counted between processing
A and processing B without requiring timer
instructions. This is achieved by calculating the
difference between the value in A000 for processing A and the value in A000 for processing B. The
interval is counted in 10 ms units.
435
Section 9-16
Auxiliary Area
Name
Address
100-ms Incrementing Free
Running Timer
A001
1-s Incrementing Free
Running Timer
(Unit version 4.0 or later)
A002
Description
Access
This word contains the system timer used after the power is Read-only
turned ON.
0000 hex is set when the power is turned ON and this value
is automatically incremented by 1 every 100 ms. The value
returns to 0000 hex after reaching FFFF hex (655,350 ms),
and then continues to be automatically incremented by 1
every 10 ms.
Note: The timer will continue to be incremented when the
operating mode is switched to RUN mode.
This word contains the system timer used after the power is Read-only
turned ON.
0000 hex is set when the power is turned ON and this value
is automatically incremented by 1 every 1 s. The value
returns to 0000 hex after reaching FFFF hex (65,535 s),
and then continues to be automatically incremented by 1
every 1 s.
Note: The timer will continue to be incremented when the
operating mode is switched to RUN mode.
Cycle Time Information
Name
Maximum Cycle Time
Address
A262 to
A263
Present Cycle Time
A264 to
A265
Peripheral Servicing Cycle
Time (Not supported by
CS1@-CPU@@(-V1) Units)
A268
Description
Access
Read-only
These words contain the maximum cycle time in units of
0.1 ms. In a Parallel Processing Mode, the maximum cycle
time of the program execution cycle will be given.
The time is updated every cycle and is recorded in 32-bit
binary (0 to FFFF FFFF, or 0 to 429,496,729.5 ms). (A263 is
the leftmost word.)
Read-only
These words contain the present cycle time in units of
0.1 ms. In a Parallel Processing Mode, the maximum cycle
time of the program execution cycle will be given. The time is
updated every cycle and is recorded in 32-bit binary (0 to
FFFF FFFF, or 0 to 429,496,729.5 ms). (A265 is the leftmost
word.)
Read-only
In Parallel Processing with Synchronous or Asynchronous
Memory Access, this word contains the peripheral servicing
cycle time in units of 0.1 ms. The time is updated every cycle
and is recorded in 16-bit binary (0 to 4E20 hex, or 0.0 to
2,000.0 ms).
Task Information
Name
Task Number when Program
Stopped
Address
A294
Maximum Interrupt Task Processing Time
Interrupt Task with Max. Processing Time
A440
IR/DR Operation between
Tasks (Not supported by
CS1@-CPU@@(-V1) Units)
436
A441
A09914
Description
Access
This word contains the task number of the task that was
Read-only
being executed when program execution was stopped
because of a program error.
Contains the Maximum Interrupt Task Processing Time in
Read-only
units of 0.1 ms.
Contains the task number of the interrupt task with the maxi- Read-only
mum processing time. Hexadecimal values 8000 to 80FF
correspond to task numbers 00 to FF. Bit 15 is turned ON
when an interrupt has occurred.
Turn ON this bit to share index and data registers between
all tasks. Turn OFF this bit to use separate index and data
registers between in each task.
Read-only
Section 9-16
Auxiliary Area
Debugging Information
■
Online Editing
Name
Online Editing Wait Flag
Address
A20110
Description
ON when an online editing process is waiting.
(An online editing request was received while online editing
was disabled.)
ON when an online editing process is being executed.
Access
Read-only
Online Editing Processing
Flag
Online Editing Disable Bit Validator
Online Editing Disable Bit
A20111
A52700 to
A52707
A52709
The Online Editing Disable Bit (A52709) is valid only when
this byte contains 5A.
Turn this bit ON to disable online editing.
(A52700 to A52707 must be set to 5A.)
Read/write
Address
A50015
Description
Access
Turn this bit ON to turn OFF all outputs from Basic I/O Units, Read/write
Output Units, and Special I/O Units.
Address
A50809
Description
Access
ON when the differentiate monitor condition has been estab- Read/write
lished during execution of differentiation monitoring.
Name
Sampling Start Bit
Address
A50815
Trace Start Bit
A50814
Trace Busy Flag
A50813
Trace Completed Flag
A50812
Trace Trigger Monitor Flag
A50811
Description
When a data trace is started by turning this bit from OFF to
ON from a Programming Device, the PLC will begin storing
data in Trace Memory by one of the three following methods:
1) Periodic sampling (10 to 2,550 ms)
2) Sampling at execution of TRSM(045)
3) Sampling at the end of every cycle.
Turn this bit from OFF to ON to establish the trigger condition. The offset indicated by the delay value (positive or negative) determines which data samples are valid.
ON when the Sampling Start Bit (A50815) is turned from
OFF to ON. OFF when the trace is completed.
ON when sampling of a region of trace memory has been
completed during execution of a Trace. OFF when the next
time the Sampling Start Bit (A50815) is turned from OFF to
ON.
ON when a trigger condition is established by the Trace Start
Bit (A50814). OFF when the next Data Trace is started by
the Sampling Start bit (A50815).
■
Differentiate Monitor
Name
Differentiate Monitor Completed Flag
■
Read/write
Output Control
Name
Output OFF Bit
■
Read-only
Data Tracing
Access
Read/write
Read/write
Read/write
Read/write
Read/write
File Memory Information
Name
Memory Card Type
Memory Card Format Error
Flag
File Transfer Error Flag
File Write Error Flag
File Read Error
Address
A34300 to
A34302
A34307
A34308
A34309
A34310
Description
Indicates the type of Memory Card, if any, installed.
Access
Read-only
ON when the Memory Card is not formatted or a formatting
error has occurred.
ON when an error occurred while writing data to file memory.
ON when data cannot be written to file memory because it is
write-protected or the data exceeds the capacity of the file
memory.
ON when a file could not be read because of a malfunction
(file is damaged or data is corrupted).
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
437
Section 9-16
Auxiliary Area
Name
Address
File Missing Flag
A34311
File Memory Operation Flag
A34313
Memory Card Detected Flag
(Not supported by pre-V@
CS1 CPU Units.)
Number of Items to
Transfer
A34315
A346 to
A347
Accessing File Data Flag
A34314
EM File Memory Format Error A34306
Flag
EM File Memory Starting
Bank
A344
Program Index File Flag
A34501
Comment File Flag
A34502
Symbol Table File Flag
A34503
File Deletion Flags
A39506
A39507
438
Description
Access
ON when an attempt is made to read a file that doesn’t exist, Read-only
or an attempt is made to write to a file in a directory that
doesn’t exist.
ON while any of the following operations is being executed. Read-only
OFF when none of them are being executed.
Memory Card detection started.
CMND instruction sending a FINS command to the local
CPU Unit.
FREAD/FWRIT instructions.
Program replacement using the control bit in the Auxiliary
Area.
Easy backup operation.
If this flag is ON, write and comparison operations to the
Memory Card cannot be executed.
ON when a Memory Card has been detected.
Read-only
OFF when a Memory Card has not been detected.
These words contain the number of words or fields remaining to be transferred (8-digit hexadecimal).
For binary files (.IOM), the value is decremented for each
word that is read. For text (.TXT) or CSV (.CSV) data, the
value is decremented for each field that is read.
ON while file data is being accessed.
Turns ON when a format error occurs in the first EM bank
allocated for file memory.
Turns OFF when formatting is completed normally.
Contains the starting bank number of EM file memory (bank
number of the first formatted bank).
This number is read when starting to write data from a Memory Card. If the largest bank number for which there is an
EM file for simple backup (BACKUPE@.IOM, where represents consecutive bank numbers) is the same as the largest
bank number supported by the CPU Unit, the EM Area will
be formatted as file memory using the value in A344. If the
maximum bank numbers are different, the EM Area will be
returned to it’s unformatted (not file memory) status.
Turns ON when the comment memory contains a program
index file.
0: No file
1: File present
Turns ON when the comment memory contains a comment
file.
0: No file
1: File present
Turns ON when the comment memory contains a symbol
table file.
0: No file
1: File present
The system automatically deleted the remainder of an EM
file memory file that was being updated when a power interruption occurred.
The system automatically deleted the remainder of a Memory Card file that was being updated when a power interruption occurred.
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Section 9-16
Auxiliary Area
Name
Address
Simple Backup Write Capacity A397
Program Replacement End
Code (Not supported by preV@ CS1 CPU Units.)
A65000 to
A65007
Replacement Error Flag (Not
supported by pre-V1 CS1
CPU Units.)
A65014
Replacement Start Bit
(Not supported by pre-V@
CS1 CPU Units.)
A65015
Description
Access
If a write for a simple backup operation fails, A397 will con- Read-only
tain the Memory Card capacity that would have been
required to complete the write operation. The value is in
Kbytes. (This indicates that the Memory Card did not have
the specified capacity when the write operation was started.)
0001 to FFFF hex: Write error (value indicates required
capacity from 1 to 65,535 Kbytes).
A397 will be cleared to 0000 hex when the write is completed successfully for a simple backup operation.
Read-only
Normal End (i.e., when A65014 is OFF)
01 hex: Program file (.OBJ) replaced.
Error End (i.e., when A65014 is ON)
00 hex: Fatal error
01 hex: Memory error
11 hex: Write-protected
12 hex: Program replacement password error
21 hex: No Memory Card
22 hex: No such file
23 hex: Specified file exceeds capacity (memory error).
31 hex: One of the following in progress:
File memory operation
User program write
Operating mode change
Read/write
ON when the Replacement Start Bit (A65015) has been
turned ON to replace the program, but there is an error. If
the Replacement Start Bit is turned ON again, the Replacement Error Flag will be turned OFF.
Program replacement starts when the Replacement Start Bit Read/write
is turned ON if the Program Password (A651) is valid (A5A5
hex). Do not turn OFF the Replacement Start Bit during program replacement.
When the power is turned ON or program replacement is
completed, the Replacement Start Bit will be turned OFF,
regardless of whether replacement was completed normally
or in error.
It is possible to confirm if program replacement is being executed by reading the Replacement Start Bit using a Programming Device, PT, or host computer.
439
Section 9-16
Auxiliary Area
Name
Address
Program Password
(Not supported by pre-V@
CS1 CPU Units.)
A651
Program File Name
(Not supported by pre-V@
CS1 CPU Units.)
A654 to
A657
440
Description
Access
Store the password to replace a program.
Read/write
A5A5 hex: Replacement Start Bit (A65015) is enabled.
Any other value: Replacement Start Bit (A65015) is disabled.
When the power is turned ON or program replacement is
completed, the Replacement Start Bit will be turned OFF,
regardless of whether replacement was completed normally
or in error.
Read/write
When program replacement starts, the program file name
will be stored in ASCII. File names can be specified up to
eight characters in length excluding the extension.
File names are stored in the following order: A654 to A657
(i.e., from the lowest word to the highest), and from the highest byte to the lowest. If a file name is less than eight characters, the lowest remaining bytes and the highest remaining
word will be filled with spaces (20 hex). Null characters and
space characters cannot be used within file names.
Example: File name is ABC.OBJ
Section 9-16
Auxiliary Area
Program Error Information
Name
Program Error Flag
(Fatal error)
Program Error Task
Address
A40109
A294
Instruction Processing Error
Flag
A29508
Indirect DM/EM BCD Error
Flag
A29509
Illegal Access Error Flag
A29510
No END Error Flag
A29511
Task Error Flag
A29512
Differentiation Overflow Error
Flag
Illegal Instruction Error Flag
A29513
UM Overflow Error Flag
A29515
Program Address Where
Program Stopped
A298 and
A299
A29514
Description
ON when program contents are incorrect. CPU Unit operation will stop.
Provides the type and number of the tack that was being
executed when program execution stops as a result of a program error.
This flag and the Error Flag (ER) will be turned ON when an
instruction processing error has occurred and the PLC
Setup has been set to stop operation for an instruction error.
This flag and the Access Error Flag (AER) will be turned ON
when an indirect DM/EM BCD error has occurred and the
PLC Setup has been set to stop operation an indirect
DM/EM BCD error.
This flag and the Access Error Flag (AER) will be turned ON
when an illegal access error has occurred and the PLC
Setup has been set to stop operation an illegal access error.
ON when there isn’t an END(001) instruction in each program within a task.
ON when a task error has occurred. The following conditions
will generate a task error.
1) There isn’t an executable cyclic task.
2) There isn’t a program allocated to the task.
ON when the specified Differentiation Flag Number exceeds
the allowed value.
ON when a program that cannot be executed has been
stored.
ON when the last address in UM (user program memory)
has been exceeded.
These words contain the 8-digit hexadecimal program
address of the instruction where program execution was
stopped due to a program error.
(A299 contains the leftmost digits.)
Access
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Error Information
■ Error Log, Error Code
Name
Error Log Area
Error Log Pointer
Address
A100 to
A199
A300
Error Log Pointer Reset Bit
Error Code
A50014
A400
Description
When an error has occurred, the error code, error contents,
and error’s time and date are stored in the Error Log Area.
When an error occurs, the Error Log Pointer is incremented
by 1 to indicate the location where the next error record will
be recorded as an offset from the beginning of the Error Log
Area (A100).
Turn this bit ON to reset the Error Log Pointer (A300) to 00.
When a non-fatal error (user-defined FALS(006) or system
error) or a fatal error (user-defined FALS(007) or system
error) occurs, the 4-digit hexadecimal error code is written to
this word.
Access
Read-only
Read-only
Read/write
Read-only
441
Section 9-16
Auxiliary Area
■ FAL/FALS Error Information
Name
FAL Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)
Executed FAL Number Flags
FALS Error Flag
(Fatal error)
FAL/FALS Number for System Error Simulation
(Not supported by
CS1@-CPU@@(-V1) Units)
Address
A40215
A360 to
A391
A40106
Description
ON when a non-fatal error is generated by executing
FAL(006).
The flag corresponding to the specified FAL number will be
turned ON when FAL(006) is executed. Bits A36001 to
A39115 correspond to FAL numbers 001 to 511.
ON when a fatal error is generated by the FALS(007)
instruction.
Access
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
A053
Set a dummy FAL/FALS number to use to simulate the sys- Read/write
tem error using FAL(006) or FALS(007).
0001 to 01FF hex: FAL/FALS numbers 1 to 511
0000 or 0200 to FFFF hex: No FAL/FALS number for system
error simulation. (No error will be generated.)
Name
Memory Error Flag
(Fatal error)
Address
A40115
Memory Error Location
A40300 to
A40308
Description
ON when an error occurred in memory or there was an error
in automatic transfer from the Memory Card when the power
was turned ON.
The ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light
and CPU Unit operation will stop when this flag turns ON.
If the automatic data transfer at startup fails, A40309 will be
turned ON. If an error occurs in automatic transfer at startup,
this error cannot be cleared.
When a memory error occurs, the Memory Error Flag
(A40115) is turned ON and one of the following flags is
turned ON to indicate the memory area where the error
occurred.
A40300: User program
A40304: PLC Setup
A40305: Registered I/O Table
A40307: Routing Table
A40308: CS-series CPU Bus Unit Settings
ON when an error occurs in automatically transferring a file
from the Memory Card to the CPU Unit at startup, including
when a file is missing or a Memory Card is not mounted.
The error can be cleared by turning OFF the power. (This
error cannot be cleared while the power is ON.)
Turns ON when the flash memory fails.
Read-only
Address
A40210
Description
ON when there is a setting error in the PLC Setup.
Access
Read-only
A406
When there is a setting error in the PLC Setup, the location
of that error is written to A406 in 4-digit hexadecimal. The
location is given as the address set on the Programming
Console.
Read-only
■ Memory Error Information
Startup Memory Card Transfer A40309
Error Flag
Flash Memory Error
(Not supported by
CS1@-CPU@@(-V1) Units)
A40310
Access
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
■ PLC Setup Error Information
Name
PLC Setup Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)
PLC Setup Error Location
442
Section 9-16
Auxiliary Area
■ Interrupt Task Error Information
Name
Interrupt Task Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)
Address
A40213
Interrupt Task Error Cause
Flag
Interrupt Task Error, Task
Number
A42615
Description
Access
ON when the Detect Interrupt Task Errors setting in the PLC Read-only
Setup is set to “Detect” and one of the following occurs.
IORD(222) or IOWR(223) in a cyclic task are competing with
IORD(222) or IOWR(223) in an interrupt task.
An interrupt task is executed for more than 10 ms during I/O
refreshing of a C200H Special I/O Unit or a SYSMAC BUS
I/O Unit.
IORD(222) or IOWR(223) was executed in an interrupt task
when I/O was being refreshed.
Indicates the cause of an Interrupt Task Error.
Read-only
A42600 to
A42611
The function of these bits depends upon the status of
Read-only
A42615 (the Interrupt Task Error Cause Flag).
A42615 OFF:
Contains the interrupt task number when an interrupt task
was executed for more than 10 ms during I/O refreshing of a
C200H Special I/O Unit or a SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Unit.
A42615 ON:
Contains the Special I/O Unit’s unit number when an attempt
was made to refresh a Special I/O Unit’s I/O from an interrupt task with IORF(097) while the Unit’s I/O was being
refreshed by cyclic I/O refreshing (duplicate refreshing).
Name
Basic I/O Unit Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)
Address
A40212
Basic I/O Unit Error, Slot
Number
A40800 to
A40807
Basic I/O Unit Error, Rack
Number
A40808 to
A40815
I/O Setting Error Flag
(Fatal error)
A40110
I/O Verification Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)
A40209
Expansion I/O Rack Number
Duplication Flags
A40900 to
A40907
Too Many I/O Points Flag
(Fatal error)
A40111
Description
ON when an error has occurred in a Basic I/O Unit (including
C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units and C200H Interrupt
Input Units).
Contains the binary slot number where the error occurred
when an error has occurred in a Basic I/O Unit (including
C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units and C200H Interrupt
Input Units).
Contains the binary rack number where the error occurred
when an error has occurred in a Basic I/O Unit (including
C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units and C200H Interrupt
Input Units).
ON when an Input Unit has been installed in an Output
Unit’s slot or vice-versa, so the Input and Output Units clash
in the registered I/O table.
ON when a Basic I/O Unit registered in the I/O Table does
not match the Basic I/O Unit actually installed in the PLC
because a Unit was added or removed.
The corresponding flag will be turned ON when an Expansion I/O Rack’s starting word address was set from a Programming Device and two Racks have overlapping word
allocations or a Rack’s starting address exceeds CIO 0901.
Bits 00 to 07 correspond to Racks 0 to 7.
ON when the number of I/O points being used in Basic I/O
Units exceeds the maximum allowed for the PLC.
■ I/O Information
Access
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
443
Section 9-16
Auxiliary Area
Name
Too Many I/O Points, Details
Address
A40700 to
A40712
Too Many I/O Points, Cause
A40713 to
A40715
I/O Bus Error Flag
(Fatal error)
I/O Bus Error Slot Number
A40114
I/O Table Errors
(Not supported by
CS1@-CPU@@(-V1) Units)
A40400 to
A40407
A26100
A26102
A26103
A26104
A26106
A26107
A26109
444
Description
The 6 possible causes of the Too Many I/O Points Error are
listed below. The 3-digit binary value in A40713 to A40715
indicates the cause of the error. (The causes corresponding
to values 0 to 5 are listed below.)
The 13-bit binary value in A40700 to A40712 indicates the
details: the excessive value or the duplicated unit number.
The number of I/O points will be written here when the total
number of I/O points set in the I/O Table (excluding Slave
Racks) exceed the maximum allowed for the CPU Unit.
The number of interrupt inputs will be written here when
there are more than 32 interrupt inputs.
The unit number of the Slave Unit will be written here when a
unit number is duplicated or the number of I/O points on a
C500 Slave Unit exceeds 320.
The unit number of the I/O Terminal (excluding Slave Racks)
will be written here when a unit number is duplicated
The unit number of the Master Unit will be written here when
a unit number is duplicated or the unit number is outside of
the allowed setting range.
The number of Racks will be written here when the number
of Expansion I/O Racks exceeds the maximum.
These three bits indicate the cause of the Too Many I/O
Points Error. (See A40700 to A40712.)
000 (0): Too many I/O points.
001 (1): Too many Interrupt Input points.
010 (2): Slave Unit’s unit number duplicated or the number
of I/O points on a C500 Slave Unit exceeds 320.
011 (3): I/O Terminal’s unit number duplicated.
100 (4): Master Unit’s unit number duplicated or unit number
is out-of-range (not 0 or 1).
101 (5): Too many Expansion Racks connected.
110 (6): The unit number of the Remote I/O Master Unit is 4,
6, or 7, or an Special I/O Unit’s unit number cannot be
detected.
ON when an error occurs in a data transfer between the
CPU Unit and a Unit mounted to a slot.
Contains the 8-bit binary slot number (00 to 09) where an
I/O Bus Error occurred.
ON: Error in CPU Bus Unit Setup
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: Overflow in maximum number of I/O points.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: The same unit number was used more than once.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: I/O bus error
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: SYSMAC BUS detection ended in an error.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: Error in a Special I/O Unit
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: I/O detection has not been completed.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
Access
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Section 9-16
Auxiliary Area
Name
I/O Bus Error Rack Number
Address
Description
Access
A40408 to
A40415
A40113
Contains the 8-bit binary rack number (00 to 07) where an
Read-only
I/O Bus Error occurred.
Read-only
ON in the following cases:
Two CPU Bus Units have been assigned the same unit number.
Two Special I/O Units have been assigned the same unit
number.
Two Basic I/O Units have been allocated the same data area
words.
The same rack number is set for more than one Expansion
Rack.
Name
CPU Bus Unit Number Duplication Flags
Address
A410
CPU Bus Unit Error, Unit
Number Flags
A417
CPU Bus Unit Setting Error,
Unit Number Flags
A427
CPU Bus Unit Setting Error
Flag
(Non-fatal error)
CPU Bus Unit Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)
A40203
Description
The Duplication Error Flag (A40113) and the corresponding
flag in A410 will be turned ON when a CPU Bus Unit’s unit
number has been duplicated.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F.
When an error occurs in a data exchange between the CPU
Unit and a CPU Bus Unit, the CPU Bus Unit Error Flag
(A40207) and the corresponding flag in A417 are turned ON.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F.
When a CPU Bus Unit Setting Error occurs, A40203 and the
corresponding flag in A27 are turned ON.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F.
ON when an installed CPU Bus Unit does not match the
CPU Bus Unit registered in the I/O table.
Duplication Error Flag
(Fatal error)
■ CPU Bus Unit Information
Access
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
A40207
Read-only
ON when an error occurs in a data exchange between the
CPU Unit and a CPU Bus Unit (including an error in the CPU
Bus Unit itself).
Name
Special I/O Unit Number
Duplication Flags
Address
A41100 to
A41615
Special I/O Unit Setting Error
Flag
(Non-fatal error)
Special I/O Unit Setting Error,
Unit Number Flags
A40202
Description
Access
The Duplication Error Flag (A40113) and the corresponding Read-only
flag in A411 through A416 will be turned ON when a Special
I/O Unit’s unit number has been duplicated. (Bits A41100 to
A41615 correspond to unit numbers 0 to 95.)
ON when an installed Special I/O Unit does not match the
Read-only
Special I/O Unit registered in the I/O table.
■ Special I/O Unit Information
A42800 to
A43315
Special I/O Unit Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)
A40206
Special I/O Unit Error, Unit
Number Flags
A41800 to
A42315
When a Special I/O Unit Setting Error occurs, A40202 and
Read-only
the corresponding flag in these words are turned ON. (Bits
A42800 to A43315 correspond to unit numbers 0 to 95.)
Read-only
ON when an error occurs in a data exchange between the
CPU Unit and a Special I/O Unit (including an error in the
Special I/O Unit itself).
When an error occurs in a data exchange between the CPU Read-only
Unit and a Special I/O Unit, the Special I/O Unit Error Flag
(A40206) and the corresponding flag in these words are
turned ON. (Bits A42800 to A43315 correspond to unit numbers 0 to 95.)
445
Section 9-16
Auxiliary Area
■ Inner Board Information
Name
Inner Board Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)
Address
A40208
Inner Board Error
Information
A424
Inner Board Stopped Error
Flag (Fatal error)
A40112
Description
Access
ON when an error occurs in a data exchange between the
Read-only
CPU Unit and the Inner Board (including an error in the Inner
Board itself).
When an error occurs in a data exchange between the CPU Read-only
Unit and the Inner Board, the Inner Board Error Flag
(A40208) and the appropriate error code will be written to
A424.
ON when there is an Inner Board Error (watchdog timer
Read-only
error).
■ SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Information
Name
SYSMAC BUS Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)
Address
A40205
SYSMAC BUS Master Error
Flags
A40500 to
A40501
Slave Number of
SYSMAC BUS Error After
Start-up
A42504 to
A42506
A42504
only
A42508 to
A42515
SYSMAC BUS Slave Number
Refresh Bit
A50900
Description
ON when an error occurs in a data transfer in the SYSMAC
BUS system. The number of the Master involved is indicated
with bits A40500 and A40501.
When a transmission error occurs in the SYSMAC BUS system, the flag for the affected Master Unit will be turned ON.
A40500: Flag for Master Unit #0
A40501: Flag for Master Unit #1
When there is an error in a Slave Rack, these bits contain
the Slave’s unit number.
When there is an error in an Optical I/O Unit (excluding
Slave Racks), the status of A42504 (0 or 1) indicates
whether the Unit is low or high.
When there is an error in a Slave Rack, this byte contains
the 2-digit hexadecimal unit number of the Master to which
the Slave is connected.
(0xB0 for Master Unit 0, 0xB1 for Master Unit 1)
When there is an error in an Optical I/O Unit, this byte contains its 2-digit hexadecimal unit number (00 to 1F, or 0 to 31
decimal).
Turn this bit ON to refresh the error information in A425 (unit
number of Slave where error occurred after startup).
Access
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read/write
■ PLC Link Information
Name
PLC Link Operating Level
Flags
Address
A44211
A44212
446
Description
These flags indicate whether a PLC Link Unit is mounted to
the PLC and the PLC Link Unit’s operating level.
ON when the Unit is in operating level #1.
These flags indicate whether a PLC Link Unit is mounted to
the PLC and the PLC Link Unit’s operating level.
ON when the Unit is in operating level #0.
Access
Read-only
Read-only
Section 9-16
Auxiliary Area
■ Other PLC Operating Information
Name
Battery Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)
Address
A40204
Cycle Time Too Long Flag
(Fatal error)
A40108
Peripheral Servicing Too Long A40515
Flag (Not supported by
CS1@-CPU@@(-V1) Units)
FPD Teaching Bit
A59800
Memory Backup Battery Failure Flag
A39511
Description
ON if the CPU Unit’s battery is disconnected or its voltage is
low and the PLC Setup has been set to detect this error.
(Detect Low Battery)
ON if the cycle time exceeds the maximum cycle time set in
the PLC Setup. In the Parallel Processing Modes, the program execution cycle time will be used. (Watch Cycle Time)
Turns ON when the peripheral servicing time in a Parallel
Processing Mode exceeds 2 s. This will also cause a cycle
time error and operation will stop.
Turn this bit ON to set the monitoring time in FPD(269) automatically with the teaching function.
Data from the I/O memory areas that are maintained when
power is turned OFF (HR, DM, etc.) are backed up with a
Battery. A39511 turns ON if the Battery voltage drops and
the data can no longer be maintained. The data in the I/O
memory will not be dependable when this happens.
Access
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read/write
Read-only
Clock
■ Clock Information
Name
Clock Data
Address
Description
The clock data from the clock built into the CPU Unit is stored here in BCD.
A35100 to
Seconds: 00 to 59 (BCD)
A35107
A35108 to
Minutes: 00 to 59 (BCD)
A35115
A35200 to
Hour: 00 to 23 (BCD)
A35207
A35208 to
Day of the month: 01 to 31 (BCD)
A35215
A35300 to
Month: 01 to 12 (BCD)
A35307
A35308 to
Year: 00 to 99 (BCD)
A35315
A35400 to
Day of the week: 00: Sunday, 01: Monday,
A35407
02: Tuesday, 03: Wednesday, 04: Thursday,
05: Friday, 06: Saturday
Access
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
The internal clock time is saved in the above words in the Auxiliary Area once
every few cycles. For details on internal clock accuracy, refer to 2-1-1 CPU
Unit Specifications.
447
Section 9-16
Auxiliary Area
■ Operation Start and End Times
Name
Operation Start Time
Address
A515 to
A517
Operation End Time
A518 to
A520
Description
Access
The time that operation started as a result of changing the
Read/write
operating mode to RUN or MONITOR mode is stored here in
BCD.
A51500 to A51507: Seconds (00 to 59)
A51508 to A51515: Minutes (00 to 59)
A51600 to A51607: Hour (00 to 23)
A51608 to A51615: Day of month (01 to 31)
A51700 to A51707: Month (01 to 12)
A51708 to A51715: Year (00 to 99)
Note: The previous start time is stored after turning ON the
power supply until operation is started.
The time that operation stopped as a result of changing the Read/write
operating mode to PROGRAM mode is stored here in BCD.
A51800 to A51807: Seconds (00 to 59)
A51808 to A51815: Minutes (00 to 59)
A51900 to A51907: Hour (00 to 23)
A51908 to A51915: Day of month (01 to 31)
A52000 to A52007: Month (01 to 12)
A52008 to A52015: Year (00 to 99)
Note: If an error occurs in operation, the time of the error will
be stored. If the operating mode is then changed to PROGRAM mode, the time that PROGRAM mode was entered
will be stored.
■ Power Supply ON/OFF Time Information
Name
Startup Time
Address
A510 and
A511
Power Interruption Time
A512 and
A513
Number of Power
Interruptions
A514
Total Power ON Time
A523
Power ON Clock Data 1 (See
note.)
A720 to
A722
448
Description
These words contain the time (in BCD) at which the power
was turned ON. The contents are updated every time that
the power is turned ON.
A51000 to A51007: Seconds (00 to 59)
A51008 to A51015: Minutes (00 to 59)
A51100 to A51107: Hour (00 to 23)
A51108 to A51115: Day of the month (01 to 31)
These words contain the time (in BCD) at which the power
was interrupted. The contents are updated every time that
the power is interrupted.
A51200 to A51207: Seconds (00 to 59)
A51208 to A51215: Minutes (00 to 59)
A51300 to A51307: Hour (00 to 23)
A51308 to A51315: Day of month (01 to 31)
Contains the number of times (in binary) that power has
been interrupted since the power was first turned on. To
reset this value, overwrite the current value with 0000.
Contains the total time (in binary) that the PLC has been on
in 10-hour units. The data is stored is updated every 10
hours. To reset this value, overwrite the current value with
0000.
Access
Read/write
Read/write
Read/write
Read/write
These words contain the startup date/time (the same time
Read/write
as the startup time stored in words A510 to A511 as well as
the month and year information) for the last time that power
was turned ON. The data is BCD.
A72000 to A72007: Seconds (00 to 59)
A72008 to A72015: Minutes (00 to 59)
A72100 to A72107: Hour (00 to 23)
A72108 to A72115: Day of month (01 to 31)
A72200 to A72207: Month (01 to 12)
A72208 to A72215: Year (00 to 99)
Section 9-16
Auxiliary Area
Name
Address
Power ON Clock Data 2 (See
note.)
A723 to
A725
Power ON Clock Data 3 (See
note.)
A726 to
A728
Power ON Clock Data 4 (See
note.)
A729 to
A731
Power ON Clock Data 5 (See
note.)
A732 to
A734
Power ON Clock Data 6 (See
note.)
A735 to
A737
Power ON Clock Data 7 (See
note.)
A738 to
A740
Power ON Clock Data 8 (See
note.)
A741 to
A743
Power ON Clock Data 9 (See
note.)
A744 to
A746
Power ON Clock Data 10 (See A747 to
note.)
A749
Description
These words contain the startup time/date for the second-tolast time that power was turned ON.
The data is BCD and the storage format is the same as
words A720 to A722.
These words contain the startup time/date for the third-tolast time that power was turned ON.
The data is BCD and the storage format is the same as
words A720 to A722.
These words contain the startup time/date for the fourth-tolast time that power was turned ON.
The data is BCD and the storage format is the same as
words A720 to A722.
These words contain the startup time/date for the fifth-to-last
time that power was turned ON.
The data is BCD and the storage format is the same as
words A720 to A722.
These words contain the startup time/date for the sixth-tolast time that power was turned ON.
The data is BCD and the storage format is the same as
words A720 to A722.
These words contain the startup time/date for the seventhto-last time that power was turned ON.
The data is BCD and the storage format is the same as
words A720 to A722.
These words contain the startup time/date for the eighth-tolast time that power was turned ON.
The data is BCD and the storage format is the same as
words A720 to A722.
These words contain the startup time/date for the ninth-tolast time that power was turned ON.
The data is BCD and the storage format is the same as
words A720 to A722.
These words contain the startup time/date for the tenth-tolast time that power was turned ON.
The data is BCD and the storage format is the same as
words A720 to A722.
Access
Read/write
Read/write
Read/write
Read/write
Read/write
Read/write
Read/write
Read/write
Read/write
Note Supported only by unit version 3.0 or later.
449
Section 9-16
Auxiliary Area
■
User Data Revision Times
Name
User Program Date
(Not supported by
CS1@-CPU@@(-V1) Units)
Address
A090 to
A093
Parameter Date
(Not supported by
CS1@-CPU@@(-V1) Units)
A094 to
A097
Description
Access
These words contain in BCD the date and time that the user Read-only
program was last overwritten.
A09000 to A09007: Seconds (00 to 59)
A09008 to A09015: Minutes (00 to 59)
A09100 to A09107: Hour (00 to 23)
A09108 to A09115: Day of month (01 to 31)
A09200 to A09207: Month (01 to 12)
A09208 to A09215: Year (00 to 99)
A09308 to A09307: Day of the week
(00: Sunday, 01: Monday, 02: Tuesday, 03: Wednesday, 04:
Thursday, 05: Friday, 06: Saturday)
Read-only
These words contain in BCD the date and time that the
parameters were last overwritten.
A09400 to A09407: Seconds (00 to 59)
A09408 to A09415: Minutes (00 to 59)
A09500 to A09507: Hour (00 to 23)
A09508 to A09515: Day of month (01 to 31)
A09600 to A09607: Month (01 to 12)
A09608 to A09615: Year (00 to 99)
A09708 to A09707: Day of the week
(00: Sunday, 01: Monday, 02: Tuesday, 03: Wednesday, 04:
Thursday, 05: Friday, 06: Saturday)
Information on Read Protection Using a Password
Name
UM Read Protection Flag
Address
A09900
Task Read Protection Flag
A09901
Program Write Protection for
Read Protection
A09902
Enable/Disable Bit for Program Backup
A09903
450
Description
Indicates whether the entire user program in the PLC is
read-protected.
0: UM not read-protected.
1: UM read-protected.
Indicates whether read protection is set for individual tasks.
0: Tasks not read-protected.
1: Tasks read-protected.
Indicates whether the program is write-protected.
0: Write-enabled.
1: Write-protected.
Indicates whether creating a backup program file (.OBJ) is
enabled or disabled.
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
Access
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Section 9-16
Auxiliary Area
Communications
■
Network
Network Communications Information
Name
Address
Communications Port Enabled A20200 to
Flags
A20207
Communications Port Completion Codes
A203 to
A210
Communications Port Error
Flags
A21900 to
A21907
Description
Access
ON when a network instruction (SEND(090), RECV(098),
Read-only
CMND(490), or PMCR(260)) can be executed with the corresponding port number or background execution can be
executed with the corresponding port number (CS1-H CPU
Units only). Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communications
ports 0 to 7.
When the simple backup operation is used to performed a
write or compare operation for a Memory Card on a CS1-H
CPU Unit, a communications port will be automatically allocated, and the corresponding flag will be turned ON during
the operation and turned OFF when the operation has been
completed.
These words contain the completion codes for the correRead-only
sponding port numbers when network instructions
(SEND(090), RECV(098), CMND(490), or PMCR(260))
have been executed. The contents will be cleared when
background execution has been completed (for CS1-H CPU
Unit only). Words A203 to A210 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
When the simple backup operation is used to performed a
write or compare operation for a Memory Card on a CS1-H
CPU Unit, a communications port will be automatically allocated, and a completion code will be stored in the corresponding word.
Read-only
ON when an error occurred during execution of a network
instruction (SEND(090), RECV(098), CMND(490), or
PMCR(260)). Turns OFF then execution has been finished
normally. Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communications ports
0 to 7.
When the simple backup operation is used to performed a
write or compare operation for a Memory Card on a CS1-H
CPU Unit, a communications port will be automatically allocated. The corresponding flag will be turned ON if an error
occurs and will be turned OFF if the simple backup operation ends normally.
451
Section 9-16
Auxiliary Area
Auxiliary Area Bits and Words Used when Automatically Allocating
Communications Ports
Name
Network Communications
Port Allocation Enabled Flag
Address
A20215
First Cycle Flags after Network Communications Finished
A21400 to
A21407
First Cycle Flags after Network Communications Error
A21500 to
A21507
Network Communications
Completion Code Storage
Address
A216 to
A217
Used Communications Port
Numbers
A218
452
Description
ON when there is a communications port available for automatic allocation.
Note: Use this flag to confirm whether a communications
port is available for automatic allocation before executing communications instructions when using 9 or
more communications instructions simultaneously.
Each flag will turn ON for just one cycle after communications have been completed. Bits 00 to 07 correspond to
ports 0 to 7. Use the Used Communications Port Number
stored in A218 to determine which flag to access.
Note: These flags are not effective until the next cycle after
the communications instruction is executed. Delay
accessing them for at least one cycle.
Each flag will turn ON for just one cycle after a communications error occurs. Bits 00 to 07 correspond to ports 0 to 7.
Use the Used Communications Port Number stored in A218
to determine which flag to access. Determine the cause of
the error according to the Communications Port Completion
Codes stored in A203 to A210.
Note: These flags are not effective until the next cycle after
the communications instruction is executed. Delay
accessing them for at least one cycle.
The completion code for a communications instruction is
automatically stored at the address with the I/O memory
address given in these words. Place this address into an
index register and use indirect addressing through the index
register to read the communications completion code.
Stores the communications port numbers used when a communications instruction is executed using automatic communication port allocations.
0000 to 0007 hex: Communications port 0 to 7
Access
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Section 9-16
Auxiliary Area
Information on Explicit Message Instructions
Name
Address
Explicit Communications Error A21300 to
Flag
A21307
Network Communications
Error Flag
A21900 to
A21907
Network Communications
Response Code
A203 to
A210
Description
Access
Turn ON when an error occurs in executing an Explicit Mes- Read-only
sage Instruction (EXPLT(720), EGATR(721), ESATR(722),
ECHRD(723), or ECHWR(724)).
Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
The corresponding bit will turn ON both when the explicit
message cannot be sent and when an error response is
returned for the explicit message.
The status will be maintained until the next explicit message
communication is executed. The bit will always turn OFF
when the next Explicit Message Instruction is executed.
Turn ON if the explicit message cannot be sent when execut- Read-only
ing an Explicit Message Instruction (EXPLT(720),
EGATR(721), ESATR(722), ECHRD(723), or ECHWR(724)).
Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
The corresponding bit will turn ON when the explicit message cannot be sent.
The status will be maintained until the next explicit message
communication is executed. The bit will always turn OFF
when the next Explicit Message Instruction is executed.
The following codes will be stored when an Explicit Message Read-only
Instruction (EXPLT(720), EGATR(721), ESATR(722),
ECHRD(723), or ECHWR(724)) has been executed.
A203 to A210 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
If the Explicit Communications Error Flag turns OFF, 0000
hex is stored.
If the Explicit Communications Error Flag is ON and the Network Communications Error Flag is ON, the FINS end code
is stored.
If the Explicit Communications Error Flag is ON and the Network Communications Error Flag is OFF, the explicit message end code is stored.
During communications, 0000 hex will be stored and the
suitable code will be stored when execution has been completed. The code will be cleared when operation is started.
SYSMAC BUS Communications Information
Name
SYSMAC BUS Master 1
Restart Bit
Address
A52614
SYSMAC BUS Master 0
Restart Bit
A52615
Description
Access
Turn this bit ON to restart SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Master Read/write
Unit 1. (Turned OFF automatically when restart processing
is completed.)
Turn this bit ON to restart SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Master Read/write
Unit 0. (Turned OFF automatically when restart processing
is completed.)
453
Section 9-16
Auxiliary Area
■ Peripheral Port Communications Information
Name
Peripheral Port Communications Error Flag
Address
A39212
Peripheral Port Restart Bit
Peripheral Port Settings
Change Bit
Peripheral Port Error Flags
A52601
A61901
Peripheral Port PT Communications Flags
A52808 to
A52815
A39400 to
A39407
Peripheral Port PT Priority
Registered Flags
A39408 to
A39415
Description
ON when a communications error has occurred at the
peripheral port.
Note: This flag is disabled in NT Link (1:N) mode.
Turn this bit ON to restart the peripheral port.
ON while the peripheral port’s communications settings are
being changed.
These flags indicate what kind of error has occurred at the
peripheral port.
The corresponding bit will be ON when the peripheral port is
communicating with a PT in NT link mode. Bits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7.
The corresponding bit will be ON for the PT that has priority
when the peripheral port is communicating in NT link mode.
Bits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7.
Access
Read-only
Read/write
Read/write
Read/write
Read-only
Read-only
■ RS-232C Port Communications Information
Name
RS-232C Port Communications Error Flag
Address
A39204
RS-232C Port Restart Bit
RS-232C Port Settings
Change Bit
A52600
A61902
RS-232C Port Error Flags
A52800 to
A52807
A39205
These flags indicate what kind of error has occurred at the
Read/write
RS-232C port.
ON when the RS-232C port is able to send data in no-proto- Read-only
col mode.
A39206
ON when the RS-232C port has completed the reception in
no-protocol mode.
A39207
ON when a data overflow occurred during reception through Read-only
the RS-232C port in no-protocol mode.
A39300 to
A39307
The corresponding bit will be ON when the RS-232C port is Read-only
communicating with a PT in NT link mode. Bits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7.
The corresponding bit will be ON for the PT that has priority Read-only
when the RS-232C port is communicating in NT link mode.
Bits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7.
Indicates (in binary) the number of bytes of data received
Read-only
when the RS-232C port is in no-protocol mode.
RS-232C Port Send Ready
Flag
(No-protocol mode)
RS-232C Port Reception
Completed Flag
(No-protocol mode)
RS-232C Port Reception
Overflow Flag
(No-protocol mode)
RS-232C Port PT Communications Flags
RS-232C Port PT Priority
Registered Flags
A39308 to
A39315
RS-232C Port Reception
Counter
(No-protocol mode)
A39300 to
A39315
Description
ON when a communications error has occurred at the RS232C port.
Note: Do not access this flag in peripheral bus mode, 1:N
NT Link mode, or Serial PLC Link Master/Slave
mode.
Turn this bit ON to restart the RS-232C port.
ON while the RS-232C port’s communications settings are
being changed.
Access
Read-only
Read/write
Read/write
Read-only
■ Serial Device Communications Information
Name
Communications Units 0 to
15, Ports 1 to 4 Settings
Change Bits
Address
A62001 to
A63504
Communications Board Ports
1 to 4 Settings Change Bits
A63601 to
A63604
454
Description
Access
The corresponding flag will be ON when the settings for that Read/write
port are being changed.
(Bits 1 to 4 in A620 to A635 correspond to ports 1 to 4 in
Communications Units 0 to 15.)
The corresponding flag will be ON when the settings for that Read/write
port are being changed.
(Bits 1 to 4 correspond to ports 1 to 4.)
Section 9-16
Auxiliary Area
Instruction-related Information
Step Flag
Name
Address
A20012
Current EM Bank
A301
Macro Area Input Words
A600 to
A603
Macro Area Output Words
A604 to
A607
Description
ON for one cycle when step execution is started with
STEP(008).
This word contains the current EM bank number in 4-digit
hexadecimal.
When MCRO(099) is executed, it copies the input data from
the specified source words (input parameter words) to A600
through A603.
After the subroutine specified in MCRO(099) has been executed, the results of the subroutine are transferred from
A604 through A607 to the specified destination words (output parameter words).
Access
Read-only
Read-only
Read/write
Read/write
Background Execution Information
Name
DR00 Output for Background
Execution
(Not supported by
CS1@-CPU@@(-V1) Units)
Address
A597
IR00 Output for Background
Execution
(Not supported by
CS1@-CPU@@(-V1) Units)
A595 and
A596
Equals Flag for Background
Execution
(Not supported by
CS1@-CPU@@(-V1) Units)
ER/AER Flag for Background
Execution
(Not supported by
CS1@-CPU@@(-V1) Units)
A59801
A39510
Description
When a data register is specified as the output for an
instruction processed in the background, A597 receives the
output instead of DR00.
0000 to FFFF hex
When an index register is specified as the output for an
instruction processed in the background, A595 and A596
receive the output instead of IR00.
0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF hex
(A596 contains the leftmost digits.)
Turns ON if matching data is found for an SRCH(181)
instruction executed in the background.
Access
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Turns ON if an error or illegal access occurs during background execution. Turns OFF when power is turned ON or
operation is started.
Read-only
Description
Turns ON if the FB program memory contains FB program
data.
0: No data
1: Data present
Access
Read-only
Function Block Information
■ Function Block Memory Information
Name
FB Program Data Flag
Address
A34500
455
Section 9-17
TR (Temporary Relay) Area
■ OMRON FB Library Information
Name
FB Communications Instruction Response Required
FB Communications Instruction Port No.
FB Communications Instruction Retries
FB Communications Instruction Response Monitoring
Time
FB DeviceNet Communications Instruction Response
Monitoring Time
Address
A58015
A58008 to
A58011
A58000 to
A58003
A581
A582
Description
0: Not required
1: Required
0 to 7 hex: Communications port No. 0 to 7
F hex: Automatic allocation
Automatically stores the number of retries in the FB communications instruction settings specified in the PLC Setup.
Automatically stores the FB communications instruction
response monitoring time set in the PLC Setup.
0001 to FFFF hex (Unit: 0.1 s; Range: 0.1 to 6553.5)
0000 hex: 2 s
Automatically stores the FB DeviceNet communications
instruction response monitoring time set in the PLC Setup.
0001 to FFFF hex (Unit: 0.1 s; Range: 0.1 to 6553.5)
0000 hex: 2 s
Access
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Read-only
Note These Auxiliary Area bits/words are not to be written by the user. The number
of resends and response monitoring time must be set by the user in the FB
communications instructions settings in the PLC Setup, particularly when
using function blocks from the OMRON FB Library to execute FINS messages
or DeviceNet explicit messages communications. The values set in the Settings for OMRON FB Library in the PLC Setup will be automatically stored in
the related Auxiliary Area words A580 to A582 and used by the function
blocks from the OMRON FB Library.
9-17 TR (Temporary Relay) Area
The TR Area contains 16 bits with addresses ranging from TR0 to TR15.
These temporarily store the ON/OFF status of an instruction block for branching. TR bits are useful when there are several output branches and interlocks
cannot be used.
It is not necessary to consider TR bits when displaying ladder diagrams on the
CX-Programmer.
The TR bits can be used as many times as required and in any order required
as long as the same TR bit is not used twice in the same instruction block.
TR bits can be used only with the OUT and LD instructions. OUT instructions
(OUT TR0 to OUT TR15) store the ON OFF status of a branch point and LD
instructions recall the stored ON OFF status of the branch point.
TR bits cannot be changed from a Programming Device.
Examples
In this example, a TR bit is used when two outputs have been directly connected to a branch point.
Instruction
Operand
LD
OR
OUT
AND
OUT
LD
AND
OUT
000000
000001
TR 0
000002
000003
TR 0
000004
000005
In this example, a TR bit is used when an output is connected to a branch
point without a separate execution condition.
456
Section 9-18
Timer Area
Instruction
LD
OUT
AND
OUT
LD
OUT
Operand
000000
TR 0
000001
000002
TR 0
000003
Note A TR bit is not required when there are no execution conditions after the
branch point or there is an execution condition only in the last line of the
instruction block.
Instruction
LD
OUT
OUT
Operand
000000
000001
000002
Instruction
Operand
LD
OUT
AND
OUT
000000
000001
000002
000003
9-18 Timer Area
The 4,096 timer numbers (T0000 to T4095) are shared by the TIM, TIMX,
TIMH(015),
TIMHX(551),
TMHH(540),
TMHHX(552),
TTIM(087),
TTIMX(555), TIMW(813), TIMWX(816), TMHW(815), and TMHWX(817)
instructions. Timer Completion Flags and present values (PVs) for these
instructions are accessed with the timer numbers. (The TIML(542),
TIMLX(553), MTIM(543), and MTIMX(554) instructions do not use timer numbers.)
When a timer number is used in an operand that requires bit data, the timer
number accesses the Completion Flag of the timer. When a timer number is
used in an operand that requires word data, the timer number accesses the
PV of the timer. Timer Completion Flags can be used as often as necessary
as normally open and normally closed conditions and the values of timer PVs
can be read as normal word data.
With CS1-H CPU Units, the refresh method for timer PVs can be set from the
CX-Programmer to either BCD or binary. With CS1 CPU Units, it can only be
set to binary.
Note It is not recommended to use the same timer number in two timer instructions
because the timers will not operate correctly if they are timing simultaneously.
(If two or more timer instructions use the same timer number, an error will be
generated during the program check, but the timers will operate as long as the
instructions are not executed in the same cycle.)
457
Section 9-19
Counter Area
The following table shows when timer PVs and Completion Flags will be reset.
Instruction name
Effect on PV and Completion Flag
Mode change1 PLC start-up1
TIMER: TIM or TIMX
PV → 0
Flag → OFF
HIGH-SPEED TIMER:
TIMH(015) or TIMHX(551)
ONE-MS TIMER:
TMHH(540) or TMHHX(552)
ACCUMULATIVE TIMER:
TTIM(087) or TTIMX(555)
TIMER WAIT: TIMW(813) or
TIMWX(816)
HIGH-SPEED TIMER WAIT:
TMHW(815) or TMHWX(817)
Note
PV → 0
Flag → OFF
CNR(545) or
CNRX(547)
PV → 9999
Flag → OFF
Operation in
Jumps and Interlocks
Jumps
Interlocks
(JMP-JME) or
(IL-ILC)
Tasks on standby
PVs refreshed in
PV → SV
operating timers
(Reset to SV.)
Flag → OFF
PV Maintained
PV Maintained
PVs refreshed in
operating timers
-----
1. If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the PV and Completion Flag will be
retained when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed from
PROGRAM mode to RUN or MONITOR mode or vice-versa. The PV and
Completion Flag will be cleared when power is cycled.
2. If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the PV and Completion Flag will be retained when the PLC’s power is cycled.
3. Since the TIML(542), TIMLX(553), MTIM(543), and MTIMX(554) instructions do not use timer numbers, they are reset under different conditions.
Refer to the descriptions of these instructions for details.
4. The present value of TIM, TIMX, TIMH(015), TIMHX(551), TMHH(540),
TMHHX(552), TIMW(813), TIMWX(816), TMHW(815), and TMHWX(817)
timers programmed with timer numbers 0000 to 2047 will be updated even
when jumped between JMP and JME instructions or when in a task that is
on standby. The present value of timers programmed with timer numbers
2048 to 4095 will be held when jumped or when in a task that is on standby.
Forcing Bit Status
Timer Completion Flags can be force-set and force-reset.
Timer PVs cannot be force-set or force-reset, although the PVs can be
refreshed indirectly by force-setting/resetting the Completion Flag.
Note When designating addresses in programming or allocations inside C200H
Special I/O Units, “T000” to “T511” will actually specify T0000 to T0511 in the
CPU Unit. T0512 to T4095 cannot be specified inside the C200H Special I/O
Units.
9-19 Counter Area
The 4,096 counter numbers (C0000 to C4095) are shared by the CNT, CNTX,
CNTR(012), CNTRX(548), CNTW(814), and CNTWX(818) instructions.
Counter Completion Flags and present values (PVs) for these instructions are
accessed with the counter numbers.
When a counter number is used in an operand that requires bit data, the
counter number accesses the Completion Flag of the counter. When a
counter number is used in an operand that requires word data, the counter
number accesses the PV of the counter.
458
Section 9-20
Data Memory (DM) Area
With CS1-H CPU Units, the refresh method for counter PVs can be set from
the CX-Programmer to either BCD or binary. With CS1 CPU Units, it can only
be set to binary.
It is not recommended to use the same counter number in two counter
instructions because the counters will not operate correctly if they are counting simultaneously. If two or more counter instructions use the same counter
number, an error will be generated during the program check, but the counters
will operate as long as the instructions are not executed in the same cycle.
The following table shows when counter PVs and Completion Flags will be
reset.
Instruction name
Reset
COUNTER: CNT or
CNTX
REVERSIBLE
COUNTER: CNTR(012)
or CNTRX(548)
PV → 0000
Flag → OFF
Mode
change
Maintained
Effect on PV and Completion Flag
PLC startup Reset Input CNR(545) or
Interlocks
CNRX(548)
(IL-ILC)
Maintained
Reset
Reset
Maintained
COUNTER WAIT:
CNTW(814) or
CNTWX(818)
Note When designating addresses in programming or allocations inside C200H
Special I/O Units, “C000” to “C511” will actually specify T0000 to T0511 in the
CPU Unit. C0512 to C4095 cannot be specified inside the C200H Special I/O
Units.
9-20 Data Memory (DM) Area
The DM Area contains 32,768 words with addresses ranging from D00000 to
D32767. This data area is used for general data storage and manipulation
and is accessible only by word.
Data in the DM Area is retained when the PLC’s power is cycled or the PLC’s
operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode
or vice-versa.
Although bits in the DM Area cannot be accessed directly, the status of these
bits can be accessed with the BIT TEST instructions, TST(350) and
TSTN(351).
Bits in the DM Area cannot be force-set or force-reset.
Note
1. If using a C200H DeviceNet Master Unit (C200HW-DRM21-V1), use the
following words as the status area. Data in this area is updated when the
C200H DeviceNet Master Unit is used, so the area cannot be used for other applications.
• Master Status: D06032 + (2 x unit number)
• Current Communications Cycle Time: D06033 + (2 x unit number)
The CS-series DeviceNet Unit (CS1W-DRM21) does not use the above
words.
2. When designating addresses in programming or allocations inside GroupI and Group-II C200H Special I/O Units, DM 0000 to DM 0999 will actually
specify D00000 to D00999 in the CPU Unit and DM 1000 to DM1999 will
actually specify D20000 to D20999 (part of the Special I/O Unit Area) in
the CPU Unit. Other addresses in this area cannot be specified. When designating addresses in programming or allocations inside Group-III and
459
Section 9-20
Data Memory (DM) Area
Group-IV C200H Special I/O Units, DM 0000 to DM 6655 will actually
specify D00000 to D06655 in the CPU Unit. Other addresses in this area
cannot be specified.
Indirect Addressing
Words in the DM Area can be indirectly addressed in two ways: binary-mode
and BCD-mode.
Binary-mode Addressing (@D)
When a “@” character is input before a DM address, the content of that DM
word is treated as binary and the instruction will operate on the DM word at
that binary address. The entire DM Area (D00000 to D32767) can be indirectly addressed with hexadecimal values 0000 to 7FFF.
@D00100
0100
D00256
Address actually used.
BCD-mode Addressing (*D)
When a “*” character is input before a DM address, the content of that DM
word is treated as BCD and the instruction will operate on the DM word at that
BCD address. Only part of the DM Area (D00000 to D09999) can be indirectly
addressed with BCD values 0000 to 9999.
*D00100
DM Area Allocation to
Special Units Inner Board
1,2,3...
0100
D00100
Address actually used.
Parts of the DM Area are allocated to Special I/O Units, CS-series CPU Bus
Units, and Inner Boards for functions such as initial Unit settings. The timing
for data transfers is different for these Units, but may occur at any of the three
following times.
1. Transfer data when the PLC’s power is turned on or the Unit is restarted.
2. Transfer data once each cycle.
3. Transfer data when required.
Refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details on data transfer timing.
Special I/O Units (D20000 to D29599)
Each Special I/O Unit is allocated 100 words (based on unit numbers 0 to 95).
Refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details on the function of these
words.
Special I/O Unit
CPU Unit
Data transferred to the
Special I/O
Unit when the
PLC is turned
on or the Unit
is restarted.
DM Area for Special I/O Units
(100 words/Unit)
Data transferred to the
CPU Unit at
cyclic refreshing or when
necessary.
CPU Bus Units (D30000 to D31599)
Each CPU Bus Unit is allocated 100 words (based on unit numbers 0 to F).
Refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details on the function of these
words. With some CPU Bus Units such as Ethernet Units, initial settings must
be registered in the CPU Unit’s Parameter Area; this data can be registered
with a Programming Device other than a Programming Console.
460
Section 9-21
Extended Data Memory (EM) Area
CPU Bus Unit
CPU Unit
Data transferred to the
CS1 Special
Unit when
the PLC is
turned on or
the Unit is
restarted.
DM Area for CPU Bus Units
(100 words/Unit)
Data transferred to the
CPU Unit at
cyclic refresh-ing or
when necessary.
Inner Board (D32000 to D32099)
The Inner Board is allocated 100 words. Refer to the Board’s Operation Manual for details on the function of these words.
CPU Unit
DM Area for Inner Board
(100 words)
Data transferred to the Inner Board when the
PLC is turned on or the Board is restarted.
9-21 Extended Data Memory (EM) Area
The EM Area is divided into 13 banks (0 to C) that each contain 32,768 words.
EM Area addresses range from E0_00000 to EC_32767. This data area is
used for general data storage and manipulation and is accessible only by
word.
Data in the EM Area is retained when the PLC’s power is cycled or the PLC’s
operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode
or vice-versa.
Although bits in the EM Area cannot be accessed directly, the status of these
bits can be accessed with the BIT TEST instructions, TST(350) and
TSTN(351).
Bits in the EM Area cannot be force-set or force-reset.
Specifying EM Addresses
1,2,3...
There are two ways to specify an EM address: the bank and address can be
specified at the same time or an address in the current bank can be specified
(after changing the current bank, if necessary). In general, we recommend
specifying the bank and address simultaneously.
1. Bank and Address Specification
With this method, the bank number is specified just before the EM address.
For example, E2_00010 specifies EM address 00010 in bank 2.
2. Current Bank Address Specification
With this method, just the EM address is specified. For example, E00010
specifies EM address 00010 in the current bank. (The current bank must
be changed with EMBC(281) to access data in another bank. A301 contains the current EM bank number.)
The current bank will be reset to 0 when the operating mode is changed
from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode, unless the IOM Hold Bit
461
Section 9-21
Extended Data Memory (EM) Area
(A50012) is ON. The current bank is not changed as the program proceeds
through cyclic tasks and the current bank will be returned to its original value (in the source cyclic task) if it has been changed in an interrupt task.
Indirect Addressing
Words in the EM Area can be indirectly addressed in two ways: binary-mode
and BCD-mode.
Binary-mode Addressing (@E)
When a “@” character is input before a EM address, the content of that EM
word is treated as binary and the instruction will operate on the EM word in
the same bank at that binary address. All of the words in the same EM bank
(E00000 to E32767) can be indirectly addressed with hexadecimal values
0000 to 7FFF and words in the next EM bank (E00000 to E32767) can be
addressed with hexadecimal values 8000 to FFFF.
@E1_00100
0200
@E00100
0200
E1_00512
Address actually used.
E0_00512
Address actually used.
(When the current
bank is bank 0.)
BCD-mode Addressing (*E)
When a “*” character is input before a EM address, the content of that EM
word is treated as BCD and the instruction will operate on the EM word in the
same bank at that BCD address. Only part of the EM bank (E00000 to
E09999) can be indirectly addressed with BCD values 0000 to 9999.
File Memory Conversion
*E1_00100
0200
*E00100
0200
E1_00200
Address actually used.
E0_00200
Address actually used.
(When the current
bank is bank 0.)
Part of the EM Area can be converted for use as file memory with settings in
the PLC Setup. All EM banks from the specified bank (EM File Memory Starting Bank) to the last EM bank will be converted to file memory.
Once EM banks have been converted to file memory, they cannot be
accessed (read or written) by instructions. An Illegal Access Error will occur if
a file-memory bank is specified as an operand in an instruction.
The following example shows EM file memory when the EM File Memory
Starting Bank has been set to 3 in the PLC Setup.
EM bank number
0
1
2
3
.
.
.
B
C
Example:
EM File Memory Starting
Bank set to 3 in the PLC Setup
EM file memory
(Cannot be accessed
from instructions.)
Note When designating addresses in programming or allocations inside C200H
Special I/O Units, “EM 0000” to “EM 6143” will actually specify E0_00000 to
E0_06143 in the CPU Unit. Other addresses in this area cannot be specified.
462
Section 9-22
Index Registers
9-22 Index Registers
The sixteen Index Registers (IR0 to IR15) are used for indirect addressing.
Each Index Register can hold a single PLC memory address, which is the
absolute memory address of a word in I/O memory. Use MOVR(560) to convert a regular data area address to its equivalent PLC memory address and
write that value to the specified Index Register. (Use MOVRW(561) to set the
PLC memory address of a timer/counter PV in an Index Register.)
Note Refer to Appendix C Memory Map for more details on PLC memory
addresses.
Indirect Addressing
When an Index Register is used as an operand with a “,” prefix, the instruction
will operate on the word indicated by the PLC memory address in the Index
Register, not the Index Register itself. Basically, the Index Registers are I/O
memory pointers.
• All addresses in I/O memory (except Index Registers, Data Registers, and
Condition Flags) can be specified seamlessly with PLC memory
addresses. It isn’t necessary to specify the data area.
• In addition to basic indirect addressing, the PLC memory address in an
Index Register can be offset with a constant or Data Register, auto-incremented, or auto-decremented. These functions can be used in loops to
read or write data while incrementing or decrementing the address by one
each time that the instruction is executed.
With the offset and increment/decrement variations, the Index Registers can
be set to base values with MOVR(560) or MOVRW(561) and then modified as
pointers in each instruction.
I/O Memory
Set to a base value
with MOVR(560) or
MOVRW(561).
Pointer
Note It is possible to specify regions outside of I/O memory and generate an Illegal
Access Error when indirectly addressing memory with Index Registers. Refer
to Appendix C Memory Map for details on the limits of PLC memory
addresses.
463
Section 9-22
Index Registers
The following table shows the variations available when indirectly addressing
I/O memory with Index Registers. (IR@ represents an Index Register from IR0
to IR15.)
Variation
Indirect addressing
Indirect addressing
with constant offset
Indirect addressing
with DR offset
Indirect addressing
with auto-increment
Function
The content of IR@ is treated as
the PLC memory address of a bit
or word.
The constant prefix is added to the
content of IR@ and the result is
treated as the PLC memory
address of a bit or word.
The constant may be any integer
from –2,048 to 2,047.
The content of the Data Register
is added to the content of IR@ and
the result is treated as the PLC
memory address of a bit or word.
After referencing the content of
IR@ as the PLC memory address
of a bit or word, the content is
incremented by 1 or 2.
Indirect addressing
The content of IR@ is decrewith auto-decrement mented by 1 or 2 and the result is
treated as the PLC memory
address of a bit or word.
Example
Syntax
Example
Loads the bit at the PLC
memory address contained
in IR0.
,IR@
LD ,IR0
Constant ,IR@
(Include a + or –
in the constant.)
LD +5,IR0
Adds 5 to the contents of IR0
and loads the bit at that PLC
memory address.
DR@,IR@
LD
DR0,IR0
Increment by 1:
,IR@+
Increment by 2:
,IR@++
Decrement by 1:
,–IR@
Decrement by 2:
,– –IR@
LD , IR0++
Adds the contents of DR0 to
the contents of IR0 and
loads the bit at that PLC
memory address.
Loads the bit at the PLC
memory address contained
in IR0 and then increments
the content of IR0 by 2.
LD , – –IR0 Decrements the content of
IR0 by 2 and then loads the
bit at that PLC memory
address.
This example shows how to store the PLC memory address of a word
(CIO 0002) in an Index Register (IR0), use the Index Register in an instruction, and use the auto-increment variation.
MOVR(560)
0002
IR0
Stores the PLC memory address of
CIO 0002 in IR0.
MOV(021)
#0001
,IR0
Writes #0001 to the PLC memory address contained in IR0.
MOV(021)
#0020
+1,IR0 Reads the content of IR0, adds 1,
and writes #0020 to that PLC memory address.
Regular
data area
address
PLC memory address
I/O memory
MOVE TO REGISTER instruction
MOVR(560) 0002 IR0
Pointer
#0001
#0020
Note
464
1. Auto-incrementing and auto-decrementing for index registers are performed whenever an instruction using them is executed. Care is required
in application, particularly with instructions like OUT, which are executed
Section 9-22
Index Registers
every cycle. Refer to 1-1-5 Inputting Data in Operands in the Instructions
Reference for details.
Example
MOVR 000013 IR0
LD
P_Off
OUT ,IR0+
With the above programming, OUT will turn OFF CIO 000013 and IR0 will
be incremented to point to CIO 000014.
MOVR 000013 IR0
LD
P_Off
SET
,IR0+
SET is executed only when the input condition is ON. With the above programming, SET will not be executed and IR0 will not be incremented.
2. The PLC memory addresses are listed in the diagram above, but it isn’t
necessary to know the PLC memory addresses when using Index Registers.
Since some operands are treated as word data and others are treated as bit
data, the meaning of the data in an Index Register will differ depending on the
operand in which it is used.
1,2,3...
1. Word Operand:
MOVR(560)
0000
MOV(021)
D00000
IR2
, IR2
When the operand is treated as a word, the contents of the Index Register
are used “as is” as the PLC memory address of a word.
In this example MOVR(560) sets the PLC memory address of CIO 0002 in
IR2 and the MOV(021) instruction copies the contents of D00000 to
CIO 0002.
2. Bit Operand:
MOVR(560)
SET
000013
+5 , IR2
,IR2
When the operand is treated as a bit, the leftmost 7 digits of the Index Register specify the word address and the rightmost digit specifies the bit number. In this example, MOVR(560) sets the PLC memory address of
CIO 000013 (0C000D hex) in IR2. The SET instruction adds +5 from bit 13
to this PLC memory address, so it turns ON bit CIO 000102.
Index Register
Initialization
The Index Registers will be cleared in the following cases:
1,2,3...
1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.
IOM Hold Bit Operation
If the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) is ON, the Index Registers won’t be cleared
when a FALS error occurs or the operating mode is changed from PROGRAM
mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) is ON, and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, and if the Index Registers
are not set to be shared between tasks (default setting), Index Registers will
be held in the following way when power is interrupted. For tasks that were
completed before power was interrupted, the values for the cycle during which
power was interrupted will be held. For tasks that were not completed before
power was interrupted, the values for the cycle before the cycle during which
465
Section 9-22
Index Registers
power was interrupted will be held. For example, in a program with three
tasks, tasks 0, 1, and 2, if power is interrupted in the nth cycle during execution of task 1, then the execution result for the nth cycle of task 0 and the execution results for the (n−1)th cycle of tasks 1 and 2 will be held.
If the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) is ON, the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status at
Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, and the Index Registers are
set to be shared between tasks, Index Registers will not be held when the
PLC’s power supply is reset (ON →OFF →ON). The Index Registers may take
undefined values. Be sure to set the values before continuing.
Forcing Bit Status
Bits in Index Registers cannot be force-set and force-reset.
Direct Addressing
When an Index Register is used as an operand without a “,” prefix, the instruction will operate on the contents of the Index Register itself (a two-word or
“double” value). Index Registers can be directly addressed only in the instructions shown in the following table. Use these instructions to operate on the
Index Registers as pointers.
The Index Registers cannot be directly addressed in any other instructions,
although they can usually be used for indirect addressing.
Instruction group
Instruction name
Data Movement
MOVE TO REGISTER
Instructions
MOVE TIMER/COUNTER PV TO REGISTER
DOUBLE MOVE
DOUBLE DATA EXCHANGE
Table Data ProSET RECORD LOCATION
cessing InstrucGET RECORD NUMBER
tions
Increment/DecreDOUBLE INCREMENT BINARY
ment Instructions
DOUBLE DECREMENT BINARY
Comparison
DOUBLE EQUAL
Instructions
DOUBLE NOT EQUAL
DOUBLE LESS THAN
DOUBLE LESS THAN OR EQUAL
DOUBLE GREATER THAN
DOUBLE GREATER THAN OR EQUAL
DOUBLE COMPARE
Symbol Math
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY ADD WITHOUT
Instructions
CARRY
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT
WITHOUT CARRY
Mnemonic
MOVR(560)
MOVRW(561)
MOVL(498)
XCGL(562)
SETR(635)
GETR(636)
++L(591)
– –L(593)
=L(301)
< >L(306)
< L(311)
< =L(316)
> L(321)
> =L(326)
CMPL(060)
+L(401)
–L(411)
The SRCH(181), MAX(182), and MIN(183) instructions can output the PLC
memory address of the word with the desired value (search value, maximum,
or minimum) to IR0. In this case, IR0 can be used in later instructions to
access the contents of that word.
Precautions
Do not use Index Registers until a PLC memory address has been set in the
register. The pointer operation will be unreliable if the registers are used without setting their values.
The values in Index Registers are unpredictable at the start of an interrupt
task. When an Index Register will be used in an interrupt task, always set a
PLC memory address in the Index Register with MOVR(560) or MOVRW(561)
before using the register in that task.
466
Section 9-22
Index Registers
Each Index Register task is processed independently, so they do not affect
each other. For example, IR0 used in Task 1 and IR0 used in Task 2 are different. Consequently, each Index Register task has 16 Index Registers.
Limitations when Using Index Registers
1,2,3...
1. It is only possible to read the Index Register for the last task executed within the cycle from the Programming Devices. If using Index Registers with
the same number to perform multiple tasks, it is only possible with the Programming Devices to read the Index Register value for the last task performed within the cycle from the multiple tasks. Nor is it possible to write
the Index Register value from the Programming Devices.
2. It is not possible to either read or write to the Index Registers using Host
Link commands or FINS commands.
3. The Index Registers cannot share tasks between them for CS1 CPU Units.
(With CS1-H CPU Units, a PLC Setup setting can be made from the CXProgrammer to share Index Registers between tasks.)
Monitoring and Sharing
Index Registers
It is possible to monitor or share Index Registers as follows:
To use the Programming Devices to monitor the final Index Register values for
each task, or to monitor the Index Register values using Host Link commands
or FINS commands, write a program to store Index Register values from each
task to another area (e.g., DM area) at the end of each task, and to read Index
Register values from the storage words (e.g., DM area) at the beginning of
each task. The values stored for each task in other areas (e.g., DM area) can
then be edited using the Programming Devices, Host Link commands, or
FINS commands.
Note Be sure to use PLC memory addresses in Index Registers.
467
Section 9-22
Index Registers
IR storage words for task 1
Task 1
D01001 and D01000
stored in IR0
or
or
Actual memory address of
CIO 0000 (0000C000 Hex)
stored in IR0
Contents of IR0 stored in
D01001 and D01000
IR storage words for task 2
Task 2
D02001 and D02000
stored in IR0
or
or
Actual memory address
CIO 0005 (0000C005 Hex)
stored in IR0
Contents of IR0 stored in
D02001 and D02000
Peripheral servicing
468
Read D01001
and D01000
Read D02001
and D02000
Section 9-23
Data Registers
Sharing Index Registers
with CS1-H CPU Units
The following setting can be made from the PLC properties dialog box on the
CX-Programmer to control sharing index and data registers between tasks.
9-23 Data Registers
The sixteen Data Registers (DR0 to DR15) are used to offset the PLC memory addresses in Index Registers when addressing words indirectly.
The value in a Data Register can be added to the PLC memory address in an
Index Register to specify the absolute memory address of a bit or word in I/O
memory. Data Registers contain signed binary data, so the content of an
Index Register can be offset to a lower or higher address.
I/O Memory
Set to a base value
with MOVR(560) or
MOVRW(561).
Pointer
Set with a regular
instruction.
Examples
The following examples show how Data Registers are used to offset the PLC
memory addresses in Index Registers.
LD
DR0 ,IR0
MOV(021) #0001 DR0 ,IR1
Range of Values
Adds the contents of DR0 to the contents
of IR0 and loads the bit at that PLC memory address.
Adds the contents of DR0 to the contents
of IR1 and writes #0001 to that PLC
memory address.
The contents of data registers are treated as signed binary data and thus
have a range of –32,768 to 32,767.
Hexadecimal content
Decimal equivalent
8000 to FFFF
–32,768 to –1
0000 to 7FFF
0 to 32,767
Data Register Initialization
1,2,3...
The Data Registers will be cleared in the following cases:
1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in the PLC Setup.
469
Section 9-23
Data Registers
IOM Hold Bit Operation
If the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) is ON, the Data Registers won’t be cleared when
a FALS error occurs or the operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode
to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) is ON, and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, and if the Data Registers
are not set to be shared between tasks (default setting), Data Registers will
be held in the following way when power is interrupted. For tasks that were
completed before power was interrupted, the values for the cycle during which
power was interrupted will be held. For tasks that were not completed before
power was interrupted, the values for the cycle before the cycle during which
power was interrupted will be held. For example, in a program with three
tasks, tasks 0, 1, and 2, if power is interrupted in the nth cycle during execution of task 1, then the execution result for the nth cycle of task 0 and the execution results for the (n−1)th cycle of tasks 1 and 2 will be held.
If the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) is ON, the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status at
Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, and the Data Registers are
set to be shared between tasks, Data Registers will not be held when the
PLC’s power supply is reset (ON →OFF →ON). The Data Registers may take
undefined values. Be sure to set the values before continuing.
Forcing Bit Status
Bits in Data Registers cannot be force-set and force-reset.
Precautions
Data Registers are normally local to each task. For example, DR0 used in
task 1 is different from DR0 used in task 2. (With CS1-H CPU Units, a PLC
Setup setting can be made from the CX-Programmer to share Data Registers
between tasks.)
The content of Data Registers cannot be accessed (read or written) from a
Programming Device.
Do not use Data Registers until a value has been set in the register. The register’s operation will be unreliable if they are used without setting their values.
The values in Data Registers are unpredictable at the start of an interrupt
task. When a Data Register will be used in an interrupt task, always set a
value in the Data Register before using the register in that task.
Sharing Data Registers
with CS1-H CPU Units
470
The following setting can be made from the PLC properties dialog box on the
CX-Programmer to control sharing index and data registers between tasks.
Section 9-24
Task Flags
9-24 Task Flags
Task Flags range from TK00 to TK31 and correspond to cyclic tasks 0 to 31. A
Task Flag will be ON when the corresponding cyclic task is in executable
(RUN) status and OFF when the cyclic task hasn’t been executed (INI) or is in
standby (WAIT) status.
Note These flags indicate the status of cyclic tasks only (including extra cyclic
tasks), they do not reflect the status of interrupt tasks.
Task Flag Initialization
The Task Flags will be cleared in the following cases, regardless of the status
of the IOM Hold Bit.
1,2,3...
1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR
mode or vice-versa.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled.
Forcing Bit Status
The Task Flags cannot be force-set and force-reset.
9-25 Condition Flags
These flags include the Arithmetic Flags such as the Error Flag and Equals
Flag which indicate the results of instruction execution. In earlier PLCs, these
flags were in the SR Area.
The Condition Flags are specified with labels, such as CY and ER, or with
symbols, such as P_Carry and P_Instr_Error, rather than addresses. The status of these flags reflects the results of instruction execution, but the flags are
read-only; they cannot be written directly from instructions or Programming
Devices.
Note The CX-Programmer treats condition flags as global symbols beginning with
P_.
All Condition Flags are cleared when the program switches tasks, so the status of the ER and AER flags are maintained only in the task in which the error
occurred.
The Condition Flags cannot be force-set and force-reset.
Summary of the Condition
Flags
The following table summarizes the functions of the Condition Flags, although
the functions of these flags will vary slightly from instruction to instruction.
471
Section 9-25
Condition Flags
Refer to the description of the instruction for complete details on the operation
of the Condition Flags for a particular instruction.
Name
Error Flag
P_ER
Access Error Flag
P_AER
Carry Flag
P_CY
Greater Than Flag
P_GT
Equals Flag
P_EQ
Less Than Flag
P_LT
<
Negative Flag
P_N
N
Overflow Flag
P_OF
OF
Underflow Flag
P_UF
UF
Greater Than or
Equals Flag
Not Equal Flag
P_GE
>=
P_NE
<>
P_LE
<=
P_On
P_Off
ON
OFF
Less Than or
Equals Flag
Always ON Flag
Always OFF Flag
Symbol
Using the Condition Flags
Label
Function
ER
Turned ON when the operand data in an instruction is incorrect (an
instruction processing error) to indicate that an instruction ended
because of an error.
Note: When the PLC Setup is set to stop operation for an instruction
error (Instruction Error Operation), program execution will be
stopped and the Instruction Processing Error Flag (A29508) will
be turned ON when the Error Flag is turned ON.
AER
Turned ON when an Illegal Access Error occurs. The Illegal Access
Error indicates that an instruction attempted to access an area of
memory that should not be accessed.
Note: When the PLC Setup is set to stop operation for an instruction
error (Instruction Error Operation), program execution will be
stopped and the Instruction Processing Error Flag (A429510)
will be turned ON when the Access Error Flag is turned ON.
CY
Turned ON when there is a carry in the result of an arithmetic operation or a “1” is shifted to the Carry Flag by a Data Shift instruction.
The Carry Flag is part of the result of some Data Shift and Symbol
Math instructions.
>
Turned ON when the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is
greater than the second or a value exceeds a specified range.
=
Turned ON when the two operands of a Comparison Instruction are
equal the result of a calculation is 0.
Turned ON when the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is less
than the second or a value is below a specified range.
Turned ON when the most significant bit (sign bit) of a result is ON.
Turned ON when the result of calculation overflows the capacity of the
result word(s).
Turned ON when the result of calculation underflows the capacity of
the result word(s).
Turned ON when the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is
greater than or equal to the second.
Turned ON when the two operands of a Comparison Instruction are
not equal.
Turned ON when the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is less
than or equal to the second.
Always ON. (Always 1.)
Always OFF. (Always 0.)
The Condition Flags are shared by all of the instructions, so their status may
change often in a single cycle. Be sure to read the Condition Flags immediately after the execution of instruction, preferably in a branch from the same
execution condition.
Instruction A
Condition Flag
Example: P_EQ
Instruction
LD
Instruction A
The result from instruction A is AND
reflected in the Equals Flag.
Instruction B
Operand
=
Instruction B
Since the Condition Flags are shared by all of the instructions, program operation can be changed from its expected course by interruption of a single task.
Be sure to consider the effects of interrupts when writing the program. Refer
472
Section 9-25
Condition Flags
to SECTION 2 Programming of CS/CJ Series Programmable Controllers
(W394) for more details.
The Condition Flags are cleared when the program switches tasks, so the status of a Condition Flag cannot be passed to another task. For example the
status of a flag in task 1 cannot be read in task 2. (The flag’s status must be
transferred to a bit.)
Note The condition flags cannot be designated directly in programming or allocations inside C200H Special I/O Units.
Saving and Loading Condition Flag Status
The CCS(282) and CCL(283) instructions can be used to save and load the
Condition Flag status. These can be used to access the status of the Condition Flags at other locations in a task or in a different task.
The following example shows how the Equals Flag is used at a different location in the same task.
Task
CMP
CCS
Stores result of comparison in the Condition
Flags. This will enable loading the results to
use with Instruction B.
Saves status of Condition Flags.
Instruction A
CCL
P_EQ
Instruction B
Loads the statuses of the Conditions Flags
that were stored.
The result of the comparison instruction in the
Equals Flag can be used by Instruction B
without interference from Instruction A.
Note This instruction does not exist in CS1 CPU Units.
473
Section 9-26
Clock Pulses
9-26 Clock Pulses
The Clock Pulses are flags that are turned ON and OFF at regular intervals by
the system.
Name
Label
0.02 s Clock Pulse 0.02s
Symbol
P_0_02_s
Programming
Console
name
0.02 s
Operation
ON for 0.01 s
OFF for 0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.1 s Clock Pulse
0.1s
P_0_1s
0.1 s
ON for 0.05 s
OFF for 0.05 s
0.05 s
0.05 s
0.2 s Clock Pulse
0.2s
P_0_2s
0.2 s
ON for 0.1 s
OFF for 0.1 s
0.1 s
0.1 s
1 s Clock Pulse
1s
P_1s
1s
ON for 0.5 s
OFF for 0.5 s
0.5 s
0.5 s
1 min Clock Pulse
1min
P_1min
1 min
ON for 30 s
OFF for 30 s
30 s
30 s
The Clock Pulses are specified with labels (or symbols) rather than
addresses.
Specify the flags as shown above using the CX-Programmer or Programming
Console.
Note The CX-Programmer treats condition flags as global symbols beginning with
P_.
The Clock Pulses are read-only; they cannot be overwritten from instructions
or Programming Devices.
The Clock Pulses are cleared at the start of operation.
Using the Clock Pulses
The following example turns CIO 000000 ON and OFF at 0.5 s intervals.
P_1s
000000
Instruction
Operand
LD
P_1s
OUT
000000
← 0.5 s
←
000000
←0.5 s
←
Note The clock pulses cannot be designated directly in programming or allocations
inside C200H Special I/O Units.
Clock Pulses Update Timing
Clock pulses are updated during program execution, so the ON and OFF status may differ at the beginning and end of the program.
474
Section 9-27
Parameter Areas
Error
The clock pulses have a maximum error of 0.01% at 25°C. For long-term time
control, it is recommended that control be based on the internal clock rather
than the clock pulses. The internal clock itself also has an error factor.
9-27 Parameter Areas
Unlike the data areas in I/O memory which can be used in instruction operands, the Parameter Area can be accessed only from a Programming Device.
The Parameter Area is made up of the following parts.
• The PLC Setup
• The Registered I/O Table
• The Routing Table
• The CPU Bus Unit Settings
9-27-1 PLC Setup
The user can customize the basic specifications of the CPU Unit with the settings in the PLC Setup. The PLC Setup contains settings such as the serial
port communications settings and minimum cycle time setting.
Refer to 7-1 PLC Setup for details on the PLC Setup settings and refer to the
Programming Device’s Operation Manual for details on changing these settings.
9-27-2 Registered I/O Table
The Registered I/O Table is a table in the CPU Unit that contains the information on the model and slot location of all of the Units mounted to the CPU
Rack, Expansion I/O Racks, and Slave Racks. The I/O Table is written to the
CPU Unit with a Programming Device operation.
The CPU Unit allocates I/O memory to actual I/O points (on Basic I/O Units or
Remote I/O Units) and CPU Bus Units based on the information in the Registered I/O Table. Refer to the Programming Device’s Operation Manual for
details on registering the I/O Table.
3
4
16-point Input
Communications
2
12-point Output
1
16-point Output
0
Analog
Programming Device
CPU Unit
Registered
I/O
Table
Analog
Communications
Output 12
Input 16
Output 16
The I/O Verification Error Flag (A40209) will be turned ON if the models and
locations of the Units actually mounted to the PLC (CPU Rack, Expansion I/O
Racks, and Slave Racks) do not match the information in the Registered I/O
Table.
475
Section 9-27
Parameter Areas
9-27-3 Routing Table
When transferring data between networks, it is necessary to create a table in
each CPU Unit that shows the communications route from the local PLC’s
Communications Unit to the other networks. These tables of communications
routes are called “Routing Tables.”
Create the Routing Tables with a Programming Device or the Controller Link
Support Software and transfer the tables to each CPU Unit. The following diagram shows the Routing Tables used for a data transfer from PLC #1 to PLC
#4.
Node number M
Network 2
PLC #1
PLC #2
PLC #3
Unit number n
Network 1
Network 3
PLC #4
Node number N
1,2,3...
1. Relay Network Table of PLC #1:
Destination network
3
Relay network
1
Relay node
N
2. Relay Network Table of PLC #2:
Destination network
3
Relay network
2
Relay node
M
3. Local Network Table of PLC #3:
Local network
3
Unit number
n
Relay Network Table
This table lists the network address and node number of the first relay node to
contact in order to reach the destination network. The destination network is
reached through these relay nodes.
Local Network Table
This table lists the network address and unit number of the Communications
Unit connected to the local PLC.
These are settings for the CS-series CPU Bus Units which are controlled by
the CPU Unit. The actual settings depend on the model of CS-series CPU
Bus Unit being used; refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details.
9-27-4 CPU Bus Unit Settings
These settings are not managed directly like the I/O memory’s data areas, but
are set from a Programming Device like the Registered I/O Tables.
Example 1: For Controller Link Units, user-set data link parameters and network parameters are managed as CPU Bus Unit settings.
Example 2: For Ethernet Units, the settings required to operate as an Ethernet node, such as the IP address table, are managed as CPU Bus Unit settings.
476
Section 9-27
Parameter Areas
Refer to the Programming Device’s Operation Manual for details on changing
these settings.
Programming Device
CS1 CPU Bus Unit
CPU Unit
CS1 CPU
Bus Unit
Settings
477
Parameter Areas
478
Section 9-27
SECTION 10
CPU Unit Operation and the Cycle Time
This section describes the internal operation of the CPU Unit and the cycle used to perform internal processing.
10-1 CPU Unit Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
481
10-1-1 General Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
481
10-1-2 I/O Refreshing and Peripheral Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
483
10-1-3 Initialization at Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
485
10-2 CPU Unit Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
486
10-2-1 Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
486
10-2-2 Status and Operations in Each Operating Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
487
10-3 Power OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
488
10-3-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
488
10-3-2 Instruction Execution for Power Interruptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
491
10-4 Computing the Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
493
10-4-1 CPU Unit Operation Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
493
10-4-2 Cycle Time Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
494
10-4-3 I/O Unit Refresh Times for Individual Units and Boards. . . . . . . . .
500
10-4-4 Cycle Time Calculation Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
507
10-4-5 Online Editing Cycle Time Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
508
10-4-6 I/O Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
509
10-4-7 Interrupt Response Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
511
10-5 Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
512
10-5-1 Sequence Input Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
513
10-5-2 Sequence Output Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
514
10-5-3 Sequence Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
515
10-5-4 Timer and Counter Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
516
10-5-5 Comparison Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
517
10-5-6 Data Movement Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
519
10-5-7 Data Shift Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
520
10-5-8 Increment/Decrement Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
521
10-5-9 Symbol Math Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
522
10-5-10 Conversion Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
524
10-5-11 Logic Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
526
10-5-12 Special Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
527
10-5-13 Floating-point Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
527
10-5-14 Double-precision Floating-point Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
529
10-5-15 Table Data Processing Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
530
10-5-16 Data Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
532
10-5-17 Subroutine Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
533
10-5-18 Interrupt Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
533
10-5-19 Step Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
533
10-5-20 Basic I/O Unit Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
534
479
480
10-5-21 Serial Communications Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
535
10-5-22 Network Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
536
10-5-23 File Memory Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
536
10-5-24 Display Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
537
10-5-25 Clock Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
537
10-5-26 Debugging Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
537
10-5-27 Failure Diagnosis Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
538
10-5-28 Other Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
538
10-5-29 Block Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
539
10-5-30 Text String Processing Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
541
10-5-31 Task Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
542
10-5-32 Model Conversion Instructions (Unit Ver. 3.0 or Later Only) . . . . .
542
10-5-33 Special Function Block Instructions (Unit Ver. 3.0 or Later Only). .
542
10-5-34 Function Block Instance Execution Time (CPU Units with Unit
Version 3.0 or Later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
543
Section 10-1
CPU Unit Operation
10-1 CPU Unit Operation
10-1-1 General Flow
The following flowchart shows the overall operation of the CPU Unit.
Note The CPU Unit’s processing mode is set to Normal Mode, Parallel Processing
with Synchronous Memory Access, or Parallel Processing with Asynchronous
Memory Access in the PLC Setup (Programming Console address 219, bits
08 to 15). This setting is also possible from the CX-Programmer.
Normal Mode
In the normal mode, the program is executed before I/O is refreshed and
peripherals are serviced. This cycle is executed repeatedly.
481
Section 10-1
CPU Unit Operation
Power ON
Startup
initialization
Initialize hardware
memory and system work
area.
Detect I/O.
Automatically transfer data
from Memory Card.
Overseeing Check the Battery.
processing
Check for Memory Card
and other devices.
Read DIP switch settings.
Program
execution
Cycle time
Verify actual Units with
registered I/O tables.
Clear I/O memory.
Check user memory.
Clear forced status, etc.
Check I/O bus.
Check user program
memory.
Operation processing: Execute the user program.
Error processing: Turn OFF outputs. (Reset Units
for bus errors.)
After error: Clear I/O memory is an error occurs
(unless a FALS(007) instruction created the error).
I/O refreshing
(even in
Refresh data for the following
PROGRAM
Units.
mode)
Basic I/O Units
SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Master
Units
Special I/O Units (both words
allocated in CIO and DM area and
specific data for each Unit)
Peripheral
servicing
Perform the following
servicing if any events have
occurred.
Special I/O Unit event
servicing
CPU Bus Unit event servicing
CPU Bus Units (both words
allocated in CIO and DM area and
specific data for each Unit)
Inner Boards (both words
allocated in CIO and DM area and
specific data for each Unit)
Peripheral port servicing
RS-232C port servicing
Inner Board event servicing
File access servicing
Communications port
servicing
Parallel Processing (CS1-H CPU Units Only)
The following two types of processing are performed in parallel in either of the
Parallel Processing Modes.
1,2,3...
1. Program execution: Includes user program execution and I/O refreshing. It
is this cycle time that is monitored from a Programming Device.
2. Peripheral servicing: Programming Devices and events from Special I/O
Units and CPU Bus Units are serviced when they occur.
There are two different Parallel Processing Modes. Parallel Processing with
Synchronous Memory Access refreshes I/O memory in the program execution
482
Section 10-1
CPU Unit Operation
cycle and Parallel Processing with Asynchronous Memory Access refreshes
I/O memory in the peripheral servicing cycle.
Power ON
Startup
initialization
Initialize hardware
memory and system
work area.
Detect I/O.
Automatically transfer
data from Memory
Card.
Program
Execution
Cycle
Overseeing
processing
Peripheral Servicing Cycle
Read DIP switch settings.
Check I/O bus.
Operation processing: Execute the user
program.
Error processing: Turn OFF outputs.
(Reset Units for bus errors.)
After error: Clear I/O memory is an error
occurs (unless a FALS(007) instruction
created the error).
Program
execution
Program
execution
cycle time
Verify actual Units with
registered I/O tables.
Clear I/O memory.
Check user memory.
Clear forced status,
etc.
I/O
refreshing
(even in
PROGRAM
mode)
Overseeing
processing
Peripheral
servicing
cycle time
Refresh data for the following Units.
Basic I/O Units
SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Master Units
Special I/O Units (both words allocated in
CIO and DM area and specific data for
each Unit)
CPU Bus Units (both words allocated in
CIO and DM area and specific data for
each Unit)
Inner Boards (both words allocated in CIO
and DM area and specific data for each
Unit)
Peripheral
servicing
Check the Battery.
Check I/O bus.
Check user program
memory.
Perform the following servicing if any
events have occurred.
Special I/O Unit event servicing
CPU Bus Unit event servicing
Peripheral port servicing
RS-232C port servicing
Inner Board event servicing
Communications port servicing
Note: In Parallel Processing with
Synchronous Memory Access, any
events requiring I/O memory access are
serviced in the program execution cycle.
Peripheral Perform the following servicing if any events
occurred.
servicing have
File access servicing
Note: In Parallel Processing with Synchronous
Memory Access, any events requiring I/O
memory access are serviced here.
Note Always disconnect the Programming Console from the peripheral port during
actual system operation in a Parallel Processing Mode. If the Programming
Console is left attached, excess time will be allocated to increase key
response for the Programming Console, adversely affecting performance.
10-1-2 I/O Refreshing and Peripheral Servicing
I/O Refreshing
I/O refreshing involves cyclically transferring data with external devices using
preset words in memory. I/O refreshing includes the following:
• Refreshing between Basic I/O Units and I/O words in the CIO Area and
refreshing between SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Master Units and SYSMAC BUS and I/O Terminal words in the CIO Area
• Refreshing between Special I/O Units, CPU Bus Units, and Inner Boards,
and the words allocated to these in the CIO Area (and for CPU Bus Units,
words allocated in the DM Area)
• Refreshing Unit-specific data for Special I/O Units, CPU Bus Units, and
Inner Boards.
483
Section 10-1
CPU Unit Operation
All I/O refreshing is performed in the same cycle (i.e., time slicing is not used).
I/O refreshing is always performed after program execution (even in a Parallel
Processing Mode for CS1-H CPU Units).
Units
Max. data
exchange
Basic I/O Units (including C200H
Depends on the
Group-2 I/O Units)
Unit.
SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Master Unit Depends on the
Unit.
Special I/O Words allocated in CIO
10 words/Unit
Units
Area
(Depends on the
(CS-series
Unit.)
and
UnitC200H
Depends on the
C200H)
specific DeviceNet Mas- Unit.
data
ter Unit
CS-series
CPU Bus
Units
CompoBus/S
Master Unit
Words allocated in CIO
Area
Words allocated in DM
Area
UnitController Link
specific Unit and SYSdata
MAC LINK Unit
CS-series
DeviceNet Unit
Depends on the
Unit.
25 words/Unit
100 words/Unit
Depends on the
Unit.
Depends on the
Unit.
Serial Communi- Depends on the
cations Unit
protocol macros.
Ethernet Unit
Depends on the
Unit.
Inner
Boards
484
Data exchange area
I/O Bit Area
SYSMAC BUS Area and
I/O Terminal Area
Special I/O Unit Area
Words set for remote I/O
communications (for
either fixed or user-set
allocations)
Special I/O Units Area
CS-series CPU Bus Unit
Area
CS-series CPU Bus Unit
Area
Words set for data links
(for either fixed or userset allocations)
Words set for remote I/O
communications (for
either fixed or user-set
allocations)
Communications data
set for protocol macros
Communications data for
socket services initiated
by specific control bit
operations.
Inner Board Area
Words allocated in CIO
100 words/Unit
Area
UnitSerial Communi- Depends on the Communications data
specific cations Board
protocol macros. set for protocol macros
data
Section 10-1
CPU Unit Operation
Peripheral Servicing
Peripheral servicing involves servicing non-scheduled events for external
devices. This includes both events from external devices and service requests
to external devices.
Most peripheral servicing for CS-series PLCs involved FINS commands. The
specific amount of time set in the system is allocated to each type of servicing
and executed every cycle. If all servicing cannot be completed within the allocated time, the remaining servicing is performed the next cycle.
Units
Event servicing for CSseries Special I/O Units
Event servicing for CSseries CPU Bus Units
Event servicing for
Inner Boards
Peripheral port servicing
RS-232C port servicing
Communications port
servicing
File access servicing
Servicing
Non-scheduled servicing for FINS commands from CS-series Special I/O Units, CS-series CPU
Bus Units, and Inner Boards (e.g., requests to start external interrupt tasks)
Non-scheduled servicing for FINS commands from the CPU Unit to the above Units.
Non-scheduled servicing for FINS or Host Link commands received via the peripheral or RS232C ports from Programming Devices, PTs, or host computers (e.g., requests to transfer programming, monitoring, forced-set/reset operations, or online editing
Non-scheduled servicing from the CPU Unit transmitted from the peripheral or RS-232C port
(non-solicited communications)
Servicing to execute network communications, serial communications, or file memory access
for the SEND, RECV, CMND or PMCR instructions using communications ports 0 to 7 (internal
logical ports)
Servicing to execute background execution using communications ports 0 to 7 (internal logical
ports) (CS1-H CPU Unit only)
File read/write operations for Memory Cards or EM file memory.
Note
1. CS-series Special I/O Units, CS-series CPU Bus Units, RS-232C communications ports, Inner Boards, and file servicing is allocated 4% of the cycle
time by default (the default can be changed). If servicing is separated over
many cycles, delaying completion of the servicing, set the same allocated
time (same time for all services) rather than a percentage under execute
time settings in the PLC Setup.
2. In either of the Parallel Processing Modes for the CS1-H CPU Unit, all peripheral servicing except for file access is performed in the peripheral servicing cycle.
10-1-3 Initialization at Startup
The following initializing processes will be performed once each time the
power is turned ON.
• Detect mounted Units.
• Compare the registered I/O tables and the actual Units.
• Clear the non-holding areas of I/O memory according to the status of the
IOM Hold Bit. (See note 1.)
• Clear forced status according to the status of the Forced Status Hold Bit.
(See note 2.)
• Autoboot using the autotransfer files in the Memory Card if one is
inserted.
• Perform self-diagnosis (user memory check).
485
Section 10-2
CPU Unit Operating Modes
Note
1. The I/O memory is held or cleared according to the status of the IOM Host
Bit and the setting for IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup in the PLC Setup
(read only when power is turned ON).
Auxiliary bit
PLC Setup setting
IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup
(Programming Console address:
Word 80, bit 15)
Clear
(OFF)
Hold
(ON)
IOM Hold Bit (A50012)
Clear (OFF)
Hold (ON)
At power ON: Clear
At power ON: Clear
At mode change: Clear At mode change: Hold
At power ON: Hold
At mode change: Hold
Mode Change: Between PROGRAMMING mode and RUN or MONITOR
mode
2. The forced status held or cleared according to the status of the Force Status Hold Bit and the setting for Forced Status Hold Bit Status at Startup in
the PLC Setup.
Auxiliary bit
PLC Setup setting
Forced Status Hold
Bit Status at Startup
(Programming Console address:
Word 80, bit 14)
Forced Status Hold Bit (A50013)
Clear (OFF)
Hold (ON)
Clear At power ON: Clear
At power ON: Clear
(OFF) At mode change: Clear At mode change: Hold
Hold
At power ON: Hold
(ON)
At mode change: Hold
Mode Change: Between PROGRAMMING mode and RUN or MONITOR
mode
3. If the CPU Unit is turned OFF after online editing before the backup process has been competed, an attempt will be made to recover the program
when power is turned ON again. The BKUP indicator will light during this
process. Refer to the CS/CJ Series Programming Manual (W394) for details.
10-2 CPU Unit Operating Modes
10-2-1 Operating Modes
The CPU Unit has three operating modes that control the entire user program
and are common to all tasks.
486
PROGRAM:
Programs are not executed and preparations, such as creating I/O tables, initializing the PLC Setup and other settings,
transferring programs, checking programs, force-setting and
force-resetting can be executed prior to program execution.
MONITOR:
Programs are executed, but some operations, such as online
editing, forced-set/reset, and changes to present values in I/O
memory, are enabled for trial operation and other adjustments.
RUN:
Programs are executed and some operations are disabled.
Section 10-2
CPU Unit Operating Modes
10-2-2 Status and Operations in Each Operating Mode
PROGRAM, RUN, and MONITOR are the three operating modes available in
the CPU Unit. The following lists status and operations for each mode.
Overall Operation
Mode
Program
(See note)
I/O refresh
PROGRAM
RUN
Stopped
Executed
Executed
Executed
MONITOR
Executed
Executed
External outputs
OFF
Controlled by program
Controlled by program
I/O Memory
Non-holding
Holding areas
areas
Clear
Hold
Controlled by program
Controlled by program
Programming Console Operations
Mode
PROGRAM
MONITOR
RUN
Mode
PROGRAM
RUN
MONITOR
Monitor I/O
Memory
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
PLC Setup
OK
X
X
Monitor
Program
Modify
Program
OK
X
OK
Transfer Program
Check
Program
Programming
PLC to
Programming Device to PLC
Device
OK
OK
OK
OK
X
X
OK
X
X
Forceset/reset
OK
X
OK
Changing
Timer/Counter
SV
OK
X
OK
Create I/O
Table
OK
X
X
Changing
Changing I/O
Timer/Counter
Memory PV
PV
OK
OK
X
X
OK
OK
Note The following table shows the relationship of operating modes to tasks.
Mode
PROGRAM
RUN
MONITOR
Cyclic task status
Interrupt task
status
Disabled status (INI)
Stopped
• Any task that has not yet been executed, will be in disabled status (INI).
Executed if inter• A task will go to READY status if the task is set to go to READY status at star- rupt condition is
met.
tup or the TASK ON (TKON) instruction has been executed for it.
• A task in READY status will be executed (RUN status) when it obtains the
right to execute.
• A status will go to Standby status if a READY task is put into Standby status
by a TASK OFF (TKOF) instruction.
487
Section 10-3
Power OFF Operation
Operating Mode Changes and I/O Memory
Mode Changes
Non-holding areas
I/O bits
Data Link bits
CPU Bus Unit bits
Special I/O Unit bits
Inner Board bits
SYSMAC BUS bits
I/O Terminal bits
C200H Special I/O Unit bits
DeviceNet bits
Work bits
Timer PV/Completion Flags
Index Registers
Data Registers
Task Flags
(Auxiliary Area bits/words are holding
or non-holding depending on the
address.)
RUN or MONITOR to PROGRAM Cleared (See note 1.)
PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR Cleared (See note 1.)
RUN to MONITOR or
Held (See note 2.)
MONITOR to RUN
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Note
Holding Areas
•
•
•
•
HR Area
DM Area
EM Area
Counter PV and Completion Flags
(Auxiliary Area bits/words are holding
or non-holding depending on the
address.)
Held
Held
Held
1. The following processing is performed depending on the status of the I/O
Memory Hold Bit. Output from Output Units will be turned OFF when operation stops even if I/O bit status is held in the CPU Unit.
2. The cycle time will increase by approximately 10 ms when the operating
mode is changed from MONITOR to RUN mode. This will not, however,
cause an error for exceeding the maximum cycle time limit.
I/O Memory
I/O Memory
Hold Bit status Mode changed
Operation stopped
(A50012)
between
FALS
Fatal error
PROGRAM
executed
other than
and RUN/
FALS
MONITOR
OFF
Cleared
Cleared
Held
ON
Held
Held
Held
Output bits allocated to Output Units
Operation stopped
Mode changed
between
FALS
Fatal error
PROGRAM
executed
other than
and RUN/
FALS
MONITOR
OFF
OFF
OFF
Held
OFF
OFF
Note Refer to 9-2 I/O Memory Areas for more details on I/O Memory.
10-3 Power OFF Operation
10-3-1 Overview
The following processing is performed if CPU Unit power is turned OFF.
Power OFF processing will be performed if the power supply falls below 85%
of the rated voltage while the CPU Unit is in RUN or MONITOR mode.
1,2,3...
1. The CPU Unit will stop.
2. Outputs from all Output Units will be turned OFF.
488
Section 10-3
Power OFF Operation
Note All output will turn OFF despite an I/O Memory Hold Bit or I/O Memory Hold
Bit at power ON settings in the PLC Setup.
85% of the rated voltage:
AC power: 85 V for a 100 V AC system and 170 V for a 200 V AC system
DC power: 19.2 V DC
The following processing will be performed if power drops only momentarily
(momentary power interruption).
1,2,3...
1. The system will continue to run unconditionally if the momentary power interruption lasts less than 10 ms, i.e., the time it takes the rated voltage at
85% or less to return to 85% or higher is less than 10 ms.
2. A momentary power interruption that lasts more than 10 ms but less than
25 ms is difficult to determine and a power interruption may or may not be
detected.
3. The system will stop unconditionally if the momentary power interruption
lasts more than 25 ms.
If operation stops under the conditions given in items 2 and 3 above, the timing used to stop operation (or the timing used to start execution of the Power
OFF Interrupt Task) can be delayed by setting the Power OFF Detection Delay
Time (0 to 10 ms) in the PLC Setup. Operation, however, will always be
stopped 10 ms after detecting a momentary power interruption regardless of
the setting in the PLC Setup.
85% of the rated voltage or less
10 ms
25 ms
Time
0 to 10 ms
Momentary power
interruption not
detected and operation continues.
Power supply
voltage
Power supply
voltage
10 to 15 ms
Operation will continue or
stop depending on whether
or not a momentary power
interruption is detected.
25 ms and longer
Power supply
voltage
Momentary power interruption detected
and operation stops.
Note The above timing chart shows an example when the power OFF detection
time is set to 0 ms (the default value).
489
Section 10-3
Power OFF Operation
The following timing chart shows the CPU Unit power OFF operation in more
detail.
Power OFF Timing Chart
Operation always stopped
at this point regardless.
85% of rated
voltage
Holding time for 5 V internal
power supply after power
OFF detection: 10 ms.
Power OFF detected Power OFF confirmed
Power OFF detection time: Default is
10 to 25 ms (Power OFF undetermined)
Power OFF
detected signal
Power OFF Detection
Delay Time: 0 to
10 ms (set in PLC Setup)
Cyclic tasks or interrupt tasks
not associated with power OFF
Program execution
status
Processing time after
power OFF is confirmed:
10 ms minus Power OFF
Detection Delay Time
Note:The interrupt task
execution time must be
less than or equal to processing time after power
OFF is confirmed.
Power OFF
interrupt task Stopped
CPU reset signal
Power OFF Detection Time
The time it takes to detect power OFF after the power supply falls below 85%
of the rated voltage.
Power OFF Detection Delay Time
The delay time after power OFF is detected until it is confirmed. This can be
set in the PLC Setup within a range from 0 to 10 ms. (The default is 0 ms.)
Power Holding Time
The amount of time (fixed at 10 ms) that 5 V will be held internally after power
shuts OFF. The time that it takes for the power OFF interrupt task to execute
must not exceed 10 ms minus the Power OFF Detection Delay Time (processing time after power OFF is confirmed). The power OFF interrupt task will be
ended even if it has not been completely executed the moment this time
expires.
Description of Operation
1,2,3...
1. Power OFF will be detected if the 100 to 120 V AC, 200 to 240 V AC or 24 V
DC power supply falls below 85% of the rated voltage for the power OFF
detection time (somewhere between 10 to 25 ms).
2. If the Power OFF Detection Delay Time is set (0 to 10 ms) in the PLC Setup, then the following operations will be performed when the set time expires.
a) If the power OFF interrupt task is disabled (default PLC Setup setting)
The CPU reset signal will turn ON and the CPU will be reset immediately.
b) If the power OFF interrupt task is enabled (in the PLC Setup), the CPU
reset signal will turn ON and the CPU will be reset after the power OFF
interrupt task has been executed. Make sure that the power OFF interrupt task will finish executing within 10 ms minus the Power OFF Detection Delay Time = processing time after power OFF. The 5-V
internal power supply will be maintained only for 10 ms after power
OFF is detected.
490
Section 10-3
Power OFF Operation
10-3-2 Instruction Execution for Power Interruptions
If power is interrupted and the interruption is confirmed when the CPU Unit is
operating in RUN or MONITOR mode, the instruction currently being executed
will be completed (see note) and the following power interruption processing
will be performed.
• If the power OFF interrupt task has not been enabled, the CPU Unit will
be reset immediately.
• If the power OFF interrupt task has been enabled, the task will be executed and then the CPU Unit will be reset immediately.
The power OFF interrupt task is enable and disabled in the PLC Setup.
Note The current instruction can be completed only when the time required to complete execution is less than or equal to the processing time after power interruption detection (10 ms − power interruption detection delay time). If the
instruction is not completed within this time, it will be interrupted and the
above processing will be performed.
Disabling Power Interruption Processing in the Program
With CS1-H CPU Units, if the power OFF interrupt task is disabled, areas of
the program can be protected from power interruptions so that the instructions
will be executed before the CPU Unit performs power OFF processing even if
the power supply is interrupted. This is achieved by using the DISABLE
INTERRUPTS (DI(693)) and ENABLE INTERRUPTS (EI(694)) instructions.
The following procedure is used.
1,2,3...
1. Insert DI(693) before the program section to be protected to disable interrupts and then place EI(694) after the section to enable interrupts.
W0.00
DI
Interrupt tasks disabled.
Power interruption
confirmed.
Instructions that cannot be
interrupted when a power
interruption occurs
EI
Instructions executed here.
Interrupt tasks enabled.
2. Set the Disable Setting for Power OFF Interrupts in A530 to A5A5 hex to
enable disabling power interruption processing.
Note A530 is normally cleared when power is turned OFF. To prevent this,
the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) must be turned ON and the PLC Setup
must be set to maintain the setting of the IOM Hold Bit at Startup, or
the following type of instruction must be included at the beginning of
the program to set A530 to A5A5 hex.
A20011
First Cycle Flag
MOV
#A5A5
A530
Set A530 to A5A5 hex at the
beginning of the program to enable
disabling power interruption
processing.
3. Disable the Power OFF Interrupt Task in the PLC Setup.
491
Section 10-3
Power OFF Operation
With the above procedure, all instructions between DI(693) and EI(694) (or
END) will be completed (see note 1) before the Power OFF Interrupt is executed even if the power interruption occurs while executing the instructions
between DI(693) and EI(694).
Note
1. The protected instructions can be completed only when the time required
to complete execution is less than or equal to the processing time after
power interruption detection (10 ms − power interruption detection delay
time). If the instructions is not completed within this time, they will be interrupted and the above processing will be performed.
2. If the Power OFF Interrupt Task is not disabled in the PLC Setup, the Power
OFF Interrupt Task will be executed, and the CPU Unit will be reset without
executing the protected instructions as soon as the power interruption is
detected.
3. If a power interrupt is detected while DI(693) is being executed, the CPU
Unit will be reset without executing the protected instructions.
Operation always stopped
at this point regardless.
85% of rated
voltage
Holding time for 5 V internal
power supply after power
OFF detection: 10 ms.
Power OFF detected Power OFF confirmed
Power OFF
detected signal
Program execution
status
Power OFF detection time: Default is
10 to 25 ms (Power OFF undetermined)
Power OFF Detection
Delay Time: 0 to
10 ms (set in PLC Setup)
Cyclic tasks or interrupt tasks
not associated with power OFF
DI(693)
EI(694)
Processing time after
power OFF is confirmed:
10 ms minus Power OFF
Detection Delay Time
Note:The interrupt task
execution time must be
less than or equal to processing time after power
OFF is confirmed.
Stopped
Instructions between
DI(693) and EI(694)
are executed.
CPU reset signal
Interrupt processing is performed according to the contents of A530 and the
PLC Setup as shown below.
A530
Power OFF
Disabled
Interrupt Task
(PLC Setup)
Enabled
492
Other
A5A5 hex (disabling
power interrupt
processing)
All instructions between
Execution of the current
DI(693) and EI(694) are
instruction is completed
executed and the CPU Unit and the CPU Unit is reset.
is reset.
Execution of the current instruction is completed, the
Power OFF Interrupt Task is executed, and the CPU Unit
is reset.
Section 10-4
Computing the Cycle Time
10-4 Computing the Cycle Time
10-4-1 CPU Unit Operation Flowchart
The CS-series CPU Units process data in repeating cycles from the overseeing processing up to peripheral servicing as shown in the following diagram.
Normal Processing Mode
Power ON
Startup initialization
Checks Unit
connection status.
Checks hardware
and user program
memory
NO
Overseeing processing
Check OK?
YES
PLC cycle
time
Sets error flags
Flashing (nonfatal error)
ERR/ALM indicator
ON or Flashing?
Executes user program (i.e., executes
READY cyclic tasks).
ON (fatal error)
NO
Program execution
End of program?
YES
Resets watchdog
timer and waits until the set cycle
time has elapsed
Cycle time calculation
Calculates cycle
time
Performs I/O refreshing
I/O refreshing
Services Programming Devices
Peripheral servicing
493
Section 10-4
Computing the Cycle Time
Parallel Processing Mode
Startup
initialization
Power ON
Checks Unit
connection status
Program Execution
Cycle
Peripheral
Servicing Cycle
Check hardware,
etc.
Set error flags.
Flashing:
Non-fatal
error
Services
peripherals.
Execute user
program (i.e., READY
cyclic tasks).
Lit: Fatal error
Program
completed?
NO
Program
execution
ERR/ALM
indicator lit or
flashing
Program execution
cycle time
Check OK?
Overseeing
processing
Check OK?
Peripheral
servicing
Overseeing
processing
Check user program
memory, etc.
Services peripherals.
I/O refreshing
Refreshes I/O.
Peripheral
servicing
Calculates cycle
time.
Cycle time
calculations
YES
Wait for specified
cycle time.
10-4-2 Cycle Time Overview
Normal Processing Mode
The cycle time depends on the following conditions.
• Type and number of instructions in the user program (in all cyclic tasks
that are executed during a cycle, and within interrupt tasks for which the
execution conditions have been satisfied).
• Type and number of Basic I/O Units
• Number of SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Master Units and number of I/O
points on the Slaves
• Type and number of Special I/O Units, CS-series CPU Bus Units, Inner
Boards, and type of services being executed.
• Specific servicing for the following Units/Boards
• Data link refreshing and the number of data link words for Controller
Link and SYSMAC LINK Units
494
Section 10-4
Computing the Cycle Time
• Remote I/O for DeviceNet (Master) Units and the number of remote I/O
words
• Use of protocol macros and the largest communications message
• Socket services for specific control bits for Ethernet Units and the number of send/receive words
• Fixed cycle time setting in the PLC Setup
• File access in file memory, and the amount of data transferred to/from file
memory
• Event servicing for Special I/O Units, CPU Bus Units, Inner Boards, and
communications ports
• Use of peripheral and RS-232C ports
• Fixed peripheral servicing time in the PLC Setup
Note
1. The cycle time is not affected by the number of tasks that are used in the
user program. The tasks that affect the cycle time are those cyclic tasks
that are READY in the cycle.
2. When the mode is switched from MONITOR mode to RUN mode, the cycle
time will be extended by 10 ms (this will not, however, take the cycle time
over its limit).
The cycle time is the total time required for the PLC to perform the 5 operations shown in the following tables.
Cycle time = (1) + (2) + (3) + (4) + (5)
1: Overseeing
Details
Checks the I/O bus and user program memory, checks for
battery errors and refreshes the clock.
Processing time and fluctuation cause
CS1-H CPU Unit: 0.3 ms
CS1 CPU Unit: 0.5 ms
2: Program Execution
Details
Executes the user program, and calculates the total time
time taken for the instructions to execute the program.
Processing time and fluctuation cause
Total instruction execution time
3: Cycle Time Calculation
Details
Processing time and fluctuation cause
Waits for the specified cycle time to elapse when a minimum When the cycle time is not fixed, the time for step 3 is
(fixed) cycle time has been set in the PLC Setup.
approximately 0.
When the cycle time is fixed, the time for step 3 is the preset
Calculates the cycle time.
fixed cycle time minus the actual cycle time ((1) + (2) + (4) +
(5)).
495
Computing the Cycle Time
Section 10-4
4: I/O Refreshing
Basic I/O Units
(including
C200H Group2 I/O Units)
SYSMAC BUS
Remote I/O
Master Unit
Details
Processing time and fluctuation cause
Basic I/O Units are refreshed. Outputs from I/O refresh time for each Unit multiplied by the number of
the CPU Unit to the I/O Unit are refreshed Units used.
first for each Unit, and then inputs.
SYSMAC BUS remote I/O is refreshed.
Outputs from the CPU Unit to remote I/O
are refreshed first for each Unit, and then
inputs.
Special I/O
Words allocated in CIO Area
Units
Unit- specific
DeviceNet remote I/O
data
for C200H DeviceNet
Master Units and CompoBus/S remote I/O
CPU Bus Units Words allocated in CIO and DM Areas
Unit- specific
data
Inner Boards
I/O refresh time for SYSMAC BUS remote I/O system.
I/O refresh time for each Unit multiplied by the number of
Units used.
I/O refresh time for each Unit multiplied by the number of
Units used.
I/O refresh time for each Unit multiplied by the number of
Units used.
Data links for Controller Link and SYSMAC
LINK Units, DeviceNet
remote I/O for CSseries DeviceNet Units,
send/receive data for
protocol macros, and
socket services for specific control bits for
Ethernet Units
Words allocated in Inner Board Area
I/O refresh time for each Unit multiplied by the number of
Example: Send/receive Units used.
Unit- specific
data
data for protocol macros,
5: Peripheral Servicing
Details
Services events for CS-series Special I/O
Units.
Processing time and fluctuation cause
If a uniform peripheral servicing time hasn’t been set in the PLC Setup for
this servicing, 4% of the previous cycle’s cycle time (calculated in step (3))
will be allowed for peripheral servicing.
Note Peripheral servicing does not include
If a uniform peripheral servicing time has been set in the PLC Setup, servicI/O refreshing,
ing will be performed for the set time. At least 0.1 ms, however, will be serviced whether the peripheral servicing time is set or not.
If no Units are mounted, the servicing time is 0 ms.
Services events for CS-series CPU Bus
Same as above.
Units.
Note Peripheral servicing does not include
I/O refreshing.
Services events for peripheral ports.
If a uniform peripheral servicing time hasn’t been set in the PLC Setup for
this servicing, 4% of the previous cycle’s cycle time (calculated in step (3))
will be allowed for peripheral servicing.
If a uniform peripheral servicing time has been set in the PLC Setup, servicing will be performed for the set time. At least 0.1 ms, however, will be serviced whether the peripheral servicing time is set or not.
If the ports are not connected, the servicing time is 0 ms.
Services RS-232C ports.
Same as above.
496
Section 10-4
Computing the Cycle Time
Details
Services Inner Board events.
Services file access (Memory Card or EM
file memory).
Services communications ports.
Processing time and fluctuation cause
If a uniform peripheral servicing time hasn’t been set in the PLC Setup for
this servicing, 4% of the previous cycle’s cycle time (calculated in step (3))
will be allowed for peripheral servicing.
If a uniform peripheral servicing time has been set in the PLC Setup, servicing will be performed for the set time. At least 0.1 ms, however, will be serviced whether the peripheral servicing time is set or not.
If no Inner Boards are mounted, the servicing time is 0 ms.
If a uniform peripheral servicing time hasn’t been set in the PLC Setup for
this servicing, 4% of the previous cycle’s cycle time (calculated in step (3))
will be allowed for peripheral servicing.
If a uniform peripheral servicing time has been set in the PLC Setup, servicing will be performed for the set time. At least 0.1 ms, however, will be serviced whether the peripheral servicing time is set or not.
If there is no file access, the servicing time is 0 ms.
If a uniform peripheral servicing time hasn’t been set in the PLC Setup for
this servicing, 4% of the previous cycle’s cycle time (calculated in step (3))
will be allowed for peripheral servicing.
If a uniform peripheral servicing time has been set in the PLC Setup, servicing will be performed for the set time. At least 0.1 ms, however, will be serviced whether the peripheral servicing time is set or not.
If no communications ports are used, the servicing time is 0 ms.
Parallel Processing with Asynchronous Memory Access
Program Execution Cycle
The program execution cycle time depends on the following conditions.
• Type and number of instructions in the user program (in all cyclic tasks
that are executed during a cycle, and within interrupt tasks for which the
execution conditions have been satisfied).
• Type and number of Basic I/O Units
• Number of SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Master Units and number of I/O
points on the Slaves
• Type and number of Special I/O Units, CS-series CPU Bus Units, Inner
Boards, and type of services being executed.
• Specific servicing for the following Units/Boards
• Data link refreshing and the number of data link words for Controller
Link and SYSMAC LINK Units
• Remote I/O for DeviceNet (Master) Units and the number of remote I/O
words
• Use of protocol macros and the largest communications message
• Socket services for specific control bits for Ethernet Units and the number of send/receive words
• Fixed cycle time setting in the PLC Setup
• File access in file memory, and the amount of data transferred to/from file
memory
• Fixed peripheral servicing time in the PLC Setup
The program execution cycle time is the total time required for the PLC to perform the 5 operations shown in the following tables.
497
Section 10-4
Computing the Cycle Time
Cycle time = (1) + (2) + (3) + (4) + (5)
Details
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Peripheral Servicing Cycle
Time
Overseeing
Program execution
Cycle time calculation
I/O refreshing
Partial peripheral
servicing
Processing time and
fluctuation cause
I/O bus check, etc.
0.3 ms
Same as for Normal Mode. Same as for Normal Mode.
Waits for the specified
Same as for Normal Mode.
cycle time.
Same as for Normal ProSame as for Normal Processing Mode.
cessing Mode.
Servicing file access
Same as for Normal Processing Mode.
The peripheral servicing execution cycle time depends on the following conditions.
• Type and number of Special I/O Units, CS-series CPU Bus Units, Inner
Boards, and type of services being executed.
• Type and frequency of event servicing requiring communications ports.
• Use of peripheral and RS-232C ports
The peripheral servicing cycle time is the total time required for the PLC to
perform the 5 operations shown in the following tables.
Cycle time = (1) + (2)
Name
(1)
(2)
Note
Overseeing
processing
Peripheral
servicing
Processing
Checks user program memory,
checks for battery errors, etc.
Events with CS-series
Performs
services for Special I/O Units (does
not include I/O refreshthe events
ing)
give at the
right, includ- Events with CS-series
ing I/O
CPU Bus Units (does
memory
not include I/O refreshaccess.
ing)
Peripheral port events
RS-232C port events
Events with Inner
Boards
Events using communications ports
Processing time and
fluctuation cause
0.2 ms
1.0 ms for each type of
service
If servicing ends before
1 ms has expired, the
next type of servicing
will be started immediately without waiting.
1. The cycle time display on a Programming Device is the Program Execution
Cycle Time.
2. The peripheral service cycle time varies with the event load and number of
Units that are mounted. In a Parallel Processing Mode, however, this variation will not affect the program execution cycle time.
Parallel Processing with Synchronous Memory Access
Program Execution Cycle
The program execution cycle time depends on the same conditions as the
Normal Mode. Partial peripheral servicing ((5) below), however, is restricted to
servicing for file and I/O memory access.
The program execution cycle time is the total time required for the PLC to perform the 5 operations shown in the following tables.
498
Section 10-4
Computing the Cycle Time
Cycle time = (1) + (2) + (3) + (4) + (5)
Details
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Peripheral Servicing Cycle
Time
Processing time and
fluctuation cause
Overseeing
I/O bus check, etc.
0.3 ms
Program exe- Same as for Normal Mode.
Same as for Normal
cution
Mode.
Cycle time
Waits for the specified cycle time.
Same as for Normal
calculation
Mode.
I/O refreshing Same as for Normal Processing Mode. Same as for Normal
Mode.
Servicing file access (Memory Card or Same as for Normal
Partial
EM file memory)
Mode.
peripheral
servicing
Events with CS-series
Performs
services for Special I/O Units (does
the events not include I/O refreshing)
give at the Events with CS-series
right that
CPU Bus Units (does not
requires
include I/O refreshing)
I/O memory access Peripheral port events
RS-232C port events
Events with Inner Boards
Events using communications ports
The peripheral servicing execution cycle time depends on the same conditions as the Parallel Processing with Asynchronous Memory Access. Peripheral servicing ((2) below), however, is restricted to servicing that does not
access I/O memory.
The peripheral servicing cycle time is the total time required for the PLC to
perform the 2 operations shown in the following tables.
Cycle time = (1) + (2)
Name
(1)
(2)
Note
Overseeing
processing
Peripheral
servicing
Processing
Checks user program memory,
checks for battery errors, etc.
Events with CS-series
Performs
services for Special I/O Units (does
not include I/O refreshthe events
ing)
give at the
right,
Events with CS-series
excluding
CPU Bus Units (does
those that
not include I/O refreshrequire I/O
ing)
memory
Peripheral port events
access.
RS-232C port events
Events with Inner
Boards
Events using communications ports
Processing time and
fluctuation cause
0.2 ms
1.0 ms for each type of
service
If servicing ends before
1 ms has expired, the
next type of servicing
will be started immediately without waiting.
1. The cycle time display on a Programming Device is the Program Execution
Cycle Time.
2. The peripheral service cycle time varies with the event load and number of
Units that are mounted. In a Parallel Processing Mode, however, this variation will not affect the program execution cycle time.
499
Section 10-4
Computing the Cycle Time
10-4-3 I/O Unit Refresh Times for Individual Units and Boards
Basic I/O Unit Refresh
Unit
C200H
Basic I/O
Units
C200H
Group-2
High-density I/O Unit
(classified
as Basic I/O
Units)
500
Name
8-point Input Unit
8-point Output Unit
12-point Output Unit
16-point Input Unit
16-point Output Unit
Interrupt Input Unit
32-point Input Unit
32-point Output Unit
64-point Input Unit
64-point Output Unit
32-point B7A Input Units
32-point B7A Output Units
16/16-point B7A I/O Units
32/32-point B7A I/O Units
Model
C200H-ID211
C200H-OC221
C200H-OA224
C200H-ID212
C200H-OD212
C200HS-INT01
C200H-ID216
C200H-OD218
C200H-ID217
C200H-OD219
C200H-B7A12
C200H-B7A02
C200H-B7A21
C200H-B7A22
I/O refresh
time per Unit
0.03 ms
0.03 ms
0.03 ms
0.02 ms
0.03 ms
0.10 ms
0.10 ms
0.10 ms
0.20 ms
0.13 ms
0.1 ms
0.1 ms
0.1 ms
0.2 ms
Section 10-4
Computing the Cycle Time
Unit
CS-series
Basic I/O
Units
Name
Model
16-point DC Input Unit
CS1W-ID211
16-point AC Input Unit
CS1W-IA111/211
8/16-point Relay Output Unit
CS1W-OC201/211
8/16-point Triac Output Unit
CS1W-OA201/211
16-point Transistor Output Unit, CS1W-OD211
sinking outputs
16-point Transistor Output Unit, CS1W-OD212
sourcing outputs
16-point Interrupt Input Unit
CS1W-INT01
16-point High-speed Input Unit CS1W-IDP01
32-point DC Input Unit
CS1W-ID231
64-point DC Input Unit
CS1W-ID261
96-point DC Input Unit
CS1W-ID291
32-point Transistor Output Unit,
sinking outputs
32-point Transistor Output Unit,
sourcing outputs
64-point Transistor Output Unit,
sinking outputs
64-point Transistor Output Unit,
sourcing outputs
96-point Transistor Output Unit,
sinking outputs
96-point Transistor Output Unit,
sourcing outputs
32-point DC Input/32-point
Transistor Output Unit, sourcing outputs
32-point DC Input/32-point
Transistor Output Unit, sinking
outputs
48-point DC Input/48-point
Transistor Output Unit, sinking
outputs
48-point DC Input/48-point
Transistor Output Unit, sourcing outputs
32-point B7A Input Unit
CS1W-OD231
64-point B7A Output Unit
CS1W-B7A02
16-point Input/16-point Output
B7A I/O Unit
32-point Input/32-point Output
B7A I/O Unit
CS1W-B7A21
CS1W-OD232
CS1W-OD261
CS1W-OD262
CS1W-OD291
CS1W-OD292
CS1W-MD261
I/O refresh
time per Unit
0.004 ms
(See note.)
0.004 ms
(See note.)
0.004 ms
(See note.)
0.004 ms
(See note.)
0.004 ms
(See note.)
0.004 ms
(See note.)
0.004 ms
(See note.)
0.004 ms
(See note.)
0.007 ms
(See note.)
0.014 ms
(See note.)
0.02 ms
(See note.)
0.008 ms
(See note.)
0.008 ms
(See note.)
0.016 ms
(See note.)
0.016 ms
(See note.)
0.02 ms
(See note.)
0.02 ms
(See note.)
0.015 ms
(See note.)
CS1W-MD262
0.015 ms
(See note.)
CS1W-MD291
0.02 ms
(See note.)
CS1W-MD292
0.02 ms
(See note.)
CS1W-B7A12
0.1 ms
(See note.)
0.1 ms
(See note.)
0.1 ms
(See note.)
0.2 ms
(See note.)
CS1W-B7A22
501
Section 10-4
Computing the Cycle Time
Note Longer I/O refresh times will be required according to the distance from the
CPU Rack to the Unit when these Units are mounted to CS-series Long-distance Expansion Racks. Multiply the values given in the table by the factors
on line *1 in the following graph.
I/O Unit Refresh Time Coefficients for Units on CS1 Long-distance Expansion Racks
Factor
(*3)
(*1)
(*2)
Distance to Unit (m)
Special I/O Unit Refresh
Unit
C200H Special I/O
Units
Name
High-density I/O
Units
Temperature Control Unit
Heat/Cool Temperature Control Unit
Temperature Sensor Unit
PID Control Unit
ASCII Unit
Analog Input Unit
Analog Output Unit
Analog I/O Unit
High-speed
Counter Unit
Position Control
Unit
502
Model
C200H-MD215
C200H-MD501
C200H-TC@@@
I/O refresh time
per Unit
0.5 ms
1.5 ms
2.6 ms
C200H-TV@@@
2.6 ms
C200H-TS@@@
1.0 ms
C200H-PID@@
C200H-ASC02
C200HASC11/21/31
C200H-AD001
C200H-AD002
C200H-AD003
C200H-DA001/002
C200H-DA003/004
2.6 ms
1.8 ms
0.4 ms
C200H-MAD01
C200H-CT001V1/CT002
C200H-CT021
C200H-NC111/112
1.0 ms
1.4 ms
0.7 ms
0.9 ms
0.6 ms
0.6 ms
2.4 ms
0.5 ms
2.2 ms
(4.0 ms for read)
Section 10-4
Computing the Cycle Time
Unit
C200H Special I/O
Units, continued
Name
Position Control
Unit, continued
Model
C200H-NC211
C200HW-NC113
C200HW-NC213
C200HW-NC413
Motion Control Unit C200H-MC221
ID Sensor Unit
C200H-IDS01V1/21
Cam Positioner Unit C200H-CP114
Voice Unit
C200H-OV001
Fuzzy Logic Unit
C200H-FZ001
PC Link Unit
C200H-LK401
SYSMAC BUS
Remote I/O Master
Unit
C200H-RM201
C200H-RM001-V1
C200H DeviceNet
Master Unit
C200HW-DRM21V1
C200H DeviceNet
I/O Link Unit
C200HW-DRT21V1
CompoBus/S Master Unit
C200HW-SRM21V1
I/O refresh time
per Unit
5.1 ms
(6.7 ms for read)
2.0 ms
(2.9 ms for read or
write)
2.3 ms
(3.2 ms for read or
write)
4.3 ms
(5.5 ms for read or
write)
1.2 ms
(2.1 ms for read)
1.8 ms
2.0 ms
3.4 ms
1.8 ms
0.3 ms (connected
without data links
operating)
4.1 ms (for 256 data
link points)
7.4 ms (for 512 data
link points)
1.1 ms x No. of
Units + 0.17 x N,
where N is the No.
of words allocated
to slaves
1.72 ms + 0.0022 ×
number of allocated words
1.72 ms + 0.0022 ×
number of allocated words
0.4 ms (for the maximum of 16 slaves)
0.9 ms (for the maximum of 32 slaves)
503
Section 10-4
Computing the Cycle Time
Unit
CS-series
Special I/O
Units
Name
Analog I/O Unit
Analog Input Unit
Analog Output Unit
Isolated Thermocouple
Input Unit
Isolated Resistance Thermometer Input Unit
Isolated Ni508.4Ω Resistance Thermometer Input
Unit
Isolated 2-wire Transmission Device Input Unit
Isolated DC Input Unit
Isolated Control Output Unit
(Analog Output Unit)
Power Transducer Input
Unit
DC Input Unit (100 mA)
Isolated Pulse Input Unit
Position Control Unit
Model
CS1W-MAD44
CS1W-AD041/081-V1
CS1W-AD161
CS1W-DA041/08V/08C
CS1W-PTS01-V1
0.2 ms
0.2 ms
0.2 ms
0.2 ms
0.3 ms
0.12 ms
0.12 ms
0.11 ms
0.12 ms
0.16 ms
When a Longdistance
Expansion Rack is
used (See note.)
0.2 ms × *2
0.2 ms × *2
0.3 ms × *2
0.2 ms × *2
0.3 ms × *2
CS1W-PTS02-V1
0.3 ms
0.16 ms
0.3 ms × *2
CS1W-PTS03
0.3 ms
0.16 ms
0.3 ms × *2
CS1W-PTW01
0.3 ms
0.16 ms
0.3 ms × *2
CS1W-PDC01
CS1W-PMV01
0.3 ms
0.3 ms
0.16 ms
0.16 ms
0.3 ms × *2
0.3 ms × *2
CS1W-PTR01
0.3 ms
0.16 ms
0.3 ms × *2
CS1W-PTR02
CS1W-PPS01
CS1W-NC113/133
0.3 ms
0.16 ms
0.3 ms
0.16 ms
0.29 ms (+ 0.7 ms for
each instruction (IOWR/
IORD) used to transfer
data)
0.32 ms (+ 0.7 ms for
each instruction (IOWR/
IORD) used to transfer
data)
0.41 ms (+ 0.6 ms for
each instruction (IOWR/
IORD) used to transfer
data)
0.2 ms
0.14 ms
0.8 ms
0.32 ms
0.85 ms
0.42 ms
0.2 ms (+ 0.3 ms if DM
Area or LR Area is used
for data exchange with
CPU Unit)
0.2 ms
0.189 ms
CS1W-NC213/233
CS1W-NC413/433
High-speed Counter Unit
Motion Control Unit
Customizable Counter Unit
CompoNet Master Unit
CS1W-CT021/041
CS1W-MC221
CS1W-MC421
CS1W-HIO01
CS1W-HCP22
CS1W-HCA22
CS1WCRM21
Communications mode No. 0
Communications mode No. 1
Communications mode No. 2
Communications mode No. 3
Communications mode No. 8
I/O refresh time per Unit
CS1
CS1-H
0.256 ms
0.211 ms
0.3 ms
0.233 ms
0.322 ms
0.289 ms
0.154 +
(0.0022 ×
No. of allocated
words) ms
0.109 +
(0.0014 ×
No. of allocated
words) ms
0.3 ms × *2
0.3 ms × *2
Multiply times at left
by factor *2 (See
note.)
0.2 ms × *2
0.8 ms × *2
0.8 ms × *2
Multiply times at left
by factor *2 (See
note.)
Multiply times at left
by factor *2 (See
note.)
Note Longer increases in the cycle time will occur according to the distance from
the CPU Rack to the Unit when these Units are mounted to CS-series Long-
504
Computing the Cycle Time
Section 10-4
distance Expansion Racks. Multiply the values given in the table by the factors
on line *2 in the graph on page 502 for the increases for data link words and
send/receive words.
505
Section 10-4
Computing the Cycle Time
Increase in Cycle Time Caused by CPU Bus Units
Name
Controller Link Unit
SYSMAC LINK
Serial Communications
Unit
DeviceNet Unit
Ethernet Unit
506
Model
CS1WCLK11/21
(-V1) or
CS1WCLK23
Increase
CS1: 0.2 ms
CS1-H: 0.1 ms
(See note 1.)
With Long-distance Expansion Rack:
0.2 ms × factor *2
CS1: 0.2 ms
CS1WCLK12/52 CS1-H: 0.1 ms
(-V1) or
(See note 1.)
CS1WCLK13/53 With Long-distance Expansion Rack:
0.2 ms × factor *2
CS1WCS1: 0.2 ms
SLK11/21 CS1-H: 0.1 ms
(See note 1.)
With Long-distance Expansion Rack:
0.2 ms × factor *2
CS1WCS1: 0.25 ms
SCU21CS1-H: 0.22 ms
V1
(See note 1.)
With Long-distance Expansion Rack:
0.2 ms × factor *2
CS1: 0.7 ms + 1 µs for each allocated
word
CS1-H: 0.4 ms + 0.7 µs for each allocated word
(See note 1.)
With Long-distance Expansion Rack:
(0.7 ms + (number of allocated words ×
1 µs)) × factor *3
CS1: 0.25 ms
CS1WETN01/11 CS1-H: 0.1 ms
/21
(See note 1.)
With Long-distance Expansion Rack:
0.2 ms × factor *2
CS1WDRM21V1
Remarks
There will be an increase of 1.5 ms + 1 µs
× number of data link words for CS1 CPU
Units and of 0.1 ms + 0.7 µs x number of
data link words for CS1-H CPU Units.
(See note 2.)
With Long-distance Expansion Rack:
(1.5 ms + (number of send words × 1 µs))
× factor *3
There will be an additional increase of the
event execution times when message
services are used.
There will be an increase of up to the following time when a protocol macro is
executed:
CS1 CPU Units: 1.3 ms + 1 µs × maximum number of data words sent or
received (0 to 500 words)
CS1-H CPU Units: 0.1 ms + 0.7 µs ×
maximum number of data words sent or
received (0 to 500 words)
With Long-distance Expansion Rack:
(1.3 ms + (max. number of send/receive
words × 1 µs)) × factor *3
Max. number of send/receive words = 0
to 500 words
There will be an increase of the event
execution times when Host Links or 1:N
NT Links are used.
---
If socket services are executed with software switches, there will be an increase
of 2 µs × the number of bytes
sent/received for CS1 CPU Units and of
1.4 µs × the number of bytes
sent/received for CS1-H CPU Units. (See
note 2.)
With Long-distance Expansion Rack:
(number of send or receive bytes × 2 µs)
× factor *3
There will be an increase of the event
execution times when FINS communications services, socket services for CMND
instructions, or FTP services are performed.
Section 10-4
Computing the Cycle Time
Name
PROFIBUS-DP Master
Unit
Model
CS1WPRM21
Increase
CS1: 0.7 ms + 1 µs for each allocated
word
CS1-H: 0.4 ms + 0.7 µs for each allocated word
Loop Control Unit
CS1WLC001
CS1: 0.2 ms
CS1-H: 0.1 ms
(See note 1.)
With Long-distance Expansion Rack:
0.2 × factor *2
Note
Remarks
Include all words allocated to the slaves,
including unused ones.
For FINS communications with the Unit,
add the number of communications
words to the calculations on the left.
---
1. The times given show the performance of the CPU6@H.
2. Longer increases in the cycle time will occur according to the distance from
the CPU Rack to the Unit when these Units are mounted to CS-series
Long-distance Expansion Racks. Multiply the values given in the table by
the factors on line *2 in the graph on page 502 for the increases and by the
factors on line *3 for the additional increases for data link words and
send/receive words
Increase in Cycle Time Caused by Inner Board
Name
Serial Communications
Board
Model
Increase
Remarks
CS1WCS1: 0.25 ms
There will be an increase of up to the
SCB21/41 CS1-H: 0.22 ms following time when a protocol macro is
-V1
executed:
CS1 CPU Units: 1 µs × maximum number of data words sent or received (0 to
500 words) + 1.3 ms
CS1-H CPU Units: 0.7 µs × maximum
number of data words sent or received
(0 to 500 words) + 0.1 ms
There will be an increase of the event
execution times when Host Links or 1:N
NT Links are used.
10-4-4 Cycle Time Calculation Example
The following example shows the method used to calculate the cycle time
when Basic I/O Units only are mounted to the PLC with a CS1G-CPU4@H.
Conditions
Item
CPU Rack (8 slots)
User program
Details
CS1W-ID291 96-point Input Units
CS1W-OD291 96-point Output
Units
CS1W-ID291 96-point Input Units
CS1W-OD291 96-point Output
Units
5 K steps
Peripheral port connection
Fixed cycle time processing
Yes and no
No
CS-series Expansion Rack (8
slots) × 1 Unit
4 Units
4 Units
4 Units
4 Units
LD instruction
2.5 K steps,
OUT instruction 2.5 K steps
507
Section 10-4
Computing the Cycle Time
Item
RS-232C port connection
No
Peripheral servicing with other No
devices (Special I/O Units, CSseries CPU Bus Units, Inner
Boards, and file access)
Details
Calculation Example
Process name
(1) Overseeing
(2) Program execution
(3) Cycle time calculation
(4) I/O refreshing
(5) Peripheral servicing
Cycle time
Calculation
--0.04 µs × 2,500 +
0.04 µs × 2,500
(Fixed cycle time
not set)
0.02 ms × 8 +
0.02 ms × 8
(Peripheral port
connected only)
(1) + (2) + (3) + (4)
+ (5)
Processing time
Without
With
Programming
Programming
Device
Device
0.3 ms
0.3 ms
0.2 ms
0.2 ms
0 ms
0 ms
0.32 ms
0.32 ms
0.1 ms
0 ms
0.92 ms
0.82 ms
10-4-5 Online Editing Cycle Time Extension
When online editing is executed from a Programming Device (such as Programming Console or CX-Programmer) while the CPU Unit is operating in
MONITOR mode to change the program, the CPU Unit will momentarily suspend operation while the program is being changed. The period of time that
the cycle time is extended is determined by the following conditions.
• Number of steps changed
• Editing operations (insert/delete/overwrite)
• Types of instructions used
For pre-V1 CS1 CPU Units, the cycle time extension for online editing
depends mainly on the size of the program in the largest task. Ideally, tasks
should be separated so that one task is 64 Ksteps max.
For CS1 CPU Units of version 1 or higher, the cycle time extension for online
editing will be negligibly affected by the size of task programs.
If the maximum program size for each task is 64 Ksteps, the following table
provides guidelines for the maximum online editing cycle time extensions.
CPU Unit
CPU6@H CS1-H CPU Units
CPU4@H CS1-H CPU Units
V1 CS1 CPU Units or higher
Pre-V1 CS1 CPU Units
Guidelines for increase in cycle time for
online editing
Approx. 8 ms
Approx. 11 ms
Approx. 12 ms
Approx. 90 ms
When editing online, the cycle time will be extended by the time that operation
is stopped.
Note When there is one task, online editing is processed all in the cycle time following the cycle in which online editing is executed (written). When there are mul-
508
Section 10-4
Computing the Cycle Time
tiple tasks (cyclic tasks and interrupt tasks), online editing is separated, so
that for n tasks, processing is executed over n to n ×2 cycles max.
10-4-6 I/O Response Time
The I/O response time is the time it takes from when an Input Unit’s input
turns ON, the data is recognized by the CS-series CPU Unit, and the user
program is executed, up to the time for the result to be output to an Output
Unit’s output terminals.
The length of the I/O response time depends on the following conditions.
• Timing of Input Bit turning ON.
• Cycle time.
• Type of Rack to which Input and Output Units are mounted (CPU Rack,
CPU Expansion Rack, Expansion Rack).
Basic I/O Units
Minimum I/O Response
Time
The I/O response time is shortest when data is retrieved immediately before
I/O refresh of the CPU Unit.
The minimum I/O response time is the total of the Input ON delay, the cycle
time, and the Output ON delay.
Note The Input and Output ON delay differs according to the Unit used.
I/O refresh
Input
Input ON delay
(Interrupt to CPU Unit)
Cycle time
Instruction
execution
Cycle time
Instruction
execution
Output ON delay
Output
Minimum I/O response time
Maximum I/O Response
Time
The I/O response time is longest when data is retrieved immediately after I/O
refresh of the Input Unit.
The maximum I/O response time is the total of the Input ON delay, (the cycle
time × 2), and the Output ON delay.
509
Section 10-4
Computing the Cycle Time
I/O refresh
Input
Input ON delay
(Interrupt to CPU Unit)
Cycle time
Instruction
execution
Cycle time
Instruction
execution
Instruction
execution
Output ON delay
Output
Maximum I/O response time
Calculation Example
Conditions:
Input ON delay
Output ON delay
Cycle time
1.5 ms
0.2 ms
20.0 ms
Minimum I/O response time = 1.5 ms + 20 ms + 0.2 ms = 21.7 ms
Maximum I/O response time = 1.5 ms + (20 ms ×2) + 0.2 ms = 41.7 ms
SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O
The response times for both inputs and outputs are shown here for when
Slave Racks are used.
Minimum Remote I/O
Response Time
The minimum I/O response time is the sum of the Input ON delay, (the cycle
time × 3), and the Output ON delay.
Note The cycle time is longer than the remote I/O transmission time.
Program
execution
CPU Unit
Master-to-CPU Unit transmission
Remote I/O Master Unit
Master-to-Slave communications
Remote I/O Slave Unit
Slave I/O refresh
Input
Output
Remote I/O transmission time = (Remote I/O Slave transmission time per
Slave + I/O Terminal transmission time) × 2
Remote I/O Slave transmission time per Slave = 1.4 ms + 0.2 ms × (total number of I/O words on Slave Rack)
I/O Terminal transmission time = 2.0 ms × (number of I/O Terminals)
Maximum Remote I/O
Response Time
The maximum I/O response time is the sum of the Input ON delay, (the cycle
time × 4), and the Output ON delay.
Note The cycle time is longer than the remote I/O transmission time.
510
Section 10-4
Computing the Cycle Time
Program
execution
CPU Unit
Master-to-CPU Unit transmission
Remote I/O Master Unit
Master-to-Slave communications
Slave I/O refresh
Remote I/O Slave Unit
Input
Output
Calculation Example
Conditions:
Input ON delay
Output ON delay
Cycle time
1.5 ms
0.2 ms
20.0 ms
Minimum I/O response time = 1.5 ms + (20 ms ×3) + 0.2 ms = 61.7 ms
Maximum I/O response time = 1.5 ms + (20 ms ×4) + 0.2 ms = 81.7 ms
• When Special I/O Units are mounted to Slave Racks, the cycle time may
be less than or equal to the remote I/O transmission time. In this case, I/O
refresh may not occur between the CPU Unit and the Remote I/O Master
Unit in some cycles.
• Refreshing will be performed for Remote I/O Masters only once in each
cycle, and then only after confirming completion of the remote cycle.
• The short duration of ON/OFF status produced by differentiated instructions can cause inaccurate signals.
10-4-7 Interrupt Response Times
I/O Interrupt Tasks
The interrupt response time for I/O interrupt tasks is the time taken from when
an input from a CS1W-INT01 or C200HS-INT01 Interrupt Input Unit has
turned ON (or OFF) until the I/O interrupt task has actually been executed.
The length of the interrupt response time for I/O interrupt tasks depends on
the following conditions.
Item
Hardware response
Software interrupt
response
Note
CPU Unit
CS1-H CPU Unit
CS1 CPU Units
CS1-H CPU Unit
CS1 CPU Units
Time
Upward differentiation: 0.1 ms,
Downward differentiation: 0.5 ms
124 µs
320 µs
1. The software interrupt response time will be 1 ms if there is a C200H Special I/O Unit in the PLC.
• The C200HS-INT01 Interrupt Input Unit’s input ON delay is 0.2 ms
maximum.
• The C200HS-INT01 Interrupt Input Unit’s software interrupt response
time is 1 ms maximum.
2. I/O interrupt tasks can be executed (while an instruction is being executed,
or by stopping the execution of an instruction) during execution of the user
program, I/O refresh, peripheral servicing, or overseeing. The interrupt response time is not affected by the Input of the Interrupt Input Unit turning
ON during any of the above processing operations.
511
Section 10-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Some I/O interrupts, however, are not executed during interrupt tasks even
if the I/O interrupt conditions are satisfied. Instead, the I/O interrupts are
executed in order of priority after the other interrupt task has completed execution and the software interrupt response time (1 ms max.) has elapsed.
The interrupt response time of I/O interrupt tasks is the sum of the Input ON
delay (0.2 ms max.) and the software interrupt response time (1 ms max.).
Input
Input ON delay
(Interrupt Input Unit retrieval)
Software interrupt response time
Interrupt task execution
I/O interrupt task interrupt response time
Scheduled Interrupt Tasks
The interrupt response time of scheduled interrupt tasks is the time taken
from after the scheduled time specified by the MSKS(690) instruction has
elapsed until the interrupt task has actually been executed.
The length of the interrupt response time for scheduled interrupt tasks is 1 ms
max.
Note Scheduled interrupt tasks can be executed (while an instruction is being executed, or by stopping the execution of an instruction) during execution of the
user program, I/O refresh, peripheral servicing, or overseeing. The interrupt
response time is not affected by the scheduled time elapsing during any of the
above processing operations.
Some scheduled interrupts, however, are not executed during other interrupt
tasks even if the scheduled interrupt conditions are satisfied. Instead, the
scheduled interrupts are executed in order of priority after the other interrupt
task has completed execution and the software interrupt response time (1 ms
max.) has elapsed.
Scheduled interrupt time
Internal timer
Software interrupt response time
Scheduled interrupt task
External Interrupt Tasks
The interrupt response time for external interrupt tasks differs depending on
the Unit or Board (Special I/O Unit, CS-series CPU Bus Unit, or Inner Board)
that is requesting the external interrupt task of the CPU Unit and the type of
service requested by the interrupt. For details, refer to the appropriate operation manual for the Unit or Board being used.
Power OFF Interrupt Tasks
Power OFF interrupt tasks are executed within 0.1 ms of the power being confirmed as OFF.
10-5 Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
The following table lists the execution times for all instructions that are available for CS-series PLCs.
512
Section 10-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
The total execution time of instructions within one whole user program is the
process time for program execution when calculating the cycle time (See
note.).
Note User programs are allocated tasks that can be executed within cyclic tasks
and interrupt tasks that satisfy interrupt conditions.
Execution times for most instructions differ depending on the CPU Unit used
(CS1@-CPU6@H, CS1@-CPU6@, CS1@-CPU4@H, CS1@-CPU4@) and the
conditions when the instruction is executed. The top line for each instruction in
the following table shows the minimum time required to process the instruction and the necessary execution conditions, and the bottom line shows the
maximum time and execution conditions required to process the instruction.
The execution time can also vary when the execution condition is OFF.
The following table also lists the length of each instruction in the Length
(steps) column. The number of steps required in the user program area for
each of the CS-series instructions varies from 1 to 7 steps, depending upon
the instruction and the operands used with it. The number of steps in a program is not the same as the number of instructions.
Note
1. Program capacity for CS-series PLCs is measured in steps, whereas program capacity for previous OMRON PLCs, such as the C-series and CVseries PLCs, was measured in words. Basically speaking, 1 step is equivalent to 1 word. The amount of memory required for each instruction, however, is different for some of the CS-series instructions, and inaccuracies
will occur if the capacity of a user program for another PLC is converted for
a CS-series PLC based on the assumption that 1 word is 1 step. Refer to
the information at the end of 10-5 Instruction Execution Times and Number
of Steps for guidelines on converting program capacities from previous
OMRON PLCs.
Most instructions are supported in differentiated form (indicated with ↑, ↓,
@, and %). Specifying differentiation will increase the execution times by
the following amounts.
Symbol
↑ or ↓
@ or %
CS1-H CPU Units
CPU6@H
CPU4@H
+0.24
+0.32
+0.24
+0.32
CS1 CPU Units
CPU6@
CPU4@
+0.41
+0.45
+0.29
+0.33
2. Use the following times as guidelines when instructions are not executed.
CS1-H CPU Units
CPU6@H
CPU4@H
Approx. 0.1
Approx. 0.2
CS1 CPU Units
CPU6@
CPU4@
Approx. 0.1 to 0.3 Approx. 0.2 to 0.4
10-5-1 Sequence Input Instructions
Instruction
LOAD
Mnemonic
LD
!LD
Code
-----
Length
(steps)
1
2
CPU6@H
0.02
+21.14
ON execution time (µs)
CPU4@H
CPU6@
CPU4@
0.04
0.04
0.08
+21.16
+21.16
+21.16
+45.1
+45.1
+45.1
+45.1
Conditions
--Increase for CS
Series
Increase for
C200H
513
Section 10-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction
LOAD NOT
AND
AND NOT
OR
OR NOT
AND LOAD
OR LOAD
NOT
CONDITION
ON
CONDITION
OFF
LOAD BIT
TEST
LOAD BIT
TEST NOT
AND BIT
TEST NOT
OR BIT TEST
OR BIT TEST
NOT
Mnemonic
LD NOT
!LD NOT
AND
!AND
AND NOT
!AND NOT
OR
!OR
OR NOT
!OR NOT
Code
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Length
(steps)
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
CPU6@H
ON execution time (µs)
CPU4@H
CPU6@
Conditions
CPU4@
0.02
+21.14
0.04
+21.16
0.04
+21.16
008
+21.16
+45.1
+45.1
+45.1
+45.1
0.02
+21.14
0.04
+21.16
0.04
+21.16
0.08
+21.16
+45.1
+45.1
+45.1
+45.1
0.02
+21.14
0.04
+21.16
0.04
+21.16
0.08
+21.16
+45.1
+45.1
+45.1
+45.1
0.02
+21.14
0.04
+21.16
0.04
+21.16
0.08
+21.16
+45.1
+45.1
+45.1
+45.1
0.02
+21.14
0.04
+21.16
0.04
+21.16
0.08
+21.16
+45.1
+45.1
+45.1
+45.1
--Increase for CS
Series
Increase for
C200H
--Increase for CS
Series
Increase for
C200H
--Increase for CS
Series
Increase for
C200H
--Increase for CS
Series
Increase for
C200H
--Increase for CS
Series
Increase for
C200H
AND LD
OR LD
NOT
UP
----520
521
1
1
1
3
0.02
0.02
0.02
0.3
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.42
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.46
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.54
---------
DOWN
522
4
0.3
0.42
0.46
0.54
---
LD TST
350
4
0.14
0.24
0.25
0.37
---
LD TSTN
351
4
0.14
0.24
0.25
0.37
---
AND TSTN 351
4
0.14
0.24
0.25
0.37
---
OR TST
OR TSTN
4
4
0.14
0.14
0.24
0.24
0.25
0.25
0.37
0.37
-----
350
351
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
10-5-2 Sequence Output Instructions
Instruction
OUTPUT
Mnemonic
OUT
!OUT
Code
-----
ON execution time (µs)
Length
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
CPU-6@
CPU-4@
(See note.)
1
0.02
0.04
0.17
0.21
2
+21.37
+21.37
+21.37
+21.37
+49.3
514
+49.3
+49.3
+49.3
Conditions
--Increase for CS
Series
Increase for
C200H
Section 10-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction
Mnemonic
OUTPUT NOT OUT NOT
!OUT NOT
KEEP
DIFFERENTIATE UP
DIFFERENTIATE DOWN
SET
RESET
Code
CPU-6@H
ON execution time (µs)
CPU-4@H
CPU-6@
Conditions
1
2
0.02
+21.37
0.04
+21.37
0.17
+21.37
0.21
+21.37
+49.3
+49.3
+49.3
+49.3
CPU-4@
KEEP
DIFU
011
013
1
2
0.06
0.24
0.08
0.40
0.25
0.46
0.29
0.54
--Increase for CS
Series
Increase for
C200H
-----
DIFD
014
2
0.24
0.40
0.46
0.54
---
SET
!SET
-----
1
2
0.02
+21.37
0.06
+21.37
0.17
+21.37
0.21
+21.37
+49.3
+49.3
+49.3
+49.3
0.02
+21.37
0.06
+21.37
0.17
+21.37
0.21
+21.37
+49.3
+49.3
+49.3
+49.3
--Increase for CS
Series
Increase for
C200H
Word specified
Increase for CS
Series
Increase for
C200H
With 1-bit set
With 1,000-bit
set
With 1-bit reset
With 1,000-bit
reset
-------------
RSET
!RSET
-----
Length
(steps)
(See note.)
-----
1
2
MULTIPLE
BIT SET
SETA
530
4
5.8
25.7
6.1
27.2
7.8
38.8
7.8
38.8
MULTIPLE
BIT RESET
RSTA
531
4
5.7
25.8
6.1
27.1
7.8
38.8
7.8
38.8
SINGLE BIT
SET
SETB
!SETB
RSTB
!RSTB
OUTB
!OUTB
532
2
3
2
3
2
3
0.24
+21.44
0.24
+21.44
0.22
+21.42
0.34
+21.54
0.34
+21.54
0.32
+21.52
-------------
-------------
SINGLE BIT
RESET
SINGLE BIT
OUTPUT
534
534
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
10-5-3 Sequence Control Instructions
Instruction
END
NO OPERATION
INTERLOCK
INTERLOCK
CLEAR
Mnemonic
Code
END
NOP
001
000
Length
ON execution time (µs)
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H
CPU-6@
CPU-4@
(See note.)
1
5.5
6.0
4.0
4.0
1
0.02
0.04
0.08
0.12
IL
ILC
002
003
1
1
0.06
0.06
0.06
0.06
0.12
0.12
0.12
0.12
Conditions
---------
515
Section 10-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction
Mnemonic
MULTIINTERLOCK
DIFFERENTIATION
HOLD
(See note 2.)
MILH
MULTIINTERLOCK
DIFFERENTIATION
RELEASE
(See note 2.)
MILR
MULTIINTERLOCK
CLEAR
(See note 2.)
JUMP
JUMP END
CONDITIONAL
JUMP
CONDITIONAL
JUMP NOT
MULTIPLE
JUMP
MULTIPLE
JUMP END
FOR LOOP
MILC
BREAK
LOOP
NEXT LOOP
Code
517
518
519
Length
(steps)
CPU-6@H
(See note.)
ON execution time (µs)
CPU-4@H
CPU-6@
3
6.1
7.5
6.5
7.9
-----
-----
8.9
9.7
---
---
6.1
7.5
6.5
7.9
-----
-----
8.9
9.7
---
---
5.0
5.6
---
---
5.7
6.2
---
---
3
2
Conditions
CPU-4@
During interlock
Not during interlock and interlock not set
Not during interlock and interlock set
During interlock
Not during interlock and interlock not set
Not during interlock and interlock set
Interlock not
cleared
Interlock cleared
JMP
JME
CJP
004
005
510
2
2
2
0.38
--0.38
0.48
--0.48
8.1
--7.4
8.1
--7.4
----When JMP condition is satisfied
CJPN
511
2
0.38
0.48
8.5
8.5
When JMP condition is satisfied
JMP0
515
1
0.06
0.06
0.12
0.12
---
JME0
516
1
0.06
0.06
0.12
0.12
---
FOR
512
2
0.52
0.54
0.12
0.21
BREAK
514
1
0.06
0.06
0.12
0.12
Designating a
constant
---
NEXT
513
1
0.18
0.16
0.17
0.17
0.22
0.40
0.12
0.12
Note
When loop is
continued
When loop is
ended
1. When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the
length column in the following table.
2. Supported only by CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later.
10-5-4 Timer and Counter Instructions
Instruction
TIMER
Mnemonic
TIM
TIMX
COUNTER
CNT
CNTX
HIGH-SPEED TIMH
TIMER
TIMHX
516
Code
--550
--546
015
551
Length
(steps)
(See note.)
3
3
3
3
3
3
ON execution time (µs)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H CPU-6@
CPU-4@
0.56
0.56
0.56
0.56
0.88
0.88
0.88
0.88
0.88
0.88
1.14
1.14
0.37
--0.37
--0.37
---
0.42
--0.42
--0.42
---
Conditions
-------------
Section 10-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction
ONE-MS
TIMER
Mnemonic
Code
Length
ON execution time (µs)
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H CPU-6@
CPU-4@
(See note.)
TMHH
TMHHX
TTIM
540
552
087
3
3
3
0.86
0.86
16.1
10.9
8.5
1.12
1.12
17.0
11.4
8.7
0.37
--21.4
14.8
10.7
0.42
--21.4
14.8
10.7
TTIMX
555
3
16.1
10.9
8.5
17.0
11.4
8.7
-------
-------
542
4
7.6
6.2
10.0
6.5
12.8
7.8
12.8
7.8
TIMLX
553
4
7.6
6.2
10.0
6.5
-----
-----
MTIM
543
4
MTIMX
554
4
REVERSIBLE CNTR
COUNTER
CNTRX
RESET
CNR
TIMER/
COUNTER
012
548
3
3
20.9
5.6
20.9
5.6
16.9
16.9
23.3
5.8
23.3
5.8
19.0
19.0
26.0
7.8
----20.9
---
26.0
7.8
----20.9
---
545
3
9.9
10.6
13.9
13.9
4.16 ms
4.16 ms
5.42 ms
5.42 ms
9.9
10.6
---
---
4.16 ms
4.16 ms
---
---
ACCUMULATIVE TIMER
LONG TIMER TIML
MULTI-OUTPUT TIMER
CNRX
547
3
Conditions
------When resetting
When interlocking
--When resetting
When interlocking
--When interlocking
--When interlocking
--When resetting
--When resetting
----When resetting
1 word
When resetting
1,000 words
When resetting
1 word
When resetting
1,000 words
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
10-5-5 Comparison Instructions
Instruction
Input Comparison Instructions
(unsigned)
Mnemonic
Code
LD, AND,
OR +=
LD, AND,
OR + <>
300
LD, AND,
OR + <
LD, AND,
OR +<=
LD, AND,
OR +>
LD, AND,
OR +>=
310
ON execution time (µs)
Length
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H CPU-6@
CPU-4@
(See note.)
4
0.10
0.16
0.21
0.37
Conditions
---
305
315
320
325
517
Section 10-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction
Mnemonic
Input Comparison Instructions (double,
unsigned)
LD, AND,
OR +=+L
LD, AND,
OR +<>+L
LD, AND,
OR +<+L
LD, AND,
OR +<=+L
LD, AND,
OR +>+L
LD, AND,
OR +>=+L
LD, AND,
OR +=+S
LD, AND,
OR +<>+S
LD, AND,
OR +<+S
LD, AND,
OR +<=
LD, AND,
OR +>+S
LD, AND,
OR +>=+S
LD, AND,
OR +=+SL
LD, AND,
OR +<>+SL
LD, AND,
OR +<+SL
LD, AND,
OR +<=+SL
LD, AND,
OR +>+SL
LD, AND,
OR +>=+SL
LD, AND,
OR +DT
LD, AND,
OR +<>DT
LD, AND,
OR +<DT
LD, AND,
OR +<=DT
LD, AND,
OR +>DT
LD, AND,
OR +>=DT
CMP
!CMP
Input Comparison Instructions (signed)
Input Comparison Instructions (double,
signed)
Time Comparison Instructions
(See note 2.)
COMPARE
DOUBLE
COMPARE
518
CMPL
Code
301
Length
ON execution time (µs)
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H CPU-6@
CPU-4@
(See note.)
Conditions
4
0.10
0.16
0.29
0.54
---
4
0.10
0.16
6.50
6.50
---
4
0.10
0.16
6.50
6.50
---
341
4
25.1
36.4
---
---
342
4
25.2
36.4
---
---
343
4
25.2
36.4
---
---
ON and OFF
execution
times are the
same as given
at the left.
344
4
25.2
36.4
---
---
345
4
25.1
36.4
---
---
346
4
25.2
36.4
---
---
020
020
3
7
0.04
+42.1
0.04
+42.1
0.17
+42.4
0.29
+42.4
+90.4
+90.4
+90.5
+90.5
0.08
0.08
0.25
0.46
306
311
316
321
326
302
307
312
317
322
327
303
308
313
318
323
328
060
3
--Increase for
CS Series
Increase for
C200H
---
Section 10-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction
SIGNED
BINARY COMPARE
Mnemonic
Code
CPS
!CPS
114
114
Length
ON execution time (µs)
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H CPU-6@
CPU-4@
(See note.)
DOUBLE
SIGNED
BINARY COMPARE
TABLE COMPARE
MULTIPLE
COMPARE
UNSIGNED
BLOCK COMPARE
AREA RANGE
COMPARE
CPSL
115
3
0.08
0.08
6.50
6.50
--Increase for
CS Series
Increase for
C200H
---
TCMP
085
4
14.0
15.2
21.9
21.9
---
MCMP
019
4
20.5
22.8
31.2
31.2
---
BCMP
068
4
21.5
23.7
32.6
32.6
---
ZCP
088
3
5.3
5.4
---
---
---
DOUBLE
AREA RANGE
COMPARE
ZCPL
116
3
5.5
6.7
---
---
---
Note
3
7
0.08
+35.9
0.08
+35.9
6.50
+42.4
6.50
+42.4
+84.1
+84.1
+90.5
+90.5
Conditions
1. When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the
length column in the following table.
2. Supported only by CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later.
10-5-6 Data Movement Instructions
Instruction
MOVE
Mnemonic
Conditions
DOUBLE
MOVE
MOVE NOT
DOUBLE
MOVE NOT
MOVE BIT
MOVE DIGIT
MULTIPLE
BIT TRANSFER
MOVL
498
3
0.32
0.34
0.42
0.50
MVN
MVNL
022
499
3
3
0.18
0.32
0.20
0.34
0.25
0.42
0.29
0.50
-----
MOVB
MOVD
XFRB
082
083
062
4
4
4
0.24
0.24
10.1
0.34
0.34
10.8
7.5
7.3
13.6
7.5
7.3
13.6
186.4
189.8
269.2
269.2
BLOCK
TRANSFER
XFER
0.36
0.44
11.2
11.2
300.1
380.1
633.5
633.5
0.26
200.1
0.28
220.1
8.5
278.3
8.5
278.3
----Transferring 1
bit
Transferring 255
bits
Transferring 1
word
Transferring
1,000 words
Setting 1 word
Setting 1,000
words
BSET
021
021
ON execution time (µs)
Length
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H CPU-6@
CPU-4@
(See note.)
3
0.18
0.20
0.25
0.29
7
+21.38
+21.40
+42.36
+42.36
--Increase for CS
Series
Increase for
C200H
---
BLOCK SET
MOV
!MOV
Code
070
071
4
4
+90.52
+90.52
+90.52
+90.52
519
Section 10-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction
DATA
EXCHANGE
DOUBLE
DATA
EXCHANGE
SINGLE
WORD DISTRIBUTE
DATA COLLECT
MOVE TO
REGISTER
MOVE TIMER/
COUNTER PV
TO REGISTER
Mnemonic
Code
Length
ON execution time (µs)
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H CPU-6@
CPU-4@
(See note.)
Conditions
XCHG
073
3
0.40
0.56
0.5
0.7
---
XCGL
562
3
0.76
1.04
0.9
1.3
---
DIST
080
4
5.1
5.4
7.0
7.0
---
COLL
081
4
5.1
5.3
7.1
7.1
---
MOVR
560
3
0.08
0.08
0.42
0.50
---
MOVRW
561
3
0.42
0.50
0.42
0.50
---
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
10-5-7 Data Shift Instructions
Instruction
SHIFT
REGISTER
Mnemonic
ON execution time (µs)
Length
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H CPU-6@
CPU-4@
(See note.)
Conditions
010
3
7.4
433.2
10.4
488.0
10.4
763.1
10.4
763.1
REVERSIBLE SFTR
SHIFT
REGISTER
084
4
6.9
615.3
7.2
680.2
9.6
859.6
9.6
859.6
ASYNCHRONOUS SHIFT
REGISTER
ASFT
017
4
6.2
1.22 ms
6.4
1.22 ms
7.7
2.01 ms
7.7
2.01 ms
WORD SHIFT WSFT
016
4
4.5
171.5
4.7
171.7
7.8
781.7
7.8
781.7
ARITHMETIC
SHIFT LEFT
DOUBLE
SHIFT LEFT
ARITHMETIC
SHIFT RIGHT
DOUBLE
SHIFT RIGHT
ROTATE LEFT
DOUBLE
ROTATE LEFT
ROTATE LEFT
WITHOUT
CARRY
DOUBLE
ROTATE LEFT
WITHOUT
CARRY
ASL
025
2
0.22
0.32
0.29
0.37
Shifting 1 word
Shifting 1,000
words
Shifting 1 word
Shifting 1,000
words
Shifting 1 word
Shifting 1,000
words
Shifting 1 word
Shifting 1,000
words
---
ASLL
570
2
0.40
0.56
0.50
0.67
---
ASR
026
2
0.22
0.32
0.29
0.37
---
ASRL
571
2
0.40
0.56
0.50
0.67
---
ROL
ROLL
027
572
2
2
0.22
0.40
0.32
0.56
0.29
0.50
0.37
0.67
-----
RLNC
574
2
0.22
0.32
0.29
0.37
---
RLNL
576
2
0.40
0.56
0.50
0.67
---
520
SFT
Code
Section 10-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction
ROTATE
RIGHT
DOUBLE
ROTATE
RIGHT
ROTATE
RIGHT WITHOUT CARRY
DOUBLE
ROTATE
RIGHT WITHOUT CARRY
ONE DIGIT
SHIFT LEFT
Mnemonic
Code
Length
ON execution time (µs)
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H CPU-6@
CPU-4@
(See note.)
Conditions
ROR
028
2
0.22
0.32
0.29
0.37
---
RORL
573
2
0.40
0.56
0.50
0.67
---
RRNC
575
2
0.22
0.32
0.29
0.37
---
RRNL
577
2
0.40
0.56
0.50
0.67
---
SLD
074
3
5.9
561.1
6.1
626.3
8.2
760.7
8.2
760.7
ONE DIGIT
SRD
SHIFT RIGHT
075
3
6.9
760.5
7.1
895.5
8.7
1.07 ms
8.7
1.07 ms
Shifting 1 word
Shifting 1,000
words
Shifting 1 word
Shifting 1,000
words
SHIFT N-BIT
DATA LEFT
NSFL
578
4
7.5
40.3
8.3
45.4
10.5
55.5
10.5
55.5
SHIFT N-BIT
DATA RIGHT
NSFR
579
4
7.5
50.5
8.3
55.3
10.5
69.3
10.5
69.3
SHIFT N-BITS
LEFT
DOUBLE
SHIFT N-BITS
LEFT
SHIFT N-BITS
RIGHT
DOUBLE
SHIFT N-BITS
RIGHT
NASL
580
3
0.22
0.32
0.29
0.37
---
NSLL
582
3
0.40
0.56
0.50
0.67
---
NASR
581
3
0.22
0.32
0.29
0.37
---
NSRL
583
3
0.40
0.56
0.50
0.67
---
Shifting 1 bit
Shifting 1,000
bits
Shifting 1 bit
Shifting 1,000
bits
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
10-5-8 Increment/Decrement Instructions
Instruction
INCREMENT
BINARY
DOUBLE
INCREMENT
BINARY
DECREMENT
BINARY
DOUBLE DECREMENT
BINARY
INCREMENT
BCD
Mnemonic
Code
++
590
Length
ON execution time (µs)
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H CPU-6@ CPU-4@
(See note.)
2
0.22
0.32
0.29
0.37
++L
591
2
0.40
0.56
0.50
0.67
---
––
592
2
0.22
0.32
0.29
0.37
---
– –L
593
2
0.40
0.56
0.50
0.67
---
++B
594
2
6.4
4.5
7.4
7.4
---
Conditions
---
521
Section 10-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction
595
ON execution time (µs)
Length
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H CPU-6@ CPU-4@
(See note.)
2
5.6
4.9
6.1
6.1
---
596
2
6.3
4.6
7.2
7.2
---
597
2
5.3
4.7
7.1
7.1
---
Mnemonic
++BL
DOUBLE
INCREMENT
BCD
DECREMENT – –B
BCD
DOUBLE DEC- – –BL
REMENT BCD
Code
Conditions
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
10-5-9 Symbol Math Instructions
Instruction
SIGNED
BINARY
ADD WITHOUT
CARRY
DOUBLE
SIGNED
BINARY
ADD WITHOUT
CARRY
+
400
Length
ON execution time (µs)
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H CPU-6@
CPU-4@
(See note.)
4
0.18
0.20
0.25
0.37
+L
401
4
0.32
0.34
0.42
0.54
---
SIGNED
BINARY
ADD WITH
CARRY
DOUBLE
SIGNED
BINARY
ADD WITH
CARRY
BCD ADD
WITHOUT
CARRY
DOUBLE
BCD ADD
WITHOUT
CARRY
BCD ADD
WITH
CARRY
DOUBLE
BCD ADD
WITH
CARRY
SIGNED
BINARY
SUBTRACT
WITHOUT
CARRY
+C
402
4
0.18
0.20
0.25
0.37
---
+CL
403
4
0.32
0.34
0.42
0.54
---
+B
404
4
8.2
8.4
14.0
14.0
---
+BL
405
4
13.3
14.5
19.0
19.0
---
+BC
406
4
8.9
9.1
14.5
14.5
---
+BCL
407
4
13.8
15.0
19.6
19.6
---
–
410
4
0.18
0.20
0.25
0.37
---
522
Mnemonic
Code
Conditions
---
Section 10-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction
DOUBLE
SIGNED
BINARY
SUBTRACT
WITHOUT
CARRY
SIGNED
BINARY
SUBTRACT
WITH
CARRY
DOUBLE
SIGNED
BINARY
SUBTRACT
WITH
CARRY
BCD SUBTRACT
WITHOUT
CARRY
DOUBLE
BCD SUBTRACT
WITHOUT
CARRY
BCD SUBTRACT
WITH
CARRY
DOUBLE
BCD SUBTRACT
WITH
CARRY
SIGNED
BINARY
MULTIPLY
DOUBLE
SIGNED
BINARY
MULTIPLY
UNSIGNED
BINARY
MULTIPLY
DOUBLE
UNSIGNED
BINARY
MULTIPLY
BCD MULTIPLY
DOUBLE
BCD MULTIPLY
SIGNED
BINARY
DIVIDE
Mnemonic
Code
Length
ON execution time (µs)
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H CPU-6@
CPU-4@
(See note.)
Conditions
–L
411
4
0.32
0.34
0.42
0.54
---
–C
412
4
0.18
0.20
0.25
0.37
---
–CL
413
4
0.32
0.34
0.42
0.54
---
–B
414
4
8.0
8.2
13.1
13.1
---
–BL
415
4
12.8
14.0
18.2
18.2
---
–BC
416
4
8.5
8.6
13.8
13.8
---
–BCL
417
4
13.4
14.7
18.8
18.8
---
*
420
4
0.38
0.40
0.50
0.58
---
*L
421
4
7.23
8.45
11.19
11.19
---
*U
422
4
0.38
0.40
0.50
0.58
---
*UL
423
4
7.1
8.3
10.63
10.63
---
*B
424
4
9.0
9.2
12.8
12.8
---
*BL
425
4
23.0
24.2
35.2
35.2
---
/
430
4
0.40
0.42
0.75
0.83
---
523
Section 10-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction
DOUBLE
SIGNED
BINARY
DIVIDE
UNSIGNED
BINARY
DIVIDE
DOUBLE
UNSIGNED
BINARY
DIVIDE
BCD DIVIDE
DOUBLE
BCD DIVIDE
Mnemonic
Code
Length
ON execution time (µs)
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H CPU-6@
CPU-4@
(See note.)
Conditions
/L
431
4
7.2
8.4
9.8
9.8
---
/U
432
4
0.40
0.42
0.75
0.83
---
/UL
433
4
6.9
8.1
9.1
9.1
---
/B
/BL
434
435
4
4
8.6
17.7
8.8
18.9
15.9
26.2
15.9
26.2
-----
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
10-5-10 Conversion Instructions
Instruction
BCD-TOBINARY
DOUBLE
BCD-TODOUBLE
BINARY
BINARY-TOBCD
DOUBLE
BINARY-TODOUBLE
BCD
2’S COMPLEMENT
DOUBLE
2’S COMPLEMENT
16-BIT TO
32-BIT
SIGNED
BINARY
DATA
DECODER
524
Mnemonic
Code
BIN
023
Length
ON execution time (µs)
(steps)
CPU-6@H CPU-4@H CPU-6@
CPU-4@
(See note.)
3
0.22
0.24
0.25
0.29
Conditions
BINL
058
3
6.5
6.8
9.1
9.1
---
BCD
024
3
0.24
0.26
8.3
8.3
---
BCDL
059
3
6.7
7.0
9.2
9.2
---
NEG
160
3
0.18
0.20
0.25
0.29
---
NEGL
161
3
0.32
0.34
0.42
0.5
---
SIGN
600
3
0.32
0.34
0.42
0.50
---
MLPX
076
4
0.32
0.42
8.8
8.8
0.98
1.20
12.8
12.8
3.30
4.00
20.3
20.3
6.50
7.90
33.4
33.4
Decoding 1 digit
(4 to 16)
Decoding 4 digits (4 to 16)
Decoding 1 digit
8 to 256
Decoding 2 digits (8 to 256)
---
Section 10-5
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
Instruction
DATA
ENCODER
Mnemonic
DMPX
DOUBLE
SIGNED
BCD-TOBINARY
162
4
7.1
7.4
10.1
10.1
LINE
063